PVOL1BACKUP D%B1111001001 1Pe _vߋt& dR 5@V$d zt|xx| ҁr& 6L~7L e7x~~E҈C2S.  ***THIS VOLUME DOES NOT CONTAIN A HARDWARE BOOTABLE SYSTEM ***  w 4  ť ť 0B < Aaw  ' UD$BA  &( U BQ b Е*  & & PHDR1MPBL58SRC 00010001000100 00000 00000 000000DECFILE11A PPHDR2U0414404144 M 00 PPMPBL58SRCMPBL58SRCZ +$$<3p@j3qn%3rz3s{3}3t3u'3'}3w2d3xd43y:}3:}3zjL3vLD3{_Mp:3|_Ma3}kQr3~Q3Rv3SZ3;d3fZ3Zg,3Tq3Uq5a3VqM3Yq3[q3s3w3w !3w@j3xs3x3x3x@3xh3*y}3ys3yd3yd3y}3 zR3}@Q3@3v<3|C^333%332d3""`3#;3y &3x'3'3U'|Q32d32d3v83:3bK3oQ3Q3Q3Q3Q3Q3Q,3Q43QF 3Ql 3Qk3Q3Q[3Q_3Qm3Q3Q3Q3Q3Q* 3QK3Q3Q3Q3Q3NQ%3Q3Q'3Qa'3Q'}3Q2]3Q2d3Qe43Qy:3Q:3QYM3Q_Mp:3QVN3QkQ3QS3QE`3Q:d3Q;d3QfZ3Qm3QIq3QLq3QUq3Q[q3Qs3Qv3Qw3Qy3Q zR3Qjz3Q4}3Q;}3Qu~3Q43Qr3Qv3Q|]3Q3t^3kQkyZ`kQY kQ]|kQ_|#kQb|&kQJwkQkQ6WkQ7XkQ9X+kQ5XkQ8kQ8TkQSqkQdSPdkQE`0akQU:d0akQ&f0akQnp0akQIq0akQLq0akQVYq,kQzs0akQ{s0akQ<vkQjvkQ3vkQ0vkQ1vkQlvkQPUFDxz PE jLdE 8E 8E QE QjLd E  jLdWkQ7XkQ9X+kQ5XkQ8kQ8TkQSqkQdSPdkQE`0akQU:d0akQ&f0akQnp0akQIq0akQLq0akQVYq,kQzs0akQ{s0akQ<vkQjvkQ3vkQ0vkQ1vkQlvkQPUFD xz PPUFD xz PPUFD yvz PK"kQ,8^kQ' ЉkQc ~kQx:kQ kQt(}kQHkQ8kQ kQ_kQHqkQkQ !kQ;kQ kQkQkQ`rkQ8kQ :kQ:h;kQ<H:kQ8kQxkQzkQ{wkQ>wkQxxKkQx_kQx !kQxPkQxЉkQ WkQxkQkQwkQ>wkQxxKkQx_kQx !kQxPkQxЉkQ WkQxkQkQF~kQ@I~XkQcP~]kQ&Sm kQSkQS3kQ2S:kQCSQkQQ`m kQU`mkQZ`kQ`kQ`3kQ3`:kQF`QkQ7`ykQ-`M~kQ*m kQkQ3kQ5:kQDQkQ.M~kQ(m kQVmkQ[kQkQ3kQ4:kQEQkQ9ykQ/M~kQ3XkQ3]kQ=:QkQI:_kQ?:XkQPUFDzz PlrE S:kQCSQkQQ`m kQU`mkQZ`kQ`kQ`3kQ3`:kQF`QkQ7`ykQ-`M~kQ*m kQkQ3kQ5:kQDQkQ.M~kQ(m kQVmkQ[kQkQ3kQ4:kQEQkQ9ykQ/M~kQ3XkQ3]kQ=:QkQI:_kQ?:XkQPUFDzz PPUFDzz PPUFD{vz P,kQ,kQ,kQv,""kQ,y:kQ,N`kQw,kQ{,kQUhkQuUikQmU(ikQtUPikQqUxikQyUikQ|'"kQsQkQz fkQx f,kQ fy:kQ}fkQwkQ~x`'kQ~WkQnZkQoZkQZUqkQpZ~kQkQy:kQrfkQ:_kQ?:XkQPUFD{z P"E ,kQ,kQv,""kQ,y:kQ,N`kQw,kQ{,kQUhkQuUikQmU(ikQtUPikQqUxikQyUikQ|'"kQsQkQz fkQx f,kQ fy:kQ}fkQwkQ~x`'kQ~WkQnZkQoZkQZUqkQpZ~kQkQy:kQrfkQ:_kQ?:XkQPUFD{z PPUFD{z PPUFD|vzP}kQ_kQmkQ2XMkQ2rkQ3kQ3 zkQ 5*}kQ\X zkQgkQxXkQUPikQqUxikQyUikQ|'"kQsQkQz fkQx f,kQ fy:kQ}fkQwkQ~x`'kQ~WkQnZkQoZkQZUqkQpZ~kQkQy:kQrfkQ:_kQ?:XkQPUFD|zP4SE 4SjLdmkQ2XMkQ2rkQ3kQ3 zkQ 5*}kQ\X zkQgkQxXkQUPikQqUxikQyUikQ|'"kQsQkQz fkQx f,kQ fy:kQ}fkQwkQ~x`'kQ~WkQnZkQoZkQZUqkQpZ~kQkQy:kQrfkQ:_kQ?:XkQPUFD|zPPUFD|z PPUFDvzPkQ{SkQy:,kQy: kQy: kQy:D,kQy:e4kQy:oQkQy:8XkQy::dkQy:rkQy:ąkQSkQS<kQS{kQSkQS'kQS?TkQS:dkQSfkQSrkQS zkQS8}kQ?TakQxD,kQy kQskQkQkQJkQHqkQ4kQ4?TkQ4:dkQ4fkQ4"gkQ4kQLP3kQGLPQkQ:LPykQ)LPM~kQfQQkQeQ_kQhQXkQgQ]kQ ZkQMUqkQNrkQkrW!kQ0rkQkQ$rqkQirkQ8yQkQKy_kQAyXkQby]kQH}RkQ+C~QkQOC~_kQ>F~kQ@I~XkQcP~]kQ&Sm kQSkQPUFDzP&E &jLd4fkQ4"gkQ4kQLP3kQGLPQkQ:LPykQ)LPM~kQfQQkQeQ_kQhQXkQgQ]kQ ZkQMUqkQNrkQkrW!kQ0rkQkQ$rqkQirkQ8yQkQKy_kQAyXkQby]kQH}RkQ+C~QkQOC~_kQ>F~kQ@I~XkQcP~]kQ&Sm kQSkQPUFDzPPUFDz PPUFDvzPskQCkQ&WkQ&ZkQ,kQD,9^}kQEqO@kQtkQt@kQ<t!kQWK f9kQ[L 0akQ` kQA HkQQ 8kQ:_L kQnMkQkQLkQkQipkQ5_kQkQ%kQkQ%vQkQ&v~kQ&Z}kQ(kQI(@kQ* kQHe kQdkQkQT<@kQe+kQkQX<kQkQkQRkQSkQfkQLkQMy-kQXkQNu:kQGe"kQkQj_kQnZ&s!kQzkQ=z`kQL{SZkQ{wkQUxkQ*y}kQAykQOyskQydkQ? zRkQ zkQ!}kQF}@QkQ"h~kQ#u~@kQY~8YkQ$ZkQ@}kQVXakQ% kQ&@kQ'kQ(tkQ)v<kQ*|C^kQ+ZkQ,ipkQ-KkQ.kQ/5pkQ0WkQ1gkQ2KkQ3.kQ|QkQQkQR,kQPRv@kQPUFD zP\kE ]RE lSE bE ^RE hE jRE iE _RE cE `RE dE eE fE gE azdv<kQ*|C^kQ+ZkQ,ipkQ-KkQ.kQ/5pkQ0WkQ1gkQ2KkQ3.kQ|QkQQkQR,kQPRv@kQPUFD!zPPUFD"z PPUFD#vzPm}kQ ^RE hE jRE iE _RE cE `RE dE eE fE gE azdv<kQ*|C^kQ+ZkQ,ipkQ-KkQ.kQ/5pkQ0WkQ1gkQ2KkQ3.kQ|QkQQkQR,kQPRv@kQPUFD$zPn}E  ^RE hE jRE iE _RE cE `RE dE eE fE gE azdv<kQ*|C^kQ+ZkQ,ipkQ-KkQ.kQ/5pkQ0WkQ1gkQ2KkQ3.kQ|QkQQkQR,kQPRv@kQPUFD%zPPUFD&z PPUFD'vzPkQ""kQfkQmkQ zkQrkQskQt@kQqW3dkQ""?TkQ(;kQu,kQ NkQvf]kQf:kQf@kQwfJ`kQfkQOlkQOlK kQOlkQpOlkQxOlGkQOlHkQyOl""kQzOl/"kQ{Ol0"kQ|Ol'kQ}Ola-kQ~Ol.kQOl.kQOl:kQOl:kQOl:kQOl@kQOl@kQOlkQkQOlSkQOlfkQOlskQoOlxkQOlykQOlykQOlykQOlykQOlzkQOlu~kQOlkQmkQmDkQmkQmkQm@kQmkQwkQx@kQxhkQ z:kQ z@kQ zJ`kQ zkQ XkQxkQ*y}kQPUFD(zPOlE OlE Ol@kQOl@kQOlkQkQOlSkQOlfkQOlskQoOlxkQOlykQOlykQOlykQOlykQOlzkQOlu~kQOlkQmkQmDkQmkQmkQm@kQmkQwkQx@kQxhkQ z:kQ z@kQ zJ`kQ zkQ XkQxkQ*y}kQPUFD)zPPUFD*z PPUFD+vzP}kQQkQTkQ`kQP}kQkQ8;kQ kQrkQPskQ:kQpkQSkQXkQ^kQ`kQykQwkQHqkQrkQxskQ`kQfkQ~kQkQ(kQ4 kQ4akQ40kQ48kQ4%kQ4%kQ4%kQ4p:kQ4pXkQ4`rkQ4PskQ4hkQ4SkQ4XkQ4kQ4H!kQ4%kQ48wkQ4`'kQ4(kQ4pXkQ4`YkQ4ZkQ4`kQ4HqkQ4P<kQ4skQ4(}kQ4P}kQ4~kQ4kQv4kQOl0"kQ|Ol'kQ}Ola-kQ~Ol.kQOl.kQOl:kQPUFD,zP&E 4E _jL4`rkQ4PskQ4hkQ4SkQ4XkQ4kQ4H!kQ4%kQ48wkQ4`'kQ4(kQ4pXkQ4`YkQ4ZkQ4`kQ4HqkQ4P<kQ4skQ4(}kQ4P}kQ4~kQ4kQv4kQOl0"kQ|Ol'kQ}Ola-kQ~Ol.kQOl.kQOl:kQPUFD-zPPUFD.z PPUFD/vz%PPUFD0z%PPUFD1vz(P,dkQ&; fkQ; vkQK VNkQ" KqkQD kQJ+kQy[MkQTwkQ>%SkQF&kQPe kQkQe"kQ@kQ(l'kQ'n XkQzkQ%z'kQWkQU fkQQ0!# kQ! kQS#LkQ3#t!kQ &@8kQ & kQ< &(kQ &,kQ/ &jLwkQ0 &jLwkQH &kQkQ; &kQkQ &TkQI &fkQ &[qkQ- &ywkQ. &ywkQ &zkQ &kQ= &kQ &KkQ &[qkQ &ƻzkQM&`;kQ?u'xkQ1(#kQO(kQ,kQ6,hkQJ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQ*:dhkQ7:dlkQX:diwkQL:dvwkQV:dwkQ+:dwkQ)dvkQCepkQBDfTkQ afZkQ@kf`;kQAkfKqkQ f; kQfvkQR\gkQkkQkQkzkQ2qWkQ7qkQE7qqkQIqkQVqMkQG[qfkQ\qkQs"&kQsvkQtLkQNtykQ$t_kQvXukQkQKqkQ:fkQ8K &kQ9K(kQ5K@kQh~kQHkQYkQ wkQ!}kQ4kQ"d kQ#(_kQ$akQu'xkQ1(#kQO(kQ,kQ6,hkQJ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD2z(Pc &,[ &9d & _ &_M\ &TZ &YZ^ &Y^b &Ya &Y &]K &E `KZE akQu'xkQ1(#kQO(kQ,kQ6,hkQJ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD3z(PPUFD4z (PPUFD5kvz=Pe qkQh q<kQf qrkQg q zkQZ &YZ^ &Y^b &Ya &Y &]K &E `KZE akQu'xkQ1(#kQO(kQ,kQ6,hkQJ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD6kz=Pi qE  q<kQf qrkQg q zkQZ &YZ^ &Y^b &Ya &Y &]K &E `KZE akQu'xkQ1(#kQO(kQ,kQ6,hkQJ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD7kz=PPUFD8kz =PPUFD9lvz>Pj&kQqk zkQp$^kQk,PkQ{&kQl'pkQv'kQm,ZkQn-LkQu.YkQt.xxkQz:kQoE`kQsLykQw[R SkQyvKkQxFwpkQr{~`"kQ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD:lz>P|fE k zkQp$^kQk,PkQ{&kQl'pkQv'kQm,ZkQn-LkQu.YkQt.xxkQz:kQoE`kQsLykQw[R SkQyvKkQxFwpkQr{~`"kQ,lkQK,zkQS.!kQT.@kQ2_MfkQ,RrkQRKkQSKqkQTkQWE`WkQE`PZkQ F`8kQ F`WkQ N`@kQPUFD;lz>PPUFD<lz >PPUFD=vzDP}x~{ƢzDP""_ME ""_MjLf]w'xxhxE_T!"""""("0 "H "( """`#"#"("X("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFD?zDPPUFD@z DPPUFDAvzQP&}kQf@kQ "skQ&fkQg'p!kQi'XkQp'XkQy:}kQ:skQ>XkQ@t!kQ@ykQlfvkQfkQf0kQOlzkQKq kQ"("0 "H "( """`#"#"("X("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFDBƢzQPME f@kQ "skQ&fkQg'p!kQi'XkQp'XkQy:}kQ:skQ>XkQ@t!kQ@ykQlfvkQfkQf0kQOlzkQKq kQ"("0 "H "( """`#"#"("X("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFDCzQPPUFDDz QPPUFDEvzUPxkQxkQxkQx(kQxzkQxkQxkQx<kQx{kQx""kQx'kQxX:kQxy:kQx:kQx:kQx^KkQx?TkQx_kQxfkQxfkQxfkQxrkQxykQxykQx\}kQxkQ("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFDFƢzUPxE xjLxkQx(kQxzkQxkQxkQx<kQx{kQx""kQx'kQxX:kQxy:kQx:kQx:kQx^KkQx?TkQx_kQxfkQxfkQxfkQxrkQxykQxykQx\}kQxkQ("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFDGzUPPUFDHz UPPUFDIƢzVPE jLxkQxkQx<kQx{kQx""kQx'kQxX:kQxy:kQx:kQx:kQx^KkQx?TkQx_kQxfkQxfkQxfkQxrkQxykQxykQx\}kQxkQ("a"c"k"pk"s"SPUFDJzVPPUFDKz VPPUFDLvzVP[kQrkQrkQrkQ#rkQ3&kQ4&rkQ,kQ. kQ?TkQN`&kQT`rkQ :dykQfkQqPkQsPkQ w0akQx0akQ x0akQ y0akQ ywkQy0akQz%kQz_MkQ kQ5kQrkQc"k"pk"s"SPHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADHEADPPUFDNNzPPUFDOPzP.MP|330APR8922292230APR89222921.OO ; 9330APR8922292430APR89222923N.PO 330APR8922292530APR89222924 ".QFr 330APR8922292630APR89222925$.RM  330APR8922292630APR89222926 '4.P33e330APR8922320830APR8922320724ZC.SJa330APR8922292730APR89222927g !.TOj330APR8922292830APR89222928lc%.P$$"&330APR8922315830APR89223157#tA=.VF,330APR8922293030APR89222929L#.M 330APR8922303930APR89223038 &.WK6s330APR8922293130APR89222930>.XJ:,8^330APR8922293230APR89222931k.YKLq|K330APR8922293330APR89222932 ".ZPqK330APR8922293430APR89222933܅.[JHqO330APR8922293530APR89222934}.\Ot!330APR8922293530APR89222935RS.]N K f9330APR8922293630APR89222936 ho.^GK @j330APR8922293730APR89222937<.P11 H330APR8922321230APR892232110._F 8330APR8922293830APR89222937l.`I6_330APR8922293930APR892229386.aG330APR8922294030APR89222939N.bH|330APR8922294130APR892229403.cNz_330APR8922294230APR89222941.dH&}330APR8922294230APR892229420O.O&330APR8922315430APR892231531.eK |(@330APR8922294330APR89222943 Mw.fO* 330APR8922294430APR89222944WU.Ne 330APR8922321730APR89223216m.B.gP330APR8922294530APR89222945tL.hFL330APR8922294630APR89222946x.iKy330APR8922294730APR89222947ݾ.jFy330APR8922294830APR89222948!.kMX330APR8922294930APR89222949.lNu:330APR8922295030APR89222949.mGz330APR8922295130APR89222950V.nO,e"330APR8922295230APR89222952Le.oF>330APR8922295330APR89222953|.pI@j330APR8922295430APR89222953.qN <n%330APR8922295530APR89222954 +o.rO z330APR8922295630APR89222955 J.sI{330APR8922295730APR89222956?C.M}330APR8922320230APR89223202 .tK330APR8922295730APR89222957L.uGB'330APR8922295830APR89222958^R.P'}330APR8922303530APR89223035S.wJ*2d330APR8922300130APR89223000+.xH|d4330APR8922300130APR89223001 c.O%%y:}330APR8922320330APR89223203$h.N :}330APR8922320430APR89223204 (.zOjL330APR8922300430APR89223003'y.P@@vLD330APR8922322130APR89223220?=.{O_Mp:330APR8922300530APR89223004}v.|M_Ma330APR8922300530APR89223005.}PDkQr330APR8922300630APR89223006p.~FQ330APR8922300730APR89223007l.HRv330APR8922300830APR89223008.e55SZ330APR8922320530APR892232044./6;d330APR8922300930APR89223008].OXfZ330APR8922301030APR89223009.HZg,330APR8922301030APR89223010.NlTq330APR8922301130APR89223011.KUq5a330APR8922301230APR89223012_.LVqM330APR8922301330APR89223013.HYq330APR8922301430APR89223014f.N[q330APR8922301530APR89223014.P Fs330APR8922301630APR89223015 t.P11w330APR8922320930APR892232080`.OVw !330APR8922304730APR89223047*.N\w@j330APR8922301730APR89223016 1 .Kxs330APR8922301830APR89223017?: .RRRXx330APR8922321330APR89223213QAt.M@x330APR8922301930APR89223018&.N>x@330APR8922301930APR89223019~).I0xh330APR8922321830APR892232170.D(*y}330APR8922322230APR89223222.O Pys330APR8922302130APR89223020 .Nyd330APR8922302230APR89223021.Fnyd330APR8922302330APR892230224.Hy}330APR8922302430APR89223023^.P  zR330APR8922302430APR89223024 .O00&}@Q330APR8922302530APR89223025/.G@330APR8922302630APR89223026.Lv<330APR8922302730APR89223027.M|C^330APR8922302830APR89223028.N 330APR8922302930APR89223028 ).P330APR8922303030APR89223029:.P0%330APR8922303130APR89223030y0.P==330APR8922303230APR89223031<2].v2d330APR8922303330APR89223032o.P''""`330APR8922303430APR89223034&NH.O#;330APR8922303730APR89223036u{.yN &330APR8922300330APR89223002u.Px'330APR8922303830APR89223038oI.O '330APR8922315030APR89223149 A.UP r'|Q330APR8922292930APR89222929.M 2d330APR8922315630APR89223154 $.O z2d330APR8922304130APR89223040 .g.vP8330APR8922300030APR892229599.P??*:330APR8922315730APR89223156>R.P bK330APR8922304230APR892230416p.NoQ330APR8922304330APR89223042\.K Q330APR8922315930APR89223159 $6j.K<Q330APR8922304430APR89223043.`.P Q330APR8922304430APR892230440d.JQ330APR8922304530APR892230456xb.OQ330APR8922304630APR892230467Wc.NnQ,330APR8922315130APR892231509c.KQ4330APR8922304830APR89223048=g.PxQF 330APR8922321030APR89223209?$v.HvQl 330APR8922304930APR89223049Ol.F.Qk330APR8922305030APR89223049Un.PQ330APR8922305130APR89223050Wh.PQ[330APR8922305230APR89223051Zh.H(Q_330APR8922305330APR89223053\j.PQm330APR8922305430APR89223054^Cl.PQ330APR8922305530APR89223055`:o.ILQ330APR8922305630APR89223056bp.PLQ330APR8922305730APR89223057dC.FTQ330APR8922305830APR89223058uQ_Mp:330APR8922311130APR89223110.PQVN330APR8922311230APR89223111 ä.P QkQ330APR8922315330APR89223152  .P>QS330APR8922311330APR89223112 .O QE`330APR8922320630APR89223206 - Z.GbQ:d330APR8922311430APR892231138 ./6Q;d330APR8922311530APR892231149 T.PQfZ330APR8922311530APR89223115: -.PQm330APR8922311730APR89223116M x.FQIq330APR8922311730APR89223117k 6.JQLq330APR8922311830APR89223118l ^.NQUq330APR8922311930APR89223119m .MDQ[q330APR8922312030APR89223120o .OQs330APR8922312130APR89223121q .NQv330APR8922312230APR89223122 .PbbQw330APR8922322330APR89223223a 3.LQy330APR8922312330APR89223123 .P Q zR330APR8922312430APR89223124 l2.PQjz330APR8922312530APR89223125 $.HTQ4}330APR8922312630APR89223126 Z.LpQ;}330APR8922312730APR89223127 .O Qu~330APR8922312830APR89223127 f.PQ4330APR8922312930APR89223128 .JQr330APR8922313030APR89223129 C.NQv330APR8922313130APR89223130 R.LQ|]330APR8922313230APR89223131 =.JQ330APR8922313330APR89223132 .O33t^330APR8922313430APR892231332 š.N .O f330APR8922313730APR89223136m w.N**Lr330APR8922313830APR89223137)s Ԩ.Elr 330APR8922313930APR89223138 Ғ.O r330APR8922314030APR89223139 .Cr330APR8922314130APR89223140 ..M &r330APR8922320730APR89223206 .Gvr330APR8922321130APR89223210 .Hr<9330APR8922314230APR89223141 K.Ors330APR8922321630APR89223215 V.P$xo330APR8922314330APR89223143 .O##Zx330APR8922320130APR89223200" R.Nz,330APR8922314430APR89223143 O.O44zzjL330APR8922304030APR892230393 .P }330APR8922314530APR89223144 ' .K66~330APR8922322030APR8922321952 .N@@~T`330APR8922322530APR89223224?h ).F~W330APR8922314630APR89223145 .N330APR8922314730APR89223146 A.P__R330APR8922314830APR89223147^ .P!!(330APR8922314930APR89223148  ePUFDxvz P.e In0akQ30APR8922340130APR892234004 ϲ.f I**~kQ30APR8922340130APR89223401)Q a.p J,kQ30APR8922341030APR89223409{ ].' I&kQ30APR8922325630APR89223255 Ai.J Kj,0akQ30APR8922333230APR89223331 .K Lv, zkQ30APR8922333230APR89223332 .A K40akQ30APR8922332230APR89223321 C. H F 0akQ30APR8922343330APR89223433 ʭ.L N** W 0akQ30APR8922333330APR89223333) . OWWX 0akQ30APR8922343030APR89223429V d. O//RY 0akQ30APR8922344330APR89223443.n .y J??.l 0akQ30APR8922341830APR89223417> &.  ?>k zkQ30APR8922322930APR89223228 _.i DkQ30APR8922340430APR89223403 |.g D }kQ30APR8922340230APR89223402 .h H`ekQ30APR8922340330APR89223402 d.M H[0akQ30APR8922333430APR892233342.C T0akQ30APR8922332430APR892233237.N ?4$]kQ30APR8922333530APR89223335P.  A tPkQ30APR8922323030APR89223229W.B Bvp:kQ30APR8922332330APR89223322]`.s LPPt0akQ30APR8922341230APR89223412Ol.O >00akQ30APR8922333630APR89223336.* J $^kQ30APR8922325930APR89223259.  A,PkQ30APR8922323130APR89223230.c AQkQ30APR8922335930APR89223359.P > 0akQ30APR8922333730APR89223336  .Q A 0akQ30APR8922333830APR89223338. K[[ 0akQ30APR8922343530APR89223434Z. NRR0akQ30APR8922342930APR89223428QRP .Z MHkQ30APR8922335030APR892233509 ." POOkQ30APR8922325130APR89223251N1.  A@GkQ30APR8922323230APR89223232ƞ.: E"wkQ30APR8922331530APR892233146.o E""?TkQ30APR8922340930APR89223408 &.= D""0akQ30APR8922331830APR892233174. D#wkQ30APR8922344230APR89223442 C. TZZF'0akQ30APR8922343830APR89223438YQ.R Aa'0akQ30APR8922333930APR89223338. A|'pkQ30APR8922323430APR89223233~.; L'kQ30APR8922331630APR892233154., >,ZkQ30APR8922330130APR89223301-. H(-LkQ30APR8922323530APR89223234. EX.`kQ30APR8922323630APR89223235P .S ?.pkQ30APR8922334030APR89223339. A.YkQ30APR8922323730APR89223236#.( H .xxkQ30APR8922325730APR89223256 8.- F8kQ30APR8922330230APR89223302v.+ G :p kQ30APR8922330030APR89223300  .r > ::kQ30APR8922341130APR89223411 ʐ. G$$:`'kQ30APR8922344430APR89223443#. A:(kQ30APR8922323730APR892232376. A:8,kQ30APR8922323830APR892232388Τ.w M ":2kQ30APR8922341630APR89223415;. P:PKkQ30APR8922344230APR89223441[E.v H,,:fkQ30APR8922341530APR89223414+.u I##v:rkQ30APR8922341430APR89223414" p .| A :` kQ30APR8922342030APR892234190. KE`kQ30APR8922323930APR892232399.[ ?TK0kQ30APR8922335230APR89223351>.~ H''K~kQ30APR8922342230APR89223421&Df).} FKskQ30APR8922342130APR89223420k.G GKkQ30APR8922332830APR892233276.a E K :kQ30APR8922335830APR89223357 u.D IHHKp:kQ30APR8922332530APR89223324G* .` F>>hKPkQ30APR8922335730APR89223356=.\ ?K8kQ30APR8922335330APR892233520d. J\LykQ30APR8922324030APR892232404. R OM0akQ30APR8922324130APR89223241;\. MVN0akQ30APR8922342530APR89223425D .  7,tQwkQ30APR8922323130APR89223231Z. FxQuLkQ30APR8922324830APR89223248[:. D Q0akQ30APR8922323330APR89223233 _;.@ >QkQ30APR8922332130APR89223320j. K^^Q{kQ30APR8922343930APR89223439]rw .q PQ,`kQ30APR8922341130APR89223410.? JQkQ30APR8922332030APR89223319f.T F &Q0akQ30APR8922334130APR89223340 \. K&&F[R SkQ30APR8922324230APR89223242%. WtSqkQ30APR8922324330APR89223243a.d F "SPdkQ30APR8922340030APR89223359 .. HPPE`0akQ30APR8922343230APR89223432O9N.U I!!:d0akQ30APR8922334330APR89223342 *#.& O f0akQ30APR8922325530APR89223254 .n Cdp0akQ30APR8922340830APR89223408O . IIq0akQ30APR8922342630APR89223425t". C"Lq0akQ30APR8922342430APR89223424 .V L Yq,kQ30APR8922334430APR89223344 .z M''s0akQ30APR8922341830APR89223418&H<.{ Es0akQ30APR8922341930APR89223419\5.< HvkQ30APR8922331730APR892233165g.j F--rvkQ30APR8922340530APR89223404,Q .3 FHvkQ30APR8922330830APR89223307~.0 GvkQ30APR8922330530APR892233043.1 AvkQ30APR8922330630APR89223305.l HlvkQ30APR8922340630APR89223406 _.2 @ PvkQ30APR8922330730APR89223306.  DvkQ30APR8922324930APR89223249o.! > vkQ30APR8922325030APR89223250 .$ ?vkQ30APR8922325330APR89223253.% >vkQ30APR8922325430APR89223254z. Pv@kQ30APR8922343130APR89223430T.m P66v'kQ30APR8922340730APR892234075{./ Av4kQ30APR8922330430APR89223304T. Krrv:kQ30APR8922344030APR89223440qv`.4 >>vRkQ30APR8922330930APR89223308$ . G""vBxkQ30APR8922343730APR89223436!%T.F G%%0vykQ30APR8922332730APR89223326$GV. NDv zkQ30APR8922343130APR89223431l(?.E N*vkQ30APR8922332630APR89223325|P.# H4vKkQ30APR8922325230APR89223252#Y.. ?v kQ30APR8922330330APR89223303U[. C FwpkQ30APR8922324830APR89223247].t Pzzw0akQ30APR8922341330APR89223413y{.I L&&Ry0akQ30APR8922333030APR89223329%8E.H L--y0akQ30APR8922332930APR89223328,^sK.) B,y0akQ30APR8922325830APR89223257#. HUUhy0akQ30APR8922343630APR89223435T$s.W N@@z0akQ30APR8922334630APR89223345?^. Oddz0akQ30APR8922342830APR89223427c$. N``bz0akQ30APR8922342430APR89223423_&}.X Ajz0akQ30APR8922334730APR892233471.^ N4zP}kQ30APR8922335530APR89223355Q. Mz0akQ30APR8922343430APR89223433 5.x O!!nzrkQ30APR8922341730APR89223416 #Q. L33;}0akQ30APR8922342230APR892234222DQ. >u~kQ30APR8922324430APR89223244w. Ou~0akQ30APR8922343730APR89223437zD. A{~`"kQ30APR8922324530APR89223245.> J""dkQ30APR8922331830APR89223318!.k O yZ`kQ30APR8922340630APR89223405 ;.Y L  kQ30APR8922334930APR892233486.] G::|kQ30APR8922335430APR892233539._ C|#kQ30APR8922335630APR89223355.b E j|&kQ30APR8922335830APR89223358.B. E nJwkQ30APR8922324730APR89223246 7N. > kQ30APR8922342730APR89223426 C.6 JWkQ30APR8922331130APR89223310M*.7 F XkQ30APR8922331230APR89223311U,.9 @ X+kQ30APR8922331430APR89223313 ^[.5 A XkQ30APR8922331030APR89223309 i7.8 J rkQ30APR8922331330APR89223312 u. ?.8TkQ30APR8922324630APR89223245p1PUFDxz P. <E 30APR8922344830APR89223447. GzjLd30APR8922344830APR89223448^o. >@E 30APR8922344730APR892234470. V(8E 30APR8922345230APR89223452 W. J,8E 30APR8922345330APR89223452H. KQE 30APR8922345130APR89223450r. OQjLd30APR8922345130APR89223451. ^  E 30APR8922345030APR89223450 . O jLd30APR8922344930APR89223449PUFD xz PPUFD xz PPUFD yvz P. HK"kQ30APR8922361830APR89223618. HR,8^kQ30APR8922360130APR89223601V. >' ЉkQ30APR8922360230APR89223602'. N<c ~kQ30APR8922355930APR892235599. Bx:kQ30APR8922360330APR89223603. Oj kQ30APR8922355530APR89223554Y. Ot(}kQ30APR8922355430APR89223554. EHkQ30APR8922345630APR89223455. H 8kQ30APR8922345630APR89223456c{. > kQ30APR8922345730APR89223457!. CP_kQ30APR8922345830APR89223457$T. MHqkQ30APR8922345830APR89223458*G. A(kQ30APR8922345930APR89223459.(n. K" !kQ30APR8922350030APR892234594. @.;kQ30APR8922350130APR89223500;. G  kQ30APR8922350130APR89223501 ?. F:kQ30APR8922350230APR89223502Ko. HkQ30APR8922350330APR89223502P*. C`rkQ30APR8922350430APR89223503X. H8kQ30APR8922350430APR89223504_ . H  :kQ30APR8922360430APR89223603 g. >p:h;kQ30APR8922350530APR89223505t. EF<H:kQ30APR8922350630APR89223505y. HD8kQ30APR8922361930APR89223619~Ǐ. BDxkQ30APR8922350730APR89223506x. FzkQ30APR8922350730APR89223507ru. Cz{ XkQ30APR8922351830APR89223518]. H j!YkQ30APR8922351930APR89223519 ax. FL""?TkQ30APR8922352030APR89223520m. E #SkQ30APR8922352130APR89223521u. H #_kQ30APR8922352230APR89223521 ~. C #XkQ30APR8922352230APR89223522. HD#p!kQ30APR8922352330APR89223523. H#2kQ30APR8922352430APR89223524 . >&,kQ30APR8922360730APR89223606. H 2&TkQ30APR8922352830APR89223527 . E h& zkQ30APR8922360730APR89223607 . I 'YkQ30APR8922352930APR89223528 A. A:w*kQ30APR8922352530APR89223524|. HJw*kQ30APR8922352630APR89223525. Hw*kQ30APR8922352630APR89223526r. Hjw*fkQ30APR8922352730APR89223527G. P~.8kQ30APR8922352930APR89223529ݻ. ?.kQ30APR8922353030APR89223530. Hv:kQ30APR8922353130APR89223530ę. By:}kQ30APR8922353230APR89223531. H:p:kQ30APR8922360830APR89223608. H2< kQ30APR8922353230APR89223532$. E [M` kQ30APR8922353330APR89223533 B. L |QWkQ30APR8922353430APR89223533* . @SP}kQ30APR8922355630APR892235563{ . I DS'kQ30APR8922360930APR89223609 5. D nSZkQ30APR8922361030APR89223610 @. FzSZkQ30APR8922355830APR89223558J. JSZkQ30APR8922361130APR89223610Rw . H SZkQ30APR8922360030APR89223559 i. G 8SZkQ30APR8922361130APR89223611 t. H S:dkQ30APR8922353530APR89223534 . >HSkQ30APR8922353530APR89223535. G6SkQ30APR8922361230APR89223612. BU:kQ30APR8922353630APR89223536. PH[kQ30APR8922353730APR89223536. ?5aPskQ30APR8922353830APR89223537$. GHfxkQ30APR8922361330APR89223613+. HFZg,kQ30APR8922353830APR89223538. E pkQ30APR8922353930APR89223539. H.!q kQ30APR8922354030APR89223540=. H (qkQ30APR8922354130APR89223540 . Fer8 kQ30APR8922361430APR89223613. >frkQ30APR8922354130APR89223541. HrYkQ30APR8922354230APR89223542]. Fht kQ30APR8922354430APR892235430B.  H .t kQ30APR8922361430APR89223614 _.  H.t`kQ30APR8922361530APR89223615I. F7tPKkQ30APR8922354330APR89223543. L>wkQ30APR8922354530APR89223544 v. B>wkQ30APR8922354630APR89223545 . FDxxKkQ30APR8922354730APR89223546s*. Bx_kQ30APR8922354730APR89223547**. HFx !kQ30APR8922354830APR89223548.. KxPkQ30APR8922354930APR892235485d. HxЉkQ30APR8922354930APR89223549:=Y.  G WkQ30APR8922361630APR89223616 @-. CvxkQ30APR8922355030APR89223550J. NkQ30APR8922355130APR89223551 M. C." F,,QkQ30APR8922363530APR89223635%!I.6 6,ykQ30APR8922364930APR89223649)!.' H",M~kQ30APR8922363930APR89223638.!. : ,]kQ30APR8922363330APR892236323!_.< @3_kQ30APR8922365330APR892236524!.R K3XkQ30APR8922370830APR892237075!. F3]kQ30APR8922363330APR89223633:!C.= C:QkQ30APR8922365430APR89223653;!.I ?H:_kQ30APR8922370130APR89223701A!.? : :XkQ30APR8922365530APR89223654 D!.J F##:]kQ30APR8922370230APR89223702"P!)., HLPm kQ30APR8922364230APR89223642s!.W C LPmkQ30APR8922371130APR89223711w!.\ CLPkQ30APR8922371530APR89223714!.# BLPkQ30APR8922363630APR89223636!i. :DLP3kQ30APR8922363230APR89223631!.G HLPQkQ30APR8922370030APR89223700!.: 8LPykQ30APR8922365230APR89223651!7.) HnLPM~kQ30APR8922364030APR89223640! .f F QQkQ30APR8922372230APR89223721 !f.e OQ_kQ30APR8922372130APR89223721!.h FQXkQ30APR8922372330APR89223723!.g I>>Q]kQ30APR8922372330APR89223722=!.  <ZkQ30APR8922363430APR89223634"|q.M GUqkQ30APR8922370430APR89223704".N DrkQ30APR8922370530APR89223704"v.k P::rW!kQ30APR8922372530APR892237259".0 FrkQkQ30APR8922364530APR89223644T"e.$ MrqkQ30APR8922363730APR89223636["G.i HzrkQ30APR8922372430APR89223724l"2_.8 IyQkQ30APR8922365030APR89223650r".K 8y_kQ30APR8922370330APR89223702u"(.A 6^yXkQ30APR8922365630APR89223656x"-.b F!!`y]kQ30APR8922371930APR89223719 "p.H L}RkQ30APR8922370130APR89223700"#.+ HC~QkQ30APR8922364130APR89223641"#.O HC~_kQ30APR8922370530APR89223705"4.> H0F~kQ30APR8922365430APR89223654"PDATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATAP0M L}L Resource Accounting provides a transaction file of system usage informationI for both the user and the system. The collected data allows you to billI individual users for resources used and to measure overall system usage.P To tailor the accounting information and format it to your application, you canN write a report program. This program accesses the transaction file, reads the3 required data fields, and writes a report for you. For more information, type:5 HELP ACCOUNTING START Starting Resource Accountingp5 HELP ACCOUNTING STOP Stopping Resource Accounting6 HELP ACCOUNTING SET Changing accounting parameters: HELP ACCOUNTING SHOW Displaying accounting informationD See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX System Management Guide for more information. 2 STARTp3 START/ACCOUNTING [parameter_1] . . . [parameter_n]g Parameters: FILE:filespec EXTEND_SIZE:valuei POOL_RESERVE:value SYSTEM_STATISTICS:yes/no STATISTICS_SCAN[:rate] SCAN_RATE:valueN CRASH_REASON:yes/noo TASK:yes/nop J The START/ACCOUNTING command starts up the Resource Accounting subsystem.O Note that the SYSLOG and ...ACC tasks must be installed before you enter this i command.5 For information on the individual parameters, type: u HELP ACCOUNTING START parameter3 FILE FILE:filespec mN Specifies the name of the transaction file that Resource Accounting creates8 to store the data. The default is LB:[1,6]ACNTRN.SYS.3 EXTEND_SIZE  EXTEND_SIZE:value P Specifies the size of the initial allocation for the transaction file and forF each extension. The value can be any amount up to 65,535(8) blocks.% The default is 10(decimal) blocks.h3 POOL_RESERVE  POOL_RESERVE:decimalvalue iL Specifies the number of blocks of secondary pool that Resource AccountingM must leave free after each allocation. The default is one-quarter of the i@ total secondary pool size. Use of the default is recommended.3 SYSTEM_STATISTICSE SYSTEM_STATISTICS:yes/noP Accumulates system-wide statistics. (System-wide statistics are the contentsP of the accumulation fields in the System Account Block, such as the total CPU, time used and the total directive count.)( The default is SYSTEM_STATISTICS:yes.3 STATISTICS_SCANf STATISTICS_SCAN[:value]c cO Specifies a scan rate for the collection of device statistics, which measurefL seek-optimization parameters and provide information on disk activity and throughput.K The affect of this parameter depends on the SYSTEM_STATISTICS parameter,- as follows: STATISTICS_SCAN: SYSTEM_STATISTICS:YES Collects device statistics once. STATISTICS_SCAN:nM or nSa: SYSTEM_STATISTICS:YES Collects device statistics every& n minutes (nM) or n seconds (nS). The default is 1 minute.S@ SYSTEM_STATISTICS:NO Does not accumulate device statistics.= STATISTICS_SCAN:0 Does not accumulate device statistics. 3 SCAN_RATEi SCAN_RATE:valueu K Specifies the time interval between the periods when Resource Accounting-N writes the SAB and active UABs to the scan file called LB:[1,6]SYSSCAN.TMP.= This protects against loss in the event of a system crash.TI Specify the value as a decimal number, followed by an M (minutes) or Sn* (seconds). The default is SCAN_RATE:5M.= If you stop Resource Accounting, the scan file is deleted.3 CRASH_REASON CRASH_REASON:yes/no P Instructs Resource Acccounting to display the prompt "Reason for crash:" when/ you start accounting after a system failure.uN If you enter CRASH_REASON:YES and a system failure occurs while scanning isO active, Resource Accounting prompts you to enter a reason for the crash whenyO you restart accounting. The reason can be as many as 60 characters in lengthh9 and is stored in the Crash Recovery Transaction Block.nO If you enter CRASH_REASON:NO, a prompt does not appear. This is the default.r3 TASK u TASK:yes/no; Requests data on individual tasks running on the 00MOTADATADATADATADATADATADATADATADATAsystem.a7 If you enter TASK:YES, task accounting is initiated.SM If you enter TASK:NO, task accounting is stopped. The default is TASK:NO. 2 SETi7 SET ACCOUNTING [[/]parameter_1] . . . [[/]parameter_n]y Parameters: /FILE:filespec /EXTEND_SIZE:valuec /STATISTICS_SCAN:valued /SCAN_RATE:values /TASK:yes/nocO Changes the value of parameters specified when Resource Accounting was startedtN with the START/ACCOUNTING command or previously modified with a SET command. G Separate the optional parameters with slashes. Default values for thedJ parameters are determined by the START/ACCOUNTING command or previous SET ACCOUNTING commands.C5 For information on the individual parameters, type: m HELP ACCOUNTING SET parameter3 FILE /FILE[:filespec]S AI Changes the file to which transactions are written. The default is thea current file specification.3 EXTEND_SIZE  /EXTEND_SIZE:valueR CM Changes the size for each extension of the transaction file specified withp. the START/ACCOUNTING parameter EXTEND_SIZE.3 STATISTICS_SCAN  /STATISTICS_SCAN[:value] OO Changes the scan rate for the collection of device statistics, which measure L seek-optimization parameters and provide information on disk activity and throughput.9 To disable this parameter, specify /STATISTICS_SCAN:0.e 3 SCAN_RATEh /SCAN_RATE:value cI Changes the time interval between the periods when Resource Accounting N writes the SAB and active UABs to the scan file called LB:[1,6]SYSSCAN.TMP.I Specify the value as a decimal number, followed by an M (minutes) or S@ (seconds). To disable this parameter, specify /SCAN_RATE:0. 3 TASK /TASK:yes/noe; Requests data on individual tasks running on the system.i; If you specify /TASK:YES, task accounting is initiated. f8 If you specify /TASK:NO, task accounting is stopped. 2 STOPI STOP/ACCOUNTING reason Shutdown procedure for Resource Accounting.w6 MAINTENANCE (performing system maintenance)/ REBOOT (rebootstrapping the system)eA SCHEDULED_SHUTDOWN (disabling Resource Accounting only)i& SHUTUP (shutting down the system) OTHER (none of the above)I STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN_UP Shutdown procedure for Resource Accountingc1 if the SYSLOG task aborts or if ResourceI- Accounting encounters a fatal error.p2 SHOW( SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION [parameter]) ttnn: (data for terminal ttnn:) % CO: (data for system tasks)a& SYS (current system totals) 0 TASK=taskname (data for specified task) iL Displays accounting information. Nonprivileged users can display only theirG own accounting data. Privileged users can display any accounting data.r@ SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE[:inputfilespec] outputfilespec F Displays the transaction file on a terminal or writes it to another file. G6 SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE[:trnsfilespec] outfilespec lH Converts a transaction to a file that is readable by DATATRIEVE-11. J You can then write your own Resource Accounting report generator using  DATATRIEVE-11.rE Octal Values for the ASCII Character Set -- ASCII is a code used to I translate letters, numbers, and symbols that people can understand into O a code which the computer can use. Most RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX functions F< requiring numerical values for characters use octal ASCII.  I 000 NUL 020 DLE 040 SP 060 0 100 @ 120 P 140 ` 160 p I 001 SOH 021 DC1 041 ! 061 1 101 A 121 Q 141 a 161 q I 002 STX 022 DC2 042 " 062 2 102 B 122 R 142 b00O L} 162 r lI 003 ETX 023 DC3 043 # 063 3 103 C 123 S 143 c 163 s tI 004 EOT 024 DC4 044 $ 064 4 104 D 124 T 144 d 164 t I 005 ENQ 025 NAK 045 % 065 5 105 E 125 U 145 e 165 u iI 006 ACK 026 SYN 046 & 066 6 106 F 126 V 146 f 166 v I 007 BEL 027 ETB 047 ' 067 7 107 G 127 W 147 g 167 w I 010 BS 030 CAN 050 ( 070 8 110 H 130 X 150 h 170 x I 011 HT 031 EM 051 ) 071 9 111 I 131 Y 151 i 171 y I 012 LF 032 SUB 052 * 072 : 112 J 132 Z 152 j 172 z I 013 VT 033 ESC 053 + 073 ; 113 K 133 [ 153 k 173 { I 014 FF 034 FS 054 , 074 < 114 L 134 \ 154 l 174 | I 015 CR 035 GS 055 - 075 = 115 M 135 ] 155 m 175 } I 016 SO 036 RS 056 . 076 > 116 N 136 ^ 156 n 176 ~ G 017 SI 037 US 057 / 077 ? 117 O 137 _ 157 o 177 DELM 0G See also HELP ASCII DECIMAL for the decimal values required by EDT and / HELP ASCII HEXADECIMAL for hexadecimal values. 2 DECIMAL3; Decimal Values for the ASCII Character Set (EDT functions)7I 000 NUL 016 DLE 032 SP 048 0 064 @ 080 P 096 ` 112 p I 001 SOH 017 DC1 033 ! 049 1 065 A 081 Q 097 a 113 q I 002 STX 018 DC2 034 " 050 2 066 B 082 R 098 b 114 r I 003 ETX 019 DC3 035 # 051 3 067 C 083 S 099 c 115 s I 004 EOT 020 DC4 036 $ 052 4 068 D 084 T 100 d 116 t DI 005 ENQ 021 NAK 037 % 053 5 069 E 085 U 101 e 117 u mI 006 ACK 022 SYN 038 & 054 6 070 F 086 V 102 f 118 v I 007 BEL 023 ETB 039 ' 055 7 071 G 087 W 103 g 119 w I 008 BS 024 CAN 040 ( 056 8 072 H 088 X 104 h 120 x I 009 HT 025 EM 041 ) 057 9 073 I 089 Y 105 i 121 y I 010 LF 026 SUB 042 * 058 : 074 J 090 Z 106 j 122 z I 011 VT 027 ESC 043 + 059 ; 075 K 091 [ 107 k 123 { I 012 FF 028 FS 044 , 060 < 076 L 092 \ 108 l 124 | I 013 CR 029 GS 045 - 061 = 077 M 093 ] 109 m 125 } I 014 SO 030 RS 046 . 062 > 078 N 094 ^ 110 n 126 ~ G 015 SI 031 US 047 / 063 ? 079 O 095 _ 111 o 127 DELM 0 2 HEXADECIMAL  3? Hexadecimal Values for the ASCII Character Set (VMS functions)5A 00 NUL 10 DLE 20 SP 30 0 40 @ 50 P 60 ` 70 p +A 01 SOH 11 DC1 21 ! 31 1 41 A 51 Q 61 a 71 q SA 02 STX 12 DC2 22 " 32 2 42 B 52 R 62 b 72 r A 03 ETX 13 DC3 23 # 33 3 43 C 53 S 63 c 73 s A 04 EOT 14 DC4 24 $ 34 4 44 D 54 T 64 d 74 t A 05 ENQ 15 NAK 25 % 35 5 45 E 55 U 65 e 75 u oA 06 ACK 16 SYN 26 & 36 6 46 F 56 V 66 f 76 v SA 07 BEL 17 ETB 27 ' 37 7 47 G 57 W 67 g 77 w A 08 BS 18 CAN 28 ( 38 8 48 H 58 X 68 h 78 x A 09 HT 19 EM 29 ) 39 9 49 I 59 Y 69 i 79 y A 0A LF 1A SUB 2A * 3A : 4A J 5A Z 6A j 7A z A 0B VT 1B ESC 2B + 3B ; 4B K 5B [ 6B k 7B { A 0C FF 1C FS 2C , 3C < 4C L 5C \ 6C l 7C | A 0D CR 1D GS 2D - 3D = 4D M 5D ] 6D m 7D } A 0E SO 1E RS 2E . 3E > 4E N 5E ^ 6E n 7E ~ ? 0F SI 1F US 2F / 3F ? 4F O 5F _ 6F o 7F DEL  00P Q$R'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAA The Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) tests disks and DECtapes forA the location and number of bad blocks. BAD then records this bad: block information on the volume. Then you use the Monitor; Console Routine (MCR) command INI, which allocates the badA blocks to the bad block file [0,0]BADBLK.SYS. The bad blocks are< marked as in-use and therefore cannot be allocated to other files. A You can use BAD in its task version, which runs at the same time9 as other tasks, or in its standalone version included in< [6,54]BRUSYS.SYS, which runs by itself on the computer. TheB standalone version is required if you have a system with a single disk drive. ( The command line for BAD is shown next.  Format  ddnn:[/switch[...]] Parameters  ddnn Specifies a physical device.  switchO Specifies an optional switch that qualifies the BAD command line. Multiple J BAD switches for a device must be specified on one line. If you do notM specify any switch, BAD begins its pattern checking of individual blocks. B For more information on BAD switches, type HELP BAD SWITCHES. 2 SWITCHES/ The following list describes the BAD switches:9 /ALO:volumelabel Prompts you for blocks to be allocated7 to BADBLK.SYS and entered in the bad) block descriptor file. 8 /LI Lists bad blocks as they are located. 9 /MAN Prompts you for additional bad blocks,6 which are entered in the bad block # descriptor file. 8 /OVR Creates the bad block descriptor file* on a last-track device. 8 /PAT=m:n Specifies the doubleword data pattern- used to locate bad blocks. ( /RETRY Recovers soft errors. 6 /UPD Reads the bad block descriptor file) and prompts for input.FPDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2 is a layered product supported on RSX-11M/M-PLUS@systems. To invoke BASIC-PLUS-2, type the BP2 command: >BP2. VCBASIC-PLUS-2 may be installed under a name other than BP2. In this Fcase, type the three-character name assigned by your system manager.  sFHELP is available on BASIC-PLUS-2 concepts, statements, functions, and@commands. You can get HELP both at the MCR command level and@within the BASIC environment. For BASIC-PLUS-2 V2.0, HELP topics(available at the MCR command level are: AARRAYS CONSTANTS DIRECTIVES LABELS QUALIFIERSkACHARACTER CONVENTIONS EXPRESSIONS LINE STATEMENTSy@COMMANDS DATA_TYPES HELP MODIFIERS VARIABLES%COMMENTS DEBUGGER IMMEDIATEuCHELP on these topics, plus associated subtopics, also is available twithin the BASIC environment. FTo access HELP text from the MCR command level, type: >HELP/BP2 topic.FTo access HELP files within the BASIC environment, first invoke BASIC>with the BP2 command and then type HELP in response to theBASIC-PLUS-2 prompt.  R E  ND A user batch job is a text file that reproduces an entire terminal4 session. Type HELP BATCH EXAMPLE for an example. J You can include most DCL or MCR commands in user batch jobs. The syntax I is identical to interactive commands except that a dollar sign ($) must 2 precede each CLI command in the user batch job. H User batch jobs also include commands that are recognized by the batch I processor only. The first command in a user batch job must be $JOB and  the last must be $EOJ. 00R( L}H For additional help type HELP BATCH command. Help is available on the $ following batch-specific commands: 1 CONTINUE GOTO ONa2 DATA IF SET3 EOD JOB STOP ! EOJ n eI Any batch command can optionally be preceded by a label and followed by n a comment, as in this example:l+ $[label:]batch-specific command [!comment]b; For information on submitting batch jobs type HELP SUBMIT.p 2 EXAMPLET# Here is a skeleton user batch job. $JOB FRED [303,5] $cli command[s] $@indirect  $DATA MYLIB $EOD  $EOJ F In this example, the $JOB command logs the batch job in with the nameI FRED and UIC of [303,5]. The batch job has the same default CLI as the eI user whose UIC is given. The cli command line can be any number of MCR nF or DCL commands. You can include MCR commands in a DCL batch job by J preceding the commands with MCR. You can include DCL commands in an MCR H batch job by preceding the commands with DCL. Note that you can invokeM indirect command files from your batch job and supply data for the indirect aA file (or for DCL commands or tasks) by using the $DATA and $EOD nC batch-specific commands. The $EOJ command logs the batch job out.u2 JOBs $JOBg@ $JOB marks the beginning of the batch job and must appear first in the file.i u$ $JOB[/qualifier] [loglabel] [[uic]] p Command QualifierM /TIME:m or /TIME:(hh:mm) < The /TIME qualifier limits CPU time for the user batch job.- HEL and LOGIN cannot be used for batch jobs. 2 EOJ  $EOJy t $EOJ ends the user batch job. - BYE or LOGOUT cannot be used for batch jobs.E2 ON $ON iE $ON defines an exit status code and specifies the action to be takengH by the batch processor when that code or a more severe code is returned" by subsequent commands and tasks. STOP $ON status-code THEN CONTINUE GOTO label status-code: WARNING ERRORi SEVEREERRORr- ON WARNING THEN STOP is the default setting.u@ The default setting is restored after an ON has been activated. See also HELP BATCH IF.2 IF $IF E $IF checks for a given status code following execution of a previoussL command in the batch job. Unlike $ON, $IF responds only to the status-code you specify.e GOTO label t $IF status-code THEN CONTINUE STOP where status-code= WARNING ERROR SEVEREERROR See also HELP BATCH ON.2 GOTO $GOTO NE $GOTO directs the batch processor to skip directly to a line with a dI specified label and continue processing from there. The line may appearFH after or before the $GOTO. $GOTO can be used alone or with $ON or $IF. $GOTO label $ON status-code THEN GOTO label $IF status-code THEN GOTO label $label:[command] F A label can be any six alphanumeric characters. Any line containing 9 a batch-specific command can optionally include a label.H On the GOTO line, the label is NOT terminated with a colon (:). On theC line actually being labeled, the label is terminated with a colon.c 2 CONTINUE $CONTINUE G $CONTINUE is a no-operation. It can be used alone or with $ON or $IF.e $CONTINUE $ON status-code THEN CONTINUE $IF status-code THEN CONTINUEJ See HELP/DCL CONTINUE for information on the interactive DCL form of this command.c2 DATA $DATA[/qualifier[s]]a /NOCOPY /DOLLARS[:"string"] aL $DATA marks the beginning of a data block to be included in the user batch K job. Data is any required user input other than MCR, DCL or any other CLIL commands. $DATA should immediately follow any command that requests input.G You do not need to specify $DATA unless you need to specify any of its$F qualifiers. Any line without the dollar-sign ($) is treated as data. For example, > $@COMFILE1 ! This indirect command file prompts for a library MYLIB1O . .00R04'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATA .> $@COMFILE2 ! This indirect command file prompts for a library $DATA MYLIB2t $EOD 2 The two data blocks are treated exactly the same.@ See HELP BATCH DATA qualifier for help on available qualifiers.3 NOCOPY $DATA/NOCOPYq> /NOCOPY specifies that the data block not be included in the  batch log file. 3 DOLLARSi $DATA/DOLLARS[:"string"]lF /DOLLARS permits lines beginning with a dollar sign ($) to be treatedI as data. Without this qualifier, the first line beginning with $ closesC the data block.I If you use /DOLLARS, you must explicitly close the data block with $EOD.oH If you specify a string argument to /DOLLARS, you must use that stringJ to close the data block. This enables you to pass data, such as another . batch job , that includes the string "$EOD". For example,g? $@COMFILE ! This indirect command file asks for salary figuresm $DATA/DOLLARS $352.40 $134.20 $1235.50e $EODd a2 EOD  $EODt $ $EOD marks the end of a data block. eM $EOD must be used if you have opened the data block with either DATA/DOLLARSa or DATA/DOLLARS:"$EOD". See also HELP BATCH DATA.2 SET $SET [NO] ONaK $SET NO ON disables the current setting of ON, including the default. Thet% space between NO and ON is optional.rL $SET ON reinstates the ON setting to whatever it was before the $SET NO ON.M $SET with other parameters or qualifiers is a CLI command, and has the same ; effect in batch jobs as in interactive mode, for instance . $SET TERMINAL/DCL2 STOP $STOP hC $STOP stops the batch job. It can be used alone or with ON or IF.S $STOP $ON status-code THEN STOP $IF status-code THEN STOP iE See also HELP/DCL STOP for the DCL interactive form of this command.bG The Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) allows you to back up and restoreG Files-11 volumes. You can use BRU to transfer files from a volume to aF backup volume (or volumes) to ensure that a copy is available in caseG the original files are destroyed. If the original files are destroyed,C or if for any other reason the copy needs to be retrieved, you canG restore the backup files with BRU. In the process of copying, BRU alsoC reorganizes and compresses files for efficient storage and access.> You can use BRU stand alone as well as on line. BRUSYS is the standalone version. C BRU can also be invoked through the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) command BACKUP.( The command line for BRU is shown next. FormatC /qualifier[...] indevice[,...][filespec[,...]] outdevice[,...] Parameters qualifierK Specifies any of the command qualifiers. If two or more qualifiers areN specified, they must be contiguous, that is, separated with a slash only.O You can use a shorter form of a qualifier as long as it is unique. All BRU/ qualifiers are unique to three characters. indeviceL Specifies the input device you want to transfer files from. In a backupM operation, the input device contains the files you want to safeguard. InJ a restore operation, the input device contains the backup set you are restoring.1 Devices are specified in the following form: ddnn: filespecH Specifies the file specification used to select particular files orN categories of files to back up or restore. A file specification takes the following form:% [directory]filename.type;version outdeviceH Specifies the output device you want to transfer the files to. In aL backup operation, the output device contains the backup set you want toG create. In a restore operation, the output device is the disk that* receives the files you are restoring.C The format of outdevice is the same as for inde008 L}vice (describedI previously). A file specification may not be placed after the output device.B Type HELP BRU STANDALONE for more information on standalone BRU.? Type HELP BRU QUALIFIERS for a list of the qualifiers for BRU. 7 Type HELP BRU EXAMPLES for examples of BRU operations. 2 QUALIFIERS# The BRU qualifiers are as follows:4 /APPEND /BACKUP_SET:name /BAD:option8 /BUFFERS:n /COMPARE:[option] /CREATED:option1 /DENSITY:n /DIRECTORY /DISPLAY2 /ERRORS:n /EXCLUDE /EXTEND:n6 /HEADERS:n /IDENTIFICATION /IMAGE:option5 /MAXIMUM:n /MOUNTED /NEW_VERSION5 /NOINITIALIZE /NOPRESERVE /NOSUPERSEDE; /OUTVOLUME:name /POSITION:option /PROTECTION:option3 /REVISED: /REWIND /SUPERSEDE9 /TAPE_LABEL:label /UFD /VERIFY:[option] /WINDOWS:value E Type HELP BRU qualfier_name (for example, HELP BRU CREATED) for more" information on the BRU qualfiers.2 APPENDG The Append qualifier (/APPEND) directs BRU to append a backup set fromK the input disk volume to the last backup set on the output tape, or on the3 output disk if you are using the /IMAGE qualifier.L You cannot use the /APPEND qualifier during a backup operation to a mounted disk. 2 BACKUP_SET L The Backup Set qualifier (/BACKUP_SET) names the backup set to be placed on tape or disk. Format /BACKUP_SET:name Parameter name* Specifies the name of the backup set.2 BADM The Bad Qualifier (/BAD) creates the bad block file BADBLK.SYS on the outputG disk. The /BAD qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations. Format /BAD[:option] Parameter option2 Specifies one of the following three options:G AUTOMATIC For last-track devices, BRU uses the written bad blockI information and the SDBSF to create BADBLK.SYS. For non-L last-track devices, it uses the software bad block descrip-J tor block to create BADBLK.SYS. AUTOMATIC is the default.N MANUAL The MANUAL option accepts the addresses of bad blocks you en-N ter interactively at your terminal. It specifies that BRU useN either the manufacturer-written bad block information and theK SDBSF (for last-track devices) or the bad block descriptorI block (for non-last-track devices) to create BADBLK.SYS.M OVERRIDE The OVERRIDE option causes a last-track device to appear to L be a non-last-track device. BRU uses the software bad blockF descriptor block to create BADBLK.SYS and ignores the2 manufacturer-written information. 2 BUFFERSK The Buffers qualifier (/BUFFERS) specifies the default number of directoryJ File Control Blocks (FCBs) on each volume. The more FCBs there are storedM in memory, the faster files contained in heavily used directories are found.A The default number of buffers is the same as for the input disk. Format /BUFFERS:n Parameter  n" Specifies the number of FCBs.E The /BUFFERS qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations. 2 COMPARED The /COMPARE qualifier (/COMPARE:[option]) compares the data on theA output device with the data on the input device and reports any differences. Format /COMPARE[:option] :DOUBLEBUFFER :SINGEBUFFER@ Specifying the DOUBLEBUFFER option, which can only be used withD MU-type tape devices and for backup sets that contain one tape, mayC improve the performance of streaming tape devices such as the TK50C cartridge tape by double buffering I/O operations. Specifying theG SINGLEBUFFER option causes BRU to single buffer I/O operations, whichB was the default action for versions o00@4'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAf BRU prior to version 4.1.G The command line specifying the compare operation must be identical toH that entered when the data on the output disk or tape was created, withK the exception of the /INITIALIZE, /NOINITIALIZE, and /APPEND qualifiers.N When the compare operation detects differences, it displays a message at your terminal. 2 CREATEDN The Created qualifier (/CREATED) backs up or restores files created before or& after the specified date and/or time. Format /CREATED:option Parameter optionJ Specifies one of the two options in three possible forms, as follows: BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss) BEFORE:dd-mmm-yy BEFORE:hh:mm:ss AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss) AFTER:dd-mmm-yy AFTER:hh:mm:ss 2 DENSITYI The Density qualifier (/DENSITY) specifies the density, in bits per inch$ (bpi), at which BRU writes to tape. Format /DENSITY:n Parameter nM Specifies the density. The following table shows the legal values for n:3 _________________________________________________* Drive Default Optional ! Density Density3 _________________________________________________ TU10/TE10 800 None TU16/TE16 800 1600 TU45 800 1600 TU77 800 1600 TS11 1600 None TSV05 1600 None TU78 6250 1600 TU80 1600 None TU81E 6250 16003 _________________________________________________L If you specify the /DENSITY qualifier with the /APPEND qualifier, you must A specify the density at which the existing tape data was written. 2 DIRECTORYK The Directory qualifier (/DIRECTORY) lists at your terminal the backup setK names or files on the specified tape or disk volume. In a multivolume tapeJ set, the directory is on the first tape of the set. In a multivolume disk4 set, the directory is on the first disk of the set.K When specified with no backup set name, the /DIRECTORY qualifier lists all the backup sets on the volume.L To display the names of files in a backup set, enter the backup set name by? using the /BACKUP_SET qualifier with the /DIRECTORY qualifier. 2 DISPLAYM The Display qualifier (/DISPLAY) prints, at your terminal, the file name andH directory of each file as the header for that file is being transferred by BRU.2 ERRORSH The Errors qualifier (/ERRORS) terminates a restore operation after the: specified number of nonfatal tape-read errors is reached. Format /ERRORS:n Parameter nL Specifies the number of errors. The range of numbers is 0 to 65535. The9 default number of errors before termination is 2510. 2 EXCLUDEJ The Exclude qualifier (/EXCLUDE) backs up or restores all of the files onA the tape or disk except the files specified on the command line.2 EXTENDI The Extend qualifier (/EXTEND) specifies the default number of blocks byK which a file is extended when that file has exhausted its allocated space. Format /EXTEND:n Parameter nK Specifies the number of blocks. This value is used by the ACP when theP volume is mounted. The default is the number of blocks from the input disk.D The /EXTEND qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations. 2 HEADERSI The Headers qualifier (/HEADERS) specifies the number of file headers to& allocate initially to the index file. Format /HEADERS:n Parameter n* Specifies the number of file headers.E The /HEADERS qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations.2 IDENTIFICATIONG The Identification qualifier (/IDENTIFICATION) directs BRU to identifyG itself by displaying its version. This qualifier may be specified on a< command line alone or in combination with other qualifiers.2 IMAGEF The Image qualifier (/IMAGE) specifies th00H L}at you want to do a multiple* disk-to-disk backup or restore operation. Format /IMAGE:option Parameter option0 Specifies one of the following two options:M SAVE If you are doing a backup operation, you must specify the SAVE* option on the command line.J RESTORE If you want to do a restore operation, you must specify the2 RESTORE option on the command line. 2 INITIALIZEM The Initialize qualifier (/INITIALIZE) specifies that you want to initializeA the output disk during a tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operation.F Initialization places a Files-11 structure on the disk. The Files-11 N structure includes the boot block, the home block, and the five system files B (INDEXF.SYS, BADBLK.SYS, BITMAP.SYS, CORIMG.SYS, and 000000.DIR).M The volume must be mounted foreign. BRU returns a privilege violation if the' conditions are not met satisfactorily. 2 INVOLUMEK The Involume qualifier (/INVOLUME) specifies the volume label of the input disk. Format /INVOLUME:name Parameter nameO Specifies the name of the volume label. This name can be up to 12(decimal) characters long.M For disk-to-tape or disk-to-disk operations, the /INVOLUME qualifier directsM BRU to look for the volume label of the input volume to verify that the diskL has the correct label. This check ensures that you do not back up the wrong volume.I For restore operations, the /INVOLUME qualifier directs BRU to check theL volume label of the disk that is stored in the backup set on tape or in the# image backup set file on the disk.2 LENGTHH The Length qualifier (/LENGTH) specifies the length of the output tape. Format /LENGTH:n Parameter nK Specifies the length of the output tape in decimal feet. If the lengthN specified exceeds the length of the tape, the entire length of the outputN tape is used. In cases where you know the end of a tape must not be used,M you can specify a shorter length to ensure that you do not write on that part of the tape. 2 MAXIMUML The Maximum qualifier (/MAXIMUM) specifies the maximum number of files thatM can be placed on a volume as determined by the number of file headers in theD volume's index file. (BRU supports up to 65,500 files on a volume.) Format /MAXIMUM:n Parameter nN Specifies the number of files. The default is the maximum number of filesA on the input disk. The value includes the five system files. 2 MOUNTEDI The Mounted qualifier (/MOUNTED) allows you to back up files from a diskI that is mounted as a Files-11 volume (by means of the MCR or DCL command MOUNT). 2 NEW_VERSIONE The New Version qualifier (/NEW_VERSION) resolves file specificationG conflicts that occur during restore operations and during backups to a mounted disk.G When a file already exists on the output disk volume, the /NEW_VERSIONH qualifier creates a new version of the file. You cannot use the /VERIFYK qualifier when you specify the /NEW_VERSION qualifier. If these qualifiersH are specified together, BRU will issue a "Conflicting qualifiers" error message.2 NOINITIALIZEJ The Noinitialize qualifier (/NOINITIALIZE) specifies that you do not wantL to initialize the output disk because it is already in Files-11 format. The2 output disk must be mounted as a Files-11 volume.K You cannot enter any of the initialization qualifiers when you specify theJ /NOINITIALIZE qualifier. If you enter any of these qualifiers, BRU issues an error message. 2 NOPRESERVEI The Nopreserve qualifier (/NOPRESERVE) specifies that you do not want toI preserve file IDs (file IDs are generally preserved). If you specify theH /NOPRESERVE qualifier, BRU suppresses the message that file IDs are notJ being preserved. Note that in restoring to a mounted disk, not preserving" file IDs is BRU's default action.G The /NOPRESERVE qualifier is used only with the /INITIALIZE qualifier.00P4'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAI When file IDs are not preserved, BRU assigns new file IDs and increments them sequentially. 2 NOSUPERSEDEB The Nosupersede qualifier (/NOSUPERSEDE) specifies that when fileH specifications on the mounted output disk are identical to those on theL input volume, the file on the input volume is not transferred. That is, theK file on the output disk is not superseded by the file on the input volume.M When an output file and an input file have identical file specifications butL different version numbers, the /NOSUPERSEDE qualifier causes the input fileG to be copied, but it does not delete the output file. The /NOSUPERSEDE qualifier is the default. 2 OUTVOLUMEN The Outvolume qualifier (/OUTVOLUME) specifies the volume label of the output disk. Format /OUTVOLUME:name Parameter nameK Specifies the name of the volume. This label can be up to 12(decimal)  characters long. 2 POSITIONL The Position qualifier (/POSITION) specifies the location of the index fileN on the output disk volume being initialized, usually to minimize access time. Format /POSITION:option Parameter optionE Specifies one of the four possible location options, as follows: BEGINNING MIDDLE END BLOCK:n 2 PROTECTIONH The Protection qualifier (/PROTECTION) specifies the default protectionE status for all files created on the output volume being initialized. Format /PROTECTION:option Parameter option< Specifies one of the four possible options, as follows: SYSTEM:value OWNER:value GROUP:value WORLD:valueB The protection value can be R (read), W (write), E (extend), or. D (delete), or any combination of the four. 2 REVISEDG The Revised qualifier (/REVISED) backs up or restores files revised or: created on, before, or after the specified date and time. Format /REVISED:option Parameter optionJ Specifies one of the two options in three possible forms, as follows: BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss) BEFORE:dd-mmm-yyu BEFORE:hh:mm:ss AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss)c AFTER:dd-mmm-yy AFTER:hh:mm:ssp2 REWINDI The Rewind qualifier (/REWIND) rewinds the first magnetic tape of a taper4 set before executing a backup or restore operation.J When specified with an input tape, BRU rewinds the first tape of the tape' set before searching for a backup set.rK When specified with the /APPEND qualifier, BRU rewinds the output tape andaF then searches for the logical end-of-tape before executing the backup operation.t 2 SUPERSEDETM The Supersede qualifier (/SUPERSEDE) specifies that when file specificationsnI on the mounted output volume are identical to file specifications on theuM input volume, the file on the output volume is deleted and replaced with then file from the input volume.K For an multiple disk-to-disk backup or restore operation (using the /IMAGEhL qualifier), if you create a backup set file on a mounted volume, and a fileH with the same name exists, the /SUPERSEDE qualifier replaces this file.+ The /NOSUPERSEDE qualifier is the default. 2 TAPE_LABELM The Tape Label qualifier (/TAPE_LABEL) specifies the volume identifier to be L placed on a tape during a backup operation or to be compared with the label/ on the tape for append and restore operations.v Formate /TAPE_LABEL:label Parameter : labelN Specifies the 6-character identifier. This label allows you to check that$ you are using the correct tape.2 UFDeK The UFD qualifier (/UFD) directs BRU to create directories (if they do notaK already exist) on a mounted output volume, and it then directs BRU to copytK into them the files from the same directory on the input volume. If you do = not specify the /UFD qualifier, BRU does not copy the files.,B The /UFD qualifier is used only with the /NOINITIALIZE qualifier.2 VERIFYH The Verify qualifier (/VERIFY:[option]) verifies 00X L}that the output volumeB was written correctly by comparing the input volume to the output& volume and reporting any differences. Formato /VERIFY[:option]n :DOUBLEBUFFER :SINGEBUFFERf@ Specifying the DOUBLEBUFFER option, which can only be used withD MU-type tape devices, may improve the performance of streaming tape@ devices such as the TK50 cartridge tape by double buffering I/OE operations. Specifying the SINGLEBUFFER option causes BRU to singleCI buffer I/O operations, which was the default action for versions of BRUn prior to version 4.1.EI During a backup operation, each tape or disk is verified before starting_M the next volume in the backup set. During a restore operation, however, theaE entire backup set is restored before beginning the verify operation.W 2 WINDOWS I The Windows qualifier (/WINDOWS) specifies the default number of mapping/L pointers to be allocated for file windows when initializing an output disk. FormatE f /WINDOWS:na Parameter nM Specifies the number of pointers. This value is used by the ACP when theaM volume is mounted. A file window consists of a number of pointers and iseL stored in memory when the file is opened. The default number of mapping0 pointers is the same as for the input disk. 2 STANDALONEG You can run BRU stand alone. On the RSX-11M-PLUS operating system, theeI standalone system is called BRUSYS. The difference between the BRU taskPK contained in this standalone system and the On-Line BRU is that standalone.M BRU does not support a restore operation to a mounted volume. Therefore, BRU G will always initialize the output disk volume. There is no /INITIALIZEaM qualifier and the BRU task does not ask if you want to initialize the output/ volume.K Other qualifiers that cannot be used in the standalone BRU systems are the:K /NEW_VERSION, /NOINTIALIZE, /NOSUPERSEDE, /SUPERSEDE, and /UFD qualifiers.N On an RSX-11M-PLUS operating system, BRUSYS contains four other tasks besides< the BRU task. These other tasks are BAD, CNF, DSC, and FMT.N If you need to use BAD or FMT, you must run them before running BRU. When youN are finished with these other tasks, issue the RUN BRU command to begin using BRU. M BRU and BAD should not be used simultaneously because they use common buffer I space. Running both tasks at the same time yields unpredictable results.K After you boot the standalone BRU system, the CNF task runs automatically. J It lists the switches available for your use and then prompts you for theL devices you will be using. It is recommended that you first specify /DEV to3 find out the status of the devices on your system.eM You can also use CNF and its switches to set the control and status registeraN (CSR) and vector addresses of devices present on your system or to change theH default formatter number (FOR=n) for some of the magnetic tape devices.! The CNF switches are shown next.n; /CSR=n Changes the default CSR number for the device.aF /DEV Lists the default CSR and vector addresses for all of the devices.hJ /FOR=n Changes the default formatter number for some of the magneticF tape devices. The qualifier is valid for only the MF- and= MM-type devices. The initial default for n is 0.d> /VEC=n Changes the default vector number for the device.K The BRUSYS system on the distribution kit requires 124K words of memory toeJ run the five tasks (BAD, BRU, CNF, DSC, and FMT). The BRUSYS system imageK and symbol table are located in directory [6,54] on the distribution disk.SK On the RSX-11M-PLUS operating system, you can bootstrap the standalone BRUe' system in one of two ways, as follows:eI o Software boot standalone BRU by using the privileged MCR command BOOT5 as follows:p >INS $BOO >BOO [6,54]BRUSYSK o Hardware boot standalone BRU following the hardware bootstrap procedurea for your processor.dL To create a hardware00`Sg'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATA-bootable, standalone BRU tape from the distributionJ disk, use the Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR) to save the system image to tape as follows:e >MOU MT:/FORh >SET /UIC=[6,54] >ASN SY:=LB:E >RUN VMRM42 ENTER FILENAME: BRUSYSs VMR>SAVE MT:BRUSYSr VMR>CTRL/ZN This tape contains a hardware-bootable image of the standalone BRU system. 2 EXAMPLESH The following are examples of various BRU operations and command lines: 1L This example shows how to use BRU to back up an entire disk volume onto twoI 1600-bpi magnetic tapes and then how to restore the disk. For the backupE operation, BRU verifies the output volumes as part of the operation.h= (Verifying volumes is specified with the /VERIFY qualifier.)J Use the following command lines to back up DM2 onto the magnetic tapes on MM0 and MM1:, >MOU DM2:/FOR >MOU MMO:/FOR >MOU MM1:/FOR" >BRU /DEN:1600/VER DM2: MM0:,MM1:J Use the following command lines to restore the entire disk and rewind theM first input tape. (The /INI qualifier specifies that DM2 will be initialized& before the restore operation begins.) >MOU DM2:/FOR >MOU MMO:/FOR >MOU MM1:/FOR% >BRU /REW/DEN:1600/INI MM:,MM1: DM2:_ 2K This example shows how to do a disk-to-disk backup operation for an entire K disk. The characteristics of the output disk default to those of the inputN disk. This operation (and every other BRU operation) can be done in two ways.J The following command lines cause BRU to initialize the output disk (DM1)C and then back up all of the files on the input disk (DM0) onto it: >MOU DM:/FORf >MOU DM1:/FOR >BRU/INI DM: DM1: orc >BRUs BRU>p FROM: DM: TO: DM1:  INITIALIZE OUTPUT DISK [Y/N]:Yi BRU>CTRL/ZO 3I This example shows another disk-to-disk backup operation. This time, thedJ maximum number of files and initial file header allocation for the output disk are changed. >MOU DM:/FORs >MOU DM1:/FOR- BRU>/INI/MAX:10000/HEA:5000/POS:BEG DM: DM1:c 4J This example shows a multiple disk-to-disk backup operation. You must useM the SAVE option with the /IMAGE qualifier when doing a multiple disk-to-diskk backup operation. >MOU DL:label >MOU DY:/FOR ! >BRU/INI/IMA:SAV/VER/MOU DL: DY:P 5L This example shows a image disk-to-disk restore operation. You must specifyB the RESTORE option on the command line with the /IMAGE qualifier. >MOU DY:/FOR >MOU DL:/FORe >BRU/INI/IMA:RES/VER DY: DL:m 6I This example shows how to do an incremental backup operation by date andi with tape verification.L The following command lines back up all files on the disk that were revisedJ after 5:00 P.M. on 14 February 1987. After all the files have been copiedJ onto the tape, BRU verifies the tape. If files on the tape do not verify, BRU returns an error message. >MOU DM:/FORs >MOU MT:/FORl# >BRU/REV:AFT:(14-FEB-87 17:00)/VER FROM: DM: TO: MT: 7B This example shows how to do a selective backup operation by file specification.tK In this case, BRU backups up all the files in directory [7,10] and all thePJ files with type MAC and CMD in directory [301,304] on the input disk to a magnetic tape. >MOU DB:/FORu >MOU MM:/FORl$ >BRU DB:[7,10],[301,304]*.MAC,*.CMD TO: MM:F CDA helps you determine the cause of system crashes by analyzing and G formatting a memory dump created by the Executive Crash Dump Module. nD You can use switches to select the information that CDA formats and lists.S) The general form of the command line is: SJ >CDA [listfile/sw],[binaryfile/sw]=[symbolfile/STB],crash-input[/sw] i/ listfile the human-readable CDA output listingc B binaryfile a copy of the binary data the crash dump module writes on the crash dump device :J00ShTlL} symbolfile the symbol definition file (RSX11M.STB) for the crashed system fC crash-input the source of the binary input to CDA; you specify thenB crash dump device or a binary file created by CDA & in a previous analysis a For more CDA information, type:+ HELP CDA LIST (for the list file switches)-- HELP CDA BINARY (for the binary file switch)A6 HELP CDA ANALYSIS (for the crash-input file switches) E See the RSX-11M/M-PLUS Crash Dump Analyzer Reference Manual for morel information.f 2 ANALYSIS+ The switches for the crash-input file are:h p5 /ACT (or /ATL) Dumps control blocks of active tasksh( /ADV Lists information on all devices /ALL Does entire analysis4 /CLI (or /CPB) Lists contents of CLI parser blocks) /CLQ Lists contents of the clock queueo0 /CTL Dumps controller info (KRBs, CTBs, etc.); /DEV (or/DCB,/SCB,/UCB)Lists information on active devicesn6 /DMP:a:b:[c] Dumps memory addresses between a and b;- c is an optional starting virtual address a /HDR Dumps task headers( /KDS:start:stop Dumps kernel data space/ /KIS:start:stop Dumps kernel instruction space 6 /KMR Forces assignment of kernel address registers : /PCB (or /PAR) Dumps partition control block information /POOL Dumps primary poolt /SECPOL Dumps secondary pool@ /STD (or /TCB,/TAL) Dumps task control blocks of all installed tasks. / /-SYS Does not dump system information pagesmA /TSK=name:start:stop Dumps task virtual address space start and v (or /TASK,/TAS) stop2 BINARY# The switch for the binary file is:a a? /MEMSIZ:n Specifies memory size in K words (default: n=124.)c a g2 LIST$ The switches for the list file are: 5 /EXIT:n Terminates analysis after n analysis errorsm p+ /LIMIT:n Limits output listing to n pages T( /LINES:n Limits page length to n lines $ /-SP Does not spool the list fileL The File Compare Utility (CMP) compares two ASCII text files. The files areK compared line by line to determine whether parallel records are identical.( The command line for CMP is shown next. Format- [outfile[/switch[...]]=] infile1,infile2 Parameters outfileJ Specifies the file specification for the output file. The format for0 entering file specifications is as follows:* ddnn:[directory]filename.type;version switchM Specifies switches that you apply to the output file specification. SomeD of the switches can be negated and some are mutually exclusive. infile1J Specifies the file specification for the input file to be compared toL infile2. The file name of this file must be specified. The default file type is MAC. infile2J Specifies the file specification for the input file to be compared toO infile1. You do not need a complete file specification. The specificationsN for infile1 are used as defaults for any unspecified portions of infile2. = Type HELP CMP SWITCHES for descriptions of the CMP switches. 2 SWITCHES! The CMP switches are as follows:J /BL Specifies that blank lines in both files be included in compare6 [/-BL] processing. The /-BL switch is the default.K /CB Specifies that CMP list infile2 with change bars, in the form ofK [/-CB] exclamation points (!), to denote which lines do not have a cor-F responding line in infile1. The /-CB switch is the default.K [/CO] Specifies that CMP include comments (that is, text preceded by aO /-CO semicolon (;)) in compare processing. The /CO switch is the default.J [/DI] Specifies that CMP list the differences between the two files. ) /-DI The /DI switch is the default.N /FF Specifies that CMP include records consisting of a single form-feedK [/-FF] character in compare processing. The /-FF switch is the default.K /LI:n Specifies that n lines must be identical be00Tpt'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAfore CMP recognizes a2 [/LI:3] match. The /LI:3 switch is the default.L [/LN] Specifies that lines in the output file be preceded by their line1 /-LN number. The /LN switch is the default.L [/MB] Specifies that CMP include all blank and tab characters in a lineE /-MB in compare processing. If you specify the /-MB switch, CMPN interprets any sequence of blank and /or tab characters as a singleK blank character. However, all spaces and tabs are printed in the9 output listing. The /MB switch is the default.I /SL[:au] Directs CMP to generate an output file suitable for use as SLPL [/-SL] command input. When you specify the /SL switch, CMP generates theL SLP command input necessary to make infile1 identical to infile2.L If a 1- to 8-character alphanumeric symbol is included in the /SLK switch (au), an audit trail is specified for SLP input. The /-SL! switch is the default.M /SP[:n] Specifies that the output file be spooled on the line printer. YouM [/-SP] can optionally specify the number of files to be spooled. The /-SPJ switch is the default. This switch applies only if you have the* Queue Manager system installed.N [/TB] Specifies that CMP include all trailing blanks on a line in compare5 /-TB processing. The /TB switch is the default.N /VB:nnn Specifies an octal character code for the character you want to useH [/VB:041] as a change bar. You use this switch with the /CB switch. The> default switch is /VB:041 for an exclamation point.J Reconfiguration is the process of physically and logically connecting andN disconnecting various system resources. By reconfiguring your system, you canO define a set of hardware resources that are accessible from the online system.E The reconfiguration services consist of three components: a command P interface (CON), a loadable driver (RD:), and a privileged reconfiguration taskO (HRC). You must have enough space in memory to contain both CON and HRC at the) same time; otherwise, CON commands fail.nL To use the reconfiguration services, invoke the command interface by typing3 CON. Then, enter CON commands at the CON> prompt.s8 Additional help is available on the following commands: BUILD CLEAR DISPLAY ESTATUS HELP IDENT LINK LIST0 OFFLINE OFFLINE_MEMORY ONLINE ONLINE_MEMORY SET SWITCH UNLINKI To display information about a command, type HELP CONFIGURE commandname. 2 STATES= A system device can assume one of the following four states:e= ONLINE Indicates the device is on line; access is granted.s= OFFLINE Indicates the device is off line; access is denied.cG MARKED FOR ONLINE Indicates the device will be brought on line when ani( access path exists; access is denied.F MARKED FOR OFFLINE Indicates the device is in an indeterminate state;9 access is denied. The system encountered an unexpectedo; error while placing a specific device logically on line.S9 Before you attempt or retry an online operation, issuet an explicit OFFLINE command. 2 BUILDn CON> BUILDsF The BUILD command creates a sequence of commands that, when executed,M duplicates the current system configuration. The sequence of reconfigurationN commands that result from a BUILD command is held in a buffer in memory. WhenM this sequence of commands executes, the reconfiguration commands restore the L system to the exact state that existed when you entered the BUILD command. 2 CLEARo CON> CLEARtJ The CLEAR command erases from the internal buff00xlL}er the current sequence ofL commands created by the BUILD command. The command does not delete the file created by the LIST command.r? For information on the LIST command, type HELP CONFIGURE LIST.d 2 DISPLAY * CON> DIS[PLAY] [keyword(s)] [FOR string] ALLn ATTRIBUTESm CONTROLLERS FULLd UNITSL The DISPLAY command provides current system configuration information aboutO the device units, device controllers, processors, memory boxes, and memory boxc controllers. D The DISPLAY command allows more than one keyword per command line. L If you do not specify a keyword, the display contains the logical names andH status flags for every device unit and device controller in the current configuration. @ For help on the FOR parameter, type HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY FOR.O For help on the DISPLAY command keywords, type HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY keyword.a 3 FOR_STRING& CON> DISPLAY [keyword(s)] FOR stringM Allows a selective display of a particular device or device group. When youmP specify this parameter, CON displays the requested information for the devices specified in the string.L You can also use one or two wildcard characters (*) in the string. Use oneM wildcard to find out which devices are connected to the controller you haveOK specified after the wildcard. Use two wildcards to find out which devicesNM have the attribute you have specified after the wildcards (either ONLINE ori OFFLINE). * The FOR string is an optional parameter.3 ALLr CON> DISPLAY ALL [FOR string]G Displays the same information as the FULL keyword with the addition of ; the associated ports and units for the device controllers.aE See also HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY FULL and HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY FOR.e 3 ATTRIBUTES% CON> DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES [FOR string] P Displays interrupt vector addresses and CSR assignments for device controllers.% See also HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY FOR.t 3 CONTROLLERS ' CON> DISPLAY CONTROLLERS [FOR string]a@ Displays every device controller in the current configuration.& See also HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY FOR.3 FULL CON> DISPLAY FULL [FOR string]oM Displays the status flags for every device unit and device controller in theL@ current configuration. The status flags indicate the following:. Accpath The device has an online access path.E Context For a tape or disk (mountable device), the device contains a = mounted volume. For a terminal, a user is logged in. OtherY devices are attached.> Driver For a device unit, the driver is loaded. For a device% controller, a driver is available.OB Massbus The device is connected to an RH-type MASSBUS controller.G Multiport The device is dual-ported (a dual-access device) between twon7 controllers (for example, a dual-ported RP06 drive).A Offline The device is off line.7 Online The device is on line (or marked for on line).)D Prv_Diag (Used with the OFFLINE and ONLINE keywords.) The device is; marked for on line or off line, but before any action isa> taken, the corresponding controller must be brought on line or taken off line.O< Unknown The CSR assignment for the device is unknown.) See also HELP CONFIGURE DISPLAY EXAMPLE.(3 UNITSc CON> DISPLAY UNITS [FOR string]M Displays every device unit in the current configuration. The display equates2 each device unit with its respective controller. 3 EXAMPLEa CON>DISPLAY FULL FOR DB C DB0: Offline,Multiport,Massbus,Accpath,Driverr PORT DB0A RHB0: Online0 PORT DB0B RHC0: Online,Current,AccpathC DB1: Offline,Multiport,Massbus,Accpath,Drivere PORT DB1A RHB1: Online0 PORT DB1B RHC1: Online,Current,AccpathK Displays information about all of the DB-type devices configured into then system.a 2 ESTATUSe CON> ESTATUSiP The ESTATUS command causes CON to exit with its exit status word reflecting theO current state of a specified device. If you use this 00t'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAcommand with the IndirectHP Command Processor, the command returns a 16- bit word describing device status.K You can use the status word to obtain information about the configuration. M For a list of the values for the bits in the word for units and controllers,rM type HELP CONFIGURE ESTATUS UNITS. For a list of the values for the bits in S8 the word for ports, type HELP CONFIGURE ESTATUS PORTS. 3 UNITSi- Exit Status Values for Units and Controllerss/ BIT VALUE DESCRIPTION STATUS BIT $ 0 1 Exit status value:) 1 2 0 = Warning 1 = Successb, 2 4 2 = Error 4 = Severe error& 6 100 Subcontroller device# 7 200 Controller devicee7 8 400 State: 0 = Device online Onlinet$ 1 = Device offline OfflineD 9 1000 Privileged and diagnostic functions. Prv_Diag3 10 2000 Multiport device MultiportsD 11 4000 MASSBUS device MassbusB 12 10000 Device's CSR is 160000(8) UnknownD 13 20000 Device has an online access path AccpathD 14 40000 Device has context ContextC 15 100000 Driver is loaded for this device Drivern3 PORTS  Exit Status Values for Ports 0 BIT VALUE DESCRIPTION STATUS BIT% 0 1 Exit status value:r$ 1 2 0 = Warning$ 2 4 1 = Success 2 = Errors 4 = Severe error 8 400 State:  0 = Port online Online 1 = Port offline Offline+ 10 2000 Current port Current0D 13 20000 An online access path to this port exists AccpathE 14 40000 Port or the device it services has context ContextE2 HELP CON> HELP1 The HELP command displays the help text for CON.B2 IDENT CON> IDENT J The IDENT command displays the current version numbers of the CON and HRCI tasks. The date and time the tasks were task built are also displayed. e2 LINK CON> LINK UBx TO CPx P The LINK command logically connects a port of a switched bus run to a processorP and thus permits access to the devices on the switched segment of the bus run. O To logically connect a switched bus run to the processor's UNIBUS, the devicesHO on the switched segment must all be off line or marked for on line. You cannotI% dynamically link switched bus runs. o> The LINK command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.C UBx Specifies the target-switched bus run. Switched bus runs areP> named using the designation UB followed by a letter from the@ DIGITAL hardware alphabet as follows: UBE, UBF, UBH, UBJ, UBK,( UBL, UBM, UBN, UBP, UBR, UBS, and UBT.6 CPx Specifies the target processor (A, B, C, or D).2 LIST CON> LIST [filespec]tN The LIST command displays the current command sequence or writes the sequenceM to a file. You can use this command to keep a list of the commands that wills% duplicate the current configuration.rE filespec Specifies the name and location of the file to contain theo> command listing. The valid format for the file specification0 is as follows: ddnn:[g,m]filename.type;version 2 OFFLINEU; CON> OFF[LINE] device-spec1[,device-spec2...,device-specn]  CON> OFF[LINE] ALLCN The OFFLINE command changes the state of an inactive device to offline, whichJ removes the device from the active set of resources in the current systemN configuration. This prevents further device access. (See also HELP CONFIGURE STATES.)eH The transition to the offline state for a specific device controller isM completed only if all associated devices are also off line. If an associatedrL device is not off line, HRC rejects the OFFLINE command because placing theK device off line could interfere with active I/O (the device has context). iO Before placing a device off line, be sure there are no conditions present thatcO constitute device context. To remove device context, enter 00lL}the appropriate DCLeL or MCR commands (for example, STOP a print processor, LOGOUT a terminal, orP DISMOUNT the volume). If a task has attached the device unit, the task must beL detached (or request to be aborted) before the unit can be placed off line.2 For help on the OFFLINE command parameters, type:# HELP CONFIGURE OFFLINE PARAMETERS.e 3 PARAMETERS; CON> OFF[LINE] device-spec1[,device-spec2...,device-specn]d CON> OFF[LINE] ALLC device-spec Represents the target device specification. Note thati- device-spec also includes processors (CPx). A ALL Places all devices off line except the system disk and thet@ terminal that issued the command. Before you enter the OFFLINE@ ALL command, dismount all volumes (tapes and disks) except the: system disk and log out all terminals except the issuing terminal. < The OFFLINE ALL command is useful prior to saving a system image with the SAVE command.2 OFFLINE_MEMORY CON> OFFLINE MEMORY memory-boxrO The OFFLINE MEMORY command removes a memory box from the system configuration. L Because memory must be contiguous, the target box must be the memory box inO the system configuration with the highest addresses (the last memory box addedn to the system).M If a partition maps to a memory box targeted for offline status, CON rejectsi/ the command and issues the following message: u7 HRC... Can't take box offline. Partition overmaps box nN Therefore, you must reduce the partition structure before removing the memoryN box. The DCL command SET PARTITION /TOP (MCR command SET /TOP) can adjust theP partition structure up or down, but it is your responsibility to ensure that noO one is using the memory in the memory box. The system is protected so that youI7 cannot bring the memory box off line if it is in use. tH The OFFLINE MEMORY command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.2 ONLINE: CON> ONL[INE] device-spec1[,device-spec2...,device-specn] CON> ONL[INE] ALLO The ONLINE command changes the state of a device to on line and enables device(* access. (See also HELP CONFIGURE STATES.)N The transition to the online state is completed only if an access path existsD between the device and the processor, and if the device driver can L successfully initialize the device. If the device lacks an access path, theL ONLINE command changes the device state to the marked for online state; theK device is activated when an online access path becomes available (when theM controller is brought on line). In addition, the ONLINE command activates a c; device unit only if the associated controller is on line. tC For help on the parameters, type HELP CONFIGURE ONLINE PARAMETERS.t- See also HELP CONFIGURE ONLINE RESTRICTIONS.e 3 PARAMETERS: CON> ONL[INE] device-spec1[,device-spec2...,device-specn] CON> ONL[INE] ALLC device-spec Represents the target device specification. Note thatt. device-spec also includes processors (CPx). < ALL Places every device controller and device unit known" to the system logically on line.3 RESTRICTIONS ONLINE Command Restrictions? o Only a privileged user can modify the system configuration.CA o The specified device must be physically present in the targetT; system and included in the system at system generation.-A o If the specified device is serviced by a loadable driver, thes. driver and device database must be loaded.2 ONLINE_MEMORYc CON> ONLINE MEMORY memory-boxL The ONLINE MEMORY command adds a memory box to the system configuration. ToJ place the additional memory on line, you must first place the appropriateM memory box port controllers and the memory box itself logically on line. Thee9 box you specify will have the highest memory addresses. iJ To use the additional memory, expand the partition structure with the DCL3 command SET PARTITION /TOP (MCR command SET /TOP).dH The ONLINE MEMORY command is supported by multiprocessor systems only. 2 SET! CON> SET controller option=value CSR V00t'DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAEC TIMER ALARMM The SET command changes the value of the CSR or the interrupt vector addressoO for an offline device. The values are stored in the device driver's database. e; The device must be off line and the driver must be loaded. N On multiprocessor systems, the SET command also activates the hardware sanity1 timer and enables an alarm if the timer expires.E9 For help on SET options, type HELP CONFIGURE SET option.3 CSR CON> SET controller CSR=valueP Alters the value of the controller's CSR address stored in the driver database.I Note that SET does not verify the CSR address that you specify until you F attempt to place the controller online. Therefore, if you specify an J incorrect CSR address, the system cannot access the device and the ONLINE command fails.oK Specify a value greater than or equal to 1600008 and less then or equal tosL 1777778. If you specify a CSR address of 1600008 or less, the device is not2 known to the system and cannot be placed on line.3 VECn CON> SET controller VEC=valueL Alters the value of the controller's interrupt vector address stored in the driver database.a" The value must be less than 7748.M SET does not verify the vector address that you specify until you attempt totJ place the controller online. If you specify an incorrect interrupt vectorK address and then attempt to place the device logically on line, the systemRO sends interrupts to nonexistent interrupt vectors; the device is not accessed.eL Also, if you specify an interrupt vector that is in use and then attempt to< place the controller on line, CON returns an error message.3 TIMERa CON> SET controller TIMER=valueO Activates or inhibits the sanity timer for the CPx controller. (Multiprocessort systems only.)c: The value is either ON (to activate) or OFF (to inhibit).3 ALARMs CON> SET controller ALARM=valueE Activates or inhibits an alarm upon sanity timer timeout for the CPxu+ controller. (Multiprocessor systems only.)s: The value is either ON (to activate) or OFF (to inhibit).2 SWITCH CON> SWITCH UBx TO CPxnO The SWITCH command modifies the processor association of a switched bus run byN performing an unlink operation followed by a link operation. The command usesM a special hardware feature of the DT07 to guarantee that the switched bus is.L linked to the target processor after the unlink operation. Thus, the SWITCHI command ensures that the switched bus will be logically connected to thes desired processor. L CON rejects the SWITCH command if a device attached to the switched bus hasL context (that is, the device is processing or allowing processing of I/O). @ The SWITCH command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.1 For help on the SWITCH command parameters, type:e" HELP CONFIGURE SWITCH PARAMETERS. 3 PARAMETERS CON> SWITCH UBx TO CPx : UBx Specifies the target-switched bus run. Switched bus5 runs are named by using the designation UB followede4 by a letter from the DIGITAL hardware alphabet (E,' F, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, and T).h& CPx Specifies the target processor.2 UNLINK CON> UNLINK UBxP The UNLINK command disconnects a port of a switched bus run from its respectiveB processor. This command reverses the effect of the LINK command. O CON rejects the command if any device attached to the context switched bus haseD (that is, the device is processing or allowing processing of I/O). UBx specifies the switched bus.; The UNLINK command applies to multiprocessor systems only.,00VL}F The console output task (COT..) communicates with the Console Logger.@ The following is a list of the privileged commands you can use: < SET /COLOG (nonprivileged) Displays Console Logging status( SET /COLOG=ON Starts Console Logging( SET /COLOG=OFF Stops Console Logging8 SET /COLOG/COTERM=TTnn: Reassigns the console terminal1 SET /COLOG/COTERM Enables the console terminal4 SET /COLOG/NOCOTERM Disables the console terminal= SET /COLOG/LOGFILE=filename Reassigns the console log file = SET /COLOG/LOGFILE= Opens a new version of the current log file 5 SET /COLOG/LOGFILE Opens a new version of the file LB:[1,4]CONSOLE.LOG5 SET /COLOG/NOLOGFILE Disables the console log file @ The /COTERM, /NOCOTERM, /LOGFILE, and /NOLOGFILE options can beC specified with each other, with SET /COLOG, or with SET /COLOG=ON.@ See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX System Management Guide for < more information on the Console Logger and the COT... task.) For HELP on logging in, type HELP LOGIN.E Help is available for DCL commands, utilities, and system features. I You can receive help by typing either HELP or ? after the DCL prompt ($)K followed by the desired topic. For example, for help on the COPY command,J type either HELP COPY or ? COPY. (The examples in the HELP files indicateM only the first of these two formats in order to save space.) Also note that@ you can type help requests in either upper case or lower case.  2 Help is available for the following DCL commands:C ABORT CONVERT DISMOUNT LOGOUT RUNaC ALLOCATE COPY EDIT MACRO SETDD ANALYZE CORAL FIX MCR SHOWD APPEND CREATE FORTRAN MOUNT SORTE ASSIGN DEALLOCATE HELP PASCAL STARTrD BACKUP DEASSIGN HOLD PRINT STOPF BASIC DEBUG INITIALIZE PURGE SUBMITD BROADCAST DEFINE INSTALL RELEASE TYPEE CANCEL DELETE LIBRARY REMOVE UNFIXRF COBOL DIFFERENCES LINK RENAME UNLOCK@ CONTINUE DIRECTORY LOGIN REQUEST C For information on a command, type: HELP commandname. Additional C; help on a command qualifier is often available by typing: D HELP commandname qualifier. For the short forms of some commands,  type: HELP BRIEF.  D For information on utilities and system features, type: HELP MORE. 1 ABORTE @DCLABORTE 1 ALLOCATE @DCLALLOC 1 ANALYZEE @DCLANALYZ1 APPEND @DCLAPPEND 1 ARCHIVE #BACKUP 1 BACKUP @DCLBACKUP 1 RESTORE@DCLRES 1 ASSIGN @DCLASSIGN 1 AUTHORS F These help files have been brought to you by the friendly folks (and H a couple of grouches) in the Spit Brook woods of Nashua, New Hampshire.1 BASICH @DCLBASICn1 BYEl#LOGOUTo1 CANCEL @DCLCANCEL1 COBOLn@DCLC81p 1 CONTINUE@DCLCONT1 COPY@DCLCOPY 1 CONVERT @DCLCONV1 CORAL, @DCLCORAL 1 CREATE @DCLCREATE 1 DEALLOCATE @DCLDEALLL 1 DEASSIGN @DCLDEASSN1 DEBUGP @DCLDEBUGP1 DEFINE @DCLDEFINE1 DELETE @DCLDELETE 1 DIFFERENCES@DCLDIFF 1 DIRECTORYD@DCLDIR 1 DISMOUNT@DCLDISh 1 EDI_UTIL@EDI1 EDIT@DCLEDIT1 FIXr@DCLFIXl 1 FORTRANa@DCLFORT1 HELLO)#LOGIN1 HELP@DCLHELP1 HOLD@DCLHOLD 1 INITIALIZE@DCLINIT 1 INSTALLl@DCLINST 1 LIBRARY@DCLLIBL1 LINK@DCLLINK1 LOGINT @DCLLOGINO1 LOGOUT @DCLLOGOUT1 MACRO @DCLMACRO1 MCR,@DCLMCRA 1 MESSAGEE #BROADCAST 1 BROADCASTE@DCLBROL1 MOUNTS @DCLMOUNTE1 PASCAL @DCLPASCAL1 PRINTE @DCLPRINTE1 PURGEE @DCLPURGEE 1 RELEASEF@DCLREL1 REMOVE @DCLREMOVE1 RENAME @DCLRENAME 1 REQUEST@DCLREQL1 RUN@DCLRUND 1 PASSWORD#SET1 SET@DCLSETa1 BRIEFT @DCLSHORTS1 SHOW@DCLSHOW1 SORT@DCLSORT1 START @DCLSTART1 STOP@DCLSTOP1 SUBMIT @DCLSUBMIT1 TYPE@DCLTYPE1 UNFIXI 00WXDATADATADATADATADATADATADATA@DCLUNFIXT1 UNLOCK @DCLUNLOCK D1 MOREB Help is available for the following utilities, system tasks, and features:D8 ACCOUNTING ASCII BAD BATCH BCK I BRU CDA CMP CNV CONFIGUREO@ COT DEF DES DMP DSC D DSP DTE EDI EDT ERROR_LOG B EXECUTIVE FCS FLX FMT IFL : INDIRECT IOX LBR MAG MFT@ ODT PAT PIP PMD RMS 0 RST SHADOW_RECORDING SLP SYSGEN , TDX SYSLIB TKB TKTN VFY VMR ZAP 1 RESOURCE_ACCOUNTING #ACCOUNTING 1 ACCOUNTING@ACC1 ASCIIO@ASCII1 BAD @BAD1 BATCH_PROCESSING@BATCH1 BRU @BRU1 CDA @CDA1 CMPT@CMP 1 RECONFIGURE #CONFIGURE 1 CONFIGURE @CON1 COTU@COT1 DSC @DSC1 DUMP#DMP1 DMPF@DMP1 MFT #DTE1 FILE_TRANSFER_UTILITY #DTE1 DATA_TERMINAL_EMULATION #DTE1 DTE @DTE1 EDT @DCLEDT 1 ERRLOG #ERROR_LOG 1 ERROR_LOGS@ERROR 1 EXECUTIVE @EXECUTIVE1 FCS @FCS1 FILEX #FLX1 FLEX#FLX1 FLX @FLX1 FMT@FMT 1 INDIRECT@ICP1 IOXU@IOX1 LBRO@LBR1 MAG@MAG1 ODTC@ODT1 PATCHD#PAT1 PATC@PAT1 PIPH@PIP1 PMDU@PMD1 RMSA@RMS1 BCKP#RMSBCKF1 RMSBCK@RMSBCK1 CNVG#RMSCNVN1 RMSCNV@RMSCNVS1 DEFC#RMSDEF1 RMSDEF@RMSDEF1 DES#RMSDESI1 RMSDES@RMSDES 1 DSP#RMSDSPR1 RMSDSP@RMSDSPD1 IFLT#RMSIFL1 RMSIFL@RMSIFL 1 RST#RMSRSTG1 RMSRST@RMSRSTR1 SHADOW_RECORDING@SHADOW 1 SLIPPERS#SLP1 SLIPRX#SLP1 SLPX@SLP1 SYSTEM_GENERATIONT#SYSGENE1 SYSGEN@SYSGENI1 SYSLIB@SYSLIB 1 CATCH_ALL_TASK#TDX1 TDXC@TDX1 TKBA@TKB1 TKTN@TKTNP!1 VIRTUAL_MONITOR_CONSOLE_ROUTINEP#VMR 1 VIRTUAL_MCR#VMR1 VMRN@VMR1 VERIFY#VFY1 VFYN@VFY1 ZAPR@ZAP ABORT[/COMMAND] commandname% ABORT/TASK[/qualifiers] [taskname] /TERMINAL:ddnn: /[NO]POSTMORTEMF The ABORT command aborts the execution of either a command or a task.> If no command or task is specified, a DCL command is aborted.F The /TASK qualifier specifies that a task running at your terminal beC aborted. If a task name is not specified, the task run via the RUNF command's install-run-remove option is aborted. The /TASK qualifier . must follow directly after the ABORT command.G The /TERMINAL qualifier specifies that a task running on some terminal@ other than your own be aborted. This is a privileged qualifier.K The /POSTMORTEM qualifier specifies that a postmortem dump be taken of theI task before it is aborted. The default is /NOPOSTMORTEM. See HELP PMD.. ALLOCATE[/qualifier[s]] dd[nn:] [logicalname] /TERMINAL:ddnn:  /TYPE:devicetype  A The ALLOCATE command reserves a device for the exclusive use of  the issuing terminal.F If you specify the device as ddnn:, the device with the number nn is G reserved for you. If you specify only dd, the first available unit ofF the types represented by this mnemonic is reserved for you: this is  called a generic allocation.J The logical name assigns a logical name to the device as you allocate it., The logical name must be in the form xxnn:.H The /TERMINAL:ddnn: qualifier allocates the device to another terminal. This is a privileged command.H The /TYPE:devicetype qualifier allocates a specific type of device from0 among the types represented by the mnemonic dd.00YL}7ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP[/qualifier[s]] infile[/qualifier[s]]0 /LIST /ACTIVE- /BINARY /ALL1 /SYMBOLS /DEVICES/ /BLOCK5 /CLOCK_QUEUE5 /CONTROLLERS1 /DENSITY9 /DATA_STRUCTURES. /DUMP1 /HEADERS0 /KERNEL3 /PARTITION. /POOL8 /SECONDARY_POOL4 /[NO]SYSTEM0 /TASKS:@ The ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP command helps you to determine the causeB of system crashes by formatting and listing a memory dump created& by the Executive Crash Dump Module. 9 For additional help, type ANALYZE CRASH_DUMP qualifier. 3 LIST4 ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP/LIST[:listfilespec[/qualifiers]]5 /ERROR_LIMIT:n6 /PAGE_COUNT:n 5 /PAGE_LENGTH:n3 /[NO]PRINTER; The /LIST qualifier allows you to specify the name of the B human-readable output listing. The /ERROR_LIMIT qualifier causesA analysis to terminate after n errors. The /PAGE_COUNT qualifierB limits output to n pages. The /PAGE_LENGTH qualifier limits page< length to n lines. The /NOPRINTER qualifier does not print& the list file, whereas /PRINTER does.3 BINARY5 ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP/BINARY:binaryfilespec[/qualifier]8 /MEMORY_SIZE:n? The /BINARY qualifier allows you to create an optional copy of" the binary crash dump input file. < The /MEMORY_SIZE qualifier specifies memory size in K words (default: n=124.) 3 SYMBOLS* ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP/SYMBOLS:symbolfilespecC The /SYMBOLS qualifier allows you to specify the symbol definitionD file for the crashed system. The default symbol definition file is2 RSX11M.STB in the current default file directory. 3 ACTIVE- ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/ACTIVE:(arg[,...])* DEVICES( TASKSA The TASKS argument dumps the contents of the task control blocks@ of active tasks in the crashed system at the time of the crash.A The DEVICES argument dumps information on devices active in the ! system at the time of the crash.3 ALL ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/ALL; Analyzes all information available in the crash dump file. 3 DEVICES" ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/DEVICES? Analyzes information in all devices on the system at the time  of the crash.3 BLOCK" ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/BLOCK:n< Identifies the block number on the crash input device where" the crash dump input file starts.( The value of n must be less than 65535. 3 CLOCK_QUEUE& ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/CLOCK_QUEUE. Lists the contents of the system clock queue. 3 CONTROLLERS& ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/CONTROLLERS- Lists information on each device controller. 3 DENSITY$ ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/DENSITY:nE Sets density of crash input tape to 800 or 1600 bits per inch (bpi).3 DATA_STRUCTURES6 ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/DATA_STRUCTURES:(arg[,...])9 COMMAND_PARSER1 DEVICE4 PARTITION1 STATUS/ TASK/ UNITA The COMMAND_PARSER argument lists the contents of the CLI parser blocks in the system. K The PARTITION argument lists the contents of each Partiti00YZDATADATADATADATADATADATADATAon Control Block. I The TASK argument lists the contents of the Task Control Block for every# task in the System Task Directory.E The DEVICE, STATUS, and UNIT arguments list the contents of control - blocks for the active devices in the system.3 DUMP= ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/DUMP[:(START:a,END:b[,ADDRESS:c])]E Lists the contents of physical memory between address a and address 8 b. Note that c is an optional virtual starting address. 3 HEADERS" ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/HEADERSA Lists the contents of the task headers for each task resident in memory. 3 KERNEL- ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/KERNEL:(arg[,...])7 DATA:(START:n,END:n)> INSTRUCTION:(START:n,END:n), REGISTERS@ The DATA argument lists the contents of kernel data space from $ virtual addresses START:n to END:n.C The INSTRUCTION argument lists the contents of kernel instruction - space from virtual address START:n to END:n.C The REGISTERS argument forces the assignment of the values for the KERNEL address registers. 3 PARTITION$ ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/PARTITIONF The PARTITION qualifier lists the contents of each Partition Control  Block.3 POOL  ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/POOL6 The POOL qualifier lists the contents of system pool. 3 SECONDARY_POOL: ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/SECONDARY_POOL:(START:n,END:n)]D The SECONDARY_POOL qualifier lists the contents of system secondary& pool between the specified addresses. 3 NOSYSTEM#SYSTEM3 SYSTEM% ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/[NO]SYSTEM= The NOSYSTEM qualifier suppresses the output listing of the - information generated on the crashed system. The default is /SYSTEM.3 TASKS:, ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP infile/TASKS:(arg[,...])* DIRECTORYD ADDRESS:(NAME:name[,START:n,END:n])A DATA:(NAME:name[,START:n,END:n])H INSTRUCTION:(NAME:name[,START:n,END:n]) D The DIRECTORY argument lists the contents of the Task Control Block- for every task in the System Task Directory.A The ADDRESS argument lists the contents of the task specified by@ NAME and between the virtual addresses that may be specified byA START and END. It also includes the contents of task data space if a task includes data space.9 The DATA argument lists the contents of task data space.A The INSTRUCTION argument lists the contents of task instruction  space./ ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/[/qualifier[s]] [input_file]i Qualifiers: /BRIEF /SERIAL_NUMBER1 /COMMAND /SERIAL_NUMBERg. /DEVICES /SINCE /ENTRY /STATISTICS /FULL /THROUGHp /INCLUDE /TODAYe/ /NODETAIL /VOLUME_LABELW /OUTPUT /[NO]WIDE- /PREVIOUS_DAYS /YESTERDAY o /REGISTERS lE The ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command analyzes and formats information aboutoF errors and events that occur on system hardware and generates reportsC that Field Service can use to repair your hardware. Most of theseN@ commands (and the reports they generate) will be useful only to DIGITAL Field Service. B Type HELP ANALYZE ERROR_LOG qualifier for additional information.3 BRIEF  ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/BRIEF@ Creates a brief format error log report containing one line of ? information about each event in the error log file. /BRIEF isa/ the default for the ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command. 3 COMMANDc000ZL} ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/COMMAND:defined_report_stringF The /COMMAND qualifier invokes a predefined string of qualifiers for I RPT to use. The string can be one of the DIGITAL-defined report stringsi! or a user-defined report string.G4 DIGITAL supplies the following four report strings:. String: Qualifiers defined:5 DAY /FULL/STATISTICS:ALL/TODAYtF WEEK /STATISTICS:(HISTORY,ERROR)/PREVIOUS_DAYS=7G MONTH /STATISTICS:(HISTORY,ERROR)/PREVIOUS_DAYS=31n7 SYSTEM /STATISTICS:(HISTORY,ERROR))d L A user-defined report string allows you to access a file that contains the M qualifier combinations you use frequently and lets you invoke the qualifierslK by using the string name, instead of reentering the qualifiers explicitly.r= The names of the predefined strings must be entered in full.O 3 DEVICES 0 ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/DEVICES:device[s] [inputfile]N Allows you to generate error log reports for a particular device or group of . devices. RPT selects all devices by default. R Arguments: H dd Selects a group of all devices with the mnemonic ddK ddnn: Selects the device with mnemonic dd and unit number nniA (arg,arg[,...]) Selects a series of devices or device groupsr3 ENTRYy) ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/ENTRY:packet_number[s] L Allows you to select a packet or range of packets by specifying the packet E identification number. RPT selects all packets by default. You cancL determine the packet numbers you want to see by examining a brief report of all packets. Arguments:cO mmm.mmm[:nnn.nnn] One packet or range of packets from mmm.mmm to nnn.nnnv3 *:nnn.nnn All packets before nnn.nnn.2 nnn.nnn:* All packets after nnn.nnnA (arg,arg[,...]) A series of packets or ranges of packetsl3 FULL ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/FULLfH Full reports provide a detailed listing of device events. They list andI interpret all of the information collected in the error log packets theye specify.i 3 INCLUDEr# ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/INCLUDE:argumentcK The /INCLUDE qualifier selects errors of the type specified. RPT includes. all error types by default. Arguments:r n> ALL Selects all packets in error log file9 CONTROL Selects command packets from ELItP ERRORS Selects packets from processor, memory, and peripherals> MEMORY Selects packets from events in memoryD PERIPHERAL Selects packets from all peripheral devices; PROCESSOR Selects packets from events in CPUlJ SYSTEM_INFORMATION Selects from system events, not hardware-specificN (arg,arg[,...]) Selects a series of packet types (The ALL and ERRORS N arguments may not be specified with other arguments.) R 3 NODETAIL ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/NODETAILrO Inhibits RPT from creating a formatted output report on event information. ThenN /NODETAIL qualifier causes RPT not to format the packets or produce a packet-O by-packet report. This can be useful when you want to generate only a summaryT report. 3 [NO]WIDE ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/[NO]WIDEp fL The /[NO]WIDE qualifier sets error log reports to wide format (132 columns)L or narrow format (80 columns). RPT selects the narrow format by default forL reports that display on your terminal. Summary reports do not recognize theK /[NO]WIDE qualifier. The summary portion of these reports is always in thei wide format.  K The basic report format does not change when RPT creates a narrow report. fF Instead, each long line of the report wraps onto the next line at an  appropriate place.  3 OUTPUT& ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/OUTPUT[:reportfile]N The /OUTPUT qualifier allows you to specify that the error log report go to aK file on disk, rather than to your terminal. If you do not use the /OUTPUT oN qualifier, the RPT report is displayed on your terminal in narrow format. No O00ZDATADATADATADATADATADATADATA reportfile is created. The /OUTPUT qualifier creates a wide format reportfile,h ERRREPORT.LST, by default. 3 PREVIOUS_DAYSd" ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/PREVIOUS_DAYS:nM The /PREVIOUS_DAYS qualifier allows you to select error log packets from theG! previous n days for RPT reports.T 3 REGISTERSw ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/REGISTERSN Register reports contain the same information as full reports for all events L except those that occur on peripherals. Register reports list the contents K of all device registers for peripherals, but contain no other information.e3 SERIAL_NUMBERe* ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/SERIAL_NUMBER:argument ( DRIVE:n' PACK:ns/ DRIVE:n,PACK:ni! EM The /SERIAL_NUMBER qualifier selects a packet based on drive or pack serial iK number, or one of each. This qualifier can only select peripheral errors.hI You can select packets from any device that has a serial number by driverH serial number, but you can only select packets from MSCP and last-track devices by pack serial number. 3 SINCE 6 ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/SINCE:start_date[/THROUGH:end_date]H The /SINCE qualifier selects error log packets created on and after theI date specified. Use one of the standard RSX date formats, as follows: s# DD-MMM-YY o or. (DD-MMM-YY HH:MM:SS) A If you specify the second format, with time as well as date, thea0 parentheses are a required part of the syntax. M An asterisk (*) used at the end of a range specification indicates any date LN since the specified starting date. For example, 12-AUG-87:* specifies all of C the packets from August 12, 1987 to the end of the error log file.s 3 STATISTICSK Creates error log summary reports based on the device characteristics you O specify as arguments. The RPT default command line creates no summary report.c) ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/STATISTICS:argument[s]a Arguments:n sO ALL Creates summary reports sorted by error, history and geometrya? ERROR Creates a summary report sorted by error typetC DISK_GEOMETRY Creates a summary report based on device geometryoI HISTORY Creates a summary report sorted by device error historytL NONE Creates no summary report (invoked by RPT default command)H (arg,arg[,...]) Creates multiple reports that you specify (The ALL andL NONE arguments may not be specified with other arguments.)I RPT cannot create summary reports in narrow width. If you specify narrowRO width by using the /NOWIDE qualifier, RPT formats the packet-by-packet displayaB in narrow format, but formats the summary portion in wide format. 3 THROUGHr6 ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG[/SINCE:start_date]/THROUGH:end_dateO The /THROUGH qualifier creates error log reports through the time you specify.aH The RPT default command line creates reports through the current date. 9 Use one of the standard RSX date formats, as follows: R c" DD-MMM-YY  or- (DD-MMM-YY HH:MM:SS) r sA If you specify the second format, with time as well as date, thes0 parentheses are a required part of the syntax. I An asterisk (*) used at the beginning of a range specification indicateseE any date through the specified ending date. For example, *:12-AUG-87fF specifies all of the packets from the beginning of the error log file through August 12, 1987.  3 TODAY o ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/TODAY I Creates reports on packets for the current day; that is, since midnight.D3 VOLUME_LABEL+ ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG/VOLUME_LABEL:volumelabel M Creates error log reports from packets based on the specified volume label. A3 NOWIDE#WIDE 3 WIDEM The NOWIDE qualifier specifies the narrow format (80 columns) for error log iN reports. This is the default for reports that are displayed on your terminal.I WIDE (132 columns00Z[\}) is the default for reports that are stored in a file.Y 3 YESTERDAYD< Creates reports on packets created during the previous day.E The ANALYZE command allows you to collect information about hardwareF on your system. You can determine the number of bad blocks on a diskE volume with the ANALYZE/MEDIA command, create and format informationG on system failures with the ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP command, and get error A logging information on system devices with the ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command.. For more information on these commands, type: HELP ANALYZE MEDIA HELP ANALYZE ERROR_LOG " HELP ANALYZE CRASH_DUMP 2 BADBLOCKS#MEDIA2 MEDIA% ANALYZE/MEDIA [/qualifier[s]] ddnn:  /ALLOCATE /BADBLOCKS /[NO]EXERCISE /OVERRIDE /RETRY /SHOWB The ANALYZE/MEDIA command locates bad blocks on a disk volume andE records their locations in the last good block before the last trackB on the disk. This information is then used by backup and restore> utilites and the INITALIZE command. See HELP BACKUP and HELP INITIALIZE. < In the command line, ddnn: specifies a physical device. TheC specification consists of two alphanumeric characters followed by . a 1- to 3-digit octal unit number and colon.  1 ANALYZE/MEDIA qualifiers are defined as follows: E /ALLOCATE:label Prompts you for blocks to be allocated9 to BADBLK.SYS and to be entered in the 9 bad block descriptor file. = /BADBLOCKS Prompts you for additional bad blocks,A /BADBLOCKS/EXERCISE:(n,m) which are entered in the bad blockJ descriptor file after the disk is searched = for bad blocks. The /EXERCISE- qualifier specifies the double word1 data pattern used to locate bad blocks.E /BADBLOCKS/NOEXERCISE Prompts you for additional bad blocks,9 which are entered in the bad block / descriptor file.F /[NO]EXERCISE[:(n,m)] Specifies the double word data pattern ) used to locate bad blocks.  < /OVERRIDE Ignores the last track information on4 a last-track device and creates a bad E block descriptor file on the last good; block before the last track.7 /RETRY Force I/O driver to retry bad blocksC /SHOW Lists bad block numbers as they are  located. 2 ERROR LOG #ERROR_LOG 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLANALER 2 CRASH_DUMP @DCLANALCD) APPEND[/qualifier[s]] infile[,s] outfile /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /ERROR_LOG< /EXCLUDE:filespec  /NOWARNINGS /REWIND /SHARED /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy* /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYD APPEND attaches to an existing sequential file records from one or D more sequential files. Note that APPEND does not delete the input D files. A copy of each input file is placed, in the order00\]DATADATADATADATADATADATADATA indicated/ in the command, at the end of the output file.A See HELP APPEND qualifier for help on that qualifier. See also & HELP CONVERT for nonsequential files.- Example: $ APPEND RAY.MAC,JAY.MAC LITE.MAC D Appends to output file LITE.MAC the input files RAY.MAC and JAY.MAC2 DATE) APPEND/DATE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileL Specifies that the operation is limited to input files from the given date.0 Example: $ APPEND/DATE:04-AUG-87 *.MAC PILL.MAC: Appends all .MAC files created on that date to PILL.MAC. 2 ERROR_LOG$ APPEND/ERROR_LOG[/DELETE] filespec J The APPEND/ERROR_LOG command appends the specified file to the end of theJ current log file. Error logging must be active for this command to work. F The /DELETE qualifier causes the Error Logger to delete the specified< file after it is copied to the end of the current log file.2 SINCE* APPEND/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileL Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on or after O the given date. Can be combined with /THROUGH. See also HELP APPEND THROUGH. Examples: - $ APPEND/SINCE:04-AUG-87 *.*;* ROMEO.TXTD Appends to ROMEOTXT all files created on or after that date.? $ APPEND/SINCE:08-OCT-87/THROUGH:10-OCT-87 *.TXT SIMON.TXTB Appends to SIMON.TXT all files included in the date range.2 THRU#THROUGH 2 THROUGH , APPEND/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileM Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on or before J the given date. Can be combined with /SINCE. See also HELP APPEND SINCE. Examples:5 $ APPEND/THROUGH:01-MAY-87 AURORA.* BOREALIS.SYM> Appends to BOREALIS.SYM all files named AURORA created on or  before that date. ? $ APPEND/SINCE:09-SEP-87/THROUGH:09-OCT-87 *.TXT RECORD.FILA Appends to RECORD.FIL all TXT files created in the date range. 2 TODAY APPEND/TODAY infile[,s] outfileN Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on the current date. Example  ! $ APPEND/TODAY RAT.* TAR.RAT6 Appends to TAR.RAT all files named RAT created today. 2 EXCLUDE+ APPEND/EXCLUDE:filespec infile[,s] outfileA Appends all input files to the output file, except for the file $ specified in the filespec argument. Example:  ) $ APPEND/EXCLUDE:*.OBJ RAY.* VAC.FILG Appends to VAC.FIL all files named RAY, with the exception of RAY.OBJ. 2 NOWARNINGS& APPEND/NOWARNINGS infile[,s] outfile Suppresses error messages.2 REWIND " APPEND/REWIND infile[,s] outfileF The /REWIND qualifier applies only to files that are on tape. This A qualifier rewinds the tape before starting an append operation.2 SHARED" APPEND/SHARED infile[,s] outfileE The /SHARED qualifier permits other users to access the input file  while you append it. 2 ERROR_LOG# APPEND/ERROR_LOG filespec[/DELETE]> APPEND/ERROR_LOG appends the specified file to the end of theI current Error Log File. Error Logging must be active for this qualifierE to work. The default is to keep the current Error Log File as well C as the appended file. The /DELETE qualifier deletes the specified? file after it has been appended to the current Error Log File. 5 ASSIGN[/qualifier[s]] equivalence_name logical_name  /FINAL /GLOBAL /GROUP[:g] /LOCAL /LOGIN /SYSTEM /TERMINAL[:TTnn:]! /TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES=TERMINAL- ASSIGN/TASK:taskname ddnn: logicalunitnumber" ASSIGN/REDIRECT oldddnn: newddnn:F The ASSIGN command equates a logical name to a physical device name, F to all or part of a file specification, or to another logical name. B All references to the logical name are resolved by the operating  system.00]\}? The equivalence name specifies the name of the device or file A? specification to which your are giving the logical name. The 3 equivalence name can also be another logical name.TA A logical name can contain any ASCII character. However, if it SD includes characters other than the letters A to Z, the numbers 0 toC 9, an underscore (_), a colon (:), or a dollar sign ($), you must cH place a quotation mark on each side of the logical name. For example, D although the logical name INFILE does not require quotation marks, @ you must specify the logical name C3PO* in the command line as "C3PO*".n@ For more information on the above qualifers, including TASK and& REDIRECT, type HELP ASSIGN qualifier. : For information about assigning queues to processors, see HELP ASSIGN QUEUE.r2 TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES#FINAL2 FINALr ASSIGN/FINAL(' ASSIGN/TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES=TERMINALaD Specifies that the equivalence name string should not be translatedE iteratively; that is, the logical name translation should terminate uC with the current equivalence string. The /TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES="< TERMINAL qualifier is synonymous with the /FINAL qualifier.2 SYSTEM#GLOBAL,2 GLOBAL- ASSIGN/GLOBAL equivalence_name logical_name s- ASSIGN/SYSTEM equivalence_name logical_name QG The /GLOBAL qualifier specifies that the logical name assignment apply/H to all tasks running in the system table. Only privileged terminals may define global assignments. 0 The /SYSTEM qualifier is a synonym for /GLOBAL.2 GROUPt/ ASSIGN/GROUP[:g] equivalence_name logical_nameTE The /GROUP qualifier specifies that the logical assignment apply to /8 all running tasks that have the specified group number.I The g argument is the User Identification Code (UIC) group number of theaL users who share the logical name. If you do not specify a group number, theN default is your own group number, which is taken from your current protectionG UIC. If you are nonprivileged, the group number is the same as the UIC ) that is assigned to you when you log in.i2 LOCALa- ASSIGN/LOCAL equivalence_name logical_name eF The /LOCAL qualifier specifies that the assignment is to be only for F your terminal. This is the default qualifier, so you do not need to specify it.G Commands and tasks initiated from your terminal can access devices or aA files through the logical names assigned to them. Note that no eH automatic deassignment occurs if you dismount a device after assigning  a logical name to it.2 LOGINt, ASSIGN/LOGIN equivalence_name logical_name D The /LOGIN qualifier specifies that the logical assignment be made E when you log in. Login assignments are usually established through H ACNT, the Account File Maintenance Program. However, the ASSIGN/LOGIN E command does not alter the account file. These logical names exist F for your account and are available to you regardless of the terminal  on which you log in.uA When a user issues a LOGIN command to log in to the system, the B system automatically assigns the logical name SY0: to the user's C system device, which is the device that contains the user's files.o4 Only privileged users may define login assignments. 2 REDIRECT" ASSIGN/REDIRECT oldddnn: newddnn:@ The ASSIGN/REDIRECT command redirects all I/O requests from oneE physical device to another physical device. Use this command when a J device is unavailable and another device can take its place. The devices need not be the same type. A The ASSIGN/REDIRECT command may only be issued from a privilegede terminal.- The following devices may not be redirected:t The pseudo device TI0:o An attached deviceu% A device containing a mounted volumeEH Note that spooled printers are attached devices. They can be redirectedC by reassigning the queues assigned to them. See HELP ASSIGN QUEUE.s2 TASK- ASSIGN/TASK:taskname ddnn: logicalunitnumberlC The ASSIGN/TASK command reassigns an installed task's logical unittF numbers (LUNs) from one physica00]^DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAl device to another. The reassignment< overrides the static LUN in the task's disk image file. TheE ASSIGN/REDIRECT command is used for dynamic device reconfiguration. cF The command does not affect memory-resident tasks. Hence, ASSIGN/TASKG has no effect on the assignments of a currently executing task, nor ont! a task that is fixed in memory. K< This command may be issued only from a privileged terminal. 2 TERMINAL5 ASSIGN/TERMINAL:ttnn: equivalence_name logical_name (@ The /TERMINAL qualifier applies the requested local assignment < to another terminal. This command may be issued only from a privileged terminal. 2 QUEUEm@DCLASSQ% ASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname > The ASSIGN/QUEUE command establishes a path from a queue to a processor. D You may assign a queue to more than one processor or assign several queues to the same processor. G When used in conjunction with the DEASSIGN/QUEUE command, ASSIGN/QUEUEG can be used to redirect jobs in a queue from one processor to another. See HELP DEASSIGN QUEUE.  @ BACKUP[/qualifier[,s]] inputdevice:[filespec[,s]] outputdevice:B The BACKUP command transfers a copy of files from a Files-11 disk> to tapes or other disks and restores the copy to the original< disk when you wish to retrieve the files. Its purpose is to@ safeguard against the loss or corruption of data. When a volumeA has been backed up, a copy will be available if any of the files/ on the original volume are lost or corrupted.  + Help is available on the following topics: - HELP BACKUP DISK Backing up files to a disk- HELP BACKUP TAPE Backing up files to a tape? HELP BACKUP COPY Backing up from one Files-11 disk to another HELP RESTORE Restoring files9 HELP BACKUP TABLE Correct combinations of /MOUNTED and - /INITIALIZE qualifiers used with BACKUP I See HELP BACKUP QUALIFIERS for a list qualifiers that backup and restoreA Files-11 volumes. For help on an individual qualifier, type HELP BACKUP qualifier. 2 TAPEJ To back up files to tape, you specify a single Files-11 disk as the inputH device and up to eight tape drives as the output devices; for example:  ( $ BACKUP DU0: MU0:,MU1: L If the number of volumes required for a backup operation exceeds the numberO of output devices specified, BACKUP prompts you to place additional volumes on% the specified drives one at a time.   2 DISKN To back up files to disk, you include the /IMAGE:SAVE qualifier to the BACKUPO command and specify a single Files-11 disk as the input device and up to eight2 disk drives as the output devices; for example: 3 $ BACKUP/IMAGE:SAVE DU0: DU1:,DU2: L If the number of volumes required for a backup operation exceeds the numberO of output devices specified, BACKUP prompts you to place additional volumes on% the specified drives one at a time. 2 COPYH To perform a disk-to-disk copy operation, you specify only one Files-11H disk as the input disk and only one Files-11 disk as the output device; for example:  " $ BACKUP DL0: DL1:H As the output device is a Files-11 disk, the files in disk-to-disk copy. operation such as this need not be restored.  2 TABLE 9 Use of /MOUNTED and /INITIALIZE Qualifiers : ____________________________________________6 Volume Mount Status MandatoryB Qualifier : ____________________________________________2 00\} Input disk Mounted foreign None6 Mounted Files-11 /MOUNTED9 Output disk Mounted foreign /INITIALIZE; Mounted Files-11 /NOINITIALIZE2 Input tape/ Mounted foreign None Output tapeB ____________________________________________________L See HELP BACKUP EXAMPLES for some command examples that back up and restore Files-11 volumes.2 AFTER#BEFORE2 BEFOREL The /BEFORE and /AFTER qualifiers are used with the /CREATED and /MODIFIED ? qualifiers. See HELP BACKUP CREATED and HELP BACKUP MODIFIED.2 APPEND BACKUP/APPEND source targetL Adds new data to a volume that already contains one or more backup sets. IfP only one volume is required to contain a single backup set, any space remainingM on that volume may be used for additional backup sets. However, if more thanO one volume is required and space remains on the last volume, this space cannotO be used for additional backup sets, because BACKUP cannot restore them. Use ofD the /APPEND qualifier is therefore restricted to the first volume.  M If the tape is not positioned at the beginning, the /APPEND qualifier causesE the output to be written at the point at which the tape is currentlyN positioned. If you want to begin writing at the logical end-of-tape, you mustN specify /APPEND/REWIND, which rewinds the tape and then spaces forward to the end of the volume.  H If the output device is a disk and you are using the /IMAGE qualifier, J /APPEND causes BACKUP to check the container file header for the logical L end-of-file on the output disk. BACKUP then starts writing at the logical  end-of-file.  M If the output disk is a continuation disk (that is, not the first disk in aM set) or if the last backup set does not end on the disk, BACKUP displays an  error message.  M You cannot use the /APPEND qualifier during a backup operation to a mounted  disk. 2 SAVE_SET# BACKUP/SAVE_SET:name source targetE The /SAVE_SET qualifier allows you to specify the name of the backupD set to be placed on the tape or disk. For tape and for an unmountedG disk, the default name is the volume name of the disk being backed up.D This name may be up to 12(10) characters long. For a mounted inputE or output disk during an image backup or restore operation, you can F specify the full backup set file name with the /BACKUP_SET qualifier.E If you do not specify the file name, the default is [0,0]BACKUP.SYS. G When applied to an output tape volume, the backup set name assigns theH name of the backup set being placed on the volume. Multiple backup sets" may be placed on a single volume.J If you do not specify a backup set name for the output volume, the volume7 name of the input disk is used to name the backup set.E When applied to an input tape volume, the first tape is searched forL the specified backup set name. If you do not specify a backup set name with@ the input volume, the first backup set on the tape is restored.C The first tape in the backup set is not rewound unless you specify /REWIND.L When this qualifier is applied to an input disk volume, BACKUP searches theF entire disk for each backup set you specify. Each backup set is then= restored in the order of the backup set names you provided. 2 OUTVOLUME#LABEL2 OUTPUT#LABEL 2 INVOLUME#LABEL2 INPUT#LABEL 2 TAPE_LABEL#LABEL2 LABEL BACKUP/LABEL:arg source target INPUT:volumelabel OUTPUT:volumelabel TAPE_LABEL:volume-IDE The /LABEL qualifier changes or checks volume labels and volume-IDs # for backup and restore operations. F The default is /LABEL:OUTPUT:volumelabel. This means you can specify? the volume label of the output disk with /LABEL:volumelabel.  2 These arguments to /LABEL are mutually exclusive.6 See HELP BACKUP LABEL labeltype for more information. 3 OUTVOLUME#OUTPUT3 OUTPUT 0 BACKUP/LABEL:[OUTPU00DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAT:]volumelabel source target K The /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier specifies the volume label of the output disk.1 This label can be up to 12 characters in length. F The default is /LABEL:OUTPUT:volumelabel. This means you can specify? the volume label of the output disk with /LABEL:volumelabel. F For disk-to-tape backup operations, the name of the input disk volumeG stored on the output tape volume is changed to the name specified with the /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier. G For tape-to-disk restore operations or for disk-to-disk transfers, theE name of the output disk volume is changed to the name specified with the /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier. 3 INVOLUME#INPUT3 INPUT- BACKUP/LABEL:INPUT:volumelabel source target I The /LABEL:INPUT qualifier specifies the volume label of the input disk.+ This name can be up to 12 characters long. F For disk-to-tape or disk-to-disk operations, the volume label of the G input volume is checked to verify that the disk has the correct label.= This check ensures that you do not back up the wrong volume. K For restore operations, BACKUP checks the volume label of the disk that is" stored in the backup set on tape. 3 TAPE_LABEL . BACKUP/LABEL:TAPE_LABEL:vol-ID source target L The /LABEL:TAPE_LABEL qualifier specifies the 6-character volume identifierG on the ANSI VOL1 label to be placed on the tape during a backup opera-I tion or to be compared with the label on the tape for append and restoreE operations. This allows you to verify that you are using the correct tape. 2 BADBLOCKS0 BACKUP/INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS[:arg] source target' AUTOMATIC MANUAL OVERRIDEL The /BADBLOCKS qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during tape$ to disk or disk to disk operations.F For last-track devices, AUTOMATIC causes the manufacturer's bad-blockD information and the software-detected bad sector file to be used toE create BADBLK.SYS. For nonlast-track devices, the software bad-block/ descriptor block is used to create BADBLK.SYS.D OVERRIDE applies only to last-track devices, causing the last-trackG device to appear to be a nonlast-track device. When OVERRIDE is speci-D fied, BACKUP uses the software bad block descriptor block to create BADBLK.SYS.E MANUAL specifies that both the manufacturer-written bad-block infor-C mation and either the software-detected bad sector file or the badB block descriptor block be used to create BADBLK.SYS. Also, MANUALH accepts the addresses of bad blocks entered manually from the terminal. 2 ACCESSED2 BACKUP/INITIALIZE/ACCESSED:fcbcount source targetG The /ACCESSED qualifier specifies the number of directory File ControlG Blocks (FCBs) per volume kept in memory by the ACP. The more FCBs thatF are kept in memory, the faster the files are found. The default value> for 'fcbcount' is the same as the default for the input disk.F The /ACCESSED qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape to disk or disk to disk operations. 2 COMPARE& BACKUP/COMPARE:[option] source target :SINGLE_BUFFER :DOUBLE_BUFFERG The /COMPARE qualifier causes the data on the output device to be com-B pared with the data on the input device and any differences to beD reported. No data transfer takes place during a /COMPARE operation.A Specifying the DOUBLE_BUFFER option, which can only be used withD MU-type tape devices and for backup sets that contain one tape, mayC improve the performance of streaming tape devices such as the TK50C cartridge tape by double buffering I/O operations. Specifying theD SINGLE_BUFFER option causes BACKUP to single buffer I/O operations,> which was the default action for versions of BACKUP prior to version 4.1.G The command string specifying the /COMPARE operation must be identicalE to that entered when the data on the output volume was created, with? the exception of the /INITIALIZE and /NOINITIALIZE qualifiers. 2 CREATED;00\} BACKUP/CREATED/BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm[:ss]) source target, /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm[:ss])B The /CREATED qualifier allows you to select for backup or restoreE operations, files created on or before, or after the specified date and time.H If you specify both a date and time, the date and time must be enclosedF in parentheses. If you specify only a date or only a time, the paren-F theses are not necessary. If you specify only a time, today's date is used. 1 /BEFORE and /AFTER are also used with /MODIFIED. 2 DENSITY BACKUP/DENSITY:n source targetF The /DENSITY qualifier specifies the density at which a magnetic tape2 is to be written. The following are legal values: 800 1600 6250F If you specify /DENSITY with /APPEND, you must specify the density atD which the old tape data was written. If you specify a density otherC than the original density, a warning message will be displayed and1 processing will continue at the correct density.F If you specify an incorrect density for a restore operation, an error6 message is displayed and the operation is terminated. 2 DIRECTORY BACKUP/NOINITIALIZE/DIRECTORYL The /DIRECTORY qualifer directs BACKUP to create directorys (if they do notM already exist) on a mounted output volume, then copy into the directorys theJ files from the same directory on the input volume. If you do not specifyD /DIRECTORY, BACKUP does not copy the file. /DIRECTORY is used only" with the /NOINITIALIZE qualifier.2 LIST BACKUP/LIST source! BACKUP/SAVE_SET:name/LIST source> The /LIST qualifier can be used to list the backup sets on a . volume, or to list the files in a backup set.C When specified with no backup set name, /LIST lists all the backupE sets on the volume. If a continuation tape is mounted when you enterG the command, only the backup sets on that volume, and not those on theG first or previous volumes, are listed. The continuation tape number is also listed.= When used in conjunction with the /SAVE_SET qualifier, /LISTB causes the files in the specified backup set to be listed. If theE backup set is not on the tape, an error message is displayed and the operation is terminated.2 NOLOG#LOG2 LOG BACKUP/[NO]LOG source targetM The /[NO]LOG qualifier causes the file name and directory of each file being3 transferred to be printed. The default is /NOLOG. 2 ERROR_LIMIT BACKUP/ERROR_LIMIT:nG The /ERROR_LIMIT qualifier requests termination of a restore operation9 after the specified number of nonfatal tape read errors. The default is /ERROR_LIMIT:25. 2 EXAMPLES4 Example of a complete disk copy to a 1600 bpi tape: $ BACKUP/DENSITY:1600 DB2: MM0:E Example of a copy from tape to disk, initializing the disk and using prompting: $ BACKUP/DENSITY:1600 From? MM1: To? DK2:# INITIALIZE THE OUTPUT DISK? YESE Example of a disk to disk transfer from a mounted disk, initializing the output disk: $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/MOUNTED From? DB0: To? DB3:- Example of a multiple disk backup operation:3 $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:SAVE/VERIFY/MOUNT From? DL0: To? DY0:. Example of a multiple disk restore operation:0 $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:RESTORE/VERIFY From? DL0: To? DY0: 2 EXCLUDE) BACKUP/EXCLUDE ddnn:filespec targetddnn:F The /EXCLUDE qualifier specifes that files matching the file specifi-B cation in the source field be excluded from the backup or restore operation. 2 EXTENSION, BACKUP/INITIALIZE/EXTENSION:n source targetG The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the default number of blocks a fileC will be extended when that file has exhausted its allocated space.E The /EXTENSION qualifier is used in conjunction with the /INITIALIZE: qualifier during tape to disk or disk to disk operations. 2 HEADERS* BACKUP/INITIALIZE/HEADERS:n source targetH The /HEADERS qualifier specifies the number of file headers to allocateG initial00DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAly to the index file. The primary reason for preallocating fileG headers is to locate them near the storage bit map file. Proper place-H ment of file headers can help reduce head motion during I/O operations.C The /HEADERS qualifier is used in conjunction with the /INITIALIZE; qualifier during tape to disk and disk to disk operations. 2 INITIALIZE #NOINITIALIZE2 LENGTH BACKUP/LENGTH:n source targetG The /LENGTH qualifier specifies the length of the output tape in deci-F mal feet. If the length specified exceeds the length of the tape, theG entire length of the output tape will be used. In cases where you knowG the end of the tape must not be used, you can specify a shorter lengthI to ensure that you do not write on that part of the tape. This qualifierG cannot be used with cartridge tape devices, such as the TK25 and TK50.2 MAXIMUM_FILES0 BACKUP/INITIALIZE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n source targetL The /MAXIMUM_FILES qualifier specifies the maximum number of files that canF be placed on a volume, as determined by the number of file headers inF the volume's index file. The default maximum is the maximum number of files on the input disk. 2 MOUNTED BACKUP/MOUNTED source targetG The /MOUNTED qualifier allows you to back up or restore files that are0 on volumes that are mounted as File-11 volumes.D Normally, both the source and target devices are mounted as foreignD devices, but by using the /MOUNTED qualifier, the source device mayH be mounted as a Files-11 device. However, files being transfered should4 not be modified while the transfer is taking place. 2 NEW_VERSIONi! BACKUP/NEW_VERSION source targetrF The /NEW_VERSION qualifier resolves file specification conflicts thatH occur during restore operations and during backups to mounted disk whenE using the /IMAGE:SAVE qualifier. When a file already exists on the iI output disk volume, /NEW VERSION creates a new version of the file. YouG cannot specify the /NEW_VERSION and /VERIFY qualifiers together in the 0 same command line; they are mutually exclusive.4 See HELP BACKUP REPLACE for alternative qualifiers.2 IMAGEe+ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:SAVE source targett :RESTORE@ /IMAGE specifies that you want to do a multivolume disk-to-diskB backup or restore operation. If you are doing a backup operationC you must specify the SAVE option on the command line. If you wantnB to do a restore operation, you must specify the RESTORE option on the command line.? If you want to do a backup operation, you must use /IMAGE:SAVEpB when you create the backup file that represents the image copy ofC the input disk or disks. For example, this qualifier must be useduB when you copy a large disk to several small disks, or if you copy- several small disks to a mounted large disk.lC If you want to do a restore operation, you must use /IMAGE:RESTOREA when restoring from a backup file that represents the image copy  of the original disk.2 NOINITIALIZE BACKUP/INITIALIZE source target" BACKUP/NOINITIALIZE source targetD The /INITIALIZE qualifier specifies that you want to initialize theG output volume during a tape to disk or disk to disk operation. Initia-tE lization places a Files-11 structure on the disk, including the bootu6 block, the home block, and the required system files.J Along with the /INITIALIZE qualifier, you can specify one or more of the F following qualifier(s) when you are initializing a disk: /BADBLOCKS, L /ACCESSED, /EXTENSION, /HEADERS, /MAXIMUM_FILES, /INDEX, /FILE_PROTECTION, K and /WINDOWS. If you do not specify any of these qualifiers, the defaults o of the input disk are used.H /NOINITIALIZE specifies that you do not want to initialize the disk; itG already has a Files-11 structure. The output disk must be mounted as a_G Files-11 volume. You cannot enter any of the initialization qualifiersy- listed above when you specify /NOINITIALIZE.QG When you are restoring to a mounted volume, the file system is used to_F access the ou00\}tput device. Therefore, a restore operation to a mounted8 volume is slower than a restore to an unmounted volume. 2 NOPRESERVE BACKUP/NOPRESERVE source targetE The /NOPRESERVE qualifier specifies that you do not want to preserve file-IDs. eG When file-IDs are not preserved, new file-IDs are assigned starting at_ 6 and incremented sequentially. 2 SUPERSEDE#REPLACE 2 NOSUPERSEDEP#REPLACE 2 NOREPLACEa#REPLACE 2 POSITION#INDEX2 INDEX10 BACKUP/INITIALIZE/INDEX:BEGINNING source target MIDDLE ENDf neD The /INDEX qualifier specifies where on the output volume the indexD file is to be placed. This qualifier can be used to force the indexF file, the Master File Directory, and the storage allocation file to a@ specific location on the disk, usually to minimize access time.J The default location is at the same location as that on the input disk. 2 PROTECTION#FILE_PROTECTION2 FILE_PROTECTIONi7 BACKUP/INITIALIZE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) source targetL The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for all newC files created on the disk after the backup transfer has completed.eA Each access code consists of a positional keyword specifying theDH protection group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) followed by a 4-code- group specifying the protection, as follows:e R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to fileR E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deletedeE If this qualifier is not specified, the defaults from the input disk are used.& The default system protection code is, (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER,RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) 2 QUALIFIERS1 The following qualifers can be used with BACKUP: G /ACCESSED:n /FILE_PROTECTION:(code) /MODIFIED/AFTER:datehH /APPEND /HEADERS:n /MODIFIED/BEFORE:date; /BADBLOCKS[:arg] /IDENTIFICATION /MOUNTED? /COMPARE[:option] /IMAGE:arg /NEW_VERSIONo> /CREATED/AFTER:date /INDEX:arg /NOPRESERVE: /CREATED/BEFORE:date /[NO]INITIALIZE /REWINDC /DENSITY:arg /LABEL:arg /VERIFY:[option]t= /DIRECTORY /LENGTH:n /WINDOWS:n  /ERRORLIMIT:n /LIST! /EXCLUDE /[NO]LOGc) /EXTENSION /MAXIMUM_FILES:nu>For more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP BACKUP qualifier.2 IDENTIFICATIONMThe /IDENTIFICATION qualifier directs BACKUP to identify itself by displayinge5the version number of the Backup and Restore Utility.pG 2 REVISEDd #MODIFIEDu 2 MODIFIED< BACKUP/MODIFIED/BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm[:ss]) source target /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm[:ss])C The /MODIFIED qualifier allows you to select for backup or restorehB files revised on or before, or after the specified date and time.H If you specify both a date and time, the date and time must be enclosedF in parentheses. If you specify only a date or only a time, the paren-F theses are not necessary. If you specify only a time, today's date is used.0 /BEFORE and /AFTER are also used with /CREATED.2 REWIND BACKUP/REWIND source targetF The /REWIND qualifier causes the first magnetic tape of a tape set to; be rewound before executing a backup or restore operation.iE When specified with an input tape, the first tape of the tape set isU/ rewound before it is searched for backup sets.UG When specified with /APPEND, the first tape of the tape set is rewound:D and then searched for the logical end of the last backup set before executing the backup operation. 2 REPLACE BACKUP/REPLACE source targetoF The /REPLACE qualifier specifies that when file specifications on theD output volume are identical to the file specifications on the inputG volume, the file on the output volume is deleted and replaced with theA file from the input volume.F For an /IMAGE operation, if you create a backup set file on a mounted00_`DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAE volume, and a file with the same name exists, /REPLACE replaces thiss file.A The default is /NOREPLACE. No files are deleted, but a warning i message is issued.d: See HELP BACKUP NEW_VERSION for an alternative qualifier. 2 TAPE_LABEL BACKUP/TAPE_LABEL source targetF The /TAPE_LABEL qualifier specifies the 6-character volume identifierG on the ANSI VOL1 label to be placed on the tape during a backup opera-aH tion or to be compared with the label on the tape on append and restoreH operations. This allows you to verify that you have mounted the correct tape.2 VERIFY% BACKUP/VERIFY:[option] source target/ :DOUBLE_BUFFER :SINGLE_BUFFERF The /VERIFY qualifier specifies that after data transfer is complete,E the input and output volumes be compared to verify that the transfer  was carried out successfully.A Specifying the DOUBLE_BUFFER option, which can only be used with D MU-type tape devices, may improve the performance of streaming tape@ devices such as the TK50 cartridge tape by double buffering I/OI operations. Specifying the SINGLE_BUFFER option causes BACKUP to single D buffer I/O operations, which was the default action for versions of BACKUP prior to version 4.1.uK You cannot specify the /NEW_VERSION and /VERIFY qualifiers together in them0 same command line; they are mutually exclusive. 2 WINDOWSd* BACKUP/INITIALIZE/WINDOWS:n source targetH The /WINDOWS qualifier specifies the default number of mapping pointersH to be allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number of= pointers which are stored in memory when the file is opened. F The default number of mapping pointers is the same as the default for the input disk. s BASIC[/BP2]BASIC/USING:taskname FThe BASIC command invokes PDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2, a layered productDsupported on RSX-11M-PLUS systems. The system manager may haveFinstalled BASIC-PLUS-2 with a name other than BP2. In this case youAmust use the BASIC/USING:taskname command, where taskname is theFthree-character name for BASIC-PLUS-2 assigned by the system manager.  FHELP is available on BASIC-PLUS-2 concepts, statements, functions, and@commands. You can get HELP both at the DCL command level and@within the BASIC environment. For BASIC-PLUS-2 V2.0, HELP topics(available at the DCL command level are: ?ARRAYS CHARACTER COMMANDS COMMENTS CONSTANTSBCONVENTIONS DATA_TYPES DEBUGGER DIRECTIVES EXPRESSIONS@HELP IMMEDIATE LABELS LINE MODIFIERS%QUALIFIERS STATEMENTS VARIABLESCHELP on these topics, plus associated subtopics, also is available within the BASIC environment. FTo access HELP text from the DCL command level, type: >HELP/BP2 topic.FTo access HELP files within the BASIC environment, first invoke BASIC=with the proper command and then type HELP in response to theBASIC-PLUS-2 prompt.  BROADCAST ttnn: message' BROADCAST[/qualifier] message username /ALL /LOGGED_IN BROADCAST @indirectfilespecI The BROADCAST command sends a one-line message to one or more terminals.C By default, the message is sent to the system console (CO0:), see  also HELP REQUEST. G The /ALL qualifier specifies that the message be sent to all terminals/ in the system. This is a privileged qualifier.C The /LOGGED_IN qualifier specifies that the message be sent to allB00`abc} terminals currently logged on in the system. This is a privileged qualifier.D Nonprivileged users can send messages to multiple terminals throughE an indirect command file containing lines in the form: ttnn:message.= Users can send messages to other users by name as well as by terminal number. CANCEL tasknameD The CANCEL command cancels the clock queue entries of an installed G task. A task's entries are placed in the clock queue through the RUN$D directive or any of the time-synchronized variations of the DCL RUND command. Note that CANCEL does not affect a task that is currently executing. ? Nonprivileged users can only cancel the entries of a task that@ initiated at the same terminal from which the CANCEL command is? issued. Privileged users can cancel any clock queue entries.  @ CREATE/CFL[/qualifier[s]] sourcefile[/[NO]OPTIONS] [symbolfile]- /[NO]INTERMEDIATE_FORM[:formfile] /[NO]LIST[:listfile]$ /[NO]SYMBOL[:symbolfile] /[NO]OPTIONSC The CREATE/CFL command invokes the Control File Language compiler E (CFL) and allows you to create intermediate form modules (IFORM) to 9 support non-DIGITAL devices in the Error Logging system.H The /[NO]INTERMEDIATE_FORM qualifier creates or suppresses creation of F an IFORM (object) file. The default file name is sourcefile.ICF. ToE change the default file name, use the formfile argument and specify 8 the file name. The default is to create an IFORM file.C The /[NO]LIST qualifier creates a compiler listing file, with the H default file name sourcefile.LST. Use the listfile argument to change  the default file name.C The /[NO]SYMBOL qualifier creates a symbol file, with the default F file name sourcefile.SYM. Use the symbolfile argument to change the  default file name.C The /OPTIONS file qualifier causes the CFL compiler to prompt for * option lines. The default is /NOOPTIONS." COBOL/C11[/qualifier[s]] filespec Command Qualifiers. /[NO]ANSI_FORMAT /TEMP:dev+ /[NO]CHECK /[NO]SKELETONa /[NO]CM6 /[NO]SUBPROGRAM 6 /[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE /[NO]SHOW:arg' /LARGE_SYMBOL_TABLE:n COPY_LISTs /[NO]LIST[:filespec] MAP A /NAMES:xx VERB_LOCATION  /NEXT:n' /[NO]OBJECT[:filespec /[NO]WARNINGSA /[NO]OVERLAY o /[NO]POOL_LITERALS  /[NO]READ_ONLY ] ? The COBOL command invokes the C81 compiler. COBOL/C11 invokes the PDP-11 COBOL compiler. ? For information on the PDP-11 COBOL command qualifiers, type: C HELP COBOL C11 qualifier+ For information on the C81 compiler, type: HELP COBOL 3 NOLIST#LIST 3 LIST COBOL/C11/[NO]LIST[:filespec] A= The /LIST qualifier specifies that a compiler listing should]G be generated. The listing file appears in your directory. The L> def00c `DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAault is /NOLIST, meaning no compiler listing is generated.B If you do not supply a file specification for this qualifier, the< listing has a file name derived from the name of the source@ file with a file type .LST. If you want the listing to have a G different name, supply the name as an argument to the /LIST qualifier.I? If your command line includes the /CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier, i, /LIST is implied and need not be specified.B If your command line includes listing-control arguments to either> /SHOW or /NOSHOW, /LIST is implied and need not be specified.G The only time you need to use /LIST with /CROSS_REFERENCE or /[NO]SHOWsD is when you want to give the listing file a filespec other than the default. y3 OBJECT #NOOBJECTh NOOBJECTf! COBOL/C11/[NO]OBJECT[:filespec] aB The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that an object file be generated.C If a filespec is not specified, the object file will have the samec? name as the source file in your command, with a type of .OBJ. s This is the default.NF The /NOOBJECT qualifier inhibits generation of an object file and the skeleton file.w 3 NOCHECKF#CHECK3 CHECKO COBOL/C11/[NO]CHECK filespechD The /CHECK qualifier verifies that subscripts and indexes are used $ correctly. /CHECK is the default. A The /NOCHECK qualifier suppresses this checking, which increasesi@ execution speed for programs with a large number of subscripted or indexed references. 3 CM6s#NOCM63 NOCM6r COBOL/C11/[NO]CM6 filespec.G The /CM6 qualifier specifies that you wish the compiler to change all oE COMPUTATIONAL references to COMPUTATIONAL-6. The default is /NOCM6.C3 CROSS_REFERENCEC#NOCROSS_REFERENCE3 NOCROSS_REFERENCEe' COBOL/C11/[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE filespec @ The /CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier specifies that a cross-referenceJ listing be included as part of the listing files. The /CROSS_REFERENCE = qualifier leaves the listing file in your current directory.M? /CROSS_REFERENCE implies /LIST. You need to include the /LISTl? qualifier only if you wish to establish a name for the listingU, file different from the source file named. # The default is /NOCROSS_REFERENCE. 3 ANSI_FORMATN#NOANSI_FORMAT3 NOANSI_FORMATL# COBOL/C11/[NO]ANSI_FORMAT filespecTD The /ANSI_FORMAT qualifier specifies that the source program is in L conventional format (that is, 80-character images with Area A beginning in 7 character position 8). The default is /NOANSI_FORMAT./ 3 WARNINGS #NOWARNINGSL 3 NOWARNINGS COBOL/C11/[NO]WARNINGS filespecB The /WARNINGS qualifier specifies that you wish both warning and F fatal diagnostics printed in the listing. The /NOWARNINGS qualifier I specifies that you wish only fatal diagnostics printed in the listing. TG The default is to print informational, warning, and fatal diagnostics. 3 NAMESc COBOL/C11/NAMES:xx filespecA The /NAMES qualifier instructs the compiler to generate program TC section names using the two character kernel, specified by xx, to SF make them unique to this compilation. xx is a two character string F that may contain the numbers 0 through 9 and the letters A through Z.3 SHOW#NOSHOWR3 NOSHOW4COBOL/C11/[NO]SHOW:(arg[,s]) filespec/[NO]SHOW(:arg) COPY_LIST MAP VERB_LOCATIONA The /SHOW qualifier specifies elements you want included in the @ listing file; the /NOSHOW qualifier specifies elements you want? excluded from the listing file. If you specify only a single aB argument, the parentheses are not needed. Your command line can include both /SHOW and /NOSHOW.F /SHOW implies /LIST, but if you wish the listing file to have a name 2 other than the default, you must still use /LIST.C /SHOW as a command qualifier causes the file to be printed on the RG line printer; /SHOW as a filespec qualifier prevents the listing file n from being printed. ; For additional help, see HELP COBOL C11 [NO]SHOW argument.m4 MAPs COBOL/C11/[NO]SHOW:MAP filespecE The /SHOW:MAP qualifier produces the following spec00c(bc}ial map listings:  Data Division Procedure Map" Data and Control Program Sections OTS Routines Referenced Segmentation Mapr The default is /NOSHOW:MAPl 4 COPY_LIST& COBOL/C11/[NO]SHOW:COPY_LIST filespecD The /NOSHOW:COPY_LIST qualifier instructs the compiler not to list H the source statements copied from a library file. The resultant source ; listing contains only the COPY statement. The default is L /SHOW:COPY_LIST.i4 VERB_LOCATIONH* COBOL/C11/[NO]SHOW:VERB_LOCATION filespecG The /SHOW:VERB_LOCATION qualifier specifies that you wish the listing aF file to include the location of the code for each program verb. The E information is listed on the line preceding the source statement it c2 describes. The default is /NOSHOW:VERB_LOCATION. 3 NOSKELETON #SKELETONe 3 SKELETON COBOL/C11/[NO]SKELETONyG The /SKELETON qualifier specifies that you want the compiler to createhB a skeleton Overlay Description Language (.SKL) file. This is theB default operation. The file is named after the file named in theD COBOL/C11 command, with the file type .SKL. If you do not want the, the .SKL file created, specify /NOSKELETON.3 NOSUBPROGRAM #SUBPROGRAMe 3 SUBPROGRAM COBOL/C11/[NO]SUBPROGRAMr sF The /SUBPROGRAM qualifier tells the compiler to treat the source fileG as a subprogram. You should use this qualifier only if the subprogramtD does not use parameters from the main program; that is, if it does- contain the Procedure Division USING header.eC The /NOSUBPROGRAM tells the compiler to treat the source as a maina program. This is the default.y3 TEMP COBOL/C11/TEMP:ddnneE The /TEMP qualifier tells the compiler to store the temporary work ME files it uses during program compilation on the device you specify.eF Since the default is the system disk (SY:), this qualifier is useful1 if there is little system disk space available. 3 OVERLAYf #NOOVERLAY 3 NOOVERLAYa COBOL/C11/[NO]OVERLAY filespeceF The /OVERLAY qualifier instructs the compiler to make all procedural 7 program sections overlayable by keeping the proceduralt$ statements out of the root section.  /[NO]OVERLAY is the default.o3 POOL_LITERALSh#NOPOOL_LITERALS3 NOPOOL_LITERALSu% COBOL/C11/[NO]POOL_LITERALS filespecuN The /POOL_LITERALS qualifier directs the COBOL compiler to automatically pool8 literals to minimize the memory required to store them.E Since pooling literals slows down the speed of the compilation, you T- can specify /NOPOOL_LITERALS to speed it up.  The default is /POOL_LITERALS.i 3 READ_ONLYl #NOREAD_ONLY 3 NOREAD_ONLY! COBOL/C11/[NO]READ_ONLY filespecL The /READ_ONLY qualifier directs the compiler to generate read-only programK sections for the procedure division object modules. The default status is uD /NOREAD_ONLY, which means that these object modules are read/write.3 LARGE_SYMBOL_TABLE:n* COBOL/C11/LARGE_SYMBOL_TABLE[:n] filespecJ The /LARGE_SYMBOL_TABLE qualifier allows you to obtain more symbol table G space for the compilation. The value for n can be any integer from 1 RMthrough 4. The default is 1. Here are the results of using this qualifier: L Maximum Maximumt5 n Data Names Procedure Namesr: (approximate) (approximate) 1 761 761s 2 1021 1021t 3 1531 1531/ 4 2039 2039Y3 NEST:n  COBOL/C11/NEST:nSA The /NEST qualifier allows you to specify the maximum number of E nested PERFORM statements in the program. The compiler generates a eC nested PERFORM stack equal in depth to the decimal number n. The r default is 10. 00d01DATADATADATADATADATADATADATA% CONTINUE[/TERMINAL:ddnn:] [taskname]G The CONTINUE command resumes execution of a previously suspended task.C Note that continuing a suspended task is different from starting a stopped one.H If a task name is not specified, the task running at your terminal that/ was initiated by the RUN command is continued.? The /TERMINAL qualifier allows a privileged user to continue a7 suspended task that is running on some other terminal.& CONVERT[/qualifier[s]] infile outfile /[NO]APPEND /BLOCK_SIZE:n /[NO]FIXED_CONTROL /[NO]IDENTIFICATION /INDEXED /KEY[:n] /[NO]LOG_FILE[:filespec] /[NO]MASS_INSERT /MERGE /[NO]PAD[:[#]arg] /RELATIVE /[NO]REPLACE /SEQUENTIAL /[NO]TRUNCATED The CONVERT command invokes the RMSCNV utility which moves records H from one file to another. RMSCNV reads records from an input file and A writes them to an output file. The action of RMSCNV depends on @ the organization -- sequential, relative, or indexed -- of the F two files and on the qualifiers you include in the CONVERT command. D See HELP CONVERT qualifier, HELP CONVERT FILESPEC, and HELP CONVERTD EXAMPLES for additional information. Also see the main text and the0 RMS-11 documentation supplied with your system.2 INFILE #FILESPECc 2 OUTFILEo #FILESPEC 2 FILESPEC& CONVERT[/qualifier[s]] infile outfile infilenG Specifies the file that is the source of records to be written to the eG output file. CONVERT reads input records sequentially, regardless of aA the organization of the input file. No wildcards are permitted.H outfileH Specifies the file that is to receive the records from the input file. F The default file organization for the output file is sequential. If B the output file is not sequential, use the /RELATIVE or /INDEXED F qualifier to indicate the organization. If the output file is to be E sequential, CONVERT can create the file; it need not exist prior to F your entering the CONVERT command. CONVERT cannot create indexed or E relative files; these must have been created prior to your entering 4 the CONVERT command. No wildcards are permitted. 2 NOAPPEND#APPEND 2 APPEND" CONVERT/[NO]APPEND infile outfile< Directs RMSCNV to append records to the end of an existing G sequential file. If the output file is not sequential, RMSCNV ignorestE the qualifier. You cannot use both /APPEND and /REPLACE in the same  command line. C The default is /NOAPPEND. If you both use this default and specifyrE /REPLACE in the command line, RMSCNV performs the replace operation;oF that is, it supersedes the existing sequential file. However, if youC do not specify /REPLACE, RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the file. SA This qualifier is the equivalent of the /AP switch in an RMSCNV I command line. 2 BLOCK_SIZE$ CONVERT/BLOCK_SIZE:n infile outfileE Specifies the physical block size of an output file being created on H magtape, where n can be from 18 through 8192 characters. RMSCNV roundsE this value up to the next multiple of 4. If you do not specify this; qualifier, the default tape block size is 512 characters. rA This qualifier is the equivalent of the /BL switch in an RMSCNV r command line.2 NOFIXED_CONTROLl#FIXED_CONTROL2 FIXED_CONTROLP) CONVERT/[NO]FIXED_CONTROL infile outfileL7 The /FIXED_CONTROL qualifier directs RMSCNV to handle sF variable-with-fixed-control (VFC) format records in either the input G file or the output file. If the fixed-control area of the input file uI and the output file are the same size, RMSCNV performs a straightforwardhB copy operation. See the RMS-11 documentation supplied with your F system for information on how RMSCNV handles other combinations. If K you include this qualifier and neither file specifies VFC records, RMSCNV f terminates.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /WF switch in an RMSCNV - command line.G The default is /NOFIXED_CONTROL. 008bc} This means that if one of the named F files contains VFC records, the fixed-control area of each record is C ignored. That is, if the input file includes VFC records and the C output file does not, only the variable portion of each record is E written to the output file; if the output file includes VFC records fE and the input file does not, data is written only into the variable T portion of each output record.f2 NOIDENTIFICATION#IDENTIFICATIONa2 IDENTIFICATION* CONVERT/[NO]IDENTIFICATION infile outfileG Requests that RMSCNV print its current version number and patch level F on your terminal. See the RMSCNV documentation for more information.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /ID switch in an RMSCNV 1 command line. The default is /NOIDENTIFICATION.h 2 INDEXEDl CONVERT/INDEXED infile outfileeJ The /INDEXED qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of indexed B organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files  are read sequentially. FF RMSCNV reads each record from the input file, then applies the outputG file's record format, that is, the key placement within the record, tonF the data. If you do not specify the /KEY qualifier with a value, theB key of reference is the primary key; otherwise, it is the key you specify. E This qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:IDX switch in an RMSCNV  command line.2 KEYf CONVERT/KEY[:n] infile outfile.G Indicates the key that establishes the order in which records are readyB sequentially from an indexed input file and written to the outputG file; n can be a number from 0 to 9. The default is n=0 and indicatesrB the primary key; n=1 is the first alternate key; n=9 is the ninth alternate key. A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /KR switch in an RMSCNV e command line. 2 NOLOG_FILE #LOG_FILEn 2 LOG_FILE/ CONVERT/[NO]LOG_FILE[:filespec] infile outfilefA Directs RMSCNV to summarize processing in a log. If you do not sG include a filespec, the log appears on your terminal. If you name a n8 file, RMSCNV creates and writes to that file. The log ! includes the following elements: A The command string in RMSCNV format. This will not be the same  as DCL format.t a8 Copies of all error messages produced during execution.= An indication of any duplicate-key problems. If the log is @ appearing on the terminal, the indications consist only of the  following message:i$ SOME DUPLICATE RECORDS NOT WRITTENF If the log is being written to a file, RMSCNV supplies the indicator G DUP RCD= followed by the first 72 characters of the record that could  not be written.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /SL switch in an RMSCNV e command line.D The default is /NOLOG, which means that only normal error messages  appear on your terminal.t2 NOMASS_INSERTI #MASS_INSERT 2 MASS_INSERT ' CONVERT/[NO]MASS_INSERT infile outfileyE Directs RMSCNV to activate the RMS-11 mass insert I/O technique and F then use sequential put operations to insert records into the output  file.D This is the equivalent of the /MA switch in an RMSCNV command line.E The default for nonsequential file organization is /NOMASS_INSERT. M2 MERGEm CONVERT/MERGE infile outfileNK Directs RMSCNV to copy records from the input file into the output file. / Both files must be of the same organization. C2 NOPADO#PAD2 PADi$ CONVERT/PAD[:[#]arg] infile outfileO Directs RMSCNV to adjust the length of the input file. As each input record isiN copied, RMSCNV adds extra characters (called "pad" characters) to the record.L The padding is done after the record is read from the input file and before* the record is written to the output file. N Use this qualifier only when the output file specifies fixed-length records. D If you specify the qualifier without an argument, the pad character? is blank (40). If you do not include the number sign (#), thetE argument can be any printing ASCII character except the number sign, B question mark (?), or com00@1DATADATADATADATADATADATADATAmercial at-sign (@). If you include the> number sign (#), n can be any octal number between 0 and 377,D representing the full ASCII character set. This enables you to useE the three excluded characters as pad characters by specifying 43 forc #, 77 for ?, and 100 for @. I This qualifier is the equivalent of the /PD switch in an RMSCNV command n line. 2 RELATIVE CONVERT/RELATIVE infile outfileC The /RELATIVE qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of nK relative organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files e are read sequentially. tF The /RELATIVE qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:REL switch in an RMSCNV command line. > RMSCNV reads records from the input file and writes them intoG successive record cells of the output file, beginning with cell 1. IfnD RMSCNV encounters a cell containing a record, it terminates with anD error message. All records written to that point are in the output@ file. You should examine the two files to determine how far the processing went. 2 NOREPLACEf#REPLACE 2 REPLACEu# CONVERT/[NO]REPLACE infile outfilei@ The /REPLACE qualifier directs RMSCNV to supersede an existing E sequential file. RMSCNV replaces a file in the output account with H the same file name, type, and version number. You cannot use /REPLACE & and /APPEND in the same command line.F The /REPLACE qualifier is the equivalent of /SU in an RMSCNV command  line.E The default is /NOREPLACE, but the default action depends on whetherwF the command line includes an /APPEND or not. If you specify /APPEND,F RMSCNV performs the append operation. If you do not specify /APPEND,6 RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the file. 2 SEQUENTIAL" CONVERT/SEQUENTIAL infile outfileE The /SEQUENTIAL qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of /M sequential organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files fM are read sequentially. The default output file organization for RMSCNV is l sequential. M This qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:SEQ switch in an RMSCNV command N line. NL If you do not specify either the /APPEND or /REPLACE qualifier, the output : file need not exist before you issue the CONVERT command.G If the output file does not exist, RMSCNV creates the output file with M the record attributes of the input file. RMSCNV then reads records from thegC input file and writes them sequentially into the new output file. uE If the output file already exists, and the command does not include F the /APPEND qualifier, RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the F file. RMSCNV then reads records from the input file and writes them 6 sequentially into the new version of the output file.I If the output file exists and you specify the /APPEND qualifier, RMSCNV E reads records from the input file and writes them sequentially into s: the output file, starting with the beginning of the file.J If the output file exists and you specify the /REPLACE qualifier, RMSCNV E reads records from the input file and writes them sequentially into xG the output file, starting with the record position following the last t record already in the file. 2 NOTRUNCATE #TRUNCATEi 2 TRUNCATE$ CONVERT/[NO]TRUNCATE infile outfileD Directs RMSCNV to truncate the records that are read from the inputA file to the record length of the output file before writing themeG into the output file. The trailing bytes of the record are truncated.aF The default is /NOTRUNCATE. If you do not specify /TRUNCATE and the H input records are too long, RMSCNV terminates with the following error message:o7 CON -- INPUT AND OUTPUT RECORD SIZES DO NOT CORRESPONDl 2 EXAMPLES $ CONVERT  Input file? FOO.BART Output file? POOH.BARiE The output file does not exist. RMSCNV creates the sequential filet6 POOH.BAR and copies the records from FOO.BAR into it. $ CONVERT FOO.BAR POOH.BAR4 This example is the equivalent of the previous one.( $ CONVERT/INDEXED GRIZZLY.BAR CROW.BARF RMSCNV read00HeMc}s each record of the input file GRIZZLY.BAR sequentiallyF and examines the contents in the primary key field, which is definedF as an attribute of CROW.BAR. RMSCNV then inserts the record into CROW.BAR. + $ CONVERT/RELATIVE/KEY:1 SAND.BAR MAX.BAR F RMSCNV reads the indexed input file SAND.BAR, using the firstF alternate key of the file to establish the sequence of access. ThenF RMSCNV writes the records sequentially into the empty relative output+ file MAX.BAR, starting with record cell 1.fF Note that the /RELATIVE qualifier refers to the organization of theF output file and the /KEY qualifier refers to the organization of the input file.: $ CONVERT/APPEND/SEQUENTIAL/KEY:2 RUNNING.BAR CORNER.BARF RMSCNV reads the indexed input file RUNNING.BAR, using the secondE alternate key of the file to establish the sequence of access. TheneF RMSCNV appends the records at the end of the existing sequential output file CORNER.BAR.F If the /APPEND qualifier had not been specified, RMSCNV would haveF created the next higher version of CORNER.BAR and written the records from RUNNING.BAR into it.4 $ CONVERT/RELATIVE/FIXED_CONTROL MAMA.BAR PAPA.BARF RMSCNV reads fixed-length records from the indexed input fileF MAMA.BAR, using (by default) the primary key of the file to establishB the sequence of access. RMSCNV writes the records sequentiallyF in a VFC format into the existing relative file PAPA.BAR. RecordF format is an attribute of each file. As each record is written, the+ first bytes become the fixed control area.R; $ CONVERT/TRUNCATE/BLOCK_SIZE:1024/APPEND/KEY:9 BRER.BAR V Output file? MM3:BRER.BCKMF RMSCNV reads the indexed input file BRER.BAR, using the file's ninthF alternate key to establish the sequence of access. The RMSCNV writesF the records to magnetic tape, truncating them to the output file'sF record length before adding them to the end of the existing file, and/ formatting the tape blocks to 1024 bytes each. ( COPY[/qualifier[s]] infile[,s] outfile /ALLOCATION:n /BLOCKSIZE:n /[NO]CONTIGUOUS /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /EXCLUDE:filespec /NOWARNINGS /OWN /OVERLAY /PRESERVE_DATE /REPLACE /REWIND /SHARED /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy /[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy( /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYE The COPY command copies one or more input files to an output file. H If you specify more than one input file, the files are connected into a3 single output file in the order that you indicate.D COPY does not alter the organization of the file. See HELP CONVERT: for information on changing the organization of the file.. For addition help, type HELP COPY qualifier. Command abbreviation: C 2 BLOCKSIZE$ COPY/BLOCKSIZE:n infile[,s] outfileD The /BLOCKSIZE qualifier defines the block size for magnetic tapes.E This qualifier allows you to write larger blocks onto magnetic tape,B thereby saving some of the space taken by gaps between records. J The argument n can be either octal or decimal. A period after the n (n.) indicates that it is decimal.2 NOCONTIGUOUS #CONTIGUOUS 2 CONTIGUOUS' COPY/[NO]CONTIGUOUS infile[,s] outfile> The /CONTIGUOUS qualifier specifies that the output file must@ be contiguous. If this qualifier is not used, only files that 2 are already contiguous remain contiguous on disk.2 OWN COPY/OWN infile[,s] outfileF The /OWN qualifier ch00ePfWDATADATADATADATADATADATADATAanges the ownership of the output file from the G source UIC to the destination UIC. After this command executes, each H UIC owns a copy of the file. If you do not specify /OWN, the original  UIC owns both copies. 2 REPLACE COPY/REPLACE infile[,s] outfileE If the output file has the same name, type, and version number as a B file existing at the destination UIC, this qualifier deletes the 4 existing file and replaces it with the output file.2 NOSPAN_BLOCKS #SPAN_BLOCKS 2 SPAN_BLOCKS( COPY/[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS infile[,s] outfileJ The /[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS qualifier specifies whether records copied from diskI to magnetic tape will cross block boundaries or be transferred in recordI mode. /SPAN_BLOCKS copies a file with records crossing block boundaries;K this is normally how a file is copied. If you specify /NOSPAN_BLOCKS, the file is copied in record mode. 2 DATE' COPY/DATE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileB The /DATE qualifier copies files created only on the given date. 2 SINCE( COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileE The /SINCE qualifier copies files created only on or after the given date. D You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH to copy files created within a 1 range of dates. The format for this command is:' COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy 2 THROUGH* COPY/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileB The /THROUGH qualifier copies files created only on or before the given date. D You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH to copy files created within a 1 range of dates. The format for this command is:' COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy2 TODAY COPY/TODAY infile[,s] outfile6 The /TODAY qualifier copies files created today only. 2 EXCLUDE) COPY/EXCLUDE:filespec infile[,s] outfileE The /EXCLUDE qualifer copies all files except the file named in the D file specification argument. The file specification argument must  contain a version number.? You can exclude more than one file from being copied by using H wildcards (*) in the file specification argument. A wildcard can also % replace the required version number. 2 ALLOCATION( COPY/ALLOCATION:n[.] infile[,s] outfileI The /ALLOCATION:n qualifier defines the number of contiguous blocks for E the output file; n is octal, unless you terminate it with a decimal point. 2 NOWARNINGS# COPY/NOWARNINGS infile[,s] outfile5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages. 2 OVERLAY COPY/OVERLAY infile[,s] outfileA The /OVERLAY qualifier rewrites an existing file, replacing the ; existing file's contents with the contents of the infiles.B The output file retains the file identification number (file-ID),E as well as the name, type, and version number, of the original file.2 PRESERVE_DATE& COPY/PRESERVE_DATE infile[,s] outfileA The /PRESERVE_DATE qualifier causes the output file to have the ! creation date of the input file.2 REWIND COPY/REWIND infile[,s] outfileA This qualifier by default rewinds the tape on the output device.C If you wish to rewind the tape on the input device, or on both theG input and output devices, you must use the qualifier after the desiredA device. The qualifier rewinds the tape before the copy operation starts.2 SHARED COPY/SHARED infile[,s] outfileD The /SHARED qualifier permits other users to access the input file  while you copy it. CORAL/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s] Qualifiers:4 /[NO]CHECK /READ_ONLY[:option]0 /CODE:EIS ALL1 /CODE:FIS NONEt6 /CODE:FPP PURE_DATA? /CODE:PIC /[NO]SHOW[:option[:option...]] / /CODE:(EIS,PIC) ALL0: /CODE:(FIS,PIC) [NO]EXPANSIONS0 /CODE:(FPP,PIC) NONE7 /[NO]EXTEND_SOURCE 00fXMc} [NO]OVERIDE6 /[NO]LIST [NO]SOURCE7 /[NO]MACHINE_CODE [NO]SYMBOLS : /[NO]OBJECT [NO]STATISTICS. /[NO]OPTIMIZE:[LEVEL:]n /[NO]STANDARD* /NAMES:x /TEST[:n]/ /[NO]TRACEBACK ) /WIDTH:nI 8 The CORAL command invokes the PDP-11 CORAL 66 Compiler.F For information on a particular qualifier, type HELP CORAL qualifier. 2 NOOBJECT#OBJECT/2 OBJECT & CORAL/OBJECT[:filespec] filespec[,s] CORAL/NOOBJECT filespec[,s]  K The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that an object file will be generated. IfIM a filespec is not specified, the object file will have the same name as the = last source file, with a type of .OBJ. This is the default. 2 NOMACHINE_CODE #MACHINE_CODE 2 MACHINE_CODE e! CORAL/MACHINE_CODE filespec[,s]O# CORAL/NOMACHINE_CODE filespec[,s]  aF The /MACHINE_CODE qualifier specifies that you wish to the compiler! listing to include binary code.c i! /NOMACHINE_CODE is the default.e2 NOLIST#LIST 2 LIST l$ CORAL/LIST[:filespec] filespec[,s] CORAL/NOLIST filespec[,s]e cF The /LIST qualifier specifies that a listing file of the compilationE be generated. If a filespec is not specified, the listing file will_C have the same name as the first source file, with a type of .LST.e sC /NOLIST is the default and causes no listing file to be produced.a 2 NOCHECKi#CHECK2 CHECKh  CORAL/CHECK filespec[,s]i CORAL/NOCHECK filespec[,s]N C Checking of array bounds. OL With the /CHECK qualifier set at compile time, the CORAL compiler generatesH additional code at each reference to an array or table element, or to aI switch. At run time, each reference is checked to ensure it lies withinnJ the declared bounds, and a message is generated if the referenced elementG is found to be out of bounds. For array and table elements, a warningdK message is generated and the task continues, subject to a count determinedNJ by procedure ERRSET. If a switch index lies out of bounds, a fatal error& is generated and the task terminates. p! The default setting is /NOCHECK. 2 NOEXTEND_SOURCEn#EXTEND_SOURCE2 EXTEND_SOURCE i! CORAL/EXTEND_SOURCE filespec[,s]s# CORAL/NOEXTEND_SOURCE filespec[,s]t d Extended Source Format. M When this qualifier is set, the first 72 characters only of each source lineaF are treated as significant. The remaining characters in the line are ignored by the compiler.d r) The default setting is /NOEXTEND_SOURCE.i 2 NOSTANDARD #STANDARDa 2 STANDARD i CORAL/STANDARD filespec[,s] CORAL/NOSTANDARD filespec[,s] STANDARD (IECCA) keyword check. NJ When this qualifier is set, the use of keywords (such as 'INCLUDE') whichL are not included in British Standard 5905 causes a warning to be generated. iN IECCA stands for the Inter-Establishment Committee for Computer Applications.H This is the British military body which first defined standards for the CORAL language. u$ The default setting is /NOSTANDARD.2 CODE SD CORAL/CODE:EIS filespec[,s] (D) CORAL/CODE:(EIS,PIC) filespec[,s]D CORAL/CODE:FIS filespec[,s] CORAL/CODE:(FIS,PIC) filespec[,s]D CORAL/CODE:FPP filespec[,s] CORAL/CODE:(FPP,PIC) filespec[,s]D CORAL/CODE:PIC filespec[,s] CORAL/CODE:(FPP,PIC) filespec[,s] + Controls code generated by CORAL compiler.  mG In the command line, POSITION_INDEPENDENT can be used in place of PIC.h rM The CORAL compiler is capable of generating code for any one of three PDP-11S instruction set variations. :I Check with your System Manager if you are not sure which instruction seti to use. " The default setting is /CODE:EIS. C) For more information type HELP CORAL EIS:) HELP CORAL FISe) HELP CORAL FPPc ]L The CORAL compiler is also capable of generating position independent code.* For more information type00f`WDATADATADATADATADATADATADATA HELP CORAL PIC.2 POSITION_INDEPENDENT#PIC2 PICp e CORAL/CODE:PIC filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(EIS,PIC) filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(FIS,PIC) filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(FPP,PIC) filespec[,s] $ Position-Independent Code Switches. uJ When the PIC option is not present (the default), a SWITCH declaration isG compiled as a list of addresses in Data space. A subsequent 'GOTO' is M compiled as an indirect indexed jump. At task-build time, the addresses arepI resolved as task relative and the image is therefore position dependent.NM Also, if a label in the list is declared as COMMON and is set in an overlaide< segment of the task, the Autoload mechanism is not invoked. CL When the PIC option is supplied, a SWITCH declaration is compiled as a listL of relative jumps in Instruction space. A subsequent 'GOTO' is compiled asN a direct indexed jump. This overcomes the problems of the former case at theO expense of doubling the size of the list (two words per label instead of one).e d> For more information on instruction sets type HELP CORAL EIS HELP CORAL FIS HELP CORAL FPP2 EISo l CORAL/CODE:EIS filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(EIS,PIC) filespec[,s] C" Use Extended Instruction Set. WK The Extended Instrution Set includes all the basic PDP-11 instructionscE plus MUL, DIV, ASH, ASHC and XOR. Floating point operations arevG performed by subroutines provided in the Object Time System (OTS).s > For information on other instruction sets type HELP CORAL FIS> HELP CORAL FPP HELP CORAL PIC2 FISL P CORAL/CODE:FIS filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(FIS,PIC) filespec[,s] e" Use Floating Instruction Set. tH The Floating Instruction Set includes all the instructions providedL by EIS plus FADD, FSUB, FMUL and FDIV. These four instructions performN Single Precision Floating Point operations using the Floating InstructionN Set hardware option which is available on the PDP11/40. Double PrecisionK Floating Point operations are performed by subroutines provided in theC Object Time System (OTS). p> For information on other instruction sets type HELP CORAL EIS HELP CORAL FPPT HELP CORAL PIC2 FPPl s CORAL/CODE:FPP filespec[,s]" CORAL/CODE:(FPP,PIC) filespec[,s] 2 Use Floating Point Processor Instruction Set. cO The Floating Point Processor Instruction Set includes all the instructions J provided by EIS plus the complete set of instructions provided by the Floating Point Processor.D The Floating Point Processor hardware is present on most modern PDP-11s.o t> For information on other instruction sets type HELP CORAL EIS> HELP CORAL FIS HELP CORAL PIC2 NOSHOW#SHOWc2 SHOW 0 CORAL/[NO]SHOW[:option[:option...] filespec[,s] Options are:n o$ EXPANSIONS List macro expansions- NOEXPANSIONS Do not list macro expansionsu. OVERIDE Over-ride 'NOLIST' in source5 NOOVERIDE Do not over-ride 'NOLIST' in sourceo SOURCE List source$ NOSOURCE Do not list source. SYMBOLS List symbols (Data and Label maps)7 NOSYMBOLS Do not list symbols (Data and Label maps) ' STATISTICS List compiler statisticsC1 NOSTATISTICS Do not list compiler statisticsS ALL Equivalent to7 /SHOW:EXPANSIONS,SYMBOLS,STATISTICS,SOURCE,OVERRIDE  NONE Equivalent toAO /SHOW:NOEXPANSIONS,NOSYMBOLS,NOSTATISTICS,NOSOURCE,NOOVERRIDEo or /NOSHOW t8 The default setting is /SHOW:SOURCE:SYMBOLS:STATISTICS. 2 NOOPTIMIZE #OPTIMIZEs 2 OPTIMIZE B CORAL/OPTIMIZE:n filespec[,s]$ CORAL/OPTIMIZE:LEVEL:n filespec[,s] CORAL/NOOPTIMIZE filespec[,s] T Select optimization level.t CK This qualifier selects the level of object code optimization that is to be performed.A O" n=0 No optimization is performed. @ n=1 Up to 3 optimization passes are performed. This is usually= sufficient to de00fhmc}tect and reduce all possible optimizations.S@ Optimization of certain constructs is delayed until the second3 or third pass to make the process more efficient.M :D n=2 Continuous optimization passes are performed until no reduction: in the size of the object code from the previous pass is detected.e * /NOOPTIMIZE is equivalent to /OPTIMIZE:0." /OPTIMIZE:LEVEL:1 is the default.2 NAMESi i CORAL/NAMES:x filespec[,s]3 tO Specifies initial character of P-Section names, where x is one of the letters cG A..Z. By default, compiler-generated P-Section names begin with the e character '$'.e 2 READ_ONLYi p& CORAL/READ_ONLY[:option] filespec[,s] : P-Section attribute settingsp eL This qualifier allows you to control the setting of the read-only attribute* for P-sections generated by the compiler. E Options are:t O6 NONE Create all data and instruction P-sections with read-write access.l e7 PURE_DATA Create the pure data P-sections as read-onlye2 ($CORRO/$CORRG and $CORSW/$CORSX) and all other P-sections as read-write. 9 ALL Create all pure data and instruction P-sections as 8 read-only and all others (impure data) as read-write. u- The default setting is /READ_ONLY:PURE_DATA. 2 TEST 3 CORAL/TEST[:n] filespec[,s] - where 0 <= n <= 127.e a Control conditional compilation eM The /TEST qualifier is used in conjunction with the 'TEST' keyword. You cancC precede any declaration or statement with 'TEST' (n), for example: ( 'TEST' (3) 'INTEGER' VAR ;S aL This line will be compiled only if the value of n in /TE:n is 3 or greater. sK Note that 'TEST' (0) ... in your source is redundant, since it will alwaysr be compiled.d u The default setting is /TEST:0A 2 NOTRACEBACK #TRACEBACK 2 TRACEBACK, - CORAL/TRACEBACK filespec[,s]n CORAL/NOTRACEBACK filespec[,s] e File/line number tracei oK If /TRACEBACK is specified, the compiler generates additional code to keeptG track of the source file and line number at run time. With trace on, aK any run-time error messages will refer to the source file and line number.. s$ The default setting is /NOTRACEBACK2 WIDTHe d1 CORAL/WIDTH:n filespec[,s] - where 0 < n <= 132.e f Specify listing file width. CJ This qualifier allows you to specify the width in columns of your listing4 file to enable you to print it on a narrow printer. # The default setting is /WIDTH:132.c i CREATE filespecB The CREATE command creates a sequential file on a file-structuredD device. After you issue the command, you type the text for the fileD on your terminal. You can delete a line with CTRL/U. You can closeE the file by typing a CTRL/Z. You can create a file in any directory@ to which you have WRITE access. Usually, this will be your own= directory and other directories with the same group number. > For information about creating directories, type HELP CREATE C DIRECTORY. For information about using the Control File Language A (CFL) compiler to create intermediate form modules (IFORM), type HELP CREATE CFL. 2 DIRECTORY0 CREATE/DIRECTORY[/qualifier] [ddnn:][directory] /ALLOCATION:n /LABEL:volumelabel /OWNER_UIC$ /PROTECTION:(code); The CREATE/DIRECTORY command adds a user file directory to@ the Master File Directory (MFD). The directory name is limitedD to one to nine alphanumeric characters (the letters of the alphabet and the numbers 0 to 9).D Nonprivileged users can create a directory on a volume mounted on aG private (allocated) device. The /NOSHAREABLE qualifier to the MOUNT K command makes a device private. Privileged users can create a directory  on any mounted volume.  E The device specification, ddnn:, defaults to the device to which theL user currently is set. The directory defaults to the directory to which theE user currently is set. Note that you must specify one of these two 00pgtDATADATADATADATADATADATADATA parameters.N The operating system also accepts numbered directory names. The format for aL numbered directory is [g,m], where g and m are octal numbers from 1 to 377.F If you issue the SET DEFAULT/NONAMED_DIRECTORY command, you can only  create numbered directories. 5 For more help, type HELP CREATE DIRECTORY qualifier. 3 ALLOCATION1 CREATE/DIRECTORY/ALLOCATION:n [ddnn:][directory]D The /ALLOCATION qualifier specifies the number of directory entriesD for which space is to be entered. The number provided is rounded up to the next multiple of 32. The default is /ALLOCATION:32. 3 PROTECTION6 CREATE/DIRECTORY/PROTECTION:(code) [ddnn:][directory]F The /PROTECTION qualifier establishes access rights for the directoryF file, not for files in the directory. Each access code consists of a M positional keyword specifying the protection group (SYSTEM:,OWNER:,GROUP:, J WORLD:) followed by a 4-code group specifying the protection, as follows:; R - Read, allows the directory to be listed on your screenB W - Write, allows files to be added or removed from the directory= E - Extend, allows the size of the directory to be increased/ D - Delete, allows the directory to be deletedD The default is the protection code the disk was mounted with. The G default for mount protection is the protection code at initialization.J The system default is /PROTECTION:(SYS:RWED,OWN:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R).3 LABEL6 CREATE/DIRECTORY/LABEL:volumelabel [ddnn:][directory]D The /LABEL qualifier compares the given volume label in the commandK line with the actual label on the volume. If the names match, a directory ? is allocated. If they do not match, the command is rejected. " The default is no label checking. 3 OWNER_UIC! CREATE/DIRECTORY/OWNER_UIC:[uic]B You use this command to specify the UIC of the directory that youA are creating. The default UIC is that of the person issuing the command.2 CONTROL_FILE_LANGUAGE#CFL2 CFL@DCLCFL L# COBOL[/qualifier[,s] filespec u t*The default extension on filespec is .CBL. h Command Qualifiers:l? /[NO]ANSI_FORMAT /[NO]LIST[:filespec]u8 /[NO]CHECK[:arg] /[NO]NAMES:xx? ALL /[NO]OBJECT:filespeceC [NO]BOUNDS /[NO]OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONN< NONE /[NO]SHOW:[NO]MAP8 [NO]PERFORM /[NO]SKELETON: /CODE:[NO]CIS /[NO]SUBPROGRAM< /[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE /TEMPORARY:device8 /[NO]DEBUG /[NO]TRUNCATEJ /[NO]DIAGNOSTICS[:filespec] /[NO]WARNINGS:[NO]INFORMATIONALG The COBOL command invokes the COBOL-81 compiler if it is installed in D your system. See your system manager to determine if the COBOL-81  compiler is installed. F For additional information on a qualifier, type HELP COBOL qualifier.E COBOL can also be used to invoke PDP-11 COBOL (COBOL/C11). For more ( help on COBOL/C11, type HELP COBOL C11.2 NOANSI_FORMAT #ANSI_FORMAT G 2 ANSI_FORMAT  COBOL/[NO]ANSI_FORMAT filespec NI The /[NO]ANSI_FORMAT qualifier indicates whether the source program m? is in conventional (ANSI) format or DIGITAL's Terminal format.  tL Conventional (ANSI) format records are 80-position card-image records with M optional sequence numbers in positions 1-6, indicators in position 7, area AeM beginning in position 8, area B beginning in position 12, and an identifica-l tion area in positions 73-80. .G DIGITAL'S Terminal Format records have area A beginning in position 1,F? and area B beginning in position 5. There are no line numbers.t " The default is /[NO]ANSI_FORMAT. 2 NOCHECKA#CHECK2 CHECKG L COBOL/[NO]CHECK[:arg] ALL [NO]BOUNDSd NONEt [NO]PERFORMC The /[NO]CHECK qualifier deals with run time error chec00gxmc}king. The rE /CHECK qualifier without an argument adds object code that looks at iF the ranges of subscripts, indexes, and nested performs at run time. G The /NOCHECK qualifier suppresses all range checking. If you include nF more that one argument, they must be surrounded by parenthesis. The G following describes the effects of using one or more of the arguments. D ALL: /CHECK:ALL enables all checking and is synonymous to /CHECK.E [NO]BOUNDS: /CHECK:BOUNDS compares subscript and index ranges at eG run time against the ranges defined by corresponding iK OCCURS clauses. /CHECK:NOBOUNDS supresses range checking eL only for subscripts and indexes. /CHECK:(BOUNDS, PERFORM) M has the same effect as /CHECK. CHECK:(NOBOUNDS, NOPERFORM) r0 has the same effect as /NOCHECK.C NONE: /CHECK:NONE suppresses all checking and is synonymous to / /NOCHECK.D? [NO]PERFORM: /CHECK:PERFORM determines whether or not your G program's PERFORM statements are nested properly. N /CHECK:NOPERFORM suppresses range checking only for PERFORM K statements. /CHECK:(PERFORM, BOUNDS) has the same effect M as /CHECK. /CHECK(NOPERFORM,NOBOUNDS) has the same effect  as /NOCHECK.OThe default is /CHECK. 2 CODE s COBOL/CODE:[NO]CIS filespec D The /CODE qualifier enables or disables the use of CIS (Commercial B Instruction Set) instructions by the compiler. The CIS argument 5 ebables CIS use; the NOCIS argument disables CIS useO; The default is system dependent. See your system manager. 2 NOCROSS_REFERENCEH#CROSS_REFERENCE2 CROSS_REFERENCEf % COBOL/[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE filespec( EM The CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier specifies that cross-reference tables should eO be appended to the end of the compile listing. These tables include data-namesaO and procedure-names. Destructive reference entries are included for data-namet 2 NODEBUG #DEBUG2 DEBUGS g COBOL/[NO]DEBUG filespec IE The /DEBUG qualifier specifies that the symbolic debugger is to be yL used. The symbolic information generated by /DEBUG increases the size of M the object file. If the symbolic debugger is included in the program, the i7 /DEBUG qualifier must be used in the LINK/C81 command.p The default is /NODEBUG.i2 NODIAGNOSTICS #DIAGNOSTICS 2 DIAGNOSTICSa p+ COBOL/[NO]DIAGNOSTICS[:filespec] filespecs eH The /DIAGNOSTICS qualifier enables the generation of a diagnostics fileG which contains only the compile time diagnostics and the correspondinguN source lines. If filespec as an argument to /DIAGNOSTICS is not specified, G a file with the same name as the source file is created with the .DIA n extension. 2 NOLIST#LISTu2 LIST t$ COBOL/[NO]LIST[:filespec] filespec eO The /LIST qualifier specifies that a compile listing be created. If filespec OK as an argument to /LIST is not included, the list file created is a file eN with the same name as the source, and the extension .LST. This qualifier is B necessary when the /CROSS_REFERENCE or /SHOW qualifiers are used.2 NAMESt D COBOL/NAMES:xx filespec, P The /NAMES qualifier tells the compiler to use the two alphanumeric characters D specified as the PSECT kernel for this program. The only time you G need this qualifier is when your task image uses both subprograms and  segmentation. 2 NOOBJECT#OBJECTI2 OBJECT l& COBOL/[NO]OBJECT[:filespec] filespec wG The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that an object file is to be created. sO If a filespec as an argument to /OBJECT is not included the resulting object = has the same name as the input file, and the extension .OBJ. 2 NOSHOW#SHOWs2 SHOW l /SHOWc /SHOW:MAPe /NOSHOW  /SHOW:NOMAPt M Indicates whether Data Division and Procedure Division offset maps are to # be included in the list file. .% The /LIST qualifier must be used00ghiDATADATADATADATADATADATADATA. I The /SHOW and /SHOW:MAP qualifiers are equivalent, as are the /NOSHOWt and /SHOW:NOMAP. 2 NOSUBPROGRAM #SUBPROGRAM 2 SUBPROGRAM B COBOL/[NO]SUBPROGRAM filespecg jO The /SUBPROGRAM qualifier indicates that this program is a subprogram. This F qualifier is only necessary when the subprogram does not contain the ! Procedure Division USING header.a 2 TEMPORARYn r! COBOL/TEMPORARY:device filespec  H The /TEMPORARY qualifier tells the compiler to store its temporary work4 files on the specified device. The default is SY:. 2 NOTRUNCATE #TRUNCATE 2 TRUNCATE A COBOL/[NO]TRUNCATE filespecR AL The /TRUNCATE qualifier indicates that the compiler is to perform decimal J truncation on the values of COMP data items. If you specify /TRUNCATE, H the maximum value that a COMP item can contain depends on its PICTURE 6 character-string, rather than its storage allocation.@ The /NOTRUNCATE qualifier tells the compiler to perform binary G truncation on the values of COMP data items. With binary truncation, tE the maximum value of a COMP item can contain depends on its storage E allocation. The default is /NOTRUNCATE. 2 NOWARNINGS #WARNINGS 2 WARNINGS m/ COBOL/[NO]WARNINGS:[NO]INFORMATIONAL filespecsI Specifies whether the compiler should issue informational diagnosticsiI during the compilation. Warning and fatal diagnostics always appear.c> /NOWARNINGS, and /WARNINGS:NOINFORMATIONAL are equivalent.2 NOOVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONt#OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION2 OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONu t /[NO]OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONoB Specifies whether an indirect command file (.CMD) and an Overlay G Descriptor Language (.ODL) file are produced. If you use the LINK/C81OE command to taskbuild a program, do not use this qualifier. LINK/C81h also produces these two files.o 2 NOSKELETON #SKELETONg 2 SKELETON /[NO]SKELETONF Specifies whether a skeleton Overlay Description Language (.SKL) file is created.2 C11. @DCLCOBOLR DEALLOCATE[/qualifier] ddnn: /ALL /DEVICE  /TERMINAL:ttnn: B The DEALLOCATE command counteracts ALLOCATE. It frees a private  device for access by others.C The /ALL qualifier frees all devices allocated from your terminal.4 Do not specify devices when you use this qualifier.C The /DEVICE qualifier is included for the sake of clarity and does not alter the command. F The /TERMINAL qualifier frees devices allocated from other terminals. This qualifier is privileged.$ DEASSIGN[/qualifier[s]] logicalname /GROUP /GLOBAL /LOCAL /LOGIN /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ddnn: or DEASSIGN/ALLD The DEASSIGN command deletes logical-device assignments. DEASSIGN E dissociates logical names from physical device names, pseudo device 3 names, or logical device names assigned by ASSIGN.A The format of logical name is ddnn:. It is omitted when the /ALL qualifier is used.; For more information about the available qualifiers, type  HELP DEASSIGN qualifier. B For more information about deassigning queues to processors, type HELP DEASSIGN QUEUE. 2 ALL DEASSIGN/ALLJ The /ALL qualifier specifies that all logical-device assignments of the I specified type be deleted. No logical name is required with this format.2 SYSTEM#GLOBAL2 GLOBAL DEASSIGN/GLOBAL logicalname DEASSIGN/SYSTEM logicalnameJ The /GLOBAL qualifier specifies that a global logical-device assignment J is to be deleted. /SYSTEM is a synonym for /GLO00ijk}BAL. /TERMINAL cannot be  specified with this qualifier.: Only a privileged terminal can delete global assignments.2 GROUP DEASSIGN/GROUPD The /GROUP qualifier deletes a group logical name assignment in the> group logical name table. The argument g identifies the UserB Identification Code (UIC) group number for which the logical nameC exists. If you do not specify a UIC group number, the default is C your own group number, which is taken from your current protectionE UIC. If you are nonprivileged, the group number is the same as the - UIC that is assigned to you when you log in.G This qualifier is valid only if your system supports extended logical  names.2 LOCAL DEASSIGN[/LOCAL] logicalname? The /LOCAL qualifier is the default and specifies that a local? logical-device assignment is to be deleted in the user logical name table.2 LOGIN DEASSIGN/LOGIN logicalnameH The /LOGIN qualifier specifies that a login logical-device assignment  is to be deleted.9 Only a privileged terminal can delete login assignments. 2 TERMINAL" DEASSIGN/TERMINAL:ddn logicalnameK The /TERMINAL qualifier specifies that the logical-device assignment to beC deleted applies to another terminal. /TERMINAL cannot be specified along with /GLOBAL or /SYSTEM.G Only privileged terminals can delete assignments from other terminals.2 QUEUE @DCLDEASSQ ' DEASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname E The DEASSIGN/QUEUE command counteracts ASSIGN/QUEUE. It is used to A eliminate the path between a queue and a processor in the Queue 2 Manager subsystem. This is a privileged command. C By first deleting a path between a queue and a processor and then B creating a path between that queue and another processor, you canF redirect jobs from one processor to another. See HELP ASSIGN QUEUE.  DEBUG [taskname]F DEBUG forces a task to trap to a debugger by setting the T-bit in theG task's Processor Status Word. The task must have been built using the? /DEBUG qualifier to the LINK command or have issued the SVDB$ C Executive directive (Specify SST Vector Table for Debugging Aid). M The taskname argument in the command line specifies the name of the task youC wish to trap. If you do not specify a task name, the default is aF task named after the terminal from which the command was issued, such as TT5.  8 DIGITAL offers two debuggers for use with this command:7 o ODT-11, the On-Line Debugging Tool, can be used on + MACRO-11 code and in-line FORTRAN code.: o FORTRAN-77 DEBUG can be used with FORTRAN-77 code or  MACRO-11 code.F Nonprivileged users can issue this command for any nonprivileged taskK running from their own terminals. Privileged users can name any task, butJ the command must be issued from the terminal from which the task was run.0 See HELP DEBUG EXAMPLE and HELP DEBUG MESSAGE. 2 EXAMPLE $ RUN JOE $ SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE MCR... (TT5:) SHOT5 (TT5:) TT5 (TT5:) . . . $ DEBUG TE:002452 D In this example, the task was built including ODT. The user issued? the DEBUG command, which defaulted to the task named after theC terminal. The display from ODT gives the T-bit exception code andD the address following the location in error and issues its prompt. , The user can then proceed with debugging. A The DEBUG command is useful when a task is caught in an infinite; loop between breakpoints or is waiting for an incorrect or nonexistent event flag. B See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual for& information on the SVDB$ directive. K See the RSX-11M-PLUS and MicroRSX Task Builder Manual for more information# on the /DEBUG qualifier to LINK. 2 MESSAGE 7 "time" *** "tas00klDATADATADATADATADATADATADATAkname" does not contain a debugging aidA Explanation: An attempt was made to debug a task that was not  built with a debugging aid. )User Action: None. This cannot be done.5DEFINE[/qualifier[,s]] logical_name equivalence_name /FINAL /GLOBAL /GROUP[:g] /LOCAL /LOGIN  /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn:' /TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES=TERMINALF The DEFINE command equates a logical name to a physical device name, F to all or part of a file specification, or to another logical name. B All references to the logical name are resolved by the operating system. E Equivalence_name specifies the device name, file specification, or H logical name to which you are assigning a logical name. Logical_name I specifies the logical name you want to assign to the device name, file G specification, or other logical name. A logical name can contain any D ASCII character, but if it contains characters besides the letters C A-Z, the numbers 0-9, an underscore (_), a colon (:), or a dollar 2 sign ($), you must enclose it in quotation marks. G See HELP DEFINE qualifier for information on the available qualifiers.2 TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES#FINAL2 FINAL DEFINE/FINAL' DEFINE/TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES=TERMINALE Specifies that the equivalence name string should not be translated E iteratively; that is, the logical name translation should terminate > with the current equivalence string. The /FINAL qualifier is@ synonymous with the /TRANSLATION_ATTRIBUTES=TERMINAL qualifier.2 SYSTEM#GLOBAL2 GLOBAL. DEFINE/GLOBAL logical_name equivalence_name - DEFINE/SYSTEM logical_name equivalence_name G The /GLOBAL and /SYSTEM qualifiers are synonyms that specify that the F assignment is to be a system table assignment. These qualifiers are privileged. 2 GROUP0 DEFINE/GROUP[:g] logical_name equivalence_name H The /GROUP qualifier specifies that the logical name assigned is valid I for a particular group of users, where g is the UIC group number of the E users you wish to share the logical name. The default group number > is the group number of the UIC under which you are logged in.& For example, if you issue the command DEFINE/GROUP:303 USER2 DB2: A all users whose UIC is [303,*] will be able to refer to DB2: as  USER2.2 LOCAL- DEFINE/LOCAL logical_name equivialence_name N The /LOCAL qualifier specifies that the logical assignment be valid only for C your terminal. Note that no automatic deassignment occurs if you G dismount a device after equating a logical name to it. /LOCAL is the < default DEFINE command qualifier and need not be specified.2 LOGIN DEFINE/LOGINE Specifies that the logical definition is to be displayed as a login - definition. This is a privileged qualifier.H You can establish login definitions any time during an individual user D session. These definitions remain in effect until you log off the ? system or you specifically delete the definition by using the  DEASSIGN/LOGIN command.B Normally, you place login definitions in your login command file,B LOGIN.CMD, or the system manager places them in the system login H file, SYSLOGIN.CMD. Having the logical definitions in either of these E login command files saves from having to define those logicals each  time you log in. 2 TERMINAL0 DEFINE/TERMINAL logical_name equivialence_name = The /TERMINAL qualifier specifies that a local logical name H assignment be applied to a terminal other than your own. /TERMINAL is  a privileged qualifier.00mn}$ DELETE/DIRECTORY [ddnn:][directory]? The DELETE/DIRECTORY command deletes a directory on a Files-11; volume, and removes the directory from the volume's Master File Directory (MFD).B Privileged users can delete directories on volumes mounted on anyD device. Nonprivileged users can delete directories only on volumes2 mounted on their own private (allocated) devices. Parameters: [ddnn:][directory]B You must specify at least the directory parameter. If you do notB specify the device, the default volume is used for the parameter.G ddnn: Specifies the device on which the volume you want to delete the? directory is mounted. This parameter defaults to SY0:.4 The volume must be mounted, Files-11 volume.1 [directory] (The brackets are required syntax.)E Specifies the name of the directory you want to delete./ This parameter must be specified.; For more information, See the DCL Command Language Manual.  " DELETE[/qualifier[s] filespec[,s] /CONFIRM /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /EXCLUDE /LOG /NOWARNINGS /QUERY /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy* /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY D The DELETE command deletes one or more files from a user directory.? For more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP DELETE qualifier.D You can also delete jobs or entries from queues, delete queues, or E delete processors. Type HELP DELETE JOB for information on deletingE jobs or entries. Type HELP DELETE QUEUE for information on deletingB processors or queues. Type HELP DELETE DIRECTORY for information on deleting directories. 2 DIRECTORY @DCLDELDIR2 ENTRY#JOB2 JOB@DCLDELJ 2 PROCESSOR#QUEUE2 QUEUE@DCLDELQ2 LOG DELETE/LOG filespec[,s]G The /LOG qualifier specifies that the names of the files being deleted be listed on your terminal. 2 NOWARNINGS DELETE/NOWARNINGSD The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages resulting from  the DELETE command. 2 [NO]CONFIRM#QUERY 2 NOCONFIRM#QUERY 2 CONFIRM#QUERY 2 SELECTIVE#QUERY2 QUERY DELETE/QUERY filespec[,s] DELETE/CONFIRM filespec[,s]G The /QUERY qualifier allows you to delete files selectively. You will L be prompted with a file name from the class specified in the command line. # The responses are: Y, N, Q, and G. Y - delete the file N - save the file Q - save the file and quit$ G - delete all remaining candidatesE Y and N will continue with the next possible file, unless terminated1 with a CTRL-Z, which will terminate the command.@ DELETE/QUERY is the default when you do not supply a full file ' specification for the DELETE command. . DELETE/CONFIRM is a synonym for DELETE/QUERY.2 DATE DELETE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy file[,s]L Specifies that the operation is limited to input files from the given date.) Example: $ DELETE/DATE:04-AUG-87 *.MAC;*. Deletes all .MAC files created on that date.2 SINCE DELETE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy file[,s]F Specifies that the operation is limited to files created on or after O the given date. Can be combined with /THROUGH. See also HELP DELETE THROUGH. Examples: $ DELETE/SINCE:04-AUG-87 *.*;* 4 Deletes all files created on that date or since. 4 $ DELETE/SINCE:08-OCT-87/THROUGH:10-OCT-87 *.TXT;*1 Deletes all *.TXT files included in date range. 2 THROUGH " DELETE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy file[,s]M Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on or before J the given date. Can be combined with /SINCE. See also HELP DELETE SINCE. Examples:& $ DELETE/THROUGH:01-MAY-87 AURORA.*;*; Deletes all files named AURORA created on or since date. 3 $ DELETE/SINCE:09-SEP-87/THROUGH:09-OCT-87 *.TXT;*6 Deletes all TXT files created within the date range.2 TODAY DELETE/TODAY file[,s]N Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on the current date. E00nopqTADATADATADATADATADATAxample: $ DELETE/TODAY RAT.*;*+ Deletes all files named RAT created today. 2 EXCLUDE! DELETE/EXCLUDE:filespec file[,s]D Specifies that the operation is to exclude the named file or files.* Example: $ DELETE/EXCLUDE:*.OBJ;* RAY.*;*, Deletes all files named RAY except RAY.OBJ. 6 DELETE/JOB[/FILE_POSITION:n] queuename [[uic]]jobname! DELETE/ENTRY:n[/FILE_POSITION:n] E The DELETE/JOB and DELETE/ENTRY commands delete either a job from a + print or batch queue or a file from a job. A A single file in a job can be deleted using the /FILE_POSITION:nE qualifier of the DELETE/JOB command. The argument to this qualifierE is the number which appears in the SHOW QUEUE display to the left of the file you want to delete.  B The DELETE/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because itF unambiguously refers to a specific job by its entry number, n. Two orB more jobs in the same queue may have the same name, but they willC never have the same entry number. Job entry numbers are displayed with the SHOW QUEUE command.  + For more information see HELP SHOW QUEUE.  = See HELP DELETE QUEUE for information about deleting queues.  DELETE/QUEUE queuename/ERASE# DELETE/processortype processorname APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR BATCH_PROCESSOR CARD_READER DEVICE INPUT PRINTER PROCESSOR  F The DELETE/QUEUE command deletes a queue by name. The default queuesD of BATCH and PRINT cannot be deleted. The /ERASE qualifier must be specified. F If the queue is not empty when this command is issued, the queue is D marked for deletion. Although a queue that is marked for deletion F cannot accept any more jobs, it sends the jobs remaining in the queue< to processors. When the queue empties, it is then deleted.  I The DELETE/processortype command deletes a print, batch, card reader, or applications processor. : Only a privileged user can delete a queue or a processor. E See HELP DELETE JOB for information about deleting jobs from queues.1 DIFFERENCES[/qualifier[s]] filespec1 filespec2 /CHANGE_BAR:n /IGNORE:arg BLANK_LINES COMMENTS FORM_FEEDS SPACING TRAILING_BLANKS /LINES:n /NONUMBERS /OUTPUT:filespec /SLP[:au]F The DIFFERENCES command compares the contents of two ASCII files and B reports the differences found between them. The default file type for both input files is MAC.N For a description of a particular qualifier, type HELP DIFFERENCES qualifier.2 IGNORE1 DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:(arg[,s]) filespec1 filespec2 BLANK_LINES COMMENTS FORM_FEEDS SPACING TRAILING_BLANKS F The /IGNORE qualifier specifies that you wish certain defaults to be ignored in making a comparison.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with = commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses.F For information on individual arguments to the IGNORE qualifier, type HELP DIFFERENCES IGNORE arg 3 BLANK_LINES3 DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:BLANK_LINES filespec1 filespec2B The BLANK_LINES argument specifies that blank lines in both filesE be included in the comparison operation. Otherwise, blank lines are ignored by default.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with 00q}= commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses. 3 FORM_FEED1 DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:FORM_FEED filespec1 filespec2C The FORM_FEED argument specifies that lines consisting solely of aD single form-feed character be included in the comparison. Normally,0 these records are not included in a comparison.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with = commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses. 3 COMMENTS0 DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:COMMENTS filespec1 filespec2B The COMMENTS argument specifies that comments, that is, text pre-D ceded by a semicolon (;) be excluded from the comparison. Normally,, such lines are treated like any other line.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with = commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses. 3 SPACING/ DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:SPACING filespec1 filespec2> The SPACING argument specifies that any sequence of blank andF tab characters is to be interpreted as a single blank for the compar-D ison. This argument is useful when source files that differ only inE their spacing are being compared. The output listing includes blanksF and tabs as they are found in the input files but they are ignored inD the comparison. Normally, sequences of blanks and tabs are compared like any other characters.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with = commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses.3 TRAILING_BLANKS7 DIFFERENCES/IGNORE:TRAILING_BLANKS filespec1 filespec2E The TRAILING_BLANKS argument specifies that all blanks following theF last nonblank character be ignored. If you include this argument with; NOCOMMENTS argument, blanks preceding a semicolon are also ignored.E If you specify more than one argument to the /IGNORE qualifier, you B must enclose the arguments in parentheses and separate them with = commas. If you specify only one argument, you can omit the parentheses. 2 CHANGE_BAR/ DIFFERENCES/CHANGE_BAR[:n] filespec1 filespec2B The /CHANGE_BAR qualifier specifies that the second input file beC listed with change bars applied to each line that does not have a , corresponding line in the first input file.H The default change bar is the exclamation point (!). The argument, n, B is the octal value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the change bar.D When a section of lines in the first input file has been deleted in= the second input file, the first line not deleted is marked.2 LINES( DIFFERENCES/LINES:n filespec1 filespec2G The /LINES qualifier specifies that n lines must be identical before a match is recognized. The default value is /LINES:3. 2 NONUMBERS* DIFFERENCES/NONUMBERS filespec1 filespec2E The /NONUMBERS qualifier specifies that lines in the output file notC be preceded by line numbers. Lines are numbered beginning with theG number one. Line numbers are incremented by one for each line read in,G including blank lines. Normally, lines in the output file are preceded by line numbers.2 OUTPUT:filespec0 DIFFERENCES/OUTPUT:filespec filespec1 filespec2A The /OUTPUT qualifier specifies that lines in the output file beB written to the file named in the qualifier. Normally, this output appears on your terminal.2 SLP DIFFERENCES/SLP[:au]G The /SLP qualifier specifies that the output listing take the form ofH an SLP indirect command file. When you include this qualifier, the out-E put listing is an SLP indirect command file that when applied to theB first input file makes it identical to the second input file. TheF optional argument, au, is a 1-to-8-character alphanumeric audit trailC symbol. For more information on the Source Language Input00qrqTADATADATADATADATADATA Program . (SLP), see the RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual.G DIRECTORY[/format-qual][/destination-qual][/other-qual] [filespec[,s]]; /ATTRIBUTES /OUTPUT[:filespec] /DATE:dd-mmm-yy< /BRIEF /PRINTER /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy> /FREE [ddnn:] /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy2 /FULL /TODAY= /NOWARNINGS /EXCLUDE:filespec+ /REWIND + /SUMMARY JThe DIRECTORY command displays information about files in a directory. ByNdefault, this command lists the following information for each file: the fullLfile specification, the number of blocks used by the file, and the creationKdate of the file. At the end of this listing is a summary of the number of#files and the space that they use. N Format qualifiers control the type of information in the directory listing. HDestination qualifiers control where the command output is sent. OtherOqualifiers list directory files according to the date created or what you wantto exclude from the listing. O If you do not supply a filespecification, a complete directory is displayed. LHowever, this optional filespecification allows you to specify a particularMsubset of your files. You can also obtain a listing of another directory by6supplying the appropriate directory in the filespec. H For information on the above qualifiers, type HELP DIRECTORY qualifier. Command abbreviation: D 2 ATTRIBUTES$ DIRECTORY/ATTRIBUTES [filespec[,s]]B The /ATTRIBUTES qualifier displays the Record Management ServicesA (RMS-11) attributes of the specified files. These attributes areG displayed for all files specified in the DIRECTORY command, regardlessE of whether the file is an RMS-11 file. The information included in this format is:  full file name file organization creation date and time revision date and time file protection record format record attributes file attributes the allocation quantity the default extend quantity' maximum record number (relative files)) bucket size (relative and indexed files)6 primary and alternate key definitions (indexed files)2 FULL DIRECTORY/FULL [filespec[,s]]H The /FULL qualifier specifies that you want full information listed in F the directory. Full format includes the name, type, and version num-H ber, the file-ID number (in the format filenumber, filesequencenumber),C the number of blocks used/allocated, code C for contiguous files, E code L for locked files, creation date and time, protection status, ; date and time of last update, and the number of revisions.2 BRIEF DIRECTORY/BRIEF [filespec[,s]]G The /BRIEF qualifier specifies that the directory listing only contain4 the names, types, and version numbers of the files.2 FREE DIRECTORY/FREE [ddnn:]E The /FREE qualifier displays the amount of free space on the defaultE device or the specified device. This display includes the amount ofF space used, the largest remaining amount of contiguous space, and the number of free file headers. 2 OUTPUT) DIRECTORY/OUTPUT:filespec [filespec[,s]]E The /OUTPUT qualifier directs the output of the directory listing toA the file specified in the filespec argument, rather than to your terminal. 2 PRINTER! DIRECTORY/PRINTER [filespec[,s]]F The /PRINTER qualifier directs the output of the directory listing toD LP0:. Generally, it is better to direct the output to a file using< the /OUTPUT qualifier and the00rs}n to print that file with the E PRINT/DELETE command. In this way, your output can be directed to a specific printer. 2 SUMMARY! DIRECTORY/SUMMARY [filespec[,s]]F The /SUMMARY qualifier displays the total number of blocks allocated @ and used for the specified files. If you do not specify a fileJ specification this qualifier displys the information for all files in the default directory.2 DATE( DIRECTORY/DATE:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[,s]]; The /DATE qualifier lists files created on the given date.2 SINCE) DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[,s]]E The /SINCE qualifier lists files created on or after the given date.C You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to list files created within a" range of dates. This format is: A DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[,s]] 2 THROUGH+ DIRECTORY/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[,s]]H The /THROUGH qualifier lists files created on or before the given date.C You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to list files created within a" range of dates. This format is: A DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[,s]] 2 TODAY DIRECTORY/TODAY [filespec[,s]]0 The /TODAY qualifier lists files created today. 2 EXCLUDE* DIRECTORY/EXCLUDE:filespec [filespec[,s]]D The /EXCLUDE qualifer lists all files except the file named in the A filespec argument. You can exclude more than one file from the C directory listing by using wildcards (*) in the filespec argument. 2 NOWARNINGS$ DIRECTORY/NOWARNINGS [filespec[,s]]5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages.2 REWIND DIRECTORY/REWIND [filespec[,s]]< The /REWIND qualifier applies only to tape. This qualifier. rewinds the tape before the command executes., DISMOUNT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: [volumelabel] /ALL /PUBLIC /SAVE /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn: /[NO]UNLOADE The DISMOUNT command marks the volume mounted on ddnn: as logically 0 off line and disconnected from the file system.I The volumelabel argument is optional. If you specify a volume label, it , is checked against the label of the volume.2 SYSTEM#PUBLIC2 DEVICE#PUBLIC2 PUBLIC$ DISMOUNT/SYSTEM ddnn: [volumelabel]$ DISMOUNT/PUBLIC ddnn: [volumelabel]E The /SYSTEM qualifier dismounts all users from a volume, regardless A of who had mounted the volume. /PUBLIC is a synomyn for /SYSTEM.C Only a privileged user may use the /SYSTEM and /PUBLIC qualifiers. 2 NOUNLOAD#UNLOAD2 SAVE" DISMOUNT/SAVE ddnn: [volumelabel]G The /SAVE qualifier specifies that the volume is to remain spinning inA the drive, to be accessed for either read or write by privileged tasks.5 Only a privileged user may use the /SAVE qualifier. 2 UNLOAD( DISMOUNT/[NO]UNLOAD ddnn: [volumelabel]C The /UNLOAD and /NOUNLOAD qualifers apply to magnetic tapes only. E The /UNLOAD qualifier specifies that the magnetic tape be completely rewound after the dismount.D The /NOUNLOAD qualifier specifies that the magnetic tape be rewound to the first file position. 2 TERMINAL, DISMOUNT/TERMINAL:ttnn: ddnn: [volumelabel]A The /TERMINAL qualifier dismounts a volume from a terminal other6 than the terminal from which the volume was mounted. : Only a privileged user may use the /TERMINAL qualifier. 2 USER#ALL2 ALL DISMOUNT/ALLD The /ALL qualifier dismounts all volumes you have mounted from the  current terminal.00qTADATADATADATADATADATA EDIT[/qualifier] [command line] /EDT[/qualifier[s] /EDI /KED /K52 /MAKEe /MUNGN /SLP[/qualifier[s] /SOS /TECO /USING:usereditor> The EDIT command, when used with one of the above qualifiers,= invokes the specified editor. EDT, the DEC standard editor,@ is the default editor. EDI and SLP also are supported. KED and. K52 are supported and included with FMS-11.  F For EDT, EDI, and the unsupported editors, the optional command line ; is passed to the editor without being checked by the CLI. I@ For more information on qualifiers available when invoking EDT,- the DEC Standard Editor, type HELP EDIT EDT.I@ For more information on qualifiers available when invoking SLP,7 the Source Language Input Program, type HELP EDIT SLP.C; For more informaton on the EDI editor, type HELP EDI_UTIL.r u2 EDT. EDIT/EDT[/qualifier[s] infile /COMMAND:filespec  /JOURNAL[:filespec] p /OUTPUT:filespecp /READ_ONLYl /RECOVER ort EDT[/qualifier[s] infile.F The above commands invoke EDT, the DEC Standard Editor. EDT has its D own HELP files, which you can access from within EDT using the EDT  HELP command.F The /COMMAND qualifier names a file of EDT initialization commands. H This file contains commands that alter the default setup for EDT. The H default is /COMMAND:EDTINI.EDT. If you have an EDTINI.EDT file and do 1 not wish to use it, use the NOCOMMAND qualifier.H The /JOURNAL qualifier controls whether EDT creates a journal file for @ the editing session. The journal file consists of all editing G commands and text entered during the session. If the editing session hC ends abnormally, the journal file is saved. You can then use the ? /RECOVER qualifier to recreate the lost test. The default is eE /JOURNAL:infilespec. If you specify /NOJOURNAL, no journal file is f' created, and no recovery is possible. tG The /OUTPUT qualifier is used to give an output file a name different oJ from that of the input file. The default is to create an output file of I the same name and type as the input file, with a version number that is H one higher. If you specify /NOOUTPUT, an output file is not created. E When using /NOOUTPUT, you cannot EXIT from EDT unless you include a t+ file specification after the EXIT command.cH The /READ_ONLY qualifier opens the file for reading only. You can use E /READ_ONLY to look at files to which you have no write access. The l default is /NOREAD_ONLY. C The /RECOVER qualifier reads editing commands from a journal file tC prior to starting an editing session. With this command, you can s@ recover text lost from your previous editing session if it was E interrupted by a system failure. The default is /NORECOVER. See thei( EDT Editor Manual for more information.2 SLPm EDIT/SLP[/qualifiers] filespece /[NO]AUDIT[:(arg[,s])]g POSITION:n SIZE:n /[NO]CHECKSUM[:n]e /[NO]LIST[:filespec] /[NO]OUTPUT[:filespec] /[NO]REPORTl /[NO]TAB /[NO]TRUNCATE[:n]tM Use this command to invoke SLP, the Source Language Input Program, a specialtE editor used for source-file maintenance. SLP has an optional audit ? trail which enables you to keep track of changes in the file. o8 See HELP EDIT SLP qualifier for help on SLP qualifiers.3 AUDITe#NOAUDIT 3 NOAUDITr EDIT/SLP/[NO]AUDIT[:(arg[,s])] POSITION:n SIZE:nG The /[NO]AUDIT qualifier controls whether the output file includes an C audit trail and optionally allows you to specify the location and cF size of the audit trail. If you specify both POSITION and SIZE, the ! parenthesis are required syntax. > The default is /NOAUDIT, by which no audit trail is produced.G The POSITION argument sets the starting position of the audit trail. AI The value of n can be a number from 0 to 132, representing the column at K which the first character in the 00t}audit trail is to appear. This value is sF rounded up to the next highest tab stop. The default value for n is  80.G The SIZE argument sets the length of the audit trail. The value of n oC can be a number from 0 to 14. The default is an audit trail of 8 e characters. 3 CHECKSUM #NOCHECKSUM 3 NOCHECKSUM EDIT/SLP/[NO]CHECKSUM[:arg]G The /[NO]CHECKSUM qualifier controls whether a checksum is calculated nE for the SLP commands. If you specify checksum without an argument, aG SLP calculates the checksum value and prints it on your terminal. If eF you specify an argument, SLP calculates the checksum and compares it G to what you have specified. If the numbers differ, a warning message ; is displayed, but the execution of SLP is not interrupted.c The default is /NOCHECKSUM.3 LIST#NOLISTM3 NOLIST / EDIT/SLP/[NO]LIST[:filespec]E The /LIST qualifier creates a listing of a file with line numbers. SG If you do not specify a filespec, SLP creates a file of type LST with a! the same name as the input file.t The default is /LIST.3 OUTPUT #NOOUTPUTe 3 NOOUTPUT EDIT/SLP/[NO]OUTPUT[:filespec] H The /OUTPUT qualifier changes the name of the output file. The defaultG output filespec argument is the same name and type as the input file, u with a higher version number. D The /NOOUTPUT qualifier suppresses the creation of an output file. 3 REPORT #NOREPORT 3 NOREPORT EDIT/SLP/[NO]REPORT[:filespec]eB The /[NO]REPORT qualifier controls whether line truncations that E result from audit trails are reported. If you specify /REPORT, you F receive warning messages on your terminal and the affected lines are H marked with a question mark (?) in place of the period (.) in the line  number in the listing files The default is /NOREPORT.3 TABr#NOTAB3 NOTAB EDIT/SLP/[NO]TABiE The /[NO]TAB qualifier controls whether SLP replaces tabs or spaces OF at the end of each record containing an audit trail. If you specify H /TAB, tabs are inserted. If you specify /NOTAB, spaces are inserted.  The default is /NOTAB.R 3 TRUNCATE #NOTRUNCATEr 3 NOTRUNCATE EDIT/SLP/[NO]TRUNCATE[:arg]E The /TRUNCATE qualifier requests SLP to truncate each record in the H input file when it creates the output file. This qualifier allows you G to delete an audit trail from a file previously updated with SLP. If H you specify /TRUNCATE without a number, SLP truncates input records at F the beginning position of the audit trail. If you specify a number, H SLP truncates the records beginning at the column. The value of n can  be from 0 through 132. The default is /NOTRUNCATE.B The EDT editor, has its own HELP files which you can access from H within EDT using the EDT HELP command. To invoke EDT, use the EDIT/EDT) command, which has the following format: EDIT/EDT[/qualifier[s]] infile /COMMAND:filespec /NOCOMMAND  /JOURNAL:filespec /NOJOURNAL  /OUTPUT:filespec /NOOUTPUT /[NO]READ_ONLY /[NO]RECOVER F The /COMMAND qualifier names a file of EDT initialization commands. G This file contains commands that alter the default setup for EDT. The E default is /COMMAND:EDTINI.EDT. If you have an EDTINI.EDT file and 5 do not wish to use it, use the /NOCOMMAND qualifier.D The /JOURNAL qualifier controls whether EDT creates a journal file D for the editing session. The journal file consists of all editing F commands and text entered during the session. If the editing session= ends abnormally, the journal file is saved. The default is E /JOURNAL:infilespec. If you specify /NOJOURNAL, no journal file is00tuTADATADATADATADATADATA % created and no recovery is possible.G The /OUTPUT qualifier is used to give an output file a name different F from the input file. The default is to create an output file of the H same version and type as the input file, with a version number that is G one higher. If you specify /NOOUTPUT, an output file is not created. E When using /NOOUTPUT, you cannot EXIT from EDT unless you include a ! filespec after the EXIT command.D The /READ_ONLY qualifier opens the file for reading only. You can E use /READ_ONLY to look at files to which you have no write access.  The default is /NOREAD_ONLY.K The /RECOVER qualifier reads editing commands from a journal file prior toG starting an editing session. With this command, you can recover text K lost from your previous editing session if it was interrupted by a system 4 crash or other problem. The default is /NORECOVER.H See the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual and the EDT Editor Manual  for more information. FIX[/qualifier] taskname /READONLY_SEGMENT /REGIONE The FIX command causes an installed task or region to be loaded and G locked into memory. Subsequent requests for the task or region may be G serviced more quickly because it is memory-resident and does not have  to be loaded from the disk.= Not all tasks run properly when fixed. Some tasks may expectC data areas to contain certain values when loaded in from disk. TheE first time the task is run, these data areas may be modified and theB task may run unexpectedly thereafter. Tasks that initialize their? data areas, and therefore do not have this problem, are called serially reentrant.E Overlaid tasks may be fixed and, if their root segments are seriallyF reentrant, will run correctly. However, since their overlaid segmentsA must still be read in from disk (unless the task was built usingE memory resident overlays), not much is gained by using this command.0 Only a privileged user may use the FIX command.E For more information on the FIX qualifiers, type HELP FIX qualifier.2 READONLY_SEGMENT FIX/READONLY_SEGMENT tasknameF The /READONLY qualifier allows the fixing of the read-only segment of a multiuser task.2 REGION FIX/REGION regionname> The /REGION qualifier allows the fixing of a common region. $ FORTRAN[/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s] Command Qualifiers:/ /[NO]CHECK /SOURCE9 /CODE:arg /[NO]STANDARD:arg9 EAE ALL: EIS NONE< FIS SOURCE< THREADED SYNTAXP /CONTINUATIONS:n /[NO]TRACEBACK:arg B /[NO]DLINES ALL = /[NO]EXTEND BLOCKSP /FOR LINES < /F4P NAMES; /[NO]F77 NONE< /[NO]I4 /USING:user compiler4 /[NO]LIST /[NO]VECTORSD /[NO]LINE_NUMBERS /[NO]WARNINGS 3 /[NO]MACHINE_CODE /WORK_FILES( /[NO]MAP < /[NO]SHAREABLE D The FORTRAN command invokes either the DIGITAL FORTRAN IV compiler, (/FOR), or the FORTRAN-77 compiler (/F77). = Type HELP FORTRAN qualifier for more information on command qualifiers.2 FOR FORTRAN/FOR filespec[,s]E The /FOR qualifier specifies that the DIGITAL FORTRAN IV compiler isC to be invoked. This is the default FORTRAN 00}compiler. The default $ file type for source files is .FTN.2 F4P FORTRAN/F4P filespec[s]A The /F4P qualifier specifies the FORTRAN IV-PLUS compiler. The E system must include the FORTRAN IV-PLUS Object Module Library (OLB) F and Object Time System (OTS) for this qualifier to work. Therefore, = your system or library UFD must include the following files: F4POTS.OLB F4P.TSKAPlease note that FORTAN IV-PLUS has been superseded by FORTAN-77.2 NOF77#F772 F77 FORTRAN/F77 filespec[,s] FORTRAN/NOF77 filespec[,s]C The /F77 qualifier specifies that DIGITAL's FORTRAN-77 compiler beB invoked. This compiler embodies a new FORTRAN standard, but alsoE includes most features of the previous FORTRAN standard. SpecifyingB /F77 means the code will be compiled according to the FORTRAN-77> standard. Specifying /NOF77 means the code will be compiledF according to the rules of the previous FORTRAN standard (1966) ratherE than the new standard (1977). See the FORTRAN documentation suppliedC with your system for more information on the FORTRAN-77 standard. 2 NOLIST#NOLIST2 LIST% FORTRAN/LIST[:filespec] filespec[,s] FORTRAN filespec[,s]/LISTG The /LIST qualifier specifies that a compiler listing be generated. G If a filespec is not specified, the listing file will have the same 3 name as the last source file, with a type of .LST. /NOLIST is the default.F /LIST as a command qualifier causes the listing to be printed on the E line printer and placed in your UFD. /LIST as a filespec qualifier D places the file in your directory, but it is not passed to the line@ printer; also, the listing file will have the same name as the H filespec with the typ .LST /MACHINE_CODE, /MAP, and /SOURCE also work this way.= All the listing-related qualifiers--/MACHINE_CODE, /MAP, andE /SOURCE--also imply /LIST. If you use any of them, you do not needF /LIST unless you wish to give the listing file a name different from the default name.N See also HELP FORTRAN MACHINE_CODE, HELP FORTRAN MAP and HELP FORTRAN SOURCE.2 NOMACHINE_CODE #MACHINE_CODE2 MACHINE_CODE" FORTRAN/MACHINE_CODE filespec[,s]" FORTRAN filespec[,s]/MACHINE_CODEM The /MACHINE_CODE qualifier specifies that you wish the compiler listing to N include binary machine code and diagnostics. The default is /NOMACHINE_CODE.N /MACHINE_CODE as a command qualifier causes the listing to be printed on the M line printer and placed in your UFD. /MACHINE_CODE as a filespec qualifier D places the file in your directory, but it is not passed to the line@ printer; also, the listing file will hav3 the same name as the filespec, with the type .LST. M /MACHINE_CODE implies /LIST. You do not need to use /LIST unless you wish to> give the listing file a name different from the default name.2 PIC#CODE2 POSITION_INDEPENDENT#CODE2 EAE#CODE2 FIS#CODE 2 THREADED#CODE2 EIS#CODE2 CODE( FORTRAN/FOR/CODE:(arg[,s]) filespec[,s] EAE EIS FIS THREADEDC The /CODE qualifier specifies that the FORTAN IV code has certain E characteristcs. The THREADED argument means the code is threaded. D EAE means that the code uses the Extended Arithmetic Element. EIS H means that the code uses the Extended Instruction Set. FIS means that C the code uses the Floating Instruction Set; FIS also includes EIS.& This qualifier is for FORTAN IV only. 2 NOSOURCE #SOURCE2 SOURCE FORTRAN/SOURCE filespec[,s] FORTRAN filespec[,s]/SOURCEN The /SOURCE qualifier specifies that you wish the compiler listing to include* the source code. /SOURCE is the default.H /SOURCE as a command qualifier causes the listing to be printed on the G line printer and placed in your UFD. /SOURCE as a filespec qualifier D places the file in your directory, but it is not passed to the line@ printer; also, the listing file will have the same name as the  filespec with the type .LST. F /SOURCE implies /LIST. You do not ne00TADATADATADATADATADATAed to use /LIST unless you wish A to give the listing file a name different from the default name.2 NOMAP#MAP2 MAP FORTRAN/MAP filespec[,s]  FORTRAN filespec[,s]/MAPK The /MAP qualifier specifies that you wish the compiler listing to include7 a storage map and diagnostics. The default is /NOMAP.E /MAP as a command qualifier causes the listing to be printed on the D line printer and placed in your UFD. /MAP as a filespec qualifier D places the file in your directory, but it is not passed to the line@ printer; also, the listing file will have the same name as the  filespec with the type .LST.F /MAP implies /LIST. You do not need to use /LIST unless you with to > give the listing file a name different from the default name. 2 NOOBJECT#OBJECT2 OBJECT' FORTRAN/OBJECT[:filespec] filespec[,s] FORTRAN/NOOBJECT filespec[,s]B The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that an object file be generated.G This is the default. If a filespec is not specified, the object fileG will have the same name as the last source file, with a type of .OBJ.F The /NOOBJECT qualifier specifies that no object module is created. G You can use the /NOOBJECT qualifier to get a compiler listing file and1 check for errors without generating object code. 2 NOCHECK#CHECK2 CHECK FORTRAN/F77/CHECK filespec[,s]L The /CHECK qualifier tells the compiler to generate code to check that all G array references are within the array address bounds specified by the B program. Individual subscripts are not checked against dimension 8 specifications. This qualifier is for FORTRAN-77 only. The default is /NOCHECK.2 CONTINUATIONS) FORTRAN/F77/CONTINUATIONS:n filespec[,s]K The /CONTINUATIONS:n qualifier specifies the compiler will accept at leastI n continuation lines for a statement in the program. (You may have fewerD than n continuation lines.) The value of n may be between 0 and 99." The default is /CONTINUATIONS:19./ This qualifier is for the FORTRAN-77 compiler. 2 NOD_LINES#DLINES2 DLINES FORTRAN/[NO]DLINES filespec[,s]C The /DLINES qualifier tells a FORTRAN compiler that lines with a DB in column one are to be compiled. The default is /NODLINES, which6 means these lines are to be treated as comment lines.4 This qualifier is for the FORTRAN-77 compiler only.2 IDENTIFICATION$ FORTRAN/IDENTIFICATION filespec[,s]I The /IDENTIFICATION qualifier instructs a FORTRAN compiler to print its : identification and version number on the user's terminal.2 NOI4#I42 I4 FORTRAN/I4 filespec[,s]G The /I4 qualifier causes two-word default allocation for integer vari- ables. O Under the default, /NOI4, a single storage word will be the default allocationB for integer variables not given an explicit length specification. 2 NOSHAREABLE #SHAREABLE 2 SHAREABLE# FORTRAN/F77/SHAREABLE filespec[,s]N The /SHAREABLE qualifier directs the compiler to generate pure code and pure K data sections as read-only, in order to take advantage of code sharing in : multiuser tasks on RSX-11M-PLUS systems. The default is  /NOSHAREABLE.B This qualifier is for the FORTRAN-77 and FORTRAN IV compilers on  RSX-11M-PLUS systems only. 2 NOSTANDARD #STANDARD 2 STANDARD( FORTRAN/F77/STANDARD[:arg] filespec[,s] ALL NONE SOURCE SYNTAX I The /STANDARD qualifier directs the compiler to look in your source codeI for extensions to ANSI standard (X3.9-1928) FORTRAN at the full languageF level. If the compiler finds extensions, it flags them and produces N informational diagnostics about them. (To receive informational diagnostics,' you must set the warning switch, /WR.)= ALL Informational diagnostics for all detected extensions.: NONE No informational diagnostics. Same as /NOSTANDARD.< SOURCE Informational diagnostics for lowercase letters and! tab characters in source code.9 SYNTAX Informational diagnostics for syntax extensio00w}ns.G If no argument is supplied, /STANDARD is the same as /STANDARD:SYNTAX.. The default is /STANDARD:NONE or /NOSTANDARD.4 This qualifier is for the FORTRAN-77 compiler only.2 NOLINE_NUMBERS #LINE_NUMBERS2 LINE_NUMBERS& FORTRAN/FOR/LINE_NUMBERS filespec[,s]F The /LINE_NUMBERS qualifier tells the FORTRAN IV compiler to include M Internal Sequence Numbers. These internal sequence numbers take up space in J the generated object code and may have some detrimental effect on programE execution speed. However, they are useful in informing you what line= caused your program to err, should an execution error occur. The default is /NOLINE_NUMBERS.; This switch is recognized only by the FORTRAN IV compiler. 2 NOTRACEBACK #TRACEBACK 2 TRACEBACK' FORTRAN/F77/TRACEBACK:arg filespec[,s] ALL BLOCKS LINES NAMES" NONE  L The /TRACEBACK qualifier controls the amount of extra code included in the H compiled output for use by the OTS during error traceback. This code isB used in producing diagnostic information and in identifying whichE statement in the FORTRAN source program caused an error condition to be detected during execution. 5 ALL Error traceback information is compiled for all4 source statements and for function and subroutine entries.9 BLOCKS Traceback information is compiled for subroutine5 and function entries and for initial statements in0 sequences called blocks. LINES Same as ALL 7 NAMES Traceback information is compiled only for sub- routine and function entries+ NONE No traceback information is produced" The default is /TRACEBACK:BLOCKS." This qualifier is for FORTRAN-77. 2 NOVECTORS#VECTORS 2 VECTORS% FORTRAN/FOR/[NO]VECTORS filespec[,s]G The /VECTORS qualifier tells the FORTRAN IV compiler to vector arrays.B Vectoring of arrays increases the size of the object program, but decreases the execution time. /VECTORS is the default.; This switch is recognized only by the FORTRAN IV compiler. 2 NOWARNINGS #WARNINGS 2 WARNINGS" FORTRAN/[NO]WARNINGS filespec[,s]B The /WARNINGS qualifier tells the compiler to issue warning diag- nostics. /WARNINGS is the default.F This switch is recognized by the FORTRAN IV and FORTRAN-77 compilers.2 USING) FORTRAN/USING:user compiler filespec[,s]C The /USING qualifier allows you to invoke a FORTRAN compiler otherC than one of the DIGITAL FORTRAN compilers. See your system manager3 about the availability of other FORTRAN compilers. 2 WORK_FILES# FORTRAN/WORK_FILES:n filespec[,s]E The /WORK_FILES qualifier specifies the number of temporary on-disk E files you wish used during the compilation. The value n can be fromD 1 through 3; the default is 2. Increasing the number of work filesC increases the maximum possible size of your program, but decreases the speed of compilation. E HELP[/OUTPUT:filespec][/qualifier] [%] [parameter1] [...parameter9]  Command Qualifiers /CLI:cliname /DCL /FILE /GROUP /LOCAL /MCR /OUTPUT:filespecE The HELP command without qualifiers or parameters displays the list D of HELP parameters for the CLI for which you terminal is set. The A parameters are the commands that your CLI uses for which further HELP is available.8 The default qualifier is the same as your current CLI. I For information on the above qualifiers, type HELP HELP qualifier. For 9 information on HELP file format, type HELP HELP FORMAT. 2 FORMAT@HELPF2 OUTPUT$ HELP/OUTPUT:filespec [parameter[s]]G Permits you to name an output file where the requested HELP text is toF be saved. The default is /OUTPUT:TI:, which prints the text on your  terminal screen.2 LOCAL HELP/LOCAL [param[s]] or HELP % [param[s]]G Specifies that the HELP text is in the file HELP.HLP in the default? directory on the default volume. H00wxTADATADATADATADATADATAELP/LOCAL and HELP % are equivalent.2 GROUP HELP/GROUP [param[s]] G Specifies that the HELP text is in the file HELP.HLP in the directory+ [current group,1] on the default volume. 2 CLI HELP/CLI:cliname [param[s]]G Specifies that the HELP text begins in the file LB:[1,2]cli.HLP. ThisH qualifier is for installations with CLIs other thatn MCR or DCL for  which HELP is provided.2 MCR HELP/MCR [param[s]]G Specifies that the HELP text begins in the file LB:[1,2]MCR.HLP. This) is the default for terminals set to MCR.2 DCL HELP/DCL [param[s]]G Specifies that the HELP text begins in the file LB:[1,2]DCL.HLP. This) is the default for terminals set to DCL.2 FILE HELP/FILE:filespec [param[s]]G Specifies any file where HELP text is located. If you do not give aD complete file specification, the defaults are LB:[1,2]filename.HLP. HELP/filename [param[s]] J Specifies that the HELP text is located in the file LB:[1,2]filename.HLP 1 where filename is a 1- to 9-character file name. HOLD/JOB queuename [uic]jobname HOLD/ENTRY:n < The HOLD/JOB and HOLD/ENTRY commands hold a job in a queue.? A job that is held is not eligible to be processed until it is> explicitly released. This command does not hold jobs that are active. H The HOLD/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it is the H only way to unambiguously refer to a specific job. Two or more jobs in E the same queue may have the same name but never have the same entry H number. Job entry numbers are displayed with the SHOW QUEUE command.  * For more information see HELP SHOW QUEUE.  See also HELP RELEASE.- INITIALIZE[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabel eH /ACCESSED:n /FILE_PROTECTION:(code); /BAD_BLOCKS:arg /HEADERS:nT; AUTOMATIC /INDEX:argA MANUAL BEGINNING> NOAUTOMATIC MIDDLE; OVERRIDE END9 (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL) n) (OVERRIDE,MANUAL)nI /DENSITY:arg /LABEL:VOLUME_ACCESSIBILITY:"c"OA 800 /MAXIMUM_FILES:nE/ 1600 /OWNER:[uic] * 6250 /PROFESSIONAL5 HIGH /PROTECTION:(code) 7 LOW /[NO]SHOW 4 /EXTENSION:n /WINDOWS:n /FORMAT O The INITIALIZE command sets up a volume in Files-11 disk structure. For more LG information on a given qualifier, see HELP INITIALIZE qualifier. Note:E that you must mount the volume using the /FOREIGN qualifier for the E MOUNT command. See HELP MOUNT.C For information on INITIALIZE/UPDATE, type HELP INITIALIZE UPDATE.GC For information on INITIALIZE/FORMAT, type HELP INITIALIZE FORMAT. A Privileged users can initialize queues and processors. See HELP 0 INITIALIZE PROCESSOR and HELP INITIALIZE QUEUE.2 FORMAT@FORMATu2 UPDATE3 INITI00}ALIZE/UPDATE[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabeln /ACCESSED:n /DENSITY:arga HIGHu LOW /EXTENSION:nr* /FILE_PROTECTION:(code)( /LABEL:newvolumelabel# /MAXIMUM_FILES:nr /OWNER:[uic]  /PROFESSIONAL% /PROTECTION:(code)q /[NO]SHOW /WINDOWS:nEA The INITIALIZE command creates a Volume Home Block that includesA@ a number of values used by the ACP when the volume is mounted. ? INITIALIZE/UPDATE uses the HOME utility to alter some of those E values without affecting the other data on the volume. This commandd: is only for disk and DECtape volumes in Files-11 format. B For information on a given qualifier, type HELP INITIALIZE UPDATE qualifier. 3 ACCESSED:n INITIALIZE/UPDATE/ACCESSED:n > The /ACCESSED:n qualifier specifies the approximate number ofC directories that will be accessed simultaneously during the mount.e. Legal values for n range from 1 through 127. A Note that increasing the /ACCESSED value increases the amount ofl system pool used. 3 DENSITY  INITIALIZE/UPDATE/DENSITY:arg HIGHo LOWB This command line checks the /DENSITY value established when the D volume was initialized. It does not alter the density in the Volume Home Block., For more help, type HELP INITIALIZE DENSITY 3 EXTENSIONo INITIALIZE/UPDATE/EXTENSION:n@ Specifies the number of blocks by which a file will be extended> if it has exhausted its space allocation. Valid values for n range from 1 through 127. " Default is set by system manager.3 FILE_PROTECTION ) INITIALIZE/UPDATE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code)D The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for? new files created on a volume. Each access code consists of aB positional keyword specifying the group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:,B WORLD:) followed by a 4-letter code specifying the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to volume! W - allow write access to volume." E - allow extend access to volume" D - allow delete access to volume3 LABELa .' INITIALIZE/UPDATE/LABEL:newvolumelabelE; Permits you to change the volume label. Volume labels canc" contain as many as 12 characters.3 OWNERt INITIALIZE/UPDATE/OWNER:[uic]% Specifies the owner of the volume. f t3 MAXIMUM_FILES," INITIALIZE/UPDATE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n? Specifies the maximum number of files permitted on the volume.a= This value must not be greater than the maximum value on the current volume. 3 PROFESSIONAL1 INITIALIZE/UPDATE/PROFESSIONAL ddnn: volumelabelIB The /PROFESSIONAL qualifier alters the values in the Volume Home ) Block in a Professional 300 Series disk.a? You cannot use this qualifier with any other qualifier except [; /SHOW. When /SHOW is also used, the system displays the U following message:Z& Volume initialized with /PROFESSIONAL x 3 PROTECTION l$ INITIALIZE/UPDATE/PROTECTION:(code)0 Specifies the volume protection for the volume.3 NOSHOW#SHOWm3 SHOW INITIALIZE/UPDATE/[NO]SHOWA; Specifies that the information about the volume whose homei< block is being updated is to be displayed on your terminal. /NOSHOW is the default. 3 WINDOWSs INITIALIZE/UPDATE/WINDOWS:nA Specifies the default number of mapping pointers to be allocatedp< for file windows when the file is accessed. A file window ? consists of a number of mapping pointers stored in memory when: the file is opened.- Legal values for n range from 1 through 127.S2 INPUTH #CARD_READER2 DEVICE #PROCESSOR 2 PRINTERs #PROCESSOR2 BATCH_PROCESSOR #PROCESSOR2 APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORo o6 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]" APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR BATCH_PROCESSORm DEVICE o PRINTER  PROCESSOR . J The INITIALIZE/pr00TADATADATADATADATADATAocessortype command initializes a processor and makes itB known to the queue manager. This is generally done in the system startup command file. DN Note that /DEVICE and /PRINTER are synonyms for initializing processors whichG are associated with some hardware device such as a printer or plotter.cL This is the default processor type. Use /BATCH_PROCESSOR for initializing K batch processors. Use /APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR when your output device is < not a physical device but rather some software application. mE The following qualifiers are available. For more information on the @ following qualifiers, type HELP INITIALIZE PROCESSOR qualifier. t7 /FLAG_PAGE /LOWERCASE /UPPERCASE ' /FORMS /[NO]SHAREABLEmF See HELP INITIALIZE CARD_READER for information on initializing input processors. s 3 FLAG_PAGEE R3 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/FLAG_PAGE:nI DEVICE PRINTER  nE The /FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies how many, if any, job flag pages lE and file flag pages are to be generated for a print job. These flagi? pages separate and identify jobs and files within those jobs.  A# Valid values for n are 0, 1, or 2./ E# The default value is /FLAG_PAGE:1.] RA It is recommended that flag pages be used on normal output formsa> as they are the only way to separate and identify print jobs. oI It is recommended that flag pages NOT be used on special forms, such as L checks, as they will write over some of these (possibly prenumbered) forms. fB This qualifier is only valid when initializing a print processor.3 FORMSr / INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/FORMS:n DEVICE PRINTERM The /FORMS qualifier specifies the physical form type for the printer being bJ initialized. An installation may have up to 256 different physical forms M used for different jobs. For example, one might have normal 11 1/2 x 14 7/8 aN paper for memos and special forms for paychecks, invoices, federal tax forms,= etc.. Each of these forms is given a number to identify it. l nK The Queue Manager will only dequeue a job to a printer if the form number OK of the form in the printer matches the form number requested by the print cJ job. Therefore, many jobs using a variety of forms may reside in a queue L at the same time but only those with a certain form number will be printed 0 on the printer to which that queue is assigned. 3 LOWERCASEf #UPPERCASE 3 UPPERCASEs r5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]LOWERCASEf5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]UPPERCASET DEVICE PRINTERtC Either the /LOWERCASE or /NOUPPERCASE qualifier specifies that theh: device being initialized has the lowercase character set.C /NOLOWERCASE and /UPPERCASE initialize a device with the uppercasetA character option. These qualifiers determine which jobs are sent G to the specified device. They do not cause a translation of lowercase 3 characters to uppercase when the job is printed. m NE The defaults are /LOWERCASE and /NOUPPERCASE, which are equivalent. 3 NOSHAREABLEE #SHAREABLE 3 SHAREABLE t5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]SHAREABLEt DEVICE PRINTERhD The /[NO]SHAREABLE qualifier specifies whether tasks other than the? device processor have access to the device being spooled. If eE /SHAREABLE is specified, the processor owns the device only for the eE duration of a job. If no job is currently being printed, the device ) is available for any other task to use. E dB If /NOSHAREABLE is specified, the device is always "owned" by theH processor, whether or not a job is being printed. This is the default. 2 CARD_READERE6 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]1 CARD_READER /BATCH_QUEUE:queuenamec3 INPUT /CONSOEL:ddnn: A /PRINTER_QUEUE:queuenamee ; The INITIALIZE/CARD_READER command initializes a processoreE a00}ssociated with a card reader device. This is referred to as "inputB0 spooling." INPUT is a synonym for CARD_READER. I The /BATCH_QUEUE and /PRINTER_QUEUE qualifiers specify default batch andI print queues for jobs read from the card reader. The defaults for these 9 qualifiers are the queues BATCH and PRINT, respectively.  J The /CONSOLE qualifier specifies which terminal will be used for messagesG that are displayed by the card reader processor. The default is CO0:.t2 QUEUE  c' INITIALIZE/QUEUE queuename[/qualifier]v /PRINTERe /BATCHu /NOWARNINGS  N The INITIALIZE/QUEUE command creates a queue. This is generally done in the  system startup command file.  K The /PRINTER and /BATCH qualifiers to the queuename parameter identify the J type of queue being initialized. The /PRINTER qualifier is the default.  hH The /NOWARNINGS qualifier inhibits error messages. The user gets error messages by default.f 2 DENSITYt) INITIALIZE/DENSITY:arg ddnn: volumelabelq 800 1600 6250 HIGH LOW A The /DENSITY qualifier specifies the density at which a magnetic A tape is to be written. In the case of a diskette, it checks that I the diskette was formatted at the requested density. Note that this is b not true for RX50 diskettes. F The default value is the lower of the two densities on a dual densityG drive. On single density drives, the qualifier serves as a check thatI- the drive operates at the requested density. ? NOTE: The /DENSITY qualifier is the only legal qualifier when O# initializing magnetic tapes.e 2 EXTENSION ) INITIALIZE/EXTENSION:n ddnn: volumelabel C The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the default number of blocks by H which a file will be extended when it has exhausted its allotted space.# The default value is /EXTENSION:5. 2 HEADERSd' INITIALIZE/HEADERS:n ddnn: volumelabelg? The /HEADERS qualifier specifies the number of file headers toe@ be allocated initially in the index file. The five system files> INDEXF.SYS, BITMAP.SYS, BADBLK.SYS, CORIMG.SYS and 000000.DIR% are not included in the value for n.Z2 INDEXO' INITIALIZE/INDEX:arg ddnn: volumelabelu BEGINNINGe MIDDLE ENDo ns= The /INDEX qualifier specifies where on the volume the indexl> file is to be placed. This qualifier can be used to force theB index file, the Master File Directory, and the storage allocation= file to a specific location on the disk, usually to minimizet access time.d6 The default is /INDEX:MIDDLE for all disk devices and0 /INDEX:BEGINNING for all magnetic tape devices.2 MAXIMUM_FILESe- INITIALIZE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n ddnn: volumelabel C The /MAXIMUM_FILES qualifier specifies the maximum number of filesEI permitted on the volume. The value for n includes the five system files.. The minimum value for n is 5.2 OWNER) INITIALIZE/OWNER:[uic] ddnn: volumelabelh= The /OWNER qualifier specifies the owning UIC of the volume.a" The brackets are required syntax.# The default value is /OWNER:[1,1].iB The volume will not be protected at the UIC level. Nonprivileged C users, however, will not have direct access to mounted volumes by e nonprivileged tasks.e 2 PROTECTION/ INITIALIZE/PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabeleC The /PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for allf@ files created on the volume being initialized. Each access codeA consists of a positional keyword specifying the protection groupaG (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) folowed by a 4-code group specifying] the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to fileo E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deleteds@ The default value is /PROTECTION:(S:RWED,O:RWED,G:RWED,W:RWED).2 NOSHOW#SHOWC2 SHOW& INITIALIZE/[NO]SHOW ddnn: volumelabel B The /SHOW qualifier specifies that you wish to see all the valuesE with which the volume is being initialized. /NOSHOW is the default.00TADATADATADATADATADATA These are the DCL values: ) Labelo /ACCESSED /BAD_BLOCKSl /EXTENSION /FILE_PROTECTIONG /HEADERS o /INDEX /MAXIMUM_FILES /OWNER /PROTECTIONO /WINDOWW / 2 BAD_BLOCKS INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:arg q! AUTOMATIC  MANUAL NOAUTOMATIC OVERRIDE* (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL)) (OVERRIDE,MANUAL) F INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS uses the bad-block information generated by theI ANALYZE/MEDIA command to create the BADBLK.SYS file in the Files-11 diskIK structure. Type HELP INITIALIZE BAD_BLOCKS qualifier for more information. C Note that before you can use INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS you must first qE determine the location of the bad blocks by using the ANALYZE/MEDIA " command. See HELP ANALYZE MEDIA. 3 AUTOMATICE INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:AUTOMATICB Specifies that bad-block information for the volume is determinedB automatically from the information generated by the ANALYZE/MEDIA command. This is the default. 3 OVERRIDE INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:OVERRIDE F Specifies that the BADBLK.SYS file should not include the information7 on the last track of last-track devices, which containrD manufacturer-recorded bad block data. The OVERRIDE qualifier will F include the blocks of the last track into BADBLK.SYS. This qualifierD assumes that the bad block information is located on the last blockC before the last track. OVERRIDE is valid only for DL:-, DM:-, andy@ DR:-type devices and must be used if the OVERRIDE qualifier was( specified in the ANALYZE/MEDIA command.3 MANUAL INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:MANUALiE Specifies that bad-block information for the volume is to be enteredo by you from your terminal. 3 NO_AUTOMATIC #NOAUTOMATIC 3 NOAUTOMATIC " INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:NOAUTOMATICD Specifies that bad-block information generated by the ANALYZE/MEDIAD command should be ignored. All blocks on the disk, therefore, are accepted by the system as good.3 (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL)#AUTOMATIC,MANUALh3 AUTOMATIC,MANUAL* INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:(AUTOMATIC,MANUAL) : First reads bad-block information for the volume from theG information generated by the ANALYZE/MEDIA command. It then allows youu? to enter additional bad-block information from your terminal. I3 (OVERRIDE,MANUAL)M#OVERRIDE,MANUAL3 OVERRIDE,MANUALo) INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:(OVERRIDE,MANUAL) mF Specifies that the BADBLK.SYS file should not include the informationF on the last track of last-track devices, which contains manufacturer-C recorded bad-block data. This qualifier assumes that the bad-blockrE information is located on the last good block before the last track.tB The blocks of the last track will also be included in BADBLK.SYS.D The (OVERRIDE,MANUAL) qualifier also allows you to enter additionalE bad-block information from your terminal. (OVERRIDE,MANUAL) is validR, only for DL:-, DM:-, and DR:-type devices. 2 FILE_PROTECTIONi4 INITIALIZE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelE The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for qE files on a volume. Each access code consists of a positional keywordsE specifying the group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) followed by al6 4-letter code specifying the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to volume! W - allow write access to volumef" E - allow extend access to volume" D - allow delete access to volumeE The default value is /FILE_PROTECTION:(S:RWED,O:RWED,G:RWED,W:RWED).d 2 WINDOWSm' INITIALIZE/WINDOWS:n ddnn: volumelabel F The /WINDOWS qualifier specifies the number of mapping pointers to beB allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number ofB mapping pointers; it is stored in memory when the file is opened.! The default value is /WINDOWS:7.a 2 ACCESSED INITIALIZE/ACCESSED:nI This qualifier specifies 00}the number of directories that will be accessedtF simultaneously. Directory operations can be speeded up by increasing8 the /ACCESSED count, but at the potential cost of pool. nA The default for n is 3. Valid values for n range from 0 to 127.a2 PROFESSIONAL* INITIALIZE/PROFESSIONAL ddnn: volumelabel: This qualifier sets up a volume in Files-11 format for a  Professional 300 Series disk.2 LABELf* INITIALIZE/LABEL:VOLUME_ACCESSIBILITY:"c"B This qualifier limits access to the Files-11 volume that you are G producing. It applies to magnetic tapes only. The value for "c" can bD contain the letters A to Z, a number from 0 to 9, and the following+ characters: ! % ' () + , - . / : <=> ? ;  The default value is a blank. INSTALL[/qualifier[s]] filespec /[NO]CHECKPOINT /[NO]DEFER_BINDING /EXTENSION:nM /[NO]INTERPRETER G /MULTIUSER_PARTITION:parname  /PARTITION:parnameH /[NO]POSTMORTEM /PRIORITY:n /[NO]READONLY_COMMON /[NO]RESIDENT_HEADER /[NO]SLAVE /TASK_NAME:taskreferencename /[NO]TRANSLATION_ROUTINE:n /UIC:[uic] /[NO]WRITEBACKE The INSTALL command makes a specified task or common region known to F the system. An installed task is dormant until the Executive receives a request for it to run.OK For more information on the qualifiers above, type HELP INSTALL qualifier.N5 Only a privileged user may issue an INSTALL command. 2 NOCHECKPOINT #CHECKPOINT/ 2 CHECKPOINT INSTALL/CHECKPOINT filespec INSTALL/NOCHECKPOINT filespecE The /CHECKPOINT qualifier specifies whether or not the task is to be]@ checkpointable. The default is set at link time. This qualifier2 overrides the link-time checkpoint specification.2 NODEFER_BINDINGn#DEFER_BINDING2 DEFER_BINDINGq INSTALL/DEFER_BINDING filespecn! INSTALL/NODEFER_BINDING filespectMThe [NO]DEFER_BINDING qualifier specifies whether or not the task's header isaKbound to Executive data structures when the task is installed. The default,pN/DEFER_BINDING, specifies that binding to the Executive will be deferred untilLthe task is loaded into memory. Use of this qualifier resolves problems thatGoccur when a task is installed in more than one system (running or diskOIresident) at the same time. The /NODEFER_BINDING qualifier specifies thatf2binding occurs at the time the task is installed. 2 EXTENSIONN INSTALL/EXTENSION:n filespecnF The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies that n additional words of address% space are to be allocated to a task.N2 MULTIUSER_PARTITIONn g- INSTALL/MULTIUSER_PARTITION:parname filespeca iF The /MULTIUSER_PARTITION qualifier specifies the partition into which> the read-only portion of a multiuser task is to be installed. 2 PARTITIONt# INSTALL/PARTITION:parname filespecGD The /PARTITION qualifier specifies in what partition the task is toD be installed. The default is set at link time. This qualifier over-# rides the link-time specification.t 2 PRIORITY INSTALL/PRIORITY:n filespecG The /PRIORITY qualifier specifies the priority at which the task is toND run. The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the  default set at link time.2 DUMP #POSTMORTEMo 2 POSTMORTEM INSTALL/POSTMORTEM filespec INSTALL/NOPOSTMORTEM filespecK The /POSTMORTEM qualifier specifies whether or not a Postmortem Dump (PMD)kC is to be generated if the task aborts because of an SST error con-rF dition. The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the. link-time specification. See also HELP PMD. 2 NOINTERPRETERt #INTERPRETER 2 INTERPRETERr INSTALL/I00 z'TADATADATADATADATADATANTERPRETER filespecm INSTALL/NOINTERPRETER filespec: Specifies that the task being installed is a command lineB interpreter (CLI). You must install a CLI using the /INTERPRETERE qualifier before you can set a terminal to that CLI or work with theP CLI command.  e- The default is the /NOINTERPRETER qualifier.r n2 READONLY_COMMONf t! INSTALL/READONLY_COMMON filespecr# INSTALL/NOREADONLY_COMMON filespeci @ The /READONLY_COMMON qualifier specifies that the common being - installed should have only read-only access.N 2 NORESIDENT#RESIDENT_HEADER2 RESIDENT_HEADERb INSTALL/RESIDENT_HEADER i INSTALL/NORESIDENT_HEADER m@ THE /[NO]RESIDENT_HEADER qualifier specifies whether or not the= Executive's copy of the tasks's header will be stored in thee( system's dynamic storage region (pool).= When you specify the /RESIDENT_HEADER qualifier, the task iss6 installed as a resident header. When you specify the9 /NORESIDENT_HEADER qualifier (the default), the task is i# installed with an external header.c sA If you take the default /NORESIDENT_HEADER, the task's header isRA not kept in pool. Instead, a copy of the header is placed in a TE reserved area immediately below the task image. The Executive uses eF the copy of the header rather than the actual header. When the task G is checkpointed, the system writes the entire task image and the copy sD of the header into the checkpoint file. The header of the task is  left unchanged.2 SLAVEu INSTALL/SLAVE filespecl INSTALL/NOSLAVE filespeccH The /SLAVE qualifier specifies whether or not the task is to be slaved.G Data sent to a slaved task is marked with the TI: of the sending task. F When the installed task receives the data, the system sets the task'sG TI: to that associated with the data. The default is set at link time.i6 This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.J Note that data may not be sent to a slaved task running on a virtual ter- minal.n 2 TASK_NAMEu- INSTALL/TASK_NAME:taskreferencename filespeclG The /TASK_NAME qualifier specifies the name by which the task is to besH referred. The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.e2 TRANSLATION_ROUTINEa1 INSTALL/TRANSLATION_ROUTINE:n filespec [logical] F Loads character-translation routines so that the terminal driver can G translate between different character sets. Character translation in aF the terminal driver allows terminals that conform to other standards D to use the DIGITAL Multinational Character Set. This qualifier is privileged.  c2 UICa INSTALL/UIC:[uic] filespecfE The /UIC qualifier specifies the default UIC for the task. This taskiB UIC determines in what file-protection class it belongs, and thus! directly influences file access.t" The brackets are required syntax. 2 NOWRITEBACK #WRITEBACK 2 WRITEBACKe INSTALL/WRITEBACK INSTALL/NOWRITEBACKG Specifies whether or not a read/write common is to be written back to D the original task image file on a checkpoint or remove operation. G Taking the default (/NOWRITEBACK) means that the read/write common is I2 to be checkpointed to the system checkpoint file.A The LIBRARY command performs maintenance operations on a libraryD file. A library file is a direct-access file containing one or more modules.A There are three types of libraries. Object libraries hold object< modules and can be used as input to the Task Builder. MacroB libraries hold source macros and can be called in by the MACRO-11D Relocatable Assembler. Universal libraries can have any contents. = The LIBRARY command performs the following eight operations:8 CREATE DELE00z(}TE INSERT REMOVE9 COMPRESS EXTRACT LIST REPLACE3 For more information, type HELP LIBRARY operation.2 CREATEC LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])][/qualifier[s]] libspec [infilespec[,s]]4 Arguments: Qualifiers:: BLOCKS:n /[NO]GLOBALS4 GLOBAL:n /MACRO5 MODULES:n /OBJECT? /SELECTIVE_SEARCH6 /SQUEEZE8 /UNIVERSALJ The LIBRARY/CREATE command creates a library file and optionally inserts O one or more modules into it. The GLOBAL argument to LIBRARY/CREATE specifies O the number of entry point table (EPT) entries to allocate. The default number N is 512 for object libraries. The number of entry points is always forced to I zero for macro libraries. The MODULES argument specifies the number of L module name table (MNT) entries to allocate. The default value is 256. The O maximum number of entries is 4096. The BLOCKS argument specifies the size of B the library in 256-word blocks. The default size is 100 blocks. 7 For further help, type HELP LIBRARY CREATE qualifier. 3 NOGLOBALS#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALS@ LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [infilespec[,s]]N The /NOGLOBALS qualifier specifies that global symbols are not to be includedK in the entry point table. Use this qualifier if you wish to use the same ( global symbols in more than one module.I The /GLOBALS form of this qualifier is nonoperational. You must use theN GLOBAL argument to LIBRARY/CREATE to specify the number of entry point table entries.3 MACRO: LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/MACRO libspec [infilespec[,s]]I The /MACRO qualifier specifies that the library being created is a macro4 library. Default file type for the library is MLB.3 OBJECT; LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/OBJECT libspec [infilespec[,s]]H The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that the library being created consistsH of object modules. This is the default. The default file type for the library is OLB. 3 UNIVERSAL> LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/UNIVERSAL libspec [infilespec[,s]]F The /UNIVERSAL qualifier specifies that the library being created is D a universal library. The default file type for the library is UNI.3 SELECTIVE_SEARCHE LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec [infilespec[,s]]D The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted into an object library.E Object modules with the selective search attribute are given special: treatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in theH Task Builder's symbol table if they have previously been referenced by  other modules. 3 SQUEEZEB LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec [infilespec[,s]]D The /SQUEEZE qualifier will reduce the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.G Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macroF library file, but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked.A See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire libraries.2 DELETE" LIBRARY/DELETE libspec module[,s]D The LIBRARY/DELETE command deletes modules from a library file. TheB list can contain up to 15 modules. Each module is separated by a comma. For example:* LIBRARY/DELETE LIBRARY.OLB MOD1,MOD2,MOD3J See HELP LIBRARY REMOVE for information on removing global symbols (entry9 points) from a library. See also HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS.2 REMOVE" LIBRARY/REMOVE libspec global[,s]I The LIBRARY/REMOVE command removes global symbols (entry points) from a K library. The list of globals can include up to 15 elements. 00z0'TADATADATADATADATADATA Each element is separated by commas. For example:- LIBRARY/REMOVE LIBRARY.OLB GLOB1,GLOB2,GLOB3L See HELP LIBRARY DELETE for information on deleting modules from a library. 2 EXTRACT7 LIBRARY/EXTRACT[/OUTPUT[:filespec]] libspec module[,s]E The LIBRARY/EXTRACT command reads one or more modules from a libraryG file and writes them into a specified output file. The module list can? contain up to 8 elements. Each element is separated by commas.G The default for the /OUTPUT qualifier is to write the modules to your terminal. 2 INSERT3 LIBRARY/INSERT[/qualifier[s]] libspec filespec[,s] /[NO]GLOBALS /SELECTIVE_SEARCH /SQUEEZEE The LIBRARY/INSERT command inserts one or more files as modules intoH a library file. Type HELP LIBRARY INSERT qualifier for additional help. 3 NOGLOBALS#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALS2 LIBRARY/INSERT/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [filespec[,s]]= The /NOGLOBALS qualifier specifies that entry points for theC specified modules are not to be included in the entry point table.7 The /GLOBALS form of this qualifier is nonoperational.3 SELECTIVE_SEARCH5 LIBRARY/INSERT/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec filespec[,s]D The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted into an object library.E Object modules with the selective search attribute are given special: treatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in theI Task Builder's symbol table if they were previously referenced by other modules. 3 SQUEEZE2 LIBRARY/INSERT/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec filespec[,s]D The /SQUEEZE qualifier will reduce the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.G Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macroF library file, but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked.A See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire libraries.2 LIST. LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec][/qualifier[s] libspec /BRIEF /FULL# /[NO]NAMES@ The LIBRARY/LIST command produces a listing of the names of allG modules in the library file. The default output file for LIBRARY/LISTC is your terminal. Type HELP LIBRARY LIST qualifier for additional HELP. 3 ENTRIES#NAMES 3 NONAMES#NAMES3 NAMES& LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/NAMES libspecD The /NAMES qualifier produces a listing of the names of all modulesG in the library file and their corresponding entry points. The default7 is /NONAMES, which means the entry points are omitted.3 BRIEF& LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/BRIEF libspecM The /BRIEF qualifier specifies that you wish only module names listed. This is the default.3 FULL% LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/FULL libspecF The /FULL qualifier produces a listing of the names of all modules inH the library file and gives a module description of each: that is, size,5 date of insertion, and module-dependent information. 2 REPLACE4 LIBRARY/REPLACE[/qualifier[s]] libspec filespec[,s] /[NO]GLOBALS /SELECTIVE_SEARCH /SQUEEZEM The LIBRARY/REPLACE command replaces a module in a library with a new moduleH of the same name and deletes the old module. Type HELP LIBRARY REPLACE qualifier for additional HELP. 3 NOGLOBALS#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALS3 LIBRARY/REPLACE/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [filespec[,s]]= The /NOGLOBALS qualifier specifies that entry points for theC specified modules are not to be included in the entry point table. The default is /GLOBALS.3 SELECTIVE_SEARCH6 LIBRARY/REPLACE/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec filespec[,s]D The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted into an object library.E Object modules with the selective search attribute are given special: t00z8=}reatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in theI Task Builder's symbol table if they were previously referenced by other modules. 3 SQUEEZE3 LIBRARY/REPLACE/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec filespec[,s]@ The /SQUEEZE qualifier reduces the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.G Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macroE library file but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked. A See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire libraries. 2 SQUEEZE #COMPRESS 2 COMPRESS2 LIBRARY/COMPRESS[:(arg[,s])] libspec [newlibspec] BLOCKS:n GLOBAL:n MODULES:nC The LIBRARY/COMPRESS command physically deletes modules that have C been logically deleted through LIBRARY/DELETE. This commands putsD all free space at the end of the file, making it available for new H library module inserts. Additionally, the library table specification I can be altered for the resulting library. If you specify only a single E argument to LIBRARY COMPRESS, the parentheses are not required. If G you specify more than one argument, the arguments must be enclosed in % parentheses and separated by commas.M You can specify a new file name for the compressed library. If you do not, < a new version of the library with the same name is created.6 Do not confuse compressing with squeezing. See also  HELP LIBRARY CREATE SQUEEZE HELP LIBRARY INSERT SQUEEZE HELP LIBRARY REPLACE SQUEEZE3 EPT#GLOBAL3 GLOBAL/ LIBRARY/COMPRESS/GLOBAL:n libspec [newlibspec]F The /GLOBAL qualifier specifies the number of entry point table (EPT)E entries to allocate. The default number is the number of EPTs in theF old library file. The number of entry points is always forced to zero for macro libraries.3 MNT#MODULES 3 MODULES0 LIBRARY/COMPRESS/MODULES:n libspec [newlibspec]G The /MODULES qualifier specifies the number of module name table (MNT)cD entries to allocate. The default value is the number of MNTs in the9 old library file. The maximum number of entries is 4096.a3 SIZE#BLOCKS 3 BLOCKS/ LIBRARY/COMPRESS/BLOCKS:n libspec [newlibspec]oD The /BLOCKS qualifier specifies the size of the library in 256-word> blocks. The default size is the size of the old library file.0 LINK[/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s][/qualifier[s]] C The LINK command invokes the Task Builder to build a runnable taskA from object modules you have previously compiled (or assembled). G The following command builds a runnable task image from an object fileF (the output of the MACRO-11 Relocatable Assembler or of a high-level language compiler): - LINK filename1[.OBJ],filename2[.OBJ],...  H The task image file has the same name as the object file, with the fileG type TSK. If more than one filespec is specified, the task image fileG has the same file name as the first input filespec, but with the file type TSK. H Type HELP LINK OPTIONS for information on options available with LINK, K HELP LINK QUALIFIERS for a list of LINK qualifiers, HELP LINK qualifier J for an individual qualifier description, HELP TKB for more information E about the Task Builder, or HELP LINK C81 for information on linking5 COBOL-87 object files to produce a task image (TSK). 2 QUALIFIERS Command qualifiers:1 /OPTIONS= /ANCILLARY_PROCESSOR[:n] /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION4 /[NO]CHECKPOINT:arg /POSTMORTEM3 SYSTEM /[NO]PRINT9 TASK /PRIVILEGED[:n] 5 /CODE:arg /[NO]RECEIVE? CLI /[NO]RESIDENT_OVERLAYS. DATA_SPACE /SAVE7 EAE 00@'TADATADATADATADATADATA /[NO]SEGREGATE> FAST_MAP /[NO]SELECTIVE_SEARCH4 FPP /SEQUENTIAL9 OTS_FAST /SHAREABLE[:arg]; PIC COMMON< POSITION_INDEPENDENT LIBRARY9 /COMPATIBLE TASK: /[NO]CROSS-REFERENCE /SLAVE 9 /[NO]DEBUG[:filespec] /SLOW L /ERROR_LIMIT:n /SYMBOL_TABLE[:filespec] D /[NO]EXECUTABLE[:filespec] /[NO]SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY= /[NO]EXTERNAL /[NO]TASK[:filespec]. /FAST /TKB / /FULL_SEARCH /TRACE6 /[NO]HEADER /[NO]WARNINGS2 /IO_PAGE /[NO]WIDE) /LONG ) /MAP[:filespec] ) /[NO]MEMORY_MANAGEMENT[:n]  Filespec Qualifiers:F /BASIC /INCLUDE:(module1,...module8)1 /[NO]CONCATENATE /LIBRARY= /DEFAULT_LIBRARY /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION: /[NO]GLOBALS /SELECTIVE_SEARCH /For more information, type HELP LINK qualifier.2 ANCILLARY_PROCESSOR2 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/ANCILLARY_PROCESSOR[:n] filespec H The /ANCILLARY_PROCESSOR qualifier identifies the task as an AncillaryA Control Processor (ACP). The parameter n specifies the first APRD used by the ACP. Acceptable values are 0, 4, or 5. The default is 5.   Abbreviation: /ANC:n4 /ANC:n corresponds to the /AC switch in TKB format.4 Default: The Task Builder does not specify an ACP.2 BASIC LINK filespec/BASICH The /BASIC qualifier specifies that the input file is a CMD (command) K file that the BASIC-PLUS-2 compiler creates. /BASIC may affect any output$ file. Do not modify the CMD file.  Abbreviation: /BAS# There is no equivalent TKB switch.C Default: The Task Builder does not expect a BASIC-PLUS-2 command  file.2 NOCHECKPOINT #CHECKPOINT 2 CHECKPOINT. LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/CHECKPOINT[:SYSTEM] filespec, LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/CHECKPOINT[:TASK] filespec G The /CHECKPOINT qualifier specifies that the task is to be built J checkpointable. The default is a task that the system cannot checkpoint.  ( Abbreviation: /CHECK:SYS or /CHECK:TASE SYSTEM is the default and specifies task checkpointing to the system9 checkpoint file. This is the default checkpointing file.A TASK specifies task checkpointing into its own checkpoint space.D Tasks built with the /CHECKPOINT:TASK qualifier take up about twice< as much disk space because the Task Builder allocates space+ in the task image file for checkpointing. C /CHECKPOINT corresponds to the /AL and /CP switches in TKB format." Default: No checkpointing occurs. 2 COMPATIBLE% LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/COMPATIBLE filespec F The /COMPATIBLE qualifier specifies the memory-resident overlay H segments that the Task Builder is to align on 256-word boundaries for D compatibility with other implementations of the mapping directives.  Abbreviation: /COMG Normally, the Task Builder aligns the memory-resident overlay segments on 32-word boundaries. 9 /COMPATIBLE corresponds to the /CM switch in TKB format.A Default: The Task Builder aligns segments on 32-word boundaries.2 NOCONCATENATE #CONCATENATE 2 CONCATENATE+ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM filespec/[NO]CONCATENATE  K The /NOCONCATENATE qualifier includes only the first module of the input ) file to which you attach this qualifier.K The /CONCATENATE qualifier includes all the modules of the input file to ! which you attach this qualifier.  Abbreviation: /CON or /NOCON: /CONCATENATE corresponds to the /CC switch in TKB format.F Default: The Task Builder concatenates all modules in the input file.2 NOCROSS_REFE00H=}RENCE#CROSS_REFERENCE2 CROSS_REFERENCE . LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE filespec J The /CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier causes the ..CRF system task to append a B listing of symbol cross-references to the Task Builder map file. D /CROSS_REFERENCE causes LINK to include the /MAP qualifier as well.A You do not need to specify the /MAP qualifier unless you want to" specify a name for the map file. Abbreviation: /CROS or /NOCROS> /CROSS_REFERENCE corresponds to the /CR switch in TKB format.B Default: /NOCROSS_REFERENCE; The Task Builder does not produce a cross-reference.2 DEBUG + LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/DEBUG[:filespec] filespec P The /DEBUG qualifier causes the inclusion of a debugging aid in the task image.L If you do not specify a debugging aid in :filespec, TKB links the task withD the Online Debugging Tool (ODT), a DIGITAL utility included in most RSX systems. H If you have a user-written debugger, you may specify it in the filespec1 argument. This file should be an object module.   Abbreviation: /DEB[:filespec]4 /DEBUG corresponds to the /DA switch in TKB format.< Default: The Task Builder links no debugger with the task.2 DEFAULT_LIBRARY6 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM filespec1,filespec2/DEFAULT_LIBRARY  G The /DEFAULT_LIBRARY qualifier specifies that the Task Builder is to F use the object library to which you apply the option, rather than useK LB0:[1,1]SYSLIB.OLB as the default library to search for unresolved global references.  + You may apply /DEF to one input file only. Abbreviation: /DEF> /DEFAULT_LIBRARY corresponds to the /DL switch in TKB format.E Default: There is no default library and the Task Builder uses none.2 FAST  LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/FAST filespec J /FAST specifies that you want to use the Fast Task Builder (FTB) to buildJ the task. The FTB is considerably faster than the default Task Builder.  M Several restrictions apply to tasks built by the FTB. FTB does not support:  o New map format o Overlaid tasks o Privileged tasks& o Creation of resident libraries$ o Linking to cluster libraries( o Production of symbol table files o FORTRAN virtual arrays= The FTB limits the LINK command to the following qualifiers: /[NO]CHECKPOINT[:SYSTEM] /CODE:EAE /CODE:FPP /CODE:OTS_FAST /CROSS_REFERENCE /DEBUG[:filespec] /LIBRARY /LONG /MAP[:filespec] /[NO]PRINT /WIDE9 The FTB limits the use of options. Usable options are: > ACTFIL RESLIB > ASG RESCOM > COMMON STACK 3 EXTSCT SUPLIB1 LIBR TASK2 MAXBUF UNITS RESCOMD In addition, the FTB has a nonstandard and undocumented map format. Abbreviation: /FAS? Default: Not /FAST; The system uses the standard Task Builder.2 FULL_SEARCH & LINK/TAS/AMP/SYM/FULL_SEARCH filespecK The /FULL_SEARCH qualifier specifies that the Task Builder should search F all co-tree (overlay) segments for a matching definition or reference@ when processing modules from the default object module library. Abbreviation: /FUL: /FULL_SEARCH corresponds to the /FU switch in TKB format.E Default: Not /FULL_SEARCH; TKB limits its search to the root of the # main tree and to the current tree. 2 NOGLOBALS#GLOBALS 2 GLOBALS# LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM filespec/GLOBALS% LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM filespec/NOGLOBALS G The /GLOBALS qualifier informs the Task Builder to include in the C MAP file global symbols that the input file refers to and defines.L The /NOGLOBALS qualifier informs the Task Builder to exclude from the MAP ? file global symbols that the input file refers to and defines. Abbreviation: /GLO6 /GLOBALS corresponds to the /MA switch in TKB format.00P'TADATADATADATADATADATA@ Default: /GLOBALS; the Task Builder includes global symbols in the MAP file. 2 NOHEADER#HEADER2 HEADER# LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOHEADER filespec! LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/HEADER filespecJ The /NOHEADER qualifier specifies that the task be built without a task N header. If you are building a shared region or a driver, you should specify  this qualifier. G The /HEADER qualifier specifies that the task be built with a task J header. A task header is necessary if the task is to run. You must use ! the STACK=0 option with /HEADER. Abreviation: /HEA or /NOHEA5 /HEADER corresponds to the /HD switch in TKB format.9 /NOHEADER corresponds to the /-HD switch in TKB format. 3 Default: /HEADER; the task is built with a header. 2 NOIO_PAGE#IO_PAGE 2 IO_PAGE" LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/IO_PAGE filespec$ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOIO_PAGE filespecK The /IO_PAGE qualifier, the Task Builder assumes that the task is over 12KN words in size and must map to the I/O page. /IO_PAGE corresponds to the use of the /IP switch in TKB. J The /NOIO_PAGE qualifier informs the Task Builder that the task is over 6 12K words and purposely does not map to the I/O page.  Abbreviation: /IO or /NOIOI Default: /IO_PAGE; TKB assumes that the 12K task is to map the I/O page.2 LONG LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/LONG filespec H The /LONG qualifier specifies that the MAP file that the Task Builder L produces is to include additional file information on modules used in the K task build. The long map does not include file information on modules from the system library. J If you include /LONG, LINK creates the /MAP qualifier as well. You need B only specify /MAP if you want to supply a name for the map file.  Abbreviation: /LON4 /LONG corresponds to the /-SH switch in TKB format.G Default: Not /LONG; TKB does not include additional file information.2 MAP5 LINK/TAS/MAP[:filespec]/SYM filespec1,filespec2,... @ /MAP specifies that the Task Builder should produce a MAP file.F The MAP file appears in your directory. The default name for the map? file is the same as that of the first input file (filespec1). A If you specify a filespec for the map file, the file appears in F your directory. You can print the map file with the /PRINT qualifier> only if you install the task QMGPRT.TSK on your system as the= PRT... task. You may prevent printing by using the /NOPRINT qualifier. Abbreviation: /MAP> /MAP corresponds to the position of the MAP filespec in TKB. 4 Default: Not /MAP; TKB does not produce a MAP file.2 NOMEMORY_MANAGEMENT#MEMORY_MANAGEMENT2 MEMORY_MANAGEMENT0 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/MEMORY_MANAGEMENT[:n] filespec2 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOMEMORY_MANAGEMENT[:n] filespec G The /MEMORY_MANAGEMENT qualifier specifies that the task is being G built for a system with memory-management hardware. The value n is  ignored with this qualifier. E The /NOMEMORY_MANAGEMENT qualifier specifies that the task is being ? built for a system without the memory-management hardware. TheD decimal value n (in K-words) specifies the highest physical address? of a task on the target system; it can be 28 or 30. Without n specified, the default is 28.  Abbreviation: /MEM or /NOMEM @ /MEMORY_MANAGEMENT corresponds to the /MM switch in TKB format.C Default: Without either qualifier, allocates memory according to = the status of the system on which the task is being built. 2 NOPOSTMORTEM #POSTMORTEM2 [NO]POSTMORTEM 2 POSTMORTEMGThe /POSTMORTEM qualifier requests a postmortem dump should the task beterminated abnormally.BIn TKB format, apply the /PM switch to the TSK file specification. 2 NOSEGREGATE #SEGREGATE 2 SEGREGATE( LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/[NO]SEGREGATE filespecE The /SEGREGATE qualifier allocates virtual address space containing M contiguous program sections; first to the read-write (RW) program sections, . then to the read-only (RO) program sections. E /SEGREGATE allows control over program section ordering. 00X=} /SEGREGATEE orders program sections aphabetically by name within access code (RW followed by RO).F /SEQUENTIAL with /SEGREGATE orders program sections in input order byD access code. /SEQUENTIAL with /NOSEGREGATE orders program sections5 in input order with RW and RO sections interleaved. H The /NOSEGREGATE qualifier interleaves the RW and RO program sections. J /NOSEQUENTIAL with /NOSEGREGATE orders program sections alphabetically & with RW and RO sections interleaved. @ /SHAREABLE:TASK causes the Task Builder to use /SEGREGATE. To ? build a shareable task correctly, you can use only /SEGREGATE. Abbreviation: /SEG or /NOSEG7 /SEGREGATE corresponds to the Task Builder /SG switch. Default: /NOSEGREGATE 2 MULTIUSER #SHAREABLE 2 SHAREABLE * LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SHAREABLE[:arg] filespec" COMMON# LIBRARY TASKA The COMMON argument identifies that a multiuser common is being C built. Always use the /NOHEADER qualifier with /SHAREABLE:COMMON. F The LIBRARY argument identifies a multiuser library. Always use the - /NOHEADER qualifier with /SHAREABLE:LIBRARY.C TASK identifies a multiuser task. TASK causes the Task Builder toD divide the task into two regions: region 0 contains the read-writeB portion of the task, and region 1 contains the read-only portion.@ /SHAREABLE:TASK identifies the task as multiuser, or shareable.@ Multiuser tasks allow more than one user to share the read-onlyG portions of a single task. In TKB format, TASK corresponds to the /MU switch. / Abbreviations: /SHA:COM, /SHA:LIB, or /SHA:TAS/ /SHAREABLE corresponds to the TKB switch /MU. D Default: /SHAREABLE without an argument uses TASK as the default. 2 OPTIONS@TKBOPT2 OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION. LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION filespec G The /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION qualifier names an overlay description file K (ODL file type) that controls the linking of the task. You can specify no@ other input file if you use this qualifier. The ODL file namesG the input files and specifies their relationship to the Task Builder.   Abbreviation: /OVE B /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION corresponds to the /MP switch in TKB format.H Default: The Task Builder does not expect an overlay description file. 2 NOPRINT#PRINT2 PRINT LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/PRINT filespec" LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOPRINT filespec? /PRINT allows printing of the MAP file only if you install the. QMGPRT.TSK in your system as the PRT... task.@ /PRINT causes the map file to print on your printer. If you do> not want a printed listing of the map file, use the /NOPRINT qualifier. M The /NOPRINT qualifier prevents the MAP file from being sent to the printer.e Abbreviation: /NOPRIN or /PRINO- /PRINT corresponds to the /SP switch in TKB.n> Default: /PRINT; the Task Builder prints the map file if you& previously installed the PRT... task. 2 PRIVILEGED) LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/PRIVILEGED[:n] filespecm H The /PRIVILEGED qualifier indicates that the Task Builder is to build M a privileged task. The optional parameter n specifies the base relocation PJ register. Acceptable values are 0, 4, or 5. The default, if you do not # specify the octal number n, is 5. e Abbreviation: /PRIV:n3 /PRIV corresponds to the /PR switch in TKB format.o< Default: The Task Builder does not build a privileged task. 2 DATA_SPACE#CODEk2 EXTENDED_ARITHMETICf#CODE 2 EAE #CODEi2 FLOATING_POINT#CODEE 2 OTS_FAST#CODEi2 FPP #CODE 2 PIC #CODE 2 POSITION_INDEPENDENT#CODEI2 CODE& LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/CODE:(arg[,s]) INPUT CLIg DATA_SPACET EAE FAST_MAP  FPP OTS_FAST PIC - POSITION_INDEPENDENT  D /CODE describes the source code for the task or shared region being built.  6 Abbreviations: /COD:CLI, /COD:DAT, /COD00`'TADATADATADATADATADATA:EAE, /COD:FAS( /COD:FPP, /COD:PIC, or /COD:POS  ; The CLI argument specifies that the task is a command line C interpteter (CLI). In TKB format, apply the /CLI qualifier to theH TSK file specification.; The DAT argument specifies that the task employs user-modeTA I- and D-space. In TKB format, use the /ID qualifier on the TSK filespec.  E The EAE argument specifies that the code assumes the presence of the C optional Extended Arithmetic Element hardware. In TKB format, use( the /EA qualifier on the TSK filespec. B The FAS argument enables the task to use the Fast Mapping featureA of the Executive. In TKB format, apply the /FM qualifier to the  TSK file specification.A The FPP argument specifies that the code assumes the presence of D the optional Floating Point Processor hardware. FPP is the default.E In TKB format, use the /FP qualifier on the TSK file specification. EF The OTS_FAST argument enables you to use the fast-mapping facility ofF the Executive to map windows for autoloaded memory-resident overlays,D thereby increasing the speed of overlay mapping by approximately 10 times.u )F The PIC and POSITION_INDEPENDENT arguments are synonymous and specifyG that the shared region (common or library) being built is relocatable. ? In TKB format, use the /PI switch on the TSK or STB filespec. LC If you combine arguments, enclose them in parentheses and separateR them with commas. p: Defaults: /CODE:FPP on RSX-11M-PLUS and on Micro/RSX with5 the Floating Point Processor, not /CODE:PIC, and note /CODE:POSITION_INDEPENDENT.2 SAVE LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SAVE INPUT eD /SAVE preserves the indirect command file that LINK creates to passE commands to the Task Builder. This file, named ATLNK.TMP, consists D of TKB commands translated from your LINK command. You can use this@ file to duplicate the task build by using a LINK command in the following form: e $ LINK @ATLNK.CMDe sA You should rename ATLNK.TMP if you want to save it. LINK createseA a new file called ATLNK.TMP each time you issue a LINK command. 2 NOEXTERNAL #EXTERNALl 2 EXTERNAL e LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/EXTERNAL INPUT" LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOEXTERNAL INPUT OM /NOEXTERNAL specifies that the task is being built to run with its header inA Executive pool space.C /EXTERNAL specifies that the task header is adjacent to the space b' in which the system installs the task.u Abbreviation: /NOEXT or /EXTo9 /EXTERNAL corresponds to the /XH switch in TKB format.  SL Default: /EXTERNAL. Overridden by /EXTERNAL_HEADER in the INSTALL command. 2 NORECEIVE #RECEIVE l 2 RECEIVEt LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/RECEIVE INPUTk! LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NORECEIVE INPUTi s> /RECEIVE specifies that the task may receive messages via the Executive Send directive. pD /NORECEIVE specifies that the task may not receive messages via the Executive Send directive. Abbreviation: /REC or /NOREC/ /RECEIVE corresponds to the /SE switch in TKB.o Default: /RECEIVE2 NORESIDENT_OVERLAYSY#RESIDENT_OVERLAYS2 RESIDENT_OVERLAYSB= LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/RESIDENT_OVERLAYS INPUT/OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONe@ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NORESIDENT_OVERLAYS INPUT/OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION  cE /RESIDENT_OVERLAY enables recognition of the memory-resident overlayC operator (!) in an overlay description file. This is the default. -> The /NORESIDENT_OVERLAY qualifier disables recognition of theB memory-resident overlay operator in an overlay description file.  k Abbreviation: /RES or /NORESw? /RESIDENT_OVERLAY corresponds to the /RO switch in TKB format.L /@ Default: /RESIDENT_OVERLAY; TKB recognizes the memory-resident  overlay operator.2 SELECTIVE_SEARCH) LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT/SELECTIVE_SEARCH h qE /SELECTIVE_SEARCH instructs the Task Builder to search the file onlyhF for undefined references to global symbols. /SELECTIVE_SEARCH is most> useful when building an Ancillary Control Processor or other . privileged task that maps into the Executive.B If you do not use this qualifier, TKB includes all gl00h=}obal symbols( from the input file in the task image.  Abbreviation: /SELE? /SELECTIVE_SEARCH corresponds to the /SS switch in TKB format.F Default: Not /SELECTIVE_SEARCHg 2 SEQUENTIAL" LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SEQUENTIAL INPUT iD /SEQUENTIAL directs the Task Builder to construct a task image fromB program segments, in the order in which they appear. Normally theE Task Builder finds all program sections referenced in all modules in/@ an overlay segment, and then builds the task with those program! sections in alphabetical order. E# See also the /SEGREGATE qualifier.a? The Task Builder groups the program section by access-code (RWfH followed by RO). Then within that grouping the Task Builder arranges E the program sections in the order in which they appear in the code. eC Do not use this qualifier to build tasks that rely on alphabetical E allocation of program sections (such as FORTRAN I/O handling modulese and FCS modules from SYSLIB).  Abbreviation: /SEQ.9 /SEQUENTIAL corresponds to the /SQ switch in TKB format.  Default: Not /SEQUENTIALo2 SLAVE  LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SLAVE INPUT.D /SLAVE specifies that the task is a slave to a sending task. When a= slaved task successfully executes the RECEIVE DATA ExecutiveRE directive, the system gives it the UIC and TI: of the sending task. eF A slaved task cannot be run with a RUN command. It must be run by the sending task. ,B A slaved task running on a virtual terminal cannot receive data.  Abbreviation: /SLA 5 /SLAVE corresponds to the /SL switch in TKB format. : Default: Not /SLAVE2 SLOW LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SLOW INPUT fG /SLOW specifies that you want the slower but more economical method of J task building. You should specify the /SLOW qualifier (Slow Task Builder)G only if your link or task build produces the following error message: T, LIN -- No virtual memory storage available F The default Task Builder and the Fast Task Builder use a symbol table@ structure that they can search quickly, but which requires more@ workfile space than the Slow Task Builder would require. If you? receive the LIN error message, you have the choice of reducing B workfile size, as described in the RSX-11M-PLUS and MicroRSX Task2 Builder Manual, or of using the /SLOW qualifier. @ Except for the use of the different symbol table structure, theB default Task Builder and the Slow Task Builder are identical. AllB qualifiers to LINK and all TKB options are available for the Slow Task Builder. F Abbreviation: /SLOtE The use of /SLOW corresponds to specifying the Slow Task Builder on your system. ? Default: Not /SLOW; the system uses the standard default Task Builder. 2 STOP #ERROR_LIMIT 2 ERROR_LIMITA& LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/ERROR_LIMIT:n INPUT C /ERROR_LIMIT directs the Task Builder to abort the build after the E build process produces n diagnostic errors. More than n errors are - unacceptable. Enter n as a decimal number. a Abbreviation: /ERR:n ; /ERROR_LIMIT corresponds to the /XT switch in TKB format. s2 Default: The Task Builder assumes /ERROR_LIMIT:5.2 SYMBOL_TABLE+ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYMBOL_TABLE[:filespec] INPUTu f> /SYMBOL_TABLE specifies that the Task Builder is to produce aF symbol definition file. If you do not specify the filespec argument,B the symbol definition file is given the same name as that of the* first input file. The file type is STB.  Abbreviation: /SYM[:filespec]= /SYMBOL_TABLE corresponds to the positional placement of thee STB filespec in TKB.hE Default: None. The Task Builder produces no symbol definition file.f2 NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY#SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAYL2 SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY f. LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY INPUT0 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY INPUTG /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY directs the Task Builder to include in the mapd> file the names of routines it added to your task from SYSLIB.@ It also includes in the MAP file global symbols that the symbolH definition file contains of any shared regi00p'TADATADATADATADATADATAon to which the task refers.E Those global symbols are those which the task defines or references.HF This map is usually longer than the default map. The map informationE displays the contributions that SYSLIB or the shared regions make to the task. ? If you include /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY, LINK includes the /MAP > qualifier as well. You need to specify /MAP only if you want$ to supply a name for the map file. & Abbreviation: /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAYE /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY corresponds to the /MA switch in TKB format.h# Default: /NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAYH2 NOEXECUTABLE#TASKn 2 EXECUTABLE#TASKi2 NOTASK#TASK/2 TASK c# LINK/TASK[:filespec]/MAP/SYM INPUTf LINK/NOTASK/MAP/SYM INPUT t$ /EXECUTABLE and /TASK are synonyms.C /TASK specifies that the Task Builder should generate a task imageNG file. This is the default. If a file specification is not given, thelI task image file is given the same name as the first input file, with theI file type TSK. B /NOTASK specifies that the Task Builder should not produce a taskE image file. /NOTASK is useful when you want to use some facility ofrD the Task Builder without building a task, for example, to generate a new map file. u Abbreviation: /TASe@ /TAS corresponds to the positional task filespec of TSK in TKB. Default: /TAS2 TKBT LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/[TKB] INPUTa h@ /TKB specifies that you want to use the default Task Builder to> build the task. /TKB is the default and is included for DCL  completeness only.c2 TRACE  LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/TRACE INPUT A /TRACE specifies that the task is traceable. When you use this qF qualifier, a trace trap occurs on the completion of each instruction  when the task is run.  Abbreviation: /TRA2 /TRA corresponds to the /TR switch in TKB format. Default: Not /TRACE 2 NOWARNINGS #WARNINGSd 2 WARNINGS LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/WARNINGS INPUT@ /NOWARNINGS prevents the following two diagnostic messages from appearing:l( o n undefined symbols segment seg-name= o Module module-name multiply defined p-section p-sect-name  Abbreviation: /NOWAR or /WARi6 /WARNINGS corresponds to the /NM Task Builder switch.( Default: /WARNINGS; the messages occur.2 NOWIDE#WIDEa2 WIDE LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/WIDE INPUT LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOWIDE INPUT t@ /WIDE specifies that you want the Task Builder to print the mapD in 132-column format. /NOWIDE specifies that you want to print the. Task Builder map in narrow 80-column format.  Abbreviation: /WID3 /WIDE corresponds to the /WI switch in TKB format.  Default: /NOWIDE 2 LIBRARYA' LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,INPUTN/LIBRARYAA /LIBRARY identifies the input file as an object module library. G= o The library file must contain relocatable object modules.eA o The library file must be to the right of the string of input e; files that contain references that the library defines.i= o If you use the library file more than once in a continuedsA command line, you must also use /LIBRARY again. For example,d1 $ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,INPUT2/LIBRARY-h& ->INPUT3,INPUT4,INPUT2/LIBRARYC o The Task Builder uses /LIBRARY as the switch /LB within overlaye; ODL files to define libraries to the overlay structure.Y Abbreviation: /LIB 9 /LIBRARY corresponds to the use of the /LB switch in TKB  Default: Not /LIBRARY 2 INCLUDE ; LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,.../INCLUDE(:module1,...,module8) i F Use /INCLUDE with an input file that is a library. You cannot use it for any other type of file. pE /INCLUDE causes TKB to extract from the library the modules named asaF arguments of the qualifier, regardless of whether the modules contain( definitions for unresolved references. F You can use /INCLUDE to specify up to eight module names, enclosed inC parentheses and separated by commas. In this case, TKB takes onlytA those modules from the library. The default filetype for these = modules is .OBJ. The assembly process defines module names.eE You can use00x{}} the /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier in the command sequence,aE with both the /LIBRARY or /INCLUDE qualifiers to perform a selectiveG search for global definitions.  Abbreviation: /INC: o@ /INCLUDE corresponds to using the /LB switch in TKB with module? qualifiers as, /LB:module1,module2,...,module8. Exceptions: T5 o The library file has a default filetype of OLB.> o The library file from which TKB extracts modules can be ' anywhere in the input file stringrD o Do not use the /CONCATENATE qualifier in the same command line with /INCLUDEbE o You may use /LIBRARY and /INCLUDE in the same command line, buto; you must specify the library name for each qualifier.w Default: Not /INCLUDER2 C81+ LINK/C81[/qualifier[s]] inputfilespec[,s] /, LINK/COBOL[/qualifier[s]] inputfilespec[,s]B Using the LINK/C81 command, you can link COBOL-87 object files to! produce a task image (TSK) file.e The qualifiers are: ! /[NO]FMS /[NO]MAP /[NO]DEBUG  iE Although the format shows the qualifiers as command qualifiers, youTE can append them to either the command or a file specification. When/B you use the LINK/C81 command, the two locations are equivalent.  i1 For further help on the above qualifiers, type: d h' HELP LINK C81 qualifiernames 3 [NO]FMSw#FMS3 FMS:RESIDENT#FMS3 NOFMSn#FMS3 FMSh /[NO]FMS  /FMS:[NO]RESIDENTD /FMS causes LINK/C81 to include the Forms Management Services (FMS)C library support in your task image. You must use /FMS if you calll! FMS routines from your program. p@ /NOFMS causes LINK/C81 not to include FMS support. This is the default.A; /FMS:NORESIDENT causes LINK/C81 to include support for a u5 non-memory-resident FMS library in your task image. f3 NOMAP #MAP3 MAPBB /MAP causes LINK/C81 to produce a Task Builder map file with the file type MAP. F /NOMAP causes LINK/C81 not to produce a memory map file. This is the default.) 3 NODEBUGo#DEBUG3 DEBUG /[NO]DEBUG F The /DEBUG qualifier causes LINK/C81 to include the COBOL-87 Symbolic Debugger in your task image.sD To use /DEBUG, you must also use the /DEBUG qualifier to the COBOL command.  The default is /NODEBUG.  LOGIN userid M LOGIN allows you to gain access to the system (if you have a valid account)  and to begin a user session.J The userid is either your last name or a UIC (user identification code). G A UIC consists of two numbers separated by a comma (,) or a slash (/).D The brackets ([]) that usually surround a UIC are optional for this command.N Once you enter your userid and press RETURN, the system prompts you for your K password. The password does not appear on your screen when you type it. J If you prefer, you may enter your password on the same line as the LOGIN L command, preceding the password with a slash. In this case, your password  appears on the screen. O If the userid and the password are valid, you are then logged into the system.L The login message file, LB:[1,2]LOGIN.TXT is printed on your screen unless N you suppress this display by typing your UIC separated by a slash instead of L a comma. In this case, only the most recent messages are printed. If you M have a login command file (LOGIN.CMD) in your directory, this file executes 3 after LOGIN.TXT has been printed on your terminal.C LOGIN and HELLO are identical, but LOGIN does not work on systems without DCL.00|}TADATADATADATADATADATA LOGOUT[/[NO]HOLD]H The LOGOUT command terminates a user session on the system. You should J log out when you finish a session, so that no one else has access to the H system from your account. If the terminal you are using is in a public F terminal area, logging off the system also frees the terminal so that someone else can log on.J The /HOLD qualifier to the LOGOUT command is for use on remote or DECnet L host terminals. If you include this qualifier, the terminal is logged out H but the line is not hung up, thus allowing you to log in again without G reconnecting the line. The default is /NOHOLD, meaning that the line " is also hung up when you log out.M When you log out, all of your allocated and mounted devices are deallocated J and dismounted, and all nonprivileged tasks and certain privileged tasks L running on your terminal are aborted. If [1,2]SYSLOGOUT.CMD exists, it is - submitted to the Indirect command processor.J On systems with Resource Accounting active, you will be told how long youL have been logged into the system, the amount of CPU time you have used, and# the number of tasks you have run.  : MACRO[/qualifier[s]] filespec[/qualifier[s][filespec[,s]] Command Qualifiers /[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE /DISABLE:(argument[,s]) /ENABLE:(argument[,s]) /[NO]LIST[:filespec] /[NO]OBJECT /[NO]SHOW /[NO]WIDE  File Qualifiers /[NO]CROSS_REFERENCE /LIBRARY /[NO]LIST[:filespec] /[NO]SHOW /PASS:n /[NO]WIDE O MACRO invokes the MACRO-11 Relocatable Assembler, which assembles one or more L MACRO-11 source files into a single relocatable object module suitable for processing by the Task Builder.< To get help on MACRO qualifiers, type HELP MACRO qualifier.2 NOCROSS_REFERENCE#CROSS_REFERENCE2 CROSS_REFERENCE# MACRO/CROSS_REFERENCE filespec[,s]G The /CROSS_REFERENCE qualifier causes the MACRO-11 Assembler to invokeC the CREF system utility program to produce a listing that includesC cross-references to symbols that appear in the source program. TheA cross-reference listing is appended to the assembly listing. TheE cross-references are helpful in debugging and reading long programs.C /CROSS_REFERENCE as a command qualifier causes the cross-referenceJ listing to be printed on the line printer and placed in your directory. B /CROSS_REFERENCE as a filespec qualifier places the file in yourB directory, but does not pass the file to the line printer. TheC listing file is assigned the same name as the name of the file toC which it is attached. All the listing-related qualifiers work in this way. I All the listing-related qualifiers also imply /LIST. If you use any of A them, you need to specify /LIST only to give the listing file a C name that is different from the names of the files in the command. 2 LIBRARY$ MACRO filespec/LIBRARY,filespec[,s]B The /LIBRARY qualifier specifies that the file is a macro libraryD containing source macro definitions. The default extension for this file is MLB.2 NOLIST#LIST2 LIST' MACRO/[NO]LIST[:filespec] filespec[,s] MACRO filespec[,s]/LIST B The /LIST qualifier specifies that a listing file of the assembly; be generated. If a filespec is not given, the listing fileC is assigned the same name as the last source file, with .LST file  type.G /NOLIST is the default and inhibits a listing file from being created.O /LIST as a command qualifier causes the assembly listing to be printed on the K line printer and placed in your directory. /LIST as a filespec qualifier J places the file in your directory, but does not pass the file to the lineI printer. The00}}} listing file is assigned the same name as the name of the G file to which it is attached. All the listing-related qualifiers work in this way.I All the listing-related qualifiers also imply /LIST. If you use any of A them, you need to specify /LIST only to give the listing file a C name that is different from the names of the files in the command.G See also HELP MACRO WIDE, HELP MACRO CROSS_REFERENCE, HELP MACRO SHOW.2 NOWIDE#WIDE2 WIDE MACRO/WIDE filespec[,s] MACRO filespec[,s]/WIDEC The /WIDE command qualifier specifies that the assembly listing beD printed in wide format, sometimes called line-printer format. This is the default. E The /NOWIDE command qualifier specifies that the assembly listing be@ printed in narrow format, sometimes called teleprinter format. H This qualifier overrides any .LIST TTM or .NLIST TTM directives in the source code.E /[NO]WIDE as a command qualifier causes the listing to be printed onK a printer and placed in your directory. /[NO]WIDE as a filespec qualifierE places the file in your directory, but does not pass the file to theG line printer. The listing file is assigned the same name as the name? of the file to which it is attached. All the listing-related qualifiers work in this way. I All the listing-related qualifiers also imply /LIST. If you use any of B them, you need /LIST only if you wish to give the listing file a B name different from the names of any of the files in the command. 2 NOOBJECT#OBJECT2 OBJECT% MACRO/OBJECT[:filespec] filespec[,s] MACRO/NOOBJECT filespec[,s]G The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that an object file be generated. If aH filespec is not specified, the object file is assigned the same name asB the last source file, with a .OBJ file type. This is the default.? The /NOOBJECT qualifier inhibits generation of an object file. 2 DISABLE#ENABLE2 ENABLE% MACRO/DISABLE:(arg[,s]) filespec[,s]% MACRO/ENABLE:(arg[,s]) filespec[,s]D The /DISABLE and /ENABLE qualifiers accept arguments which overrideM various .DSABL and .ENABL directives specified in the source program. These O qualifiers override the arguments and remain in effect for the entire assemblyG process. If you specify more than one argument, the arguments must be J enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas. You can include /ENABLE' and /DISABLE on the same command line.P The following arguments (directive equivalents in parentheses) are disabled by default:I ABSOLUTE (AMA) BINARY (ABS) CASEMATCH (LCM) TRUNCATION (FPT)6 AUTOMCALL (MCL) CARD_FORMAT (CDR) LOCAL (LSB) O The following arguments (directive equivalents in parentheses) are enabled by default:F GLOBAL (GBL) LOWERCASE (LC) REGISTER_DEFINITIONS (REG)F See also HELP MACRO SHOW and HELP MACRO WIDE for more information on ! overriding assembler directives.2 NOSHOW#SHOW2 SHOW" MACRO/SHOW:(arg[,s]) filespec[,s]$ MACRO/NOSHOW:(arg[,s]) filespec[,s] B The /SHOW and /NOWSHOW qualifiers accept arguments which overrideG various .LIST and .NOLIST directives specified in the source program. G These arguments remain in effect for the entire assembly process. If I you specify more than one argument, the arguments must be enclosed in J parentheses and separated by commas. You can include /SHOW and /NOSHOW  on the same command line. M See also HELP MACRO ENABLE and HELP MACRO WIDE for information on overriding other assembler directives.K The following arguments (directive equivalents in parentheses) are listed by default:H CALLS (MC) DEFINITIONS (MD) SEQUENCE_NUMBERS (SEQ)> COMMENTS (COM) EXTENSIONS (BEX) SOURCE (SRC)? CONDITIONALS (CND) LOCATION_COUNTER (LOC) SYMBOLS (SYM)2 CONTENTS (TOC) OBJECT_BINARY (BIN)  N The following arguments (directive equivalents in parentheses) are not listed by default:I BINARY (MEB) EXPANSIONS (ME) LISTING_DIRECTIV00}~TADATADATADATADATADATAES (LD) C /[NO]SHOW as a command qualifier causes the assembly listing to beK printed on the line printer and placed in your directory. /[NO]SHOW as aD filespec qualifier places the file in your directory, but does notF pass the file to the line printer. The listing file is assigned theE same name as the name of the file to which it is attached. All the. listing-related qualifiers work in this way. F All the listing-related qualifiers also include /LIST by default. IfA you use any of these qualifiers, you need /LIST only to give theF listing file a name that is different from the names of the files in the command. 2 USING ' MACRO/USING:userassembler filespec[,s]F The /USING qualifier allows you to invoke an assembler other than theE DIGITAL MACRO-11 Assembler. See your system manager about the avail- ability of other assemblers.2 PASS MACRO filespec[,s]/PASSC The PASS filespec qualifier specifies that the file is only to be G assembled during the pass specified. The assembler makes two passes;  n can be either 1 or 2. MCR mcrcommandF The MCR command allows a DCL user to enter an MCR command and pass it0 to the Monitor Console Routine for processing. ? For example, the following two commands, issued from DCL, are equivalent: >SHOW TIME >MCR TIM MESSAGE/ERROR_LOG messagetextF This command inserts text into the error log file. (The default errorH logging file is LB:[1,6]LOG.ERR.) The text appears in reports produced F by the ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command. The message can be any text string  up to 79 characters long.E MOUNT declares a volume to be logically known to the system, online,iC and available for use. Some qualifiers can be used with any MOUNTa7 command; some are limited to mounting disks (and otherl; random-access devices); and others are limited to mounting+ magnetic tapes. See also HELP MOUNT TAPE.5 For mounting disks and other random-access devices," the general format is as follows:* MOUNT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabel5 Command qualifiers for both disks and tapes include:  /[NO]CACHE:(arg[,s])c m: /DEFAULT:arg /PROTECTION:(code)/ SAVE /PUBLICt6 NOUNLOAD /[NO]SHAREABLE1 /FILE_PROTECTION:(code) /[NO]SHOW.E /FOREIGN /SYSTEM (synonym for /PUBLIC)c> /OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION /VOLUME:(volume-ID[s])1 /PARAMETERS:"user parameters" /[NO]WAITi2 /PROCESSOR:arg /[NO]WRITE acpname UNIQUE @ Command qualifiers for disks and other Files-11 devices follow: 4 /ACCESSED:n /WINDOW:arg2 /EXTENSION:n nA /OWNER:[uic] (USER:n,INDEX:n)  /UNLOCK FULLf> For further help on the available qualifiers, type HELP MOUNT qualifier. 2 [NO]CACHER#CACHE 2 NOCACHE #CACHE2 CACHE 8 MOUNT ddnn:volumelabel /[NO]CAC00}}HE[:(option,option,...)]< The /CACHE qualifier associates caching with the specified ? disk and allows you to override the disk data caching defaultsC= and set one or more of the options. The default is /NOCACHE. < The following options are available with disk data caching:5 CREATE[:[region][:[main_partition][:[cache_size]]]]L REGION:name [NO]DEFER_WRITES [NO]DIRECTORY[:extent_size] [NO]LOGICAL[:extent_size] [NO]OVERLAY[:extent_size] [NO]READ_AHEAD[:extent_size]e [NO]VIRTUAL[:extent_size]; If you use only one option in a command line, you can omit 3 the parentheses. For further help on options, type  HELP MOUNT CACHE OPTIONS. 3 OPTIONSo> The extent_size argument specifies the maximum size of an I/O> request that will be considered for caching. The extent size> radix is decimal. The maximum value for an extent size is 1;< the maximum is 15. Extent sizes can be modified for cachedC devices using the SET command. The options are defined as follows:e2CREATE[:[region][:[mainpar][:[size]]]] ?Creates a cache region in memory and associates caching for thetIspecified device with that region. You can specify the name of the regioneHto be created, the main partition in which the region is to be created,Iand the size of the region. You specify the size of the region in decimaliFnumber of disk blocks. By default, the /CACHE qualifier uses a region Dcalled CACHE in the GEN partition with a size of 10010 disk blocks. "REGION=name JAssociates caching for the specified device with an already existing cache$region. The default region is CACHE.0[NO]DEFER_WRITES AEnables or disables data caching of deferred write requests. The e%NODEFER_WRITES option is the default. B[NO]DIRECTORY[=extentsize] IEnables or disables caching of directory and other volume-structured I/O;iEthat is, logical I/O from ACP (F11ACP). The default is DIRECTORY. The 8default extent size for the DIRECTORY option is 1 block.3 e[NO]LOGICAL[=extentsize] EGEnables or disables caching of logical I/O. The default is LOGICAL. Thei6default extent size for the LOGICAL option is 1 block.3[NO]OVERLAY[=extentsize] CEnables or disables caching of overlay I/O. The default is OVERLAY.r;The default extent size for the OVERLAY option is 4 blocks.O"[NO]READ_AHEAD[=extentsize] KEnables or disables reading of the next extent before reading is explicitly Jrequested. The default is /[NO]READ_AHEAD. The default extent size for theREAD_AHEAD option is 5 blocks."[NO]VIRTUAL[extentsize] DEnables or disables caching of virtual I/O. The default is /VIRTUAL.;The default extent size for the VIRTUAL option is 5 blocks.d e2 TAPE MOUNT for Magnetic Tapes 5 MOUNT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn:[,ddnn:...]] fileset-IDi, Command Qualifiers For Both Disks and Tapes: /DEFAULT:arg /PROTECTION:(code)/ SAVE /PUBLIC 6 [NO]UNLOAD /[NO]SHAREABLE- /FILE_PROTECTION:(code) /SHOWiE /FOREIGN /SYSTEM (synonym for /PUBLIC) > /OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION /VOLUME:(volume-ID[s])1 /PARAMETERS:"user parameters" /[NO]WAITe2 /PROCESSOR:arg /[NO]WRITE acpname UNIQUEs 9 Command qualifiers for ANSI and unlabelled tapes follow: 3 /BLOCK_SIZE:n /[NO]LABEL 6 /CARRIAGE_CONTROL:arg /OVERRIDE:arg@ FORTRAN ACCESSIBILITYB LIST EXPIRATION_DATEE NONE SET_IDENTIFICATIONe7 /DENSITY:arg /RECORD_SIZE:n 7 800 /TRANSLATE:arg 9 1600 00TADATADATADATADATADATA EBCIDl 6250 NONE7 /[NO]HDR3 UT1 7 UT2 7 UT3Y F MOUNT declares a volume to be logically known to the system, on-line,C and available for use. Some qualifiers can be used with any MOUNT 7 command; some are limited to mounting disks (and other ? random-addressable devices) and others are limited to mounting H magnetic tapes. See also HELP MOUNT for information on mounting disks.A For further information on the above qualifiers, type HELP MOUNT . qualifier. See also HELP MOUNT TAPE EXAMPLES. 3 EXAMPLESD Mounting of tape volumes is handled by a special ACP, the MTAACP. B This ACP handles not only tapes that meet the ANSI standard, but < also the most commonly encountered unlabelled tape formats.F The MOUNT command can only mount a single random-addressable volume, A but tapes can be mounted by the set. In fact, when you mount a E single tape, you are mounting a set consisting of only one tape. A bB tape set consists of logically related records written on one or H more individual reels of tape. Only the first tape in the set need be E loaded on a device at the time the MOUNT command is issued. However,tF all tapes in the set can be loaded on different devices at that time.I Therefore, the terminology used for mounting tapes is somewhat different L from that used in mounting disks. The tape set is identified by a File SetL Identifier (fileset-ID). Each individual tape in the fileset is identifiedC by a Volume Identifier (volume-ID). By default, the fileset-ID isnF the same as the volume-ID of the first individual reel of tape in the set. vG If you wish to use a fileset-ID other than the volume-ID of the first e= reel in the set, you can do so on the first mount of a newlye. initialized tape as shown an example below. A Each installation using tapes extensively will have policies on I fileset-IDs and volume-IDs. See your system manager or supervisor for n7 information on how they are used in your installation.mK The examples establish the relationship between fileset-ID and volume-IDs. O The following command mounts a tape set (consisting of a single physical reel)t4 whose fileset-ID is FOO and whose volume-ID is FOO: a $ MOUNT MM0: FOOtF The reel FOO must be loaded on device MM0: at the time of the mount. K The following command mounts a tape set whose fileset-ID is DRAG and whichnH consists of three physical reels with volume-IDs of FOO, BAR, and MORE: o8 $ MOUNT MM0: DRAG /VOLUME_IDENTIFICATION:(FOO,BAR,MORE)N The reel with the volume-ID FOO must be loaded on device MM0:, but the otherG two reels are not loaded at the time of the mount. The fileset-ID ofl@ the tape set was established with the first mount of the newlyB initialized tape set, using this same command. If this were theD first mount, the fileset-ID DRAG would be established by the MOUNTG command, but the actual change of the fileset-ID (from the default of OB FOO) does not take place until the first record is written to the tape. )K The following command mounts a tape set whose fileset-ID is immaterial andhN which consists of three physical reels with volume-IDs of FOO, BAR, and MORE:8 $ MOUNT/OVERRIDE:SET_IDENTIFICATION MM0: (FOO,BAR,MORE)L The reel FOO must be loaded on device MM0:, but the other two reels are not" loaded at the time of the mount. J The following command mounts a tape set whose fileset-ID is FOO and whichF consists of three physical reels with volume-IDs A312,A387, and B231:, $ MOUNT MM0: FOO /VOLUMEID=(A312,A387,B231)M The reel A312 must be loaded on device MM0:, but the other two reels are notr" loaded at the time of the mount. e The following command mounts a tape set whose fileset-ID is FOO and which consists of three physical * reels with volume-IDs FOO, BAR, and MORE:( $ MOUNT (MM0:,MM1:,MM2:) (FOO,BAR,MORE)J At the time of the mount, the ree00}}l FOO must be loaded on device MM0:, theK reel BAR must be loaded on device MM1:,and the reel MORE must be loaded on device MM2:. F There is no theoretical limit to the number of physical tape reels inG a set, but your DCL MOUNT command must translate to an MCR MOU commandB of 80 characters or fewer. There are, therefore, mounts that areC permitted by the system but that cannot be translated successfully,D from DCL to MCR within that limit. This means that in those cases,G you cannot use the DCL MOUNT command but must use the MCR MOU command instead. d2 ACPi #PROCESSOR2 UNIQUE #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORd& MOUNT/PROCESSOR:arg ddnn: volumelabel acpname  UNIQUEA Allows privileged users to specify the name of the ACP to use to E support file activity on the volume. In most cases, you can use the tD default ACP. The default ACP depends on the the device type. You K have to specify an ACP only in special cases. If an ACP has been written yJ for a custom application in your installation, you will need to use that J ACP for volumes used by that application. You will also have to include D the /FOREIGN qualifier in this case. You may also need to use the < /PARAMETERS qualifier to enter parameters used by that ACP.J The UNIQUE argument specifies that a dedicated ACP is to be used for the H volume being mounted. You do not name an ACP with the UNIQUE argument.N MOUNT creates a copy of the F11ACP if the device is a disk or DECtape, or of L the MTAACP, if the device is a tape. This unique ACP will be given a name L of the form ddnnF1 or ddnnAP. When the volume is dismounted and the file I processor exits, the ACP is automatically removed. If the ACP (F11ACP orSK MTAACP) is installed in secondary pool, /PROCESSOR:UNIQUE is the default. i 2 DENSITYe. MOUNT/DENSITY:arg ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-ID 800 or LOW n 1600 or HIGH 6250 U= The /DENSITY qualifier specifies the density at which a tapeaD is to be written. The density set cannot be changed; it can only be3 checked with an INITIALIZE/UPDATE/DENSITY command.WD If the specified tape unit does not support the density given, the  command is rejected. f 2 EXTENSIONA$ MOUNT/EXTENSION:n ddnn: volumelabelC The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the default number of blocks byNH which a file will be extended when it has exhausted its allotted space.H The default is whatever value was specified when the volume was initia-H lized. This qualifier may be used to override the initialization value.2 FILE_CONTROL_BLOCKSt #ACCESSEDL 2 ACCESSED# MOUNT/ACCESSED:n ddnn: volumelabelaF Specifies the approximate number of directories that will be accessedB simultaneously during the mount. Valid values for n range from 1< through 127. F11ACP maintains a list of most recently usedC directories. The value specified for /ACCESSED sets the number of.K entries in this list. In general, the time requuired to perform directoryH operations can be significantly lowered by increasing this value. If aM directory appears in the list, no disk I/O is required to find the directoryeF in the MFD. In addition, directory operations take place without theF necessity of reading the directory file header. If this qualifier isF not explicitly stated, the default is the value specified at the timeF the volume was initialized. Note that increasing the /ACCESSED value+ increases the amount of system pool used. r 2 FOREIGNr MOUNT/FOREIGN ddnn:@ Specifies that the volume being mounted is not in Files-11 diskM structure. Such volumes are called foreign volumes. Note that before a disk 7 or tape has been initialized, it is a foreign volume. tF All volumes must be mounted. This qualifier is required for mounting foreign volumes. lG Since a foreign format is unknown to the system, no label is specifiedn on the command line.n 2 NOUNLOAD#DEFAULT2 ACCESSIBILITYs #OVERRIDE 2 EXPIRATION_DATE. #OVERRIDEG2 IDENTIFICATION #OVERRIDE2 OVERRIDE:IDENTIF00TADATADATADATADATADATAICATIONb #OVERRIDEd2 SET_IDENTIFICATION #OVERRIDEu 2 OVERRIDE5 Format for mounting disks or other Files-11 volumes:s1 MOUNT/OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION ddnn: volumelabel l Format for mounting tapes:m9 MOUNT/OVERRIDE:(arg[,arg[s]) ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-IDl ACCESSIBILITYi EXPIRATION_DATE  IDENTIFICATION SET_IDENTIFICATION This is a privileged qualifier.L /OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION allows privileged users to mount a volume without A using the volume label (or the File Set ID for magnetic tape). DO For magnetic tapes, /OVERRIDE specifies that you wish to override one or more EM characteristics of a tape volume that are normally checked when you mount a UF tape. The parentheses are optional if you specify only one argument.C If you wish to specify more than one argument, the arguments must G be enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas. The ACCESSIBILITY IG argument overrides the protection on ANSI tapes. The EXPIRATION_DATE tL argument overrides the expiration date on ANSI tapes. The IDENTIFICATION K argument mounts the tape or tape set without specifying a fileset-ID. By sN default, the fileset-ID is the volume-ID of the first tape reel in the set. L The SET_IDENTIFICATION argument specifies that you wish to mount a tape or M tape set that does not follow ANSI standard; this argument is not otherwise  needed.2 OWNERm$ MOUNT/OWNER:[g,m] ddnn: volumelabelH Specifies the owner of the volume. The brackets are required syntax. H Inclusion of this qualifier overrides the OWNER value established when  the volume was initialized.K The /OWNER interacts with the protection established for the file and the C volume. See HELP MOUNT PROTECTION and HELP MOUNT FILE_PROTECTION.t 2 PARAMETERSI MOUNT/FOREIGN/ACP:acpname/PARAMETERS:"user parameters" ddnn: volumelabeldI Enables you to enter commands to an ACP that is not DIGITAL standard. AnH maximum of 40 characters enclosed in quotation marks can be passed to a2 foreign ACP. The /FOREIGN qualifier is required.2 FILE_PROTECTIONe/ MOUNT/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelH Specifies the default file protection for any new files created on the J volume while it is mounted. The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier combines withM /OWNER to control access to files. The file-protection code is enclosed in eJ parentheses in the form (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) where" R means allow read access to file# W means allow write access to filee" E means allow file to be extended! D means allow file to be deletedEE See also HELP MOUNT PROTECTION for information on volume protection.eF The default file protection can be overridden by specifying another J protection when the file is created. If this qualifier is not included, I the value specified at the time the volume was initialized is applied. sD For ANSI tapes, this qualifier specifies the protection applied to I the volume. See the RSX-11M-PLUS and MicroRSX I/O Operations Manual foraN further information on the translation from this coding to ANSI label coding. 2 PROTECTION* MOUNT/PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelE Specifies the volume protection for Files-11 disks. This protection @ overrides the volume protection established when the volume wasA initialized. The /PROTECTION qualifier combines with the /OWNERi- qualifier to control access to the volume. lA The file-protection code is enclosed in parentheses in the form -2 (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) where" R means allow read access to file# W means allow write access to file." E means allow file to be extended! D means allow file to be deletedsD See also HELP MOUNT FILE_PROTECTION for information on setting the F default protection for new files created on the volume while mounted.2 SHOW MOUNT/SHOW ddnn: volumelabeltE The /SHOW qualifier specifies that volume information for the volumerD being mounted be displayed on the entering terminal. /NOSHOW is theF default. Here is the display form00}}at for disks and other random-access devices:s Volume Informationf! Class: Files-11 or Foreigne Device: ddnn: Volume label: label5 Pack Serial: serial number supplied by manufacturer 9 Owner: [g,m] (volume owner, override with /OWNER)t' Protection: code (volume protection)S- Default: code (default file protection)s Processor: acpname> The information displayed by /SHOW is similar for tapes. If F multiple tape volumes are being mounted, the device and volume label E information is repeated for each volume. The Protection and Default s: fields are omitted from the volume information for tapes.2 UNLOAD#DEFAULT 2 DEFAULT $ MOUNT/DEFAULT:arg ddnn: volumelabel SAVE [NO]UNLOAD C The /DEFAULT qualifier applies to DB:, DM:, DU: and magnetic tape cB devices only. It specifies the default that will apply when the  volume is dismounted. sC SAVE is a privileged argument and specifies that the medium is nothG unloaded and can be accessed for reads and writes by privileged tasks.  t= UNLOAD specifies that the medium is to be unloaded after them? dismount. This is the default for Files-11 volumes. NOUNLOADUF specifies that the medium is not to be unloaded. This is the defaultM for foreign volumes. Remember, these values can also be set when you issue l/ the DISMOUNT command. See also HELP DISMOUNT. I Only privileged users can specify /DEFAULT:UNLOAD for a multiunit devices (for example, an RC25).2 UNLOCK MOUNT/UNLOCK ddnn: volumelabelrF Specifies that the volume index file, [0,0]INDEXF.SYS, is unlocked. F This means the file can be read and written to. Normally, this file is locked and can be read only.I This qualifier has nothing to do with hardware or software writelocking.RI Its main use is in conjunction with VFY, the File Structure Verificationn Utility.o2 WINDOW# MOUNT/WINDOW:arg ddnn: volumelabels nA FULL (USER:n,INDEX:n)E The /WINDOW qualifier specifies the number of mapping pointers to beeB allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number ofB mapping pointers; it is stored in memory when the file is opened.H The argument n specifies a default for all files opened on the volume. ' The values for n can be from 1 to 127.IJ The USER and INDEX arguments can be combined or specified singly. USER:nH specifies the user default value for the volume. INDEX:n specifies theL number of pointers to allocate to the index file window. The argument FULLI specifies that you want windows created that map as much of the file as n7 possible. FULL can also replace n for USER and INDEX.mG The default value is set when the volume is initialized. This qualiferl4 may be used to override the initialization default.2 SYSTEM#PUBLIC2 PUBLIC MOUNT/PUBLIC ddnn: volumelabeli MOUNT/SYSTEM ddnn: volumelabelM /PUBLIC and /SYSTEM are synonymous privileged qualifiers which specify that O the mounted volume is available to all users who are allowed access under the tL volume-protection and file-protection codes established when the volume was mounted. eE If you state this qualifier explicitly when mounting a volume on an E allocated (private) device, the device is automatically deallocated t and set public, if necessary.B If you do not state this qualifier explicitly, and the device is 9 already set public, the mount will default to /PUBLIC. qC See also HELP MOUNT SHAREABLE, HELP ALLOCATE, and HELP SET DEVICE. 2 NOSHAREABLEl #SHAREABLE 2 SHAREABLE& MOUNT/[NO]SHAREABLE ddnn: volumelabelL Specifies whether the volume is to be mounted shareable. A volume mounted K /SHAREABLE can be mounted multiple times by the same or different users. e> Each user's access is determined by the volume-protection and? file-protection codes established for the volume when mounted. H If you mount the volume /SHAREABLE, and the device is allocated or set B public, the device is automatically deallocated or set nonpublic.F A volume 00TADATADATADATADATADATAmounted /NOSHAREABLE is dedicated for your private use. No A other user can access the volume. For Files-11 volumes mounted 7 /NOSHAREABLE, your privileges are SYSTEM privileges. iD If you specify /NOSHAREABLE explicitly when mounting a volume on anA device, the device is automatically allocated and set nonpublic.f; If the device is already allocated, the mount defaults to RA /NOSHAREABLE. If the device is not allocated or set public, the aA default is /SHAREABLE otherwise, the device is /PUBLIC (which isS synonymous with /SYSTEM).? See also HELP MOUNT PUBLIC, HELP ALLOCATE and HELP SET DEVICE.-2 NOWAIT#WAITd2 WAIT! MOUNT/[NO]WAIT ddnn: volumelabelED Specifies whether you require operator assistance in performing theD mount. The main use of this qualifier is for batch jobs, indirect@ command files, or terminals distant from the machine room. TheF default is /WAIT for mounts in batch jobs and indirect command files,C and /NOWAIT for interactive mounts. If the mount is included in ahB batch job or indirect command file, or if you specify /WAIT in anA interactive mount, a message concerning the mount is sent to the[E operator's console and the mount is not completed until the operatorsA takes action. If you specify /NOWAIT in a batch job or indirect G command file, or if the mount is interactive, no message appears. ThehF medium must have been previously placed on the device and readied for access (spun up/on-line). 2 NOWRITEt#WRITE2 WRITE " MOUNT/[NO]WRITE ddnn: volumelabel9 Specifies whether the volume is to be write-protected. n3 If /WRITE is specified or implied, the volume can i9 be written to as permitted by the volume-protection and mA file-protection codes established for the volume when mounted. i: If /NOWRITE is specified, no one may write to the volume. The default is /WRITE.e2 VOLUME& MOUNT/VOLUME:(volumeID[,volumeID[s]) D Specifies volume identifiers. If you wish to check volume-IDs, you must specify this qualifier. WG If, for tapes, the fileset-ID is not the same as the volume-ID of the eD first tape in the set, you must use this qualifier and include all  volume-IDs in the set. e See HELP MOUNT TAPE EXAMPLES. 2 FORTRANd#CARRIAGE_CONTROLt2 LIST#CARRIAGE_CONTROL2 CARRIAGE_CONTROL7 MOUNT/CARRIAGE_CONTROL:arg ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-IDi FORTRANE LIST NONEB Specifies the record type for an unlabelled tape. The arguments B correspond to the FORTRAN keywords for the OPEN statement. This A qualifier also works on ANSI Level 1 or 2 tapes, that is, those nD without HDR2 records (labels). This qualifier also works for ANSI E Level 3 tapes that do not have a system code (HDR1 CP 61) beginning O in DEC or OS. 2 BLOCK_SIZE/ MOUNT/BLOCK_SIZE:n ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-ID:C Specifies the block size in characters for unlabelled tapes at the F time of the mount. Values for n can be from 18 through 16000. This A qualifier also works on ANSI Level 1 or 2 tapes, that is, those e without HDR2 records (labels). 2 NOHDR3#HDR3r2 HDR3+ MOUNT/[NO]HDR3 ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-IDbL Specifies whether an HDR3 label is to be written when creating new files. I The /NOHDR3 qualifier is needed only in the situation where it is known OG that the target system cannot handle a tape with an HDR3 label. This aE qualifier has no other effect or application. The default is /HDR3. 2 NOLABEL #LABEL2 LABEL , MOUNT/[NO]LABEL ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-IDI Specifies whether the tape volume is ANSI or unlabelled. To specify an RE ANSI tape, use the /LABEL qualifier. To specify an unlabelled tape,w use the /NOLABEL qualifier.  e /LABEL is the default.. 2 RECORD_SIZE30 MOUNT/RECORD_SIZE:n ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-IDC Specifies the record size in characters for unlabelled tape. The C value for n can be from 1 through the value for block size on the f volume.2 EBCDIC #TRANSLATE2 UT1 #TRANSLATE2 UT2L #TRANSLATE2 UT3. #TRANSLATE 2 TRANSLATEs0 MOUNT00}/TRANSLATE:arg ddnn:[,ddnn:...] fileset-ID EBCID NONE UT1T UT2l UT3G Specifies the character translation to take place for reading from and3B writing to the mounted unlabelled tape volume. NONE specifies noB translation, and is the default. EBCDIC specifies translation toG ASCII from EBCDIC for writes and EBCDIC to ASCII for reads. Note thatDD the translation is not one-to-one because some characters are found; only in EBCDIC or only in ASCII. UT1, UT2, or UT3 specifyeG user-supplied translation tables that have been previously linked into J the MTAACP. See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Manual for/ further information on character translation. a/PASCAL currently is unavailable on your system.; The PRINT command submits one or more files for printing.  3 PRINT/commandqualifier[s] file[s]/filequalifier[s] 0 The following command qualifiers are available:< /[NO]ADJACENT /JOB_COUNT E /AFTER /JOB_PAGE /PRIORITYB /DEVICE /LENGTH /QUEUEH /[NO]FLAG_PAGE /LOWERCASE /[NO]RESTARTK /FORMS /NAME /[NO]TRANSFER H /HOLD /PAGE_COUNT /UPPERCASE - The following file qualifiers are available: ( /COPIES:n /[NO]DELETE /[NO]TRANSFERJ File qualifiers override command qualifiers. To obtain help for any PRINT qualifier, type: HELP PRINT qualifier Abbreviation: P 2 NOTRANSFER #TRANSFER 2 TRANSFER PRINT/[NO]TRANSFER filesG The /NOTRANSFER qualifier inhibits the copying of the file to LB: for F spooling. The default is /TRANSFER. This can be a command qualifierI or a file qualifier. When a copy of a file is transferred from a privateG device and then printed, the copy of the file is deleted. The original+ file on the private device is not deleted. 2 DEVICE PRINT/DEVICE:ddnn: filesC The /DEVICE qualifier specifies the device on which you want your F output to appear. The default is the device or devices served by the PRINT queue.2 QUEUE PRINT/QUEUE:queuename filesE The /QUEUE qualifier specifies the name of the print queue in which 6 the job is to be placed. The default queue is PRINT.2 NAME PRINT/NAME:jobname filesD The /NAME qualifier permits you to give a name of from 1 through 9 C Radix-50 characters to your QMG print job. The default is to name. the job after the first file name in the job.2 [NO]ADJACENT #ADJACENT 2 NOADJACENT #ADJACENT 2 ADJACENT LThe /ADJACENT qualifier causes print jobs to begin at the point at which theNpreceding job finished; that is, if the preceding job finished in midpage, theKnew one will commence on the next line. In print jobs that include multipleNfiles, each file will begin at the point at which the preceding file finished.JThe /ADJACENT qualifier will override any command qualifiers for file flagLpages, such as /[NO]FLAG_PAGE and /[NO]JOB_PAGE regardless of whether or notthey are the default.) LThe default is /NOADJACENT, which causes a print job to begin on a new page,Kregardless of where the previous j00TADATADATADATADATADATAob finished. Some printers are unaffectedKby this qualifier. See the documentation for the PRINT command for details.2 AFTER ' PRINT/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) filespec# TOMORROW filespec  @ The /AFTER qualifier allows you to specify that your job shouldI be delayed until after a specified date and time. The job will not printI immediately at that time but will become eligible to be printed and will& compete with other jobs at that time. E You may specify either the date, or the time, or both. If you do notB specify a date, the current date is assumed. To specify the dateC without the time, omit the hh and mm values, but still include the colons.> The /AFTER:TOMORROW qualifier specifies that the command willL execute after midnight. You can use this qualifier to queue print jobs for A the early morning hours. If you run a command file every day andJ wish to print output from that file, you can include PRINT/AFTER:TOMORROW in the command file. Examples: ? PRINT/AFTER:(18:00) LONGFILE.TXT ! print the file after 6 p.m. C PRINT/AFTER:(1-APR-87) JOKE.TXT ! print the file on April 1, 1987  G PRINT/AFTER:TOMORROW OUTPUT.LOG !print the file after midnight  2 JOB_COUNT #JOBCOUNT 2 JOBCOUNT  PRINT/JOB_COUNT:n files O The command qualifier /JOB_COUNT specifies how many copies of the complete jobC are to be printed. In the example below, two copies of the job areD printed. Each one consists of one copy of FILE1.TXT followed by one copy of FILE2.TXT. Example: ' PRINT/JOB_COUNT:2 FILE1.TXT, FILE2.TXT 2 COPIES F The file qualifier /COPIES specifies how many copies of the file are I to be printed. Only one copy of the job is printed, but it contains two 9 copies of FILE1.TXT followed by two copies of FILE2.TXT. Example: $ PRINT FILE1.TXT, FILE2.TXT/COPIES:22 DELETE  PRINT files/[NO]DELETE PRINT/[NO]DELETE filesO The /DELETE qualifier specifies that one or more files are to be deleted after$ printing. The default is /NODELETE. L As a filespec qualifier, /DELETE indicates that that file is to be deleted.G As a command qualifier, /DELETE indicates that all files named in the H command are to be deleted. Use the filespec qualifier to override the  command qualifier. Examples: ? PRINT FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT/DE,FILE3.TXT !Delete FILE2.TXT only= PRINT/DELETE FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT,FILE3.TXT !Delete all filesI PRINT/DELE FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT/NODEL,FILE3.TXT !Delete all but FILE2.TXT 2 NOFLAG_PAGE #FLAG_PAGE 2 FLAG_PAGE  PRINT/FLAG_PAGE files PRINT/NOFLAG_PAGE files B The /FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not files in a job F should be preceeded by file flag pages. The file flag pages separate 7 files and show the file. The default is /NOFLAG_PAGE. 2 FORMS  PRINT /FORMS:n files L The /FORMS qualifier specifies that your job is to be printed on a special K form. Your installation may have different forms for different tasks, suchL as normal computer paper, narrow white paper for letters, check forms, etc. % The default form number is /FORMS:0. K See your system manager to find out what other forms are available at your installation2 HOLD#NOHOLD2 NOHOLD  PRINT/HOLD files  PRINT/NOHOLD files M The /HOLD qualifier specifies that your job is to be held (made ineligible I for printing). You must then release the job to allow it to be printed  (see HELP RELEASE). 2 JOB_PAGES #JOBPAGES 2 JOBPAGES  PRINT/JOB_PAGE files PRINT/NOJOB_PAGE files E The /JOB_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not your job should be 6 preceded by job flag pages. The default is /JOB_PAGE. F If you specify /NOJOB_PAGE, your job will still start on a new page, G but job flag pages will not be printed. You might do this if you were 6 printing on a special form, particularly a short one.2 LENGTH  PRINT/LENGTH:n files E The /LENGTH qualifier specifies how many lines 00}should be printed on C a physical printer page. If, within 'n' lines, a formfeed has not I been printed, the despooler will insert one. In this way, you can limit  the amount of text on a page. N This is particularly useful if you are going to place the output in a listingK binder. By using the /LENGTH qualifier you can prevent the despooler from I printing over a perforation, which will be difficult to read when bound.9 For instance, /LENGTH:60 works on 66-line line printers. H The default, /LENGTH:0, specifies that no implied form feeds should be inserted. 2 LOWERCASE  PRINT/LOWERCASE files N The /LOWERCASE qualifier specifies that your job must be printed on a printer5 that has been initialized with lowercase characters. F Notice that /LOWERCASE does not effect a lower to upper translation. 2 It is just a requirement for selecting a printer. 2 PAGE_COUNT #PAGECOUNT 2 PAGECOUNT  PRINT/PAGE_COUNT:n files K /PAGE_COUNT allows you to specify a limit on the number of pages of outputN your job will produce. If the specified number of pages is exceeded, an error( message appears and the job is deleted. = The default is /PAGE_COUNT:0, which specifies no page limit. 2 PRIORITY  PRINT/PRIORITY:n files D /PRIORITY allows you to specify a priority for your print job. ThisM priority has no effect on how quickly the job is printed once it is started,- but it determines its position in the queue. L Privileged users may specify any priority between 1 and 250. Non-privileged5 users may only specify priorities between 1 and 150. F The default is /PRIORITY:50. /PRIORITY:0 is the same as /PRIORITY:50. 2 RESTART #NORESTART 2 NORESTART  PRINT/RESTART files PRINT/NORESTART files D /RESTART specifies whether or not a job is to be restarted from theJ beginning, if it is interrupted. When you specify /RESTART, if the job isL stopped for some reason and then restarted, it restarts from the beginning.H If you specify /NORESTART, the job restarts where it left off. /RESTARTJ and DELETE cannot be used together, as the system deletes the file before it can be restarted. 2 UPPERCASE  PRINT/UPPERCASE files : /UPPERCASE specifies that the print job can be sent to a < line printer that need not have been initialized lowercase. This is the default. PURGE[/qualifier[s]] filespec /EXCLUDE:filespec /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /KEEP:n /[NO]LOG /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy) /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY /NOWARNINGS D The PURGE command deletes all but the latest versions of files and E releases the storage space the deleted files occupy. Normally, the A PURGE command deletes all but the most recent version of a file.2 KEEP PURGE/KEEP:n filespec[,s] F The /KEEP qualifier saves the last n versions of a file. If you haveE three versions of a file numbered 1, 2, and 3, /KEEP:2 will save theE last two numerical versions (2 and 3) and delete version 1. However,E if the versions were numbered 1, 2, and 4, /KEEP:2 would try to saveD the last two numerical versions (3 and 4) and delete versions 1 andD 2. Since version 3 did not originally exist, you would be left with2 only one version of the file in your directory. 2 NOLOG#LOG2 LIST#LOG2 LOG PURGE/[NO]LOG filespec[,s]A The /LOG qualifier specifies that the names of the files deleted; should be listed on your terminal. The default is /NOLOG.2 DATE" PURGE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]H The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to affect& only files created on the given date.2 SINCE# PURGE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]C The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to 6 affect only files created on or after the given date.00TADATADATADATADATADATA@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGH% PURGE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]E The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to 7 affect only files created on or before the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAY PURGE/TODAY filespec[,s]C The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to ! affect only files created today. 2 EXCLUDE PURGE/EXCLUDE:filespec[,s]D The /EXCLUDE qualifer specifies that you wish the PURGE command to H exclude the named file (or files, if named with wildcard characters) in its action. 2 NOWARNINGS PURGE/NOWARNINGS filespec[,s]5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages. RELEASE/JOB queuename jobname RELEASE/ENTRY:n : The RELEASE/JOB and RELEASE/ENTRY commands release a job I that has been held in a queue. A job that is held is not eligible to be+ processed until it is explicitly released.F The RELEASE/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it isL more convenient to use and is the only way to refer to a job unambiguously.M Two or more jobs in the same queue may have the same name but never the sameN entry number. Job entry numbers are displayed with the SHOW QUEUE command. ? For more information see HELP SHOW QUEUE. See also HELP HOLD. REMOVE[/REGION] tasknameE The REMOVE command removes from the system a task or region that wasE previously installed with the INSTALL command. REMOVE also removes . the task name form the System Task Directory.J The /REGION qualifier takes the name of a region out of the Common Block  Directory and partition list.  This is a privileged command. REMOVE/TRANSLATION_ROUTINE:nD The /TRANSLATION_ROUTINE:n qualifier removes the ancillary control , driver (ACD) specified by the argument n.  K If you assigned a logical name for the ACD when you installed it, the nameE is deleted when you remove the ACD. This is a privileged qualifier. / RENAME [/qualifier[s]] oldfilespec newfilespec /EXCLUDE:filespec /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY /NOWARNINGSD The RENAME command changes the name, type, or version number of an F existing file. You can also use this command to change the directory1 (User File Directory) in which the file resides. > For help on a specific qualifier, type HELP RENAME qualifier.2 DATE. RENAME/DATE:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecB The /DATE qualifier affects files created only on the given date.2 SINCE/ RENAME/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecG The /SINCE qualifier affects files created on or after the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGH1 RENAME/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecJ The /THROUGH qualifier affects files created on or before the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODA00}Y% RENAME/TODAY oldfilespec newfilespec7 The /TODAY qualifier affects files created today only. 2 EXCLUDE' RENAME/EXCLUDE:oldfilespec newfilespecL The /EXCLUDE qualifer directs the RENAME command to exclude the named file ? (or files, if named with wildcard characters) from its action. 2 NOWARNINGS* RENAME/NOWARNINGS oldfilespec newfilespec5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages. REQUEST messageF The REQUEST command sends a message to the operator's terminal (CO:).H If you wish the message to include lowercase characters, enclose it in 0 quotation marks; for example, "Please wake up."HA restore operation is the transferring of a copy of files from a backupHset on one or more tapes or disks to a single Files-11 disk. You use the-BACKUP command to perform restore operations.NTo restore from tape, you specify up to eight tape drives as the input devices5and a single disk as the output device; for example: ' $ BACKUP MU0:,MU1: DU0:@To restore from disk, you specify up to eight disk drives as the>input devices, a single disk as the output device, and includeAthe /IMAGE:RESTORE qualifier to the BACKUP command; for example: 5 $ BACKUP/IMAGE:RESTORE DU1:,DU2: DU0:6For more information on backup and restore operations,Ftype HELP BACKUP. For examples of backup and restore operations, type HELP BACKUP EXAMPLES.   RUN[/qualifier[s]] [$]filespec Command Qualifiers:" /[NO]CHECKPOINT /STATUS:COMMAND /COMMAND:"taskcommand" :TASK /EXTENSION:n /TASK_NAME:name$ /PARTITION:parname /TIME_LIMIT:arg /PRIORITY:n /UIC:[g,m]  /[NO]POSTMORTEM? The RUN command can be used to initiate execution of either anH installed task or an uninstalled task from a task image file. Most RUNK commands are used to execute uninstalled tasks. The RUN command in this O case is a combination INSTALL-RUN-REMOVE command. The $ paramenter requests P that the task be run from a file in the library directory or system directory.  : For help on specific qualifiers, type HELP RUN qualifier.G Also, type HELP RUN INSTALLED_TASK for information on another type of RUN command.2 NOCHECKPOINT #CHECKPOINT 2 CHECKPOINT RUN/[NO]CHECKPOINT [$]filespecE The /CHECKPOINT qualifier specifies whether or not the task is to beH checkpointable as it runs. The default is set at link time. This quali-, fier overrides the link-time specification. 2 COMMAND RUN/COMMAND:"taskcommand" I The /COMMAND qualifier passes the specified command line to the task youL are running. The command must begin with the task's acronym, and it must beF valid for the task (if not, a syntax error message is returned). WhenK the task has finished executing the command line, the task is removed. TheE command must be inside the quotation marks and must be limited to 40$ characters in length; for example,  $ RUN/COMMAND:$PIP" /LI" 2 POSTMORTEM #NOPOSTMORTEM2 NOPOSTMORTEM  RUN/[NO]POSTMORTEM H The /POSTMORTEM qualifier specifies whether or not a postmortem dump is5 to be generated if the task terminates unexpectedly. I The default is determined when the task is built. If not specified, the* LINK command defaults to /NOPOSTMORTEM. 2 EXTENSION RUN/EXTENSION:n filespecF The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies that n additional words of addressI space are to be alloc00TADATADATADATADATADATAated to a task. The argument n is a decimal number. 2 PARTITION RUN/PARTITION:parname filespecF The /PARTITION qualifier specifies into what partition the task is toI run. The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the link- time specification.2 DUMP #POSTMORTEM 2 POSTMORTEM RUN/POSTMORTEM tasknameH The /POSTMORTEM qualifier specifies a postmortem dump in the case of an abnormal exit of the task. 2 PRIORITY RUN/PRIORITY:n filespecG The /PRIORITY qualifier specifies at what priority the task is to run.H The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.2 STATUS RUN/STATUS:COMMAND taskname RUN/STATUS:TASK tasknameN The /STATUS:TASK qualifier specifies that you wish exit status to be from the@ task being run instead of from the RUN command. The default isF /STATUS:COMMAND. The /STATUS:TASK qualifier may be necessary in user G batch jobs that run tasks where the batch processor must wait for the L task to exit before attempting to execute the next command. For instance, K if the user batch job includes a command to run a task that writes a file F followed by a command to print that file, the /STATUS:TASK qualifier > prevents the PRINT command from being issued before the task  has finished writing the file. 2 TASK_NAME RUN/TASK_NAME:name filespecG The /TASK_NAME qualifier specifies the name by which the task is to beH referred. The default is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the link-time specification. 2 TIME_LIMIT RUN/TIME_LIMIT:argF The /TIME_LIMIT qualifier permits you to set a time limit on the taskI execution time. Specify either m and the number of minutes or s and the2 number of seconds of CPU time. The default is m.2 UIC RUN/UIC:[uic] filespecE The /UIC qualifier specifies the default UIC for the task. This taskC UIC determines into what file-protection class it belongs and thus! directly influences file access." The brackets are required syntax.2 DELAY RUN/DELAY:nu tasknameD The /DELAY qualifier specifies that the specified task be run afterC the specified amount of time passes. The argument nu specifies theH amount of the delay as a number of units. The value n is the number of = units, and u is one of the time unit qualifiers, as follows: TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSI For example, to delay execution for 5 seconds after issuing the command, /DELAY:5S should be specified. 2 INTERVAL RUN/INTERVAL:nu tasknameG The /INTERVAL qualifier specifies that the specified task is to be runC at a regular interval. The argument nu specifies the interval as aL number of units of time. The value n is the number of units, and u is one ) of the time unit qualifiers, as follows: TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSD For example, to run a task every 5 seconds, /INTERVAL:5S should be specified. 2 SCHEDULE RUN/SCHEDULE:hh:mm:ss tasknameF The /SCHEDULE qualifier specifies that the specified task be run at a particular time of day. 2 SYNCHRONIZE RUN/SYNCHRONIZE:u tasknameB The /SYNCHRONIZE qualifier specifies that execution of the speci-H fied task be synchronized on a particular clock unit. The character u / is one of the time unit qualifiers as follows: TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSA For example, if you want to run a task A every hour on the hour, enter the following command:! RUN/SYNCHRONIZE:H/INTERVAL:1H AA This command synchronizes on the hour and then runs at intervals of 1 hour.2 INSTALLED_TASK RUN[/qualifier] INSTALLED_TASK Qualifiers /DELAY:nu /INTERVAL:nu  /SCHEDULE:hh:mm:ss /STATUS:arg COMMAND TASK /SYNCHRONIZE:u /UIC:[g,m]C This type of RUN command initiates execution of an installed task.> Nonprivileged users can run installed tasks with the /STATUS 4 qualifier, but all other qualifiers are privileged.K You cannot use RUN with tasks with names in the form ...xxx. To run these! tasks, use a command in the00} form $ RUN xxx- See HELP RUN qualifier for more information.6 The SET command establishes or changes the following:G [DAY]TIME ERROR_LOG LIBRARY PRIORITY SYSTEMI DEFAULT FILE [NO]PARTITION PROTECTION TERMINAL? DEVICE HOST PASSWORD QUEUE UICA GROUPFLAGS B For information on the above commands, type HELP SET commandname. 2 DAYTIME#TIME 2 DEFAULT8 SET DEFAULT[/[NO]NAMED_DIRECTORY] [ddnn:] [[directory]]I SET DEFAULT changes the location in which the operating system looks forN information from your current device and directory to those indicated in the J command. This command establishes your default device or directory, or J both. That is, when you do not indicate a device or a directory in the M file specification or command, the operating system supplies these defaults.D SET DEFAULT/[NO]NAMED_DIRECTORY establishes whether or not you can F specify named directories in the SET DEFAULT command. Also, the SET > DEFAULT command works differently if you previously set your * terminal's default to /NONAMED_DIRECTORY.> For more information on both named and numbered directories, ' type HELP SET DEFAULT NAMED_DIRECTORY.3 NONAMED_DIRECTORY#NAMED_DIRECTORY3 NAMED_DIRECTORY6 SET DEFAULT[/[NO]NAMED_DIRECTORY] [ddnn:] [directory]N SET DEFAULT/NONAMED_DIRECTORY is the default. This command allows SET DEFAULTH to accept either named or numbered directories. The format for a namedJ directory is [directory], where directory is one to nine of the followingK characters: the letters A to Z and the numbers 0 to 9. Examples of named4 directories include [MAG], [30352], and [1POTATO2].P The format for a numbered directory is [g,m], where g and m are octal numbers K from 1 to 377. Examples of numbered directories are [100,2] and [202,10].D If you issue the SET DEFAULT/NONAMED_DIRECTORY command, you can no C longer set your default to any named directory. However, you can H still use named directories in commands. In addition, the SET DEFAULT B command now changes the UIC as well as the default directory and C device of privileged users. This is the traditional RSX behavior,? in which no distinction is made between the protection UIC and the default directory. 2 DEVICE SET DEVICE:ddnn:/qualifier[s] /[NO]CACHE /[NO]CHECKPOINT_FILE[:n] /[NO]LOWERCASE /[NO]PUBLIC /WIDTH:n@ The SET DEVICE command establishes the attributes of a device. = Except for setting the width of your own terminal, this is a privileged command. 1 Type HELP SET DEVICE qualifier for further help. 3 NOCACHE#CACHE 3 [NO]CACHE#CACHE3 CACHE1 SET DEVICE ddn: /[NO]CACHE[:(option,option,...)]N The /CACHE qualifier modifies data caching for the specified device. You can specify the following options:4 CREATE[:[region][:[main_partition][:[cache_size]]]] REGION:name [NO]DEFER_WRITES [NO]DIRECTORY[:extent_size] [NO]LOGICAL[:extent_size] [NO]OVERLAY[:extent_size] [NO]READ_AHEAD[:extent_size] [NO]VIRTUAL[:extent_size]A Note that the CREATE option must be used for the first device toH be cached. You can omit the parentheses if you specify only one option.K The extent_size argument specifies the maximum size of an I/O request thatH will be considered for caching. The extent size radix is decimal. TheH minumum value for an extent size is 1 block; the maximum is 127 blocks.G Extent sizes can be modified for cached devices u00TADATADATADATADATADATAsing the SET command. The defaults are as follows:/ region -> CACHE (for both CREATE and REGION) main_partition -> GEN' cachesize -> 100 (decimal disk blocks)! directory -> on, 1 (recommend 3) logical -> off, 1 overlay -> on, 4 read_ahead -> off, 5 virtual -> on, 5E The /NOCACHE qualifier deactivates caching for the specified device.A For further help on options, type HELP SET DEVICE CACHE OPTIONS. 4 OPTIONS1 The data caching options are defined as follows:2CREATE[:[region][:[mainpar][:[size]]]] ?Creates a cache region in memory and associates caching for theIspecified device with that region. You can specify the name of the regionHto be created, the main partition in which the region is to be created,Iand the size of the region. You specify the size of the region in decimalFnumber of disk blocks. By default, the /CACHE qualifier uses a region Dcalled CACHE in the GEN partition with a size of 10010 disk blocks. "REGION=name JAssociates caching for the specified device with an already existing cache$region. The default region is CACHE.0[NO]DEFER_WRITES AEnables or disables data caching of deferred write requests. The %NODEFER_WRITES option is the default.B[NO]DIRECTORY[=extentsize] IEnables or disables caching of directory and other volume-structured I/O;Ethat is, logical I/O from ACP (F11ACP). The default is DIRECTORY. The8default extent size for the DIRECTORY option is 1 block.3 [NO]LOGICAL[=extentsize] GEnables or disables caching of logical I/O. The default is LOGICAL. The6default extent size for the LOGICAL option is 1 block.3[NO]OVERLAY[=extentsize] CEnables or disables caching of overlay I/O. The default is OVERLAY.;The default extent size for the OVERLAY option is 4 blocks."[NO]READ_AHEAD[=extentsize] IEnables or disables reading of the next exte before reading is explicitlyJrequested. The default is /[NO]READ_AHEAD. The default extent size for theREAD_AHEAD option is 5 blocks."[NO]VIRTUAL[extentsize] DEnables or disables caching of virtual I/O. The default is /VIRTUAL.;The default extent size for the VIRTUAL option is 5 blocks.3 CHECKPOINT_FILE#NOCHECKPOINT_FILE 3 LOWERCASE #NOLOWERCASE 3 NOPUBLIC#PUBLIC3 NOCHECKPOINT_FILE' SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]CHECKPOINT_FILE:nD The /CHECKPOINT_FILE qualifier sets aside n blocks on the specifiedE volume in [0,0]CORIMG.SYS to be the checkpoint file. n is a decimalE number. The volume must be in Files-11 format. Only one checkpointF file is permitted on each volume, but all volumes may have checkpointH files. Checkpoint files can be allocated on volumes mounted on private devices.H /NOCHECKPOINT_FILE eliminates a current checkpoint file on the device. ? The command does not take effect until the checkpoint file is cleared. 3 NOLOWERCASE SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]LOWERCASE@ /LOWERCASE sets a terminal or a printer to lowercase. If these@ devices are not set to lowercase, all lowercase characters are G translated to uppercase before being typed or printed. The default is /NOLOWERCASE. 3 SYSTEM#PUBLIC 3 NOSYSTEM#PUBLIC3 PUBLIC SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]PUBLICM The SET DEVICE:ddnn:/PUBLIC command sets a device to public access. A publicH device can be mounted by anyone. SET DEVICE:ddnn:/NOPUBLIC removes the9 public status of a device. This is the default setting.G The opposite of a public device is a private device. Use ALLOCATE to  create a private device. 3 WIDTH SET DEVICE:ddnn:/WIDTH:nK The SET DEVICE:ddnn:/WIDTH command sets the size of a device's I/O buffer.H This is the number of characters in a line on the device. The value of n is decimal. D Nonprivileged users can only set the width of their own terminal. 9 SET TERMINAL/WIDTH is the same command for this purpose. 2 ERRO00}R_LOG @DCLSETEL 2 GROUPFLAGS SET GROUPFLAGS:n[/CREATE]  SET GROUPFLAGS:n/DELETE C The SET GROUPFLAGS command creates and deletes group global event K flags. The default is to create them. You must enter the group number. J Privileged users can create or delete global event flags for any group. G Nonprivileged users can create or delete global event flags for their own group.2 HOST SET HOST nodenameJ The SET HOST command establishes the specified node as your host system.L After issuing the SET HOST command, you can enter terminal management modeJ by pressing CTRL\ (that is, the CTRL key, the backslash key, and theG RETURN key). Valid commands for terminal management mode are CONTINUE and CLEAR HOST.J Typing CONTINUE and then pressing the RETURN key allows you to exit fromN terminal management mode and return to the remote session. Typing CLEAR HOST4 followed by RETURN terminates the remote session. L Both your local system and the remote system must run DECnet software. InN addition, you need to have an account on the remote system. (Otherwise, youM will not be able to login to the remote system after you issue the SET HOST command.)  2 LIBRARY SET LIBRARY/DIRECTORY:[g,m]B The SET LIBRARY/DIRECTORY command establishes the directory whereM system utilities and other nonprivileged system tasks are kept. The commandF does not create a directory. This is a privileged command. See HELP A SET SYSTEM DIRECTORY for information on privileged system tasks directories. 2 NOPARTITION #PARTITION 2 PARTITION' SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/qualifier[s]! /BASE:n! /DEVICE% /DIAGNOSTIC! /SIZE:n! /SYSTEM$ /TOP:valueE The SET PARTITION command creates a partition in the system memory. C SET NOPARTITION deletes the partition. The parname argument names@ the partition. This name can be up to six Radix-50 characters. E The /BASE and /SIZE qualifiers are required with SET PARTITION. TheF /BASE qualifier specifies the starting address of the partition. The E base address, n, is specified in 32-word units. The /SIZE qualifier8 specifies the size of the partition in 32-word blocks. F Type HELP SET PARTITION qualifier for help on the remaining, optional qualifiers. This is a privileged command.3 DEVICE! SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/DEVICEF The /DEVICE qualifier identifies the partition as a common partition A for mapping into the device registers, that is, a device common. 3 DIAGNOSTIC& SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/DIAGNOSTIC @ The /DIAGNOSTIC qualifier creates a partition that is used for @ diagnostic functions on multiprocessor systems. The specified 9 partition is created without checking the top of memory.3 SYSTEM! SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/SYSTEM@ The /SYSTEM qualifier identifies a system-controlled partition.3 TOP SET PARTITION:parname/TOP:valueF The /TOP qualifier moves the top boundary of the specified partition,B based on the format of the value argument. The value argument isD a number of 64-byte blocks, expressed in one of the five following formats:@ +n moves the top boundary of the partition up by the specified ( amount, making the partition larger.C -n moves the top boundary of the partition down by the specified & amount, making the partition smaller.= n makes the partition the specified size by moving the top boundary.D [+]* moves the top boundary of the partition up as far as possible.< -* moves the top boundary of the partition down as far as possible. 2 PRIORITY SET PRIORITY:n taskname F The SET PRIORITY command changes the priority of an active task. The( value of n can be from 0 through 250. 2 PROTECTION1 SET PROTECTION:code[/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s] $ /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /[NO]DEFAULT% /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy' 00TADATADATADATADATADATA /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy7 /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY& /EXCLUDE:filespec > The SET PROTECTION command controls user access to a file by F establishing its protection code. The code argument consists of fourD groups (SYSTEM:,OWNER:,GROUP:,WORLD:), each of which is followed byE the appropriate code letters specifying the protection, as follows:  R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to file E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deleted! The system default protection is, (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R)? SET PROTECTION/DEFAULT is actually a command, not a qualifier;5 however, treat it as a qualifier to access more HELP information.: For more information, type HELP SET PROTECTION qualifier.3 DATE0 SET PROTECTION:code/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]C The /DATE qualifier establishes the protection of files created on the given date. 3 SINCE1 SET PROTECTION:code/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]D The /SINCE qualifier establishes the protection of files created on@ or after the given date. You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 3 THROUGH3 SET PROTECTION:code/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]C The /THROUGH qualifier establishes the protection of files createdD on or before the given date. You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 3 TODAY' SET PROTECTION:code/TODAY filespec[,s]H The /TODAY qualifier establishes the protection of files created today. 3 EXCLUDE6 SET PROTECTION:code/EXCLUDE:filespec[,s] filespec[,s]F When you use the /EXCLUDE qualifier, the command establishes the fileF protection code of all specified files except those designated in the qualifier's argument. 3 DEFAULT SET PROTECTION:(code)/DEFAULT? SET PROTECTION/DEFAULT is a DCL command, not a qualifier, thatL establishes your personalized protection code for all files that you createJ after issuing this command. A file protection code controls the types of9 access that other system users can have to your files. E Note that this command establishes your default file protection for B both current and future terminal sessions. If your system fails,D however, the processor restores your file protection to the system ; default protection. To ensure that your own default file C protection is set for all future terminal sessions, place the SET 3 PROTECTION/DEFAULT command in your LOGIN.CMD file.2 An example of a default protection is as follows:@ >SET PROTECTION:(SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:R,WORLD:)/DEFAULTB SYSTEM, OWNER, GROUP, and WORLD are the four user categories, andC READ, WRITE, EXTEND, and DELETE are the four types of file access G that you can grant to users. This default protection code gives the H SYSTEM and OWNER categories read, write, extend, and delete access to K files, but limits the GROUP category to read access and grants no access G to the WORLD category. Normally, you issue SET PROTECTION/DEFAULT to < establish a different default file protection for yourself.J For help on SET PROTECTION/NODEFAULT, type HELP SET PROTECTION NODEFAULT. 3 NO_DEFAULT #NODEFAULT 3 NODEFAULT SET PROTECTION/NODEFAULTI The SET PROTECTION/NODEFAULT command removes your personal default file G protection. After issuing this command, the files you create receive H the volume default protection. Although a volume can have any default A file protection, this default is usually the same as the system 5 default (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER;RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R).2 QUEUE@DCLSETQ2 SYSTEM SET SYSTEM/qualifier" /[NO]CRASH_DEVICE:ddnn:! /DIRECTORY:[directory]( /EXTENSION_LIMIT:n  /[NO]LOGINS /NETWORK_UIC  /PACKETS:n /POOL /REGISTER=nnnnnnG This is a privileged command. See HELP SET SYSTEM qualifier for more 00} information.3 NOCRASH_DEVICE #CRASH_DEVICE3 CRASH_DEVICE2 SET SYSTEM/[NO]CRASH_DEVICE:ddnn:/REGISTER=nnnnnnG The /[NO]CRASH_DEVICE:ddnn:/REGISTER=nnnnnn qualifier loads a specific@ crash driver into a main memory partition and updates the crashD database. To display the current crash dump device, omit the deviceG specification ddnn:. The /NOCRASH_DEVICE qualifier unloads the currentI crash driver. You use the /REGISTER qualifier to specify the control andC status register (CSR) of the desired device when the device is notn currently on the system. = Note that this qualifier is valid for all operating systems. D 3 DIRECTORYF! SET SYSTEM/DIRECTORY:[directory]TK The /DIRECTORY qualifier establishes the directory where privileged system K tasks are kept. Nonprivileged tasks are placed in the library directory. @ This command does not create a directory. See HELP SET LIBRARY.3 EXTENSION_LIMITM SET SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMIT:nNE The /EXTENSION_LIMIT qualifier sets the maximum size to which a taskt@ can extend itself by means of the EXTEND TASK system directive.@ n is specified in bytes or in 1024-byte units if suffixed by K. 3 NOLOGINS#LOGINSs3 LOGINS SET SYSTEM/[NO]LOGINS: The /NOLOGINS qualifier disables logging into the system.C If you issue this command and then log out, you have to reboot the E system to log back in, unless there is another privileged user stillt# logged in. /LOGINS is the default.e 3 NETWORK_UICc# SET SYSTEM/NETWORK_UIC:[directory]lF Specifies the directory in which all DECnet-related tasks are stored.B The qualifier applies only to systems that selected the external 8 communication products option during system generation. 3 PACKETSN SET SYSTEM/PACKETS:nAF The /PACKETS qualifier alters the number of preallocated I/O packets.E n equals 0 through 15. Normally, some number of 18-word I/O packets F are set aside in pool and retained in a separate queue for use by the> QIO directive. This number of packets is used to optimize the servicing of QIO requests. 3 POOL SET SYSTEM/POOL:topD Increases the size of the system pool (the dynamic storage region).> The top argument is the number of 32-word blocks (decimal).  SET SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITS:arg[s] HIGH=n LOW=n MINIMUM_SIZE=n TASK_PRIORITY=neD Sets the pool limit parameters used by the Pool Monitor Task (PMT).C HIGH = The high-pool limit in bytes. The default is 1600(decimal)  bytes.A LOW = The low-pool limit in bytes. The default is 600(decimal) I bytes. E MINIMUM_SIZE = The minimum byte size of the largest free pool block rB required for avoiding low-pool action by the Pool 3 Monitor Task. The default is 200(decimal) bytes.e@ TASK_PRIORITY = The base task priority is the lowest priority a@ nonprivileged task can have and still be eligible for memory ' contention during times of low pool.C$ The default is 51(decimal) bytes. 2 TERMINAL@DCLTERM2 TIME SET [DAY]TIME [date][time]nE The SET TIME command sets the current date and time. The date can beTF entered in either of these forms: dd-mmm-yy, or mm/dd/yy, but it will) always be displayed in the first format.d% The time is formatted as hh:mm[:ss].TH Either time, or date, or both, can be specified in the command line. If@ they are both specified, they can be specified in either order. 2 PASSWORD SET PASSWORD  Old password: New password: Verification:A SET PASSWORD changes your password. Your password is limited totE 39 Radix-50 characters, including: the uppercase letters A to Z, theNG numbers 0 to 9, the period, exclamation point, quotation mark, hyphen,h9 and dollar sign. For example, C3P0 is a valid password.t; After issuing the SET PASSWORD command, type your current ? password in response to the "Old password:" prompt. Then type t> your new password in response to both the "New password:" and> "Verification:" prompts. To preserve security, what you typeD in response to these pr00 TADATADATADATADATADATAompts is not shown on your terminal screen. 9 Note that you must press return after typing the commandN" and your response to each prompt.2 UIC  SET UIC [uic]G SET UIC is a privileged command that changes your User Identification eB Code (UIC). A UIC is an attribute of a directory and its files, F establishing ownership. If you create or alter files in a directory E other than your own, use this command to change your UIC to that of N the directory's owner.iA A UIC controls the protection codes of both a directory and its ]G files. These protection codes determine who can access the directory ! and its files, and in what ways.gC The format of a UIC is [g,m], where the first number is the group pH number, and the second is the member number. Group and member numbers L are octal and range from 1 through 377. Group numbers indicate privilege F status. The UICs of privileged accounts have group numbers of 10 or  less.C If your terminal's default is /NONAMED_DIRECTORY, SET UIC changes 5 both the UIC and the directory of a privileged user.e2 FILE6 SET FILE[/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s]/filequalifier[s]) /END_OF_FILE[:(BLOCK:n,BYTE:n)] ! /ENTER:synonym_filespeco /NOWARNINGSt /REMOVER /REWINDd /TRUNCATETB SET FILE establishes certain file attributes. You can change an G end-of-file marker, have an entry in one directory point to a file in lH another directory, remove an entry from a directory, or truncate files  to their actual length.4 For more information, type HELP SET FILE qualifier. 3 END_OF_FILE1 SET FILE/END_OF_FILE[:(BLOCK:n,BYTE:n)] filespeceDYou can specify only one file with the /END_OF_FILE qualifier. Use M/END_OF_FILE to specify where a file's end-of-file pointer is. This helps in Msituations, such as system crashes, when a file contains useful information,LHbut its end-of-file pointer is wrong, preventing you from obtaining the information. eF If you do not specify values for BLOCK and BYTE, the system puts the G end-of-file pointer past the last byte of the last block allocated to e the file. @ For BLOCK, the argument n specifies the block number where the F end-of-file pointer is to be placed. Usually, the pointer cannot be D placed beyond the highest number of blocks allocated to the file. 1 The block number can be either octal or decimal.E For BYTE, the argument n specifies the location of the first unused dH byte of the specified block. The byte number can be octal or decimal. > The maximum value for byte is 777 (octal), or 511. (decimal).3 ENTER - SET FILE/ENTER:synonym_filespec filespec[,s]sK Use the /ENTER qualifier if you want to be able to refer to a file by moremF than one name or if you wish to have the same file in more than one M directory. The synonym_filespec is the new directory entry. If many usersmG need the same file, this qualifier can save you a lot of disk space. aF If there is already a file of the name you specify, the new file will. be one version number higher than that file. < If you specify more than one file with this qualifier, the G synonym_filespec points to all those files. In effect, the files are a concatenated.F If you omit any field of the the synonym_filespec, the corresponding D field of the parameter filespec is used in its place. The default  parameter filespec is *.*;* 3 NOWARNINGS! SET FILE/NOWARNINGS filespec[,s]c. Suppresses error messages from the operation.3 REMOVE SET FILE/REMOVE filespec[,s]iA The /REMOVE qualifier is the opposite of the /ENTER qualifier. eF SET FILE/REMOVE removes a directory entry from a directory. You can H use this qualifier to delete synonyms created by the /ENTER qualifier. H You can also use it to eliminate directory entries which, for whatever G reason, point to nonexistent files. If you remove the last entry for l6 a file, it can only be found with the Verify Utility.3 REWIND SET FILE/REWIND filespec[,s]nC This qualifier is for use00(*} with tapes only. It causes the tape to G( be rewound before the operation begins. 3 TRUNCATE SET FILE filespec[,s]/TRUNCATEeM The /TRUNCATE file qualifier enables you to get back unused disk space. WhenmF the system creates a file, it allocates file space in multiple units,D usually 5 blocks at a time. The system, however, uses these blocksC only one at a time. This means that there are often unused blocksHB included in files. Issue the command DIRECTORY/FULL to check theD number of blocks used and allocated for a file. Two numbers in theG form 23./25. in the listing indicate that 23 blocks are used out of 25LF allocated. Since EXTEND access allows the system to change file sizeF whenever it wants to, the extra blocks may be of only limited use and can be truncated without loss. F In some cases, the presence of the extra allocated but unused blocks " may speed up execution of a task., SET ERROR_LOG/qualifier[/...] [ddnn:[,...]  /HARD_LIMIT:nI /[NO]LIMITINGn0 /NEW_LOG_FILE:filespec[/qualifier]1 /NEW_VERSIONm, /DELETE /RESET_COUNTSc /SOFT_LIMIT:nt@ The SET ERROR_LOG command modifies error logging operation and manipulates the error log file.7 See HELP SET ERROR_LOG qualifier for more information.n 3 HARD_LIMIT7 SET ERROR_LOG/HARD_LIMIT:n [/SOFT_LIMIT:n] ddnn:[,...]dN The HARD_LIMIT qualifier sets limits for the number of hard errors that errorL logging records on the device specified. Hard errors occur on a device whenI an I/O operation fails and cannot be recovered by the device driver. YouRG can set hard error limits for more than one device in the same commandmJ line, as long as the limits are the same. The default hard error limit on each device is five. G The value for n can be 0 to 255. If you set the limit to 255, logging /I continues without stopping (the limit is infinite). If the limit is set ! to 0, no errors will be logged. lK You can use the /HARD_LIMIT and /SOFT_LIMIT qualifiers in the same command I line to control both hard and soft limits for the same device. You can n3 specify different limits for hard and soft errors.e 3 NOLIMITING #LIMITINGo 3 LIMITING SET ERROR_LOG/[NO]LIMITINGtE The /[NO]LIMITING qualifier starts or stops the use of error limits. C These limits are set by default for all devices on the system whenoD you start error logging or they are set for individual devices with, the /HARD_LIMIT and /SOFT_LIMIT qualifiers.3 NEW_LOG_FILE0 SET ERROR_LOG/NEW_LOG_FILE:filespec[/qualifier]1 /NEW_VERSION , /DELETEF The /NEW_LOG_FILE qualifier copies the current error log file to the F file you specify and begins logging in that file. The default opera-D tion appends data to an existing version of the error log file and F preserves the old version. The /NEW_VERSION qualifier creates a new I version of the file. The /DELETE qualifier causes the system to delete EF the current error log file after it copies the file to the new file.3 RESET_COUNTS' SET ERROR_LOG/RESET_COUNTS ddnn:[,...] I The /RESET_COUNTS qualifier resets the QIO count and error count to zerooH for the specified devices (up to 14). This determines the error counts & shown in the SHOW ERROR_LOG display. 3 SOFT_LIMIT7 SET ERROR_LOG/SOFT_LIMIT:n [HARD_LIMIT:n] ddnn:[,...] T /N The SOFT_LIMIT qualifier sets limits for the number of soft errors that errorO logging records on the device specified. Soft errors occur on a device when an M I/O operation fails, but succeeds on a subsequent attempt. You can set soft L error limits for more than one device in the same command line, as long as O the limits are the same. The default soft error limit on each device is five. nG The value for n can be 0 to 255. If you set the lim0001TADATADATADATADATADATAit to 255, logging :I continues without stopping (the limit is infinite). If the limit is set o! to 0, no errors will be logged. rK You can use the /SOFT_LIMIT and /HARD_LIMIT qualifiers in the same commandnI line to control both soft and hard limits for the same device. You can e3 specify different limits for hard and soft errors.hD The SET QUEUE command modifies attributes given to either print or E batch jobs, or to files that compose jobs in a queue. Such jobs or ? files have been entered in queues by either a PRINT or SUBMIT 8 command. Attributes of active jobs cannot be modified.L A job can be specified as either the combination of a queue name and a job F name, or as a queue entry number. (The entry number for a particular G job can be determined by using the SHOW QUEUE command.) Both the job C formats and file formats for the command line are described below 1 with the available qualifiers for each format.  Job formats: ) SET QUEUE queuename jobname/qualifier[s] SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/qualifier[s] /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) /[NO]FLAG_PAGE /FORMS:n /JOB_COUNT:n /LENGTH:n /LOWERCASE /PAGE_COUNT:n /PRIORITY:n /[NO]RESTART /UPPERCASE File formats: 9 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s] / SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s] /COPIES:n /[NO]DELETE: To obtain additional help for a specific qualifier, type: HELP SET QUEUE qualifier 3 AFTER 4 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm)* SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) K The /AFTER qualifier sets a WAITING or HELD queued job to be blocked untilH after the specified date and time. The job will not be processed at the? time specified, but it will become eligible for processing andF will compete with other jobs in the queue. This is the equivalent of; issuing the PRINT or SUBMIT command at the time specified. H The date defaults to the present day. The time defaults to midnight. IfD only the date or time are specified (but not both), the parenthesesE can be omitted. If both time and date are specified, the parenthesesE must be included and the date and time must be separated by a space.3 COPIES 5 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/COPIES:n+ SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/COPIES:n F The /COPIES qualifier sets the number of copies of a file you wish to have printed within a job. " See also HELP SET QUEUE JOB_COUNT3 DELETE #NODELETE 3 NODELETE 7 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/[NO]DELETE- SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/[NO]DELETE @ The /[NO]DELETE qualifier changes the delete status of a single( file contained in a print or batch job.3 FILE_POSITION 9 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s]/ SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s] C The /FILE_POSITION qualifier is used for modifying attributes of aA file within a job rather than attributes of the job itself. The? file number n can be determined by examining the files in yourB job with the SHOW QUEUE command. Use the number displayed to the@ left of the file whose attributes you want to change. The onlyE qualifiers which can be used along with /FILE_POSITION are /COPIES:n and /[NO]DELETE. 9 See also HELP SET QUEUE COPIES and HELP SET QUEUE DELETE 3 FLAG_PAGE #NOFLAG_PAGE3 FORMS $ SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FORMS:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FORMS:n ? The /FORMS qualifier changes the physical form number for your; print job. An installation can have as many as 256 differ-F ent forms for different purposes (plain paper, letterhead, tax forms,F etc.). When you specify a form number, the print job will wait in the? queue until a printer with the proper form becomes available.  G You should see your system manager to determine what special form008?}s are available at your installation. 3 JOB_COUNT ( SET QUEUE queuename jobname/JOB_COUNT:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/JOB_COUNT:n @ The /JOB_COUNT qualifier sets the number of copies of a job you want to print. See also HELP SET QUEUE COPIES.3 LENGTH % SET QUEUE queuename jobname/LENGTH:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/LENGTH:n B The /LENGTH qualifier sets the number of lines to be printed on aH page. This number should be less than the actual number of lines on theB form you are printing on. After n lines have been printed on the 9 current page, printing begins on the next physical page. E The default is /LENGTH:0 which means that no page ejection will take9 place unless there are form-feed characters in the file. 3 LOWERCASE & SET QUEUE queuename jobname/LOWERCASE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/LOWERCASE I The /LOWERCASE qualifier specifies that the print job contains lowercaseH letters and therefore must be printed on a printer that has a lowercase character set. E This option only selects a printer. No conversion of characters from( lowercase to uppercase will take place. 3 NOFLAG_PAGE * SET QUEUE queuename jobname/[NO]FLAG_PAGE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/[NO]FLAG_PAGE I The /[NO]FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not you want file flagD pages to precede each file that is printed. The number of file flagF pages that precede each file is equal to the number of job flag pages that precede the job. H These file flag pages spell out the full file name of the file in block> letters and serve as a convenient method of separating files. 3 NORESTART#RESTART 3 PAGE_COUNT ) SET QUEUE queuename jobname/PAGE_COUNT:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/PAGE_COUNT:n F The /PAGE_COUNT qualifier allows you to specify a page limit for yourC print job. Should your job exceed this limit, it will be aborted. : Any flag pages in the job are included in the page count. F The default is /PAGE_COUNT:0 which means that there is no page limit. 3 PRIORITY ' SET QUEUE queuename jobname/PRIORITY:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/PRIORITY:n G The /PRIORITY qualifier allows you to change your job's priority. ThisG priority does not raise or lower the priority of the processor that isE processing your job; it only affects the position of your job in theN priority ordered queue. Priorities from 1 to 150 are available for all users.> Priorities from 151 to 250 are reserved for privileged users. D When the queue manager finishes processing a job, it looks for the F highest priority WAITING job. If there are two WAITING jobs at that H priority, the queue manager selects the job that has been in the queue longest.  The default is /PRIORITY:50. 3 RESTART ( SET QUEUE queuename jobname/[NO]RESTART SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/[NO]RESTART E The /RESTART qualifier specifies that if your job is HELD or stoppedD and then restarted it will restart from the first file in the job. > /NORESTART restarts the job at the point at which it stopped. 3 UPPERCASE & SET QUEUE queuename jobname/UPPERCASE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/UPPERCASE G The /UPPERCASE qualifier specifies that the print job does not containE lower case letters and need not be printed on a printer with a lower case character set. E This option is only a selection criterion. No lowercase to uppercase translation will take place.K The following are short forms of some commonly used DCL commands. You canA use any valid qualifiers with these forms. Although these shortB forms are not part of the DCL standard, they are provided for the9 convenience of users. Note that we recommend you do notG use these abbreviations in command files, because they may change from" one product release to the next. < A for ABORT E for EDIT M for MACRO< B for BROADCAST F for Fortran P for PRINT00@ATADATADATADATADATADATA: C for COPY H for HELP R for RUN; D for DIRECTORY ? for HELP S for SHOW; DEAL for DEALLOCATE L for LINK T for TYPE( DEAS for DEASSIGN LO for LOGOUT SHOW parameter: The SHOW command is used to display information about the following parameters:A ACCOUNTING [DAY]TIME HOST PRIVILEGE TASKSD ASSIGNMENTS DEFAULT LIBRARY PROCESSOR TERMINAL7 CACHE DEVICES LOGICALS PROTECTION UICA CLOCK_QUEUE ERROR_LOG MEMORY QUEUE USERS9 COMMON GROUPFLAGS PARTITIONS SYSTEM D For further help on the above parameters, type HELP SHOW parameter. 2 ACCOUNTING SHOW ACCOUNTING/qualifier" /INFORMATION ddnn:. /TRANSACTIONS[:infile] outfileH The SHOW ACCOUNTING command displays either current accounting data forB a terminal or historical accounting data showing system activity.D The SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION command displays current accountingG data for a logged-in terminal. Nonprivileged users can show accounting1 information about their own terminal activity. D The SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONS command dumps the current account-F ing transaction file to the specified output file. The optional input> file argument can be used to specify a transaction file other= than the currently active one. This is a privileged command. 2 ASSIGNMENTS. SHOW ASSIGNMENTS [logicalname][/qualifier[s]] /ALL /GLOBAL /GROUP[:g] /LOCAL /LOGIN /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn:B The SHOW ASSIGNMENTS command displays the local and login logicalB assignments pertaining to your terminal. The command can displayB all logical assignments for a specific logical name. You can use@ the asterisk (*) and percent (%) wildcard characters to displayC logical names. Privileged users can display assignments from other' terminals and also global assignments.E Logical assignments are established by ASSIGN, DEFINE, SET DEFAULT, 0 and ACNT, the Account File Maintenance Program.G For help on available qualifiers type HELP SHOW ASSIGNMENTS qualifier.3 ALL SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/ALLH The ALL qualifier displays all of your local, login, and group logical M name assignments, as well as all global assignments. This is a privileged qualifier.J You can use this qualifier with the /TERMINAL:ttnn: qualifier to display N the local, login, and group logical name assignments for terminal ttnn: on  your terminal.3 GLOBAL#SYSTEM3 SYSTEM SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/GLOBAL SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/SYSTEME The /GLOBAL and /SYSTEM qualifiers are synonyms that specifiy that B all global logical assignments in the operating system are to be > displayed on your terminal. These are privileged qualifiers.3 GROUP SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/GROUP[:g]G The /GROUP qualifier displays the group logical assignments for users H with the specified User Identification Code (UIC) group number, g. If D no group number is specified, the default is your UIC group number.H Nonprivileged users can display the group logical assignments of their I own group. Privileged users can display the logical assignments of any  group.3 LOCAL SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/LOCAL= The /LOCAL qualifier specifies that local and login logical F assignments for your terminal are to be displayed on your terminal. F This qualifier is only valid if your system supports extended logical names.! The default is SHOW ASSIGNMENTS. 3 LOGIN SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/LOGINC For all terminals, the /LOGIN qualifier is a synonym for /LOCAL.  This qualifier is privileged. 3 TERMINAL00H?} SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/TERMINAL:ttnn:@ The /TERMINAL qualifier specifies that local and login logical G assignments for terminal ttnn: are to be displayed on your terminal.  This is a privileged qualfier.E You can also use this qualifier with /ALL to see all of the logical assignments for terminal ttnn:.2 CACHE SHOW CACHE [/DEVICE=ddnn:]  [/REGION=name]  [/RATE:n]A The SHOW CACHE command monitors the performance of data caching,C once disk data caching has been established by using the DCL MOUNT or SET command. Qualifiers:D /DEVICE=ddnn: Specifies the device about which you want to display5 detailed data cache information. Note that /DEVICE& and /REGION cannot be used together.C /REGION=name Specifies the cache region about which you want to 5 display general data cache information. Note that. /DEVICE and /REGION cannot be used together.; /RATE:n Specifies in seconds the rate at which the screen - refreshes. The default rate is one second. 2 CLOCK_QUEUE SHOW CLOCK_QUEUEH The SHOW CLOCK_QUEUE command displays information about tasks currentlyD in the clock queue. The information consists of the task names, theG next time each task is to be run, and each task's reschedule interval, if one was specified. 2 COMMON_BLOCK_DIRECTORY SHOW COMMON[:name][/TASKS]5 The SHOW COMMON command on displays the names of theC resident commons installed in the system, their PCB addresses, the8 number of attached tasks, and the status of the common.B The optional name argument specifies that information should only# be displayed for the named common.H The optional /TASK qualifier, when used in conjunction with the name ofD a common, specifies that the list of attached tasks should also be displayed. 2 DAYTIME#TIME 2 DEFAULT SHOW DEFAULTE The SHOW DEFAULT command displays the current assignment of logical 5 name SY: and the default directory for the terminal. 2 DEVICES# SHOW DEVICES[/qualifier] [dd[nn:]] /[NO]CACHE  /[NO]PUBLIC /[NO]SYSTEM /WIDTH:ddnn:F The SHOW DEVICES command displays a list of the symbolic names of allE of the devices in the system. The device names appear in one column;G the second and subsequent columns contain additional information (when necessary) about each device.F For more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP SHOW DEVICES qualifier. 3 NOCACHE#CACHE3 CACHE SHOW DEVICE [ddnn:] /[NO]CACHEE The /CACHE qualifier lists all devices known to the system that are $ cached (if no device is specified).C The /NOCACHE qualifier lists devices that are not cached but could be cached. 3 NOPUBLIC#PUBLIC3 PUBLIC SHOW DEVICES/PUBLIC SHOW DEVICES/NOPUBLICF The /PUBLIC qualifier specifies that only a list of public devices be generated.I The /NOPUBLIC qualifier specifies that only a list of private devices be generated.3 SYSTEM SHOW DEVICES/SYSTEM SHOW DEVICES/NOSYSTEMB The /SYSTEM qualifier displays only a list of the public devices.E The /NOSYSTEM qualifier displays only a list of the private devices.3 WIDTH SHOW DEVICES /WIDTH:ddnn:G The /WIDTH qualifier displays the buffer size of the specified device. 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLSHOWEL 2 GROUPFLAGS SHOW GROUPFLAGSF The SHOW GROUPFLAGS command displays a list of the group global event flags currently in existence.  >SHOW GROUPFLAGS 201 1 000000 000000 303 1 000000 000000 333 1 000000 000000C The first column is the group number for the flags. The second isE the access count. The two 6-digit numbers are the octal words that G give the current state of each group global event flag. Group global H event flags are global event flags 65 through 80. The first octal wordF starts at flag 80 and goes to the right to flag 65. The second octal; word starts at flag 96 and goes to the right to flag 81. 2 HOST SHOW HOST C The SHOW HOST com00PATADATADATADATADATADATAmand displays the name of the processor to which G your terminal is currently connected. The display also shows you the @ name and version number of the operating system running on the processor.D The SHOW HOST command is most useful after you have connected your G terminal to a remote system with the SET HOST command. However, SHOW F HOST works whether or not your system runs DECnet software. Without E DECnet on your system, this command displays information about your  local operating system. 2 LIBRARY SHOW LIBRARY[/DIRECTORY]I The SHOW LIBRARY command displays the current library directory. This isH the directory where the nonprivileged system utility programs are to be6 found. The /DIRECTORY qualifier is a nonoperational.% See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM DIRECTORY.@ To run a program from this library, you can type RUN $filename. 2 LOGICALS+ SHOW LOGICALS [logicalname][/qualifier[s]] /ALL /GLOBAL /GROUP[:g] /LOCAL /LOGIN /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn:? The SHOW LOGICALS command displays the local and login logicalB assignments pertaining to your terminal. The command can displayB all logical assignments for a specific logical name. You can use@ the asterisk (*) and percent (%) wildcard characters to display- logical names. Privileged users can display; logicals from other terminals and also global assignments.E Logical assignments are established by ASSIGN, DEFINE, SET DEFAULT, 0 and ACNT, the Account File Maintenance Program.C For help on available qualifiers type HELP SHOW LOGICAL qualifier.3 ALL SHOW LOGICALS/ALLH The ALL qualifier displays all of your local, login, and group logical M name assignments, as well as all global assignments. This is a privileged qualifier.J You can use this qualifier with the /TERMINAL:ttnn: qualifier to display N the local, login, and group logical name assignments for terminal ttnn: on  your terminal.3 GLOBAL#SYSTEM3 SYSTEM SHOW LOGICALS/GLOBAL SHOW LOGICALS/SYSTEMD The /GLOBAL and /SYSTEM qualifiers are synonyms that specify that B all global logical assignments in the operating system are to be > displayed on your terminal. These are privileged qualifiers.3 GROUP SHOW LOGICALS/GROUP[:g]G The /GROUP qualifier displays the group logical assignments for users H with the specified User Identification Code (UIC) group number, g. If D no group number is specified, the default is your UIC group number.D Nonprivileged users can see the group logical assignments of their D own group. Pivileged users can see the logical assignments of any  group.3 LOCAL SHOW LOGICALS/LOCAL= The /LOCAL qualifier specifies that local and login logical F assignments for your terminal are to be displayed on your terminal. F This qualifier is only valid if your system supports extended logical names. The default is SHOW LOGICALS. 3 LOGIN SHOW LOGICALS/LOGINC For all terminals, the /LOGIN qualifier is a synonym for /LOCAL.  This qualifier is privileged. 3 TERMINAL SHOW LOGICALS/TERMINAL:ttnn:@ The /TERMINAL qualifier specifies that local and login logical G assignments for terminal ttnn: are to be displayed on your terminal.  This is a privileged qualfier.E You can also use this qualifier with /ALL to see all of the logical assignments for terminal ttnn:. 2 MEMORY SHOW MEMORYC The SHOW MEMORY command invokes the resource monitor display (RMD)F system utility program. This program displays in a graphic manner theA status of much of the system. Certain keys are active during the- display. Pressing "H" (HELP) will list them.( Type a CTRL-Z to exit from the display.E The RMD program is useful for monitoring the general activity of theG system. It is also useful for a new user to watch to gain some insightJ into how the operating system works. However, the graphic display is very7 approximate and cannot be used for critic00X?}al measure. @ For other functions of RMD, see HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE DYNAMIC. 2 PARTITIONS SHOW PARTITIONS[:parname]E The SHOW PARTITIONS command displays address and content informationG about the partitions of the system. The optional partition name can be7 used to limit the display to one particular partition.C When all partitions in the system are displayed, the format of the display is as follows:& parname pcbaddr baseaddr parsize MAING This display may possibly be followed by one or more lines describing = the contents of the subpartition, with the following format:. pcbaddr baseaddr parsize partype contentnameB When only one partition is listed the format of the display is as follows:! PAR=parname:baseaddr:parsize:SYSH The address and size fields of the single partition display are 32-wordF values, while they are byte values in the multiple partition display. 2 PRIVILEGE SHOW PRIVILEGEE The SHOW PRIVILEGE command generates a list of privileged terminals " that are logged in to the system. 2 PROTECTION SHOW PROTECTIONE SHOW PROTECTION displays your personal default file-protection code.F Your default file protection can be established in two ways: either G by issuing the SET PROTECTION/DEFAULT command or by using the Account E File Maintenance Utility (ACNT) to enter a protection code for your account.? If you do not set your own default file protection, then SHOW ) PROTECTION issues the following message:+ No user default protection specified.2 QUEUE( SHOW QUEUE [/qualifier[s]] [/queuename] /ALL /BATCH /BRIEF /DEVICE /ENTRY /FILES /FORMS /FULL /NAME /OWNER_UIC /PRINTERC The SHOW QUEUE command displays information about batch and print G jobs in queues. For information on the above qualifiers type  HELP SHOW QUEUE qualifier.3 ALL SHOW QUEUE/ALLF The /ALL qualifier displays information on all entries in all queues.3 BATCH SHOW QUEUE/BATCH? The /BATCH qualifier displays information on all batch queues. 3 BRIEF SHOW QUEUE/BRIEFM The /BRIEF qualifier displays queues, queue assignments, and jobs in queues.3 DEVICE SHOW QUEUE/DEVICEC The /DEVICE qualifier displays information on all nonbatch queues. Synonym for /PRINTER. 3 ENTRY:nn SHOW QUEUE/ENTRY:nnC The /ENTRY qualifier limits information to a particular job entry 3 where :nn specifies the job's unique entry number.3 FILES SHOW QUEUE/FILES? The /FILES qualifier displays information about queues, queue F assignments, jobs in queues, and files that compose jobs in queues. 4 This display format is the default of SHOW QUEUE. 3 FORMS SHOW QUEUE/FORMS[:n]@ The /FORMS qualifier limits information to jobs that are to be H printed on a specified form where :n specifies the type of form. If n C is omitted, the display shows all jobs that are other than Form 0.3 FULL SHOW QUEUE/FULLA The /FULL qualifier displays detailed information about queues, F queue assignments, jobs, the attributes of jobs in queues, and files  that compose jobs in queues.3 NAME SHOW QUEUE/NAME:jobnameC The /NAME qualifier limits information to jobs with the specified job name. 3 OWNER_UIC SHOW QUEUE/OWNER_UIC:uic B The /OWNER_UIC qualifier limits information to jobs owned by the * specified user identification code (UIC). 3 PRINTER SHOW QUEUE/PRINTERH The /PRINTER qualifier limits information to print queues. Synonym for /DEVICE. 2 PROCESSOR @DCLSHOWP 2 CARDREADER @DCLSHOWP2 BATCH @DCLSHOWP 2 PRINTER @DCLSHOWP2 INPUT @DCLSHOWP2 QUEUE @DCLSHOWQ2 SYSTEM SHOW SYSTEM[/qualifier] /CLI /CRASH_DEVICE /DIRECTORY  /EXTENSION_LIMIT /NETWORK_UIC /PACKETS /POOL /SECONDARY_POOL G The SHOW 00`ATADATADATADATADATADATASYSTEM command displays information about the current system.E For further information on the above qualifiers, type the following: HELP SHOW SYSTEM qualifier 3 PACKETS SHOW SYSTEM/PACKETSG Normally, some number of 18-word I/O packets are set aside in pool andG retained in a separate queue for use by the QIO directive. This numberG of packets (refered to as MAXPKT) is used to optimize the servicing of QIO requests.L The SHOW SYSTEM/PACKETS command displays the maximum number and the current/ number of available I/O packets in the format:i MAXPKT=m.:c.E where m is the maximum number of available I/O packets and c is the L) current number of available I/O packets. 3 CLIR SHOW SYSTEM/CLIL The /CLI qualifier displays information about the command line interpreters currently on the system.O3 CRASH_DEVICE SHOW SYSTEM/CRASH_DEVICEN The SHOW SYSTEM/CRASH_DEVICE command displays the current crash dump device. 3 DIRECTORY  SHOW SYSTEM/DIRECTORYN The SHOW SYSTEM/DIRECTORY command displays the current system directory. ThisR is the directory in which the system image and privileged system utility programs are to be found. n@ To run a program from this library, you can type RUN $filename. 3 NETWORK_UICT SHOW SYSTEM/NETWORK_UIC5 /NETWORK_UIC displays the current network directory.g3 POOL SHOW SYSTEM/POOL G The SHOW SYSTEM/POOL command displays the current status of the system ? dynamic pool as three numbers, top:max:total, where top is the F current top of memory, max is the largest contiguous block of pool inC 64.-byte blocks, and total is the total amount of pool in 64.-byteh$ blocks. See also HELP SHOW MEMORY. SHOW SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITSC Displays the current settings for the pool limit parameters. The $ display is in the following format:" PLCTL=high:low:minimum:priorityThe elements are as follows:) high The high pool limit in bytesI( low The low pool limit in bytesA minimum The minimum byte size of the largest free pool blockcA priority The lowest priority a nonprivileged task can have toY: compete for memory during periods of low pool3 EXTENSION_LIMITl SHOW SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMITM The SHOW SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMIT command displays the maximum size to which aLF task can extend itself by means of the EXTEND TASK system directive. 3 SECONDARY_POOL SHOW SYSTEM/SECONDARY_POOL D Displays secondary pool use on the system. The display is in the  following format:N T SECPOL=secfr:secsiz:pctfr sI secfr The number of free blocks in secondary pool in units of 32-worde (decimal) blocks.  iJ secsiz The size of secondary pool in units of 32-word (decimal) blocks. M: pctfr The percentage of free blocks in secondary pool. l2 TASKSn# SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/qualifier[s] $ /ACTIVE[:ttnn:]% /ACTIVE/DYNAMICS /DYNAMIC /INSTALLEDe /LOGICAL_UNITSN The SHOW TASKS command displays information about active and installed tasks. See also  HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE # HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE FULLT& HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE DYNAMIC HELP SHOW TASKS INSTALLED HELP SHOW TASKS FLAGS HELP SHOW TASKS LOGICAL_UNITS3 ACTIVE2 SHOW TASKS[:taskname][/qualifier]/ACTIVE[:ttnn:] /ALLu /BRIEFo nJ With the /BRIEF qualifier, which is the default, SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE lists N the names of tasks active on your terminal. The ttnn: argument specifies thatG it is the list of tasks active on another terminal that should be dis-eH played. The /ALL qualifier specifies that a list of all active tasks in the system be displayed. t iF For further help, type HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE FULL or HELP SHOW TASKS ACTIVE DYNAMIC.4 FULL# SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/ACTIVE/FULL E The full format of the SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE command displays a detailediF list of the disposition of all of the active tasks in the system. The00h?}D optional task name allows you to show this information for a single/ task. The format of the display is as follows:rF taskname tcbaddr parname pcbaddr taskaddrlimits priority def.priority STATUS: statusflagscH TI - ddnn: IOC - iocount EFLG - eventflags PS - pswval PC - pcval REGS 0-6 4 DYNAMICA I The /ACTIVE/DYNAMIC qualifier to SHOW TASKS invokes RMD display to show TK continously updated information on active tasks. On a video terminal, thedK display changes regularly. On a hardcopy terminal, the display is static.) SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE/DYNAMIC[/qualifier[s]]h /OWNER:ttnn: ALLo /PRIORITY:nd /RATE:noM The default is to show all active tasks. The /OWNER qualifier permits you tonL display only active tasks running from a particular terminal. The /PRIORITYG qualifier allows you to set the highest priority to display. The /RATEdI qualifier allows you to change the rate in seconds at which the display@ changes. To display dynamic information on a single task, type SHOW TASKS:taskname/DYNAMIC.T L3 FLAGSmD Here are the task status flags included in various system displays. i! Status Flag TCB Flag Meaninge ABO T2.ABO Being aborted( ACP T3.ACP Ancillary Control Processor AST T2.AST AST state. BLK TS.STP Blocked externally by CLI command5 CAF T2.CAF Dynamic checkpointing allocation failurei5 CAL T3.CAP Checkpoint space allocated in task imagen-CHK T2.CHK Not checkpointable C CIP TS.CIP Blocked for checkpoint in progress (RSX-11M-PLUS only)e CKP TS.CKP Checkpointed ' CKR TS.CKR Checkpoint request pendingi% CLI T3.CLI Command Line Interpretero% CMD T3.CMD Executing a CLI commando> DSP T4.DSP Task was built for the user-mode I- and D- space DST T2.DST ASTs disabled-EXE TS.EXE Not executing FXD T2.FXD Fixed in memory9 GFL T3.GFL Task has own group global event flags lockedt7 HLD TS.HLD Half-loaded, awaiting pool for task headert HLT T2.HLT Being terminatedE4 LDD T4.LDD Task's load device has been dismounted MCR T3.MCR Activated by MCR . MSG TS.MSG Aborted, waiting for TKTN message MUT T4.MUT Multiuser task# NET T3.NET Network protocol levelf- NRP TS.NRP Mapped to nonresident partitiont7 NSD T3.NSD Cannot receive data (no send data allowed)s&-PMD T3.PMD Suppress PMD on SST abort OUT TS.OUT Out of memory PRO T4.PRO Prototype task PRV T3.PRV Privileged 8 PRV T4.PRV Task was privileged but has cleared T3.PRV RDN TS.RDN I/O being run down REM T3.REM Remove on exitN/ REX T2.REX ABORT AST effected or in progresse ROV T3.ROV Resident overlays2 RST T3.RST Restricted - used by layered software* RUN TS.RUN Running on another processor# SEF T2.SEF Stopped for event flagU SLV T3.SLV SlavedL. SNC T4.SNC Commons used for synchronization SPN T2.SPN Being suspended$ SPNA T2.SPN Suspended prior to AST STP T2.STP Stopped" STPA T2.STP Stopped prior to AST+ SWS T3.SWS Reserved for software servicesg WFR T2.WFR In a wait-for state. WFRA T2.WFR In a wait-for state prior to AST) XHR none Task has an external headerb 3 INSTALLED, SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/INSTALLED[/qualifier] /BRIEFd /FULL /DEVICE[:ddnn:]& The /BRIEF qualifier displays a shortG format list of all of the installed tasks in the system. The format ofW the display is as follows:U/ taskname ident parname priority startaddr iN The /FULL qualifier displays a detailed list of the disposition of all of theH installed tasks in the system. The format of the display is as follows:F taskname tcbaddr parname pcbaddr taskaddrlimits priority def.priority STATUS: statusflagsi0 TI - ddnn: IOC - iocount EFLG - eventflagsA The /DEVICE qualifier displays the names and status of all taskst# installed from a specified device.u3 LOGICAL_UNITSo# SHOW TASKS:taskname/LOGICAL_UNITS rN The SHOW TASKS/LOGICAL_UNITS command displays the static logical unit number ) (LUN) assignments for an installed task.T 2 TERMINAL00pATADATADATADATADATADATA" SHOW TERMINAL[:ttnn:][/qualifier]H The SHOW TERMINAL command shows how various attributes of terminals are set.eL The SHOW TERMINAL command without any qualifier shows all the attributes ofH your terminal. If you name another terminal in the command, all of its2 attributes are displayed in the following format:TTnn: [303,12] [303,12]3 CLI = DCL BUF = 132. HFILL = 0 SPEED=(300,300)r2 LINES = 66. TERM = LA36 OWNER = SELF BRO NOABAUD> LOWER NOPRIV NOHOLD NOSLAVE NOESC NOCRT NOHFF NOREMOTE4 ECHO NOVFILL NOHHT NOFDX WRAP NORPA NOEBC TYPEAHEADC For a list of the commonly used attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINALc COMMON_USE.D For a list of the terminal setup attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINAL TERMINAL_SETUP.E The task setup attributes are attributes that may need to be set forgA certain user tasks to execute properly. For a list of task setupS/ attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINAL TASK_SETUP. H For more information on a particular attribute, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL attribute.G3 NOADVANCED_VIDEO#ADVANCED_VIDEOT3 ADVANCED_VIDEO SHOW TERMINAL/ADVANCED_VIDEO  SHOW TERMINAL/NOADVANCED_VIDEOaE This command displays a list of all VT100-series terminals that haveg( (or do not have) advanced video option. 3 NOANSI_CRT #ANSI_CRTt 3 ANSI_CRT SHOW TERMINAL/ANSI_CRTa SHOW TERMINAL/NOANSI_CRTnJ This command displays a list of all terminals whose output is (or is not)L a subset of the ANSI standard. Terminals with this attribute do not output" DIGITAL private escape sequences. 3 NOAUTOBAUD #AUTOBAUDg 3 AUTOBAUD SHOW TERMINAL/AUTOBAUDr SHOW TERMINAL/NOAUTOBAUDaI This command displays a list of all terminals that have (or do not have)y5 autobaud detection on a remote dial-up line enabled.,3 NOBLOCK_MODE #BLOCK_MODEm 3 BLOCK_MODE SHOW TERMINAL/BLOCK_MODE SHOW TERMINAL/NOBLOCK_MODEeD This command displays a list of all terminals that are (or are not)6 capable of local editing and block-mode transmission. 3 NOBROADCASTl #BROADCAST 3 BROADCAST  SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]BROADCASTI This command lists all terminals on the system that accept messages from  the BROADCAST command.g 3 NODEC_CRT #DEC_CRT 3 DEC_CRTe SHOW TERMINAL/DEC_CRT SHOW TERMIAL/NODEC_CRTi .N This command displays a list of all terminals that are upward compatible with the VT100 series of terminals.o 3 NOEDIT_MODEg #EDIT_MODE 3 EDIT_MODE  SHOW TERMINAL/EDIT_MODE SHOW TERMINAL/NOEDIT_MODEK This command displays a list of all terminals that can (or cannot) performeH ANSI-defined advanced editing functions. An example of such a terminal is the VT102. 3 COMMON_USE SHOW TERMINAL/attributeH The following keywords show terminal characteristics that are regularlyF needed by the average terminal user. For more information on a parti-> cular characteristic, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL characteristic. /CLI /CONTROL=C  /DCLs /[NO]HOLD_SCREENg /LOWERCASE /MCRd /[NO]PRIVILEGED /SPEED:(t,r)O /UPPER_CASE3 CLIS SHOW TERMINAL/CLIE The SHOW TERMINAL/CLI command displays the command line interpreter e for the terminal. See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM CLI.: 3 NOCONTROL=C/ #CONTROL=C 3 CONTROL=Ci SHOW TERMINAL/CONTROL=C SHOW TERMINAL/NOCONTROL=C> This command displays a list of all terminals on which typing? CTRL/C causes either an abort (/CONTROL=C) or an explicit DCL>L prompt (/NOCONTROL=C).l3 DCLs SHOW TERMINAL/DCLF The SHOW TERMINAL/DCL command displays a list of the DCL terminals in the system.  See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM CLI H To change from a DCL terminal to an MCR terminal, issue the command SET TERMINAL/MCR.D To change from an MCR terminal to a DCL terminal, issue the command SET /DCL=TI:. 3 LOGGED_ONx SHOW TERMINAL/LOGGED_ONF This command displays a list of all the terminals currently logged in on the system.s3 ECHO#NOECHOe 3 EIGHT_BIT #NOEIGHT_BIT3 ESCAPE #NOESCAPEp 3 FORM_FEEDm #NOFORM_FEED 3 FULL_DUPLEXd#NOFULL_DUPLEX 3 HARDCOPY#SCOPE3 HFILLe#CRFILLt00x?}3 CRFILL SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/CRFILLoH The SHOW TERMINAL/CRFILL command displays the number of horizontal fillG characters generated for your terminal. A privileged user can show thenE number of horizontal fill characters for any terminal in the system.  /HFILL is a synonym.lD Horizontal fill characters are null characters sent to the terminalF after a carriage return to accommodate the different return speeds ofE different terminal models. Many terminal models perform a mechanicalyC carriage return slow enough that the next n characters sent to thesD terminal will be lost. Adding in null characters prevents this from happening.e 3 NOHOSTSYNC #HOSTSYNCp 3 HOSTSYNC SHOW TERMINAL/HOSTSYNCd SHOW TERMINAL/NOHOSTSYNC> The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]HOSTSYNC command lists the terminals inG the system which do [do not] temporarily lock their keyboards when theeB typeahead buffer is full. Locking the keyboard stops informationD from being sent to the system until the terminal's typeahead buffer is emptied. 3 HOLD_SCREENd#NOHOLD_SCREEN 3 INTERACTIVEN#PASSALL3 LOCALN#REMOTE 3 LOWERCASEs #UPPERCASE3 MCR  SHOW TERMINAL/MCRC The SHOW TERMINAL/MCR command displays a list of the MCR terminalss in the system. u See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM CLI.a3 MODELu SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/MODELE The SHOW TERMINAL MODEL command shows you what model of terminal theE system thinks you are using. If this information is not correct, youEG should correct it with the SET TERMINAL command. Some system tasks uses7 this information and therefore it should be correct. u3 NOECHO SHOW TERMINAL/ECHO  SHOW TERMINAL/NOECHO E The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]ECHO command lists the terminals in the systemIF that are set to [set not to] echo input typed on them. Most terminals will be set to echo. 3 EBC #NOEIGHT_BIT 3 NOEIGHT_BITU SHOW TERMINAL/EIGHT_BIT SHOW TERMINAL/NOEIGHT_BITC The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]EIGHT_BIT command lists the terminals in the4 system that are set to [not set to] eight bit mode.B /NOEIGHT_BIT is the default. DEC software employs seven bit ASCII (without parity checking).UC /EIGHT_BIT allows the terminal to pass all eight bits of the ASCIIuH characters. This attribute is used when a teminal is communicating with( some device that sends eight-bit ASCII.A The mnemonic EBC, used in the output, means Eight Bit Character.s 3 NOESCAPE SHOW TERMINAL/ESCAPEu SHOW TERMINAL/NOESCAPEEG The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]ESCAPE command lists the terminals in the systemr5 that are set to recognize terminal escape sequences.s 3 NOFORM_FEEDu SHOW TERMINAL/FORM_FEED SHOW TERMINAL/NOFORM_FEEDC The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]FORM_FEED command lists the terminals in then) system that support hardware form feeds.j 3 NOHARDCOPY#SCOPE3 NOHOLD_SCREENi SHOW TERMINAL/HOLD_SCREEN SHOW TERMINAL/NOHOLD_SCREEND The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]HOLD_SCREEN command lists the terminal in the; system that are in hold-screen mode. Hold-screen mode is aoD mode supported by some CRT terminals in which text is presented one page at a time.3 NOINTERACTIVEU#PASSALL 3 NOLOCALq#REMOTEd3 NOLOWER_CASE #UPPER_CASEa 3 NOPASSALL#PASSALL 3 NOPRIVILEGEs #PRIVILEGE 3 NOREMOTE#REMOTEs 3 NOSCOPE #SCOPE 3 NOSLAVEs#SLAVE3 NOTABA#TAB 3 NOTYPEAHEADE #TYPEAHEAD 3 NOUPPERCASEi #UPPERCASE 3 NOVFILL #VFILL3 NOWRAP#WRAPd3 PAGE SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/PAGEUE The SHOW TERMINAL/PAGE command shows the number of lines per page onsH your terminal. A privileged user can show the page length of any termi- nal in the system.G The page length on a CRT terminal is usually considered to be the num- ber of lines on the screen.3 RPA#PASSALL 3 PASSALLW SHOW TERMINAL/PASSALL SHOW TERMINAL/NOINTERACTIVE SHOW TERMINAL/NOPASSALL SHOW TERMINAL/INTERACTIVE> The above commands list the terminals in the system that are  in read-pass-all mode. E /NOPASSALL is the default and means that any characters typed on the 1 terminal are interpreted by the00ATADATADATADATADATADATA terminal driver.sI /PASSALL means that characters typed on the terminal are passed directlyhG to the requesting task, without interpretation by the terminal driver.e< The mnemonic RPA, used in the display, means Read Pass All. 3 NOPASTHRU #PASTHRU 3 PASTHRUs SHOW TERMINAL/PASTHRU SHOW TERMINAL/NOPASTHRUA The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]PASTHRU command lists the terminals in theM@ system which are set to [not set to] execute special characters@ according to their original function. These special characters@ include control characters (except CTRL/S and CTRL/Q), carraige" return, and line-feed characters.3 PRINTER_PORT SHOW TERMINAL/PRINTER_PORTe SHOW TERMINAL/NOPRINTER_PORTeE The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]PRINTER_PORT lists the terminals in the systemsA which do [do not] have a port for attaching a line printer. For 8 example, the VT200-series terminals have printer ports. 3 PRIVILEGED SHOW TERMINAL/PRIVILEGEDlF The SHOW TERMINAL PRIVILEGED command lists all of the privileged ter-E minals in the system. A privileged terminal can issue any DCL or MCRc command. 3 NOREGISe#REGIS3 REGISe SHOW TERMINAL/REGIS SHOW TERMINAL/NOREGISF The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]REGIS command displays a list of all terminals 9 that support (or do not support) the Regis graphics set.K VT125s can support the set.3 REMOTE SHOW TERMINAL/LOCAL SHOW TERMINAL/NOREMOTEO SHOW TERMINAL/NOLOCAL SHOW TERMINAL/REMOTEc= The above commands list the terminals in the system that are: on remote (dial-up) lines.3 SCOPEt SHOW TERMINAL/HARDCOPYr SHOW TERMINAL/NOSCOPE SHOW TERMINAL/NOHARDCOPYn SHOW TERMINAL/SCOPE> The above commands list the terminals in the system that are  hardcopy terminals.3 SLAVED SHOW TERMINAL/SLAVE SHOW TERMINAL/NOSLAVEF The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]SLAVE command lists the terminals in the systemL that are slaved. A slaved terminal is one that cannot issue any unsolicitedJ input. In general, this means that a slave terminal may not issue any DCLK or MCR commands. A terminal is usually slaved while running a task so thatsO the terminal can be left unattended without any fear of it being used to gain i access to the system.3 NOSOFT_CHARACTERSS#SOFT_CHARACTERS3 SOFT_CHARACTERSO SHOW TERMINAL/SOFT_CHARACTERS SHOW TERMINAL/NOSOFT_CHARACTERSK This command displays a list of the terminals that accept software-defined ? character sets. The VT200-series terminals accept these sets.c3 SPEEDo SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/SPEEDF The SHOW TERMINAL SPEED command lists the transmit and receive speedsF of your terminal. A privileged user can show the transmit and receive& speeds of any terminal in the system.B The first of the two numbers displayed is the terminal's transmitH speed. The second is its receive speed. Normally, both of these will beN the same speed, but the operating system supports split-speed terminals (ter-H minals with different transmit and receive speeds). The SPEED setting C must match the speed set on the hardware switches on the terminal  itself.3 HHTo#TAB3 TABs SHOW TERMINAL/TAB SHOW TERMINAL/NOTABI The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]TAB command lists the terminals in the system thatL< support hardware horizontal tabs. If your terminal does notF support these, the terminal driver replaces tabs with the appropriate number of spaces.F The mnemonic HHT, used in the display, means Hardware Horizontal Tab. 3 TASK_SETUP SHOW TERMINAL attributeH The following keywords show terminal characteristics that can be neededE by system or user tasks. Most system tasks that require these attri- H butes will set the attributes when they attach the terminal. User tasksG can also do this. For more information on a particular attribute, typei HELP SHOW TERMINAL attribute.# /CHARACTER_LENGTH /ECHO /PASSALLS /EIGHT_BIT /REMOTE /ESCAPE /SLAVEs /FULL_DUPLEX /TYPEAHEADf /INTERACTIVE /WRAP /LOCAL /PASTHRU" /PARITY /SERIAL3 TERMINAL_SETUP SHOW TERMINAL attribute00?}D The following keywords relate to hardware characteristics of a ter-H minal. Most of these keywords will cause a list of all terminals in theG system with the specified characteristic to be displayed. However, thecJ attributes CRFILL,MODEL, PAGE, and LFFILL will display the value relating to your terminal.E /ASR33 /DTC01 /KSR33 /ASR35 /LA12 /LA30P /LA30S /LA34 /LA36 /LA38sK /LA50 /LA75 /LA100 /LA120 /LA180S /LA200_SERIES /LA210 /LQP02 /LQP03 G /LN03 /PRO_SERIES /VT05B /VT50 /VT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100 /VT101 d4 /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIES  h( /FORM_FEED /LFILL ! /HFILL /MODEL f /PAGE /HOSTSYNC /SCOPE /PRINTER_PORTr /ADVANCED_VIDEO /REGISl% /ANSI_CRT /SOFT_CHARACTERSr /BLOCK_MODE /TTSYNC /DEC_CRT /TABe /EDIT_MODE  4 For more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL attribute3 [NO]CHARACTER_LENGTH#CHARACTER_LENGTHe3 NOCHARACTER_LENGTH#CHARACTER_LENGTH 3 CHARACTER_LENGTHOThe /CHARACTER_LENGTH:n qualifier sets the length of characters transmitted andNreceived by terminals attached to the system through DH11, DHU11, DHV11, DZ11,Oor DZV11 variable-speed multiplexers. This qualifier is not valid for terminalsmNattached through DL11 serial-line units. You can set the character length as 7Kor 8 bits. The default is 8-bit characters. Nonprivileged users can set thekKcharacter length for their own terminals only; privileged users can set theCJcharacter length for any terminal. This qualifier determines the characterClength that the hardware controller will accept, in contrast to thetL/[NO]EIGHT_BIT qualifier, which determines the character length the software will accept. 23 TTSYNC SHOW TERMINAL/TTSYNC  SHOW TERMINAL/NOTTSYNCtB The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]TTSYNC lists the terminals in the system toK which the operating system responds when a CTRL/S or a CTRL/Q is issued. D Pressing CTRL/S delays output to the terminal, CTRL/Q continues it. 3 TYPEAHEADs SHOW TERMINAL/TYPEAHEAD SHOW TERMINAL/NOTYPEAHEADJ The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]TYPEAHEAD command lists the terminals in the system9 that have their typeahead buffers enabled. The typeaheadS@ buffer is 36 characters long and holds characters when they are/ typed faster than they are accepted as input. 3 UPPER_CASE SHOW TERMINAL/LOWERCASE SHOW TERMINAL/NOUPPERCASE SHOW TERMINAL/NOLOWERCASE SHOW TERMINAL/UPPERCASEL The above commands list the terminals in the system that support lowercase.G On terminals that do not have this attribute, lowercase characters areh> converted to upper case before they are sent to the terminal.3 VFILL#LFFILLS3 LFFILL SHOW TERMINAL/LFFILLn SHOW TERMINAL/NOLFFILLeG The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]LFFILL command lists the terminals in the system.B which do [do not] require vertical fill characters. Vertical fillE characters are used to accommodate terminals which cannot accept new H data characters immediately after performing a vertical tab, line feed,# or form feed. /VFILL is a synonym.u3 ASR33#VT61R3 DTC01 #VT613 KSR33I#VT61n3 ASR35e#VT61 3 LA12#VT61a3 LA30St#VT61a3 LA30P #VT61t3 LA34#VT61s3 LA38#VT61m3 LA100m#VT613 LA120l#VT61s3 LA180S#VT61s3 LN02#VT61a3 LN03#VT61 3 LQP02r#VT61T3 LQP03q#VT61r3 VT05#VT61a3 VT50#VT61e3 VT52#VT61 3 VT55#VT61s3 VT100s#VT61h3 VT101 #VT61m3 VT102 #VT61 3 VT105l#VT613 VT125 #VT61 3 VT131c#VT61a3 VT132i#VT61r3 VT200r#VT613 VT61$ SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/terminalmodelI The SHOW TERMINAL/terminalmodel command displays a list of all terminals E on your system of a particular model including any of the following:OE /ASR33 /DTC01 /KSR33 /ASR35 /LA12 /LA30P /LA30S /LA34 /LA36 /LA38IK /LA50 /LA75 /LA100 /LA120 /LA180S /LA200_SERIES /LA210 /LQP02 /LQP03sG /LN03 /PRO_SERIES /VT05B /VT50 /00TADATADATADATADATADATAVT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100 /VT101 f4 /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIES E Certain system tasks, and possibly some user tasks, make use of thisyD terminal model information, and therefore it is a good idea to make& sure that the information is correct.3 WRAP SHOW TERMINAL/WRAPt SHOW TERMINAL/NOWRAPE The SHOW TERMINAL [NO]WRAP command lists the terminals in the system3J that are set to wrap around at the end of line. If the terminal is set toK wrap, the terminal driver issues a carriage-return/line-feed pair when youNL type up to whatever line width the terminal is set for. If wrap is not set,- no carriage-return/line-feed pair is issued.t2 TIME#DAYTIME 2 DAYTIME SHOW DAYTIMEM SHOW TIMEF The SHOW TIME command displays the current time and date. The time is: in 24-hour format and the date is formatted as dd-mmm-yy.2 UICt SHOW UICI The SHOW UIC command displays the UIC. The command works only in named-a directory mode.2 USERS SHOW USERSNF The SHOW USERS command lists the currently logged in real and virtual; terminals. Also displayed are the default and login UICs. IM If accounting is supported and is running, subsequent columns of the display(M show the date and time of login, the number of tasks active on the terminal,& and the name of the person logged in.1 SHOW ERROR_LOG[/OUTPUT[:filespec]] [ddnn:[,...]]E The SHOW ERROR_LOG command provides a brief display of error-loggingI information on the devices specified (up to 14). If you do not specify M any devices, the Error Logger provides information about all of the devices F in the system. The default is to display the report on your terminal.J The /OUTPUT qualifier allows you to specify that the output be written inG a file. Without the file specification, the system uses the file nameD ERRORS.LST. If you specify a file name, the system uses that name.. SHOW processortype processorname[/qualifier] BATCH CARD_READER INPUT PRINTER PROCESSORG The SHOW processortype command displays information about processors, D card readers, batch processors, and other devices under the control of the Queue Manager. D CARD_READER and INPUT are synonyns. PRINTER refers to all nonbatchN output processors. BATCH refers to all batch processors. (Batch processing $ is available only on RSX-11M-PLUS.)G A simple SHOW PROCESSOR command displays all processors in the system. & SHOW QUEUE [queuename][/qualifier[s]] /ALL /BRIEF /DEVICE /ENTRY:n /FILES" /FORMS[:n] /FULL% /NAME:jobname& /OWNER_UIC:uic /PRINT  D The SHOW QUEUE command displays the status of the system queues. It= can be used to check the status of a partic00}ular job or jobs, or to check queue activity. A A simple SHOW QUEUE command will display all jobs in all queues,@ including the files that make up each job. It is comparable to typing SHOW QUEUE/FILES.G For more information on the qualifiers available with SHOW QUEUE, type HELP SHOW QUEUE qualifier.3 ALL SHOW QUEUE/ALLF The /ALL qualifier displays information on all entries in all queues.3 BRIEF#FULL3 ENTRY  SHOW QUEUE/ENTRY:n H The /ENTRY:n qualifier allows you to specify the unique entry number ofG the job you wish to display. This is helpful if you remember the entryI number displayed upon successful execution of a PRINT or SUBMIT command. D When two or more jobs with the same name are in a queue, the use ofB /ENTRY:n is the only unambiguous way to reference a specific job.3 FILES#FULL3 FORMS  SHOW QUEUE/FORMS[:n] G The /FORMS qualifier restricts the display to print jobs with the same@ form number as specified in the command. This can be useful toD determine how many jobs preceding your job require the same special form. A If :n is omitted, the display shows all jobs that are other than FORM:0.3 FULL  SHOW QUEUE/BRIEF SHOW QUEUE/FILES SHOW QUEUE/FULL E There are three formats in which the queue (and jobs in them) can be> displayed. They are listed in order of least to most detail. D The /BRIEF format displays only queues, queue assignments, and jobs in queues. F The /FILES format displays queues, queue assignments, jobs in queues,D and files that compose those jobs. This is the default format used for SHOW QUEUE. = The /FULL format contains the most information. It displaysG attributes of jobs in queues and attributes of the files that compose: those jobs in addition to queues and queue assignments.  3 NAME  SHOW QUEUE/NAME:jobname > The /NAME qualifier allows you to display only jobs with the 5 specified jobname. The UIC of the job is part of the= name. (You do not have to specify it if it is your own UIC.) D If there are multiple jobs in the queue with the same UIC and name 7 specified, they will all be displayed. If this is notB desired, use the /ENTRY:n qualifier (see HELP SHOW QUEUE ENTRY). 3 DEVICE#PRINT3 PRINT  SHOW QUEUE/PRINT SHOW QUEUE/DEVICE E The /PRINT qualifier restricts the display to print (device) queues.! /DEVICE is a synonym for /PRINT. 3 OWNER_UIC  SHOW QUEUE/OWNER_UIC:uic @ The /OWNER_UIC qualifier restricts the display to the jobs of a specific UIC. D If you are only interested in your own jobs, you should specify theC /OWNER_UIC qualifier since the SHOW QUEUE command will default to  displaying all jobs. @ The UIC should appear with square brackets in the format [g,m]. ; SORT[/qualifiers] infile[/qualifiers] outfile[/qualifiers]D 0 Qualifiers  /ALLOCATION /BUCKET_SIZE 8 /[NO]CHECK_SEQUENCE /COLLATING_SEQUENCE /[NO]CONTIGUOUS' /DEVICE /FORMAT /INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL! /KEY /LOAD_FILL /NODUPLICATES /OVERLAY /PROCESS /RELATIVE /SEQUENTIAL /SHAREABLE /SIZE) /SPECIFICATION /[NO]STABLE /STATISTICS /TREE_SPACE /WORK_FILESC The SORT command invokes the unbundled SORT-11 product to sort theC records of the specified file in the specified manner. The SORT-11> software is optional and may not be available on your system.D See your system manager to determine if SORT-11 (and hence the SORT command) is available to you.00TADATADATADATADATADATA" START[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]F The START command resumes execution of a task that was stopped by theG STOP$S directive. Note that starting a stopped task is different from continuing a suspended one.H The taskname argument specifies the name of the task you wish to start.M If a task name is not specified, the task that was running at your terminal 8 (and that was initiated by the RUN command) is started.D The /TERMINAL qualifier allows a privileged user to start a stopped. task that is running on some other terminal. E For information about starting queues and processors, see HELP STARTE QUEUE or HELP START PROCESSOR. For information about starting errorE logging, see HELP START ERROR_LOG. For information about starting a' blocked task, see HELP START UNBLOCK. 2 QUEUE #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSOR START/QUEUE queuename START/QUEUE/MANAGER1 START/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]3 Processortypes: Command Qualifiers:4 APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR /ALIGN: BATCH_PROCESSOR /BACKSPACE:n7 CARD_READER /CONTINUE3 DEVICE /FORMS:n= INPUT /FORWARDSPACE:n3 PRINTER /NEXT5 PROCESSOR /PAGE:n6 /RESTART: /TOP_OF_FILE  ? The START/QUEUE and START/PROCESSOR commands start a queue or A processor that was stopped with the STOP/QUEUE or STOP/PROCESSOR commands. = The START/QUEUE/MANAGER command starts up the Queue Manager.C For more information, type HELP START PROCESSOR qualifier and HELP0 START QUEUE MANAGER. See also HELP STOP QUEUE. 3 ALIGN ( START/processortype processorname/ALIGN C The /ALIGN qualifier clears the internal line counter in the printE processor and informs the processor that the paper has been aligned.3 This is necessary for handling special characters. D This qualifier is useful when a paper fault occurs, and you need to2 adjust the position of the paper in the printer.  @ You do not need to specify the /ALIGN qualifier when you changeF the forms in a printer, because the alignment at the top of the form is assumed.3 PAGE ) START/processortype processorname/PAGE:n C The /PAGE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue at pageC n in the current file. In order to use this qualifier, a file must3 have been printing when the processor was stopped. 3 BACKSPACE . START/processortype processorname/BACKSPACE:n B The /BACKSPACE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue nB pages back in the current file. In order to use this qualifier, a= file must have been printing when the processor was stopped. D This qualifier is useful when there is a paper fault in the printer3 and one or more pages of the job have been ruined. 3 CONTINUE + START/processortype processorname/CONTINUE D The /CONTINUE qualifier specifies that the processor is to continue; printing where it left off. This is the default condition.3 FORMS* START/processortype processorname/FORMS:n L The /FORMS qualifier specifies the physical form type in the printer beingLrestarted. An installation may have up to 256 different physical forms usedJfor different jobs. For example, one might have 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper forOmemos and special forms for paychecks and invoices, for example. Each of these)forms is given a number to identify it.  N The Queue Manager will only dequeue a job to a printer if the form number ofLthe form in the printer matches the form number requested by the print job.KTherefore, many jobs using a variety of forms may reside in a queue at theGsame time, but only those with a certain form number will print on theassigned printer.  N When this qualifier is used, the processor will start with the next job th00}athas a matching forms number. 3 FORWARDSPACE 1 START/processortype processorname/FORWARDSPACE:n C The /FORWARDSPACE qualifier specifies that printing is to continueC n pages ahead in the current file. In order to use this qualifier,? a file must have been printing when the processor was stopped. 3 MANAGER  START/QUEUE/MANAGER D The START/QUEUE/MANAGER command starts the Queue Manager. This mustB be done before any other Queue Manager commands are issued. This 7 command is usually in the system startup command file.3 NEXT ' START/processortype processorname/NEXT D The /NEXT qualifier specifies that printing is to continue with theM next available job in the queue. The job that is currently printing is held. 3 RESTART * START/processortype processorname/RESTART ? The /RESTART qualifier specifies that printing continue at theB beginning of the current job. Unless the job was submitted with aG matching /RESTART qualifier, files from the job that have already been) completely printed will not be repeated. 3 TOP_OF_FILE . START/processortype processorname/TOP_OF_FILE E The /TOP_OF_FILE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue at6 the beginning of the file that is currently printing. 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLSTRTEL 2 UNBLOCK* START/UNBLOCK[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]@ START/UNBLOCK continues the execution of a task blocked by the G STOP/BLOCK command. Nonprivileged users can unblock any task running B from their terminal. Privileged users can unblock a task at any ) terminal, using the terminal qualifier. ' STOP/BLOCK[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]F The STOP/BLOCK command blocks an installed running task. The task noA longer executes or competes for memory. Nonprivileged users canD block tasks running from their own terminals. Privileged users can block any task. L The taskname argument defaults to a task named after the terminal, such as  TT10:.K Privileged users can use the /TERMINAL qualifier to block a task running  on another terminal.! There is no simple STOP command. For more information, see:1 HELP/MCR UNLOAD !stops a device driver= HELP STOP ABORT !stops current job on line printer/ HELP STOP ERROR_LOG !stops error logging> HELP STOP PROCESSOR !stops batch processor, card-reader2 !processor, and printer) HELP STOP QUEUE !stops a queue2 QUEUE #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSOR STOP/QUEUE queuename STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER[/ABORT]0 STOP/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]8 Processortypes: Qualifiers:6 APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR /ABORT+ BATCH_PROCESSOR /FILE_END+ CARD_READER /JOB_END% DEVICE /PAUSE INPUT PRINTER PROCESSORB The STOP/QUEUE stops a queue. Jobs may no longer be distributed  from this queue. D The STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER command shuts down the Queue Manager and allF known processors. Any active jobs are allowed to complete before the? shutdown. STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER/ABORT does the same, except thatD any active jobs are aborted and held rather than allowed to finish. A The STOP/PROCESSOR command stops a print, batch, card reader, or applications processor.C For more information, type HELP STOP PROCESSOR qualifier. See also HELP START QUEUE. 3 ABORT' STOP/processortype processorname/ABORT @ The /ABORT qualifier stops the processor immediately and abortsJ the active job (if any) running on it. An aborted print00TADATADATADATADATADATA job is HELD. An N aborted batch job submitted with the /RESTART qualifier is HELD. An aborted > batch job submitted with the /NORESTART qualifier is deleted. J Privileged users can abort any job; nonprivileged users can delete their own jobs. C You can also delete the active job on a Card Reader processor with this command. 3 FILE_END* STOP/processortype processorname/FILE_END H The /FILE_END qualifier stops the processor when it finishes processing the current file. 3 JOB_END ) STOP/processortype processorname/JOB_END H The /JOB_END qualifier stops the processor when it finishes processing  the current job. H This is often useful when changing forms in printers. You can stop the F print processor using the /JOB_END qualifier, change the forms in theD printer, and then restart the processor using the /FORMS qualifier.3 PAUSE ) STOP/processortype processorname[/PAUSE] D The /PAUSE qualifier stops the processor immediately and remembers 7 the position in the current file. This is the default. 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLSTOPEL2 ABORT STOP/ABORT printer[:]B Stops the current job on a line printer immediately. Privileged F users can stop any job. Nonprivileged users can stop their own jobs. STOP/ERROR_LOGF The STOP/ERROR_LOG command stops error logging and error limiting on all devices.- START/ERROR_LOG[/qualifier[/...]] [filespec]' /INCLUDE[:arg[,...]]! ALL% CONTROL$ ERRORS$ MEMORY( PERIPHERAL' PROCESSOR0 SYSTEM_INFORMATION /NEW_VERSION /NOLIMITINGC START/ERROR_LOG starts logging on all error logging devices in theD system. It creates LB:[1,6]LOG.ERR as the default binary error log) file used by ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG commands.G To get help on individual qualifiers, type HELP START/ERROR qualifier.3 /INCLUDE[:arg[,..]] ALL CONTROL ERRORS MEMORY PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR SYSTEM_INFORMATIONF The /INCLUDE qualifier allows you to specify the kinds of errors thatG error logging collects from your system devices and stores in LOG.ERR.G The ALL argument selects all of the information in the error log file. H The CONTROL argument selects error log command packets that control the Error Log Interface task (ELI).F The ERRORS argument selects information on all peripheral, processor,) and memory errors in the error log file. C The MEMORY argument selects information from all events that occur) in memory, such as memory parity errors.H The PERIPHERAL argument selects information from all peripheral devicesB in the system that support error logging. This argument does notE include logging of system information, such as mounts and dismounts, for the devices.E The PROCESSOR argument selects information from events that occur in% the CPU, such as unknown interrupts.E The SYSTEM_INFORMATION argument selects information from events thatE occur on the system, but are not specifically tied to a single pieceB of hardware, such as time changes and system service messages, asC well as som00}e device specific events, such as mounts and dismounts. 3 NEW_VERSIONG The /NEW_VERSION qualifier creates a new version of the error log fileG instead of writing to the current version (either the file you specify( or the default file LB:[1,6]LOG.ERR). 3 NOLIMITINGH The /NOLIMITING qualifier stops the use of error limiting for all error logging devices on the system.LSUBMIT[/commandqualifiers] filespec[,s][/filequalifiers][/logfilequalifiers] /AFTER /[NO]DELETE /[NO]HOLD /[NO]LOG_FILE /NAME:jobname /[NO]PRINT[:queuename] /PRIORITY:n /QUEUE:queuename /[NO]RESTART  /[NO]TRANSFERFThe SUBMIT command submits one or more files for processing on a batchAprocessor. The files are grouped together into a single batch job:and are executed one after the other without interruption.AFor additional information, type HELP SUBMIT qualifier. See alsoAHELP STOP ABORT for information about stopping the current job ona line printer.2 AFTER+SUBMIT/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) filespec[,s]SUBMIT/AFTER:TOMORROWDThe /AFTER qualifier delays the processing of your job until after aAspecified date and time. The job will not run immediately at thatDtime, but will become eligible to be processed, competing with otherjobs at that time. DYou may specify either the date, or the time, or both. If you do notEspecify a date, the current date is assumed. If you specify only theIdate or only the time, the parentheses are optional. The /AFTER:TOMORROW Cqualifier ensures that the job is run after midnight of the day thejob is submitted. Examples:A$ SUBMIT/AFTER:(18:00) BIGFILE.BAT !process the file after 6 pmG$ SUBMIT/AFTER:(1-APR-87) JOKE.BAT !process the file on April 1, 1982 2 NODELETE#DELETE2 DELETESUBMIT/[NO]DELETE filespec[,s]SUBMIT filespec[,s]/[NO]DELETEBThe /DELETE qualifier deletes the specified file after processing.B/[NO]DELETE is both a command and a file qualifier. The default is /NODELETE. AIn the following example, only FILE2 is deleted after processing,-$ SUBMIT FILE1.BAT,FILE2.BAT/DELETE,FILE3.BAT1In the next example, FILE1 and FILE2 are deleted.8$ SUBMIT/DELETE FILE1.BAT, FILE2.BAT, FILE3.BAT/NODELETE2 NOHOLD#HOLD2 HOLDSUBMIT/[NO]HOLD filespec[,s]AThe /HOLD qualifier makes your job ineligible for printing. This@qualifier has the same effect as the HOLD command. You must thenEenter the RELEASE command to allow your job to be processed. /NOHOLDis the default. See HELP RELEASE. 2 NOLOG_FILE #LOG_FILE 2 LOG_FILE SUBMIT/[NO]LOG_FILE filespec[,s]FThe /[NO]LOG_FILE qualifier specifies whether or not a log file of theBjob should be generated. The log file tracks all the action in the%batch job. The default is /LOG_FILE. 2 NOPRINTER#PRINTER 2 PRINTERSUBMIT/[NO]PRINTER filespec[,s]%SUBMIT/PRINTER:queuename filespec[,s]?The /[NO]PRINT qualifier specifies whether or not the batch logBshould be printed. If you specify /NOPRINTER, the log file is notHprinted but is placed in your directory. All output of the batch job notNcontained in the batch log file (spooled MACRO listings, for example) will be printed as separate print jobs. OIf you specify /PRINT, the log file will be queued to be printed. All output ofNthe batch job not contained in the batch log file is attached to the batch log*and printed with it as a single print job.MIf you want your batch log to go to a queue other than PRINT, you can specify(another queue on the /PRINTER qualifier.The default is /PRINTER:PRINT. 2 PRIORITYSUBMIT/PRIORITY:n filespec[,s]LThe /PRIORITY qualifier allows you to specify a priority for your batch job.LThis priority does not specify the priority at which the batch job actually ;runs but is simply used to determine position in the queue.JPrivileged users may specify a00TADATADATADATADATADATAny priority between 1 and 250. Nonprivileged4users may only specify priorities between 1 and 150.EThe default is /PRIORITY:50. /PRIORITY:0 is the same as /PRIORITY:50. 2 NORESTART#RESTART 2 RESTARTSUBMIT/[NO]RESTART filespec[,s]D /RESTART specifies whether or not a job is to be restarted from theI beginning if it is interrupted. When you specify /RESTART, if the job is= stopped and later restarted, it restarts from the beginning.H If you specify /NORESTART, the job restarts where it left off. /RESTARTJ and DELETE cannot be used together, as the system deletes the file before it can be restarted. 2 TRANSFER #NOTRANSFER 2 NOTRANSFER SUBMIT/[NO]TRANSFER filespec[,s]FThe /[NO]TRANSFER qualifier specifies whether or not the system shouldDmake temporary copies of batch command files submitted from a volumeBon a private device. The default is /TRANSFER. This permits you toCdismount the volume and deallocate the device as soon as the prompt"returns after the SUBMIT command. FIf you specify /NOTRANSFER, no copies will be made, and you must keep Gthe volume mounted and the device allocated until the batch processing is complete.2 QUEUE#SUBMIT/QUEUE:queuename filespec[,s]GThis qualifier allows you to submit your job to a queue other than the default BATCH.2 NAME SUBMIT/NAME:jobname filespec[,s]GThis qualifier allows you to give your print job a name. The job name Pis limited to 1 to 9 characters. If you do not specify a job name, the name of "the first file in the job is used." SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/qualifier[s]E The SET TERMINAL command sets various attributes of your terminal. A4 privileged user can set attributes of any terminal.7 You can get help for these categories of SET TERMINAL:$ HELP SET TERMINAL COMMON_USE ' HELP SET TERMINAL TERMINAL_SETUP# HELP SET TERMINAL TASK_SETUP A Note that the SET TERMINAL/INQUIRE command will set most of your= terminal attributes for you. See HELP SET TERMINAL INQUIRE. 3 INQUIRE SET TERMINAL/INQUIRED This command tests the terminal type and then sets all appropriate F attributes for that terminal type. In most cases, you will not need F to change any attributes of your terminal after issuing this command.C If you include this command in your LOGIN.CMD file, your terminal ) attributes are set each time you log in.? See HELP SET TERMINAL COMMON_USE for the most common terminal < attributes that you may want to change from their defaults. 3 COMMON_USE" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/qualifier[s]@ The following qualifiers set terminal characteristics that the 8 average terminal user may need. For more information on? a particular characteristic, type HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier. /[NO]BROADCAST /CLI:cliname /[NO]CONTROL=C /MCR /DCL /[NO]HOLD_SCREEN /INQUIRE  /[NO]LOWERCASE /[NO]PRIVILEGED /[NO]SERIAL /SPEED:(t,r) /[NO]UPPERCASE /WIDTH:n 3 NOBROADCAST #BROADCAST 3 BROADCAST# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]BROADCASTD The SET TERMINAL/NOBROADCAST command prevents messages that another? user sends using the BROADCAST command from being typed on the> specified terminal. You might choose this option if you wereE printing out a hard copy of a file for reproduction. The default is /BROADCAST3 MCR SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/MCR A This command set a terminal to the MCR command line interpreter.= To change back from an MCR terminal to a DCL terminal, issue the MCR command SET /DCL=TI:.3 DCL00} SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/DCL B This command sets a terminal to the DCL command line interpreter.D Since it is a DCL command, it is mainly useful for privileged users, who wish to set some other terminal to DCL.3 CLI! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/CLI:clinameA This command sets a terminal to an alternate command line inter-D preter (CLI). The cliname is from one to six Radix-50 characters. C See your system manager for information on any alternative CLIs at your installation. 3 NOCONTROL=C #CONTROL=C 3 CONTROL=C# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]CONTROL=C; This command establishes whether a CTRL/C causes an abort 8 (/CONTROL=C) or an explicit DCL> prompt (/NOCONTROL=C).3 WIDTH SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/WIDTH:nI The SET TERMINAL/WIDTH command sets the width of your terminal, that is,F the length of a line. n can be from 0 through 132. Note that a lineK length of zero means no commands can be entered on the terminal. See also HELP SET TERMINAL PAGE.3 ECHO#NOECHO 3 EIGHT_BIT #NOEIGHT_BIT3 ESCAPE #NOESCAPE 3 FORM_FEED #NOFORM_FEED 3 FULL_DUPLEX#NOFULL_DUPLEX3 NOFULL_DUPLEX% SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]FULL_DUPLEXD The /FULL_DUPLEX qualifier instructs the terminal driver to accept @ input from the specified terminal while simultaneously sending , output to it. This is the default setting.E The /NOFULL_DUPLEX qualifier disables this capability. The terminal- can send or receive, but not simultaneously. 3 HARDCOPY#SCOPE3 CRFILL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/CRFILL:n< The SET TERMINAL/CRFILL command sets the attributes used to? accommodate the carriage-return/line-feed process on hard-copy? terminals. While the terminal is performing the line feed, a@ number of null characters may be needed to fill in for the time> the terminal is not capable of accepting new characters. The, value n can be any number from 0 through 7. 3 INTERACTIVE#PASSALL3 LOCAL#REMOTE 3 LOWERCASE #UPPERCASE3 NOECHO SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ECHOD The SET TERMINAL/ECHO command sets your terminal show what you typeE on the terminal keyboard. By using /NOECHO, you no longer see what E you type, although the system still receives your commands. /ECHO is the default. 3 NOEIGHT_BIT# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]EIGHT_BITC The SET TERMINAL/EIGHT_BIT command sets your terminal to eight-bitF character mode. /EIGHT_BIT allows the terminal to pass all eight bitsC of the ASCII characters. This attribute is used when a terminal is9 communicating with a device that sends eight-bit ASCII. B /NOEIGHT_BIT is the default. DEC software employs seven-bit ASCII (without parity checking). 3 NOESCAPE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ESCAPE@ The SET TERMINAL/ESCAPE command sets your terminal to recognize> terminal escape sequences. When you press the ESC key, it is5 interpreted as the beginning of an escape sequence.  E /NOESCAPE is the default. In this case, when you press the ESC key,D it is interpreted as a line terminator (a line feed but no carriage return). 3 NOFORM_FEED# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]FORM_FEEDE If the terminal hardware supports form feeds, the terminal should beA set /FORMFEED. If the form feeds are provided by software line / feeds, the terminal should be set /NOFORMFEED. 3 NOHARDCOPY#SCOPE3 NOHOLD_SCREEN #HOLD_SCREEN 3 HOLD_SCREEN% SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]HOLD_SCREENF The SET TERMINAL/HOLD_SCREEN command allows text to be presented on aD VT50, VT52, or VT55 terminal one page or one line at a time. AfterD issuing this command, pressing the SCROLL key alone causes one lineE to scroll off the top of the screen and one line to scroll on to theC bottom of the screen. Pressing the SHIFT and SCROLL keys together? causes one screen's worth of scrolling. /NOHOLD_SCREEN is the default.! See also HELP SET TERMINAL PAGE.E This command does not work on VT100s and some other video terminals.3 NOINTERACTIVE#PASSALL 3 NOLOCAL#REMOTE 3 NOLOWERCASE #UPPERCASE 3 NOPASSALL#PASSALL 00TADATADATADATADATADATA3 NOPRIVILEGE #PRIVILEGE 3 NOREMOTE#REMOTE 3 NOSCOPE#SCOPE 3 NOSLAVE#SLAVE3 NOTAB#TAB 3 NOTYPEAHEAD #TYPEAHEAD 3 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE3 NOWRAP#WRAP 3 PAGE_LENGTH# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/PAGE_LENGTH:nO The SET TERMINAL/PAGE_LENGTH command sets the number of lines per page on your terminal.L The page length on a CRT terminal is the number of lines on the screen. TheF default differs by terminal model. See also HELP SET TERMINAL WIDTH. 3 PASSALL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/PASSALL# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOINTERACTIVE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOPASSALL! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/INTERACTIVEE /NOPASSALL is the default and means that any characters typed on theF terminal are interpreted by the terminal driver before they are sent ) to the task. /INTERACTIVE is a synonym.I /PASSALL means that characters typed on the terminal are passed directlyG to the requesting task without interpretation by the terminal driver.  /NOINTERACTIVE is a synonym. 3 PRIVILEGED$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]PRIVILEGEDF The SET TERMINAL/PRIVILEGED command sets your terminal to be a privi-B leged terminal. A privileged terminal can issue all DCL commands.; The SET TERMINAL/NOPRIVILEGED commands sets your terminal  nonprivileged.( This command is, of course, privileged.3 REMOTE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LOCAL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOREMOTE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOLOCAL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/REMOTEE The above commands tell the system whether the specified terminal isE a local or a remote terminal. Remote terminals are connected to the? system through telephone lines. Local terminals are connected directly to the system. 3 SCOPE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/HARDCOPY SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOSCOPE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOHARDCOPY SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/SCOPEI The above commands inform the system whether the specified terminal is a hardcopy or a video terminal.3 SLAVE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]SLAVE@ The SET TERMINAL/SLAVE command prevents a user at the specifiedD terminal from issuing commands to the system, except for input thatF may be requested by a task running at the slaved terminal. A terminalF is often slaved while running a task to dedicate the terminal to thatE task. The terminal can be left unattended without fear of its being$ used to gain access to the system. E SET TERMINAL/ttnn:/NOSLAVE must be issued from a nonslaved terminal.3 SPEED! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/SPEED:(t,r)G The SET TERMINAL/SPEED command sets the transmit and receive speeds of your terminal.G The first of the two numbers entered is the terminal's transmit speed.E The second is its receive speed. Normally, both of these will be theG same speed, but RSX-11M-PLUS supports split speed terminals (terminals- with different transmit and receive speeds).A The /SPEED setting must match the hardware speed setting on the terminal.3 TAB SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]TAB A If the terminal hardware supports horizontal tabs, the terminal A should be set /TAB. If the software provides tabs, the terminal should be set /NOTAB. 3 TASK_SETUPD The following qualifiers set terminal attributes that may be neededF for system or user tasks. Most system tasks that require these attri-H butes will set the attributes when they attach the terminal. User tasksB can also do this. These parameters are included for use in cases G where the task does not set the terminal. For more information, type  HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier. /[NO]ECHO /[NO]PASSALL /[NO]EIGHT_BIT /[NO]REMOTE /[NO]ESCAPE /[NO]SERIAL /[NO]FULL_DUPLEX /[NO]SLAVE" /[NO]INTERACTIVE /[NO]TYPEAHEAD:n) /[NO]LOCAL /[NO]WRAP 3 TERMINAL_SETUPF The following qualifiers relate to hardware characteristics of a ter-D minal. For more information, type HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier. TypeH HELP SET TERMINAL MODEL for a list of list of terminal models for which9 SET TERMINAL/MODEL establishes terminal characteristics. 9 /[NO]ADVANCED_VIDEO 00}/[NO]FORM_FEED /PRINTER_PORT6 /[NO]ANSI_CRT /[NO]HARDCOPY /[NO]REGIS6 /[NO]AUTOBAUD /[NO]HOSTSYNC /[NO]SCOPE@ /[NO]BLOCK_MODE /LFFILL /[NO]SOFT_CHARACTERS4 /CHARACTER_LENGTH:n /MODEL:arg /[NO]TABF /CRFILL:n /PAGE_LENGTH:n /[NO]TRANSLATION_ROUTINE:n6 /[NO]DEC_CRT /[NO]PARITY[:arg] /[NO]TTSYN* /[NO]EDIT_MODE /[NO]PASTHRU /WIDTH:n3 NOADVANCED_VIDEO#ADVANCED_VIDEO3 ADVANCED_VIDEO( SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ADVANCED_VIDEOB This command states whether a VT100-series terminal includes the F advanced video option, which gives it the capability to blink, bold, D and flash parts of the screen, as well as to set the screen at 132 C columns wide. If the word SET-UP blinks when your terminal is in B setup mode, you have the advanced video option. See your system  manager for more information. 3 NOANSI_CRT #ANSI_CRTb 3 ANSI_CRT" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ANSI_CRTD This command states whether the terminal output is a subset of the F ANSI standard. Terminals with the /ANSI_CRT attribute do not output " DIGITAL private escape sequences. 3 NOAUTOBAUD #AUTOBAUD 3 AUTOBAUD" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]AUTOBAUDD This command enables autobaud detection on a remote dial-up line. F This means that when a remote terminal dials up, the terminal driver B samples the first character sent along the line to determine the C incoming baud rate and sets the interface speed accordingly. The u default is /NOAUTOBAUD.3 NOBLOCK_MODE #BLOCK_MODEa 3 BLOCK_MODE$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]BLOCK_MODEF This command states whether the terminal is capable of local editing  and block-mode transmission.R 3 NODEC_CRT #DEC_CRT 3 DEC_CRT ! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]DEC_CRTD This command states whether the terminal is upward-compatible with  the VT100-series of terminals./3 NOCHARACTER_LENGTH#[NO]CHARACTER_LENGTH3 CHARACTER_LENGTH#[NO]CHARACTER_LENGTHR3 [NO]CHARACTER_LENGTHMThe /[NO]CHARACTER_LENGTH qualifier sets the length of characters transmitted Land received by terminals attached to the system through DH11, DHU11, DHV11,KDZ11, or DZV11 variable-speed multiplexers. This qualifier is not valid foruLterminals attached through DL11 serial-line units. You can set the characterOlength as 7 or 8 bits. The default is 8-bit characters. Nonprivileged users cannOset the character length for their own terminals only; privileged users can setuNthe character length for any terminal. This qualifier determines the characterClength that the hardware controller will accept, in contrast to theeL/[NO]EIGHT_BIT qualifier, which determines the character length the software will accept. e 3 NOPARITY#PARITY3 PARITY$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]PARITY:arg$ ODD% EVEN F Parity generation and checking is used to verify the transmission of F data between the terminal and the computer. Verification is done by H sending an extra bit with each character, which serves as a check that 1 the character transmitted was received properly.C This command enables, disables, and determines the type of parity E checking for a given terminal line. SET TERM/PARITY:EVEN checks to C see if the total number of 1-bits for each character is even. The ODD argument is analogous. E The terminal hardware must be set to the same mode of parity genera-E tion and checking for correct data transmission to occur. On VT100-I and VT200-series terminals, this is done in the terminal's SET-UP mode. H SET TERM/PARITY is not the same as /EIGHT_BIT. If parity is selected, H then an extra bit is physically transmitted with each character. Eight-D bit only affects whether the 8th data bit is cleared or left alone. 3 TYPEAHEAD# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/TYPEAHEAD[:n]% SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOTYPEAHEAD[:n]E The SET TERMINAL/TYPEAHEAD command enables your terminal's typeahead= buffer. The typeahead buffer is 36 characters long and ho00TADATADATADATADATADATAlds@ characters when they are typed faster than they are accepted as input. H If your typeahead buffer is full, you cannot enter any characters, and F any key you strike returns a buzz, bell, or beep. In this instance, . type a CTRL/X to clear your typeahead buffer. ? The SET TERMINAL/NOTYPEAHEAD command disables your terminal's  typeahead buffer. K You can specify a size from 0 through 255 bytes for your typeahead buffer.L The default is /TYPEAHEAD:66. This setting is required for use with the SET TERMINAL/SERIAL command.  # See also HELP SET TERMINAL SERIAL. 3 NOEDIT_MODE #EDIT_MODE 3 EDIT_MODE SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/EDIT_MODE! SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/NOEDIT_MODEJ This command states whether or not the terminal can perform ANSI-defined < advanced editing functions. The VT102 is such a terminal.3 PRINTER_PORT SET TERMINAL/PRINTER_PORTE States whether the terminal has a port for attaching a line printer.< For example, the VT200-series terminals have printer ports. 3 NOREGIS#REGIS3 REGIS SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/REGIS SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/NOREGISI This command indicates whether the terminal supports the Regis graphics 5 set. The VT125 and VT240 support this graphics set. 3 NOSERIAL#SERIAL3 SERIAL SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/SERIAL SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/NOSERIALK The SET TERMINAL/[NO]SERIAL command sets your terminal for either serial " or parallel command processing. E The default is /SERIAL, which means that there can be only one task @ running at your terminal at any time. For instance, with serialF processing, the LINK command can be typed immediately after the MACROC command, but it will not execute until the assembly is completed. F If you choose serial command processing, you may want to increase theL size of your terminal's typeahead buffer. See HELP SET TERMINAL TYPEAHEAD. F /NOSERIAL allows each command to be processed as it is entered. For E instance, you may want to edit a file while also running a compiler.@ If you are set /NOSERIAL, watch for the return of the $ prompt G carefully. You get one $ prompt per task when execution is completed.M When your terminal is set to /NOSERIAL, CTRL/C aborts affect all tasks that G include your terminal number in their name. You may want to set your H terminal /NOCONTROL=C, which allows you to abort tasks and commands by  name. 3 NOSOFT_CHARACTERS#SOFT_CHARACTERS3 SOFT_CHARACTERS% SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/SOFT_CHARACTERS' SET TERMINAL[:TTnn:]/NOSOFT_CHARACTERSN This command determines whether or not the terminal accepts software-defined D character sets. The VT200-series terminals accept software-defined character sets.3 NOTRANSLATION_ROUTINE#TRANSLATION_ROUTINE3 TRANSLATION_ROUTINE/ SET TERMINAL/TRANSLATION_ROUTINE[:arg] [TTnn:]# SET TERMINAL/NOTRANSLATION_ROUTINE9 /TRANSLATION_ROUTINE sets your terminal to the specified! character translation routine. H You can specify only one character translation routine for a terminal. F If your terminal is already set to a routine and you specify another F routine, the first routine is disabled and the new routine is enabled for your terminal.> /NOTRANSLATION_ROUTINE disables your terminal from using the > character translation routine currently set for the terminal.B The n argument specifies the number of the character translation 9 routine, which is assigned when the routine is instlled.C The logical argument specifies the logical name for the character B translation routine number which is assigned when the routine is installed. 3 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE 3 LOWERCASE #UPPERCASE 3 UPPERCASE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LOWERCASE! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOLOWERCASE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/UPPERCASE! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOUPPERCASEB The above commands tell the system whether your terminal supportsD lowercase characters. On terminals that do not have /LOWERCASE set,F lowercase characters are converted to uppercase before they are typed7 or printed at t00}he terminal. /UPPERCASE is the default.3 LFFILL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LFFILLH The SET TERMINAL/LFFILL command sets the attributes used to accommodateD vertical spacing on terminals. While the terminal is performing a E vertical tab, line feed, or form feed, four null characters are sentE to fill in for the time the terminal is not capable of accepting new characters. 3 NOHOSTSYNC #HOSTSYNC 3 HOSTSYNC SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC SET TERMINAL/NOHOSTSYNC@ The /HOSTSYNC qualifier controls whether the terminal terminal D temporarily locks the keyboard when the typeahead buffer is full. G /HOSTSYNC temporarily locks the keyboard when the typeahead buffer is ND full. Locking the keyboard prevents you from entering information F that the operating system is not ready to accept. Once the terminal @ transmits all of the information in the tyeahead buffer to the > operating system, it unlocks the keyboard to receive further  information from you.F When you specifiy /HOSTSYNC, the operating system generates a CTRL/S 0 to lock the keyboard and a CTRL/Q to unlock it.F The /HOSTSYNC qualifier is recommended for users with terminals that H transmit information in blocks --- that is, DIGITAL terminals VT131 or D VT132, or the terminals of any other vendor that emulate these two F models. If you do not have such a terminal, it is unlikely that you , will fill your terminal's typeahead buffer.D The /NOHOSTSYNC qualifier, the default, does not lock the keyboard. 3 PASTHRUA #NOPASTHRU 3 NOPASTHRUe SET TERMINAL/[NO]PASTHRUsB The /[NO]PASTHRU qualifier controls whether the operating system E executes special characters according to their original function or hC ignores them, passing all data to an application program in their G binary form. The default is /NOPASTHRU, where the terminal keeps T- the original function of special characters..E /PASTHRU allows you to suppress standard operating system responses C to special characters, thereby controlling output to the terminal DF screen. Neither your terminal, nor any application programs running D at your terminal, respond to special characters in the usual way. H Your terminal does not recognize any control characters, except CTRL/S H and CTRL/Q if you terminal is set /TTSYNC. In addition, your terminal > does not respond to carriage return and line feed characters.7 /PASTHRU is used primarily by applications programers.S3 TTSYNC #NOTTSYNCS 3 NOTTSYNC SET TERMINAL/[NO]TTSYNCA The /[NO]TTSYNC qualifier controls whether the operating system SH responds to CTRL/S or CTRL/Q when you type these control characters on F your terminal. The default, /TTSYNC, if for the operating system to  respond to these characters.A CTRL/S deletes output to your terminal; CTRL/Q resumes it. You E usually use these two control characters alternately to control the D flow of information on your terminal screen. Note that you do not 5 lose any information when you use CTRL/S and CTRL/Q.iG Also note that, if you set your terminal /NOTTSYNC, the NO SCROLL key CC on VT100-series terminals and the HOLD SCREEN key on VT200-series w terminals no longer work.3 ASR33a#VT61n3 KSR33b#VT61d3 ASR35s#VT613 DTC01R#VT61C3 KSR35E#VT613 LA12#VT61t3 LA30S]#VT613 LA30P #VT61 3 LA34#VT61t3 LA36#VT61u3 LA38#VT61e3 LA50#VT6113 LA100 #VT61i3 LA120 #VT61C3 LA180S#VT61C3 LA210L#VT613 LQP02E#VT61H3 LQP03A#VT61L 3 PRO_SERIES#VT61E3 VT05#VT61 3 VT50#VT61L3 VT52#VT61 3 VT55#VT61 3 VT100t#VT61n3 VT101#VT61e3 VT102e#VT61 3 VT105t#VT61y3 VT125u#VT61,3 VT131H#VT61Z3 VT132V#VT61a3 VT200_SERIES#VT61 3 VT61# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/terminalmodeltH The SET TERMINAL/terminalmodel command tells the system what model your9 terminal is; /terminalmodel can be any of the following:  r$ /ASR33 /LA36 /LQP03 /VT102 ' /ASR35 /LA38 /PRO_SERIES /VT105 & /DTC01 /LA50 /VT05 /VT125 /KSR33 00TADATADATADATADATADATA /LA100 /VT50 /VT131$ /KSR35 /LA120 /VT52 /VT132 ( /LA12 /LA180S /VT55 /VT200_SERIES /LA30P /LA210 /VT61i /LA30S /LN03 /VT100e /LA34 /LQP02 /VT101 eE Certain system tasks, and possibly some user tasks, make use of this:D terminal model information, and therefore it is a good idea to make' sure that this information is correct.aH Note that you can also use this command in the form SET TERMINAL/MODEL.I You must use SET TERMINAL/MODEL for non-DIGITAL terminals. See HELP SET  TERMINAL MODEL. 3 UNKNOWNr#MODEL3 MODELa! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/MODEL:[arg]r terminalmodelT n F The SET TERMINAL/MODEL command sets a terminal as a particular model.F The argument to /MODEL can be either the name of a DIGITAL terminal, E such as VT100, or a number, n, that has been assigned by your systemaI manager for the type of terminal you are using. n can be 0 through 255. eB The following is a list of terminals for which SET TERMINAL/MODEL6 establishes a number of the terminal characteristics:$ /ASR33 /LA36 /LQP03 /VT102 ' /ASR35 /LA38 /PRO_SERIES /VT105 & /DTC01 /LA50 /VT05 /VT125 /KSR33 /LA100 /VT50 /VT131$ /KSR35 /LA120 /VT52 /VT132 ( /LA12 /LA180S /VT55 /VT200_SERIES /LA30P /LA210 /VT61A /LA30S /LN03 /VT100/ /LA34 /LQP02 /VT1013 NOWRAP#WRAPH3 WRAP SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]WRAPB The SET TERMINAL/WRAP command tells the system that text typed atA your terminal should appear on the next line once the end of thee? current line is reached. If the terminal is set to /WRAP, thedF terminal driver issues a carriage-return/line-feed pair when you typeF up to whatever line width the terminal is set for. If /NOWRAP is set,. no carriage-return/line-feed pair is issued. TYPE[/qualifier[s] filespec[,s] /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /EXCLUDE:filespec /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYG The TYPE command displays the contents of text files on your terminal.B To obtain help on the above qualifiers, type HELP TYPE qualifier.2 DATE! TYPE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]E The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to type& only files created on the given date.2 SINCE" TYPE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]B The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to 4 type only files created on or after the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGH$ TYPE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]D The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to 5 type only files created on or before the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAY TYPE/TODAY filespec[,s]B The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to  type only files created today. 2 EXCLUDE# TYPE/EXCLUDE:filespec filespec[,s]C The /EXCLUDE qualifer specifies that you wish the TYPE command to D exclude the named file (or files, if named with wildcards) in its  action. UNFIX [/qualifier] taskname /READONLY_SEGMENT /REGIOND The UNFIX command frees a fixed region from memory. This region mayF be either a task or a common that has been previously fixed using the FIX command.B The /REGION qualifier specifies that it is a common region rather# than a task that is to be unfixed.L The /READONLY_SEGMENT qualifier specifies that it is the read-only segment + of a multiuser task that is to be unfixed.00}"UNLOCK[/qualifier[s]] filespec[,s] /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /EXCLUDE:filespec /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYA The UNLOCK command unlocks files that have been locked. A lockedK file is one that was not closed properly (for example, because of a system= crash or task abort). Locked files may have been corrupted./ For additional HELP type HELP UNLOCK qualifier2 DATE# UNLOCK/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]I The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to affect& only files created on the given date.2 SINCE$ UNLOCK/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]D The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to 6 affect only files created on or after the given date.@ You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGH& UNLOCK/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[,s]F The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to 7 affect only files created on or before the given date.D You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH and to create a range of dates.2 TODAY UNLOCK/TODAY filespec[,s]D The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to ! affect only files created today. 2 EXCLUDE UNLOCK/EXCLUDE:filespecE The /EXCLUDE qualifer specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to M exclude the named file (or files if named with wildcard characters) in its  action.J The File Dump Utility (DMP) enables the user to examine the contents of aH specific file or volume of files. The output may be formatted in ASCII,I octal, decimal, hexadecimal, or Radix-50 form and dumped to any suitableK output device such as a line printer, terminal, magnetic tape, DECtape, or disk.M You can dump the header and/or virtual blocks of a file, portions of blocks," or the virtual records of a file.I DMP operates in two basic modes: file mode and device mode. File mode isK used to dump virtual records or virtual blocks, and device mode is used toM dump logical blocks (the /BL switch is a required parameter in device mode).( The command line for DMP is shown next. Format3 [outfile][/switch[...]][=inspec][/switch[...]] Parameters outfileN Specifies the output file. The format for entering file specifications is as follows:* ddnn:[directory]filename.type;version switch' Specifies any of the DMP switches. inspec> Specifies the input device and file or input device only.> Type HELP DMP SWITCHES for a description of the DMP switches. 2 SWITCHES! The DMP switches are as follows:M /AS Specifies that the data should be dumped one byte at a time in ASCII mode.K /BA:n:m Specifies a 2-word base block address, where n is the high- J order base block address, and m is the low-order base block address.I /BL:n:m Specifies the range of blocks to be dumped, where n is theI first block and m is the last block. The values of n and m' must not exceed 16 bits.F /BY Specifies that the data be dumped in octal byte format.H /DC Specifies that the data be dumped in decimal word format.K /DENS:n Specifies the density of an input magnetic tape with 800- orC 1600-bpi capability when DMP is in device mode only.J /FI:n:seq In file mode, the file number can be used instead of a file6 name as a file specification for input.I /HD[:F] This switch is an optional parameter used in file mode. IfJ /HD:U specified, the /HD switch causes the file header as well asL the specified or implied portion of the file to be dumped. InH addition, the /HD switch has two options: the default, F,N causes a Files-11 formatted dump of the header, and U specifies) an unformatted octal dump.J /HF00TADATADATADATADATADATA Specifies the format for data blocks that have the Files-11 header structure.L /HX Specifies that the data be dumped in hexadecimal byte format.I /ID Causes DMP's version to be identified. This switch may beA specified on a command line by itself at any time.M /LB Requests logical block information for a file and displays theF starting block number and a contiguous or noncontiguous' indication for the file.M /LC Specifies that the data should be dumped in lowercase letters.M /LIM:n:m Specifies the range of bytes n-m of each record or block to be dumped.K /LW Specifies that the data be dumped in hexadecimal doubleword  format.N /MD[:n] Specifies a memory dump and allows control of line numbers. TheJ /MD switch allows lines to be numbered sequentially for theI full extent of the file; that is, the line numbers are notL reset when block boundaries are crossed. The optional value nN specifies the value of the first line number. The default is 0.I The /MD switch is used with the output file specification.J /OCT Specifies that the data should be dumped in octal format in3 addition to other formats specified.@ /RC Specifies that data be dumped a record at a time.H /RW Causes DMP to issue a rewind command before referencing a specified tape. F /R5 Specifies that data be dumped in Radix-50 format words.G /SB:[-]n Specifies the number of blocks DMP spaces forward (n) or% backward (-n) on tape.I /SF:[-]n Specifies the number of end-of-file (EOF) marks DMP spaces4 forward (n) or backward (-n) on tape.M /SP Causes the dump output file to be spooled to the line printer.F The /SP switch may only be specified on the output file specification.L /WD Specifies that the data be dumped in hexadecimal word format.J The Disk Save and Compress Utility (DSC) copies a Files-11 disk either toL disk or to tape and from DSC-created tape back onto disk. At the same time,M DSC reallocates and consolidates the disk data storage area: it concatenatesI files and their extensions into contiguous blocks whenever possible and,N therefore, reduces the number of retrieval pointers and file headers required& for the same files on the new volume.I DSC copies files that are randomly scattered over a disk volume to a newM volume, without the intervening spaces. This eliminates unused space between4 files and reduces the time required to access them.( The command line for DSC is shown next. FormatP outdev[,...][filelabel1][/switch[...]]=indev[,...][filelabel2][/switch[...]] Parameters outdevI Specifies the physical volume or volumes to which data is copied. The$ format for outdev is as follows: ddnn: filelabel1J Identifies the output disk's Volume ID, the tape file, or the tape set( that DSC creates in a data transfer. switch7 Specifies one or more of the optional DSC switches. indevK Specifies the physical volume or volumes, in the same format as outdev, from which data is copied. filelabel2M Identifies the DSC-created tape file that is being transferred to disk or is being compared.7For a list of the DSC switches, type HELP DSC SWITCHES. 2 SWITCHES! The DSC switches are as follows:H /AP Appends a DSC file 00}to the first volume of a tape set that+ already contains a DSC file.M /BAD=option Allows manual entry of bad block locations; it can supplement,= override, or ignore the disk's bad block file.L /BL=n Sets the number of 256-word blocks DSC can include in each of /BL:n its two buffers.A /CMP Compares input and output volumes for differences.K /DENS=option Overrides the DSC default storage density for magnetic tapes /DENS:option of 800 bpi.I /RW Rewinds all magnetic tapes before DSC executes the current command.M /VE Copies data from the input volume and compares it with data in! the output volume.J For a detailed description of the DSC switches, type HELP DSC switch_name (for example, HELP DSC DENS).2 API The Append switch (/AP) directs DSC to begin writing a file to the firstE specified volume of a tape set that contains only DSC-created files.H Enter the /AP switch as part of the output specification. The volume toJ which files will be appended must be specified as the first volume of the! output side of the command line.K You can only use the /AP switch with output tape volumes. Any other use ofP the switch causes DSC to generate an error message and terminate the operation.2 BADL Use the Bad Block switch (/BAD) with output disk volumes to control the wayI DSC uses bad block information. The bad block descriptor of the disk is never altered by DSC.- The format of the /BAD switch is shown next. Format /BAD=option Parameter option; Specifies one of the five possible options as follows:I MAN Supplements the bad block file BADBLK.SYS with manually) entered bad block data. D NOAUTO Ignores the bad block descriptor area on the disk.L MAN:NOAUTO Enters only manually entered bad block data in BADBLK.SYS.H OVR Ignores the bad block descriptor area and accesses theM substitute descriptor area (the last good block on the nextK to the last track on the disk) to obtain the data for theF creation of BADBLK.SYS. This option is valid only on% last-track devices.F MAN:OVR Allows manual entry of bad block data to BADBLK.SYS.N When you specify the MAN, MAN:NOAUTO, or MAN:OVR option with the /BAD switch,( DSC responds with the following prompt: DSC>LBN(S)=M DSC issues this prompt after it accepts the original command line but before it transfers any data. I Enter the locations of bad blocks after the LBN(S)= prompt in the format shown next. Format n:m Parameters nK Specifies the logical block number (LBN), in octal, of the initial bad block in the group. mK Specifies the number, in octal, of consecutive blocks contained in theL group. If you do not specify m, it defaults to 1. To specify a decimalC number for either m or n, place a period (.) after the number.H You can specify multiple bad block entries on one command line by usingK either a space, tab, or comma (,) to separate each entry. You can also use separate lines for each entry.H After you enter the first group of bad blocks, DSC reissues the LBN(S)=< prompt. At this point, you can enter additional bad blocks.L To terminate manual bad block entry, press the RETURN key after the LBN(S)= prompt.K When you have entered all the bad blocks and terminated the entry process, DSC begins the data transfer.2 BLI The Block Factor switch (/BL) allows you to set the number of blocks DSCI uses in each of its buffers during I/O operations. The default DSC blockG factor is four blocks or the last value specified with the /BL switch. Format /BL=n or /BL:nK The value of n can be any positive integer, decimal or octal, less than or4 equal to the maximum block factor available to DSC.00TADATADATADATADATADATA2 CMPK The Compare switch (/CMP) directs DSC to compare the contents of two disksF or a disk and a tape set. Multiple tape specifications are valid, butM multiple disk specifications are not. The /CMP switch is always specified onM the output side of the DSC command line. If the comparison involves tape andJ disk, specify the tape as the input device. The /CMP switch performs only6 comparison operations; no copy operation is involved.M When DSC finds a difference between the volumes it is comparing, it displaysJ a warning message on your terminal. This warning message lists the outputM volume number, file identification, and the virtual block number (VBN) where= the difference was found. DSC then continues the comparison.L When DSC detects an end-of-volume (EOV) on any reel or end-of-file (EOF) onG other than the first reel of a tape set, the /CMP switch causes DSC toJ rewind and unload the current volume and resume comparison with the next volume until it detects an EOF.N When DSC begins a comparison involving tape, it first positions the specifiedN or implied file (refer to the /RW switch), and then positions a single volumeL tape at the end of the current file when the comparison ends. Each reel ofF a tape set is rewound and unloaded as the compare operation for it isP completed. DSC then resumes the comparison by using the next volume of the set.2 DENSM The Density switch (/DENS), with its two options, allows you to override theK DSC default storage density of 800 bpi for TU16, TE16, TU77, and TU45 tape drives. Format /DENS=option or /DENS:option Parameter option0 Specifies one of the following two options: 1600 800:1600G The 1600 option creates magnetic tapes at 1600 bpi density and theL 800:1600 option (the Split Density option) creates magnetic tapes withD volume headers at 800 bpi and the rest of the tape at 1600 bpi.N Note that the 1600 option is valid with TU16, TU77, TE16, or TU45 drives.M The 800:1600 option is valid with TU16 or TU45 drives only when they are* not controlled by the TM03 formatter.M You do not have to specify the /DENS switch when a tape is the input device.K DSC determines the density of all input tapes by first reading the tape at9 800 bpi and then, if that fails, reading it at 1600 bpi.M If you specify the /DENS switch with tape drives other than those above, DSCJ ignores the switch and does not alter the default density. Note that TS11K (TS04) drives write all tapes at 1600 bpi and cannot support the 800:1600 K option. The TS11 (TS04) ignores the /DENS switch; therefore, do not use it with these devices.2 RWH The Rewind switch (/RW) directs DSC to rewind all volumes in a tape setG before performing any other DSC operation, such as a copy or a compareD operation. You can use it to rewind either input or output volumes.L The /RW switch can be used only with magnetic tapes. If you use it with any+ other volume, DSC prints an error message.L If you enter the /RW switch as part of the input specification, DSC rewindsI only the first tape before the DSC operation begins. The other tapes areJ rewound before they are about to be accessed. If you specify a file labelI with the /RW switch, DSC rewinds the tapes and searches for the file youM specified from the beginningof-tape (BOT) on the first volume. If you do notM specify a file label, DSC transfers the first DSC-created file it encounters on the first volume.K After a volume of a tape set has been copied, DSC rewinds it and places itL off line. If, however, the current file ends on the first or only tape of aM set, the tape is positioned to read the next file on the input tape. The /RW? switch only rewinds tapes at the beginning of a DSC operation.M If you enter the /RW switch as part of the output specification, DSC rewindsL the output tape before beginning a copy or compare function. The default is% no rewind and the tape is not m00}oved.I If you do not enter the /RW switch with the output specification and theJ first volume is not positioned at BOT, DSC begins its operation after the< last DSC-created end-of-file (EOF) it finds on that volume.F After the output tape has been rewound, DSC determines if the tape isK positioned at BOT. For a compare function, a search for the next file or aK specific file begins at the current tape position. For a copy function, ifJ the /AP switch was specified or if the tape is not positioned at BOT, theL search for the current end of DSC created files begins; otherwise, the copyA operation will overwrite any data previously stored on the tape.2 VEN The Verify switch (/VE), entered as part of the output specification, directsO DSC to perform a copy operation followed by a compare operation to verify thatL the two volumes are the same. (DSC does not allow you to specify either the? /VE or /CMP switch if both input and output volumes are tape.)I If either the input or output volume is tape, the verify operation takesL place at the end of the copy operation for each volume. In other words, DSCI writes MM01 and compares MM01, then writes MM02 and compares MM02, afterM which the entire DSC operation is complete. In a disk-to-disk DSC operation,A the verify operation begins when the copy operation is finished.L If you do not specify a file label for an input tape set, DSC will copy the4 first file it finds on the first volume of the set.L When DSC detects the end-of-volume (EOV) or end-of-file (EOF) on any volumeI of a tape set during a copy operation, it re-positions the volume to theG beginning of the current file segment and begins the verify operation.M During a verify operation, if DSC detects EOV on any volume, or EOF on otherJ than the first volume of a tape set, it rewinds and unloads the tape whenN the operation is complete. After an EOV, the copy operation resumes using the, next volume from the beginning of the tape.N Data Terminal Emulation (DTE) allows you to log into another DIGITAL computerM system from a terminal connected to a Micro/RSX or RSX-11M-PLUS system. TheEO other DIGITAL system can be an RSX-11M/M-PLUS system, a VAX/VMS system runningEE VAX-11/RSX, a Professional Personal Computer, or a Micro/RSX system.mK Once a local RSX terminal is logged in to an external system, the externaleP system becomes the host system. The host system views the system running DTE asP remote. Once you have logged into the host system through DTE, you can use theG File Transfer Utility (MFT) to copy and delete files between the locala and the host systems.L Additional HELP is available on the topics summarized below. To access this# information, type HELP DTE topic. o' Topics: CONNECT DISCONNECT SET_HOST " HOOKUP FILE_TRANSFER DCL_COPY# DCL_DELETE MCR_COPY MCR_DELETE,2 HOOKUP' DTE requires the following conditions:h > 1. The local and external (host) computers must be connected.; 2. The DTE software must be installed on the local system.lI 3. The File Transfer Utility (MFT) must be installed on the host system.t hF The two computers can be connected either on site or at a remote siteM through an asynchronous serial line. An RSX system is connected to an onsite L external system by a cable and to a remote system by modems and a telephoneM line. In either case, there is a dedicated line between the two systems that1K establishes the ports at each end of the line as assigned specifically fort& terminal emulation and data transfer.N In addition, before using DTE from the system's console terminal, disable theN On-Line Debugging Tool (ODT). (Both ODT and DTE use the CTRL/P character, but for different purposes.) = To see example configurations type: HELP DTE HOOKUP ONSITE b HELP DTE HOOKUP REMOTEt Also see HELP DTE HOOKUP CABLE.3 ONSITE* Terminal Emulation with an Onsite System: C _____________ User Terminal _______________sC | 00 TADATADATADATADATADATA | _________ | |IC | RSX |TT1: | | | Local PDP-11|bC | |-- | | | |/C | System | ]------| | | System |gB | | |-- --------- | | |C | v | / / | v |iC |DTE Program| -------- | MFT Program | C | | |TT5: TT30:| | | C | v |-- Connecting Ports --| v | C | DZV11 | ]--------------------------------[ | DZ11 | C | |-- Both set to same baud rate --| | C ------------- ---------------  3 REMOTE) Terminal Emulation with a Remote System:  C _____________ User Terminal _______________ C | | _________ | | C | RSX |TT1: | | |Remote PDP-11|rC | |-- | | | |-C | System | ]------| | | System |aC | | |-- -------- | | | C | v | / / | v |hC |DTE Program| -------- | MFT Program | C | | |TT5: TT30:| | | C | v |-- ______ ______ --| v | C | DZV11 | ]----|DF03| <--\ |Modem|----[ | DZ11 | C | |-- ------ \--> ------ --| | C ------------- ---------------  3 CABLE| G When the two systems are directly connected with a cable the terminal hK characteristics of the port at the local system should be SET to SLAVE and N NOECHO. This prevents the transmisson of extraneous signals when the port isL idle (disconnected from terminal emulation). These noise signals can create: intersystem echo loops that degrade system performance.  I Transmission speeds between systems varies depending upon the system P involved. Limitations are based upon processor type, interface type, systemP load, distance between systems, and terminal support (use of higher baudL rates require that the remote system support XON/XOFF protocol). InL addition, if XON/XOFF is present, the user terminal may run speeds lowerN than that of the physical connection. A 2400 baud rate is recommended for Micro/RSX systems. 2 CONNECT #SET_HOSTs 2 SET_HOST SET HOST/DTE ddnn:[/options]n /DIALe /MUTE  /VERSIONH Establishes a connection between a local RSX system and another system.G The variable ddnn: specifies the device and unit specification of the + terminal port used for terminal emulation.p oJ Press the RETURN key twice after entering this command. This connects youJ to the host system. However, before you can use the host system, you must! log on as a user of that system.s E For help on the SET HOST/DTE options, type HELP DTE SET_HOST option.K For examples of the SET HOST/DTE command, type HELP DTE SET_HOST EXAMPLES. 3 DIAL SET HOST/DTE device:/DIAL="..."J Allows you to specify a dial command string for the modem. The string mayN consist of the digits 0-9, and the character "=" (equals sign; this indicatesO that another dial tone is expected at this point, such as when dialing from ano< internal telephone system to an outside telephone number). % See also HELP DTE SET_HOST EXAMPLES.H3 MUTE SET HOST/DTE device:/MUTEK Specifies whether DTE should alter certain device characteristics prior toXM exiting. The default is to return all of the device characteristics to theirdP original state. It is recommended that either the device be set to SLAVE/NOECHOP when it is idle (DTE will change these characteristics), or the /MUTE option 00(}beB specified which will set the device SLAVE/NOECHO when DTE exits. % See also HELP DTE SET_HOST EXAMPLES. 3 VERSIONE SET HOST/DTE device:/VERSION 8 Displays the identification (version) of the DTE task. 3 EXAMPLES i" SET HOST/DTE TT50:/DIAL="8850837" iG Initiates terminal emulation using terminal TT05 after directing the dG modem to dial the specified number and establish a modem connection. V O SET HOST/DTE TT25:/MUTE K Establishes terminal emulation using terminal TT25:, and sets the terminall0 characteristics to SLAVE/NOECHO on termination. 2 DISCONNECT SH To terminate emulation, log out of the host system with LOGOUT or BYE. @ Press and hold the control key (CTRL) and type a P character. $ The following message is displayed: I1 %DTE-S-EMUEXIT, Emulation exiting... Please waitt dF You are then returned to command level execution at the local System. cF (Be sure that you LOGOUT from the host system before exiting terminalC emulation. If you are in terminal emulation and type CTRL/P beforesE logging out from the host system, terminal connection is returned tolL the local system with the host system left logged on to your account. UnderP these conditions, if another user initiates terminal emulation, they are logged, on to the host system under your account.)  a See also HELP DTE CONNECT.e2 FILE_TRANSFERe H The MFT utility is used to delete and copy files between a local systemL (that uses terminal emulation) and the host system that the local system isN logged onto. Special code in the DTE task is used to identify and perform G local file operations requested by the MFT task. File transfer is oP performed using an error detection and correction algorithm to insure dataP integrity. The speed of file transfer varies with the processor and interface O types, system load, and software (support for variable typeahead buffersizedO allows for higher transfer rates). The user's local terminal is locked outsI during file transfer operations to prevent interference with the dataiP transfer between the two systems. The user is returned to terminal emulation+ upon completion of the file operation.  P The command syntax used to initiate file transfer operations depends on whetherI the host system uses DCL or MCR as its CLI. For more information, type: 3 HELP DTE MCR_COPY and HELP DTE MCR_DELETEf0 or HELP DTE DCL_COPY and HELP DTE DCL_DELETE 2 MCR_COPY? MCR Syntax for Copying Files (Host system uses MCR as its CLI) P First, invoke MFT by typing MFT. The host system responds with the prompt MFT>./ Then, to copy files, use the following syntax:i * MFT> to_file[/options]=from_file[/REM] Parameters:2 to_file Specifies the output file (destination). from_file Specifies the input file (origin)7 /REM Indicates that the file is on the local system  (remote to the host system) 2 MCR_DELETE@ MCR Syntax for Deleting Files (Host system uses MCR as its CLI)P First, invoke MFT by typing MFT. The host system responds with the prompt MFT>.2 Then, to delete files, use the following syntax: MFT> delete_file/DE[/REM] Parameters:A delete_file Specifies the name of the file to be deleted. Youi4 cannot specify wildcards when using MFT to delete files.p, /DE Indicates the file is to be deleted B /REM Indicates the file is on the local system (remote to the8 host system). The absence of /REM indicates the file is on the host system.n 2 DCL_DELETE@ DCL Syntax for Deleting Files (Host system uses DCL as its CLI) DELETE file[/REM] l Parameters:5 file Specifies the name of the file to be deleted_F /REM Indicates that the file is on the local system (remote to the@ host system). The absence of /REM indicates the file is on the host system.L For example, the following command line deletes the file FILE.DAT from the local (DTE) system:. DELETE FILE.DAT/DE/REMOTE 2 DCL_COPY? DCL Synta0002TADATADATADATADATADATAx for Copying Files (Host system uses DCL as its CLI)s' COPY from_file[/REM] to_file[/REM] E Parameters:A from_file Specifies the name of the input file (the file to bee transferred). J to_file Specifies the name of the output file (the file to be created).F /REM Indicates that the file is on the local system (remote to the@ host system). The absence of /REM indicates the file is on the host system.H For an example of this command format, type HELP DTE DCL_COPY EXAMPLES. 3 EXAMPLES$ COPY INFILE.DAT OUTFILE.DAT/REMOTE  N Copies the file 'INFILE.DAT' from the host (MFT) system into 'OUTFILE.DAT' on the DTE system. e p$ COPY INFILE.DAT/REMOTE OUTFILE.DAT  K Copies the file 'INFILE.DAT' from the DTE system into 'OUTFILE.DAT' on the. host (MFT) system.sO EDI is a line-oriented editor that allows you to create and modify text files.e' EDI operates on most ASCII text files.tJ EDI accepts commands that determine its mode of operation and control its@ actions on input files, output files, and working text buffers.( The command line for EDI is shown next. Formate filespecs Parameter filespecd< Specifies a file specification in the following format.* ddnn:[directory]filename.type;versionM After EDI has identified the input file or created the new file, it is readyu for commands.J EDI runs in two control modes: Edit (command) mode and Input (text) mode.F Edit mode is invoked automatically when you specify an existing file.L In edit mode, EDI issues an asterisk (*) prompt. EDI acts upon commands andK data to open and close files; to bring lines of text from an open file; toL change, delete, or replace information in an open file; or to insert single& or multiple lines anywhere in a file.H Input mode is invoked automatically at program startup if you specify a nonexistent file.J When in input mode, EDI does not issue an explicit prompt. Lines that youK enter at the terminal are treated as text and are inserted into the outputdH file. When you complete each input line by pressing the RETURN key, EDI# sends a line feed to the terminal. K To switch from edit mode to input mode, enter the Insert command and presspK the RETURN key. To return to edit mode, press the RETURN key as the only tF character on an input line. EDI will issue the asterisk prompt, which signifies edit mode. M EDI provides two modes you can use to access and manipulate lines of text inhK the input file. (A line is defined as a string of characters terminated by 8 pressing the RETURN key.) The two modes are as follows:K Line-by-line mode Allows access to one line of text at a time. Backing upm# is not allowed.sM Block mode Allows free access within a block of lines, on a line-by-M line basis. Backing up within a block is allowed. BackingiK up to previous blocks is not allowed. Block mode is thee- default text access mode.  i7 Type HELP EDI COMMANDS for a list of the EDI commands.h 2 COMMANDS! The EDI commands are as follows:nE Add Add & Print ALTMODE key BeginE Block On/Off Bottom Change Close F Close Secondary Close & Delete Concatenation Character CTRL/ZE Delete Delete & Print End Erace D ESCAPE key Exit Exit & Delete FileD Find Form Feed Insert KillM Line Change List on Pseudo Device List on Terminal Locate DevicesO Macro Macro Call Macro Execute Macro ImmediateoM Next Next & Print Open Secondary Output On/OffnK Overlay Page 008}Page Find Page Locate E Paste Print Read Renew M RETURN key Retype Save Search & Save J Select Primary Select Secondary Size Tab On/OffF Top Top of File Type Unsave5 Uppercase On/Off Write Verify On/OffJ Type HELP EDI command_name (for example, HELP EDI ADD_&_PRINT or HELP EDI0 TAB) for more information on the EDI commands.2 ADD O The Add command (A) causes the specified string to be appended to the current e line. Format A string 2 ADD_&_PRINT L The Add & Print command (AP) performs the same function as the Add command % except that the new line is printed.  Formatl AP string 2 ALTMODE_KEY M Pressing the ALTMODE key causes the system to print the previous line in theIK block (block mode only). That line becomes the current line. Thus, you can M back up through a block, one line at a time, by pressing a series of ALTMODE J keys. Pressing the ALTMODE key is equivalent to typing NP-1 (Next & Print% command) or pressing the ESCAPE key.dF If EDI is in input mode, the ALTMODE key acts like the RETURN key andI terminates a line of input. Pressing the ALTMODE key also exits EDI fromD5 input mode if it is the first character of the line.o2 BEGINpL The Begin command (B) sets the current line pointer to the beginning of theK file in line-by-line mode or to the beginning of the block buffer in block I mode. The current line is one line preceding the top line in the file ornM block buffer. Thus, you can insert text at the beginning of a file or block.nL If EDI is in line-by-line mode, Begin copies the input file into the outputL file, closes both, and then opens the latest version of the file. The Begin7 command performs the same function as the Top command.m Formatt B2 BLOCK_ON/OFFJ The Block On/Off command (BL) allows you to switch between block mode andK line-by-line mode. When you enter the Block On command, block mode becomes M active and the next block of text is brought into the block buffer. When you M enter the Block Off command, the current block being processed is written to N the output file and line-by-line mode becomes active. The first line from theB next sequential block in the input file becomes the current line. a7 The Block On command is the default text access mode. k Formatm BL [ON] or BL OFFo2 BOTTOMP The Bottom command (BO) moves the current line pointer to the beginning of the J last line of the current block (in block mode) or to the beginning of theG last line of the file (in line-by-line mode). In block mode, the only L processing EDI performs is line pointer positioning. In line-by-line mode,M all the lines are copied from the input file to the output file until EOF isB reached.  Formatd BO 2 CHANGEO The Change command (C) searches for string1 in the current line and, if found,tL replaces it with string2. If string1 is given, but cannot be located in theK current line, EDI prints [NO MATCH] and returns an asterisk (*) prompt. If K string1 is not given, string2 is inserted at the beginning of the line. Ifn@ string2 is not given, string1 is deleted from the current line.G The search for string1 begins at the beginning of the current line andF1 proceeds across the line until a match is found.EG If you precede the command with a number n, the first n occurrences off string1 are changed to string2.Format [n]C /string1/string2[/]e2 CLOSEcM The Close command (CL) transfers all remaining lines in the block buffer andnL input file (in that order) into the output file and closes both files. If aL file specification is included, the output file is renamed to the filespec.I EDI then returns to its initial command sequence, prompts with EDI>, andt2 waits for you to type another file specification.N If a secondary file was o00@2TADATADATADATADATADATApened during the editing session and was not closed, it remains open.Format CL [filespec]2 CLOSE_SECONDARYCK Use the Close Secondary (CLOSES) command when you have finished extractingtM text from a secondary input file. You must enter the Close Secondary commandp5 before you can use another secondary file as input.tFormat CLOSESe2 CLOSE_&_DELETE mK The Close & Delete command (CD) transfers all remaining lines in the blockpN buffer and the input file (in that order) into the output file, and it closesG both files. The input file is then deleted. If a file specification isL6 included, the output file is renamed to the filespec.N If a secondary file was opened during the editing session and was not closed, it remains open.e Formatm CD [filespec]2 CONCATENATION_CHARACTERsK The concatenation character allows you to give commands on one input line. K By default, the concatenation character is the ampersand (&). To referenceuJ text containing an ampersand, you must change the concatenation character to some other character..M If the Concatenation Character command (CC) is used without an argument, thee* concatenation character is the ampersand. Formatg CC [character]o2 CTRL/ZL CTRL/Z is a CLI function that terminates EDI. Pressing CTRL/Z (pressing theM CTRL key and the Z key simultaneously) terminates the editing session. If anBM output file is open when CTRL/Z is pressed, all remaining lines in the blockxJ buffer and the input file are transferred (in that order) into the outputL file, all files are closed, and EDI exits. If EDI is prompting for anotherK file specification when CTRL/Z is pressed, all files are closed (includingrI any open secondary input file), and EDI exits. If you press CTRL/Z as ant, input line terminator, that line is erased.2 DELETEO The Delete command (D) causes a specified number of lines to be deleted in the  following manner:N o If n is given and is a positive number, the current line and n-1 followingJ lines are deleted. The new current line is the line following the last deleted line.oL o If n is given and is a negative number, the current line is not deleted,K but the specified number of lines that precede it are deleted. The linesI pointer remains unchanged. A negative value for n can be used only in block mode.nM o If n is not given, the current line is deleted, and the next line becomes: the new current line.s Formatu D [n] or D -ng2 DELETE_&_PRINTI The Delete & Print command (DP) performs the same function as the DeleteK command except that the new current line is printed when all the specified, lines have been deleted.b Format DP [n] orT DP -nI If n is not specified, +1 is assumed. A negative value for n can be usedl only in block mode.2 ENDiO The End command (E) sets the current line pointer to the beginning of the lastiL line of the block or input file. If EDI is in block mode, only line pointerH positioning occurs. In line-by-line mode, all lines are copied from the4 input file to the output file until EOF is reached. Formatl E2 ERASEnL In line-by-line mode, the Erase command (ERASE) erases the current line. InK this mode, n can only be 1. In block mode, this command erases the currentL block buffer and the next n-1 blocks. If n is not specified, +1 is assumed. Formath ERASE [n] 2 ESCAPE_KEYL Pressing the ESCAPE key causes the system to print the previous line in theK block (block mode only). That line becomes the current line. Thus, you canoL back up through a block, one line at a time, by pressing a series of ESCAPE keys.E If EDI is in input mode, the ESCAPE key acts like the RETURN key and L terminates a line of input. The ESCAPE key also exits from input mode if it$ is the first character of the line.2 EXITL The Exit command (EX) transfers all remaining lines in the block buffer andG input f00H}ile (in that order) into the output file, closes the files, andoL terminates the editing session. If a file specification is used, the output, file is renamed to the specified file name. Formate EX [filespec]2 EXIT_&_DELETEnO The Exit & Delete command (ED) functions in the same way as the Close & Delete.) command except that EDI also terminates.i Formath ED [filespec]2 FILEI The File command (FIL)--line-by-line mode only--transfers lines from the L input file to both the output file and a specified file, beginning with theF current line, until a form-feed character is encountered as the firstI character in a line or until EOF is reached. At that time, the specified L file is closed. During the transfer, the original file remains intact (thatK is, all lines written to the specified file are also written to the normalmI output file, including the form feed). When the command is complete, theFA current line in the input file is one line beyond the form feed. L If the specified file does not already exist, a new file is created. If theK specified file does exist, the latest version of the file contains the newe data.Format FIL filespec 2 FINDK The Find command (F) searches the block buffer or input file for a string,hK beginning at the line following the current line. The string must begin inaI column 1 of the line matched. The line pointer is positioned at the linehJ containing the match. When the line containing the string is found, it is/ printed if the Verify On command is in effect.wL The Find command applies to the block buffer if EDI is in block mode and to/ the input file if EDI is in line-by-line mode.FE If a string is not specified, the line following the current line is K considered a match. If n is specified, the nth occurrence of the string isn found.rFormat [n]F [string] 2 FORM_FEEDeL The Form Feed command (FF) allows you to insert form feeds into the text toJ delimit pages. The form feed is inserted after the current line. The line< containing the form feed then becomes the new current line. Formati FFm2 INSERTP The Insert command (I) inserts a string immediately following the current line.K The string becomes the new current line. If a string is not specified, EDId enters input mode.o Formatg I [string]o2 KILLL The Kill command (KILL) returns EDI to the initial command sequence withoutL retaining the output file. When this command is executed, the input file is' closed and the output file is deleted.n Formatf KILLm 2 LINE_CHANGEt nN The Line Change command (LC) is similar to the Change command except that allM occurrences of string1 in the current line are changed to string2. A numeric H value n preceding the command changes the current line and the next n-1L lines. If string2 is not given, all occurrences of string1 are deleted. New9 lines are printed if the Verify On command is in effect.eK If string1 is given, but EDI cannot locate the string in the current line, ; EDI prints [NO MATCH] and returns the asterisk (*) prompt. Formath [n]LC /string1/string2[/]2 LIST_ON_PSEUDO_DEVICEtP The List on Pseudo Device command (LP) functions in the same manner as the ListH on Terminal command except that the remaining lines in the block bufferJ (block mode) or the remaining lines of the input file (line-by-line mode)K are listed on the pseudo device CL. In most systems, CL is the system line printer.u Formatt LP 2 LIST_ON_TERMINALN The List on Terminal command (LI) prints on your terminal all remaining linesK in the block buffer (block mode) or all remaining lines in the input filePF (line-by-line mode), beginning at the current line. At the end of theK listing, the current line pointer is re-positioned to the top of the input  file or block buffer.L If terminal host synchronization is installed at system generation, you canF control printing functions by pressing CTRL/O, CTRL/S, and CTRL/Q. 00P2TADATADATADATADATADATAToH suppress printing at any point, press CTRL/O. Printing can be suspended? temporarily by pressing CTRL/S and resumed by pressing CTRL/Q.m Format  LIi2 LOCATEK The Locate command (L) causes a search for a string, beginning at the linetN following the current line. The string may occur anywhere in the line sought.J The line pointer is positioned to the line containing the match. When theF line is located, it is printed if the Verify On command is in effect.E If a string is not specified, the line following the current line is/F considered a match, and the line pointer is positioned there. If n is4 specified, the nth occurrence of string is located.L Locate applies to the block buffer if EDI is in block mode and to the input file if in line-by-line mode. Formatn [n]L [string]2 MACROsI The Macro command is used to define macros. Space is available for threenL macro definitions. The definition can be any legal EDI command or string of= legal EDI commands connected by the concatenation character. I If a numeric argument is to be passed to the macro at execution time, a M percent sign (%) must be inserted in the macro definition at the point wheretK the numeric argument is to be substituted. Then, the value passed with the-L Macro Execute command replaces the percent sign when the macro is executed.K A macro definition may contain more than one percent sign. If it does, thehL single numeric value given in a Macro Execute command replaces each percentG sign. However, a macro may not have two or more independent arguments.b Format  MACRO x definition, Parameter x- Specifies the macro number (1, 2, or 3). 2 MACRO_CALL tE The Macro Call command (MC) allows you to retrieve up to three macrohL definitions previously stored in a file. The macro definitions must containN only the "definition" portion of the Macro command. The macro definitions areE stored in successively numbered macros: the first definition becomesh macro 1, and so on.rK The file used to store the macro definitions must be the latest version ofMJ file MCALL--that is, MCALL;n. The file type must be null or blank. If theJ macro definitions to be loaded are in a file of another name, you can useD the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) with the New Version (/NV) subswitch, to rename the file.n Format  MC"N Strings of concatenated EDI commands can be written as EDI macro definitions,I and up to three EDI macro definitions can be stored in file MCALL;n. TheTM Macro Call command is used to call the latest version of file MCALL and movelL the three definitions into the macro storage area. Then you can execute the; desired macro without having to type the complete command.c Macro calls may not be nested. G The concatenation character may precede, but not follow, a macro call.2 MACRO_EXECUTE"G The Macro Execute command executes a macro n times while passing it aniM optional numeric argument a. If a macro numeric argument is defined with thehL percent sign (%) in the macro definition, the numeric argument contained inL this command is passed for each execution of the macro. Before a macro canM be executed, it must either have been defined by means of a Macro command orl" called with a Macro Call command.D Use the Macro Execute command to execute any one of the three macroF definitions stored in the EDI macro storage area any number of times. Formatt [n]Mx [a] Parametersa n? Specifies the number of times the macro is to be executed.n x- Specifies the macro number (1, 2, or 3).  aK Specifies the numeric argument to be passed when the macro is executedbD (ignored if the argument % is not present in macro definition).2 MACRO_IMMEDIATEaJ The Macro Immediate command defines and executes a macro in one step. TheM definition is enclosed within angle brackets and is identical to that of the K Macro command. The definition is copied into the macro 1 storage area andeM i00X}mmediately executed n times. The macro may also be subsequently executed bynM entering an M1 command. The command is equivalent to the following two macroe commands: MACRO 1 definitiono nM1 Formatn [n] 2 NEXTN The Next command (N) moves the current line pointer backwards and forwards inJ the file. A positive number moves the current line pointer n lines beyondL the current line. A negative number moves the current line pointer backward n lines.s Format N [n] or N -neL If n is not specified, a value of +1 is assumed. A negative value for n can be used only in the block mode.2 NEXT_&_PRINT F The Next & Print command (NP) has the same effect as the Next command- except that the new current line is printed.r Formata NP [n] or NP -n2 OPEN_SECONDARY oN The Open Secondary command (OP) opens the specified secondary input file. TheL primary input file, if any, remains open. Subsequent text is read from theN primary input file until the secondary input file is selected by means of the) Select Secondary (SS) command for input.  FormatT OP filespec2 OUTPUT_ON/OFFmK The Output On/Off command (OU), used only in the line-by-line mode, allowslH you to continue or discontinue the transfer of text to the output file.K Output On is the default condition; it is automatically reestablished eachd time a Close command is issued. Formatl OU [ON] ors OU OFFr 2 If neither ON or OFF is specified, ON is assumed. 2 OVERLAYeM The Overlay command (O) deletes n lines and replaces them with any number ofL lines that you type. If n is not specified, the current line is deleted andG replaced with the lines typed. When you enter the Overlay command, EDIhM enters input mode. All text that you type goes into the file until you press 7 the RETURN key as the only character in an input line.n Format. O [n]2 PAGE ]M The Page command (PAG) causes EDI to enter block mode, if not already in it,sN and read page n into the block buffer. A page is delimited by form feeds. IfN n is less than the current page number, a TOF command is performed first. TOFL processing writes the input file to the output file, closes both files, and+ then opens the latest version of the file.tL If n is greater than the current page number, the necessary number of RenewM commands is executed to read page n into the block buffer. This command can  be used in block mode only. Formato PAG n 2 PAGE_FINDaJ The Page Find command (PF) performs the same function as the Find commandK except that successive blocks are searched until the nth occurrence of theFH string has been found. The contents of the block buffer and the blocksK between the current block and the block in which the nth occurrence of theh3 string is located are copied into the output file.K The string must begin in column 1 of the matched line. The line is printedH if the Verify On command is in effect. This command can be used only in block mode. FormatF [n]PF stringu 2 PAGE_LOCATEdO The Page Locate (PL) command causes a search of the current block, starting athL the line following the current line, and of successive blocks until the nthN occurrence of the string has been located. Text from the current block bufferM is written into the output file. The string can occur any place in the lines I checked. The line is printed if the Verify On command is in effect. Thisn( command can be used only in block mode. Formato [n]PL string2 PASTEsO The Paste command (PA) is identical to the Line Change command except that allrG lines remaining in the input file or block buffer are searched and allcM occurrences of string1 are replaced with string2. Modified lines are printedfL if the Verify On command is in effect. If string1 is given, but no match isL found, EDI returns the asterisk (*) prompt. When the command completes, the800`2TADATADATADATADATADATA line pointer is at the top of the buffer or input file. Format. PA /string1/string2[/]n2 PRINTAL The Print command (P) prints the current line and the next n-1 lines on theJ terminal. The last line printed becomes the new current line. If n is not$ specified, a value of 1 is assumed. Format P [n]2 READN The Read command (REA) reads the next n blocks of text into the block buffer.J If a block is already in the buffer, the new block or blocks are appended to it.e? EDI must be in block mode before this command can be executed.a FormatP REA [n]0 If n is not specified, a value of 1 is assumed.2 RENEWiM The Renew command (REN) writes the current block buffer into the output filewP and reads a new block from the input file. The optional value n is a repetitionK count: if you specify n, the process is repeated n times. The intermediate J blocks are written into the output file and the last block is left in theJ block buffer. If n is not specified, a single Renew process is performed.- This command may be used only in block mode.A Format REN [n] 2 RETURN_KEYI Pressing the RETURN key in edit mode causes the next line in the file orcJ block buffer to be printed. That line becomes the current line. Thus, youK can scan through a file or block, one line at a time, by pressing a seriessK of RETURN keys. This command is equivalent to NP+1 (Next & Print command).eL In input mode, pressing the RETURN key causes EDI to change from input mode to edit mode.2 RETYPEO The Retype command (R) replaces the current line with a string. If a string is $ not specified, the line is deleted. Formatd R [string]i2 SAVEM The Save command (SA) causes the current line, and the next n-1 lines, to beyJ saved in the specified file. If the file already exists, a new version is created.EM If no file is specified, the save file generated has the name SAVE.TMP. SaveuL puts the temporary file in the directory on the device for the file you are editing. J The input file or buffer information that is transferred to the save fileN remains intact. The new current line is the last line saved. The Save command9 does not delete lines in the block buffer or input file.i Format  SA [n] [filespec]2 SEARCH_&_CHANGE J The Search & Change command (SC) causes a search for string1 in the blockP buffer (block mode) or input file (line-by-line mode), beginning at the currentM line. The string may occur anywhere in the line. When string1 is located, itTC is replaced by string2. The located line becomes the current line.i Formats SC /string1/string2[/]s2 SELECT_PRIMARYN The Select Primary command (SP) selects the primary file for input. It allowsO you to reestablish the primary input file as the file from which text is read.c Format  SPa2 SELECT_SECONDARYM With the Select Secondary command (SS), you select the secondary file as thec input file. Format  SSnK To add text to the output file from a secondary input file, you must firstl7 open the secondary input file and select it for input. 2 SIZEP The Size command (SIZE) allows you to specify the maximum number of lines to beJ read into the block buffer on a single Read or Renew command. The defaultJ value for Size depends on your exact system configuration. Initially, EDIG determines how much buffer space it has and divides that by 13210, thedL maximum line size, to set the number of lines read in. In no case can it be less than 38 lines. Formatt SIZE n 2 TAB_ON/OFFM The Tab On/Off command (TA) turns automatic tabbing on or off. The automaticSM tab feature is useful for MACRO-11 language input. Tab Off is the default atoP the start of an editing session. When Tab On is in effect, a tab (equivalent toL eight spaces) is automatically inserted at the beginning of each input lineO unless the line either begins with a label followed by a colon (:) or containsm% a semicolon (;) in the 00ho}first column.  Formath TA [ON] or TA OFF P If neither ON nor OFF is specified when a TAB command is issued, ON is assumed.2 TOPtL The Top command (T) sets the current line pointer to the top of the currentM block (in block mode) or to the top of the file (in line-by-line mode). WhenL the current line pointer is positioned using the Top command, you can enter5 lines preceding the first line in the block or file. 8 The Top command differs from TOF in the following ways:J o In line-by-line mode, the Top command creates a new file and moves theK current line pointer to the top of the file. Unlike the TOF command, itO/ does not cause EDI to return to block mode.pL o In block mode, the Top command moves the current line pointer to the topG of the current block and does not create a new output file. The TOF M command moves the current line pointer to the top of the file and createso a new output file.Format T 2 TOP_OF_FILEiL The Top of File (TOF) command creates a new version of the file and return H the current line pointer to the first line of the file. The TOF commandL copies the input file into the output file, closes both, and then opens theN latest version of the file as the input file. If you issue this command whenO in line-by-line mode, EDI switches to block mode after saving the edited data.u/ The first block is read into the block buffer.a Format  TOF2 TYPEM The Type command (TY) is similar to the Print command. In line-by-line mode,wN the two are identical. In block mode, the Type command does not move the lineG pointer after displaying the requested text unless the end-of-block iscL encountered. In this case, the line pointer remains at the last line before the end-of-block.0 If n is not specified, a value of 1 is assumed. Format TY [n]e2 UNSAVEP The Unsave command (UNS) retrieves all the lines in a specified file and copiesJ them after the current line. If no file is specified, the default file isF SAVE.TMP. The new current line pointer is positioned at the last lineM retrieved from the file. The file used in this command can be any text file.f4 It is often the file created with the Save command. Formata UNS [filespec]2 UPPERCASE_ON/OFFO The Uppercase On/Off command (UC) allows you to enter lowercase letters from aAL terminal and have them converted to uppercase letters. If the Uppercase OffG command is issued, all input letters are accepted as they are entered,u including the EDI commands. Formatn UC [ON] ore UC OFFt8 If neither ON nor OFF is specified, then ON is assumed.2 VERIFY_ON/OFFoM The Verify On/Off command (V) controls the display of lines specified by theH Locate and Change commands. Use the Verify On command to display a lineI located by the Locate command or to display a line changed by the ChangerK command. Use the Verify Off command to inhibit the display of these lines. : The Verify On command is the default when EDI is started. Formatn V [ON]] ore V OFF3 If neither ON nor OFF is specified, ON is assumed.s2 WRITEK The Write command (W) causes the entire contents of the block buffer to ben? written into the output file. The block buffer is then erased. ? EDI must be in block mode before this command can be executed.d Formatn W1 HELP&You can get help on a topic by typing: & HELP topic subtopic subsubtopic... ,A topic can have one of the following forms: A 1. An alphanumeric string (e.g. a command name, option, etc.)+ 2. The match-all or wildcard symbol (*) Examples: HELP SUBSTITUTE NEXT HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMAND HELP CH EIf a topic is abbreviated, HELP displays the text for all topics thatmatch the abbreviation.1 KEYPADBEnter the keypad editor through the CHANGE comma00p2TADATADATADATADATADATAnd with the keypadEoption set (see SET KEYPAD command). See HELP CHANGE KEYPAD for more. information.2 VT100eWlqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqk lqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqki]x ^ x DOWN x x x x x x FNDNXT x DEL L x [x x x x x x x  GOLD x HELP x x xamx x x x x LEFT x RIGHT x x x x FIND x UND L xETx UP x v x x x tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquXmqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqj x PAGE x SECT x APPEND x DEL W xRDELETE Delete character x x x x xvLINEFEED Delete to beginning of word x COMMANDx FILL x REPLACEx UND W xRBACKSPACE Backup to beginning of line tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquZCTRL/A Compute tab level x ADVANCEx BACKUP x CUT x DEL C xRCTRL/D Decrease tab level x x x x xvCTRL/E Increase tab level x BOTTOM x TOP x PASTE x UND C xRCTRL/K Define key tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquXCTRL/R Refresh screen x WORD x  EOL x CHAR x xTCTRL/T Adjust tabs x x x x ENTER xmCTRL/U Delete to beginning of line xCHNGCASEx DEL EOLx SPECINSx x RCTRL/W Refresh screen tqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqu xVCTRL/Z Exit to line mode x LINE  x SELECT x xY x x x SUBS x kPress a key for help on that key. x OPEN LINE x RESET x x bTo exit, press the spacebar. mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqj3 127[DELETE xPDeletes the character preceding the cursor and stores it in the delete characterMbuffer. When the cursor is at the leftmost character position on a line, thexPline terminator to the left is deleted and the text on that line is moved to the$right of the text in the line above.3 300kLINE - (0) .HMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest beginning of a line,<depending on the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). q qOPEN LINE - (GOLD 0) [MBreaks the current line into two lines. The break is placed after the cursoriNand leaves the cursor position unchanged. Pressing the OPEN LINE key when the>cursor is at the beginning of a line creates a new blank line.3 301tWORD - (1)HMoves the cursor forward or backward by a word, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).  kCHNGCASE - (GOLD 1) 5Changes the case of a range of characters as follows:A L 1. If the select range is active, the case of each letter in the select range is changed.kN 2. If 1 does not apply and the cursor is positioned on the current searchH string, the case of each letter in the search string is changed.F This does not apply if a repeat count greater than 1 is given.H 3. If 1 and 2 do not apply, then the case of one letter is changed.I If the current direction is ADVANCE, the cursor moves forward one O character after the change of case occurs. If the current direction isfN BACKUP, the cursor moves backward one character before the case change occurs.r3 302iEOL - (2)n eMMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest end of line, depending on+current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).  a DEL EOL - (GOLD 2) aPDeletes all characters to the right of the cursor in the current line, includingMthe character on which the cursor is positioned, up to, but no00xo}t including thehline terminator.3 303 CHAR - (3) nLMoves the cursor forward or backward one character, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).m L (SPECINS - (GOLD 3) rKInserts any character from the DEC Multinational Character Set by using its Pdecimal value. Press the GOLD key, enter the code for the character in decimal,=press the GOLD key again, and press SPECINS (special insert).i3 304 ADVANCE - (4)c oPSets the current direction to forward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,PSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. ADVANCE means that movement will be toward the end.of the buffer; that is, to the right and down. L (BOTTOM - (GOLD 4)m r3Positions the cursor at the end of the text buffer.a3 305SBACKUP - (5) PSets the cursor direction to backward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,KSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. BACKUP means that movement will be toward the-5beginning of the buffer; that is, to the left and up.   RTOP - (GOLD 5) C9Positions the cursor at the beginning of the text buffer.n3 306bCUT - (6)f eMMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textrObetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position. IfJno SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchPstring, that string is cut. Each time CUT is used, the previous contents of thePASTE buffer are discarded.f ; aPASTE - (GOLD 6) LInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 307uPAGE - (7) TPMoves the cursor to the top of a page. A page is defined by a delimiter string,Nwhich can be set by the SET ENTITY command. The default page delimiter is theformfeed character (CTRL/L). n dCOMMAND - (GOLD 7) oKAllows you to enter a line mode command to be executed without exiting from Jkeypad mode. The command is processed when you press the ENTER key on thekeypad.3 308SECT - (8) MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward or backward, depending on themGcurrent direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). The cursor is moved to them"beginning of the appropriate line. E NFILL - (GOLD 8)t gPPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. You can set the right margin with the SET WRAP command. IfOit is not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL 1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.e3 309sAPPEND - (9) TOMoves the select range to the end of the PASTE buffer. The select range is all Jthe text between the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursorIposition. If no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the /current search string, that string is appended.  u nREPLACE - (GOLD 9) SODeletes the select range and replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer.p3 310 HELP - (PF2) l6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 3119FNDNXT - (PF3) rMSearches for the next occurrence of the search string previously entered withnIthe FIND key. The direction of the search is the current one (ADVANCE oroBACKUP). e mFIND - (GOLD PF3)i dNSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEOor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the ENTER key to search innthe current direction.3 312 UP-ARROW P=The ^ (up-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character above.n3 313oDOWN-ARROW ?The v (down-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character below.E3 314ARIGHT-ARROWF AThe --> (right-arrow) key moves the cursor to the next character.s3 315NLEFT-ARROW eEThe <-- (left-arrow) key moves t002TADATADATADATADATADATAhe cursor to the preceding character.e3 316ESELECT - (.) eLMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichPvarious operations (such as CUT, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. To create a select range: 1F 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.1 2. Press the SELECT key.h8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. r8You can then perform the desired operation on the range. m sRESET - (GOLD .) cJCancels the effect of the GOLD key if it was pressed by mistake, cancels aIselect range, or cancels any partly entered command string. Also sets the current direction to forward.r3 317 DEL L - (PF4)n ODeletes text from the cursor position to the end of the current line, including Mthe line terminator. If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a line,oIthe entire line is deleted. The deleted text is saved in the delete lineibuffer.  g UND L - (GOLD PF4) mJInserts the contents of the delete line buffer directly to the left of thecursor.e3 318eDEL W - (-)l nPDeletes text from the cursor to the beginning of the next word, storing the textin the delete word buffer.  tUND W - (GOLD -) tJInserts the contents of the delete word buffer directly to the left of thecursor.o3 319tDEL C - (,)e KDeletes the character on which the cursor is positioned and saves it in theudelete character buffer. ( DUND C - (GOLD ,) tOInserts the contents of the delete character buffer directly to the left of themcursor.(3 320GOLD - (PF1) OLets you use the lower (alternate) function of the editing keys. Press the GOLDf"key, then the key you wish to use. LYou can also use the GOLD key to enter counts. Press GOLD and then the mainKkeyboard numeric keys, followed by the key to which the count should apply.tNThe DELETE key and CTRL/U can be used to edit the number, and thus cannot haveLa count applied to them in this manner. The SPECINS key treats the count as(the code for a character to be inserted. NThe GOLD key is used with main keyboard keys for additional editing functions.PFor help on "GOLD character" (for example, GOLD A), press the character's key onthe main keyboard.3 321t ENTERs@Sends information to EDT for functions such as FIND and COMMAND. t hSUBS - (GOLD ENTER)MDeletes the search string, replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer,5and finds the next occurrence of the string. To use:y e 1. Press SELECT.o 2. Type the new text. 3. Press CUT. 4. Press FIND.n+ 5. Enter the text you wish to replace.n GEach time you press SUBS, EDT makes one substitution and finds the next Ioccurrence of the search string. You can use a repeat count for multipleTsubstitutions.3 001FTAB COMPUTE - (CTRL/A) PSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing the currentNcursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor position is not aMmultiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SET TAB inreffect to use CTRL/A.e3 004eTAB DECREASE - (CTRL/D)h mKUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inoeffect to use CTRL/D.o3 005sTAB INCREASE - (CTRL/E)u iKUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inveffect to use CTRL/E.b3 008f1BEGINNING OF LINE - (CTRL/H or BACKSPACE)  PMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.e3 009T$TAB INSERT - (CTRL/I or TAB) e$Moves the cursor in one of two ways: uM 1. If the tab size has not been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is notCO at the beginning of the line, a tab character is inserted at the cursorS position.t sL 2. If the tab size has been set wit00o}h SET TAB or if the cursor is at theH beginning of the line, a number of tab characters and spaces areK inserted to move the cursor to the column position that is equal toi< the SET TAB value times the indentation level count.3 010s:DELETE TO BEGINNING OF WORD - (CTRL/J or LINEFEED) nNUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theOword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a word,tthe previous word is deleted.E3 011rDEFINE KEY - (CTRL/K)  ePUsed to define a new keypad function for an editing key. You are prompted firstMto press the key to be defined, then to enter the definition. You can define Mthe key either in terms of other editing keys or with nokeypad mode commands.OOIf you press an editing key, its definition appears at the bottom of the screenoin the definition line.f3 012o"INSERT FORMFEED - (CTRL/L) r;Inserts a formfeed character () at the cursor position.d3 018EREFRESH - (CTRL/R) RORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersrMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.u(The cursor remains in the same location.3 020iTAB ADJUST - (CTRL/T)  m*Indents the select range. To use the key: t= 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.eD 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.d 3. Use the tab adjust key.  LThe effect of CTRL/T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs specified in the level count. You must haveB(a SET TAB value in effect to use CTRL/T.3 021n.DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE - (CTRL/U) aPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line is deleted.3 023dREFRESH - (CTRL/W) 1ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersdMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.i(The cursor remains in the same location.3 026 EXIT - (CTRL/Z)R .Shifts EDT to line editing.N3 065 TAB COMPUTE - (GOLD A) eHSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing theMcurrent cursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor positioneOis not a multiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SETr"TAB value in effect to use GOLD A.3 068TAB DECREASE - (GOLD D)r oNUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD D.3 069[TAB INCREASE - (GOLD E)g NUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD E.3 082tREFRESH - (GOLD R) iORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersTMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.G(The cursor remains in the same location.3 084TAB ADJUST - (GOLD T)a n*Indents the select range. To use the key: = 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.[D 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.d 3. Use the tab adjust key.  LThe effect of GOLD T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs specified in the level count. You must haveB(a SET TAB value in effect to use GOLD T.3 085n.DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE - (GOLD U) aPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line is deleted.3 087dREFRESH - (GOLD W) 1ORefreshes 002TADATADATADATADATADATAthe screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersdMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.i(The cursor remains in the same location.3 090 EXIT - (GOLD Z)L .Shifts EDT to line editing.N3 428 HELP  6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 429f DO*Processes the command that was just given. o 3 401h FIND NSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEPor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the DO key to search in thecurrent direction.3 402 INSERT HERE) LLInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 403bREMOVE iMMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textoKbetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position.sMIf no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchnLstring, that string is cut. Each time REMOVE is used, the previous contents"of the PASTE buffer are discarded. u n3 404tSELECT ILMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichJvarious operations (such as REMOVE, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. Tocreate a select range: F 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.n 2. Press the SELECT key.a8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. h8You can then perform the desired operation on the range. t s3 405ePREVIOUS SCREENe MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) backward. The cursor is moved to ther"beginning of the appropriate line. u p3 406sNEXT SCREENE LMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward. The cursor is moved to the"beginning of the appropriate line.  3 424u!BEGINNING OF LINE - (F12)  sPMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.m3 425U+DELETE TO BEGINNING OF WORD - (F13)o sNUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theOword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a word,ithe previous word is deleted.e2 VT52QHJ +--------+--------+--------+--------+)M | | | DEL L | UP | MDELETE Delete character | GOLD | HELP | | |uMLINEFEED Delete to beginning of word | | | UND L |REPLACE |eMBACKSPACE Backup to beginning of line +--------+--------+--------+--------+nM | PAGE | FNDNXT | DEL W | DOWN |oMCTRL/A Compute tab level | | | | |-MCTRL/D Decrease tab level |COMMAND | FIND | UND W | SECT | MCTRL/E Increase tab level +--------+--------+--------+--------+LMCTRL/F Fill text |ADVANCE | BACKUP | DEL C | RIGHT | MCTRL/K Define key | | | | |-MCTRL/R Refresh screen | BOTTOM | TOP | UND C |SPECINS |GMCTRL/T Adjust tabs +--------+--------+--------+--------+ MCTRL/U Delete to beginning of line | WORD | EOL | CUT | LEFT |AMCTRL/W Refresh screen | | | | |-MCTRL/Z Exit to line mode |CHNGCASE|DEL EOL | PASTE | APPEND |NM +--------+--------+--------+--------+ M | LINE | SELECT | ENTER |TM | | | |-M | OPEN LINE | RESET | SUBS |RM*** For help on a key, press the00o} key. +-----------------+--------+--------+ *** To exit, press the spacebar.3 127 DELETE------?Deletes the character preceding the cursor and stores it in the Odelete character buffer. When the cursor is on the leftmost character position Oon a line, the line terminator to the left is deleted and the text on that line 4is moved to the right of the text in the line above.3 300 LINE (0) ----HMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest beginning of a line,<depending on the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). - OPEN LINE (GOLD 0)t ---------.IInserts a carriage return/linefeed after the cursor and leaves the cursoroIposition unchanged. Pressing the OPEN LINE key when the cursor is at thet/beginning of the line creates a new blank line.t3 301h WORD (1)e----HMoves the cursor forward or backward by a word, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).e hCHNGCASE (GOLD 1)--------5Changes the case of a range of characters as follows:r tL 1. If the select range is active, the case of each letter in the select range is changed./N 2. If 1 does not apply and the cursor is positioned on the current searchH string, the case of each letter in the search string is changed.F This does not apply if a repeat count greater than 1 is given.H 3. If 1 and 2 do not apply, then the case of one letter is changed.I If the current direction is ADVANCE, the cursor moves forward one O character after the change of case occurs. If the current direction isfN BACKUP, the cursor moves backward one character before the case change occurs.r3 302iEOL (2)---uMMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest end of line, depending onh/the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).o  aDEL EOL (GOLD 2).------- PDeletes all characters to the right of the cursor in the current line, includingMthe character on which the cursor is positioned, up to, but not including thefline terminator.3 303cCUT (3)---rLMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textObetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position. IffJno SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchPstring, that string is cut. Each time CUT is used, the previous contents of thePASTE buffer are discarded.f e rPASTE (GOLD 3)t-----iLInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 304h ADVANCE (4)------- PSets the current direction to forward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,PSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. ADVANCE means that movement will be toward the end.of the buffer; that is, to the right and down. u rBOTTOM (GOLD 4)------3Positions the cursor at the end of the text buffer.T3 305d BACKUP (5)s------PSets the cursor direction to backward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,KSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. BACKUP means that movement will be toward the5beginning of the buffer; that is, to the left and up.o r o TOP (GOLD 5)D---E9Positions the cursor at the beginning of the text buffer.e3 306t DEL C (6)-----oKDeletes the character on which the cursor is positioned and saves it in the delete character buffer. h uUND C (GOLD 6)f-----xOInserts the contents of the delete character buffer directly to the left of theocursor.R3 307 PAGE (7)P----PMoves the cursor to the top of a page. A page is defined by a delimiter string,Nwhich can be set by the SET ENTITY command. The default page delimiter is theformfeed character (CTRL/L). h eCOMMAND (GOLD 7) -------KAllows you to enter a line mode command to be executed without exiting fromtJkeypad mode. The command is processed when you press the ENTER key on thekeypad.x n3 308h FNDNXT (8) ------MSearches for the next occurrence of the search string previously entered withIthe FIND key. The direction of the search is the current one (ADVANCE ortBACKUP). h002TADATADATADATADATADATA FIND (GOLD 8)----NSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEOor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the ENTER key to search in the current direction.3 309 DEL W (9)-----hPDeletes text from the cursor to the beginning of the next word, storing the textin the delete word buffer. k UND W (GOLD 9) -----rJInserts the contents of the delete word buffer directly to the left of thecursor.f3 310c HELP (RED) ----6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 311 DEL L (GRAY)t-----nODeletes text from the cursor position to the end of the current line, includinghMthe line terminator. If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a line,-Ithe entire line is deleted. The deleted text is saved in the delete linenbuffer.t n eUND L (GOLD GRAY)----- JInserts the contents of the delete line buffer directly to the left of thecursor.o3 312fUP (UP-ARROW)--=The ^ (up-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character above.t e iREPLACE (GOLD UP-ARROW)-------ODeletes the select range and replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer.l3 313DOWN (DOWN-ARROW)----?The v (down-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character below.l  dSECT (GOLD DOWN-ARROW) ----MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward or backward, depending on thehGcurrent direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). The cursor is moved to theo"beginning of the appropriate line.3 314oRIGHT (RIGHT-ARROW)-----eAThe --> (right-arrow) key moves the cursor to the next character.e  SPECINS (GOLD RIGHT-ARROW)w-------oKInserts any character from the DEC Multinational Character Set by using itsrPdecimal value. Press the GOLD key, enter the code for the character in decimal,=press the GOLD key again, and press SPECINS (special insert).c3 315dLEFT (LEFT-ARROW)----EThe <-- (left-arrow) key moves the cursor to the preceding character.n  tAPPEND (GOLD LEFT-ARROW)o------OMoves the select range to the end of the PASTE buffer. The select range is allaJthe text between the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursorIposition. If no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the /current search string, that string is appended.t3 316e SELECT (.) ------LMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichPvarious operations (such as CUT, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. To create a select range:L EN 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.l 2. Press the SELECT key.e8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. 8You can then perform the desired operation on the range.  rRESET (GOLD .),-----tJCancels the effect of the GOLD key if it was pressed by mistake, cancels aJselect range, or cancels any partly entered command string. Also sets thecurrent direction to forward.e3 320m GOLD (BLUE)----OLets you use the lower (alternate) function of the editing keys. Press the GOLDe"key, then the key you wish to use. .LYou can also use the GOLD key to enter counts. Press GOLD and then the mainKkeyboard numeric keys, followed by the key to which the count should apply.ENThe DELETE key and CTRL/U can be used to edit the number, and thus cannot haveLa count applied to them in this manner. The SPECINS key treats the count as(the code for a character to be inserted. dNThe GOLD key is used with main keyboard keys for additional editing functions.PFor help on "GOLD character" (for example, GOLD A), press the character's key onthe main keyboard.3 321tENTERt-----s@Sends information to EDT for functions such as FIND and COMMAND. tSUBS (GOLD ENTER)----MDeletes the search string, replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer,o5and finds the next occurrence of the string. To use:E S 1. Press SELECT.s 2. Type the new text. 3. Press CUT.00o} 4. Press FIND.w+ 5. Enter the text you wish to replace.  cGEach time you press SUBS, EDT makes one substitution and finds the nextrIoccurrence of the search string. You can use a repeat count for multipleosubstitutions.3 001sTAB COMPUTE (CTRL/A). -----------GPSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing the currentNcursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor position is not aMmultiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SET TAB inseffect to use CTRL/A. 3 004tTAB DECREASE (CTRL/D) ------------KUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB in effect to use CTRL/D. 3 005 TAB INCREASE (CTRL/E) ------------KUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inveffect to use CTRL/E.b3 006fFILL (CTRL/F)----PPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. You can set the right margin with the SET WRAP command. IfOit is not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL 1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.-3 008d(BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/H or BACKSPACE)-----------------SPMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.m3 009lTAB INSERT (CTRL/I or TAB) ----------$Moves the cursor in one of two ways: uP 1. If the tab size has not been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is not atL the beginning of the line, a tab character is inserted at the cursor position.eL 2. If the tab size has been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is at theH beginning of the line, a number of tab characters and spaces areO inserted to move the cursor to the column position that is equal to the 8 SET TAB value times the indentation level count.3 010h1DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/J or LINEFEED)b---------------------------ENUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theNword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a wordthe previous word is deleted. 3 011iDEFINE KEY (CTRL/K)n ----------PUsed to define a new keypad function for an editing key. You are prompted firstMto press the key to be defined, then to enter the definition. You can define Mthe key either in terms of other editing keys or with nokeypad mode commands.EOIf you press an editing key, its definition appears at the bottom of the screen in the definition line. 3 012INSERT FORMFEED (CTRL/L)----------------;Inserts a formfeed character () at the cursor position.d3 0181REFRESH (CTRL/R)--------ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterstMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.n(The cursor remains in the same location.3 020gTAB ADJUST (CTRL/T) ----------*Indents the select range. To use the key: o= 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust. D 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.n 3. Use the tab adjust key.n nLThe effect of CTRL/T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs indicated by the level count. You must haveD(a SET TAB value in effect to use CTRL/T.3 021n%DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/U)e---------------------------oPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line isddeleted.3 023eREFRESH (CTRL/W)------- ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterseMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messag002TADATADATADATADATADATAes. (The cursor remains in the same location.3 026 EXIT (CTRL/Z)----Shifts EDT to line editing.  T3 065TAB COMPUTE (GOLD A)- ----------- HSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing theMcurrent cursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor positioneOis not a multiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SETs"TAB value in effect to use GOLD A.3 068eTAB DECREASE (GOLD D) ------------NUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD D.3 069-TAB INCREASE (GOLD E) ------------NUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD E.3 070tFILL (GOLD F)----PPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. The right margin can be set by the SET WRAP command. If itLis not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.-3 082dREFRESH (GOLD R)-------lORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersIMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.r(The cursor remains in the same location.3 084aTAB ADJUST (GOLD T) ----------GAdjusts the tab level of the select range. The key is used as follows:  = 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.iD 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.  3. Use the tab adjust key.n eLThe effect of GOLD T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs indicated by the level count. You must haved(a SET TAB value in effect to use GOLD T.3 085 %DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (GOLD U)e---------------------------oPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line isddeleted.3 087eREFRESH (GOLD W)------- ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterseMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages. (The cursor remains in the same location.3 090 EXIT (GOLD Z)----Shifts EDT to line editing.  O1 CHANGEGThe CHANGE command puts EDT in change mode. Use change mode to edit atl/the character level rather than the line level.  t-Format: CHANGE [range] [;nokeypad command(s)]u iFThe optional range specifies the cursor position when you enter change7mode. If you omit range, the current position is used.a rGThere are three submodes of change mode. Which submode you use dependseHon the type of terminal you are using and whether or not you wish to useFthe auxiliary (numeric) keypad for editing commands. These modes are:  1. Hardcopy modee 2. Keypad modea 3. Nokeypad mode  hDIf the CHANGE command contains a semicolon (;) it may be followed byFnokeypad commands. If the last nokeypad command is EX, EDT returns toBline mode for the next command line. This is the only form of theCCHANGE command that may be used in a startup command file or macro. 2 ENTITIESBEntities are used in nokeypad mode commands to specify the text onBwhich a command will operate. Each entity represents a portion ofEtext, which may be anything from a single character to an entire textpFbuffer. Most entities can be preceded by a count, which indicates the"number of entities to be affected. 3 CHARACTERpGThe character entity is specified by the letter C. It selects a singlehcharacter of text.3 WORD@A word consists of a string of characters terminated by a set ofCdelimiter characters. The default delimiter characters are spaces,yDtabs, carriage returns, line terminators, line feeds, formfeeds, and?vertical t00o}abs. Spaces are handled in a special way: all spacesoHfollowing a word up to the first non-space character are considered partFof a word. Other delimiters are not considered part of the word theyBterminate. Rather, they are considered to be words by themselves,Funless SET WORD NODELIMITER in in effect. If SET WORD NODELIMTER is inAeffect, delimiters are not considered words by themselves but arecHconsidered part of the word they terminate. The three word entities are: D W Specifies the entire word in which the cursor is positioned.I BW Specifies all characters preceding the cursor up to the beginninge of the word.G EW Specifies all characters from the cursor through the end of thea word.c i?You can change the word delimiters with the SET ENTITY command.i3 LINEThe line entities are: D L Specifies the entire line in which the cursor is positioned.I BL Specifies all characters preceding the cursor up to the beginningH of a line. (When the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a> line, the BL entity selects the entire previous line.)F EL Specifies all characters from the cursor to the end of a line,B including the character on which the cursor is positioned.G (If the cursor is on a line terminator, the entire next line ist selected.)H NL Specifies all characters from the cursor to the beginning of theA next line, including the character on which the cursor is positioned.W3 RANGEuHThe range entities specify all text in the buffer either before or after(the cursor. The two range entities are: fG BR Specifies the text from the cursor position to the beginning ofn the buffer.iE ER Specifies the text from the cursor position to the end of then buffer.n 3 SENTENCEHA sentence consists of a string of characters terminated by one of a setEof single character delimiters. The default sentence delimiters are:cEperiod (.), question mark (?), and exclamation point (!). A sentenceeGdelimiter is considered to be a delimiter only if it is at the end of arFline or if it is followed by a space. The line terminator or trailingGspaces are considered a part of the sentence. There are three sentencet entities:u rJ SEN Specifies the entire sentence in which the cursor is positioned,I including the delimiter and trailing spaces or line terminator.eF BSEN Specifies all characters preceding the cursor in the current sentence.aJ ESEN Specifies all characters in the current sentence from the cursor9 to (but not including) the delimiter character.a aAThe sentence delimiters can be changed by the SET ENTITY command.o3 PAGEFA page consists of all the text between two page delimiters, includingHthe trailing page delimiter. The default page delimiter is the formfeed'character. The three page entities are:n e, PAGE Specifies all of the current page.I BPAGE Specifies all characters in the current page from the characterf< preceding the cursor to the beginning of the page.I EPAGE Specifies all characters in the current page from the cursor tod1 (but not including) the page delimiter.o >You can change the page delimiter with the SET ENTITY command. 3 PARAGRAPHFA paragraph consists of all the text between two paragraph delimiters,Gincluding the trailing paragraph delimiter, and if SET PARAGRAPH WPS isfFin effect, any adjacent delimiters. The default paragraph delimiter isCtwo consecutive line terminators. The three paragraph entities are:n f1 PAR Specifies all of the current paragraph.hD BPAR Specifies all characters in the current paragraph from theK character preceding the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.oK EPAR Specifies all characters in the current paragraph from the cursora9 to (but not including) the paragraph delimiter.  CYou can change the paragraph delimiter with the SET ENTITY command.a3 SELECTGThe select entity 002TADATADATADATADATADATAconsists of all characters between the cursor and thenFselect mark. The select mark must have been specified previously by aHSEL command. The select range entity is specified by SR. Some commandsCuse the search string when the SR entity is specified but no selectorange has been created. 3 VERTICALHThe vertical entity is the same as the line entity, except that with theHV entity, the cursor stays in the same column. You specify the verticalentity with V.3 STRINGGThe string entity consists of all the characters between the cursor andoEthe next occurrence of a specified search string. Specify the stringiAentity by enclosing the desired search string in single or doubleRCquotation marks. If the string is null (specified by '' or ""), thee%previous search string is used again.d FFor key definitions, you may use the null character (character code 0)Bin place of the quotation marks to avoid conflicts with the searchstring. 2 HARDCOPY6On a hardcopy terminal, change mode operates this way: h@When you enter change mode, EDT displays the current line on theFterminal. The cursor position is marked by bracketing the character on>which the cursor is positioned. EDT will then prompt with the characters:l p C* 'FIn response, you type a series of nokeypad mode commands terminated byDpressing return. EDT will execute the commands and type the currentline.u2 KEYPAD@You enter the keypad mode of change mode when your terminal is aHVT100-type or VT52 and the keypad option is set. (This option is set byGdefault for these terminals.) In this mode the terminal screen is usedtFto view the text buffer. Characters typed using the main keyboard areCinserted into the buffer at the cursor position. You enter editingnAcommands by using keys on the auxiliary keypad, function keys, ory"control keys on the main keyboard. eFFor more help on keypad mode, type CHANGE to enter that mode. Use the keypad HELP facility as follows: J 1. If your terminal is a VT100-type, press the keypad key marked PF2.= 2. If your terminal is a VT52, press the red keypad key.rI 3. If your terminal has function keys, press the function key markedb HELP.t 2 NOKEYPAD@You enter the nokeypad mode of change mode if your terminal is aEVT100-type or VT52 and the SET NOKEYPAD command has been used to turnhDoff the keypad option. The screen is used as a window into the textEbuffer. You type nokeypad mode commands at the keyboard; they echo onfEthe bottom line of the screen. EDT executes the commands and updates.1the text on the screen whenever you press return.k 2 SUBCOMMANDSf@When EDT is in change mode and SET NOKEYPAD is in effect or yourCterminal is set to HARDCOPY, EDT accepts a distinct set of commandseCcalled the nokeypad mode commands. You may concatenate a string ofn6these commands with or without spaces separating them. nCNokeypad commands take one of the following forms, depending on themparticular command:; e 1. commando 2. [+|-][count]command = 3. [+|-][count][command][+|-][count][+|-]entity[=buffer]e @Whenever a sign can appear in more than one place, the last sign#specified determines the direction.e3 ADViEThe ADV (advance) command sets the cursor direction to advance. Manyn@nokeypad commands use the current direction to determine whetherFentities to the left or to the right of the cursor are to be affected.BWhen the direction is forward, nokeypad commands affect the cursor&character and characters to the right. n Format: ADV 3 APPENDEThe APPEND command works in the same way as the CUT command (see CUT) Cexcept that it adds the new text to the end of the alternate buffers"instead of replacing its contents. n:Format: [+|-][count]APPEND[+|-][count][+|-]entity[=buffer]3 ASCcFThe ASC nokeypad command inserts a specified character into the bufferDat the cursor position. Use the count field to indicate the decimalEcode of the character you want to insert. Characters are coded usingrCthe DEC Multinational Character 00o}Set; codes 0 to 127 are the same aswASCII. Format: [count]ASC mDThe ASC command is the only way to insert a carriage return into theEmiddle of a line of text; otherwise, insert commands always treat theoBcarriage return as a line terminator. The following command wouldinsert a carriage return:d a0 13ASC (13 is the code for carriage return)3 BACKFThe BACK command sets the cursor direction to backward. Many nokeypadGcommands use the current direction to determine whether entities to thec@left or to the right of the cursor are to be affected. When theFdirection is backward, nokeypad commands affect characters to the leftof the cursor. Format: BACK3 BELLGThe BELL command rings the bell on the terminal. There is no effect onfthe text buffer. d Format: BELL3 CHGCBThe CHGC command changes the case of every letter in the specifiedDnumber of entities: lowercase letters become uppercase and uppercasebecome lowercase.e r/Format: [+|-][count]CHGC[+|-][count][+|-]entityh HCHGCSR (change case of select region) works differently: If there is noGselect range and the cursor is in the search string, CHGCSR changes therGcase of every letter in the search string. If there is no select rangerFand the cursor is not in the search string, CHGCSR changes the case ofFthe character under the cursor, if it is letter. If the [count] field;is two or more, CHGCSR ignores the search string condition.p3 CHGL>The CHGL command forces every letter in the specified range to lowercase. H/Format: [+|-][count]CHGL[+|-][count][+|-]entityn :4CHGLSR has the same special contingencies as CHGCSR.3 CHGU>The CHGU command forces every letter in the specified range to uppercase. e/Format: [+|-][count]CHGU[+|-][count][+|-]entityt s4CHGUSR has the same special contingencies as CHGCSR.3 CLSS1The CLSS command clears the search string buffer. Format: CLSS3 CUTRHThe CUT command deletes a specified number of entities and saves all theDdeleted text in an alternate text buffer. The command works exactly6like the DELETE command except that the text is saved. p7Format: [+|-][count]CUT[+|-][count][+|-]entity[=buffer]f e?If you do not specify a buffer, the buffer named PASTE is used.  -"Ex: CUTSR Cut the selected range( CUTPAGE Cut the current page of text3 D >The D nokeypad command deletes a specified number of entities. r,Format: [+|-][count]D[+|-][count][+|-]entity HIf the entity is C, W, BW, EW, L, BL, EL, or NL, the last entity deletedGby the command is saved in the delete buffer associated with the entityeBand can be restored with the UNDC, UNDW, or UNDL nokeypad command. ];Ex: D15C Deletes 15 characters in the current direction.f% DSR Deletes the select range. 3 DBR Deletes to the beginning of the buffer. 3 DATEBThe DATE command inserts the current date and time string into the&buffer at the current cursor position. tEThe form of the string is: dd-MMM-yyyy hh:mm:ss . Note the trailinglEspace. Before the tenth of the month the dd is a space followed by aaHsingle digit. If you prefer the month abbreviation to be in lower case,Byou can change it by backing up to the month and using CHGL. This>command always uses the English abbreviations for month names. e Format: DATE3 DEFKCThe DEFK command can be used to reassign the define key function ton-another redefinable keypad mode function key.u Format: DEFK3 DESEL HThe DESEL command cancels the current select range if one is active. If4no select range is active the command has no effect. d Format: DESELd3 DLWCHThe DLWC (default lowercase) command sets the motion state to lowercase.HWith this as the motion state moving the cursor over a lower case letter-changes it to upper case. See DUPC and DMOV.o t Format: DLWC3 DMOVEThe DMOV command returns the default motion state to unchanged. With Hthis as the motion state moving the cursor over a letter does not changeits case. See DLWC and DUPC.e r Format: DMOV3 DUPCHThe DUPC (default uppercas002TADATADATADATADATADATAe) command sets the motion state to uppercase.HWith this as the motion state moving the cursor over a lower case letter-changes it to upper case. See DMOV and DLWC.i t Format: DUPC3 EX:The EX (exit) command exits from change mode to line mode. Format: EX3 EXT FThe EXT (extend) command executes a line mode command while you are inHchange mode. EDT interprets the remainder of the command line as a line<mode command, executes the command, and reenters change modeBautomatically. The EXT command may not be used inside parentheses. sFormat: EXT line mode commandt3 FILLCThe FILL command reformats a block of text so that as many completeDEwords as possible are placed on each line without exceeding the rightm?margin. It sets the right margin to the terminal width minus 1n@character by default. The margin can be changed by the SET WRAPcommand. e/Format: [+|-][count]FILL[+|-][count][+|-]entitye3 HELPEThe HELP command can be used to reassign the help function to anotherT%redefinable keypad mode function key.a3 IeDThe I command inserts new text into the buffer at the current cursor position.o oFormat: Itext to be inserted^Z or: Ip text to be inserted ^Zl HIf you plan to insert only a few characters, use the first form of the IHcommand. If you plan to insert several lines use the second form. WithBthe second form you can insert lines until you type control Z. OnFVT100-type terminals the I command remains at the bottom of the screenHto remind you that you are inserting text. Only the first form of the IAcommand can be used in a key definition or after C; in a macro ornstartup command file.o 3 KSBThe KS command modifies the cursor position after a PASTE command. EAfter a PASTE command, the cursor is on the character to the right ofaGthe pasted text. If PASTE is followed by KS, however, the cursor moves Gto the last pasted character if the current direction is forward and toIDthe first pasted character if the direction is backward. You should:only use the KS command immediately after a PASTE command. eFormat: PASTE KS tGSuch cursor positioning affects a subsequent string search. KS is usedcHin the definition of the keypad SUBS function so that the character thatHfollows the pasted text in the current direction is included in the nextstring search.3 MOVEFThe "MOVE" command moves the cursor a specified number of entities. IfFDLWC is in effect, all letters encountered are forced to lowercase. IfFDUPC is in effect, all letters encountered are forced to uppercase. IfBDMOV is in effect, no text is changed. The "MOVE" command uses no command word.  uFormat: [+|-][count][+|-]entitye GIf you use an explicit sign, the direction of the move is determined byAthat sign (+ for forward, - for backward); otherwise, the current Hdirection mode (set by the ADV or BACK command) is used to determine the direction. n-Ex: +3W Moves the cursor 3 words forward.u= L Moves the cursor 1 line in the current direction.e: -PAGE Moves the cursor backward to a page delimiter.3 PASTEtEThe PASTE command copies the contents of an alternate buffer into the+&current buffer at the cursor position. xFormat: [count]PASTE[=buffer]h o6If you omit the buffer name, the PASTE buffer is used.3 QUITLThe QUIT nokeypad command leaves the editor without saving any text buffers.EThis will cause you to lose any editing you have done in this sessionrCunless you used the WRITE command to save the text before quitting.c n Format: QUIT3 ReHThe R (replace) command deletes the specified entities and leaves you inGthe insert state so you can enter the text that you want to replace the deleted text with. o,Format: [+|-][count]R[+|-][count][+|-]entity3 REFf%The REF command refreshes the screen.U Format: REFy3 SoCThe S command replaces occurrences of one string of characters withaanother. s(Format: [+|-][count]S/string-1/string-2/ HThe slashes represent any non-alphanumeric character used to delimit theGtwo 00o}strings. S searches in the specified direction from the cursor andsAfinds an occurrence of string-1. It deletes string-1 and inserts string-2 in its place. eEx: S/1988/1989/3 SELmHThe SEL command marks a portion of text that will be one end of a selectArange. You create a select range by positioning to one end of therGdesired text (either end will do), executing the SEL command, moving tonHthe other end of the desired text, and performing an operation on the SRC(select range) entity. On VT100-type terminals the select range is displayed in reverse video.s i Format: SELe3 SHIFTrDUse the SHL (shift left) and SHR (shift right) commands to alter theHleft margin when in change mode. The left margin is the position of theFfirst character in each line on the screen. Normally, the left marginAis 0, which means all characters are displayed. If you use a SHLtDcommand, the left margin can be changed by an integral number of tabHstops (8 characters). If SHL is used once, the first 8 columns will notHbe displayed on the screen. This shifts the screen window horizontally. 1Format: countSHL (Shift left by count tab stops)h2 countSHR (Shift right by count tab stops)3 SSELEThe SSEL (search and select) command searches for the occurrence of a Hstring and places the string in the select range. The cursor remains atthe far end of the string. tFormat: SSEL"string"3 SNGThe SN (substitute next) command performs a substitution using the same Bsearch and replacement strings as the previous substitute command. Format: [+|-][count]SN3 TABhEUse the TAB nokeypad command when the line mode SET TAB command is in Feffect. The TAB command inserts the correct number of tabs and blanksFto position the cursor to the current tab level. When SET NOTAB is inBeffect, or when the cursor is not at the beginning of a line, thisHcommand inserts an HT character, thus positioning the cursor to the next-tab stop. Tab stops are every eight columns.m Format: TABp3 TADJGThe TADJ command adjusts the tab level for the specified range of text.GThe SET TAB value determines the tab size. The tab level is adjusted bys>the value of count; it is incremented for a positive count andDdecremented for a negative count. A count not preceded by + or - isFassumed positive. The TADJ tab setting is the product of the tab sizeand the count. *Format: [+|-][count]TADJ[+|-][count]entity uHNote that the + or - that precedes the first count is not used to modifyHthe direction of entity selection. Its function in this command differsGin this way from all other nokeypad commands that use a similar format.l3 TCFThe TC nokeypad command computes the tab level from the current cursorAposition. This command has meaning only if SET TAB is in effect.  s Format: TC3 TDHThe TD nokeypad command decreases the tab level count. This command has%meaning only if SET TAB is in effect.n y Format: TD3 TGSEL HThe TGSEL command allows you to toggle select. When the select range isGactive, TGSEL will cancel it, and when no select range is active, TGSELm,will enable it, acting like the SEL command. o Format: TGSELh3 TIFThe TI nokeypad command increases the tab level counter. This command)has meaning only if SET TAB is in effect.  i Format: TI3 TOPmHThe TOP command forces the line on which the cursor is positioned to theHtop of the screen. If there is less than a full screen of lines between?the current line and the end of the buffer, TOP has no effect. l Format: TOPi 3 UNDELETEAThe UNDELETE commands restore the last entity deleted by a deletelcommand. l"Format: UNDC (undelete character) UNDW (undelete word)m UNDL (undelete line)n3 XLATEsDThe XLATE command allows calling back to the caller of callable EDT. OFormat: XLATEtext^Zo sDThe text is passed to the XLATE routine, which returns some NOKEYPADHcommands for EDT to execute. This command is an error except on VAX/VMSGwhen EDT is being called from a program. See the EDT Editor002TADATADATADATADATADATA Manual forE more details.E3 ()FA sequence of nokeypad commands can also be enclosed in parentheses toFform a single unit. A number preceding the left parenthesis indicatesDthe number of times to repeat the entire sequence. The EXT nokeypad)command cannot appear inside parentheses.L3 ^xFThis command provides for the insertion of control characters in text.GEDT accepts a circumflex (^) followed by a letter from A to Z, an @, [,VH\, ], ^ or _. Each of these 32 characters is transformed into a controlHcharacter by subtracting 32 from its ASCII code, thus ^@ becomes NUL, ^Abecomes SOH, etc.e Format: [count]^[character]m1 CLEARd4The CLEAR (abbreviated CL) command deletes a buffer. oFormat: CLEAR buffer cHThe buffer no longer appears on the list printed by SHOW BUFFER. If theIbuffer was a macro, it is no longer a macro. If the buffer contained anycGtext, that text is deleted. If that buffer was the current buffer, the Jcurrent buffer becomes MAIN. There are two exceptions to these rules: theLbuffers PASTE and MAIN. The CLEAR command does not delete these buffers butNjust deletes their text. Note that the argument is a buffer name, not a rangeIspecification: CLEAR PASTE is valid, while CLEAR =PASTE and CLEAR BUFFERrPASTE are not.1 COPYBThe COPY (abbreviated CO) command copies text from one location toEanother within a buffer or between buffers. When text is copied, thehsource text remains intact.f ;Format: COPY [range-1] TO [range-2] [/QUERY] [/DUPLICATE:n]t hHThe lines specified by range-1 are copied above the first line specifiedHby range-2. Either range defaults to the current line. Either range mayinclude a buffer specification.c oAIf the destination is not the current buffer, put the name of theTFreceiving buffer immediately after TO (=buffer). Give the full name of=the buffer. To copy text from an external file, see INCLUDE.e 2 /DUPLICATEFormat: /DUPLICATE:n aCWhen you use the /DUPLICATE (abbreviated /DUP) qualifier, the linesI,specified by range-1 are duplicated n times.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY eHWhen you use the /QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with5a question mark (?) to verify each line to be copied.e sResponses are:  Y Yes, copy this lineo! N No, do not copy this lineyA Q Quit, do not copy any of the remaining lines in the rangex+ A All, copy all the rest of the linesP1 DEFINEDThe DEFINE command (abbreviated DEF) defines either editing keys for$keypad mode or macros for line mode.2 KEYaBThe DEFINE KEY (abbreviated DEF K) command creates definitions forCediting keys for use in keypad mode. You can redefine keypad keys,nCcontrol key sequences and GOLD control key sequences. You can also3define function keys, for terminals that have them.  s'Format: DEFINE KEY key-name AS 'string't 3 KEY-NAME'Format: DEFINE KEY key-name AS 'string'l h!Key-name is one of the following:  I [GOLD] [FUNCTION] number [GOLD] CONTROL character [GOLD] CONTROL "character" [GOLD] CONTROL 'character' [GOLD] DELETEc GOLD character GOLD "character" GOLD 'character' CNumber refers to keypad and function keys. CONTROL character namesyBspecific control keys (upper- and lowercase letters are consideredGequivalent). A character following CONTROL is limited to @, A to Z, [,oG\, ], ^ and _. DELETE refers to the delete key, which is not a controliCcharacter. Character not following CONTROL can be any keyboard keyFexcept 0-9, though - is not useful. Characters !, %, ', and " must be5enclosed in quotation marks; other characters can be."3 STRING ''Format: DEFINE KEY key-name AS 'string'n u@The string is a string of nokeypad mode commands that define theEfunction of the key. If you want the command to be executed when thelDkey is struck, the definition must end with a period. Otherwise, EDTGwill accumulate definitions until the user types a key whose definition 7ends with a period, and then execute them all together.h4 ?-FYou ca00o}n use a question mark (?) or question mark and asterisk (?*), inGkey definitions to prompt the user for input. The ? is replaced by thenDcharacters read from the terminal before the command is executed. AEprompt string enclosed in single quotation marks may follow the ?. AxCresponse to an input request generated by a ? must be terminated bydDpressing a keypad or function key, whereas a response to a ?* can beFterminated by pressing a keypad key, a function key or the return key.4 RESET DIf you define a key as 'RESET' (must be exactly five characters) theDkey will perform the RESET keypad function. RESET is not a nokeypad;command. Do not put a period at the end of the definition.d4 GOLDBIf you define a key as 'GOLD' the key will perform the GOLD keypadFfunction. GOLD is not a nokeypad command. Do not put a period at theend of the definition. 3 EXAMPLESDTo define the key CTRL/A to move 3 lines, use the following command: y DEFINE KEY CONTROL A AS '3L.'t GTo define the GOLDed function of the up-arrow key to mean "go to top ofa#buffer," use the following command:T y DEFINE KEY GOLD 12 AS 'BR.'o pDTo define the key CTRL/D to write your COBOL identification division*header for you, use the following command: pJ DEFINE KEY CONTROL D AS 'iIDENTIFICATION DIVISION.^Z^MiPROGRAM-ID. ?^Z.' a0(After pressing the key, type the program name.) oDTo define the CTRL/R key to prompt for the name of a BLISS routine,4which it will then find, use the following commmand: D? DEFINE KEY CONTROL R AS "BR ADV 'ROUTINE ?'Routine name: ''."u3 VT529 +-------+-------+-------+-------+9This diagram shows | | | | | 9the numbers of the | 20 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 9keypad keys on VT52 | | | | |R9terminals for use in +-------+-------+-------+-------+ 9the DEFINE KEY | | | | |e9command. | 7 | 8 | 9 | 13 |o9 | | | | |I9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | | 9 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 14 | 9 | | | | | 9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | | 9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 15 | 9 | | | | | 9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | 9 | 0 | 16 | 21 | 9 | | | | 9 +---------------+-------+-------+-3 VT100-I+-------+-------+-------+-------+ +-------+-------+-------+-------+ I| | | | | | | | | | I| 12 | 13 | 15 | 14 | | 20 | 10 | 11 | 17 | I| | | | | | | | | | I+-------+-------+-------+-------+ +-------+-------+-------+-------+ I | | | | | IThe diagram to the right shows the | 7 | 8 | 9 | 18 |-Inumbers of the keypad keys on VT100 | | | | | Iterminals for use in the DEFINE KEY +-------+-------+-------+-------+ Icommand. Above are the numbers for | | | | | Ithe arrow keys, for terminals that | 4 | 5 | 6 | 19 |-Ido not have function keys. | | | | | I +-------+-------+-------+-------+eI | | | | |yI | 1 | 2 | 3 | | I | | | | |rI 002TADATADATADATADATADATA +-------+-------+-------+ 21 |oI | | | |iI | 0 | 16 | | I | | | | I +---------------+-------+-------+ 3 FUNCTION-KEYS I +--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+--+--+--+--+--+ I |17|18|19|20|21| |23|24|25|26| |28| 29 | |31|32|33|34| I +--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+--+--+--+--+--+  :The diagram above and right shows the numbers +--+--+--+:of the function keys. When used with the | 1| 2| 3|:DEFINE KEY command these numbers must be +--+--+--+:preceeded by the word FUNCTION. | 4| 5| 6|: +--+--+--+7The diagram to the right shows how the arrow +--+7keys are numbered on terminals which have |12||:function keys. These keys do not use the word +--+--+--+:FUNCTION when defined using the DEFINE KEY |15|13|14|:command. +--+--+--+ e2 MACROtFThe DEFINE MACRO (abbreviated DEF M) command defines a line mode macrocommand. rFormat: DEFINE MACRO nameN EThe name is the name of the text buffer in which the macro is stored. GThe macro itself is a series of EDT line mode commands. You invoke thee=macro by giving its name in response to the line mode prompt.n1 DELETELThe DELETE (abbreviated D) command deletes the lines specified by the range. KFormat: DELETE [range] [/QUERY]  AIf you do not specify the range, the default is the current line.M2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY aIWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with a4question mark (?) to verify each line to be deleted. oResponses are: a Y Yes, delete this linei# N No, do not delete this lineaC Q Quit, do not delete any of the remaining lines in the rangeE- A All, delete all the rest of the linese1 EXITEThe EXIT (abbreviated EX) command terminates all action in the editoru<and saves a copy of the MAIN text buffer in the output file. Q8Format: EXIT [file-spec] [/SEQUENCE:[init:incr]] [/SAVE] AIf you omit the file specification, the output file name from the Gcommand line that invoked EDT is used. If no output file name has beensHspecified, and if /READ_ONLY and /NOOUTPUT have not been specified, thenthe input file name is used.2 /SAVEEAWhen you use the /SAVE qualifier, the journal file is saved. The(Ejournal file is called 'name.JOU', where name is the output file name Ffrom the command line. For information about the journal facility, see HELP JOURNAL.E 2 /SEQUENCErFormat: /SEQUENCE[:init:incr]  eFWhen you use the /SEQUENCE option, the output file is in VFC (variableGwith fixed control) format, and line numbers are written in the control_Dfield. The values of both 'init' and 'incr' must be less than 65536. uIIf you set init and incr, the file is renumbered starting with the number.Dyou choose for init, and the lines are incremented by the number youJchoose for incr. Otherwise, the line numbers assigned by EDT are written.EThese line numbers are truncated to integers and taken modulo 100000,with a maximum value of 65535.1 FILLDThe FILL (abbreviated FIL) command reformats a block of text so thatHthere are as many full words on a line as possible without exceeding the right margin.e tFormat: FILL [range] tFThe lines in the range must be contiguous. If you omit the range, theselect range is assumed. aGThe right margin can be set by the SET WRAP command. If the margin hasu8not been set, the default is the terminal width minus 1.1 FINDDThe FIND (abbreviated F) command places the cursor at the first linespecified by range.( rFormat: FIND [range] rGThe located line is not displayed. To find and display a line, use theo TYPE command.e eHEx: F=X. Retur00o}ns EDT to buffer X, to the line EDT was on when you lastH left buffer X. Note the dot (.) after the buffer name. ThisG specifies the line that EDT was on when you last left bufferr X.e 1 INCLUDE EThe INCLUDE (abbreviated INC) command copies external files into text)buffers. e!Format: INCLUDE file-spec [range]c eEThe specified file is copied to the location before the first line ofpHthe range. Note that range specifies the position to which the file willEbe copied; it does not restrict the portion of the file which will be Cincluded. To include part of a file, first INCLUDE the file into a Cbuffer; then COPY the desired portion of the included text into therappropriate buffer.N1 INSERT?The INSERT (abbreviated I) command inserts new text into a textxbuffer.r +Format: INSERT [range] ;line to be insertedh Or: INSERT [range] text to be inserted ^Z EThe new text is inserted above the first line specified by range. Ifl<you omit range, new text is inserted above the current line. iHIf you choose the first form of the INSERT command, the text on the lineHfollowing the semicolon is inserted and the editor does not enter insertFmode. This is the only form of the INSERT command that should be used#in a startup command file or macro. oGIf you choose the second form, EDT enters insert mode. In insert mode, Fyou can enter as many lines of text as you wish, terminating each line>by pressing return. Terminate insert mode by pressing CTRL/Z. CThe line following the last line inserted becomes the current line. 1 JOURNALcDEDT saves all input from the terminal during an editing session in aDfile called the journal file. The journal file is deleted when youHexit the editor with an EXIT or QUIT command (without the /SAVE option).?If the editor is left involuntarily, the journal file is saved.s EThe journal file can be used to redo all the operations of an editingcEsession. The edited file is thereby recreated. Type the same commandFline used previously with the addition of the /RECOVER qualifier. AllDinput files used in the original session must be available under the(same names as when they were first read. EUnless explicitly overridden by the /JOURNAL qualifier on the commandUBline, the journal file will have the same name as the output file,Eexcept that the file type will be JOU and the file will be written intthe current default directory.1 MOVE@The MOVE (abbreviated M) command moves text from one location to0another, deleting it from the original location. ,Format: MOVE [range-1] TO [range-2] [/QUERY] BThe lines specified by range-1 are moved to a location immediatelyFabove the first line specified by range-2. The lines are deleted fromGthe original location. If you omit either of the range specifications, Dthe current line is used. The first line of range-2 becomes the newDcurrent line. To move lines of text without deleting them from the(original location, see the COPY command.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY nGWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with 4a question mark (?) to verify each line to be moved. Responses are: e Y Yes, move this line." N No, do not move this line.A Q Quit, do not move any of the remaining lines in the rangep, A All, move all the rest of the lines.1 PRINTnAThe PRINT (abbreviated P) command creates a listing file with thewspecified file name. Format: PRINT file-spec [range]C EThe lines selected by range are written to a listing format file withaFpage headers. If the NUMBERS option is set (see SET NUMBERS), the EDTGline numbers will appear on the listing. If you omit range, the entirenGcurrent buffer is printed. Print does not alter the current line. UsetFPRINT only to create a listing. If you wish to create a file, use theWRITE command.1 QUITDThe QUIT command exits the editor without saving the contents of the MAIN buffer. Format: QUIT [/SAVE] rGUse the QUIT c002TADATADATADATADATADATAommand only if you have made no changes to the buffer youiFare editing or if you have decided you do not wish to save the changesByou have made. All edits will be discarded when you QUIT from theeditor.t2 /SAVErCThe SAVE qualifier specifies that the journal file should be saved.4Normally, the journal file is deleted when you QUIT.1 RANGEuERange specifications select the exact lines of text on which the lineuediting command will operate.A b:There are several general classes of range specifications: 9 1. Single line ranges specify a single line of text. M 2. Multiple line ranges specify blocks of text, such as an entire buffer D or all lines from the current line to the end of the buffer.L 3. Compound ranges combine single line ranges with operators to specify multiple lines of text.yL 4. Noncontiguous ranges specify multiple lines that are not necessarily adjacent to one another.2 ALLe<The ALL range further refines a general range specification. :Format: [range] ALL 'string' sEWhile range can be a single, multiple, or compound range, the commandoEbeing performed will only apply to those lines of text containing theuGgiven string. This string can be enclosed in single or double quotationgmarks. gFEx: TYPE ALL 'EDT' When ALL is used, the default for range isH WHOLE. This command will type all the linesG in the current buffer containing the stringe" 'EDT'. rF SUBS/A/B/50:100 ALL '1' Substitute B for A in all lines from 50 to; 100 which include the string 1.o2 ANDs.The AND range selects a group of single lines. *Format: range-1 AND range-2 AND range3 ...& Or: range-1 , range-2 , range3 ... CEach of the ranges must be a single line range. Each of the single lines is operated on.w @Ex: TYPE 4 AND 7 Lines 4 and 7 are displayed on the terminal B TYPE BEGIN,END-1 The first and last lines are displayed on the terminalu2 BEGINAEThe BEGIN range (abbreviated B) is a single line range that specifies the first line in the buffer. 2 BEFORE@The BEFORE range (abbreviated BEF) is a multiple line range thatAspecifies all the lines in the buffer preceding the current line. 2 BUFFEREThe BUFFER (abbreviated BU) specification may precede any other rangeFspecification and indicates that the range is to be applied to a namedbuffer.E GFormat: BUFFER name [range]i Or: =name [range]e FThe two forms are equivalent. Name is the name of the buffer in whichCthe text resides. If you leave out the range, the entire buffer is selected.2 DOTOEThe dot (.) is a single line range that refers to the current line of Etext. For many commands, dot is the default range. See the help textF/for a command if you are unsure of the default.  e'Ex: TYPE . Display the current line.t2 ENDnGThe END (abbreviated E) range specifies an imaginary line following theiClast line in the buffer. END does not specify the last line in thetCbuffer. The last line can be referred to by E-1 (that is, the lineh;preceding END). When the END line is typed, it looks like:. s[EOB]l2 FORrFThe FOR range is a multiple line range that selects a specified number*of lines starting at a specified location. Format: [range] FOR nr Or: [range] # ne x@The two forms are equivalent. Range is a single line range thatFspecifies the starting position, and n is an integer number. If range6is omitted, the current line is the starting position. rEEx: TYPE . FOR 5 Display 5 lines, starting with the current linen N8 TYPE #5 Equivalent to the previous example > TYPE BEGIN FOR 10 Display the first 10 lines in the buffer2 LASTHThe LAST (abbreviated L) range is a single line range that refers to theHline in the previous buffer which was the current line when you switchedto the current buffer.2 MINUS FThe minus sign (-) in ranges selects a00o} single line that is a specified(number of lines before a specified line. Format: [range] - [n]  iHRange is a single line range, and n is an integer. The line selected isDthe line that is n lines before the line specified by range. If you?omit range, the current line is used; if you omit n, 1 is used.) nGEx: TYPE 15 - 3 Display the third line before the line numbered 15.  c8 TYPE END -1 Display the last line in the buffer. e. TYPE - Display the previous line.2 NUMBERGA line number is a single line range that refers to the line having the?specified number. The line number may contain a decimal point.s 'Ex: TYPE 10 Display line number 10.t ' INSERT 65.3 Insert above line 65.3.a .HThe maximum allowable line number is 2814749767. A line number may have4up to five digits to the right of the decimal point. h?You can change the line number with the RESEQUENCE command. InnGaddition, the INSERT and INCLUDE commands will automatically change theUGnumbers of existing lines if necessary to make each line in a buffer to 1have a line number larger than the previous line.n dAWhen lines are read from the primary input file and that file has Fsequence numbers, the line number assigned is the sequence number fromDthe file, plus N*100000, where N is large enough to ensure that eachCline in the buffer has a line number larger than the previous line. 5File sequence numbers range in value from 0 to 65535.I 2 ORIGINALFormat: ORIGINAL n cFThe ORIGINAL (abbreviated O) range is no longer a feature of EDT. TheHkeyword ORIGINAL is ignored; the number specified is taken as an editing9line number. See HELP RANGE NUMBER for more information.a2 PLUSCThe plus sign selects, in ranges, a single line that is a specifiedh'number of lines after a specified line.n hFormat: [range] + [n]i iHRange is a single line range, and n is an integer. The line selected isHthe line that is n lines after the line specified by range. If you omit;range, the current line is used. If you omit n, 1 is used.t FEx: TYPE 15 + 3 Display the third line after the line numbered 15. : TYPE BEGIN +1 Display the second line in the buffer. a@ TYPE + Display the line following the current line. iC TYPE 'string'+2 Display the second line following the next line ( continaing 'string'.2 RESTFThe REST (abbreviated R) range is a multiple line range that refers to7the current line and all lines following in the buffer.c2 SELECTAThe SELECT range is a multiple line range that contains all linespHbetween the current line and the SELECT mark. The SELECT mark is set byCthe change mode SEL nokeypad command or the keypad SELECT function. 2 STRINGDA quoted string specifies a single line that contains the specifiedGstring. You can enclose the string in either single or double quotationBmarks (' or "). When you use a string as a range, EDT will searchEforward, starting with the current line, until it locates a line with Cthe specified string. If a minus sign (-) precedes the string, theisearch will be backward. eGEx: TYPE 'abc' Locate and display the first line forward that containse! the string 'abc'.u i9 TYPE -"abc" Same, except the search will be backward.t2 THRUGThe THRU range is a compound range that specifies all lines between twodsingle line ranges.k 'Format: range-1 THRU range-2 Or: range-1 : range-2h oFBoth forms are equivalent. Starting with range-1, EDT selects all the8lines up to and including the line specified by range-2. FEx: TYPE 15:30 Display all lines with numbers between 15 and 30. fB TYPE 'glorp':END Display all lines from the first line forward3 containing 'glorp' to the end. 2 WHOLEtAThe WHOLE (abbreviated W) range refers to the entire text buffer.e 1 REPLACEwHThe REPLACE (abbreviated R) command deletes the specified range of lines#and then places EDT in INSERT mode.v n'Format: REPLACE [range] ;text to ins002TADATADATADATADATADATAertl Or: REPLACE [range]l text to insert ^Z EWhen you do not specify a range, replace deletes the current line and.&inserts the new text at that location. sFIf you use the first form of the REPLACE command, EDT inserts the textCin the command line following the semicolon and the editor does notnEenter insert mode. This is the only form of the REPLACE command thate3should be used in startup command files and macros.  IGIf you use the second form, EDT enters insert mode. In insert mode youCGcan enter as many lines of text as you wish, terminating each line withfAa carriage return. You terminate insert mode by pressing CTRL/Z.e aCThe line following the last line inserted becomes the current line.d 1 RESEQUENCEFThe RESEQUENCE (abbreviated RES) command assigns new line numbers to arange of lines.e m0Format: RESEQUENCE [range] [/SEQUENCE:init:incr] aHThe specified range of lines must be contiguous. When you do not specifyFa range, all lines in the current buffer are resequenced. If the newEnumbers assigned would cause duplicate or nonsequential line numbers,aAEDT will either disallow the command or renumber lines beyond the specified range. sGNote that the total count of lines resequenced (which is displayed upon(?completion of the command), may differ from the number of lineslBoriginally specified in the range, due to the possibility of extra renumbering. 2 /SEQUENCEmCThe SEQUENCE (abbreviated /SEQ) qualifier specifies the sequence of Anumbers to be assigned. The init parameter specifies the initiald<number, and incr specifies the number by which the lines areEincremented. If you do not use the SEQUENCE qualifier, init and incr.both default to 1. a<The maximum allowable line number is 2814749767. If, duringEresequencing, a line number plus 'incr' would exceed this value, thatsEline and all remaining lines will be numbered 2814749767. You should Gcorrect this immediately by resequencing with a different 'init' and/ornsmaller 'incr'.o1 SETiGThe SET (abbreviated SE) command sets options that control other editoriHoperations. Once set, these options are in effect throughout the rest of5the edit session or until changed by the SET command. 2 AUTOREPEATHThe SET AUTOREPEAT (abbreviated SE AUTOREPEAT) command enables EDT's useDof the DECARM VT100 control sequence to prevent keypad, function andHarrow keys from repeating faster than EDT can update the screen. If youEdo not want EDT to manipulate the VT100's autorepeat feature, use SET @NOAUTOREPEAT (abbreviated SE NOAUTOREPEAT). On some VT100-classHterminals, SET AUTOREPEAT can cause the arrow keys to repeat at the rate>of 2 per second rather than the usual 30 per second. With SETHNOAUTOREPEAT the arrow keys repeat faster, but the screen is not updatedFfor each repeat of the arrow key, since EDT skips intermediate updatesif it gets behind. Format: SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT2 CASE)Format: SET CASE { UPPER | LOWER | NONE }  CUse the SET CASE (abbreviated SE CA) command on terminals which are(Hcapable of displaying uppercase characters only. SET CASE instructs EDTHto flag with a preceding apostrophe either the uppercase characters, theDlowercase characters, or neither. The default for SET CASE is NONE,&which means no characters are flagged. d+You can abbreviate the keywords as follows:  p CASE CA UPPER Ue LOWER L NONE N] 2 COMMAND&Format: SET COMMAND file-specification NEThe SET COMMAND (abbreviated SE COMMAND) command is used in a startuphDcommand file to specify the name of the next startup command file toFread. EDT provides a default file type of ".EDT". If the file is notBpresent this command does nothing; otherwise it causes the currentEcommand file to be abandoned and the new one to be read in its place.b 3 STARTUPeEWhen EDT starts up, it reads the installation default startup command Ffile. The name of the file is always EDTSYS. The default name varies$depending on the system, as follows: N 00o} Default Name$ -----------------#VAX/VMS SYS$LIBRARY:.EDT RSX-11M & M-PLUS LB:[1,2].EDT RSTS/E LB:.EDT AWhen opening the file, EDT combines the name and the default nameGtogether into a complete file specification. On VAX/VMS, therefore, if Ethe logical name EDTSYS is defined, EDT will read from it rather than from SYS$LIBRARY:EDTSYS.EDT. fEThe installation default startup command file should have SET COMMAND,FEDTINI at its end, so that the user's initialization file will be readFafter the installation default initialization file. If EDTSYS is notHfound, EDT will try again using the name EDTINI, so there is no need forBan installation-default initialization file that just contains SETCOMMAND EDTINI.o2 CURSORFormat: SET CURSOR top:bottoma aEThe SET CURSOR (abbreviated SE CU) command, used with screen editing,ABsets the limits within which the cursor is allowed to move withoutscrolling the screen. IDTop and bottom are the line numbers at the top of the screen and theHbottom of the screen. The line numbers must be in the range of 0 to 21,Gwith 0 specifying the top of the screen and 21 the bottom. The defaultiGsetting is 7:14, allowing the cursor to move within the middle third ofDGthe screen. If SET LINES is used to decrease the number of lines shownrEon the screen, the top and bottom of the cursor limits must be withinh"the number of lines on the screen.2 ENTITY1Format: SET ENTITY entity-type 'delimiter string'e n*Where entity-type is one of the following: t WORD (abbreviated W)r SENTENCE (abbreviated S),! PAGE (abbreviated PAG)s! PARAGRAPH (abbreviated PAR)l FThe SET ENTITY (abbreviated SE EN) command sets the delimiters for theGuser-defined change mode entities. For the WORD and SENTENCE entities,rGthe delimiter string is a set of single character delimiters. For PAGEDand PARAGRAPH, the delimiter is a character string that delimits theCentity. See HELP CHANGE ENTITIES for explanations of the entities.w2 FNFtFormat: SET [NO]FNFb iDThe SET FNF option controls whether or not an informative message isFdisplayed when you attempt to edit a non-existing file. NOFNF opens anew file but gives no message.2 HELP%Format: SET HELP [file-specification]t .FThe SET HELP (abbreviated SE H) option lets you define which help fileHwill be accessed when you either give the HELP command or press the HELPCkey in keypad mode. The default device and directory are always asEGlisted below unless overriden by an explicit device and directory. SEThEHELP without a file specification returns you to the original defaultp help file. aAThe following are default specifications for the various systems:v n5 File specification Name Typen5 ------------------ ---- ---- 5VAX/VMS SYS$HELP: .HLB EDTHELP .HLBr5RSX-11M & M-PLUS LB:[1,2] .HLP EDTHELP .HLP 5RSTS/E LB: .HLP EDTHEL .HLP t2 KEYPADFormat: SET [NO]KEYPAD cDThe SET KEYPAD (abbreviated SE K) option controls whether or not theHediting keypad is to be used when you are in CHANGE mode. KEYPAD is setBby default for VT100 and VT52 terminals, which means the alternateAkeypad is used to enter change mode commands. For terminals with-Afunction keys, the function keys can also be used in KEYPAD mode.E2 LINESrFThe SET LINES (abbreviated SE L) command controls the number of screenElines used in either of the screen versions of change mode. Use this]Coption to reduce the time it takes to refresh the screen image when editing on slow terminals. oFormat: SET LINES n  CGwhere n is the number of lines to use. n must be between 1 and 22. ByhHdefault, n is set to 22 lines. If the cursor limits are larger than n-1)they are reduced to n-1. See SET CURSOR. 2 MODEHThe SET MODE (abbreviated SE M) command determines which mode of editingAshould be entered after all initial processing is complete. This 3comm00 2TADATADATADATADATADATAand is useful only in the startup command file.  u"Format: SET MODE { LINE | CHANGE } e?By default, EDT enters line mode when the startup processing is Hcomplete. Use SET MODE CHANGE in your startup command file to cause EDT9to enter change mode when startup processing is complete.s 2 NUMBERS Format: SET [NO]NUMBERSd HThe SET NUMBERS (abbreviated SE NU) command controls the display of lineHnumbers on the terminal. Numbers are set on by default. If you want to9suppress numbers, use SET NONUMBERS (abbreviated SE NON).r 2 PARAGRAPHiFormat: SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPSN HThe SET PARAGRAPH (abbreviated SE PARA) command specifies a paragraph asEthe text between two delimiters and including any adjacent delimitersu2(WPS), or the text between two delimiters (NOWPS).2 PROMPT'Format: SET PROMPT prompt-type 'string'd EWhere prompt-type is either LINE, KEYPAD, NOKEYPAD, HCCHANGE, INSERT,iINSERTN, or QUERY. iGThe SET PROMPT command allows redefinition of the prompt string that issEdisplayed in line mode, in keypad mode, in nokeypad mode, in hardcopyREchange mode, in line mode when inserting, in line mode when insertingf.with NONUMBERS, and with the /QUERY qualifier. EEDT will become confused if the new string for the keypad or nokeypaddDprompt causes a net motion of the cursor. If a pair is notEincluded in the new string for any prompt which has it in the defaultEEprompt, these characters will be inserted at the beginning of the newnstring.r2 QUIETnDThe SET QUIET (abbreviated SE Q) command controls whether or not the5bell will sound when an error is made in change mode.  lFormat: SET [NO]QUIETf iAThe quiet option is off (meaning the bell will sound) by default.o2 REPEATGThe SET REPEAT (abbreviated SE REP) command enables you to use the GOLD Dkey followed by digits to represent a count. If you do not want theBability to use counts, use SET NOREPEAT (abbreviated SE NOREP). ACwarning bell sounds if you attempt to use counts with NOREPEAT set.  Format: SET [NO]REPEAT mBy default, REPEAT is enabled.2 SCREENFThe SET SCREEN (abbreviated SE SC) command specifies the width of your terminal.  eFormat: SET SCREEN w tFwhere w is the width of the screen line. By default, the screen widthCis set to the terminal's width, as reported to EDT by the operatingtHsystem. On VT100-type terminals you can set the width to 80 or 132, andGEDT will adjust the terminal appropriately. On other CRT terminals youtCshould only use the terminal's fixed width: 80 for VT52s and 84 foryVK100s. 2 SEARCHCThe SET SEARCH (abbreviated SE SE) command controls several optionsirelated to string searching. ,Format: SET SEARCH { GENERAL | EXACT | WPS |, CASE INSENSITIVE | CI |3 DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE | DI } " { [UN]BOUNDED }" { BEGIN | END } 3 GENERAL EThe GENERAL option will cause the case of letters and the presence orRFabsence of diacritical marks to be ignored in search strings. GENERALis the default.K3 EXACT HThe EXACT option will require all characters to match exactly, includingDthe case of letters and the presence of diacritical marks, in searchstrings.3 WPS GThe WPS option will cause a case-independent string match for lowercaseLFletters in the search string, and a case-dependent match for uppercaseletters in the search string. 3 CIDThe CI option will cause the case of letters to be ignored in search=strings, but not the presence of diacritical marks. CI is anN"abbreviation for CASE INSENSITIVE.3 DIFThe DI option will cause diacritical marks on letters to be ignored inHstring searches, but not the case of the letters. DI is an abbreviationfor DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE. 3 BOUNDEDiGThe BOUNDED (abbreviated BO) option will cause the search to be bounded Fby a page delimiter. By default, the search is unbounded, which meansHthat the entire buffer will be searched. This option has effect only in change mode. tHThe UNBOUNDED (abbreviated U) option00(o} causes the search not to be bounded?by a page delimiter, which means that the entire buffer will berFsearched. This is the default. This option has effect only in changemode. 3 BEGINiDThe BEGIN (abbreviated B) option causes the cursor to be left at theEbeginning of the search string when it is found. This is the default. +This option has effect only in change mode.a3 ENDtFThe END (abbreviated E) option causes the cursor to be left at the endHof the search string when it is found. By default, the cursor is left at:the beginning. This option has effect only in change mode. 2 SUMMARY GThe SET [NO]SUMMARY command controls whether or not summary information Gabout a file written with the WRITE or EXIT commands will be typed out.sFThe default is SUMMARY, which means that summary information is typed. Format: SET [NO]SUMMARYt 2 TABeBThe SET TAB (abbreviated SE TA) command enables the structured tab&feature and sets the logical tab size. eFormat: SET [NO]TAB ni o7where n is the number of columns in a logical tab stop.i pFWith the structured tab feature, EDT keeps a counter of the tab level,Fwhich is set to 1 when the SET TAB command is issued. When you use theEtab key in change mode at the beginning of a line, EDT inserts enoughMGtabs and spaces to move the cursor to the column defined by the level n]Ktimes the tab size. Change mode nokeypad commands can alter the tab level.u2The structured tab feature is disabled by default. CThe tab size set by the tab command is also used by the TABS ADJUSTicommand. 2 TERMINAL,Format: SET TERMINAL { HCPY | VT100 | VT52 }* { SCROLL | NOSCROLL }& { EDIT | NOEDIT }. { EIGHTBIT | NOEIGHTBIT } GThe SET TERMINAL (abbreviated SE TE) command identifies to EDT the type Gof terminal you are using. Normally, EDT will set the terminal type by Fasking the operating system what type it is. If it does not appear toEhave set the type correctly, you can use the SHOW TERMINAL command to Dsee what EDT thinks your terminal is and the SET TERMINAL command toGcorrect it if necessary. If your terminal is not a VT100 or a VT52, it !should be set to HCPY (hardcopy). 3 HCPYEHCPY stands for hardcopy. EDT considers a terminal hardcopy if it iscFnot a VT100 or a VT52. On such terminals change mode does not use theFscreen as a window onto your buffer, but instead shows you the currentHline with the cursor position indicated. You type NOKEYPAD commands andBEDT will keep you informed by printing the current line after eachcommand.3 VT100RCThe VT100 is a family of terminals, all based on the original VT100 Cterminal. This class of terminals includes the VT101, VT102, VT125,YVT131 and VT132.3 VT52FThe VT52 terminal is the predecessor of the VT100 family. It does not5have reverse video, and has fewer keys in its keypad.i3 SCROLLFThis option indicates that your terminal has scrolling regions and EDT<may use them. This is the default for most VT100 terminals. 3 NOSCROLLGThis option indicates that either your terminal does not have scrolling Aregions or EDT should not use them. This is the default for VT52l terminals.3 EDITHThis option indicates that your terminal has the screen editing featuresHof the VT102. These are IL (insert line), DL (delete line), ICM (insert,character mode) and DCH (delete characters).3 NOEDITAThis option indicates that your terminal does not have the screendediting features of the VT102. 3 EIGHTBITGThis option indicates that your terminal contains the DEC MultinationalrFCharacter Set, which extends ASCII to include letters with diacritical*marks and other characters used in Europe. 3 NOEIGHTBITAThis option indicates that your terminal does not contain the DECHMultinational character set. On such a terminal characters which cannot-be displayed directly are displayed using <>. 2 TEXT$Format: SET TEXT text-type 'string' d"Text-type is one of the following: r PAGE END  HAThe SET TEXT command allows you 0002TADATADATADATADATADATAto define the displayed string totGindicate a formfeed character (SET TEXT PAGE), and the displayed stringaEto indicate the end of the buffer (SET TEXT END). The string can nots%contain control or escape characters.e 2 TRUNCATEEThe SET TRUNCATE (abbreviated SE TR) command controls the handling of long lines in change mode. cFormat: SET [NO]TRUNCATE @By default, truncate mode is set, which means long lines will beGtruncated on the display (the actual text is not altered). If you turnwHoff truncate mode by using SET NOTRUNCATE, long lines will be wrapped toAas many screen lines as are necessary to display the entire line.e2 VERIFYAThe SET VERIFY (abbreviated SE V) command controls the listing ofcBcommands that are executed from the startup command file or from amacro. aFormat: SET [NO]VERIFY hFVerify is off by default, which means the lines are not typed. If you9turn it on, each command line is typed as it is executed.s2 WORDFormat: SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER yGThe SET WORD (abbreviated SE W) command enables you to specify that therCword delimiters be considered words by themselves (NODELIMITER), or Hconsidered as part of the word they delimit (DELIMITER). The default is DELIMITER. m2 WRAPFormat: SET [NO]WRAP n rAThe SET WRAP (abbreviated SE W) command enables word wrapping andCspecifies the right margin. Word wrapping is a feature of EDT thatuBautomatically insert carriage returns when the text you are typingDexceeds the right margin. Word wrapping is in effect in change mode4only and only if you have used the SET WRAP command. EThe SET WRAP command also sets the right margin for the nokeypad modetFILL commmand. eCSET NOWRAP (abbreviated SE NOW) disables the word wrapping feature.E1 SHOWFormat: SHOW parameter rFThe SHOW (abbreviated SH) command displays selected information on theGcurrent state of the editor. Parameter is one of the additional topicsi listed below.n 2 AUTOREPEATFormat: SHOW AUTOREPEATi >The SHOW AUTOREPEAT command displays whether EDT is allowed toFmanipulate the Autorepeat feature of VT100-type terminals or not. See$SET AUTOREPEAT for more information.2 BUFFERFormat: SHOW BUFFER  RHThe SHOW BUFFER (abbreviated SH BU) command lists the buffers being usedFduring the edit session, including the number of lines of text in eachFbuffer. The current buffer is marked by an equal sign (=) before theGname. If an asterisk follows the number of lines, it indicates that anRFinput file is connected to the buffer and that there are more lines to<be read from the file. Thus, the line count is not accurate.2 CASEFormat: SHOW CASET rHThe SHOW CASE (abbreviated SH CA) command shows the current case setting(upper, lower, or none). 2 COMMANDuFormat: SHOW COMMAND tGThe SHOW COMMAND (abbreviated SH COMMAND) command shows the name of theh>last specified startup command file. For more information seeHELP SET COMMAND. 2 CURSORFormat: SHOW CURSOR  iHThe SHOW CURSOR (abbreviated SH CU) command shows the current setting of*the cursor region. EDT will respond with: lt:bo Fwhere t and b are integer numbers indicating the top and bottom of theDcursor region. See HELP SET CURSOR for an explanation of the cursorregion. 2 ENTITYFormat: SHOW ENTITY entity-typeW M*where entity-type is one of the following:  WORD (abbreviated W)a SENTENCE (abbreviated S)f PAGE (abbreviated PAG) PARAGRAPH (abbreviated PAR)i h@The SHOW ENTITY (abbreviated SH EN) command displays the current*delimiter string for the specified entity.2 FILESFormat: SHOW FILES CThe SHOW FILES (abbreviated SH FI) command displays the name of theoHinput and output files which were specified in the EDT command line. IfFno output file was specified, then the input file name is also used asFthe output file name. If /NOOUTPUT or /READ_ONLY was specified in theEcommand line, then this will be indicated in place of the output filePname.h2 FNFHFormat: SHOW FNF dCThe SHOW FNF comma008o}nd displays whether the file not found message isienabled or disabled.2 HELPFormat: SHOW HELP WCThe SHOW HELP (abbreviated SH H) command shows the currently activenEdefault help file specification and help file name. Use the SET HELPt'command to redefine the help file name.l2 KEYiGThe SHOW KEY (abbreviated SH K) command displays the current definitionc%of a keypad, function or control key.i bFormat: SHOW KEY key-name  pGWhere key-name is one of the following: (alternatives separated by "|")l 9[GOLD] number |[GOLD] CONTROL char |[GOLD] CONTROL "char".7[GOLD] CONTROL 'char' |GOLD character |GOLD "character"t8GOLD 'character' |[GOLD] DELETE |[GOLD] FUNCTION number l@Number refers to keypad and function keys and CONTROL char namesEspecific control keys Char is limited to @, A to Z, [, \, ], ^ and _, ?but the case of letters is ignored. DELETE refers to the deleterEcharacter, which is not a control character. Character refers to anynFkeyboard key except 0-9, though - is not useful. Upper and lower caseDletters are considered equivalent. Characters !, %, ', and " must beenclosed in quotation marks. GFor the meaning of the string printed by the SHOW KEY command, see HELPr DEFINE KEY.n2 KEYPADFormat: SHOW KEYPADr mGThe SHOW KEYPAD (abbreviated SH KEYP) command shows the current setting Cfor the option of using keypad editing when you are in change mode.hHKEYPAD is the default for VT100 and VT52 terminals, which means that theGalternate keypad is used to enter change mode commands. The option canr/be changed by using the SET [NO]KEYPAD command.a2 LINES Format: SHOW LINES oEThe SHOW LINES (abbreviated SH L) command shows the current number ofmDscreen lines displayed in change mode. Use the SET LINES command tomodify this setting.2 MODEFormat: SHOW MODEh uEThe SHOW MODE (abbreviated SH M) command shows the current setting ofcHthe default editing mode. It indicates the editing mode that is enteredDafter all startup processing. By default, EDT enters line mode whenDstartup processing is complete. Use SET MODE CHANGE in your startupDcommand file to cause EDT to enter change mode at the end of startup processing. 2 NUMBERSbFormat: SHOW NUMBERS lFThe SHOW NUMBERS (abbreviated SH NU) command shows the current settingGfor the option of displaying line numbers on the terminal. Numbers aredFdisplayed by default. Use SET NONUMBERS to suppress the line numbers. 2 PARAGRAPHoFormat: SHOW PARAGRAPH lBThe SHOW PARAGRAPH (abbreviated SH PARA) command shows the currentEsetting for delimiting paragraphs. By default a new paragraph begins Gafter two successive linefeeds. Use SET PARAGRAPH WPS to indicate that Da new paragraph begins at the first non-linefeed character after twosuccessive linefeeds.e2 PROMPTFormat: SHOW PROMPT prompt-typei lFWhere prompt-type is one of: LINE, KEYPAD, NOKEYPAD, HCCHANGE, INSERT,INSERTN, or QUERY. s@The SHOW PROMPT command shows the current string to be used whenGprompting in line mode, in keypad change mode, in nokeypad change mode,oGin hardcopy change mode, in line mode when inserting, in line mode whenuBinserting with NONUMBERS, and in response to /QUERY, respectively.2 QUIET Format: SHOW QUIET -FThe SHOW QUIET (abbreviated SH Q) command shows the current setting ofHthe option that controls whether or not the bell sounds when you make anHerror in change mode. You can change this option with the SET [NO]QUIETcommand.2 REPEATFormat: SHOW REPEATn rHThe SHOW REPEAT (abbreviated SH REP) command shows whether or not countsHare allowed. The default is to allow counts. To disable counts use SET NOREPEAT.h2 SCREENFormat: SHOW SCREEN/ REThe SHOW SCREEN (abbreviated SH SC) command shows the current settingr.for the maximum length of a line EDT displays.2 SEARCHFormat: SHOW SEARCHe rDThe SHOW SEARCH (abbreviated SH SE) command shows the current searchDparameters. See HELP SET SEARCH for a description of search options. 2 SUMMARYPFormat: SHOW SUMMARY DThe SHOW S00@2TADATADATADATADATADATAUMMARY command shows whether the file summary on WRITE andEXIT is enabled or disabled.2 TAB Format: SHOW TAB TGThe SHOW TAB (abbreviated SH TA) command shows the current settings foriDthe structured tab feature. If structured tabs are enabled, the tab)size and indentation level are displayed.  WFFor additional information on the structured tab feature, see HELP SETTAB and HELP TAB.e 2 TERMINALFormat: SHOW TERMINALi oGThe SHOW TERMINAL (abbreviated SH TE) command shows your terminal type:AHVT100, VT52 or Hardcopy. It also shows whether or not your terminal hasEscrolling regions, eight-bit graphics and the advanced screen editingT1features. See SET TERMINAL for more information.u2 TEXTFormat: SHOW TEXT text-typeb r(where text-type is one of the following: ENDd PAGE WHThe SHOW TEXT command shows the current string to be used for displayingformfeeds or the end of buffer.o 2 TRUNCATEFormat: SHOW TRUNCATET IGThe SHOW TRUNCATE (abbreviated SH TR) command shows the current settingrGof the option for displaying long lines in change mode. The default isiATRUNCATE, which means that lines longer than the screen width are Gtruncated on the display (the actual text is not altered). If you turntHoff this option by entering SET NOTRUNCATE, long lines are wrapped to as@many screen lines as are necessary to display the entire screen.2 VERIFYFormat: SHOW VERIFYo uBThe SHOW VERIFY (abbreviated SH VERI) command displays the currentAsetting of the option to list commands that are executed from the Gstartup command file or a macro. By default, verify is off, which meanscFthat the lines are not typed. If you turn it on, each such command istyped as it is executed. 2 VERSIONdFormat: SHOW VERSION sHThe SHOW VERSION (abbreviated SH VE) command displays the version numberFand copyright statement of EDT. You should write the full text of theCversion number on any EDT SPR. The copyright statement appears asieither c: COPYRIGHT (C) DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION 1980, 1983 dor h8 COPYRIGHT DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION 1980, 1983 f@the latter form is used on terminals that have the internationalcopyright symbol.s2 WORDFormat: SHOW WORD EGThe SHOW WORD (abbreviated SH WO) command shows the current setting form@the handling of word delimiters. The default is to consider allEdelimiters with the exception of a space a word. To disable this use SET WORD NODELIMITER.t2 WRAPFormat: SHOW WRAP  OEThe SHOW WRAP (abbreviated SH W) command shows the current setting ofO#the right margin for word wrapping.O 9EWord wrapping is a feature of EDT that automatically inserts carriageaHreturns when the text you are typing exceeds the right margin. The sameGmargin is used for the nokeypad mode FILL command. Word wrapping is inoBeffect in change mode only and only, if you have used the SET WRAPcommand. 1 SUBSTITUTEBThe SUBSTITUTE (abbreviated S) command replaces occurrences of one)string of characters with another string.t SMFormat: SUBSTITUTE/string-1/string-2/ [range] [/BRIEF[:n]] [/QUERY] [/NOTYPE]O 9HAny nonalphanumeric character except % can be used as string delimiters. uHAll occurrences of string-1 within the specified range are replaced withBstring-2. If you do not specify range, a single occurrence in the@current line is substituted. The line in which the substitution*occurred is typed after each substitution. 2 /BRIEF[:n]EWhen you select the /BRIEF (abbreviated /BR) option, only the first n Hcharacters of the line are displayed. If you omit n, the default is 10. 2 /NOTYPEO>When you specify /NOTYPE (abbreviated /NOT) the lines in which%substitutions occurred are not typed.e2 NEXTHThe SUBSTITUTE NEXT (abbreviated N) command replaces the next occurrenceof string-1 with string-2. r/Format: [SUBSTITUTE] NEXT [/string-1/string-2/]i iGThe search for string-1 is made forward from the current location. WhenBFa substitution is made, the line where the substitution occurs becomesEthe current line. 00HN} When the optional strings are omitted, the stringsa@used in the last SUBSTITUTE or SUBSTITUTE NEXT command are used.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY uGWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you withN0a question mark (?) to verify each substitution. iResponses are: o! Y Yes, do the substitution.s' N No, do not do the substitution.s$ Q Quit, terminate the command.< A All, do the rest of the substitutions without query.1 TABuCThe TAB ADJUST (abbreviated TA A) command shifts each of a range of .lines a specified number of logical tab stops. T Format: TAB ADJUST [-] n [range] Fwhere n is the number of tab stops to shift. You must use the SET TABGcommand to set the logical tab size in order for this command to work.iDIf you omit range, the select range is assumed. If a minus sign (-)Hprecedes the count n, the text shifts to the left. Otherwise, it shifts to the right.e1 TYPEFThe TYPE (abbreviated T) command displays the specified range of lineson the terminal. )Format: TYPE [range] [/BRIEF[:n]] [/STAY]  i?The first line in the specified range becomes the current line.  tEIf the range specification starts with a nonalphabetic character, thes'keyword TYPE may be omitted completely. 2 /BRIEFFormat: /BRIEF[:n] aEWhen you select the /BRIEF (abbreviated /BR) option, only the first nuBcharacters of the line are displayed. If you omit n, the defaultis 10.2 /STAY Format: /STAYe )GWhen you select the /STAY (abbreviated /ST) option, the cursor positionmEis not changed by the TYPE command. This enables you to look at textfBelsewhere in the buffer (or in another buffer) without losing your position.h1 WRITEhHThe WRITE (abbreviated WR) command creates a file from a specified range of lines.B F7Format: WRITE file-spec [range] [/SEQUENCE[:init:incr]]t ,FWhen you specify a range, the text contained in that range becomes theGfile. When you do not specify a range, the contents of the current text Hbuffer becomes the new file. The cursor position is not affected by theWRITE command. 2 /SEQUENCE Format: /SEQUENCE[:init:incr]  tFWhen you use the /SEQUENCE option, the output file is in VFC (variableGwith fixed control) format, and line numbers are written in the controlnDfield. The values of both 'init' and 'incr' must be less than 65536. ]IIf you set init and incr, the file is renumbered starting with the numbertDyou choose for init, and the lines are incremented by the number youJchoose for incr. Otherwise, the line numbers assigned by EDT are written.EThese line numbers are truncated to integers and taken modulo 100000,with a maximum value of 65535.L The RSX error logging system consists of four tasks: ELI, ERRLOG, RPT, and L CFL. All command descriptions in these help files use MCR syntax. If your I system's Command Line Interpreter (CLI) is DCL, you may wish to use DCL K commands to operate error logging. For help with DCL commands, type HELP.H The Error Log Interface (ELI) task controls the operation of the error F logging task (ERRLOG). ELI turns error logging on and off, changes H error limits, and names error log files and backup files. ERRLOG also @ provides a warning whenever one of the error limits is reached. E The Report Generator task (RPT) produces error log reports based on % information in control file modules. I The Control File Language (CFL) compiler compiles the error log control  file modules used by RPT. A Type HELP ERROR_LOG ELI for more information about ELI commands.F Type HELP ERROR_LOG WARNINGS for more information about error limits.@ Type HELP ERROR_LOG CFL for information about the CFL c00P2TADATADATADATADATADATAommands.D Type HELP ERROR_LOG RPT for more information about the RPT commands! that generate error log reports. 2 CFL H The CFL compiler compiles error log control file modules. CFL is used K primarily to generate new control file modules or to patch existing ones. E Since CFL does not produce object code, CFL binary output cannot be K patched with the Task/File Patch Program (ZAP) or the Object Module Patch I Utility (PAT). Patches must be made by applying SLP corrections to the K source file and recompiling the module. CFL can be used from MCR or with  the DCL MCR command. Syntax: B [binary_file][,list_file][,symbol_file,]=input_file[,symbol_file] ( The file type defaults are as follows:  7 Binary file: CNF Input file : LST/ List file : ICF Symbol file: SYM 2 ELI O The Error Log Interface task (ELI) controls the error logging task (ERRLOG).  J To install the ERRLOG task, enter the following command from a privileged terminal: >INS $ERL G To invoke ELI after it is installed, issue the following command from  any terminal: >ELI M If ELI is not installed, you can invoke it from a privileged terminal using  the following command: >INS $ELI3 Your terminal will display the following prompt:  ELI>A The following table lists the ELI switches and their functions: * ELI Switch Function 4 /AP Appends a log file8 /HL Sets hard error limits: /[-]LIM Turns limiting on or off3 /LOG Turns logging on 3 /-LOG Turns logging off= /RE Resets QIO and error counts3 /SH Shows information8 /SL Sets soft error limits> /SW Switches logging to new file H For information on a particular switch, type HELP ERROR_LOG ELI switch. 3 APPEND  filespec/AP[/DE] E The ELI /AP switch appends the specified log file to the end of the F current log file. Logging must be active for the /AP switch to work. K The /DELETE subswitch causes the Error Logger to delete the specified fileD after it appends the file to the end of the current error log file.3 HL  ddnn:[...:]/HL:n[/SL:n]K The ELI /HL (Hard Limit) switch sets limits for the number of hard errors G that error logging records on the device specified. You can set hard J errors for more than one device in the same command line, as long as the J limits are the same. The value for n can be 0 to 255. The default hard  error limit is five.F Use the /SL (Soft limit) switch with the /HL switch to set both hard H and soft errors for the device or devices specified. The default soft  error limit is eight. For example:7 ddnn:[...:]/HL:n Sets only hard limitsA ddnn:[...:]/HL:n/SL:n Sets hard and soft limits3 LIM#NOLIM3 NOLIM /[-]LIMJ The ELI /LIM and /-LIM (/NOLIM) switches start and stop the use of error H limits. These limits are set by default for all devices on the system L when you enable error logging. Use the /HL and /SL switches to set limits  for individual devices.I The /-LIM switch inhibits the incrementing of hard and soft error countsL that are displayed by the ELI /SH switch and in the RMD "I" page. To checkH the number of errors that occur when limiting is off, you must generate an RPT report.3 LOG [filespec]/LOG [/subswitch[es]] /[-]LIM[IT] /NV# /TY[PE]:argument[s], The ELI /LOG switch begins error logging. H The /LIM subswitch turns on error limiting. This is the default ERRLOGD operation. The /-LIM (/NOLIM) subswitch turns off error limiting. I The New Version (/NV) subswitch c00XN}auses the Error Logger to create a new K version of the error log file (either the file you specify in the command F line or the default error log file, LB:[1,6]LOG.ERR). This subswitch K overrides the default operation in which the /LOG switch appends data to + the current version of the error log file. L The /TYPE subswitch selects error log packets based on their packet type. N The packets included in the report are determined by the following arguments:; A[LL] PE[RIPHERAL] 4 C[ONTROL] PR[OCESSOR]1 E[RROR] SY[STEM] M[EMORY]I The A argument selects all error log command packets in the error log ' file. This is the default argument.K The C argument selects error log command packets that control the Error  Log Interface (ELI) task.E The E argument selects error log packets from system peripherals,  the processor, and memory.F The M argument selects error log packets from events that occur in ) memory (such as memory parity errors).I The PE argument selects error log packets from all peripheral devices F that support error logging. This argument does not display system > information (such as mounts and dismounts) for the devices.G The PR argument selects error log packets from events that occur in ' the CPU, such as unknown interrupts.G The SY argument selects error log packets from events that occur on K the system but are not specifically tied to errors on a single piece of J hardware, such as time changes and system service messages, as well as < some device-specific events such as mounts and dismounts.3 -LOG#NOLOG3 NOLOG /-LOGF The ELI /-LOG (/NOLOG) switch stops error logging and error limiting  on all devices on the system.3 RESET  ddnn:[...:]/RE G The ELI /RESET switch resets the error and QIO counts on devices to 0.7 You may specify up to 14 devices on the command line.  3 SHOW ) [filespec=] [ddnn:[...:]]/SH[/subswitch]M The ELI /SHOW switch displays error and QIO counts for the devices specifiedI (up to 14). If no devices are specified, all error logging devices are N shown. The /SH switch also displays information about the current operating $ status of the error logging system.O You can have the /SHOW switch write the output in a file instead of displayingI it on your terminal, by using the filespec argument in the command line.3 SL  ddnn:[...:]/SL:n[/HL:n]K The ELI /SL (Soft Limit) switch sets limits for the number of soft errors F that error logging records on the device specified. You can set softJ errors for more than one device in the same command line, as long as the I limits are the same. The value for n can be 0 to 255. The default soft error limit is eight.F Use the /HL (Hard Limit) switch with the /SL switch to set both hard G and soft errors for the device or devices specified. The default hard error limit is five.3 SWITCH  filespec /SW[/subswitch] /NV /DEG The ELI /SWITCH switch copies the current log file to another file and# transfers logging to the new file. E The /NV subswitch creates a new version of the file you specify. D This overrides the default operation of the /SW switch, in which : the data is appended to the latest version of the file. G The /DE subswitch deletes the current error log file after it copiesJ the file to the file you specify. This overrides the default operationB of the /SW switch, in which the previous log file is preserved.2 RPT @ RPT creates reports on the data in the error log file based on D information in the error log control file and commands you supply. N RPT is a nonprivileged task: any user can use it to create Error Log Reports.+ RPT analyzes and formats 00`2TADATADATADATADATADATAinformation aboutF errors and events that occur on system hardware and generates reportsC that Field Service can use to repair your hardware. Most of these@ commands (and the reports they generate) will be useful only to DIGITAL Field Service.= The general MCR format of an RPT command line is as follows: 9 [report_file][/switch[/...]]=[input_file][/switch[/...]]? RPT switches can be used on either side of the equal sign (=).G The equal sign is the only required part of the syntax. In fact, youB can generate an RPT report with predetermined (default) switches % by using the following command line: RPT>=G Type HELP ERRLOG RPT DEFAULT for information on the switches and file 5 specifications used in the RPT default command line. RPT Switches:  ( /DA[TE] Selects packets based on date* /DE[VICE] Selects packets based on device1 /F[ORMAT] Determines format for error log report2 /P[ACKET] Selects packets based on packet number< /R[EPORT] Creates reports using a predefined switch string5 /SE[RIAL] Selects packets based on serial number of drive and/or pack : /SU[MMARY] Selects the type of summary report/ /T[YPE] Selects packets based on packet type1 /V[OLUME] Selects packets based on volume label6 /W[IDTH] Determines width of error log output report B Type HELP ERROR_LOG RPT switch for information on individual RPT switches.3 DATE  /DA:argument Arguments: PREVIOUS:n% RANGE:start_date:end_date TODAY YESTERDAY M The RPT /DATE switch allows you to select packets based on the time of theirH occurrence. The RPT default command line invokes the /DA:R:*:* switch. K The PREVIOUS argument selects packets occurring on the previous n days.H The RANGE argument selects packets in the date range specified. TheF starting and ending dates must be in one of the following formats: DD-MM-YY (DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS) D If you specify the second format, with time as well as date, the3 parentheses are a required part of the syntax. L An asterisk (*) used at the beginning of a range specification indicatesH any date through the specified ending date. For example, *:12-AUG-87I specifies all of the packets from the beginning of the error log file through August 12, 1987. N The TODAY argument selects packets that have occurred on the current date.K The YESTERDAY argument selects packets occurring on the date before the current date. 3 DEFAULTSG To use the RPT default command line, simply type the equal sign (=) at the RPT prompt, as follows:  RPT>=O The default command generates an RPT report with the following, commonly used  file specifications:4 Defaults Report File Input File # Device: LB0 LB0( UIC: Current UIC [1,6]* File name: ERRREPORT LOG File type: LST ERR Version: New version 0= The RPT default command line invokes the following switches: 2 /DATE:RANGE:*:* Selects packets from all dates1 /DEVICE:ALL Selects packets from all devices3 /FORMAT:BRIEF Selects brief report format2 /PACKET:*:* Selects all packet numbers8 /SUMMARY:NONE Does not create a summary report4 /TYPE:ALL Selects all types of packets= /WIDTH:WIDE Selects wide line width (132 columns)3 DEVICE  /DE:device[s]=inputfileM The RPT /DE switch allows you to generate error log reports for a particularO device or group of devices. The RPT default command line selects all devices. Arguments:H dd Selects a group of all devices with the mnemonic ddK ddnn: Selects the device with mnemonic dd and unit number nnA (arg,arg[,...]) Selects a series of devices or device groupsJ For example, /DE:DM selects all DM devices, and /DE:(DM,D00hN}B2:) selects all DM devices and device DB2.3 FORMAT /F:argument H The RPT /FORMAT switch allows you to specify the desired format for the packet-by-packet report.  Arguments: 3 B[RIEF] Displays packets in brief format2 F[ULL] Displays packets in full format= N[ONE] Does not display a packet-by-packet report> R[EGISTERS] Displays only device registers in full format K on peripheral errors. Does not display software E information. Packets for other errors are 3 displayed in full format.4 Multiple arguments for the /F switch are not valid.? The RPT default command line invokes the /FORMAT:BRIEF switch.3 PACKET /PA:packet_number[s]KThe RPT /PACKET switch allows you to select a packet or range of packets byJspecifying the packet identification numbers. The RPT default command lineMselects all packets. You can determine the packet numbers you want to see by(examining a brief report of all packets.  Arguments: O mmm.mmm[:nnn.nnn] One packet or range of packets from mmm.mmm to nnn.nnn3 *:nnn.nnn All packets before nnn.nnn2 nnn.nnn:* All packets after nnn.nnnA (arg,arg[,...]) A series of packets or ranges of packets G The asterisk (*) indicates an open-ended number. For example, you can I select all the packets before a particular number (*:235.3), or all the - packets after a particular number (235.3:*).3 REPORT  /R:defined_report_stringG The RPT /REPORT switch accesses predefined switch strings. The report F string must be either the name of a DIGITAL-defined switch string or K the name of a user-defined switch string located in LB:[1,6]ERRDEFINE.CFS. A DIGITAL supplies 4 predefined switch strings to use with the /RE? switch. Their arguments are SYSTEM, WEEK, MONTH, and DAY. TheB strings, using defaults for unspecified switches, are as follows:( String Switches defined1 DAY /FO:FULL/SU:ALL/DA:TODAY): WEEK /SU:(HISTORY,ERROR)/DA:PREVIOUS:7); MONTH /SU:(HISTORY,ERROR)/DA:PREVIOUS:31), SYSTEM /SU:(HISTORY,ERROR))= The names of the predefined strings must be entered in full., 3 SERIAL /SE:argument DRIVE:n PACK:n DRIVE:n,PACK:nG The RPT /SERIAL switch selects a packet based on drive or pack serial H number, or one of each. This switch can only select peripheral errors.I You can select packets from any device that has a serial number by driveH serial number, but you can only select packets from MSCP and last-track devices by pack serial number. 3 SUMMARY /SU:argument Arguments: O ALL Creates summary reports sorted by error, history and geometry? ERROR Creates a summary report sorted by error typeRC DISK_GEOMETRY Creates a summary report based on device geometryeI HISTORY Creates a summary report sorted by device error historyuL NONE Creates no summary report (invoked by RPT default command)H (arg,arg[,...]) Creates multiple reports that you specify (The ALL andL NONE arguments may not be specified with other arguments.) I RPT cannot create summary reports in narrow width. If you specify narrow I width by using the /W:N switch, RPT formats the packet-by-packet displayeB in NARROW format, but formats the summary portion in WIDE format.N The RPT default command line invokes the /SU:NONE switch; it does not create  a summary report.3 TYPE /T:argumentK The RPT /TYPE switch selects error log packets based on their packet type.n2 The RPT default command line selects all packets. n Arguments: E> ALL Selects all packets00puTADATADATADATADATADATA in error log file9 CONTROL Selects command packets from ELIsP ERRORS Selects packets from processor, memory, and peripherals> MEMORY Selects packets from events in memoryD PERIPHERAL Selects packets from all peripheral devices; PROCESSOR Selects packets from events in CPUJ SYSTEM_INFORMATION Selects from system events, not hardware-specificN (arg,arg[,...]) Selects a series of packet types (The ALL and ERRORS N arguments may not be specified with other arguments.)3 VOLUME n /V:volume_label l ,F Creates RPT reports from packets based on the specified volume label. t3 WIDTH /W:argument N[ARROW] p W[IDE] E The /WIDTH switch allows you to set the line width of the report RPTL generates to narrow (80 columns) or wide (132 columns). WIDE is the default3 for reports that are displayed on your terminal. f oK The basic report format does not change when RPT creates a narrow report. IE Instead, each long line of the report wraps onto the next line at ana appropriate place. I Summary reports do not recognize the /WIDTH switch. The summary portion p1 of these reports is always in the wide format. 2 WARNINGS I The ERRLOG task issues the following warning message when error limitingo= is turned on and the device reaches one of the error limits:  = ** WARNING: Device ddnn: reached {Hard|Soft} limit (nn.) **  J ERRLOG then stops logging that particular type of error on that device. D You can restore logging on the device in one of the following ways: H - Raising the limit that was met (see HELP ERROR_LOG ELI HL or SL)I - Resetting the device error counts (see HELP ERROR_LOG ELI RESET).d rH On multiuser systems, the warning is displayed on any terminal that hasE allocated the device. If that fails, it is sent to the terminal that D invoked the task that attached the device. If the device is neitherI allocated nor attached, the warning is sent to the console. On systems O that are not multiuser, the warning is only displayed on the console terminal.tH See HELP ERROR_LOG ELI SHOW for information on how to display the error counts for each device.6 Help is available for all Executive directives. Type HELP EXECUTIVE macrocall E for help on the directive that corresponds to the macro call. (NoteE that the terminating $ should be eliminated from the macro call whenD requesting help. For example, type HELP EXECUTIVE ABRT for help on the ABRT$ directive.) You can also type" HELP EXECUTIVE directivenameF where directivename is the name of the directive. Remember that manyG directives have similar names. Type the full name of the directive as< a single word with underscores between words. For example:. HELP EXECUTIVE SEND_REQUEST_AND_CONNECT F Type HELP EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVES for a list of the directives and their macro call names.H Type HELP EXECUTIVE DIC for information on the Directive IdentificationG Codes and HELP EXECUTIVE ERRORS for a list of the error codes returned in the Directive Status Word. 2 DIRECTIVESE The following is a list of all of the Executive directives and their macro call names. ABRT Abort Task ACHN Assign Channel  ALTP Alter Priority ALUN Assign LUN ASTX AST Service Exit ATRG Attach Region! CINT Connect to Interrupt Vector CLEF Clear Event Flag CLON Create Logical Name CMKT Cancel Mark Time Requests CNCT Connect CPCR Checkpoint Common Region CRAW Create Address Window% CRGF Create Group Global Event Flags CRRG Create Region CRVT Create Virtual Terminal* CSRQ Cancel Scheduled Initiation Requests  DECL Declare Sign00xN}ificant Event! DLON Declare Significant Event DSAR Disable AST Recognition DSCP Disable Checkpointing DTRG Detach Region ELAW Eliminate Address Window( ELGF Eliminate Group Global Event Flags ELVT Eliminate Virtual Terminal EMST Emit Status ENAR Enable AST Recognition ENCP Enable Checkpointing EXIF Exit If. EXIT Task Exit (Note: use full name for help) EXST Exit with Status EXTK Extend Task) FEAT Test for Specified System Feature" FSS File Specification Scanner) GCCI Get Command for Command Interpreter) GCII Get Command Interpreter Information GDIR Get Default Directory GIN General Information GLUN Get LUN Information GMCR Get MCR Command Line GMCX Get Mapping Context GPRT Get Partition Parameters GREG Get Region Parameters GSSW Get Sense Switches GTIM Get Time Parameters GTSK Get Task Parameters  IHAR Inhibit AST Recognition MAP Map Address Window MRKT Mark Time2 MSDS Map Supervisor D-Space to Supervisor I-Space- MVTS Move to/from User/Supervisor I-/D-Space PFCS Parse FCS PRMS Parse RMS QIO Queue I/O Request QIOW Queue I/O Request and Wait RCST Receive Data or Stop RCVD Receive Data RCVX Receive Data or Exit RDAF Read All Event Flags RDEF Read Event Flag RDXF Read Extended Event Flags- RLON Recursive Translation of Logical Name RMAF Remove Affinity, RPOI Request and Pass Offspring Information RQST Request Task RREF Receive By Reference$ RRST Receive By Reference or Stop RSUM Resume Task RUN Run Task! SCAA Specify Command Arrival AST SCAL Supervisor Call" SCLI Set Command Line Interpreter SDAT Send Data SDIR Set Default Directory SDRC Send, Request, and Connect8 SDRP Send Data Request and Pass Offspring Control Block SETF Set Event Flag* SFPA Specify Floating Point Exception AST SMSG Send Message SNXC Send Next Command SPEA Specify Parity Error AST SPND Suspend SPRA Specify Power Recovery AST SPWN Spawn SRDA Specify Receive Data AST SREA Specify Requested Exit AST SREX Specify Requested Exit AST SREF Send By Reference& SRRA Specify Receive-By-Reference AST STAF Set Affinity STIM Set System Time( STLO Stop for Logical OR of Event Flags STOP Stop STSE Stop for Single Event Flag* SVDB Specify SST Vector for Debugging Aid! SVTK Specify SST Vector for Task SWST Switch State' TFEA Test for Specified Task Feature TLON Translate Logical Name% ULGF Unlock Group Global Event Flags UNMAP Unmap Address Window USTP Unstop VRCD Variable Receive Data % VRCS Variable Receive Data or Stop % VRCX Variable Receive Data or Exit  VSDA Variable Send Data ) VSRC Variable Send, Request, and Connect WSIG Wait for Significant Event( WTLO Wait for Logical OR of Event Flags WTSE Wait for Single Event Flag 2 ABORT_TASK#ABRT2 ABRTG Abort Task ABRT$ FORTRAN Call: CALL ABORT (tsk[,ids])6 tsk Name (Radix-50) of the task to be aborted ids Directive status Macro Call: ABRT$ tsk6 tsk Name (Radix-50) of the task to be aborted2 ASSIGN_CHANNEL#ACHN2 ACHNH Assign Channel (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) ACHN$ FORTRAN Call:6 CALL ACHN ([mod],[itbmsk],lun,fsbuf,fssz[,idsw])G mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify one* of the following values: LB.LOC = 1 LB.LOG = 2G Specifying one of these values indicates that matchesG in the logical table are based on the exact value.G Not specifying a value indicates that the system willG look for the first matching logical block, regardless( of the modifier value.G itbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical table from beingG searched. The following symbol definitions, whenF 00uTADATADATADATADATADATA set, prevent a particular table from being searched:+ System (IN.SYS) = 10+ Group (IN.GRP) = 4+ Session (IN.SES) = 20+ Task (IN.TSK) = 1 $ lun LUN to be assigned@ fsbuf Array containing the file specification bufferB fssz Size (in bytes) of the file specification buffer > idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:# ACHN$ mod,tbmsk,lun,fsbuf,fssz9 mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify one of the following values: LB.LOC = 1 LB.LOG = 27 Specifying one of these values indicates that matches4 in the logical table are based on the exact value.7 Not specifying a value indicates that the system will7 look for the first matching logical block, regardless of the modifier value.: tbmsk Inhibits mask to prevent a logical table from being7 searched. The following symbol definition, when set,1 prevent a particular table from being searched: System (IN.SYS) = 10 Group (IN.GRP) = 4 Session (IN.SES) = 20 Task (IN.TSK) = 1 lun LUN to be assigned+ fsbuf Address of file specification buffer6 fssz Size (in bytes) of the file specification buffer2 ALTER_PRIORITY#ALTP2 ALTPG Alter Priority ALTP$ FORTRAN Call:% CALL ALTPRI ([tsk],[ipri][,ids]) tsk Active task name? ipri A one-word integer value equal to the new priority from 1 to 250(10) ids Directive status Macro Call: ALTP$ [tsk][,pri] tsk Active task name+ pri New priority from 1 to 250(10) 2 ASSIGN_LUN#ALUN2 ALUNG Assign LUN ALUN$ FORTRAN Call:$ CALL ASNLUN (lun,dev,unt[,ids]) lun Logical unit number& dev Device name (format: 1A2) unt Device unit number ids Directive status Macro Call: ALUN$ lun,dev,unt lun Logical unit number3 dev Device name (two uppercase characters) unt Device unit number2 AST_SERVICE_EXIT#ASTX2 ASTXG AST Service Exit ($S form recommended) ASTX$S FORTRAN Call:F Neither the FORTRAN language nor the ISA standard permits directF linking to system-trapping mechanisms. Therefore, this directive' is not available to FORTRAN tasks. Macro Call: ASTX$S [err]" err Error-routine address2 ATTACH_REGION#ATRG2 ATRGF Attach Region ATRG$ FORTRAN Call: CALL ATRG (irdb[,ids])G irdb An eight-word integer array containing a Region Definition Block  ids Directive status Macro Call: ATRG$ rdb, rdb Region Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE RDB for information on the Region Definition Block.2 CLEAR_EVENT_FLAG#CLEF2 CLEFG Clear Event Flag CLEF$ FORTRAN Call: CALL CLREF (efn[,ids]) efn Event flag number ids Directive status Macro Call: CLEF$ efn efn Event flag number2 CREATE_LOGICAL_NAME#CLON2 CLONH Create Logical Name (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) CLON$: (CALL CRELON and CLON$ are the preferred calls to use on8 RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX. CALL CRELOG and CLOG$ are( provided for compatibility with P/OS.) FORTRAN Call:; CALL CRELON (mod,itbnum,lns,lnssz,iens,ienssz[,idsw]); CALL CRELOG (mod,itbnum,lns,lnssz,lens,ienssz[,idsw])G mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; if notG specified, the nonzero value reserved by the systemG (LB.LOC = 1) is placed in the DPB; if specified,H 00N} nonzero values must correspond to the valid symbolic1 references used by the systemG itbnum Logical name table number in the lower byte and the= status byte in the upper byte, as follows:% Table number: 4 System (LT.SYS) = 04 Group (LT.GRP) = 14 Session (LT.SES) = 44 Task (LT.TSK) = 3 Status:= LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status? LS.PRV = 2 Privileged statusE lns Character array containing the logical name string = lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name stringG iens Character array to contain the returned equivalence stringG ienssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for the returned% equivalence string? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Calls:" CLON$ mod,,lns,lnssz,ens" CLOG$ mod,,lns,lnssz,ens: mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; if not5 specified, the nonzero value reserved by the system1 (LB.LOC =1) is placed in the DPB; if specified,6 nonzero values must correspond to the valid symbolic references used by the system" <[tbnum][,status]>0 (angle brackets not required if only tbnum is specified)1 tbnum Logical name table number. The following* are the symbolic offsets for the table: System (LT.SYS) = 0 Group (LT.GRP) = 1 Session (LT.SYS) = 4 Task (LT.TSK) = 3) status Logical status definition value., The following are the valid bits for the value: LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status! LS.PRV = 2 Privileged status lns Logical name string1 lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string! lens Returned equivalence string5 lenssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for returned equivalence string2 CANCEL_MARK_TIME_REQUESTS#CMKT2 CMKTH Cancel Mark Time Requests CMKT$ FORTRAN Call: CALL CANMT ([efn][,ids]) efn Event flag number ids Directive status Macro Call: CMKT$ [[efn],[ast],[err]] efn Event flag number" ast Mark time AST address" err Error-routine address 2 CONNECT#CNCT2 CNCTG Connect CNCT$ FORTRAN Call:: CALL CNCT (rtname,[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids]); CALL CNCTN (rtname,[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids])C rtname Name (Radix-50) of the Offspring task to be connectedD iefn Event flag to be set when the offspring task exits or emits statusD iast Name of an AST routine to be called when theF Offspring task exits or emits status (ignored for CALL CNCTN)H iesb Name of an eight-word status block to be written when8 the Offspring task exits or emits statusD iparm Name of a word to receive the status block address" when an AST occurs< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:# CNCT$ tname,[efn],[east],[esb]E tname Name (Radix-50) of the Offspring task to be connectedD efn The event flag to be cleared on issuance and set= when the Offspring task exits or emits statusD east Address of an AST routine to be called when the4 Offspring task exits or emits statusH esb Address of an eight-word status block to be written when8 the Offspring task exits or emits statusA See HELP EXECUTIVE ESB for information on the Exit Status Block.2 CONNECT_TO_INTERRUPT_VECTOR#CINT2 CINTF Con00uTADATADATADATADATADATAnect To Interrupt Vector CINT$ FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call:$ CINT$ vec,base,isr,edir,pri,astD vec Interrupt vector address; must be in the range 60(8) to@ highest vector specified during system generation,3 inclusive, and must be a multiple of 4D base Virtual base address for kernel APR 5 mapping of the6 ISR and enable/disable interrupt routinesC isr Virtual address of the ISR or 0 to disconnect from the interrupt vectorD edir Virtual address of the enable/disable interrupt routine< pri Initial priority at which the ISR is to executeD ast Virtual address of an AST routine to be entered after1 the fork-level routine queues an AST2 CHECKPOINT_COMMON_REGION#CPCR2 CPCRH Checkpoint Common Region (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) CPCR$  FORTRAN Call: CALL CPCR (name[,ids])C name Name (Radix-50) of the common region to be checkpointed ids Directive status Macro Call: CPCR$ name: name Name of the common region to be checkpointed2 CREATE_ADDRESS_WINDOW#CRAW2 CRAWG Create Address Window CRAW$ FORTRAN Call: CALL CRAW (iwdb[,ids])H iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window Definition Block  ids Directive status Macro Call: CRAW$ wdb, wdb Window Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block.!2 CREATE_GROUP_GLOBAL_EVENT_FLAGS#CRGF2 CRGFG Create Group Global Event Flags CRGF$ FORTRAN Call: CALL CRGF ([group][,ids])K group Group number for the flags to be created. Only privilegedL tasks can specify group numbers other than the issuing task'sA group UIC. If the UIC is not specified, the task'sF protection UIC (H.CUIC+1) in the task's header is used.; ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: CRGF$ [group]K group Group number for the flags to be created. Only privilegedL tasks can specify group numbers other than the issuing task'sC group UIC. If the UIC is not specified, the task'sF protection UIC (H.CUIC+1) in the task's header is used.2 CREATE_REGION #CRRG2 CRRGG Create Region CRRG$o FORTRAN Call: CALL CRRG (irdb[,ids]) H irdb An eight-word integer array containing a Region Definition Block V ids Directive statusr Macro Call: CRRG$ rdb, rdb Region Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE RDB for information on the Region Definition Block.a2 CREATE_VIRTUAL_TERMINALu#CRVT 2 CRVTG Create Virtual Terminal (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) CRVT$: FORTRAN Call:< CALL CRVT ([iiast],[ioast],[iaast],[imlen],iparm[,ids])D iiast AST address at which input requests from offspring" tasks are servicedD ioast AST address at which output requests from offspring" tasks are servicedD iaast AST address at which the parent task may be notifiedD of the completion of successful offspring attach and< detach requests to the virtual terminal unitD imlen Maximum buffer length allowed for offspring I/O requestsH iparm Address of three-word buffer to receive information from, the stack when an AST occursG ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word containinga+ the virtual terminal numberr Macro Call:& CRVT$ [iast],[oast],[aast],[mlen]D iast AST address 00N}at which input requests from offspringG tasks are serviced; if iast=0, offspring input requests1 are rejected with IE.IFC returneddD oast AST address at which output requests from offspringH tasks are serviced; if oast=0, offspring output requests1 are rejected with IE.IFC returneduD aast AST address at which the parent task may be notifiedD of the completion of successful offspring attach andC detach requests to the virtual terminal unit; if E aast=0, no notification of offspring attach/detach is . returned to the parent taskF mlen Maximum buffer length (in bytes) allowed for offspringA I/O requests (default and maximum values for thisI8 parameter are system generation options)&2 CANCEL_SCHEDULED_INITIATION_REQUESTS#CSRQW2 CSRQF Cancel Scheduled Initiation Requests CSRQ$ FORTRAN Call: CALL CANALL (tsk[,ids]) tsk Task name ids Directive statuse Macro Call: CSRQ$ tsk) tsk Scheduled (target) task namev2 DECLARE_SIGNIFICANT_EVENTxG Declare Significant Event ($S form recommended) DECL$Se FORTRAN Call: CALL DECLAR ([,ids])f ids Directive statusn Macro Call: DECL$S [,err]" err Error-routine address2 DELETE_LOGICAL_NAMER#DLONe2 DLONF Delete Logical Name (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) DLON$9 (CALL DELLON and DLON$ are the preferred calls to use onn: RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems. DELLOG and DLOG$ are& provided for compatibility with P/OS. FORTRAN Call:/ CALL DELLON (mod,itbnum,lns,lnssz[,idsw])e/ CALL DELLOG (mod,itbnum,lns,lnssz[,idsw])iG mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; if notEG specified, the nonzero value reserved by the systemG (LB.LOC = 1) is placed in the DPB; if specified, anypG nonzero value must correspond to the valid symbolic-0 references used by the systemE itbnum Logical name table number. The tables and theirt- corresponding numbers are:t/ System (LT.SYS) = 0T/ Group (LT.GRP) = 1e/ Session (LT.SES) = 4a/ Task (LT.TSK) = 3PE lns Character array containing the logical name stringV= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string ? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Wordt Macro Call:  DLON$ mod,tbnum,lns,lnssz  DLOG$ mod,tbnum,lns,lnsszsG mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; if notTG specified, the nonzero value reserved by the systemRG (LB.LOC = 1) is placed in the DPB; if specified, anyoG nonzero value must correspond to the valid symbolic:0 references used by the systemE tbnum Logical name table number. The tables and theirn- corresponding numbers are: / System (LT.SYS) = 0H/ Group (LT.GRP) = 1 / Session (LT.SES) = 4e/ Task (LT.TSK) = 3i& lns Logical name string= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name stringc i2 DISABLE_AST_RECOGNITIONc#DSARa2 DSARG Disable AST Recognition ($S form recommended) DSAR$Se FORTRAN Call: CALL DSASTR [(ids)] ids Directive status Macro Call: DSAR$S [err]t" err Error-routine address2 DISABLE_CHECKPOINTINGe#DSCP.2 DSCPG Disable Checkpointing ($S form recommended) DSCP$S  FORTRAN Call: CALL DISCKP [(ids)] ids Directive s00uTADATADATADATADATADATAtatus Macro Call: DSCP$S [err]l" err Error-routine address2 DETACH_REGIONI#DTRG=2 DTRGG Detach Region DTRG$  FORTRAN Call: CALL DTRG (irdb[,ids]).H irdb An eight-word integer array containing a Region Definition Block l ids Directive status Macro Call: DTRG$ rdb, rdb Region Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE RDB for information on the Region Definition Block.m2 ELIMINATE_ADDRESS_WINDOW#ELAWf2 ELAW o& Eliminate Address Window ELAW$ FORTRAN Call: CALL ELAW (iwdb[,ids])LH iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window! Definition Block c ids Directive status Macro Call: ELAW$ wdb/ wdb Window Definition Block addresssG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block.a$2 ELIMINATE_GROUP_GLOBAL_EVENT_FLAGS#ELGFo2 ELGFG Eliminate Group Global Event Flags ELGF$  FORTRAN Call: CALL ELGF ([group][,ids])G group Group number of flags to be eliminated. Only privilegedE tasks can specify group numbers other than the issuingsH task's group UIC. If the UIC is not specified, the task'sF protection UIC (H.CUIC+1) in the task's header is used.; ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:v ELGF$ [group]G group Group number of flags to be eliminated. Only privilegedoE tasks can specify group numbers other than the issuing H task's group UIC. If the UIC is not specified, the task'sF protection UIC (H.CUIC+1) in the task's header is used.2 ELIMINATE_VIRTUAL_TERMINAL#ELVT 2 ELVT J Eliminate Virtual Terminal (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) ELVT$ FORTRAN Call: CALL ELVT (iunum[,ids]), iunum Virtual terminal unit number< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: ELVT$ unumgE unum Unit number of the virtual terminal to be eliminated.> The task must provide this parameter after the, virtual terminal is created. 2 EMIT_STATUS #EMST 2 EMSTG Emit Status EMST$t FORTRAN Call:& CALL EMST ([rtname],status[,ids])F rtname Name of a task connected to issuing task to which the' status is to be emittedD status A 16-bit quantity to be returned to the connected task< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: EMST$ [tname],status D tname Name of a task connected to the issuing task to1 which the status is to be emittedD status A 16-bit quantity to be returned to the connected task2 ENABLE_AST_RECOGNITION#ENARt2 ENARG Enable AST Recognition ($S form recommended) ENAR$SF FORTRAN Call: CALL ENASTR [(ids)] ids Directive status Macro Call: ENAR$S [err] " err Error-routine address2 ENABLE_CHECKPOINTING#ENCPl2 ENCPG Enable Checkpointing ($S form recommended) ENCP$S FORTRAN Call: CALL ENACKP [(ids)] ids Directive status Macro Call: ENCP$S [err]C" err Error-routine address 2 TASK_EXITSG Task Exit ($S form recommended) EXIT$Sw FORTRAN Call: CALL EXIT (istat)CB istat A 16-bit quantity to be returned to the parent task Macro Call: EXIT$S [err]i" err Error-routine address 2 EXIT_IFl#EXIFi2 EXIFG Exit If EXIF$  FORTRAN Call: CALL EXITIF (efn[,ids]) efn Event flag number ids D00N}irective status Macro Call: EXIF$ efn efn Event flag number2 EXIT_WITH_STATUS#EXST2 EXSTG Exit with Status EXST$  FORTRAN Call: CALL EXST (istat)C istat A 16-bit quantity to be returned to the parent task Macro Call: EXST$ status=C status A 16-bit quantity to be returned to the parent task 2 EXIT_STATUS_BLOCK #ESB2 ESB4D The Exit Status Block (ESB) can be specified by a parent task when K spawning or connecting to an offspring task. The ESB receives exit-statuslJ information when the offspring task exits or emits status. The format of the ESB is as follows:a$ Word 0 Offspring-task exit status Word 1 TKTN abort code  Words 2-7 Reserved I The ESB defaults to a length of one word. To receive more than one worduI of information, logically OR the event flag argument with SP.WX8 in the L directive that establishes the connection to the offspring task. Note thatM if this is done, all eight words of the ESB are expected to be available forM returning information. 2 EXTEND_TASKs#EXTK2 EXTKG Extend Task EXTK$n FORTRAN Call: CALL EXTTSK ([inc][,ids])D inc A positive or negative number equal to the number ofD 32-word blocks by which the task size is to be extended or reduced  ids Directive status Macro Call: EXTK$ [inc]D inc A positive or negative number equal to the number ofD 32-word blocks by which the task is to be extended or reduced#2 TEST_FOR_SPECIFIED_SYSTEM_FEATURE#FEATs2 FEAT E Test for Specified System Feature FEAT$v FORTRAN Call: CALL FEAT (isym[,ids]) 4 isym Symbol for the specified system feature ids Directive statusz Macro Call: FEAT$ sym4 sym Symbol for the specified system feature2 FILE_SPECIFICATION_SCANNER#FSS2 FSSrH File Specification Scanner (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) FSS$ FORTRAN Call: ; CALL FSSFSS (fsbuf,fssz,prsblk,prssz,[reserv][,idsw])RA fsbuf Array containing the file specification buffer C fssz Size (in bytes) of the file specification buffer[3 prsblk Array containing the parse block5 prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse blockr= reserv Reserved parameter (must not be specified) ? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Wordl Macro Call:) FSS$ fsbuf,fssz,prsblk,prssz,reservs; fsbuf Address of the file specification bufferC fssz Size (in bytes) of the file specification buffer- prsblk Address of the parse block  s. prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse block5 reserv Reserved parameter (must be blank) %2 GET_COMMAND_FOR_COMMAND_INTERPRETERr#GCCIk2 GCCIG Get Command for Command Interpreter GCCI$  FORTRAN Call:B CALL GTCMCI (icbf,icbfl,[iibuf],[iibfl],[iaddr],[incp][,ids]): icbf Name of a byte array to receive the commandE icbfl Integer containing the size of the icbf array in bytessL iibuf Name of an integer array to receive the optional information  buffer[G iibfl Name of an integer containing the length of the optional ! information buffer C iaddr Name of an integer containing the address in pool ofhE the command desired. (This address was obtained by a > previous call to GTCMCI with GC.CND specified.)D incp Name of an integer containing a value indicating theK action to take if there is no command queued (see list underi ncp); ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Wordk Macro Call:/ GCCI$ cbuf,cbfl,[ibuf],[ibfl],[ad00uTADATADATADATADATADATAdr],[ncp]n: cbuf Address of buffer to receive command stringB cbfl Length of buffer; maximum buffer size is 91(10) for? RSX-11M and 266(10) for RSX-11M-PLUS and for Micro/RSXsF ibuf Address of buffer to receive information on the issuing terminal 6 ibfl Length of buffer to receive information! addr Address of commandA> ncp Action to take if no command buffer is present:C GC.CCS (000) -- Return with Carry set (default)eF GC.CEX (001) -- Force CLI to exit instead of- returning F GC.CST (002) -- Force CLI to stop instead of- returningeF GC.CND (200) -- Copy command into buffer, but do@ not dequeue it from the list%2 GET_COMMAND_INTERPRETER_INFORMATION#GCIIF2 GCIIG Get Command Interpreter Information GCII$  FORTRAN Call:8 CALL GETCII (ibuf,ibfl,[icli],[idev],[iunit][,ids])F ibuf Name of an integer array to receive the CLI informationF ibfl Length in bytes of the integer array to receive the CLI informationG icli Name of a two-word array element containing the Radix-50l name of the CLIF idev Name of an integer containing the ASCII name of( terminal (default is TI:)F iunit Name of an integer containing the octal unit number of terminals ids Directive statuso Macro Call:$ GCII$ buf,bufl,cli,[dev],[unit]7 buf Address of buffer to receive informationl+ bufl Length of information bufferRK cli Name (Radix-50) of the CLI on which information is requestedp lG dev ASCII name of terminal whose CLI should be used (defaultg is TI:), unit Octal unit number of terminal2 GET_DEFAULT_DIRECTORYt#GDIR'2 GDIR? Get Default Directory (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) GDIR$. FORTRAN Call:2 CALL GETDDS (mod,iens,ienssz,[irsize],[idsw])C mod Modifier for the GDIR$ directive; specify one of thel following values:% 0 = Get task defaulto) GD.LOG = Get terminal default F iens Character array containing the default directory string> ienssz Size (in bytes) of the default directory string? irsize Buffer address of the returned default directory  string size ; ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:" GDIR$ [mod],ens,enssz[,rsize]C mod Modifier for the GDIR$ directive; specify one of theu following values:% 0 = Get task defaultk) GD.LOG = Get terminal defaulto= ens Buffer address of the default directory stringAE enssz Size (in bytes) of the default directory string buffer H rsize Buffer address to which the size of the default directory! string is returnedi2 GENERAL_INFORMATIONi#GIN2 GINeF General Information GIN$< Information is available on the following GIN subfunctions: a' GI.GAS Get Assigned Device Name d% GI.UIC Get System UIC Informationo GI.DEF Set Task Default UICm GI.SPR Set Task Privilege  GI.REN Rename Task! GI.FMK Get Feature Mask Wordst! GI.UAB Get User Account Blocki! GI.QMC Queue MCR Command Linef! GI.DEV Get Device Informations GI.APR Get System APRs+ GI.TSK Find and Return Task Information , GI.UPD Update UICs and Default Directory" 3 GI.GAS' GI.GAS - Get Assigned Device Name N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro C00N}all:4 GIN$ GI.GAS, buf, siz, dev, unt, udev, unum& GI.GAS GIN$ function code (0)G buf Address of 6 word buffer to receive the LUN informationo$ siz Buffer size in words dev Device name " unt Device unit number; udev Device name for which this assignment holdsI; If zero, get global assignment nG unum Unit number of terminal for which this assignment holdss5 If high bit set, get login assignmente Buffer Format: ' Word 0 Name of assigned devicef= Word 1 Unit number of assigned device and flags byted1 Word 2 First device characteristics wordu2 Word 3 Second device characteristics word1 Word 4 Third device characteristics wordf2 Word 5 Fourth device characteristics word DSW Return Codes:& IS.SUC Successful completion.; IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space. D IE.IDU The specified device is not a terminal. 3 IE.PRI The issuing task is not privileged.aD IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.= IE.ULN No assignment exists for the logical name. i3 GI.UIC$ GI.UIC - Get System UIC Information $N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call: GIN$ GI.UIC, buf, siz& GI.UIC GIN$ function code (1)I buf Address of 5 or 32 word buffer to receive the information)$ siz Buffer size in words Buffer Format:  Word 0 System UIC Word 1 Library UICt. Word 2 H.DUIC for the requesting task. Word 3 H.CUIC for the requesting task Word 4 Login UICs/ Word 5 (Optional) Current terminal UICs8 Word 6 (Optional) Radix-50 CLI name, first half9 Word 7 (Optional) Radix-50 CLI name, second half 9 Word 8 (Optional) ASCII system name, first third : Word 9 (Optional) ASCII system name, middle third9 Word 10 (Optional) ASCII system name, final thirdd& Word 11 (Optional) Network UIC8 Word 12 (Optional) System size in 32-word blocks DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion.p3 GI.DEF GI.DEF - Set Task Default UIC N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call: GIN$ GI.DEF, uic& GI.DEF GIN$ function code (2)' uic User identification codey DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion. : IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space., IE.IUI The specified UIC is invalid.< IE.RSU Group global event flags are active for task.C IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.l3 GI.SPR GI.SPR - Set Task Privilege N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call: GIN$ GI.SPR, flge& GI.SPR GIN$ function code (7)* flg New privilege bit in bit 0  DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion. : IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space.6 IE.PRI The task was not previously privileged.C IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.u3 GI.REN GI.REN - Rename Task  N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call: GIN$ GI.REN, nam1, nam2& GI.REN GIN$ function code (8). nam1 Radix-50 task name, first half/ nam2 Radix-50 task name, second halfA DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion.s: IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space.9 IE.RSU The specified task name is already in use.TC IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid. 3 GI.FMK GI.FMK - Get Feature Mask Words N NOTE: You must include a variable for every e00uTADATADATADATADATADATAlement in the macro definition. Macro Call: GIN$ GI.FMK, buf, siz& GI.FMK GIN$ function code (3)B buf Address of 9 word buffer to receive the information# siz Buffer size in wordsb Buffer Format:d1 Word 0 First Executive feature mask worde2 Word 1 Second Executive feature mask word1 Word 2 Third Executive feature mask word 2 Word 3 Fourth Executive feature mask word* Word 4 Hardware feature mask word3 Word 5 ASCII system base level, first half4 Word 6 ASCII system base level, second half0 Word 7 ASCII system version, first half1 Word 8 ASCII system version, second halfy" Words 9-4 ASCII system type   DSW Return Codes:& IS.SUC Successful completion. 3 GI.QMC GI.QMC - Queue MCR Command LineO NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. i Macro Call: GIN$ GI.QMC, buf, siz& GI.QMC GIN$ function code (4) A buf Address of buffer containing the MCR command lineF$ siz Buffer size in words Buffer Format: * Words 00-x Command line characters DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion. : IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space.N IE.IDU The host terminal is a virtual terminal marked for elimination.C IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.aC IE.UPN Insufficient POOL available to queue command buffer.a3 GI.UAB GI.UAB - Get User Account Block N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call:( GIN$ GI.UAB, buf, siz, dev, unt' GI.UAB GIN$ function code (5) A buf Address of buffer to receive the UAB informationL% siz Buffer size in words- dev Device name( If zero, use task's TI:# unt Device unit numbert Buffer Format:u C The format of this buffer is subject to change. Consult theE6 RSX-11M-PLUS Crash Dump Analyzer Manual or theI RSX-11M-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/O Driver Manual for the ACNDF$rH system macro, which defines the format of a User Account Block.  U DSW Return Codes:& IS.SUC Successful completion.; IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space. I IE.IDU The specified device is not a terminal, or no UAB exists. 7 IE.PRI Unprivileged user specified a terminal.bD IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.3 GI.DEV GI.DEV - Get Device Information N NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call:( GIN$ GI.DEV, buf, siz, dev, unt& GI.DEV GIN$ function code (6)A buf Address of buffer to receive the unit informationt$ siz Buffer size in words dev Device name& If zero, use task's TI:! unt Device unit numberd@ If high bit clear, follow assignments  Buffer Format: , Word 0 Device characteristics word:; Bit 0 A logical assignment was followedB+ Bit 1 Unit is allocatedc* Bit 2 Unit is attached1 Bit 3 Unit has a labeled tapeC5 Bit 4 Unit is marked for dismount1 Bit 5 Unit is mounted foreigna- Bit 6 Unit is not mountedo7 Bit 7 Unit or controller is offlineR) Bit 8 Unit is offline , Bit 9 Unit is redirected1 Bit 10 Unit is a public devicei: Bit 11 Unit is attached for diagnostics3 Bit 12 Device controller offline A Bit 13 Unit is allocated by issuing task's TI:(: Bit 14 Unit is attached by issuing task000N} Bit 15 Device driver unloaded< Word 1 (Optional) First device characteristics wordE Word 2 (Optional) UCB U.PRM disk size doubleword, first half H Word 3 (Optional) UCB U.PRM+2 disk size doubleword, second half, Word 4 (Optional) ASCII device name@ Word 5 (Optional) (Low byte) Device logical unit numberI (High byte) LCB L.TYPE logical assignment typeCC Word 6 (Optional) Radix-50 attaching task name, first halfpD Word 7 (Optional) Radix-50 attaching task name, second halfC Word 8 (Optional) ASCII device name of allocating terminalo= Word 9 (Optional) Unit number of allocating terminalr8 Word 10 (Optional) Radix-50 ACP name, first half9 Word 11 (Optional) Radix-50 ACP name, second halft9 Word 12 (Optional) ASCII volume name, first sixtht: Word 13 (Optional) ASCII volume name, second sixth9 Word 14 (Optional) ASCII volume name, third sixthr: Word 15 (Optional) ASCII volume name, fourth sixth9 Word 16 (Optional) ASCII volume name, fifth sixtha9 Word 17 (Optional) ASCII volume name, final sixth   DSW Return Codes:& IS.SUC Successful completion.; IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space.sK IE.IDU The specified device does not exist, or device is a virtualkE terminal and issuing task is not parent or offspring.D IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid.& 3 GI.APR GI.APR - Get System APRs O NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call:  GIN$ GI.APR, buf, siz& GI.APR GIN$ function code (9)H buf Address of 97 word buffer to receive the APR information$ siz Buffer size in words f Buffer Format:i M. Word 0 Buffer characteristic word:A Bit 0 Kernel D-space information is presentR? Bit 1 User D-space information is present/B Bit 2 Supervisor mode information is present? Words 01-08 Kernel I-space PAR 0 through PAR 7 y? Words 09-16 Kernel I-space PDR 0 through PDR 7 SJ Words 17-24 (Optional) Kernel D-space PAR 0 through PAR 7 J Words 25-32 (Optional) Kernel D-space PDR 0 through PDR 7 = Words 33-40 User I-space PAR 0 through PAR 7 e= Words 41-48 User I-space PDR 0 through PDR 7 tH Words 49-56 (Optional) User D-space PAR 0 through PAR 7 H Words 57-64 (Optional) User D-space PDR 0 through PDR 7 D Words 65-72 (Optional) Supervisor I-space PAR 0 through PAR 7D Words 73-80 (Optional) Supervisor I-space PDR 0 through PDR 7D Words 81-88 (Optional) Supervisor D-space PAR 0 through PAR 7D Words 89-96 (Optional) Supervisor D-space PDR 0 through PDR 7 I DSW Return Codes:% IS.SUC Successful completion.  3 GI.TSK* GI.TSK - Find and Return Task Information iN NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition. Macro Call:* GIN$ GI.TSK, buf, siz, nam1, nam2( GI.TSK GIN$ function code (10.)A buf Address of buffer to receive the task information $ siz Buffer size in words0 nam1 First half of Radix-50 task name1 nam2 Second half of Radix-50 task name  Buffer Format:i. Word 0 Radix-50 task name, first half/ Word 1 Radix-50 task name, second half 6 Word 2 (Optional) T.STAT TCB task status word5 Word 3 (Optional) T.ST2 TCB task status wordg5 Word 4 (Optional) T.ST3 TCB task status word 5 Word 5 (Optional) T.ST4 TCB task status word C Word 6 (Optional) Radix-50 task partition name, first halfsD Word 7 (Optional) Radix-50 task partition name, secon00uTADATADATADATADATADATAd half n DSW Return Codes:& IS.SUC Successful completion.; IE.ADP Part of DPB is out of task's address space.1& IE.INS Task is not installed.D IE.SDP Invalid subfunction code or the DPB size is invalid. m3 GI.UPD+ GI.UPD - Update UICs and Default Directory  fN NOTE: You must include a variable for every element in the macro definition.  Macro Call: GIN$ GI.UPD, buf, siz n( GI.UPD GIN$ function code (17.)I buf Address of 5 or 32 word buffer to receive the informationC$ siz Buffer size in words Buffer Format:  Word 0 System UIC Word 1 Library UIC . Word 2 H.DUIC for the requesting task. Word 3 H.CUIC for the requesting task Word 4 Login UICm/ Word 5 (Optional) Current terminal UIC 8 Word 6 (Optional) Radix-50 CLI name, first half9 Word 7 (Optional) Radix-50 CLI name, second halft9 Word 8 (Optional) ASCII system name, first third: Word 9 (Optional) ASCII system name, middle third9 Word 10 (Optional) ASCII system name, final thirdo& Word 11 (Optional) Network UIC8 Word 12 (Optional) System size in 32-word blocks I DSW Return Codes: % IS.SUC Successful completion.r2 GET_LUN_INFORMATIONg#GLUNd2 GLUNG Get LUN Information GLUN$o FORTRAN Call: CALL GETLUN (lun,dat[,ids]) lun Logical unit number@ dat A six-word integer array to receive LUN information ids Directive statusD Macro Call: GLUN$ lun,buf lun Logical unit numberF buf Address of six-word buffer that will receive the LUN information2 GET_MCR_COMMAND_LINE#GMCRd2 GMCRG Get MCR Command Line GMCR$v FORTRAN Call: CALL GETMCR (buf[,ids])9 buf An 80-byte array to receive the command lineu ids Directive statusE Macro Call: GMCR$2 GET_MAPPING_CONTEXTo#GMCX-2 GMCXG Get Mapping Context GMCX$e FORTRAN Call: CALL GMCX (imcx[,ids])fD imcx An integer array to receive the mapping context. TheD size of the array is 8*n+1, where n is the number of2 window blocks in the task's header. 6 The maximum size is 8*8=1=65 on RSX-11M systems.B and 8*24+1=193 on RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems. ids Directive statust Macro Call: GMCX$ wvec C wvec The address of a vector of n Window Definition BlockstE followed by a terminator word; n is the number of window ( blocks in the task's headerG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block. 2 GET_PARTITION_PARAMETERS#GPRTD2 GPRTG Get Partition Parameters GPRT$r FORTRAN Call:" CALL GETPAR ([prt],buf[,ids]) prt Partition name @ buf A three-word integer array to receive the partition parameterss ids Directive statusN Macro Call: GPRT$ [prt],buf prt Partition name + buf Address of a three-word bufferi Buffer format:i+ Word 0 Partition physical base addresst Word 1 Partition size! Word 2 Partition flags word:o& 0 = system-controlled partition$ 1 = user-controlled partition2 GET_REGION_PARAMETERSG#GREGu2 GREGG Get Region Parameters GREG$L FORTRAN Call:" CALL GETREG ([rid],buf[,ids]) rid Region idH buf A three-word integer array to receive the region parameters ids Directive status Macro Call: GREG$ [rid],buf rid Region id+ buf Address of a three-word buffert Buffer format:i Word 0 Region base address  Word 1 00N}Region size  Word 2 Region flags word:& 0 = system-controlled partition$ 1 = user-controlled partition2 GET_SENSE_SWITCHES#GSSWe2 GSSWG Get Sense Switches ($S form recommended) GSSW$S  FORTRAN Call: CALL READSW (isw); isw Integer to receive the console switch settingsnG The following FORTRAN call allows a program to read the state of a  single switch:t CALL SWITCH (ibt,ist). ibt The switch to be tested (0 to 15) ist Test results where: 1 = switch one 2 = switch off Macro Call: GSSW$S [err]f" err Error-routine address2 GET_TIME_PARAMETERS#GTIMr2 GTIMG Get Time Parameters GTIM$r FORTRAN Call: CALL GETTIM (ibfp[,ids])e( ibfp An eight-word integer array ids Directive status Macro Call: GTIM$ buf, buf Address of an eight-word buffer Buffer format:  Word 0 Year (since 1900)  Word 1 Month (1-12) Word 2 Day (1-31) Word 3 Hour (0-23)u Word 4 Minute (0-59)i Word 5 Second (0-59)N Word 6 Tick of second Word 7 Ticks per second2 GET_TASK_PARAMETERSm#GTSKf2 GTSKG Get Task Parameters GTSK$e FORTRAN Call: CALL GETTSK (buf[,ids])D buf An 18-word integer array to receive the task parameters ids Directive status Macro Call: GTSK$ buf) buf Address of an 18-word bufferm2 INHIBIT_AST_RECOGNITIONm#IHAR 2 IHARG Inhibit AST Recognition ($S form recommended) IHAR$SW FORTRAN Call: CALL INASTR [(ids)]W ids Directive status5 Macro Call: IHAR$S [err]" err Error-routine address2 MAP_ADDRESS_WINDOWG Map Address Window MAP$O FORTRAN Call: CALL MAP (iwdb[,ids])H iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window Definition Block e ids Directive statusO Macro Call: MAP$ wdb2, wdb Window Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block.G 2 MARK_TIMEk#MRKTt2 MRKTG Mark Time MRKT$i FORTRAN Call:" CALL MARK (efn,tmg,tnt[,ids]) efn Event flag number$ tmg Time interval magnitude tnt Time interval unit  ids Directive statusnG The ISA standard call for delaying a task for a specified time  interval is also provided:i CALL WAIT (tmg,tnt,ids)$ tmg Time interval magnitude tnt Time interval unitr ids Directive statusI Macro Call: MRKT$ [efn],tmg,tnt[,ast] efn Event flag number$ tmg Time interval magnitude tnt Time interval unit $ ast AST entry-point address Legal tmg values for CALL WAIT: 0 for ticks 1 for milliseconds/ Legal tmg value for CALL MARK and macro calls:P 1 for tickst Legal tmg values for all forms: 2 for secondso 3 for minutes  4 for hourss2 MAP_SUPERVISOR_DSPACEs#MSDSi2 MSDSG Map Supervisor D-Space (RSX-11M-PLUS) MSDS$b FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: MSDS$ mask E mask A seven-bit mask with one bit corresponding to each IC supervisor-mode D-space APR. If the bit is set, thefD APR is mapped to supervisor-mode I-space. If the bitE is clear, the APR is mapped to user-mode D-space.DA The seven bits are specified in bits 8 through 14 s of the mask word.2 MOVE_USER_SUPERVISOR_ID_SPACEr#MVTSB2 MVTSH Move to/from User/Supervisor I/D-Space (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) MVTS$ FORTRAN Call: Not s00uTADATADATADATADATADATAupported Macro Call: MVTS$ action,addr,val buff% action One of the following:5 MV.TUI -- Move to user I-spacee5 MV.TUD -- Move to user D-space; MV.TSI -- Move to supervisor I-space ; MV.TSD -- Move to supervisor D-spaced7 MV.FUI -- Move from user I-space 7 MV.FUD -- Move from user D-space = MV.FSI -- Move from supervisor I-spaceb= MV.FSD -- Move from supervisor D-space,3 addr Address of the location in the tasksF buf Buffer to receive the value fetched (for the move-from operations)WC val Value to be stored in the location (for the move-to  operations) 2 PARSE_FCSe#PFCST2 PFCSG Parse FCS (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) PFCS$M FORTRAN Call:F CALL PRSFCS ([mod],[itbmsk],[lun],prbuf,prsz,rsbuf,rssz,[rslen],> [prsblk,prssz],[dfnbk,dfnsz],[rsmsk][,idsw])G mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify one + of the following values:s" LB.LOC = 1" LB.LOG = 2G Specifying one of these values indicates that G matches in the logical table are based on the exactvG value. Not specifying a value indicates that theiG system will look for the first matching logical ; block, regardless of the modifier value.rG itbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical table from beingIG searched. The following symbol bit definitions, G when set, prevent a particular table from being  searched:/ System (IN.SYS) = 10 / Group (IN.GRP) = 4c/ Session (IN.SES) = 20 / Task (IN.TSK) = 1b% lun LUN to be assigned-G prbuf Array containing the primary file specificationrG buffer; prbuf and prsz must both be specified oreG both omitted; if omitted, a comma between their G positions must be present unless no other parameters  follow G prsz Size (in bytes) of the primary file specification G buffer; prbuf and prsz must both be specified oraG both omitted; if omitted, a comma between theireG positions must be present unless no other parameterse follownG rsbuf Array containing the resulting file specification. buffer)G rssz Size (in bytes) of the resulting file specification  buffern? rslen Integer to receive the resulting string sizea3 prsblk Array containing the parse block 5 prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse blockG dfnbk Array containing the default name block; dfnbk and G dfnsz must both be specified or both omitted; if G omitted, a comma between their positions must be < present unless no other parameters followG dfnsz Size of the default name block; dfnbk and dfnsz must G both be specified or both omitted; if omitted, a G comma between their positions must be present unless - no other parameters follownG rsmsk Mask of fields in the resulting string to suppress G before returning the string. The bits currently G defined are the same as those for the flag word inaG the parse block. The bits are FS$NOD, FS$DEV, G 00N} FS$DIR, FS$NAM, FS$TYP, and FS$VER. If the bit G FS$NDF is set, the device is not defaulted to andoG the LUN is not assigned. (FS$NDF has no meaning fora' the FSS$ directive.)n? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:I PFCS$ mod,tbmsk,lun,prbuf,prsz,rsbuf,rssz,rslen,prsblk,prssz,dfnbk,B dfnsz,rsmsktG mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify onep+ of the following values:n" LB.LOC = 1" LB.LOG = 2G Specifying one of these values indicates thattG matches in the logical table are based on the exactWG value. Not specifying a value indicates that thetG system will look for the first matching logicalv; block, regardless of the modifier value.lG tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical table from beinghG searched. The following symbol bit definitions,WG when set, prevent a particular table from beinge searched:/ System (IN.SYS) = 10o/ Group (IN.GRP) = 4c/ Session (IN.SES) = 20a/ Task (IN.TSK) = 1n% lun LUN to be assigned C prbuf Address of the primary file specification buffer G prsz Size (in bytes) of the primary file specifications buffereE rsbuf Address of the resulting file specification buffer G rssz Size (in bytes) of the resulting file specification  bufferoG rslen Address of a word to receive the resulting stringw- prsblk Address of the parse block 5 prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse blockw4 dfnbk Address of the default name block1 dfnsz Size of the default name blocksG rsmsk Mask of fields in the resulting string to suppressnG before returning the string. The bits currently G defined are the same as those for the flag word in G the parse block. The bits are FS$NOD, FS$DEV, G FS$DIR, FS$NAM, FS$TYP, and FS$VER. If the bit G FS$NDF is set, the device is not defaulted to andG the LUN is not assigned. (FS$NDF has no meaning fors' the FSS$ directive.)r 2 PARSE_RMS #PRMS 2 PRMSH Parse RMS (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) PRMS$ FORTRAN Call: F CALL PRSRMS ([mod],[itbmsk],[lun],prbuf,prsz,rsbuf,rssz,[rslen],= [prsblk,prssz],[dfbuf,dfsz],[rsmsk][,idsw])lG mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify onee+ of the following values:R" LB.LOC = 1" LB.LOG = 2G Specifying one of these values indicates thatlG matches in the logical table are based on the exact:G value. Not specifying a value indicates that thenG system will look for the first matching logical ; block, regardless of the modifier value. G itbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical table from beingfG searched. The following symbol bit definitions, G when set, prevent a particular table from beingW searched:/ System (IN.SYS) = 102/ Group (IN.GRP) = 4)/ Session (IN.SES) = 20t/ Task (IN.TSK) = 1 % lun LUN to be assigned,G prbuf Array containing the primary file specificationn00uTADATADATADATADATADATAG buffer; prbuf and prsz must both be specified orG both omitted; if omitted, a comma between theirSG positions must be present unless no other parametersh follow G prsz Size (in bytes) of the primary file specificationNG buffer; prbuf and prsz must both be specified ornG both omitted; if omitted, a comma between their G positions must be present unless no other parameters  followhG rsbuf Array containing the resulting file specification bufferCG rssz Size (in bytes) of the resulting file specificationa bufferf? rslen Integer to receive the resulting string size 3 prsblk Array containing the parse blocko5 prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse blockoG dfbuf Address of the default file specification buffer;eG dfbuf and dfsz must both be specified or botheG omitted; if omitted, a comma between their positionsWD must be present unless no other parameters followG dfsz Size of the default file specification buffer; dfbuf G and dfsz must both be specified or both omitted; ifiG omitted, a comma between their positions must be< present unless no other parameters followG rsmsk Mask of fields in the resulting string to suppressnG before returning the string. The bits currentlyG defined are the same as those for the flag word infG the parse block. The bits are FS$NOD, FS$DEV,_G FS$DIR, FS$NAM, FS$TYP, and FS$VER. If the bit G FS$NDF is set, the device and directory are noti= defaulted to and the LUN is not assigned.n4 (FS$NDF has no meaning for the FSS$ directive.)@ idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word. Macro Call: I PRMS$ mod,tbmsk,lun,prbuf,prsz,rsbuf,rssz,rslen,prsblk,prssz,dfbuf,( dfsz,rsmskG mod Modifier for logical name table entries; specify onez+ of the following values:m" LB.LOC = 1" LB.LOG = 2G Specifying one of these values indicates thatXG matches in the logical table are based on the exactcG value. Not specifying a value indicates that the G system will look for the first matching logical ; block, regardless of the modifier value.eG tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical table from beingoG searched. The following symbol bit definitions,tG when set, prevent a particular table from being  searched:/ System (IN.SYS) = 10A/ Group (IN.GRP) = 4n/ Session (IN.SES) = 20i/ Task (IN.TSK) = 1f% lun LUN to be assigned C prbuf Address of the primary file specification buffer G prsz Size (in bytes) of the primary file specification  buffer E rsbuf Address of the resulting file specification bufferG rssz Size (in bytes) of the resulting file specification  buffer G rslen Address of a word to receive the resulting string  size - prsblk Address of the parse blocke5 prssz Size (in bytes) of the parse blockMC dfbuf Address of the default file specification bufferbG dfsz Size (in bytes) of the default file specificationi buffer 00N}G rsmsk Mask of fields in the resulting string to suppressdG before returning the string. The bits currentlyG defined are the same as those for the flag word in G the parse block. The bits are FS$NOD, FS$DEV, G FS$DIR, FS$NAM, FS$TYP, and FS$VER. If the bitNG FS$NDF is set, the device and directory are not G defaulted to and the LUN is not assigned. (FS$NDF): has no meaning for the FSS$ directive.)2 QUEUE_IO_REQUEST#QIO2 QIO G Queue I/O Request QIO$r FORTRAN Call:5 CALL QIO (fnc,lun,[efn],[pri],[isb],[prl][,ids])e fuc I/O function code lun Logical unit number efn Event flag number= pri Priority (ignored, but parameter must be presentr in call)oA isb A two-word integer array to receive final I/O statusfF prl A six-word integer array containing device-dependentD parameters to be placed in parameter words 1 through 6D of the Directive Parameter Block (DPB). Fill in this8 array by using the GETADR routine.  ids Directive statuse Macro Call:/ QIO$ fnc,lun,[efn],[pri],[isb],[ast],[prl]N fnc I/O function code lun Logical unit number efn Event flag number? pri Priority (ignored, but Q.IOPR byte must be presentS in DPB)( isb Address of I/O status block7 ast Address of AST service-routine entry point(2 prl Parameter list of the form 2 QUEUE_IO_REQUEST_AND_WAIT #QIOWW2 QIOWG Queue I/O Request and Wait QIOW$  FORTRAN Call:5 CALL WTQIO (fnc,lun,efn,[pri],[isb],[prl][,ids])  fnc I/O function code lun Logical unit number efn Event flag number= pri Priority (ignored, but parameter must be presenti in call)kA isb A two-word integer array to receive final I/O status2E prl A six-word integer array containing device-dependentDD parameters to be placed in parameter words 1 through 6 of the DPB  ids Directive status Macro Call:0 QIOW$ fnc,lun,[efn],[pri],[isb],[ast][,prl] fnc I/O function code lun Logical unit number efn Event flag number? pri Priority (ignored, but Q.IOPR byte must be presenta in DPB)( isb Address of I/O status block7 ast Address of AST service-routine entry point2 prl Parameter list of the form 2 RECEIVE_DATA#RCVD 2 RCVDG Receive Data RCVD$  FORTRAN Call:# CALL RECEIV ([tsk],buf[,,ids])l< tsk Sender task name (if not specified, data may be$ received from any task)6 buf A 15-word integer array for received data ids Directive statusr Macro Call: RCVD$ [tsk],bufC tsk Sender task name (if not specified, data may be$ received from any task)( buf Address of a 15-word buffer2 RECEIVE_DATA_OR_EXIT#RCVX-2 RCVX Receive Data or Exit RCVX$ FORTRAN Call:# CALL RECOEX ([tsk],buf[,,ids])C tsk Sender task name (if not specified, data may bee$ received from any task)6 buf A 15-word integer array for received data ids Directive statusv Macro Call: RCVX$ [tsk],bufC tsk Sender task name (if not specified, data may be $ received from any task)( buf Address of a 15-word buffer2 RECEIVE_DATA_OR_STOP#RCSTS2 RCSTG Receive Data or Stop RCST$P FORTRAN Call:$ CALL RCST ([rtname],ibuf[,i00uTADATADATADATADATADATAds])D rtname Sender task name (if not specified, data may be' received from any task)lF ibuf Address of a 15-word buffer to receive the sender task name and datao< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: RCST$ [tname],bufD tname Sender task name (if not specified, data may be' received from any task) D buf Address of a 15-word buffer to receive the sender" task name and data2 READ_ALL_EVENT_FLAGS#RDAFm2 RDAFG Read All Event Flags RDAF$  FORTRAN Call:= A FORTRAN task can read only one event flag. The call is:  CALL READEF (efn[,ids]) efn Event flag number n ids Directive status  rC The Executive returns the status codes IS.SET (+02) and IS.CLRMC (00) for FORTRAN calls in order to report event-flag polarity. Macro Call: RDAF$ buf* buf Address of a four-word buffer Buffer format:]! Word 0 Task local flags 1-16 " Word 1 Task local flags 17-32# Word 2 Task common flags 33-48 # Word 3 Task common flags 49-64s2 READ_EVENT_FLAG #RDEF 2 RDEF G Read Event Flag RDEF$f FORTRAN Call: CALL READEF (iefn[,ids]) 5 iefn Integer containing an event flag numberC ids Integer variable to receive the Directive Status WordiC The Executive returns the status codes IS.SET (+02) and IS.CLRaC (00) for FORTRAN calls in order to report event-flag polarity. Macro Call: RDEF$ efn efn Event flag number2 READ_EXTENDED_EVENT_FLAGS.#RDXF 2 RDXFE Read Extended Event Flags (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX RDXF$p FORTRAN Call:= A FORTRAN task can read only one event flag. The call is:  CALL READEF (efn[,ids]) efn Event flag number G ids Directive status Macro Call: RDXF$ buf) buf Address of a six-word buffer Buffer format:L! Word 0 Task local flags 1-16 " Word 1 Task local flags 17-32# Word 2 Task common flags 33-48 # Word 3 Task common flags 49-64t) Word 4 Task Group Global flags 65-80 ) Word 5 Task Group Global flags 81-96h------------------------'2 RECURSIVE_TRANSLATION_OF_LOGICAL_NAMEp#RLONr2 RLONF Recursive Translation of Logical Name (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) RLON$ RLOG$9 (CALL RCTLON and RLON$ are the preferred calls to use ont@ RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX. CALL RCTLOG and RLOG$ are provided for compatibility with P/OS.) FORTRAN Call:? CALL RCTLON (mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,ienssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],  [status],[idsw])? CALL RCTLOG (mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,ienssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],  [status],[idsw])G mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; 1 restricted to LB.LOC or LB.LOGeG tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical name table fromaG being searched. The following symbol bit G definitions, when set, prevent a particular table ' from being searched:p1 System (IN.SYS) = 10t1 Group (IN.GRP) = 4 1 Session (IN.SES) = 20 1 User (IN.USR) = 1mG If no mask is specified, the tables are searched in F the following order: user, session, group, system.E lns Character array containing the logical name stringl= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string F ens Character array buffer to contain the returned% equivalence stringnG ienssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for the returneda* equivalence name stringG rsize 00N} Word to receive the size of the returned equivalencei name$G rtbmod Word to receive, in the lower byte, the table numberLG and, in the higher byte, the modifier value of theF' located logical namet; status Word to receive the logical status word: < LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status bit: LS.PRV = 2 Privileged status? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:C RLON$ mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,enssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],[status] C RLOG$ mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,enssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],[status] D mod Modifier of the logical name within a table;1 restricted to LB.LOC or LB.LOGtG tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a table from being searched. G The following symbol bit definitions, when set,dB prevent a particular table from being searched:1 System (IN.SYS) = 10 1 Group (IN.GRP) = 4o1 Session (IN.SES) = 20i1 User (IN.USR) = 1cG If no mask is specified, the tables are searched in F the following order: user, session, group, system.C lns Character array containg the logical name stringu= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string G ens Character array to contain the returned equivalence  stringcG enssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for the returnedu* equivalence name stringG rsize Word to receive the size of the returned equivalence G name; this size is always the actual size of the G equivalence name regardless of the string size ' specified with ensszaG rtbmod Word to receive, in the lower byte, the table number G and, in the higher byte, the modifier value of thef' located logical namer6 status Word to receive the logical status:< LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status bit: LS.PRV = 2 Privileged status------------------------2 REGION_DEFINITION_BLOCK #RDB2 RDBI Region Definition Block RDB Formate Word 0 R.GID -- Region IDD Word 1 R.GSIZ -- Region size* Words 2-3 R.NAM -- Region name (Radix-50)< Words 4-5 R.GPAR -- Region's main partition name (Radix-50)% Word 6 R.GSTS -- Region status wordM) Word 7 R.GPRO -- Region protection wordU R.GSTS bit definitions: 0 RS.CRR=100000 ;Region was created successfully= RS.UNM=40000 ;One or more windows were unmapped on a detach 3 RS.MDL=200 ;Mark region for delete on last detachs= RS.NDL=100 ;Created region is not to be marked for deletioni' ;on last detachh% RS.ATT=40 ;Attach to created region - RS.NEX=20 ;Created region is not extendableL, RS.DEL=10 ;Delete access desired on attach+ RS.EXT=4 ;Extend access desired on attach * RS.WRT=2 ;Write access desired on attach) RS.RED=1 ;Read access desired on attachl2 REMOVE_AFFINITY #RMAFi2 RMAF tJ Remove Affinity (RSX-11M-PLUS multiprocessor; $S form recommended) RMAF$S FORTRAN Call: CALL RMAF [(ids)] 8 ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: RMAF$Se(2 REQUEST_AND_PASS_OFFSPRING_INFORMATION#RPOI 2 RPOIG Request and Pass Offspring Information RPOI$t FORTRAN Call:I CALL RPOI (tname,[iugc],[iumc],[iparen],[ibuf],[ibfl],[isc],[idnam],=. [iunit],[itask],[ocbad][,ids])H tname Name of an array containing the actual name in Radix-50F of the task to be requested and optionally chained toD iugc Name of an integer containing the group code number@ 00uTADATADATADATADATADATA for the UIC of the requested target chain taskE iumc Name of an integer containing the member code numbert? for the UIC of the requested target chain task J iparen Name of an array (or I*4 integer) containing the Radix-50C name of the parent task. (This is returned in thef> information buffer of the GTCMCI subroutine.)N ibuf Name of an array containing the command line text for the chained task B ibfl Name of an integer containing the number of bytes1 in the command in the ibuf arrayoF isc Flag byte controlling the actions of this directive* request when executed D idnam Name of an integer containing the ASCII name of theM requested task's TI: (must be the name of a physical device) E iunit Name of an integer containing the unit number of thee% requested task's TI: B itask Name of an array containing the Radix-50 name the/ requested task is to run undertJ On Micro/RSX systems, any task may specify a new name forH the requested task as long as the requested task is not a CLI task.F The requested task (specified in the tname parameter)8 must be installed in the ...tsk format.@ ocbad Name of an integer containing the internal poolI address of the parent OCB. This value may be obtained I only in the information buffer of the GTCMCI subroutine,uF which only a CLI can issue; therefore, only a CLI can' specify this argument. = ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word$ Macro Call:G RPOI$ tname,,,,[ugc],[umc],[parent],[bufadr],[buflen],[sc],[dnam],e [unit],[task],[ocbad]. tname Name of task to be chained to= ugc Group code for the UIC of the requested task)> umc Member code for the UIC of the requested taskG parent Name of issuing task's parent task whose connection ise to be passed.D bufadr Address of buffer to be given to the requested taskC buflen Length of buffer to be given to the requested task  sc Flag bits:1@ RP.OEX -- (200) Force issuing task to exitL RP.OAL -- (1) Pass all connections (default is none)? RP.ONX -- (2) Pass the first connection in the queue,e if there is oneiJ dnam ASCII device name for TI: (must be the name of a physical device)* unit Unit number of task's TI:4 task Radix-50 name task is to be started9 On RSX-11M systems, this argument is valid only if thee issuing task is a CLI task. 7 On RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems, any task may t8 specify a new name for the requested task as long as ( the requested task is not a CLI task.8 For all systems the requested task (specified in the ; tname parameter) must be installed in the ...tsk format. 3 ocbad Address of OCB to pass (CLIs only)t2 REQUEST_TASK#RQST 2 RQSTG Request Task RQST$  FORTRAN Call:" CALL REQUES (tsk,[opt][,ids]) tsk Task name& opt A four-word integer arrayB opt(1) First half of partition name (ignored, but( must be present)C opt(2) Second half of partition name (ignored, bute( must be present)? opt(3) Priority (ignored, but must be present) 0 opt(4) User Identification Code ids Directive status Macro Call:$ RQST$ tsk,[prt],[pri][,ugc,umc] tsk Task name: prt Partition name (ignored, but must be present)00N}4 pri Priority (ignored, but must be present) ugc UIC group code  umc UIC member code2 RECEIVE_BY_REFERENCE#RREF 2 RREFG Receive By Reference RREF$  FORTRAN Call:" CALL RREF (iwdb,[isrb][,ids])J iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window Definition Block $F isrb A 10-word integer array to be used as the receiveF buffer. If the call omits this parameter, the contents! of iwdb(8) are unchanged.e ids Directive statusI Macro Call: RREF$ wdb. wdb Window Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block. 2 RECEIVE_BY_REFERENCE_OR_STOP#RRST 2 RRSTG Receive By Reference or Stop RRST$i FORTRAN Call:# CALL RRST (iwdb,[isrb][,ids])aG iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window! Definition Block G isrb A 10-word integer array to be used as the receive G buffer. If the call omits this parameter, thel3 contents of iwdb(8) are unchanged. ! ids Directive status Macro Call: RRST$ wdb0 wdb Window Definition Block address 2 RESUME_TASKf#RSUMO2 RSUMG Resume Task RSUM$b FORTRAN Call: CALL RESUME (tsk[,ids]) tsk Task name ids Directive statusA Macro Call: RSUM$ tsk tsk Task name 2 RUN_TASKG Run Task RUN$U FORTRAN Call:3 CALL RUN (tsk,[opt],smg,snt,[rmg],[rnt][,ids])  tsk Task name' opt A four-word integer array:LC opt(1) First half of partition name (ignored, butt( must be present)D opt(2) Second half of partition name (ignored, but( must be present)? opt(3) Priority (ignored, but must be present)n0 opt(4) User Identification Code% smg Schedule delta magnitude 7 snt Schedule delta unit (either 1, 2, 3, or 4)u* rmg Reschedule interval magnitude% rnt Reschedule interval unit  ids Directive status]> The ISA standard call for initiating a task is also provided:# CALL START (tsk,smg,snt[,ids])f tsk Task name% smg Schedule delta magnitudeb: snt Schedule delta unit (either 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4) ids Directive statusd Macro Call:7 RUN$ tsk,[prt],[pri],[ugc],[umc],smg,snt[,rmg,rnt]t tsk Task name: prt Partition name (ignored, but must be present)4 pri Priority (ignored, but must be present) ugc UIC group code[ umc UIC member code% smg Schedule delta magnitude7 snt Schedule delta unit (either 1, 2, 3, or 4)o* rmg Reschedule interval magnitude% rnt Reschedule interval unit2 SPECIFY_COMMAND_ARRIVAL_ASTk#SCAAe2 SCAAG Specify Command Arrival AST SCAA$t FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: SCAA$ [ast]E ast AST service-routine entry point. Omitting this parameter ? disables command arrival ASTs for the issuing taskm0 until the directive is respecified.2 SUPERVISOR_CALLt#SCAL2 SCAL AH Supervisor Call (RSX-11M-PLUS; $S form recommended) SCAL$S FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: SCAL$S saddr,caddr[,err]c= saddr Address of the called supervisor-mode routine D caddr Address of the completion routine for return to the caller( err Address of error routine NOTE F7 We strongly suggest using the Task Builder 00 uTADATADATADATADATADATAto resolve 9 references to supervisor-mode routines rather than usingy9 the SCAL$S directive explicitly. Doing so allows you tou> take advantage of the CSM (Call Supervisor Mode) instruction,' which is not used by the Task Builder.s2 SET_COMMAND_LINE_INTERPRETER#SCLIa2 SCLIF Set Command Line Interpreter SCLI$ FORTRAN Call:( CALL SETCLI (icli,idev,iunit[,ids])C icli Name of a two-word array element containing the nameo5 of the CLI to which the terminal is to be setaB idev Name of an integer containing the ASCII name of the2 terminal to be set (default is TI:)C iunit Name of an integer containing the unit number of thec terminalD ids Directive statust Macro Call: SCLI$ cli,[dev],[unit] A cli Name of the CLI to which the terminal is to be setID dev ASCII name of the terminal to be set (default is TI:)& unit Unit number of terminal 2 SEND_DATAd#SDAT 2 SDATG Send Data SDAT$  FORTRAN Call:$ CALL SEND (tsk,buf,[efn][,ids]) tsk Task name7 buf A 13-word integer array of data to be sentF efn Event flag number ids Directive status Macro Call: SDAT$ tsk,buf[,efn] tsk Task name- buf Address of a 13-word data buffer efn Event flag number2 SET_DEFAULT_DIRECTORYt#SDIRr2 SDIRD Set Default Directory (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) SDIR$ FORTRAN Call:+ CALL SETDDS (mod,iens,ienssz,[idsw]) G mod Modifier for the SDIR$ directive; specify one of theE# following values:D3 0 = Modify task default 7 SD.LOG = Modify terminal default 7 SD.BYE = Delete terminal default D SD.TI = Set task default to terminal defaultG iens Character array containing the default directorys stringA ienssz Size (in bytes) of the default directory stringa> idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: {mod }k? SDIR$ {,ens,enssz } (must choose one of these options)1 {mod,ens,enssz}-G mod Modifier for the SDIR$ directive; specify one of thes" following values:2 0 = Modify task default6 SD.LOG = Modify terminal default6 SD.BYE = Delete terminal defaultC SD.TI = Set task default to terminal defaulttG ens Buffer address of the default directory string; if not)G specified, the default directory string is deleted G (ens and enssz must be selected to modify the default)aG enssz Size (in bytes) of the default directory string (enssz.@ and ens must be selected to modify the default)2 SDRCNf#SDRC 2 SEND_REQUEST_AND_CONNECT#SDRC 2 SDRCG Send, Request, and Connect SDRC$v FORTRAN Call:? CALL SDRC (rtname,ibuf,[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids]) @ CALL SDRCN (rtname,ibuf,[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids])F rtname Target task name of the offspring task to be connectedr/ ibuf Name of a 13-word send buffermF iefn Event flag to be set when the offspring task exits! or emits status,F iast Name of an AST routine to be called when theC Offspring task exits or emits status (ignored forr CALL SDRCN)J iesb Name of an eight-word status block to be written when: the Offspring task exits or emits statusF iparm Name of a word to receive the status block address$ 00(N} when an AST occurs> ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:' SDRC$ tname,buf,[efn],[east],[esb]eF tname Target task name of the offspring task to be connected1 buf Address of a 13-word send bufferrJ efn The event flag to be cleared on issuance and set when the5 offspring task exits or emits statusVF east Address of an AST routine to be called when the5 offspring task exits or emits statusoK esb Address of an eight-word status block to be written when,9 the offspring task exits or emits statuso42 SEND_DATA_REQUEST_AND_PASS_OFFSPRING_CONTROL_BLOCK#SDRP 2 SDRPG Send Data Request and Pass Offspring Control Block SDRP$  FORTRAN Call:9 CALL SDRP (task,ibuf,[ibfl],[iefn],[iflag],[iparen],m [iocbad][,ids])dA task Name of an array (REAL, INTEGER, I*4) containing4 the Radix-50 name of the target taskC ibuf Name of an integer array containing data to be sent A ibfl Name of an integer containing the number of wordsNH (integers) in the array to be sent. On RSX-11M systems,7 this argument must always be 13 or must be defaulted.u ( On RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems,B this argument may be in the range of 1 to 255(10). 2 On any system, if this argument is not specified' a default value of 13(10) is assumed.n? iefn Name of an integer containing the number of theS< event flag to be set when this directive is% executed successfully G iflag Name of an integer containing flag bits controlling the - execution of this directive eI iparen Name of array containing the Radix-50 name of the parenthJ task whose connection should be passed to the target task.: The name of the parent task was returned in the informa-( tion buffer of the GTCMCI subroutine.I iocbad Name of an integer containing the pool address of the OCB C to pass. Only CLI tasks may specify this parameter. 6 This value was returned in the information buffer of the GTCMCI subroutine.B ids Name of an integer to receive the contents of the % Directive Status Wordi Macro Call:= SDRP$ task,bufadr,[buflen],[efn],[flag],[parent],[ocbad]o- task Name of task to be chained to)C bufadr Address of buffer to be given to the requested task B buflen Length of buffer to be given to the requested task! efn Event flag number E flag Flag bits controlling the execution of this directiverF parent Name of issuing task's parent task whose connection isB to be passed. If not specified, all connections or7 no connections are passed, depending on the flag bit.h2 ocbad Address of OCB to pass (CLIs only)2 SET_EVENT_FLAG#SETFn2 SETFG Set Event Flag SETF$e FORTRAN Call: CALL SETEF (efn[,ids])d efn Event flag number ids Directive statusA Macro Call: SETF$ efn efn Event flag number02 SPECIFY_FLOATING_POINT_PROCESSOR_EXCEPTION_AST#SFPA2 SFPAG Specify Floating Point Processor Exception AST SFPA$o FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: SFPA$ [ast]4 ast AST service-routine entry-point address2 SEND_MESSAGE#SMSG 2 SMSGG Send Message SMSG$f FORTRAN Call:/ CALL SMSG (itgt,ibuf,ibufl,iprm,iprml,ids)s> itgt Name of an integer containing the target object+ (currently, only SM.SER is defined) A ibuf Name of an integer array containing the data to be 8 inserted into the formatt000uTADATADATADATADATADATAed data packet> ibufl Name of an integer containing the length of the ibuf arrayiA iprm Name of an integer array containing any additionalu parametersE iprml Name of an integer containing the number of parameters  in the iprm arraynC ids Name of an optional integer to receive the directivef status Macro Call:$ SMSG$ tgt,buf,len,( tgt Target identifier9 buf Address of an optional data bufferNB len Length in bytes of the optional data buffer= pri,...,prn Target-specific (for the Error Logger)r& parameter list:8 SMSG$ SM.SER,buf,len,3 typ Error Logger packet type code6 sub Error Logger packet subtype code7 lun Logical unit number of the device ' msk Control mask word 2 SEND_NEXT_COMMAND'#SNXC2 SNXC kK Send Next Command (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) SNXC$e FORTRAN Call:% CALL SNXC ([dnam][,iunit][,ids]) ; dnam Device name (ASCII); if not specified, TI: is usedtA iunit Unit number of the terminal from which the command is to be sent 5 ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Wordh Macro call: SNXC$ [dnam][,unum]; dnam Device name (ASCII); if not specified, TI: is used A unum Unit number of the terminal from which the command is toh be sentC2 SPECIFY_PARITY_ERROR_AST#SPEA 2 SPEAG Specify Parity Error AST (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) SPEA$  FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: SPEA$ [ast]4 ast AST service-routine entry-point address 2 SUSPENDi#SPND 2 SPNDG Suspend ($S form recommended) SPND$S, FORTRAN Call: CALL SUSPND [(ids)] ids Directive status Macro Call: SPND$S [err] " err Error-routine address2 SPECIFY_POWER_RECOVERY_AST#SPRA 2 SPRAG Specify Power Recovery AST SPRA$  FORTRAN Call: To establish an AST: EXTERNAL sub CALL PWRUP (sub)eF sub Name of a subroutine to be executed upon powerD recovery. The PWRUP subroutine will effect a+ CALL sub (no arguments) F The subroutine is called as a result of a power? recovery AST, and therefore, may be controlledf; at critical points by using the DSASTR (or3 INASTR) and ENASTR subroutine calls.h To remove an AST: CALL PWRUPc Macro Call: SPRA$ [ast]4 ast AST service-routine entry-point address2 SPAWNN#SPWNO2 SPWNG Spawn SPWN$t FORTRAN Call:C CALL SPAWN (rtname,[iugc],[iumc],[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm], 7 [icmlin],[icmlen],[iunit],[dnam][,ids]) D CALL SPAWNN (rtname,[iugc],[iumc],[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm],8 [icmlin],[icmlen],[iunit],[dnam][,ids])C rtname Name (Radix-50) of the offspring task to be spawned C iugc Group code number for the UIC of the offspring task D iumc Member code number for the UIC of the offspring taskD iefn Event flag to be set when the offspring task exits or emits status1D iast Name of an AST routine to be called when theB offspring task exits or emits status (ignored for  CALL SPAWNN) H iesb Name of an eight-word status block to be written when8 the offspring task exits or emits statusD iparm Name of a word to receive the status block address# when the AST occurs,D icmlin Name of a command line to be queued for the of008N}fspring task> icmlen Length of the command line; maximum length is > 79(10) for RSX-11M and 255(10) for RSX-11M-PLUS and for Micro/RSXRJ iunit Unit number of terminal to be used as the TI: for the off-D spring task. On RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems,' if the optional dnam parameter D is not specified, this parameter must be the unitD number of a virtual terminal created by the issuingC task; if a value of 0 is specified, the TI: of the)H issuing task is propagated. A task must be a privileged5 task or a CLI task in order to specify a TI: othera than the parent task's TI:.DD dnam Device name mnemonic (must be the name of a physical2 device). On RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems,/ if not specified, the virtual terminali$ specified by iunit is used as TI:.< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:C SPWN$ tname,,,[ugc],[umc],[efn],[east],[esb],[cmdlin],[cmdlen]  ,[unum],[dnam] C tname Name (Radix-50) of the offspring task to be spawned C ugc Group code number for the UIC of the offspring taskeD umc Member code number for the UIC of the offspring taskD efn The event flag to be cleared on issuance and set= when the offspring task exits or emits status D east Address of an AST routine to be called when the4 offspring task exits or emits statusH esb Address of an eight-word status block to be written when8 the offspring task exits or emits statusD cmdlin Address of a command line to be queued for the offspring taskD cmdlen Length of the command line; maximum length is 79(10)7 for RSX-11M systems, and 255(10) for RSX-11M-PLUS anda Micro/RSX systems J unum Unit number of terminal to be used as the TI: for the off-< spring task. If the optional dnam parameterD is not specified, this parameter must be the unitD number of a virtual terminal created by the issuingD task. If a value of 0 is specified, the TI: of theH issuing task is propagated. A task must be a privileged9 task or a CLI task in order to specify a TI: other thanc the parent task's TI:.D dnam Device name mnemonic (must be the name of a physical< device). If not specified, the virtual terminal specified by unum is used as TI:.2 SPECIFY_RECEIVE_DATA_AST#SRDAi2 SRDAG Specify Receive Data AST SRDA$R FORTRAN Call:E Neither the FORTRAN language nor the ISA standard permits direct F linking to system-trapping mechanisms. Therefore, this directive' is not available to FORTRAN tasks.u Macro Call: SRDA$ [ast]8 ast AST service-routine entry-point address (0)2 SPECIFY_REQUESTED_EXIT_AST#SREAh2 SREX#SREA42 SREAFSpecify Requested Exit AST SREA$F SREX$ FORTRAN Call: CALL SREA (ast[,ids])4 ast Name of the externally declared AST routine> ids Name of an optional integer to receive the Directive Status Wordi/ CALL SREX (ast,ipblk,ipblkl,[dummy][,ids]) 4 ast Name of the externally declared AST routine@ ipblk Name of an integer array to receive the trap-dependent parametersA ipblkl Number of parameters to be returned into the ipblk arrayL dummy Reserved for future useE ids Name of an optional integer to receive the Directive Status  Word Macro Call: SREA$ [ast] SREX$ [ast][,dummy]7 ast AST service-routine entry-point address & dummy Reserved for future use2 SEND_BY_REFERENCE #SREFO2 SREFG Send By Reference 00@uTADATADATADATADATADATA SREF$s FORTRAN Call:, CALL SREF (tsk,[efn],iwdb,[isrb][,ids])C tsk A single-precision, floating-point variable containingS7 the name of the receiving task in Radix-50 formata efn Event flag numberH iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window Definition Block LH isrb An eight-word integer array containing additionalE information (if specified, the address if isrb is placedf= in iwdb(8); if isrb is omitted, the contents of iwdb(8)N remain unchanged)i ids Directive status Macro Call: SREF$ task,wdb[,efn]& task Name of the receiver task, wdb Window Definition Block address efn Event flag number"2 SPECIFY_RECEIVE_BY_REFERENCE_AST#SRRA]2 SRRAG Specify Receive-By-Reference AST SRRA$ FORTRAN Call:E Neither the FORTRAN language nor the ISA standard permits direct F linking to system-trapping mechanisms. Therefore, this directive' is not available to FORTRAN tasks. Macro Call: SRRA$ [ast]4 ast AST service-routine entry-point address2 SET_AFFINITY#STAFo2 STAF rH Set Affinity (RSX-11M-PLUS multiprocessor) STAF$ FORTRAN Call: CALL STAF (iaff[,ids])t iaff Affinity mask worda9 ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: STAF$ [cp!ub!ub...]& cp CPU selected (A through D). ub UNIBUS runs selected (E through T)2 SET_SYSTEM_TIME#STIM 2 STIMG Set System Time STIM$$ FORTRAN Call:& CALL SETTIM (ibufn[,ibufp][,ids])I ibufn An eight-word integer array--new time specification buffer @ ibufp An eight-word integer array--previous time buffer ids Directive status Macro Call: STIM$ bufn,[bufp]dF bufn Address of the new eight-word time-specification bufferJ bufp Address of eight-word buffer to receive the previous system time parameters' See HELP EXECUTIVE GET_TIME_PARAMETERS 2 STOPG Stop ($S form recommended) STOP$S FORTRAN Call: CALL STOP ([ids])9 ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: STOP$Si$2 STOP_FOR_LOGICAL_OR_OF_EVENT_FLAGS#STLO 2 STLOG Stop for Logical OR of Event Flags STLO$  FORTRAN Call:$ CALL STLOR (ef1,ef2,ef3,...efn)* CALL STLORS (idsw,ef1,ef2,ef3,...efn), ef1...efn List of event flag numbers> idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word d Macro Call: STLO$ grp, msk ) grp Desired group of event flagsi msk A 16-bit mask wordn2 STOP_FOR_SINGLE_EVENT_FLAG#STSEt2 STSEG Stop for Single Event Flag STSE$( FORTRAN Call: CALL STOPFR (iefn[,ids])o iefn Event flag number9 ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Worde Macro Call: STSE$ efn efn Event flag number,2 SPECIFY_SST_VECTOR_TABLE_FOR_DEBUGGING_AID#SVDB,2 SVDBG Specify SST Vector Table for Debugging Aid SVDB$[ FORTRAN Call:E Neither the FORTRAN language nor the ISA standard permits direct F linking to system-trapping mechanisms. Therefore, this directive' is not available to FORTRAN tasks.w Macro Call: SVDB$ [adr][,len], adr Address of the SST vector tableJ len Length of (that is, number of entries in) table in words#2 SPECIFY_SST_VECTOR_TABLE_FOR_TASKo#SVTK 2 SVTKG Specify SST Vector Table for Task SVTK$  FORTRAN Call:E Neither the FORTRAN language nor the ISA standard permits direct F linking to system-trapping mechanisms. Therefore, this directive'00HN} is not available to FORTRAN tasks. Macro Call: SVTK$ [adr][,len], adr Address of the SST vector tableJ len Length of (that is, number of entries in) table in words2 SWITCH_STATE#SWST 2 SWST  Switch State SWST$  FORTRAN Call: Not supported Macro Call: SWST$ base,addrB base The base virtual address within the task for mapping) the subroutine through APR5TH addr Virtual address of the subroutine to be executed in system$ state by the directive!2 TEST_FOR_SPECIFIED_TASK_FEATUREt#TFEAr2 TFEAG Test for Specified Task Feature TFEA$D FORTRAN Call: CALL TFEA (isym,idsw)S5 isym = Symbol for the specified task featureo< idsw = Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: TFEA$ sym5 sym = Symbol for the specified task feature 2 TRANSLAGE_LOGICAL_NAME#TLON,2 TLONG Translate Logical Name (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) TLON$  TLOG$ FORTRAN Calls:n? CALL TRALON (mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,ienssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],  [status][,idsw])? CALL TRALOG (mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,ienssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],h [status][,idsw])G mod Modifier of the logical name within a table; 1 restricted to LB.LOC or LB.LOG(G tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a logical name table fromG being searched. The following symbol bittG definitions, when set, prevent a particular table ' from being searched:x1 System (IN.SYS) = 10t1 Group (IN.GRP) = 4 1 Session (IN.SES) = 20a1 User (IN.USR) = 1 G If no mask is specified, the tables are searched in F the following order: user, session, group, system.E lns Character array containing the logical name stringn= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string F ens Character array buffer to contain the returned% equivalence stringhG ienssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for the returnedo* equivalence name stringG rsize Word to receive the size of the returned equivalence] name G rtbmod Word to receive, in the lower byte, the table numberfG and, in the higher byte, the modifier value of ther' located logical name ; status Word to receive the logical status word:t< LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status bit: LS.PRV = 2 Privileged status? idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Wordn Macro Calls:eC TLOG$ mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,enssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],[status]sC TLON$ mod,tbmsk,lns,lnssz,ens,enssz,[rsize],[rtbmod],[status] D mod Modifier of the logical name within a table;1 restricted to LB.LOC or LB.LOGfG tbmsk Inhibit mask to prevent a table from being searched.eG The following symbol bit definitions, when set,RB prevent a particular table from being searched:1 System (IN.SYS) = 10:1 Group (IN.GRP) = 4$1 Session (IN.SES) = 20i1 User (IN.USR) = 1 G If no mask is specified, the tables are searched inRF the following order: user, session, group, system.C lns Character array containg the logical name stringt= lnssz Size (in bytes) of the logical name string G ens Character array to contain the returned equivalencet00PuTADATADATADATADATADATA stringuG enssz Size (in bytes) of the data area for the returnedr* equivalence name stringG rsize Word to receive the size of the returned equivalencefG name; this size is always the actual size of theaG equivalence name regardless of the string sizef' specified with ensszSG rtbmod Word to receive, in the lower byte, the table numberG and, in the higher byte, the modifier value of then' located logical namen6 status Word to receive the logical status:< LS.TRM = 1 Terminal status bit: LS.PRV = 2 Privileged status!2 UNLOCK_GROUP_GLOBAL_EVENT_FLAGSp#ULGFy2 ULGFG Unlock Group Global Event Flags ($S form recommended) ULGF$S  FORTRAN Call: CALL ULGF ([ids]) ids Directive status Macro Call: ULGF$S [err]S" err Error-routine address2 UNMAP_ADDRESS_WINDOWF Unmap Address Window UMAP$ FORTRAN Call: CALL UNMAP (iwdb[,ids])J iwdb An eight-word integer array containing a Window Definition Block t ids Directive statust Macro Call: UMAP$ wdb. wdb Window Definition Block addressG See HELP EXECUTIVE WDB for information on the Window Definition Block.i 2 UNSTOP_TASKe#USTPf2 USTPG Unstop Task USTP$  FORTRAN Call: CALL USTP (rtname[,ids])rC rtname Name of the task to be unstopped (if not specified,M5 CALL USTP will use the issuing task as its default)i? ids Integer to receive directive status informatione Macro Call: USTP$ [tname]I tname Name of the task to be unstopped (if not specified, USTP$+ will use the issuing task as its default)l2 VARIABLE_RECEIVE_DATA#VRCD 2 VRCD rJ Variable Receive Data (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) VRCD$ FORTRAN Call:+ CALL VRCD ([task],bufadr,buflen,[ids]) task Sender task nameH bufadr Address of the buffer to receive the sender task name; and data (must be word-aligned (INTEGER*2)) $ buflen Length of the buffer< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:& VRCD$ [task],bufadr[,buflen],[ti] task Sender task name bufadr Buffer address$ buflen Buffer size in words6 ti TI: indicator (ignored on RSX systems)5 See also HELP EXECUTIVE VRCS and HELP EXECUTIVE VRCX2 VARIABLE_RECEIVE_DATA_OR_STOP#VRCSR2 VRCSG Variable Receive Data or Stop (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) VRCS$O FORTRAN Call:- CALL VRCS ([task],bufadr,[buflen][,ids]) task Sender task nameH buf Address of the buffer to receive the sender task name and data$ buflen Length of the buffer< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:& VRCS$ [task],bufadr[,buflen],[ti] task Sender task name bufadr Buffer address$ buflen Buffer size in words6 ti TI: indicator (ignored on RSX systems)2 VARIABLE_RECEIVE_DATA_OR_EXIT #VRCX2 VRCX (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX)e hG Variable Receive Data or Exit VRCX$  FORTRAN Call:- CALL VRCX ([task],bufadr,[buflen][,ids]) task Sender task nameH bufadr Address of the buffer to receive the sender task name and data$ buflen Length of the buffer< ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:& VRCX$ [task],bufadr[,buflen],[ti] task Sender task name bufadr Buffer address$ buflen Buffer size in words6 00XN} ti TI: indicator (ignored on RSX systems)2 VARIABLE_SEND_DATA#VSDA 2 VSDA I Variable Send Data (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) VSDA$n FORTRAN Call:1 CALL VSDA (task,bufadr,[buflen],[efn][,ids]) " task Receiver task nameH bufadr Address of the buffer to receive the sender task name; and data (must be word-aligned (INTEGER*2))$ buflen Length of the buffer! efn Event flag number < ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:3 VSDA$ [task],bufadr,[buflen][,efn],[spri],[ti]" task Receiver task name bufadr Buffer address$ buflen Buffer size in words! efn Event flag number 6 spri Send priority (ignored on RSX systems)6 ti TI: indicator (ignored on RSX systems)2 VSRCNi#VSRC #2 VARIABLE_SEND_REQUEST_AND_CONNECTe#VSRCc2 VSRCH Variable Send, Request, and Connect (RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX) VSRC$ FORTRAN Call:J CALL VSRC (rtname,ibuf,[ibuflen],[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids])J CALL VSRCN (rtname,ibuf,[ibuflen],[iefn],[iast],[iesb],[iparm][,ids])F rtname Target task name of the offspring task to be connecteda% ibuf Name of send buffere& ibuflen Length of the bufferF iefn Event flag to be set when the offspring task exits! or emits statuscF iast Name of an AST routine to be called when theC offspring task exits or emits status (ignored forh CALL VSRCN) J iesb Name of an eight-word status block to be written when: the offspring task exits or emits statusF iparm Name of a word to receive the status block address$ when an AST occurs> ids Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call:0 VSRC$ tname,buf[,buflen],[efn],[east],[esb]F tname Target task name of the offspring task to be connectedr* buf Address of a send buffer& buflen Length of the bufferG efn The event flag to be cleared on issuance and set when : the offspring task exits or emits statusF east Address of an AST routine to be called when the6 offspring task exits or emits statusK esb Address of an eight-word status block to be written whena: the offspring task exits or emits status2 WAIT_FOR_SIGNIFICANT_EVENT#WSIGe2 WSIGG Wait for Significant Event ($S form recommended) WSIG$SC FORTRAN Call: CALL WFSNEu Macro Call: WSIG$S [err]c" err Error-routine address$2 WAIT_FOR_LOGICAL_OR_OF_EVENT_FLAGS#WTLOo2 WTLOG Wait for Logical OR of Event Flags WTLO$  FORTRAN Call:e# CALL WFLOR (ef1,ef2,ef3...efn)E* CALL WFLORS (idsw,ef1,ef2,ef3...,efn)G ef1...efn List of event flag numbers taken as the set of flags to$- be specified in the directive < idsw Integer to receive the Directive Status Word Macro Call: WTLO$ grp,msk) grp Desired group of event flagsf$ msk A 16-bit flag mask word2 WAIT_FOR_SINGLE_EVENT_FLAG#WTSEX2 WTSEG Wait for Single Event Flag WTSE$T FORTRAN Call: CALL WAITFR (efn[,ids]) efn Event flag number ids Directive statusm Macro Call: WTSE$ efn efn Event flag number2 WINDOW_DEFINITION_BLOCKf#WDB2 WDBi Window Definition Block Word 0 W.NID -- Window ID Word 1 W.NAPR -- Base APR/ Word 2 W.NBAS -- Virtual base address (bytes)r/ Word 3 W.NSIZ -- Window size (32-word blocks)y Word 4 W.NRID -- Region ID4 Word 5 W.NOFF -- Offset in region (32-word blocks)0 Word 6 W.NLEN -- Length00`uTADATADATADATADATADATA to map (32-word blocks)% Word 7 W.NSTS -- Window status wordR= Word 8 W.NSRB -- Send/Receive buffer virtual address (bytes)s W.NSTS Bit Definitionse8 WS.CRW=100000 ;Address window was created successfully4 WS.UNM=40000 ;One or more windows were unmapped in! ;created address window or mapc6 WS.ELW=20000 ;One or more windows were eliminated in ;create address windowd3 WS.RRF=10000 ;Reference was received successfully ) WS.BPS=4000 ;Always bypass cache on map * WS.NBP=4000 ;Do not bypass cache on CRAW# WS.RES=2000 ;Map only if residentN1 WS.NAT=1000 ;Create att descr only if necessarye0 WS.64B=400 ;Define task's alignment boundaries7 WS.MAP=200 ;Map after Create Window or Receive By Refw. WS.RCX=100 ;Exit if no references to receive0 WS.SIS=40 ;Create window in supervisor I-space* WS.UDS=20 ;Create window in user D-space$ WS.DEL=10 ;Send with delete access# WS.EXT=4 ;Send with extend access; WS.WRT=2 ;Send with write access or map with write accessi! WS.RED=1 ;Send with read accesst2 ERRORSG The symbols listed below are associated with the directive statuss8 codes returned by the Executive. They are determinedG (by default) at task-build time. To include these in a MACRO-11. program, use the following two lines of code: .MCALL DRERR$S DRERR$R ;F ; STANDARD ERROR CODES RETURNED BY DIRECTIVES IN THE DIRECTIVE STATUS ; WORDi ;, IS.CLR +00 Event flag was clear3 IS.SUC +01 Operation complete, Success * IS.SET +02 Event flag was set ; ; ;4 IE.UPN -01. Insufficient dynamic storage4 IE.INS -02. Specified task not installed4 IE.PTS -03. Partition too small for task6 IE.UNS -04. Insufficient dynamic storage for send& IE.ULN -05. Unassigned LUN2 IE.HWR -06. Device driver not resident' IE.ACT -07. Task not active > IE.ITS -08. Directive inconsistent with task state2 IE.FIX -09. Task already fixed/unfixed7 IE.CKP -10. Issuing task not checkpointableo. IE.TCH -11. Task is checkpointable3 IE.RBS -15. Receive buffer is too smallT+ IE.PRI -16. Privilege violation$' IE.RSU -17. Resource in use / IE.NSW -18. No swap space availableC0 IE.ILV -19. Illegal vector specified% IE.ITN -20. Invalid table numberC+ IE.LNF -21. Logical name not foundO ; ; ;< IE.AST -80. Directive issued/not issued from AST1 IE.MAP -81. Illegal mapping specified2 IE.IOP -83. Window has I/O in progress' IE.ALG -84. Alignment errore: IE.WOV -85. Address window allocation overflow) IE.NVR -86. Invalid region ID 1 IE.NVW -87. Invalid address window ID , IE.ITP -88. Invalid TI parameter8 IE.IBS -89. Invalid SEND buffer size (>255.)) IE.LNL -90. LUN locked in useF# IE.IUI -91. Invalid UIC . IE.IDU -92. Invalid device or unit/ IE.ITI -93. Invalid time parameters6 IE.PNS -94. Partition/region not in system0 IE.IPR -95. Invalid priority (>250.)# IE.ILU -96. Invalid LUNS8 IE.IEF -97. Invalid event flag number (>64.)7 IE.ADP -98. Part of DPB out of user's space / IE.SDP -99. DIC or DPB size invalidR 2 DIRECTIVE_IDENTIFICATION_CODES#DIC2 DICG Directive Identification Codes (DICs) are used to identify each G directive. The DIC appears in the low byte of the first (or only)]G word in the Directive Parameter Block (DPB). The DPB length (inn; words) appears in the high byte of the first DPB word.G This list can be used as a software debugging aid to quickly identifyaE directives based on the octal value of the first word in a DPB. ; Octal Value For Directive Decimal Values Ford; DPB First Word (Macro Call) DIC DPB Lengthe; ---------------00hN} ------------ --- ----------7 433 CMKT$ 27. 1.s7 443 DECL$ 35. 1.i7 455 SPND$S 45. 1.S7 461 WSIG$S 49. 1. 7 463 EXIT$S 51. 1.7 537 DCSP$ 95. 1.d7 541 ENCP$S 97. 1.u7 543 DSAR$S or IHAR$S 99. 1.e7 545 ENAR$S 101. 1. 7 563 ASTX$S 115. 1.T7 575 GSSW$S 125. 1. 7 603 STOP$S 131. 1.L7 637 ULGF$S 159. 1.i7 643 RMAF$S 163. 1.t7 1015 STAF$ 13. 2.m7 1025 SRRA$ 21. 2. 7 1035 EXST$ 29. 2.L7 1037 CLEF$ 31. 2.N7 1041 SETF$ 33. 2.R= 1045 RDEF$ 37. 2. 7 1047 RDAF$ 39. 2.l7 1051 WTSE$ 41. 2.]7 1065 EXIF$ 53. 2.a7 1067 CRRG$ 55. 2.e7 1071 ATRG$ 57. 2. 7 1073 DTRG$ 59. 2. 7 1075 GTIM$ 61. 2.7 1077 GTSK$ 63. 2.t7 1121 RREF$ 81. 2.7 1153 SRDA$ 107. 2. 7 1155 SPRA$ 109. 2. 7 1157 SFPA$ 111. 2. 7 1161 GMCX$ 113. 2. 7 1165 CRAW$ 117. 2. 7 1171 MAP$ 121. 2.s7 1173 UMAP$ 123. 2.h7 1207 STSE$ 135. 2.)7 1227 ELVT$ 151. 2.t7 1235 CRGF$ 157. 2. 7 1237 ELGF$ 159. 2. 7 1241 STAF$ 161. 2. 7 1245 SPEA$ 165. 2.o7 1247 SREA$ 167. 2. 7 1255 SCAA$ 173. 2.t7 1261 FEAT$ 177. 2. 7 1311 MSDS$ 201. 2. # 1321 TFEA$ 209. 2. # 1325 RRST$ 213. 2.l7 1405 GLUN$ 5. 3.17 1431 CSRQ$ 25. 3. 7 1433 CMKT$ 27. 3.t7 1447 RDXF$ 39. 3.7 1453 WTLO$ 43. 3.]7 1457 RSUM$ 47. 3.r7 1475 STIM$ 61. 3.o7 1523 ABRT$ 83. 3.r7 1531 EXTK$ 89. 3.b7 1547 SVDB$ 103. 3. 7 1551 SVTK$ 105. 3.n7 1577 SNXC$ 127. 3.m7 1605 USTP$ 133. 3.S7 1611 STLO$ 137. 3.=7 1617 CNCT$ 143. 3.7 1633 SCAL$S 155. 3. 7 1647 SREX$ 167. 3.a7 1657 SWST$ 175. 3.,7 1715 CPCR$ 205. 3.r7 2007 ALUN$ 7. 4.S7 2011 ALTP$ 9. 4. 7 2101 GPRT$ or GREG$ 65. 4.t00pyuTADATADATADATADATADATA7 2113 RCVD$ 75. 4.i7 2115 RCVX$ 77. 4. 7 2213 RCST$ 139. 4. 7 2223 EMST$ 147. 4. 7 2313 MVTS$ 203. 4. 7 2427 MRKT$ 23. 5. 7 2505 SREF$ 69. 5.S7 2507 SDAT$ 71. 5.,7 2625 CRVT$ 149. 5. 7 2655 SCLI$ 173. 5.t7 2717 ACHN$ 207. 5.l/ 2717 DLON$ or DLOG$ 207. 5. 0 2717 SDIR$ 207. 5.7 3113 VRCD$ 75. 6.O7 3115 VRCX$ 77. 6.e7 3213 VRCS$ 139. 6.N7 3317 GDIR$ 207. 6.s7 3413 RQST$ 11. 7. 7 3577 GCCI$ 127. 7.d7 3601 CINT$ 129. 7.$7 3615 SDRC$ 141. 7. 7 3655 GCII$ 173. 7.w4 3717 CLON$ or CLOG$ 207. 7.) 3717 FSS$ 207. 7.A7 4107 VSDA$ 71. 8.7 4215 VSRC$ 141. 8.i% 4253 SMSG$ 171. 8. 7 4615 SDRP$ 141. 9.  + 5317 RLON$ or RLOG$ 207. 10.P2 5317 TLON$ or TLOG$ 207. 10.7 5421 RUN$ 17. 11.e7 6001 QIO$ 1. 12.e7 6003 QIOW$ 3. 12.:7 6413 SPWN$ 11. 13.t# 6717 PFCS$ 207. 13.P# 6717 PRMS$ 207. 13.s7 7013 SPWN$ 11. 14.e7 10013 RPOI$ 11. 16.r7 24577 GMCR$ 127. 41.  A File Control Services (FCS) is a collection of record management< macros and subroutines used to maintain and manipulate data@ files. FCS, in contrast to RMS-11, supports only sequential and@ fixed record length file organizations. This HELP file contains? brief summaries of the MACRO-11 assembly language interface to FCS. See also, HELP FCS: < BIGBUFFERS ERRORS ALL FDB INTRO< DATA-STRUC ERRORS err FLUSH MACRO@ DATA-SET ERRORS nnn FILES-11 USER-TASK0 ERRORS EXAMPLE FILE-SPEC Code Name Meaning --------- -------: err Indicates a three-character error code name. > nnn Indicates a three-digit octal error code number. 2 INTRO A File Control Services (FCS) is a Files-11 based, I/O programming> system. You interface to FCS by using macro calls that eitherA generate nonexecutable code (data structures) or executable code (file processing). B Data structures describe a file and define how that file is to be8 processed. File processing macros perform the action of< processing the file by calling file control routines. These< routines execute the necessary executive and file processor@ (F11ACP) routines to perform the I/O requested by your original macro call.  B For help on the macros, type HELP FCS MACROS. For additional help on FCS, see HELP FCS: - DATA-STRUC FILES-11 USER-TASK 2 DA00yxN}TA-STRUC> Before you use the File Control Services (FCS) to perform I/OB operations, the following data structures must be created in your program. ? Assembly-Time Run-TimeA Data Structure Macro Call Macro CallA -------------- ----------- ----------= File Descriptor Block FDBFDF$ (required) FDAT$R= FDAT$A FDRC$R= FDRC$A FDBK$R= FDBK$A FDOP$R= FDOP$A FDBF$R# FDBF$A8 File Storage Region FSRSZ$ -; Data-set Descriptor 6-word block you create - or; Default Filename Block NMBLK$ -= For more help see also: HELP FCS FDB and HELP FCS USER-TASK.? Additionally, help is available on the macros used to generateB the data structures by typing HELP FCS MACROS name. The parameter@ name indicates letters in the macro name before the dollar sign ($) character. 2 FDB> The File Descriptor Block (FDB) contains the information that@ File Control Services (FCS) uses to open and process files. One6 FDB is required for each file that your program opens= simultaneously. You initialize some portions of the FDB with? assembly-time or run-time macro calls, and FCS maintains other@ portions. Each FDB has the following five sections that contain3 information that your task or the system defines:  4 Section Contents % ------- --------> File attribute section Contains the record type and size= and the file type and size. You : initialize the file attribute= section of the FDB by using the * FDAT$A macro. A Record or block access Contains the buffer descriptors and F section pointers. You initialize the block/record? access section of the FDB by usingA the FDRC$A macro for record I/O and < the FDBK$A macro for block I/O.B File-open section Contains the associated logical unit = number (LUN). You initialize the< file-open section of the FDB by4 using the FDOP$A macro.8 Block buffer section Contains the multibuffering= descriptor and buffer size. You @ initialize the block buffer section7 by using the FDBK$A macro. A Filename block section Contains the file specification and > the file ID. Communicated to FCS B through two data structures that you : create. They are the data-set@ descriptor and the default filename# block.2 See also, HELP FCS USER-TASK, HELP FCS DATA-SET,  HELP FCS MACROS NMBLK. 2 FILES-11: The Files-11 file processing system can be illustrated as follows: 2 **************** For help on the FCS user task& * User * type HELP FCS USER-TASK. * Task *< **************** For more help on virtual, physical, and; * FCS * logical blocks, type FCS FILES-11 MORE. **************** | Virtual Blocks( **************** ****************1 * Executive * ------------>* File * ( **************** * Processor *+ | Logical Blocks * (F11ACP) *% **************** ****************  * Device * * Driver * **************** | Physical Blocks **************** * Physical * * Volume *00yuTADATADATADATADATADATA ****************3 MOREI The association and processing of virtual, logical, and physical blocks  can be illustrated as follows: , Virtual Logical Physical2 Get Record Block Block BlockD *********** ************ ************ ************D * . * * . * * . * * *G * . * * . * * . * * *M * . * FCS * . * F11ACP * . * DRIVER * *M * GET$ *-------->*QIO IO.RVB*----------->*QIO IO.RLB*------->* DISK *> * . * * . * * . * * *> * . * * . * * . * * *G *********** ************ ************ ************ 2 USER-TASKB Your task issues macro calls that generate either executable codeB (file processing macros) or nonexecutable code (data structures).> File processing macros process a file by calling file control3 routines. An examples of executable code follows: 0 Example:  START: . .  FINIT$  OPEN$  .  . & READ$/WRITE$ ;Block I/O  . . CLOSE$ . . FINISH: EXIT$ B Data structures describe a file and define how that file is to be4 processed. An example of a data structure follows: C Example: File Descriptor Block (FDB) and File Storage Region (FSR)  FDBTAG: FDBDF$ ! FDB. FDAT$A ;File *************. ;Attribute * File *' FDRC$A ;Record * Creation *' ;Access *************. FDBK$A ;Block * Block I/O *. ;Access *************( FDOP$A ;File * Record *' ;Open * *+ FDBF$A ;Initialize * I/O . ;Blk Buffer *************( ; Blk. Buffer# ; Pool ' FSRSZ$ ;File Store *************' ;Region Size * $$FSR1 * ; *************2 URBUF: Other user buffers such as the default  filename block 2 FILE-SPECB Identifying the file to be processed is accomplised by using data> structures that you can generate in your program as follows: B o Creating a 6-word block in your program that contains the B sizes and addresses of ASCII data strings that constitute D a file specification. This is called a data-set descriptor. E o Creating a default filename block by using the NMBLK$ macro. B FCS uses the data-set descriptor or the default filename block orA both to build the filename block (FNB) which is part of the File9 Descriptor Block (FDB). See also, HELP FCS DATA-SET and  HELP FCS MACROS NMBLK. 2 DATA-SET? The data-set descriptor is a 6-word block in your program that< contains the sizes and addresses of ASCII data strings thatB constitute a file specification. The information supplied in this? area is used by FCS to build the filename block (FNB) which isH part of the File Descriptor Block (FDB). See also, HELP FCS FILE-SPEC. 7 Following is a description of the data-set descriptor: # Word Contents # ---- -------- / Word 1 Contains the length (bytes) of the $ ASCII device name string. + Word 2 Contains the address of the ASCII6 device name string. 5 , Word 3 Contains the length (bytes) of the' ASCII file directory string.  + Word 4 Contains the address of the ASCII! file directory string.  , Word 5 Contains the length (bytes) of the5 ASCII file name string. 00yN} + Word 6 Contains the address of the ASCII, file name string. 2 Following is an example of a data-set descriptor:  DATSET: .WORD DEVSZ,DEV  .WORD DIRSZ,DIR .WORD NAMSZ,NAM DEV: .ASCII /DB2:/  DEVSZ=.-DEV  DIR: .ASCII /[303,4]/ DIRSZ=.-DIR  NAM: .ASCII /FCS.HLP/ NAMSZ=.-NAM 2 MACROS 9 In general, there are two categories of FCS macros: file: processing (generates executable code) and data structure? (nonexecutable code). All macro call names are suffixed with a= dollar sign ($) character and some with a dollar sign and an> additional character. To get help on any macro, type HELP FCS0 MACROS and the macro name, without the suffix. & FILE PROCESSING DATA STRUCTURE  MACROS MACROS > --------------- --------------" FCSMC$ FINIT$ FDBDF$ FSRSZ$  FDBSZ$ ( OPEN$x READ$ CLOSE$ FDAT$t FDOF$L " OPNS$x WRITE$ FDRC$t NBOF$L ! OFID$x WAIT$ FDBK$t FCSBT$ " OFNB$x GET$a DELET$ FDOP$t # OPNT$D PUT$a FDBF$t NMBLK$ OPNT$W  : Character Meaning Character Meaning: --------- ------- --------- -------B x R (read) a S (sequential) = M (modify) R (random)* W (write) t A (assembly-time)4 U (update) R (run-time) A (append) 3 OPENB The OPEN$x macro calls FCS to perform general file processing forA an existing file or to create a new file. The suffix (x) is used: to indicate the type of processing. For example, to write@ (create) a new file you would use the following format to issue the call: ' OPEN$W fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,errA To process an existing file, use the following OPEX$x calls (the parameters are the same):   OPEN$ Call Function ---------- --------' OPEN$R Read an existing file.F OPEN$M Modify an existing file, without changing its length.@ OPEN$U Update an existing file and extend its length,  if nesessary.B OPEN$A Append (add) data to the end of an existing file.A You can open a file, but not supersede an existing file by using$ the same specification as follows: 0 OPEN$ fdb,facc,lun,dspt,dfnb,racc,urba,urbs,err/ For a description of the open parameters type ! HELP FCS MACROS OPEN PARAMETERS.? For help on other open macros type HELP FCS MACROS and include@ the any of the following macro types: OPNS,OPID,OPNT, or OPNB. ? The following table describes the OPEN$ paramters and the File> Desctiptor Block (FDB) fields initialized by that parameter. K Parameters Description FDB Fields Initialized6 ---------- ----------- ----------------------< dfnb Address of the default filename block F.DFNB 5 dspt Address of data-set descriptor F.DSPT9 err Address of user-coded error-handling  routine < facc Symbolic value, indicating file access F.FACC7 fdb Address of the File Descriptor Block (FDB)8 lun Logical unit number (LUN). Unique for each ? FDB F.LUN = racc Record access byte. Record or block I/O F.RACC6 urba Address of user record buffer F.URBD+2 2 urbs Size of user record buffer F.URBD3 OPNS@ The OPNS$x macro is used to open a file for shared access. The0 format for the OPNS$ macro call is as follows: ' OPNS$x fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,err> The suffix x indicates the type of processing as shown in the following list:  R Read an existing file W Write a new file< M Modify an existing file, without changing its lengthC U Update an existing file and extend its length, if necessary00yuTADATADATADATADATADATA8 A Append (add) data to the end of an existing file> For a description of the open parameters,type the following: " HELP FCS MACROS OPEN PARAMETERS. 3 OPNT B The OPNT$W macro is used to create and open a temporary file. The+ format for the OPNT$W call is as follows: ' OPNT$W fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,err> The OPNT$D macro is used to open a temporary file and also toA mark the file for deletion. The format for the OPNT$D call is as follows: ' OPNT$D fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,err> For a description of the open parameters,type the following: ! HELP FCS MACROS OPEN PARAMETERS.3 OFID8 The OFID$x macro is used to open an existing file using? information stored in file identification field (N.FID) of theB filename block in the FDB. The format for the OFID$ macro call is a follows: ' OFID$x fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,err> The suffix x indicates the type of processing as shown in the following list:  R Read an existing file W Write a new file< M Modify an existing file, without changing its lengthC U Update an existing file and extend its length, if necessary8 A Append (add) data to the end of an existing fileA You can open a file, but not supersede an existing file by using$ the same specification as follows: 0 OFID$ fdb,facc,lun,dspt,dfnb,racc,urba,urbs,err> For a description of the open parameters,type the following: ! HELP FCS MACROS OPEN PARAMETERS.3 OFNB ? The OFNB$x macro is used either to open an existing file or to> create and open a new file using file name information in the: filename block. The format for the OFNB$ macro call is as follows: ' OFNB$x fdb,lun,dspt,racc,urba,urbs,err> The suffix x indicates the type of processing as shown in the following list:  R Read an existing file W Write a new file< M Modify an existing file, without changing its lengthC U Update an existing file and extend its length, if necessary8 A Append (add) data to the end of an existing file @ You can open a file, but do not supersede an existing file with$ the same specification as follows: 0 OFNB$ fdb,facc,lun,dspt,dfnb,racc,urba,urbs,err> For a description of the open parameters,type the following: ! HELP FCS MACROS OPEN PARAMETERS.3 CLOSEB The CLOSE$ macro is used to close a file, after the processing of= the file is completed. The format for the CLOSE$ macro is as follows:  CLOSE$ fdb,err Parameter Meaning --------- -------= fdb A symbolic address value of the associated FDBM err The symbolic address of a user-coded, error-handling routine t> The CLOSE$ macro performs several functions. They include the following: D 1. Waits for all I/O to complete (multibuffered record I/O only)? 2. Ensures that the FSR block buffer is completely written  (record I/O only) 3. Deaccesses the file7 4. Releases the FSR block buffers (record I/O only)T2 5. Clears the appropriate FDB offset locations AB 6. Calls user error routine, if an error condition is detected3 GET@ The GET$ macro is used to read logical records from a file. The$ format for the call is as follows:  GET$ fdb,urba,urbs,err  Parameter Meaning -------- -------; fdb A symbolic value of the address of the File & Descriptor Block (FDB).< urba Address of your record buffer to be used for : I/O operations in move or locate mode. This9 parameter initializes F.URBD+2 in the FDB.e= urbs Size (in bytes) of largest record that can be e= placed in your record buffer in move or locatee8 mode. This initializes F.URBD in the FDB.< err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.? The GET$S and GET$R macros perform specific I/O functions. TherB GET$S macro reads logical records from a file in sequential mode.A The GET$R macro reads fixed-length records from00yN} a file in randomr1 mode. The formats for both call are shown next. mB GET$S fdb,urba,urbs,err GET$R fdb,urba,urbs,lrcnm,hrcnm,err  Parameter Meaning -------- -------9 lrcnm High order record number. This initializes # F.RCNM+2 in the FDB.: hrcnm High order record number. This initializes ! F.RCNM in the FDB. 3 PUT(< The PUT$ macro is used to write logical records to a file. ' The format for the call is as follows:  PUT$ fdb,nrba,nrbs,err  Parameter Meaning -------- -------; fdb A symbolic value of the address of the File & Descriptor Block (FDB).? nrba The symbolic address of the next record buffer. $) This initializes F.NRBD+2.i? nrbs The length of next record buffer to be written. F' This initializes F.NRBD. < err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.? The PUT$S and PUT$R macros perform specific I/O functions. Theg= GET$S macro writes logical records from a file in sequentialTA mode. The GET$R macro writes fixed-length records from a file ind8 random mode. The formats for both call are shown next. C PUT$S fdb,nrba,nrbs,err PUT$R fdb,nrba,nrbs,lrcnm,hrcnm,err ( Parameter Meaning -------- -------: lrcnm High order record number. This initializes # F.RCNM+2 in the FDB.t: hrcnm High order record number. This initializes ! F.RCNM in the FDB.D3 READ? The READ$ macro is used to read a virtual block of data from ar: block-oriented device. See HELP FCS FILES-11 for virtual,> logical, and physical relationships. The format for the READ$ macro is as follows: , READ$ fdb,bkda,bkds,bkvb,bkef,bkst,bkdn,err Parameter Meaning  --------- ------- e> bkda Address of the block I/O buffer in your program. ; Need not be specified if F.BKDS+2 in the File A Descriptor Block (FDB) is initialized by the FDBK$A " or the FDBK$R macro. B bkdn Address of an asynchronous system trap (AST) service  routine..? bkds Size (bytes) of the virtual block to be read. NeedsA not be given if F.BKDS in the FDB is initialized by R, the FDBK$A or the FDBK$R macro.@ bkef The event flag number used for synchronizing block @ I/O operations. Can also be specified using FDBK$A 6 or FDBK$R; initializes F.BKEF in the FDB.; bkst Address of the I/O status block (IOSB) in your ? program. Initializes F.BKST in the FDB and can be o+ specified by FDBK$A or FDBK$R. B bkvd Address of a 2-word block in your program containing 8 the number of the virtual block to be read.8 Initializes F.BKVB and F.BKVB+2 in the FDB.: err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.8 fdb A symbolic value of the address of the FDB.3 WRITE A The WRITE$ macro is used to write a virtual block of data from a : block-oriented device. See HELP FCS FILES-11 for virtual,? logical, and physical relationships. The format for the WRITE$  macro is as follows: - WRITE$ fdb,bkad,bksz,bkvb,bkef,bkst,bkdn,err  A Parameter Meaning --------- -------> bkda Address of the block I/O buffer in your program. : Need not be specified if F.BKDS+2 in the File: Descriptor Block (FDB) is initialized by the ( FDBK$A or the FDBK$R macro.: bkdn Address of an asynchronous system trap (AST)  service routine.*> bkds Size (bytes) of the virtual block to be written. 6 Need not be given if F.BKDS in the FDB is; initialized by the FDBK$A or the FDBK$R macro.o@ bkef The event flag number used for synchronizing block @ I/O operations. Can also be specified using FDBK$A 6 or FDBK$R; initializes F.BKEF in the FDB.< bkst Address00yuTADATADATADATADATADATA of the I/O status block (IOSB) in your ? program. Initializes F.BKST in the FDB and can be + specified by FDBK$A or FDBK$R. B bkvd Address of a 2-word block in your program containing < the number of the virtual block to be written. 8 Initializes F.BKVB and F.BKVB+2 in the FDB.: err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.8 fdb A symbolic value of the address of the FDB.3 FCSMCF: The FCSMC$ macro is a convenient way to declare commonly = used File Control Services (FCS) macros. The format for the - FCSMC macro is as follows:* .MCALL FCSMC$ ; Using this single macro declares the following FCS macros:   OPEN$x GET$ FDAT$x OPNS$x PUT$ FDRC$x* CLOSE$ DELET$ FCOP$x* READ$ FINIT$ FDBF$x WRITE$ FSRSZ$ FDBK$x WAIT$ FDBDF$ NMBLK$: Other macros may then be declared using explicit .MCALLs.3 WAIT9 The WAIT$ macro, which is issued only in connection withc@ READ$/WRITE$ operations, causes a program to be suspended untilB the requested block I/O transfer is completed. The format for the WAIT$ macro is as follows:  WAIT$ fdb,bkef,bkst,err Parameter Meaning --------- -------; fdb A symbolic value of the address of the File & Descriptor Block (FDB).B bkef The event flag number used for synchronizing block B I/O operations. This parameter must agree with the > corresponding bkef parameter in the associated ' READ$/WRITE$ macro call.o F= bkst Address of the I/O status block (IOSB) in your = program. This is an optional parameter, and if A specified, must agree with the corresponding bkst r> parameter in the associated READ$/WRITE$ macro.< err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.3 DELET*? The DELET$ macro causes the directory information for the filep9 associated with the specified FDB to be deleted from the*> appropriate UFD. This causes file space to be deallocated and> returned to the pool of available storage. The format for the DELET$ macro is as follows: S DELET$ fdb,err  Parameter Meaning --------- -------: fdb A symbolic value of the address of the File& Descriptor Block (FDB).< err Address of user-coded error-handling routine.3 FINITb? The FINIT$ macro is used to initialize the file storage regionf= (FSR) created by the FSRSZ$ macro. The format for the FINIT$t macro is as follows:  label: FINIT$< In this example, label indicates an optional user-specified symbol. sC The FINIT$ should be issued in the program's initialization code. m3 FSRSZu; The FSRSZ$ macro is used to establish the size of the filerB storage region (FSR) at assembly time. Block-buffer pool space is@ allocated in a program section named $$FSR1. The format for the FSRSZ$ macro is as follows:  FSRSZ$ fbufs,bufsiz,psect Parameter Meaning --------- -------A fbufs Zero, if no record I/O processing is to be done or 7 if an unspecified number of files openedm, simultaneously for block I/O.; The maximum number of files that can be opene9 simultaneously for record I/O processing. l8 The maximum number of buffers ever in use? simultaneously among all files open concurrently  for record I/O.> bufsiz A numeric value defining the total block buffer? pool space (bytes) needed to support the maximumm> number of files that can be open simultaneously for record I/O. ? psect The name of the program section to which controlo; returns after FSRSZ$ completes processing. e3 FDBDFSB The FDBDF$ macro is used to allocate space within a program for a@ File Descriptor Block (FDB). It must be specified once for eachA input or output file that00yN} is to be opened simultaneously by yours9 program. The format for the FDBDF$ macro is as follows:  label: FDBDF$n@ In this example, label indicates a user specified symbol naming< an FDB and defining its beginning address. The File ControlA Services (FCS) accesses the fields within an FDB relative to the3% address represented by this symbol. Example:L5 FDBOUT: FDBDF$ ;Generate block for output fileeE FDAT$A R.FIX,FD.CR,BUFSIZ ;Fixed length, LF with CR, buffer sizeuK FDOP$A OUTLUN,CSIBLK+C.DSDS ;LUN and pointer to file descriptorr3 FDRC$A TMPBUF,BUFSIZ ;temp buffer, buffer sizem3 FDATB The FDAT$x macro is used to initialize the file attribute section= of the File Descriptor Block (FDB). The format for the FDAT$ macro is as follows: ' FDAT$x rtyp,ratt,rsiz,cntg,aloc C -> The suffix x indicates A for assembly time and R for run time initialization or change.  Parameter Meaning $ --------- -------  R5 rtyp Indicates the record type as follows: T 8 R.FIX Indicates a fixed record type < R.VAR Indicates a variable record type 8 R.SEQ Indicates a variable sequenced record type 9 ratt Indicates the record attribute: (separates 0 multiple fields - FD.FTN!FD.BLK) : FD.FTN Specifies a FORTRAN carriage-control in' first byte ; FD.CR Specifies a record preceded by and N, followed by 6 FD.BLK Specifies that records do not cross- block boundaries a8 FD.PRN Specifies a record preceded by a word1 with carriage control i c9 rsiz Indicates the size (bytes) of fixed lengthrA records. This is true only for fixed record types m (rtyp = R.FIX). $> cntg Indicates a positive (+) value for the number of < contiguous blocks allocated or a negative (-)< value for the number of noncontiguous blocks " (2's complement). @ aloc Indicates a positive (+) value for the number of B contiguous blocks FCS can extend or a negative (-) ; value for the number of noncontiguous blockss! (2's complement). , c3 FDRC> The FDRC$x macro initializes the record access section of the> File Descriptor Block (FDB) and specifies record or block I/O; operations. The format for the FDRC$ macro is as follows: a FDRC$x racc,urba,urbs B f> The suffix x indicates A for assembly time and R for run time initialization or change. i  Parameter Meaning m! --------- ------- > racc Indicates record/block I/O (separates multiple 5 fields - FD.RAN!FD.PLC). For block I/Oh= (READ$/WRITE$): FD.RWM For record I/O use the 3 following access modes can be used: I FD.RAN Specifes random access mode. Sequential mode isC specified if this parameter is omitted. bK FD.PLC Specifies locate mode. Move mode is specified if u7 this parameter is omitted. J FD.INS Specifies that a file will not be truncated whenE a PUT$ operation is issued in body of file.c > urba Indicates the address of your record buffer to = be used for GET$ operations in move and locate = modes and for PUT$ operations in locate mode. i? urbs Indicates the size (bytes) of your record buffers* for move and locate mode. 3 FDBK @ The FDBK$x macro is used to initialize the block access sectionA of the File Descriptor Block (FDB). This macro is used for blockx> I/O only (READ$/WRITE$). The format for the F00yuTADATADATADATADATADATADBK$ macro is as follows: 8 FDBK$x bkda,bkds,bkvb,bkef,bkst,bkdn t> The suffix x indicates A for assembly time and R for run time initialization or change   Parameter Meaning o --------- ------- < bkda Indicates the address of the user buffer for " block I/O. B bkds Indicates the size (bytes) of the block to be read  or written. o J bkvd Indicates the virtual block number (FDBK$R only).  F bkef Indicates the numeric value of an event flag.  B bkst Indicates the address of a 2-word I/O status block / (IOSB) in your program.  OB bkdn Indicates the address of a user coded asynchronous ; system trap (AST) service routine. 3 FDOP? The FDOP$x macro initializes the file-open section of the Filer= Descriptor Block (FDB). The format for the FDOP$ macro is asn follows:  FDOP$x lun,dspt,dfnb,facc,actln s> The suffix x indicates A for assembly time and R for run time initialization or change. o Parameter Meaning d --------- ------- eF lun Indicates the value for a logical unit number (LUN). r? dspt Indicates the address of 6-words in your program - for the data-set descriptor. N< dfnb Indicates the address of the default filename- block (created with NMBLK$). t < facc Indicates the following types of file access:7 FA.SHR Indicates shared access e ? For existing files, the following types of file g' access can be specified:5 FO.RD Indicates read only accessl2 FO.APD Indicates append access4 FO.MFY Indicates modify access 3 FO.UPD Indicates update access and, if5 necessary, extend access. i; For new files, the following types of file access b can be specified:: FO.WRT Indicates write access> FO.WRT!FA.NSP Indicates that a file withE same name is not to be supersededl? FO.WRT!FA.TMP Indicates temporary access  = actl Indicates the following control information: ? FA.ENB!FA.POS Position magnetic tape just D after most recently closed file 9 FA.ENB!FA.RWD Rewind magnetic tape eA FA.ENB!FA.DLK Indicates that a disk file isfE not locked if not properly closedoE FA.LKL!FA.EXL Lock all blocks that are accessedi3 FDBFB The FDBF$x macro initializes the block buffer section of the File= Descriptor Block (FDB). The format for the FDBF$ macro is aso follows: FDBF$x efn,ovbs,mbct,mbfg T> The suffix x indicates A for assembly time and R for run time initialization or change. l G Parameter Meaning  --------- ------- 6 efn Specifies the event flag used by FCS to* synchronize I/O operations. F= ovbs Specifies the file storage region (FSR) block % buffer size (bytes). m tB mbct Specifies the value for the multiple buffer count; ( the numbers used by FCS. o: mbfg Specifies one of the following two types of' multiple buffering: . 1 FD.RAH Indicates read ahead o 2 FD.WBH Indicates write behind 3 NMBLK ? The NMBLK$ macro is used to define a default filename block ino> your program. The format for the NMBLK$ macro is as follows: r300yN} label: NMBLK$ fnam,ftyp,fver,dvnm,unit l n@ In this example, label indicates a user-defined symbol that is 2 the address of the default filename block. l Parameter Meaning e --------- ------- A fnam Indicates the default filename which is up to nineo? ASCII characters. The character string is stored0 as six bytes in Radix-50 format.  D ftyp Indicates the default file type which is up to three B ASCII characters. The character string is stored as- two bytes in Radix-50 format.  A fver Indicates the default file version number which ise: a binary value that identifies a particular% version of a file. n @ dvnm Indicates the default device name for the mountedA volume containing the file. A two-character ASCII T string. p sB unit Indicates a binary value identifying the unit used & in processing the file  3 FDBSZi8 The FDBSZ$ macro is used to define the size of the File3 Descriptor Block (FDB) as a local symbol (S.FDB). s3 FDOF FDOF$LA The FDOF$L macro defines the File Descriptor Block (FDB) offsetsr in your program. B This macro does not generate any code but creates absolute symbol/ definitions in your program at assembly time. See also, HELP FCS MACROS FCSBT3 FCSBTT@ The FCSBT$ macro defines locally in your program the bit values- for File Descriptor Block (FDB) parameters. iB This macro does not generate any code but creates absolute symbol/ definitions in your program at assembly time. b See also, HELP FCS MACROS FDOFr3 NBOF NBOF$L-A The NBOF$L macro defines locally in your program the offsets forp a filename block. B This macro does not generate any code but creates absolute symbolB definitions in your program at assembly time. This macro need not* be issued if the FDOF$L macro is issued.  See also, HELP FCS MACROS FDOFv 2 BIGBUFFERSA Big buffering reduces the number of disk accesses for record I/Or< by allowing multiblock input and output. Normally, the diskA accesses for GET$ or PUT$ operations are performed one sector atb< a time. Using FCS big buffers allows you to read or write aA specified number of sectors in a single operation.. This reduces the number of head seeks. a@ To use big buffers, you must select the buffer size and specify? that buffer size in the parameter lists for each occurrence of 8 the FSRSZ$ macro and the FDBF$A macro in your program. > You should choose a buffer size that is a multiple of 512(10)> bytes, the size of one disk block. Because the default amountB allocated by a file extend is five blocks and disks often contain< many 5-block files or parts of files, a buffer size of five? blocks is generally a good choice. Larger amounts may increaseT< performance, but note that you are trading large amounts of memory for speed. i? You must reserve the buffer space in your program and you musts@ specify the buffer size to the FDB. The FSRSZ$ macro allows you@ to specify the total buffer space needed. Specify 512(10) bytes> for each normal disk file, plus the buffer size that you have@ selected for each big buffered file. For example, assume that a@ program has three files: one normal file (512(10)-byte buffer);> one file with a big buffer size of three blocks; and one fileA with a big buffer size of five blocks. The following call to the + FSRSZ$ macro reserves the space properly: S  FSRSZ$ 3,<<1+3+5>*512.>k A In the FDB of each file that has a big buffer, you must override A the default buffer size, by using either the FDBF$A macro or the ? FDBF$R macro. For a file with five blocks as a big buffer, the ) assembly-time macro call is as follows: i FDBF$A ,<5*512.> B On RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems, the SYSLIB pro00yuTADATADATADATADATADATAvided as the> default library contains all the proper File Control Services' (FCS) modules for big buffer support. 2 ERRORSB When FCS returns an error code in byte location F.ERR in the File@ Descriptor Block (FDB), it may be either a directive error codeA or an I/O error code. You can determine which type of code it is % by examining byte location F.ERR+1: r Location Meaning -------- -------B F.ERR+1 A byte location of -1 indicates a directive error. 9 (For a list of directive error codes type C- HELP EXECUTIVE ERRORS.) e F< F.ERR+1 A byte location of 0 indicates an I/O error.  : For HELP on an individual error code, type the following: HELP FCS ERRORS xxx < xxx is the 3-letter error name or the 3-digit octal numericC value. For example, the following will access the same error text:  HELP FCS ERRORS ONP and  HELP FCS ERRORS 373 oG For a list of all FCS error names and codes, type HELP FCS ERRORS ALL.s3 ALLm@ Following is a list of all error codes returned by File Control Services (FCS): t! IE.BAD,-01.,377,W( IE.IFC,-02.,376,# IE.DNR,-03.,375, ) IE.VER,-04.,374, . IE.ONP,-05.,373,& IE.SPC,-06.,372,& IE.DNA,-07.,371,* IE.DAA,-08.,370, r( IE.DUN,-09.,367,' IE.EOF,-10.,366, ) IE.EOV,-11.,365,s1 IE.WLK,-12.,364,n IE.DAO,-13.,363,h' IE.SRE,-14.,362, % IE.ABO,-15.,361,h& IE.PRI,-16.,360, m, IE.RSU,-17.,357,* IE.OVR,-18.,356,6 IE.BYT,-19.,355,1 IE.BLK,-20.,354,e, IE.MOD,-21.,353,$ IE.CON,-22.,352,+ IE.NOD,-23.,351,e IE.DFU,-24.,350, m" IE.IFU,-25.,347, IE.NSF,-26.,346,P0 IE.LCK,-27.,345,# IE.HFU,-28.,344,d% IE.WAC,-29.,343,p/ IE.CKS,-30.,342,r6 IE.WAT,-31.,341,3 IE.RER,-32.,340,f (4 IE.WER,-33.,337,/ IE.ALN,-34.,336,- IE.SNC,-35.,335, 1 IE.SQC,-36.,334, * IE.NLN,-37.,333,/ IE.CLO,-38.,332,t< IE.NBF,-39.,331,& IE.RBG,-40.,330, t: IE.NBK,-41.,327,= IE.ILL,-42.,326," IE.BTP,-43.,325,1 IE.RAC,-44.,324,r5 IE.RAT,-45.,323,i4 IE.RCN,-46.,322,- IE.ICE,-47.,321,m/ IE.2DV,-48.,320,  s8 IE.FEX,-49.,317,% IE.BDR,-50.,316,n/ IE.RNM,-51.,315,e' IE.BDI,-52.,314,r$ IE.FOP,-53.,313, IE.BNM,-54.,312," IE.BDV,-55.,311,& IE.BBE,-56.,310, 7 IE.DUP,-57.,307, 6 IE.STK,-58.,306,1 IE.FHE,-59.,305, , IE.NFI,-60.,304,/ IE.ISQ,-61.,303,o' IE.EOT,-62.,302,F% IE.BVR,-63.,301,s" IE.BHD,-64.,300, t! IO.BCC,00yN}-65.,277,e5 IE.BCC,-66.,276,r IE.ONL,-67.,275, IE.NNN,-68.,274,n> IE.DIS,-69.,273, ;THIS CODE MUST BE ODD% IE.BLB,-70.,272,S- IE.NDR,-72.,270, . IE.URJ,-73.,267,, IE.NRJ,-74.,266,3 IE.EXP,-75.,265,D" IE.BTF,-76.,264,1 IE.NNC,-77.,263,D$ IE.NDA,-78.,262,B IE.NLK,-79.,261,/ IE.NST,-80.,260,e i) IE.FLN,-81.,257, * IE.IES,-82.,256,* IE.PES,-83.,255,% IE.ALC,-84.,254,  IE.ULK,-85.,253, & IE.WCK,-86.,252, % IE.NTR,-87.,251,-5 IE.REJ,-88.,250,t/ IE.FLG,-89.,247, & IE.DSQ,-90.,246,/ IE.IQU,-91.,245,i1 IE.RES,-92.,244,t) IE.TML,-93.,243, % IE.NNT,-94.,242,r& IE.TMO,-95.,241,& IE.CNR,-96.,240, IE.UKN,-97.,237,R( IE.SZE,-98.,236,- IE.MII,-99.,235,i $ IE.SPI,-100.,234,8 IE.FER,-101.,233,@ IE.IRR,-102.,232,) IE.SUI,-103.,231,s? IE.PIO,-104.,230,i ! IS.PND,+00. ;I/O REQUEST PENDINGd) IS.SUC,+01. ;OPERATION COMPLETE, SUCCESS 6 IS.RDD,+02. ;(RX11) FLOPPY DISK SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION# ;OF A READ PHYSICAL, AND DELETEDX' ;DATA MARK WAS SEEN IN SECTOR HEADER  ; LAST SECTOR.u. IS.BV,+05. ;(A/D READ) AT LEAST ONE BAD VALUE% ;WAS READ (REMAINDER MAY BE GOOD).v! ;BAD CHANNEL IS INDICATED BY As! ;NEGATIVE VALUE IN THE BUFFER.e? IS.CR,<15*400+1> ;SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION WITH CARRIAGE RETURN u> IS.ESC,<33*400+1> ;SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION ON ESCAPE (ALTMODE) 1 IS.CC,<3*400+1> ;SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION ON CTRL-Ct? IS.ESQ,<233*400+1> ;SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION ON ESCAPE SEQUENCE t8 IS.PES,<200*400+1> ;PARTIAL ESCAPE SEQUENCE TERMINATOR9 IS.EOT,<4*400+1> ;EOT WAS TERMINATOR (BLOCK MODE INPUT)s9 IS.TAB,<11*400+1> ;TAB WAS TERMINATOR (FORMS MODE INPUT)h. IS.TMO,+2. ;SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION ON TIME OUTB IS.TNC,+2. ;SUCCESSFUL TRANSFER BUT MESSAGE TRUNCATED1 ;RECEIVE BUFFER TOO SMALL.3 377 #BAD3 BADm! IE.BAD,-01.,377,-3 376 #IFC3 IFCr( IE.IFC,-02.,376,3 375s#DNR3 DNR # IE.DNR,-03.,375, 3 374c#VER3 VER ) IE.VER,-04.,374,I3 373t#ONP3 ONP . IE.ONP,-05.,373,3 372 #SPC3 SPCR& IE.SPC,-06.,372,3 371e#DNA3 DNA & IE.DNA,-07.,371,3 370s#DAA3 DAA* IE.DAA,-08.,370,3 367v#DUN3 DUNc( IE.DUN,-09.,367,3 366t#EOF3 EOF.' IE.EOF,-10.,366, 3 365f#EOV3 EOVb) IE.EOV,-11.,365, 3 364o#WLK3 WLKs1 IE.WLK,-12.,364,I3 363s#DAO3 DAOo IE.DAO,-13.,363, 3 362b#SRE3 SRET' IE.SRE,-14.,362, 3 361m#ABO3 ABOP% IE.ABO,-15.,361,b3 360 #PRI3 PRIt& IE.PRI,-16.,360,3 357 #RSU3 RSUv, IE.RSU,-17.,357,3 356 #OVR3 OVRe* IE.OVR,-18.,356,3 355s#BYT3 BYT 6 IE.BYT,-19.,355,3 354#BLK3 BLKA1 IE.BLK,-20.,354,f3 353 #MOD3 MODk, IE.MOD,-21.,353,3 352 #CON3 CONf$ IE.CON,-22.,352,3 351 #NOD3 NODi+ IE.NOD,-23.,351, 3 350i#DFU3 DFU- IE.DFU,-24.,350,3 347 #IFU3 IFUe" IE.IFU,-25.,347,3 346 #NSF3 NSFO IE.NSF,-26.,346, 3 345I#LCK3 LCKs0 IE.LCK,-27.,345,3 344r#HFU3 HFU # IE.HFU,-28.,344,e3 343l#WAC3 WAC % IE.WAC,-29.,343, 3 342e#CKS3 CKSd/ IE.CKS,-30.,342, 3 341 #WAT3 WAT 6 IE.WAT,-31.,341,3 340l#RER3 RER 3 IE.RER,-32.,340, 3 337#WER3 WER 4 IE.WER,-33.,337,3 336 #ALN3 ALN / IE.ALN,-34.,336,3 335F#SNC3 SNCn- IE.SNC,-35.,335,D3 334o#SQC3 SQC.1 IE.SQC,-36.,334,3 333$#NLN3 NLNn* IE.NLN,-37.,333,3 332 #CLO3 CLOt/ IE.CLO,-38.,332,.3 331P#NBF3 NBFM< IE.NBF,-39.,331,3 330t#RBG3 RBGa& IE.RBG,-40.,330,3 327p#NBK3 NBKd: IE.NBK,-41.,327,3 326t#ILL3 ILLe= IE.ILL,-42.,326,o3 325e#BTP3 BTPe" IE.BTP,-43.,325,3 324)#RAC3 RAC 1 IE.RAC,-44.,324, 3 323c#RAT3 RAT 5 IE.RAT,-45.,323,3 322 #RCN3 RCNi4 IE.RCN,-46.,322,3 321c#ICE3 ICEe- IE.ICE,-47.,321,s3 320n#2DV3 2DV / IE.2DV,-48.,320,3 317 #FEX3 FEX.8 IE.FEX,-49.,317,3 316a#BDR3 BDR,% IE.BDR,-50.,316,a3 315e#RNM3 RNM/ IE.RNM,-51.,315,f3 314e#BDI3 BDI ' IE.BDI,-52.,314, 3 313.#FOP3 FOP $ IE.FOP,-53.,313,3 312.#BNM3 BNM IE.BNM,-54.,312,3 311 #BDV3 BDV " IE.BDV,-55.,311,3 310#BBE3 BBE & IE.BBE,-56.,310,3 307s#DUP3 DUP 7 IE.DUP,-57.,307,o3 306:#STK3 STK 6 IE.STK,-58.,306,3 305 #FHE3 FHE 1 IE.FHE,-59.,305, 3 304 #NFI3 NFIN, IE.NFI,-60.,304,3 303 #ISQ3 ISQK/ IE.ISQ,-61.,303, 3 302 #EOT3 EOT ' IE.EOT,-62.,302, 3 301 #BVR3 BVRA% IE.BVR,-63.,301,e3 300 #BHD3 BHDF" IE.BHD,-64.,300,3 277c#BCC3 BCCi! IO.BCC,-65.,277,r3 276 #BCC3 BCCr5 IE.BCC,-66.,276, 3 275 #ONL3 ONLf IE.ONL,-67.,275,3 274 #NNN3 NNN IE.NNN,-68.,274, 3 273#NFW3 NFW > IE.NFW,-69.,273, ;THIS CODE MUST BE ODD3 272e#BLB3 BLBs% IE.BLB,-70.,272,e3 271e#TMM3 TMM 0 IE.TMM,-71.,271,3 270(#NDR3 NDR- IE.NDR,-72.,270, 3 267c#CNR3 CNRe& IE.CNR,-73.,267,3 266 #TMO3 TMO % IE.TMO,-74.,266,o3 265 #EXP3 EXPi3 IE.EXP,-75.,265, 3 264l#BTF3 BTF " IE.BTF,-76.,264,3 263c#NNC3 NNCa1 IE.NNC,-77.,263,t3 262e#NNL3 NNL $ IE.NNL,-78.,262,3 261d#NLK3 NLKlB IE.NLK,-79.,261,3 260f#NST3 NST / IE.NS00yN}T,-80.,260, 3 260 #AST3 ASTn. IE.AST,-80.,260,3 257o#FLN3 FLNtA IE.FLN,-81.,257,m3 256 #IES3 IES-* IE.IES,-82.,256,3 255c#PES3 PESu* IE.PES,-83.,255,3 254C#ALC3 ALC.% IE.ALC,-84.,254, 3 253 #ULK3 ULK  IE.ULK,-85.,253, 3 252f#WCK3 WCKI& IE.WCK,-86.,252,3 251e#NTR3 NTR % IE.NTR,-87.,251,r3 250o#REJ3 REJ 5 IE.REJ,-88.,250, 3 247 #FLG3 FLGc/ IE.FLG,-89.,247, 3 246 #DSQ3 DSQa& IE.DSQ,-90.,246,3 245v#IQU3 IQUi/ IE.IQU,-91.,245,t3 244f#RES3 RESa1 IE.RES,-92.,244,g3 243.#TML3 TMLt) IE.TML,-93.,243, 3 242 #NNT3 NNT % IE.NNT,-94.,242,i3 241 #TMO3 TMO & IE.TMO,-95.,241,3 240 #CNR3 CNRi& IE.CNR,-96.,240,3 237o#UKN3 UKND IE.UKN,-97.,237,s3 236F#SZE3 SZED( IE.SZE,-98.,236,3 235e#MII3 MIIl- IE.MII,-99.,235, 3 234s#SPI3 SPI $ IE.SPI,-100.,234,3 233o#FER83 FER IE.FER,-101.,233,3 232T#IRR@3 IRR IE.IRR,-102.,232,3 231#SUI)3 SUI IE.SUI,-103.,231,3 230r#PIO?3 PIO IE.PIO,-104.,230,i2 .FLUSH#FLUSH2 FLUSH.  .FLUSHsA The buffer flush routine (.FLUSH) writes the block buffer to theeB file being written in record mode. The .FLUSH routine also writesB file attributes (including F.EFBK and F.HIBK, the end-of-file and@ high-allocation block numbers) each time the routine is called. = Closing the file guarantees that the block buffer is flushed > and that the file attributes will be written back to the fileB header. However, closing and opening a file frequently, solely to8 write the block buffer, causes high system overhead and unnecessary disk accesses. > When FCS executes a PUT$ macro to a disk file, the PUT$ macro> puts a record into the block buffer. When the block buffer is@ full, or the file is closed, FCS writes the block buffer to the@ file. You cannot predict when FCS will actually write the block buffer to the file. rA Some applications may require that a record be written to a filep= immediately. As an example, a task that handles a laboratory ; device may write small amounts of data to a file every feweA minutes. If the system crashes, the contents of the block buffero= may not have been written to the file. This data may be losti> unless a PUT$ is immediately followed by a call to the .FLUSHA routine. As another example, the .FLUSH routine should be calleduA by an originating task to write data immediately if another taski? must then read data written by that originating task. In these.? examples, the tasks need not close the file to ensure that then data is written to the file. A Your task should call .FLUSH whenever data should be immediatelye written to a file. @ You need not call the .FLUSH routine for block mode (WRITE$) orA record mode (PUT$) write operations to a record-oriented device;o; the block buffer is always written in these cases. Nothing ; happens if you call .FLUSH when a file is open under theseeB circumstances except the return of a cleared Carry bit and status! +1 (success) in FDB byte F.ERR. > Calling the .FLUSH routine after every PUT$ macro can greatly? increase I/O activity compared to using solely the PUT$ macro. < One alternative is to call the .FLUSH routine after certainC intervals have passed or after a certain number of calls to PUT$. c: The following register mu00yuTADATADATADATADATADATAst be preset before calling this routine:  3 R0 Must contain the address of the associated FDB.b= During output, all registers are preserved, the Carry bit isn? clear or set to indicate success or failure, and the FDB F.ERR , byte contains the success or failure code. Y( Writing file attributes to a disk file: bB When a file is being writen, some file attributes (notably F.EFBK? and F.HIBK, the end-of-file and high-allocation block numbers)s< are not written to the file header by FCS until the file is< closed. Thus, even if frequent calls of .FLUSH are used to@ ensure that a file contains recent information, the file headerA will not reflect this fact while the file is open. Another taskn< trying to read the file (open for shared read) will find anA end-of-file error returned on the first GET$. If a system crashw9 occurs, the data in the file is recoverable, but only by A manipulating the end-of-file block number in the file header, asn with PIP /EOF.  HB Whenever new records are being written past the end-of-file whichA existed at OPEN$ time, this problem can occur. In this sense, a3? new file has an immediate "OPEN$ time end-of-file", and a fileI@ open for append or update has its old end-of-file as the "OPEN$> time end-of-file". A file open for modify does not have this= problem because it cannot be extended; the F.EFBK and F.HIBKNB fields are always correct, even if several tasks are operating on the file. EB Attributes may be written back to the file header while a file isB open by using a write-attributes QIO, function code IO.WAT, usingA attribute 4. (Given a file ID number file attributes can be read.A in a similiar way using attribute -4.) (See QIO interface to theh@ ACPs in the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual.)  @ Writing file attributes is illustrated below, in code purloined from COT.TSK module COTWAT: L0 .TITLE COTWAT - WRITE FILE ATTRIBUTES FROM FDB .IDENT /01.00/O 2 ; 37 ; THIS SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED UNDER A LICENSE AND MAYC7 ; BE USED OR COPIED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMSI ; OF SUCH LICENSE.E ; 7 ; COPYRIGHT (c) 1981 BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION.6 ; ALL RIGHTS RESERVED., ;  ; STEVE RUZICH 28-MAY-81A  ;@ ; THIS ROUTINE REQUESTS THE F11ACP TO WRITE THE FILE ATTRIBUTES& ; FROM THE FCS FILE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK. ; S F, HA.UAT=4 ;WRITE USER FILE ATTRIBUTES CODE T R PRMLST: ;QIO PARAMETER LISTE .WORD 0 ;FILE ID POINTER * .WORD ATTLST ;POINTER TO ATTRIBUTE LIST ATTLST: ;QIO ATTRIBUTE LIST 1 .BYTE HA.UAT,S.FATT ;WRITE USER FILE ATTRIBUTESI: ATTADR: .WORD 0 ;THEY RESIDE AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FDB" .WORD 0 ;ATTRIBUTE LIST STOPPER O ;+ * ; ***- .WRATT - WRITE ATTRIBUTES FROM FDB ;/ ; INPUT: R0 = FILE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK ADDRESSU ;$ ; OUTPUT: R0, R4, R5 - PRESERVED ; R1, R2, R3 - ALTERED ; CC - NO ERROR.$ ; CS - FCS ERROR CODE IN F.ERR(R0) ;-K8 .WRATT::MOV #IO.WAT,R1 ;WRITE ATTRIBUTES FUNCTION CODE- MOV #2,R2 ;THERE ARE TWO DPB PARAMETERS...I$ MOV #PRMLST,R3 ;...AT THIS ADDRESS MOV R0,(R3) ;: ADD #F.FNB+N.FID,(R3) ;FID ADDRESS IS THE FIRST PARAMETER2 MOV R0,ATTADR ;FDB ADDRESS IS ADDR OF ATTRIBUTES' JMP .XQIO ;HAVE FCS EXECUTE THE QIO$I D .END3 2 EXAMPLED? The exclamation points that appear in Column 1 in this exampleR; are there for help file processing and are not part of the, working source code.  .TITLE FILMOV .IDENT /01.0/ .ENABLE LC  ;+X8 ; Test program to introduce the MACRO-11 programmer to 6 ; terminal I/O functions and disk I/O functions under/ ; RSX-11. The prompt is "FLM>" and the command,! ; input sequence is of the form:N ; ; FLM>outfile=infile O ;-U! .SBTTL Definitions of Directives, .5 .MCALL CLOSE$ ;Terminate processing in orderly way4& .MCALL CSI$ ;Generate the CSI block/ .MCALL CSI$1 ;Check and compressing cmd line64 .MCALL CSI$2 ;Build file information from command .MCALL EXIT$S ;Try to exit38 .MCALL FDBDF$ ;Allocate a Fil00yN}e Descriptor Block (FDB)% .MCALL FDAT$A ;Initialize the FDT 8 .MCALL FSRSZ$ ;Allocate space for a block-buffer pool8 .MCALL FDAT$A ;Initialize the File Attribute Section3 .MCALL FDOP$A ;Initialize the File-Open Section <7 .MCALL FDRC$A ;Initialize the Record-Access Section A- .MCALL GCML$ ;Macro to get the user input C+ .MCALL GCMLB$ ;Generate I/O block for TIC& .MCALL GET$ ;Read a buffer of input+ .MCALL OPEN$W ;Open a file or create one< .MCALL OPEN$R ;++( .MCALL PUT$ ;Write a buffer to output D! .SBTTL QIO buffer control blocksL ;+I ;D ; MACRO: CSI$ generates the control block necessary to compress and= ;- validate the command recieved from the user through GML$7 E# CSI$ ;Generate at assembly time2! .EVEN ;As the manual dictatesE4 CSIBLK: .BLKB C.SIZE ;Allocate depending on C.SIZE L ;+I ;B ; MACRO: FDBDF$ generates the file descriptor block for each file9 ; that is open, allocating space for the FCS to use for ; processing ;$ ; Disk output File Descriptor block ;-, .2 FDBOUT: FDBDF$ ;Generate block for output file@ FDAT$A R.FIX,FD.CR,BUFSIZ ;Fixed length,LF with CR,buffer sizeA FDOP$A OUTLUN,CSIBLK+C.DSDS ;LUN and pointer to file descriptorM3 FDRC$A ,TMPBUF,BUFSIZ ; temp buffer, buffer size2 O ;# ; Disk input File Descriptor BlockE T1 FDB.IN: FDBDF$ ;Generate block for input file>@ FDAT$A R.FIX,FD.CR,BUFSIZ ;Fixed length,LF with CR,buffer size@ FDOP$A INLUN,CSIBLK+C.DSDS ;LUN and pointer to file descriptor3 FDRC$A ,TMPBUF,BUFSIZ ; temp buffer, buffer sizeF - ;( ; Terminal output File Descriptor block 2 FDB.TI: FDBDF$ ;Generate block for output file@ FDAT$A R.FIX,FD.CR,BUFSIZ ;Fixed length,LF with CR,buffer size@ FDOP$A TILUN,CSIBLK+C.DSDS ;LUN and pointer to file descriptor3 FDRC$A ,TMPBUF,BUFSIZ ; temp buffer, buffer size  P ;N ; MACRO: GCMLB$ generates the database for receiving a command from the user HB GCMBLK: GCMLB$ 0,FLM,CMDBUF,TILUN,,CMDSIZ ;Argument list to macro S E% .SBTTL Symbol and Memory definitionsT E ; ; SYMBOLS 2 BUFSIZ =128. ;Size of temporary scratch buffer' CMDSIZ =82. ;Size of command buffer . FSRSZ$ 3 ;No more than three files opened INLUN =2 ;LUN for disk input" OUTLUN =3 ;LUN for disk output" TILUN =5 ;LUN for terminal I/O ; ; ; MEMORYL O3 CMDBUF: .BLKW CMDSIZ ;The command receive bufferT9 TMPBUF: .BLKW BUFSIZ ;Temporary scratch buffer for I/OA S E  .SBTTL Main calling sequence; ;+A ; Enter at FILMOV.O$ ; This is the main calling routine.: ; Its purpose is to call all other routines in a top down4 ; environment to copy one file to another emulating( ; the system task PIP in that function. ;-  7 FILMOV: CALL RCVCMD ;Get command string from the user& CALL OPNFIL ;Go open the input file* MOV #FDB.IN,R1 ;Set pointer to input FDB+ MOV #FDBOUT,R2 ;Set pointer to output FDB,1 MOV (R1)+,(R2)+ ;Set output attributes the same# MOV (R1),(R2) ; as the input fileI. CALL RCVFL1 ;Build the output specification) CALL CREFIL ;Go create the output file  ;+5 ; Loop through these subroutines copying the records  ; to the output file.( ; If an I/O error occurs execute an IOT ;-. ,5 DO.IO: MOV #BUFSIZ,R1 ;Length in words of the recordc# MOV #TMPBUF,R2 ;The record bufferA. !5$: CLR (R2)+ ;Zero the buffer word by word# SOB R1,5$ ;B till buffer is empty  ; ; ;/ !7$: CALL REDFIL ;Go read a block of the fileK BCC 10$ ;B if you read a block- CMPB #IE.EOF,F.ERR(R0) ;Hope for end of fileo( BEQ LSTREC ;B to write the last record# MOV #0,R0 ;Set for some I/O errorD IOT ;Trap on error6) !10$: CALL WRTFIL ;Go write out a block  BR 7$ ;down on next line& ; BR DO.IO ;B to read another record ; ;, ; Write last record and close out the files . LSTREC: CALL CLSFIL ;Go close all active I/O JMP EXTPRG ;Exit the program> ; ; ; EXIT  ; I: .SBTTL Retrieve and validate a command line from the user  ;+ ; ; This routine deals with system 00yTADATADATADATADATADATAdirectives, using the GMC5: ; package to accept a command line and the CSI package to* ; validate and compress the command line. ;-O C R: RCVCMD: GCML$ #GCMBLK ;Get a command line from the user' BCC 10$ ;B if command line acceptedF" MOV #1,R0 ;Get the error in R0 IOT ;Trap on error3I !10$: CSI$1 #CSIBLK,#CMDBUF,#CMDSIZ ;Compress the received user command 1 BCC 20$ ;B if command successfully compressedO MOV #2,R0 ;Set error  IOT ;Trap on error@ !20$: CSI$2 #CSIBLK,INPUT ;Get the input file spec from CMDBUF- BCC 30$ ;B if command semantically correctd MOV #3,R0 ;Set error  IOT ;Trap on error0 !30$: RETURN ;Return with cmd line in CMDBUF O ;+ ) ; Second part of receive command routineI1 ; Calls CSI$2 a second time returning the output ; file specification. ;-, .? RCVFL1: CSI$2 #CSIBLK,OUTPUT ;Go get the output specificationI BCC 10$ ;B if all goes wellS# MOV #4,R0 ;Set a flag for debugI IOT ;Trap on errorF* !10$: RETURN ;Return with input spec Q" .SBTTL Create the new output file ;+? ; Routine CREFIL using information from the CLM macros creates>; ; the file from CMDBUF and also initializes the FDB withL ; the macro FDAT$A. ;-B 1 CREFIL: OPEN$W #FDBOUT ;Create the output fileF BCC 10$ ;B if sucessfula( MOV 15,R0 ;Flag for diagnostic error IOT ;Trap on error.! !10$: RETURN ;Back to callerL T. .SBTTL Open already existing file for reading ;+<5 ; This routine is called if the file already exists.B3 ; If the file cannot be opened, the error is a PMD) ;-C 2 OPNFIL: OPEN$R #FDB.IN ;Open file for read only BCC 10$ ;B if successful* MOV #16,R0 ;Flag for diagnostic errors IOT ;Trap on error # !10$: RETURN ;Return to callerD% .SBTTL Read data from the input filee ;+C2 ; This routine reads one data buffer and returns. ; The error checking is in the main routine. ;-V S: REDFIL: GET$ #FDB.IN ;Read a buffer from the input file RETURN ;Return to caller R % .SBTTL Write data to the output fileI ;+ 3 ; This routines writes a data buffer to the outputD7 ; file and returns. The error checking is in the mainA ; routine.Y ;-  K WRTFIL: PUT$ #FDBOUT,,FDB.IN+F.NRBD ;Write out a buffer to the output file  RETURN ;Return to callerM  1" .SBTTL Close any I/O active files ;+I: ; This routine closes all active channels used by FILMOV." ; The program traps on any error. ;-, ./ CLSFIL: CLOSE$ #FDB.IN ;Close the input file0! BCC 10$ ;B if close a success< MOV #11,R0 ;Flag error R IOT ;Trap on errorH0 !10$: CLOSE$ #FDBOUT ;Close the output file! BCC 20$ ;B if close a success, MOV #12,R0 ;Flag error C IOT ;Trap on errorS$ !20$: RETURN ;Return to caller  O .SBTTL EXIT from the task ;+I+ ; As the .SBTTL says, "EXIT from the task"  ; No error return.V ;-. 1& EXTPRG: EXIT$S ;Exit to MCR or DCL F I .END FILMOVAJ The File Transfer Utility Program (FLX) allows you to use foreign volumesK (not in Files-11 format) in DIGITAL's DOS-11 or RT-11 format. FLX convertsC the format of a file to the format of the volume the file is being transferred to.M FLX can be used to initialize and list directories of cassettes and RT-11 orJ DOS-11 file-structured volumes. FLX can also be used to delete files from# RT-11 or DOS-11 formatted volumes.H FLX performs file transfers (and format conversions, as appropriate) as follows:) o DOS-11 to Files-11 and DOS-11 volumes3 o Files-11 to DOS-11, Files-11, and RT-11 volumes' o RT-11 to RT-11 and Files-11 volumesG FLX supports all Files-11 devices, including RSX-format cassettes. TheF cassettes are volumes that you have initialized using the MCR commandD INITVOL or the DCL command INITIALIZE. DOS-11 and RT-11 volumes areK initialized using FLX. On RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems, DOS-11 and RT-11M volumes must be mounted with foreign characteristics be00N}fore you can use FLX.A The general format for entering FLX command lines is shown next. Format> [ddnn:[[directory]]/switch[...]=]infile[,...]/switch[...] Parameters ddnn- Specifies the device for the FLX output. directory2 Specifies the directory on the output device.H Do not specify a directory if the output device is in RT-11 format. switch' Specifies one of the FLX switches. infile, Specifies the input file specification.? The format for entering file specifications is as follows:* ddnn:[directory]filename.type;version6 The directory is not specified for RT-11 volumes.9 FLX provides three types of switches for file transfers:M Volume format Specifiy the format of the volume on which files are stored;= that is, Files-11, DOS-11, or RT-11 volumes.K Transfer mode Provide the means for specifying the format of a file on aF non-Files-11 volume. Files can be in formatted ASCII,8 formatted binary, or file image format.H Control Provide control functions useful during file transfers.K Using file control switches, you can specify, for example,J the number of blocks to be allocated to an output file or2 the directory for an output file.G Type HELP FLX SWITCHES for a list and description of the FLX switches. 2 SWITCHES! The FLX switches are as follows: Volume Format Switches< /DO Identifies the volume as a DOS-11 formatted volume.> /RS Identifies the volume as a Files-11 formatted volume.< /RT Identifies the volume as an RT-11 formatted volume.J For more information on the volume format switches, Type HELP FLX VOLUME. Transfer Mode Switches C /FA[:n] The DOS-11 or RT-11 output file is to be formatted ASCII.D /FB[:n] The DOS-11 or RT-11 output file is to be formatted binary.. /IM[:n] The transfer is to be in image mode.L For more information on the transfer mode switches, type HELP FLX TRANSFER. Control SwitchesJ /BL:n Indicates the number of contiguous blocks to be allocated to the output file.< /BS:n Specifies the block size for cassette tape output.= /CO Indicates that the output file is to be contiguous.6 /DE Deletes files from a DOS-11 DECtape or disk.I /DI Causes a directory listing of cassettes or DOS-11 volumes to be, listed on a specified output file.5 /DNS:n Specifies the density of the magnetic tape.M /FC Indicates that FORTRAN carriage control conventions are to be used.E /ID Requests the current version number of FLX to be displayed.! /LI Same as the /DI switch.N /NU:n Specify the number of directory blocks to allocate when initializing# an RT-11 disk or DECtape.G /RW Rewinds the magnetic tape before beginning the file transfer.I /SP Indicates that the converted file is to be spooled by the print6 spooler task or the queue management system.M /UI Indicates that the output file is to have the same directory as the input file.K /VE Causes each record written to a cassette to be read and verified.2 /ZE[:n] Initializes cassettes or DOS-11 volumes.E For more information on the control switches, type HELP FLX CONTROL.2 VOLUMEM FLX has three volume format switches that define the format of the specified volumes as follows:< /DO Identifies the volume as a DOS-11 formatted volume.> /RS Identifies the volume as a Files-11 formatted volume.< /RT Identifies the volume as an RT-11 formatted volume. 2 TRANSFER H FLX has three transfer mode switches--one for each type of file format.I Files can be in formatted ASCII, formatted binary, or file image format.K Format conversions can be in either direction, and they are between DOS-11D files and Files-11 files or between RT-11 files and Files-11 files.J Specifying a transfer mode switch00TADATADATADATADATADATA determines which format the output file- will be in after the conversion of the file.+ The transfer mode switches are as follows:M /FA[:n] The DOS-11 or RT-11 output file is to be formatted ASCII. FormattedJ ASCII is defined as ASCII data records terminated by a carriage-L return/line-feed combination (RET-LF), form feed (FF), or verticalN tab (VT). In transfers from DOS-11 or RT-11 files to Files-11 files,M RET-LF pairs are removed from the end of records. In transfers fromL Files-11 files to DOS-11 or RT-11 files, RET-LF pairs are added toL the end of each record that does not already end with LF or FF. InL both directions, all nulls, rubouts, and vertical tabs are removed from input records.L If you specify /FA:n with Files-11 output, fixed-length records ofH size n are generated. Output records are padded with nulls, if necessary.E If you do not specify n with Files-11 output, FLX generatesJ variable-length records. The output record size equals the input record size.L /FB[:n] The DOS-11 or RT-11 output file is to be formatted binary. In thisK mode, formatted binary headers and checksums are added to recordsH that are output to DOS-11 or RT-11 files, and they are removedG when transferred to Files-11 files. If you specify /FB:n withK Files-11 output, fixed-length records of size n are output (51210J bytes is the maximum). FLX pads records with nulls to create theM specified length. If you do not specify n with Files-11 output, FLXC generates variable-length records. The output record size' equals the input record size.M /IM[:n] The transfer is to be in image mode. Image mode forces fixed-lengthI records. You can use the value n to indicate the desired recordN length (in decimal bytes) for Files-11 output (51210 bytes maximum).N If you do not specify n, FLX assumes a record length of 51210 bytes. 2 CONTROL J FLX provides a number of control switches to control file processing. The switches are as follows:K /BL:n Indicates the number of contiguous blocks (n) in octal or decimalK to be allocated to the output file. This switch is normally usedJ with the /CO switch (described later in this table). Because allI RT-11 files are contiguous, the /CO switch is not required with* the /BL switch for RT-11 output.K If you do not specify the /BL switch, the input file size is usedL as the output file size. The file allocation scheme used for RT-11G volumes normally allocates the largest available space on the volume for a new file.M Using the /BL switch with the /RT switch for the output file causesK the output file to be allocated the first unused space of size n.M However, when the RT-11 file is closed, the input file size is usedP as the output file size. If the input file is not n, an error results.L /BS:n Specifies the block size n in decimal bytes for cassette tape (CT)M output. If you do not specify the /BS switch, a block size of 12810F is assumed. The /BS switch is only valid in a CT output file6 specification with the /RS switch specified.L /CO Indicates that the output file is to be contiguous. The /CO switchM is used only with disks and DECtapes. If the input file is on paperI tape, cassette, or DOS-11 magnetic tape, the /BL switch is alsoN required. FLX transfers the file types TSK, SYS, and OLB to Files-11J volumes with the /CO switch implied when the input is a Files-116 volume or a DOS-11 or RT-11 DECtape or disk.K /DE Deletes files from a DOS-11 DECtape or disk. It is used also withL the /RT switch to delete files from an RT-11 DECtape or disk. WhenH you spec00}ify the /DE switch, the FLX command line has no output specification.I /DI Causes a directory listing of cassettes or DOS-11 volumes to beI listed on a specified output file. It is used also with the /RTF switch to generate a directory listing of RT-11 volumes in aL specified output file. You cannot list Files-11 volume directoriesM by using FLX. If you do not specify an output device, the directoryM is sent to TI. If you do not specify file name and file type on the: input file specification, a wildcard is assumed.L/DNS:n Specifies the density of the magnetic tape, where n is 800 or 1600I bpi. If n is any other value or is not specified, FLX prints anL error message. If you do not specify the /DNS switch, the magneticI tape density defaults 1600 bpi for the TS11 and 800 bpi for allL other magnetic tape devices. If you specify the /DNS switch with a5 nonmagnetic device, FLX ignores the switch.L /FC Indicates, when using FORTRAN files, that FORTRAN carriage controlM conventions are to be used. The /FC switch applies only to Files-11 output files.K /ID Requests the current version number of FLX to be printed. You canL specify the /ID switch as part of an output or input specification: or type it in response to the FLX prompt (FLX>).! /LI Same as the /DI switch.E /NU:n Used with the /ZE and /RT switches to specify the number ofN directory blocks n in octal or decimal to allocate when initializingN an RT-11 disk or DECtape. If you do not specify the /NU switch, fourK directory blocks are allocated. The maximum number of blocks that* can be allocated is 378 or 3110.G/RW Rewinds the magnetic tape before beginning the file transfer.M Specifying the /-RW switch causes FLX to begin the transfer withoutI first rewinding the magnetic tape. If you do not specify eitherN rewind option, the switch defaults to the /RW switch. If you specifyN the /RW switch with a nonmagnetic tape device, or with the /LI, /DI,4 or /ZE switch; FLX ignores the /RW switch.I /SP Indicates that the converted file is to be spooled by the printM spooler task or the queue management system. The /SP switch applies( only to Files-11 output files.M /UI Indicates that the output file is to have the same directory as theL input file. FLX ignores the /UI switch if the output specificationJ contains an explicit directory. The /UI switch is valid only for4 output files in DOS-11 or Files-11 format.K /VE Causes each record written to a cassette to be read and verified.K The /VE switch is only valid with a CT output file specification.K /ZE[:n] Initializes cassettes or DOS-11 volumes. It is also used with theD /RT switch and the /NU switch to initialize RT-11 volumes.M Initializing erases any files already on the device. The /ZE switchJ does not allow a file specification. For DOS-11 DECtape, the /ZE6 switch creates an entry for the current UIC.M The Disk Volume Formatter (FMT) utility formats and verifies disk cartridge,N disk pack, fixed media disk, and flexible disk volumes under any RSX-11M-PLUSK operating system that includes online formatting support in the Executive.2 In general, FMT performs the following functions:L o Writes a complete header for each sector of the volume it is formatting.8 o Verifies the address contents of each sector header.2 o Sets the density for RX02 (DY-type) diskettes.G o Lets you specify an er00TADATADATADATADATADATAror limit for the volume being formatted. FMT: terminates processing when the error limit is reached.F o Lets the Bad Block Locator task run (spawn) if your system permits spawned tasks.C FMT can also be invoked through the DCL command INITIALIZE/FORMAT.( The command line for FMT is shown next. Format ddnn:[/switch[...]] Parameters ddnn- Specifies the volume you are formatting. switchK Specifies an FMT switch. Not all switches can be used with all device types.9 To terminate FMT, press CTRL/Z following the FMT prompt.7 Type HELP FMT SWITCHES for a list of the FMT switches. 2 SWITCHES% The switches for FMT are as follows:I /DENS=option Selects HIGH or LOW density for DY- and DU-type diskettes.L /ERL=n Determines the number of errors FMT will allow on the volume.N /@Y Informs FMT that it is receiving input from an indirect command+ file that you have created. K /MAN Enters manual operating mode and formats the sector or track you specify.O /NOVER Inhibits the default verification of a successful FMT operation.. /OVR Overrides or ignores the MDBSF.I /VER Verifies that an FMT operation was successfully completed.* This switch is the default.J /WLT=n Rewrites the MDBSF (on the last track of the device) to add6 bad sectors found during FMT operation.E Type HELP FMT switch_name (for example, HELP FMT WLT) for a detailed description of each switch.2 BADI The Bad switch (/BAD) spawns BAD after FMT completes its processing. BADK tests for the number and location of any unusable blocks. BAD records thisM bad-block information, which is used by the initializing function. If BAD isK not installed on the system, FMT prints a warning message on your terminal and exits.M Note that the /BAD switch can only be used with operating systems that allowL spawning of tasks. The RSX-11M-PLUS operating system provides spawned tasks as a system generation option. 2 DENSITYN The Density switch (/DENS) sets DY-type diskettes to either HIGH (double) or M LOW (single) density, and it sets DU-type (RX33) diskettes to HIGH (double)J density. The default is low density. (This switch can also use SINGLE and DOUBLE as options.) Format ddnn:/DENS=option Parameters ddnn* Specifies the device to be formatted. optionN Specifies one of the two densities: HIGH (or double) and LOW (or single). 2 ERROR_LIMIT#ERL2 ERLK The Error Limit switch (/ERL) sets the error limit for the volume you are E formatting. If the error count reaches this limit, FMT generates an K appropriate message and terminates the operation. The default error limit  is 25610 errors. Format ddnn:/ERL=n Parameter nK Specifies the error limit. Any value for n greater than 0 or less than or equal to 25610 is valid.2 @YM In the method of operation that uses the Indirect Command File switch (/@Y),M FMT will not generate any operational messages or warnings to your terminal.F No user intervention is possible until the FMT operation is complete.M To run FMT from an indirect command file, FMT must be installed before hand.L Otherwise, you will receive an error message and the FMT operation not run.2 MANUALK The Manual switch (/MAN) puts FMT in manual operating mode and permits youK to format an individual sector (or track for DM-type disk cartridges) of aK device. FMT assumes cylinder, track, and sector numbers are decimal valuesM unless they are preceded by a number sign (#), which indicates octal values.; Manual operating mode cannot be used with DY-type devices.J In manual operating mode, FMT displays the following message and prompts:+ ** WARNING - Data will be lost on ddnn: **" Continue [Y OR N]?$ Entering manual mode Cylinder= 00U}Track = Sector =" Operation complete 2 NOVERIFYM The Noverify switch (/NOVE) inhibits the operation performed by the default 9 /VE switch. The /-VE switch performs the same function. 2 OVERRIDE#OVR2 OVRL The Override switch (/OVR) causes FMT to ignore the MDBSF on DL-, DM-, and K DR-type disk volumes. When FMT writes headers on these disks, it normally J sets bad sector flags in those headers marked bad in the MDBSF. When the M verification process discovers a bad sector, it reports that the sector was G marked in the MDBSF. The /OVR switch inhibits the reporting operation.2 VERIFYJ The Verify switch (/VE) confirms that an FMT operation was successful. ItK does this by reading back the headers and determining if they were written' correctly. This switch is the default.2 WLTN The Write Last Track switch (/WLT), when used with the /VE switch on DM- and N DR-type volumes, rewrites the MDBSF to add the bad sectors that FMT found to K the bad sectors already in the MDBSF. FMT also rewrites each bad sector's N header to flag it as a bad sector. The /VE switch is the default. The /NOVE ! switch should not be specified.F The /WLT switch must be specified when using FMT on a DL-type device. Format ddnn:/WLT=n Parameters ddnn- Specifies the volume you are formatting. n< Specifies the volume's pack serial number (in decimal).'INITIALIZE/FORMAT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn:  /BADBLOCKS /DENSITY:arg* HIGH or DOUBLE) LOW or SINGLE! /ERROR_LIMIT:n /MANUAL /[NO]MESSAGE /OVERRIDE /[NO]VERIFY& /WRITE_LAST_TRACK:nBThe INITIALIZE/FORMAT command formats and verifies volumes on diskLcartridges, disk packs, fixed media disks, and diskettes associated with anyIRSX-11M-PLUS or MicroRSX operating system that includes online formattingMsupport in the Executive. (See your system manager to determine whether yourMsystem includes this feature.) For information on the qualifiers, type HELP INIITIALIZE FORMAT qualifier. 3 BADBLOCKS /BADBLOCKSJ Spawns the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) after the formatting operationP completes. The BAD operation determines and records the number and location of O any unusable blocks. This information is used by the initializing function. IfN BAD is not installed on the system, the formatting operation prints a warning$ message on your terminal and exits. 3 DENSITY /DENSITY:arg HIGH or DOUBLE LOW or SINGLEO Sets RX02 diskettes and RX33 diskettes to either HIGH (DOUBLE) or LOW (SINGLE)O density. The default for RX02 diskettes is LOW. The only valid option for RX33 diskettes is HIGH.  3 ERROR_LIMIT /ERROR_LIMIT:nN Sets an error limit, in decimal, for the volume being formatted. If the errorL count reaches this limit, the command generates an appropriate message and O terminates. The default limit is 256 (decimal) errors. Any value for n greater0 than 0 but less than or equal to 256 is valid. 3 MANUAL/MANUALOPermits you to format an individual sector or track of a device in manual mode.>The /MANUAL qualifier cannot be used with DY-type devices. TheFINITIALIZE/FORMAT command reads cylinder, track, and sector numbers asLdecimal unless they are preceded by a number sign (#), which indicates octalGvalues. In manual operating mode, the following prompts appear on your terminal: > ** WARNING - Data will be lost on ddn: ** 9 Continue [Y or N]? ) Entering manual mode 1 Cylinder = * Track =  Sector =% Operation complet00U $TADATADATADATADATADATAe 3 NOMESSAGE#MESSAGE 3 MESSAGE /MESSAGEL Specifies that the formatting operation will receive input from an indirectP command file that you have created. When you use this qualifier, no operationalH messages or warnings appear on your terminal, and you may not intervene" until the operation is complete. 3 OVERRIDE /OVERRIDEL Causes FMT to ignore the Manufacturer's Detected Bad Sector File (MDBSF) onI DM- and DR-type disk volumes. When FMT writes headers on these disks, itA normally sets bad sector flags in the headers marked bad in the I Manufacturer's Detected Bad Sector File. When the verification procedureJ discovers a bad sector flag, it reports that the sector was marked in theB MDBSF. The /OVERRIDE qualifier inhibits the reporting operation. 3 NOVERIFY#VERIFY3 VERIFY/VERIFYADetermines whether an FMT operation was successful by reading the8headers the INITIALIZE/FORMAT command wrote to determine=whether they were written correctly. The /VERIFY qualifier is the default. 3 WRITE_LAST_TRACK/WRITE_LAST_TRACK:nBWhen used with the /VERIFY qualifier on volumes on DM- and DR-typeNdevices, adds a list of the bad sectors the INITIALIZE/FORMAT command found toMthose indicated by the manufacturer in the Manufacturer's Detected Bad SectorLFile (MDBSF). The INITIALIZE/FORMAT command also rewrites the header of eachMbad sector to flag the sector as bad. The n is a required decimal number thatKis used as the volume's pack serial number. Note that you must specify the >/WRITE:n qualifier when formatting volumes on DL-type devices.) For HELP on logging in, type HELP LOGIN.E Help is available for DCL commands, utilities, and system features. I You can receive help by typing either HELP or ? after the DCL prompt ($)K followed by the desired topic. For example, for help on the COPY command,J type either HELP COPY or ? COPY. (The examples in the HELP files indicateM only the first of these two formats in order to save space.) Also note that@ you can type help requests in either upper case or lower case.  2 Help is available for the following DCL commands:C ABORT CONVERT DISMOUNT LOGOUT RUNaC ALLOCATE COPY EDIT MACRO SETDD ANALYZE CORAL FIX MCR SHOWD APPEND CREATE FORTRAN MOUNT SORTE ASSIGN DEALLOCATE HELP PASCAL STARTrD BACKUP DEASSIGN HOLD PRINT STOPF BASIC DEBUG INITIALIZE PURGE SUBMITD BROADCAST DEFINE INSTALL RELEASE TYPEE CANCEL DELETE LIBRARY REMOVE UNFIXRF COBOL DIFFERENCES LINK RENAME UNLOCK@ CONTINUE DIRECTORY LOGIN REQUEST C For information on a command, type: HELP commandname. Additional C; help on a command qualifier is often available by typing: D HELP commandname qualifier. For the short forms of some commands,  type: HELP BRIEF.  D For information on utilities and system features, type: HELP MORE. 1 ABORTE @DCLABORTE 1 ALLOCATE @DCLALLOC 1 ANALYZEE @DCLANALYZ1 APPEND @DCLAPPEND 1 ARCHIVE #BACKUP 1 BACKUP @DCLBACKUP 1 RESTORE@DCLRES 1 ASSIGN @DCLASSIGN 1 AUTHORS F These help files have been brought to you by the friendly folks (and H a couple of grouches) in the Spit Brook woods of Nashua, New Hampshire.1 BASICH @DCLBASICn1 BYEl#LOGOUTo1 CANCEL @DCLCANCEL1 COBOLn@DCLC800(.}1p 1 CONTINUE@DCLCONT1 COPY@DCLCOPY 1 CONVERT @DCLCONV1 CORAL, @DCLCORAL 1 CREATE @DCLCREATE 1 DEALLOCATE @DCLDEALLL 1 DEASSIGN @DCLDEASSN1 DEBUGP @DCLDEBUGP1 DEFINE @DCLDEFINE1 DELETE @DCLDELETE 1 DIFFERENCES@DCLDIFF 1 DIRECTORYD@DCLDIR 1 DISMOUNT@DCLDISh 1 EDI_UTIL@EDI1 EDIT@DCLEDIT1 FIXr@DCLFIXl 1 FORTRANa@DCLFORT1 HELLO)#LOGIN1 HELP@DCLHELP1 HOLD@DCLHOLD 1 INITIALIZE@DCLINIT 1 INSTALLl@DCLINST 1 LIBRARY@DCLLIBL1 LINK@DCLLINK1 LOGINT @DCLLOGINO1 LOGOUT @DCLLOGOUT1 MACRO @DCLMACRO1 MCR,@DCLMCRA 1 MESSAGEE #BROADCAST 1 BROADCASTE@DCLBROL1 MOUNTS @DCLMOUNTE1 PASCAL @DCLPASCAL1 PRINTE @DCLPRINTE1 PURGEE @DCLPURGEE 1 RELEASEF@DCLREL1 REMOVE @DCLREMOVE1 RENAME @DCLRENAME 1 REQUEST@DCLREQL1 RUN@DCLRUND 1 PASSWORD#SET1 SET@DCLSETa1 BRIEFT @DCLSHORTS1 SHOW@DCLSHOW1 SORT@DCLSORT1 START @DCLSTART1 STOP@DCLSTOP1 SUBMIT @DCLSUBMIT1 TYPE@DCLTYPE1 UNFIXI @DCLUNFIXT1 UNLOCK @DCLUNLOCK D1 MOREB Help is available for the following utilities, system tasks, and features:D8 ACCOUNTING ASCII BAD BATCH BCK I BRU CDA CMP CNV CONFIGUREO@ COT DEF DES DMP DSC D DSP DTE EDI EDT ERROR_LOG B EXECUTIVE FCS FLX FMT IFL : INDIRECT IOX LBR MAG MFT@ ODT PAT PIP PMD RMS 0 RST SHADOW_RECORDING SLP SYSGEN , TDX SYSLIB TKB TKTN VFY VMR ZAP 1 RESOURCE_ACCOUNTING #ACCOUNTING 1 ACCOUNTING@ACC1 ASCIIO@ASCII1 BAD @BAD1 BATCH_PROCESSING@BATCH1 BRU @BRU1 CDA @CDA1 CMPT@CMP 1 RECONFIGURE #CONFIGURE 1 CONFIGURE @CON1 COTU@COT1 DSC @DSC1 DUMP#DMP1 DMPF@DMP1 MFT #DTE1 FILE_TRANSFER_UTILITY #DTE1 DATA_TERMINAL_EMULATION #DTE1 DTE @DTE1 EDT @DCLEDT 1 ERRLOG #ERROR_LOG 1 ERROR_LOGS@ERROR 1 EXECUTIVE @EXECUTIVE1 FCS @FCS1 FILEX #FLX1 FLEX#FLX1 FLX @FLX1 FMT@FMT 1 INDIRECT@ICP1 IOXU@IOX1 LBRO@LBR1 MAG@MAG1 ODTC@ODT1 PATCHD#PAT1 PATC@PAT1 PIPH@PIP1 PMDU@PMD1 RMSA@RMS1 BCKP#RMSBCKF1 RMSBCK@RMSBCK1 CNVG#RMSCNVN1 RMSCNV@RMSCNVS1 DEFC#RMSDEF1 RMSDEF@RMSDEF1 DES#RMSDESI1 RMSDES@RMSDES 1 DSP#RMSDSPR1 RMSDSP@RMSDSPD1 IFLT#RMSIFL1 RMSIFL@RMSIFL 1 RST#RMSRSTG1 RMSRST@RMSRSTR1 SHADOW_RECORDING@SHADOW 1 SLIPPERS#SLP1 SLIPRX#SLP1 SLPX@SLP1 SYSTEM_GENERATIONT#SYSGENE1 SYSGEN@SYSGENI1 SYSLIB@SYSLIB 1 CATCH_ALL_TASK#TDX1 TDXC@TDX1 TKBA@TKB1 TKTN@TKTNP!1 VIRTUAL_MONITOR_CONSOLE_ROUTINEP#VMR 1 VIRTUAL_MCR#VMR1 VMRN@VMR1 VERIFY#VFY1 VFYN@VFY1 ZAPR@ZAP3 HELP files are written using three basic concepts:v6 Nested Files Describe the structure of HELP files.I Indirect File References Allow one HELP file to access the text ofi another HELP file. P : Synonyms Allow two or more similar words to access the same HELP file text. 6 For more information on each of these concepts, type: HELP HELP FORMAT NESTED_FILES HELP HELP FORMAT SYNONYMS HELP HELP FORMAT IND_FILE_REF' For a summary of these concepts, type:t# HELP HELP FORMAT CONCEPT_SUMMARYe3 For information on writing local help files, type:u HELP HELP FORMAT LOCALn3 NESTED_FILESK Help files contain text and up to 9 levels of nesting. Each level number .I corresponds to the position of a parameter in the HELP command line. Fora example:  Help Command Line: * >HELP ARM HAND FINGER  Corresponding Help file:S ! 1 ARMH The first parameter is ARM, so it appears as level 1 in the HELP file. ! 2 HANDp; The 000$TADATADATADATADATADATAsecond parameter is HAND, so it appears as level 2.r ! 3 FINGERt= The third parameter is FINGER, so it appears as level 3.TF The level number must appear in the first column of the file. It mustE be followed by a blank and then the parameter, which is specified inoN uppercase letters. The parameter cannot contain any blanks or tabs; however, O phrases can be joined together with hyphens (-) or underscore (_) characters. e sM Any level-2 parameter that is a subtopic of a level-1 parameter must appearrE after that level-1 parameter and before the next level-1 parameter. 3 IND_FILE_REFB HELP files can include indirect references to other HELP files inE place of text. You may substitute indirect file references for textn5 after any parameter, regardless of its level number.e Format: @FILENAME@ The @ sign must appear in the first column, with the file nameC immediately following (no intervening blank space). The file namelG must be in capital leters. The default file type is .HLP, so you needtE only state the file name. (NOTE: Do not use the @ sign as the firstNE non- blank character of a line of HELP text; this causes the file toi fail.) G The file referenced in this manner has the same format as other HELPrF files, with one exception: if the indirect file contains levelG numbers, these must be greater than the level number in the base filedF that references the indirect file. For example, if the base file contains the following lines: 1 BACKUPH @DCLBACKUPtG then DCLBACKUP.HLP can contain only level numbers 2 through 9.n 3 SYNONYMSrH HELP allows cross-references between two or more synonymous parameters.9 These similar parameters access the same HELP file text.  Format: #SYNONYM G The # sign must appear in the first column, immediately followed byuG the synonym (no intervening blank space). The synonym must be in  capital letters.eG The synonyms must all precede the main entry to which they refer. TheCG main entry and all synonym entries must have the same level number.u3 CONCEPT_SUMMARY9D The following table summarizes HELP file conventions for the three B basic HELP concepts: nested files, indirect file references, and synonyms.G ----------------------------------------------------------------------eB CONCEPT OPERATOR OPERATOR SPACE AFTER UPPERB POSITION OPERATOR CASEG ----------------------------------------------------------------------n aG A. Nested File 1-9 1st Column Yes Parameters eG B. Indirect File @ 1st Column No ParametersHF Reference F C. Synonym # 1st Column No File NameG ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 LOCAL B In addition to system HELP, you can create your own local HELP. I Local HELP is HELP text located in the default directory on the default eE volume (usually the user's own directory). To create local HELP, dor the following: A 1. Using an editor, create a file named HELP.HLP. HELP.HLP C functions as a root file; it is the first file accessed by  the processor. F 2. Enter into HELP.HLP any introductory text and, at minimum, allI first level parameters. (See HELP HELP FORMAT NESTED_FILE.) Note n? that the same HELP file conventions that apply to system HELP i< files also apply to local HELP files. (See HELP HELP FORMAT CONCEPT_SUMMARY.) ) rB 3. As with system HELP files, you have the option of placing @ either text or an indirect file reference after a level-C number line. (See HELP HELP FORMAT IND_FILE_REF.) Indirect B file references in local HELP files, however, access otherA local HELP files--not system HELP files. A file accessedD@ by an indirect file reference must be named filename.HLPC and must008v9} be placed in the default directory on the default : volume. This file must also follow HELP file conventions.A Once you have created the HELP.HLP root file and any other locala- HELP files, you access local HELP by typing:  r >HELP % parameter(s) orR >HELP/LOCAL parameter(s)@ Note that you can only use local HELP after you have logged in.? The Indirect Command Processor allows CLI command lines to be J placed in a file. The file is then executed as though the command lines = were entered from a terminal. Indirect also supports other + numeric and string manipulation commands. E A summary of commands and special symbols can be obtained by typing   HELP INDIRECT SUMMARY ; Individual command descriptions can be obtained by typing   HELP INDIRECT commandname 7 Operators (relational and arithmetic) are described at  HELP INDIRECT OPERATORS 6 Special symbol descriptions can be obtained by typing  HELP INDIRECT symbolname< NOTE: symbolname does not include the angle brackets. K A list of Indirect error messages, including their severity class numbers, can be obtained by typing  HELP INDIRECT MESSAGES 2 OPERATORSB A numeric symbol or constant can be combined with another numericI symbol or constant by a logical or arithmetic operator to form a numeric3 expression. Arithmetic and logical operators are: + Add - Subtract  * Multiply / Divide ! Logical inclusive OR & Logical AND # Logical NOT < No embedded blanks or tabs are permitted between operators.  The string operator  + (Concatenation) I can be used to form longer strings from a collection of shorter strings.  The substring operator [start:end] I describes a substring range of a given string, for example, STRING[x:y],J where x is the first position of the substring and y is the last. If the2 total length of the string is unknown, the syntax STRING[5:*] C can be used to express "from position 5 to the end of the string." % Relational operators are as follows:  EQ or = Equal to NE or <> Not equal to# GE or >= Greater than or equal to LE or <= Less than or equal to GT or > Greater than LT or < Less than 2 SUMMARY@ Information about the following Indirect commands is available:B .ASK .END .IFDISABLED .OPEN .SETOB .ASKN .ERASE .IFENABLED .OPENA .SETSB .ASKS .EXIT .IFF .OPENR .SETTB .BEGIN .FORM .IFT .PARSE .STOPB .CHAIN .GOSUB .IFINS .PAUSE .TESTH .CLOSE .GOTO .IFNINS .READ .TESTDEVICEF .DATA .IF .IFLOA .RETURN .TESTFILEK .DEC .IFACT .IFNLOA .SETD .TESTPARTITIONG .DELAY .IFNACT .INC .SETF .TRANSLATEC .DISABLE .IFDF .label: .SETL .WAIT A .ENABLE .IFNDF .ONERR .SETN .XQT1 > Information about the following special symbols is available:D ACCOUN ERRSEV LIBUIC RAD50 SYSUICD ALPHAN ERSEEN LOCAL RSX11D SYUNITD ALTMOD ESCAPE LOGDEV SEVERE TICLPPD BASLIN EXSTAT LOGUIC SPACE TICWIDD CLI EXSTRI MAPPED STRLEN TISPEDB CONFIG FALSE MEMSIZ SUCCES TIMEI DATE FILATR NETNOD SYDISK TIMOUT D DEFAUL FILERR NETUIC SYMTYP TITYPEB DIRECT FILER2 NOSTAT SYSDEV TRUEC EOF 00v@$TADATADATADATADATADATA FILSPC NUMBER SYSID UIC C ERRCTL FMASK NXTSYM SYSTEM VERSND ERRNUM FORATT OCTAL SYTYP WARNIN0 ERROR IAS PRIVIL  * Reserved symbols created by Indirect are: 0 P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, COMMAN ; Other Indirect operations for which help is available are: P ADVANCED techniques PARAMETER passing SUBSTITUTION of symbols @ FORMATTING for readability PRE-PROCESSOR SWITCHES LIBRARY procedures4 For help on these topics, type HELP INDIRECT topic.2 .ASK#ASK2 ASK .ASK [def:tmt] sym txtL Defines or redefines a logical symbol and assigns it a true or false value. where: D def - Optional default value to be assigned to the symbol if a line> terminator is typed in response to the question or if a? timeout occurs. The default can be or or another logical variable. C tmt - Optional decimal timeout count describing the length of timeE before the default value is used. The format of the parameter9 is the same as that used for the .DELAY directive. A sym - Logical symbol name consisting of 1 through 6 alphanumeric characters. 7 txt - Text to be displayed on the output display line. Example: # .ASK [:10S] L1 Logical value produces " >* Logical value [Y/N D:Y T:10S]: 4 See also HELP INDIRECT ASKN and HELP INDIRECT ASKS.2 .ASKN#ASKN2 ASKN! .ASKN [low:high:def:tmt] sym txtP Defines or redefines a numeric symbol and assigns it an octal or decimal value. where: D low:high - Numeric values that define the range for the response.: The input or default value must be within the range to be valid.  F def - Optional default value to be assigned to the symbol if a> line terminator is typed in response to the question or9 if a timeout occurs. The default can be a numeric, expression or another numeric symbol. B tmt - Optional decimal timeout count describing the length< of time before the default value is used. The format? of the parameter is the same as that used for the .DELAY directive. H sym - Logical symbol name consisting of 1 through 6 alphanumeric characters. > txt - Text to be displayed on the output display line. Example: # .ASKN [1:3:2:10S] N1 Numeric value produces & >* Numeric value [O R:1-3 D:2 T:10S]:3 See also HELP INDIRECT ASK and HELP INDIRECT ASKS. 2 .ASKS#ASKS2 ASKS! .ASKS [low:high:def:tmt] sym txtO Defines or redefines a string symbol and assigns it an ASCII text string up to 80(10) bytes in length. where: D low:high - Numeric values that define the range for the response.> The length of the input or default value must be within the range to be valid. D def - Optional default value to be assigned to the symbol if= a line terminator is typed in response to the question; or if a timeout occurs. The default can be a string+ expression or another string symbol. E tmt - Optional decimal timeout count describing the length of< time before the default value is used. The format of< the parameter is the same as that used for the .DELAY directive. H sym - Logical symbol name consisting of 1 through 6 alphanumeric characters. > txt - Text to be displayed on the output display line. Example:  .SETS DEF "abc"$ .ASKS [1:3:DEF:10S] S1 String value produces ) >* String value [S R:1-3 D:"abc" T:10S]:3 See also HELP INDIRECT ASKN and HELP INDIRECT ASK.2 .BEGIN#BEGIN2 BEGIN .BEGIN) Delimits the start of a BEGIN-END block. I Note that the .BEGIN command must appear on a line by itself. It cannotN be part of an .IFx command line. A BEGIN-END block00vH9} defines a set of IndirectK commands that must be entered and exited as a unit. Local symbols definedI outside the block are accessible, but those created within the block are; deleted when Indirect exits from the block (reaches .END). 2 .CHAIN#CHAIN2 CHAIN .CHAIN filename[/switches]H The .CHAIN command continues execution from a new command file. UnlikeG the @filename construction, the current file context is not preserved.G All local symbols are erased (unless the /LO switch is specified) and I execution continues at the first line of the file specified with .CHAIN. Examples:  .CHAIN SYSGEN2.CMD .CHAIN PROCLIB/LB:PART22 .CLOSE#CLOSE2 CLOSE .CLOSE #nO Closes a secondary data file where n is the channel number of the file to be = closed. No error is returned if the file is already closed.2 .DATA#DATA2 DATA, .DATA #n This line will go into data file nA Specifies a single line of data to be output to a secondary file) previously opened by an .OPEN directive. A One or more blanks or tabs can follow the .DATA command. If theM first character is a blank, it is removed and not placed in the output file.G If the first character is a tab, it is transferred to the output file. 2 .END#END2 END .ENDL Delimits the end of a BEGIN-END block. All local symbols defined since the0 last .BEGIN command are erased by this command. E Note that an .END command must appear on a line by itself. It cannot! be part of an .IFx command line. 2 .EXIT#EXIT2 EXIT .EXIT [n]D Exits a BEGIN-END block or a command file, optionally specifying a N numeric exit status n. The exit status value can be any 16-bit encoded value.C This value will be available in the next outer command file as theC value of or to the task that spawned Indirect as the exit status value. 2 .DISABLE#ENABLE 2 DISABLE#ENABLE 2 .ENABLE#ENABLE2 ENABLEI With the .ENABLE and .DISABLE commands, several Indirect operating modes% can be controlled. These modes are: / Mode Default Scope Default Effect; ---- ------- ----- ------- ------ setting ------- G ATTACH Enabled G Indirect attaches to TI: for comment lines.I CLI Enabled L Commands not processed by Indirect areN passed to the default CLI for the terminal.4 (Synonym of MCR.)I CONTROL-Z Disabled G CTRL/Z in response to .ASKx exits Indirect.G DATA Disabled L Input lines are written to an open data file.A DECIMAL Disabled G Numeric symbols are created as OCTAL.D DELETE Disabled L The current command file is not deleted * at end.I DETACH Enabled G Indirect detaches from TI: for command lines.E DISPLAY Enabled G Indirect displays the current fields for  .ASKx and "@ ".A ESCAPE Disabled G ESCAPE or ALTMODE is legal for .ASKx  response.G ESCAPE-SEQ Disabled G When Indirect attaches, escape-sequence " recognition is not enabled.D FMS Read-only G If enabled, the .FORM command is supported. E FULL-DUPLEX Read-only G If enabled, the full-duplex terminal  driver is available.E GLOBAL Disabled L Symbols of the form $xxxx are placed in a global symbol table.K LOCAL Enabled L /LO switch was specified in initial command( line.F LOWERCASE Enabled L Indirect is not sensitive to the case of commands or strings.@ MCR Enabled L Commands not processed by Indirect are 2 passed to the default CLI for the terminal.4 (Synonym of CLI.)= OVERFLOW Disabled L Allows signed numeric operations* that would normally cause under- or overflow errors.O POTASK Enabled G P00vP$TADATADATADATADATADATAarent/offspring tasking support is included5 in current system.F QUIET Disabled L Comments and CLI commands are displayed on  the terminal.L SUBSTITUTION Disabled L String substitution is not performed before command line evaluation.F TIMEOUT Enabled G The timeout parameter of .ASKx commands is processed.B TRACE Disabled G Commands processed by Indirect are not ! displayed on the terminal.D TRUNCATE Disabled G Truncate errors on a .READ command are  not ignored. 2 .DEC#DEC2 DEC .DEC numeric symbol name0 Decrement the value of a numeric symbol by one. For example  .DEC J( decrements the numeric symbol J by one. 2 .DELAY#DELAY2 DELAY .DELAY argument@ Delay the execution of an indirect command file for a specifiedH period of time. The argument is a decimal number of time units followedF by the character H, M, S, or T (for hours, minutes, seconds, or ticks respectively). For example .DELAY 10S 6 stops indirect command file execution for 10 seconds. 2 .ERASE#ERASE2 ERASE .ERASE GLOBAL  2 Deletes all global symbols from the symbol table.  .ERASE LOCAL  7 Deletes all local symbols defined in the current block from the symbol table.  .ERASE SYMBOL symbol 5 Erases the single specified global or local symbol.  2 .FORM#FORM2 FORM .FORM command,p1,p2...,pnG Provides access to the FMS-11 form driver. The following FMS commands can be passed to FMS-11:, ALL DAT OPN RAL TRM/ ANY GET PAL RTN ( CLS GSC PSC SHO, CSH LST PUT SPF/SPNF The parameters for the directive (p1,p2...,pn) are filename, fldname,G index, linenum, retinx, retnam, rettrm, retval, terminator, and value.G A demonstration procedure is included in LB:[1,2]INDSYS.CLB. Type the1 following command line to execute the procedure:! @LB:[1,2]INDSYS.CLB/LB:FMSDEM 2 .GOTO#GOTO2 GOTO .GOTO labelname Branches to a label. For example .GOTO ERROR .EXIT 1& .ERROR: ; Warning, error encountered.@ branches to the warning message identified by the .ERROR label.@ Note that a target label of a .GOTO command inside a BEGIN-END < block must be on the same block level as the .GOTO command.2 .GOSUB#GOSUB2 GOSUB# .GOSUB subroutinename [parameters]H Saves the location of the next Indirect command and branches to a labelA identifying a subroutine. Upon execution of a .RETURN command, G control returns to the next command line following the .GOSUB command.G Any parameters to the right of the label and to the left of a comment J are transferred to the local symbol COMMAN. The value of COMMAN can then , be parsed to obtain formal call parameters. For example: .GOSUB DCB4 .GOSUB BLDTBL DB,2,176450,210 !Build device table I In the second example, the following command line will separate the call parameters: - .PARSE COMMAN "," DEVICE COUNT CSRADR VECADR2 .IF#IF2 IF .IFE Determines whether or not a symbol satisfies one of several possible conditions. Example:' .IF ADDRES = "14 GARBLE ROAD" .GOTO 10M If the string symbol ADDRES is equal to "14 GARBLE ROAD," Indirect transfers control to label 10. 2 .IFNACT#IFACT2 IFNACT#IFACT2 .IFACT#IFACT2 IFACT .IFACT .IFNACT- Determines whether or not a task is active. Example: .IFNACT PIP pip /liG If the task PIP is not active, Indirect executes the command PIP /LI.2 .IFNDF#IFDF2 IFNDF#IFDF2 .IFDF#IFDF2 IFDF .IFDF .IFNDF/ Determines whether or not a symbol is defined. Example: .IFDF DLG ; Long dialogM If the symbol DLG is defined, Indirect displays the comment "; Long dialog"  on the terminal. 2 .IFDISABLED #IFENABLED 2 IFDISABLED #IFENABLED 2 .IFENABLED #IFENABLED00vX9} 2 IFENABLED .IFENABLED .IFDISABLEDJ Determines whether an Indirect operating mode is enabled or disabled, orK whether an environmental condition is met. Legal options are as follows:' ATTACH CLI CONTROL-Z DECIMAL DELETE( DETACH DISPLAY ESCAPE ESCAPE-SEQ FMS* FULL-DUPLEX GLOBAL LOCAL LOWERCASE MCR. QUIET SUBSTITUTION TIMEOUT TRACE TRUNCATE OVERFLOW POTASK Example:+ .IFDISABLED DISPLAY ; Phase 2 starting...K If the DISPLAY operating mode is disabled, Indirect displays the messager "; Phase 2 starting...."n 2 .IFNINSp#IFINS2 IFNINS#IFINS2 .IFINS#IFINS2 IFINS  .IFINS  .IFNINS= Determines whether or not a task is installed in the system.m Example:n+ .IFNINS PIP ins $pip/inc=20000/task=...pipmO If the task PIP is not installed, Indirect installs the task with an increment# of 20000 and the task name ...pip.n 2 .IFNLOAb#IFLOA2 IFNLOA#IFLOA2 .IFLOA#IFLOA2 IFLOAa s .IFLOAn .IFNLOA5 Determines whether or not a device driver is loaded. Example:s .IFNLOA MM: LOAD MM: G If the driver for device MM: is not loaded, Indirect loads the driver.s2 .IFF#IFT2 IFFa#IFT2 .IFT#IFT2 IFT  I .IFT  .IFFe6 Determines whether a logical symbol is true or false. Example:y .IFT START .GOTO STARTSL If the logical symbol START is true, then Indirect transfers control to the label START.m2 .INC#INC2 INCl .INC symbolname0 Increment the value of a numeric symbol by one. c For example a .INC J( increments the numeric symbol J by one. i 2 .LABEL: #LABEL:2 LABEL: .LABEL:= Assigns a six-character name to a line in the command file d2 so that the line can be referenced. For example: T) .GOTO CLNUP ! Jump to clean-up routineo . .n( .CLNUP: ! Beginning of clean-up code tO Labels that are placed alone on command lines are called direct-access labels.dL Indirect remembers the exact location of these labels, and they can be used9 to decrease search time for .GOTO and .GOSUB directives.s 2 .ONERR#ONERR2 ONERRe .ONERR labelname @ Defines a label to branch to upon detecting an error condition.F The scope of the label is limited to the currently open command file.A If an error condition occurs inside a BEGIN-END block, the last o .ONERR label specified is used. o For example:o q5 .ONERR ERRSRV ! Define the label for a .GOTO ERRSRV ! operation in case of error eK Once an error condition has occurred, another .ONERR label must be defined  to reenable error processing. 2 .OPEN #OPENE2 OPEN .OPEN [#n] filespec EI Opens the specified secondary file as an output file. Returns the J FCS-11 status code for the operation in the special symbol .= E Example:   .OPEN DATA.DAT2 .OPENA#OPENA2 OPENA. .OPENA [#n] filespec  E If the indicated file exists, opens it for an append operation. J If the file does not exist, a new file is created in the same manner as for .OPEN.  L Returns the FCS-11 status code for the operation in the special symbol .N= Example:   .OPENA DATA.DAT 2 .OPENR#OPENR2 OPENRo .OPENR [#n] filespecl mI Opens the indicated file for a read operation by means of the .READ G command. Returns the FCS-11 status code for the operation in the  special symbol . Example:V  .OPENR #3 DB4:DATALOG.LST S 2 .PARSE#PARSE2 PARSEU: .PARSE ... ? Strings can be parsed into substrings with the .PARSE command. = The string is decomposed into substrings as specified by theAG control string. The substrings are stored in the specified variables.I= The first character of the control string delimits the first C substring, the second character of the control string delimits 00v`$TADATADATADATADATADATAthe G second substring, and so on. The last character of the control stringM? is repeated if the number of destination variables exceeds the  length of the control string. YP If there are more variables specified than substrings, the additional variablesH are set to be null strings. If there are fewer variables than parsableJ substrings, the last variable contains the unparsed fragment of .D If you specify only one variable, Indirect discards all characters I following, and including, the delimiter (for example, a comma or a right I angle bracket). All null substrings are also discarded. If you specifyRJ more than one variable and the last character of is a delimiter,J Indirect assumes that there is a null substring after it. If you do not L specify a variable for this substring to be parsed into, the delimiter and > the null substring are parsed into the last symbol specified.G The symbol contains the actual number of substrings processedl& (including explicit null substrings). i1 For an example, type HELP INDIRECT PARSE EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLEh e0 An example of the use of the .PARSE command is: ' .PARSE COMMAN " ," FILE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5L dF Given that COMMAN contains "TESTFILE IND,MCR,,LOA", the results would be:  FILE= TESTFILEr A1= IND A2= MCR A3= Nulla A4= LOA A5= Nullp  would contain a 5. > Note that the explicit null substring is counted in . a2 .PAUSE#PAUSE2 PAUSES .PAUSEEH Stops Indirect from processing to allow user action. Indirect displays> the command line you must enter to resume Indirect operation.2 .READa#READi2 READ> Files can be opened and read by using the following commands: a5 .OPENR [#file] Open a file for reading.o eB .READ [#file] Read next record into specified string variable.i l- After a .READ, true if end-of-filea encountered, false if not. n2 Contains the FCS-11 error code if an) error ocurred on the .READ operation.  p s6 For more information, type HELP INDIRECT READ DETAILS0 For an example, type HELP INDIRECT READ EXAMPLE 3 DETAILSfETo read from a data file, the file must first be opened successfully,tCusing the .OPENR command. Records can then be read using the .READ Fcommand until either is set to true or returns an errorDcode. When processing is complete, the file should be closed, usinga .CLOSE command.E pHThe .OPENR command has the same format as the .OPEN and .OPENA commands,Eand also sets the special variables , , and .E I<The .READ command is similar in format to the .DATA command,Eexcept that, instead of having as its argument the text to be written Dout to a file, the argument is a string variable. The entire record>is written into the string variable. If an error occurs while Breading a file, the variable is unchanged from its previous state. ;The variable is set by the .READ command. This meansn9specifically that its state is unknown following an .READlAcommand. If an end-of-file has occurred, both and a$are set to indicate the end-of-file. r 3 EXAMPLE ;The following indirect command file routine lists a file oni the terminal:m t .OPENR FILEn .IF NE 1 .GOTO ERRORo t .LOOP: .READ Ai .IFT .GOTO DONE  .IF NE 1 .GOTO ERROR  ; 'A' .GOTO LOOP  .DONE: .CLOSE 2 .RETURN #RETURNi2 RETURN .RETURN= Effects an exit from a subroutine and returns to the command E line immediately following the corresponding .GOSUB subroutine call. 2 .STOPD#STOP"2 STOP .STOP [value]@ Immediately stops command file execution, optionally specifying' the exit status for the Indirect task.S aJ The .STOP command is synonymous with the logical end-of-file command (/). For example E .STOP 1A terminates command file processing and sets the exit status for  Indirect to 1.a o2 .SET#SET2 SETe" .SETN variable nu00vh9}meric-expression .SETD variablea .SETO variablee r@ Define or redefine a numeric symbol and assign it a specific< numeric value. The .SETO and .SETD directives change theF default radix of the variable to be octal or decimal respectively. C! .SETS variable string-expressionw hA Defines or redefines a string symbol and assigns the symbol af* specific ASCII-character string value. c .SETT variablex .SETF variabled" .SETL variable logical-expression s? Define or redefine a logical symbol and assign the symbol a  true or false value. i Examples:  .SETN NUM COUNT*2 .SETS ADDRES "14 GARBLE ROAD" .SETT MALE2 .SETL FLAG FLAG!NEWERRL2 .TESTS#TEST2 TESTD The .TEST command is used to determine the symbol type and return aE type code in . If the symbol is a string, the command tests 1 the length of the string or locates a substring.  o Format examples:e i .TEST ADDRESeA .IF GT 20. GOTO TOO BIG ; Length of response too longn PE .TEST ADDRES "STREET" ! Look for the string "STREET" in the stringm ! ...contained in ADDRESS.C .IF = 0 .GOTO NOTFND ! = the character positionh# ! where "STREET" begins.n rE If the variable being tested is a string, then the following symbols 5 are set to reflect characteristics about the string:d n% , , ,  tM If the variable being tested is numeric and octal, then the following symbolt$ is set to reflect the symbol radix: e  I" See also HELP INDIRECT TESTDEVICE TESTPARTITION TESTFILEm 2 .TESTDEVICEl #TESTDEVICE 2 TESTDEVICE .TESTDEVICE DD:O Allows a command file to acquire information about any device in the system. nI The returned data, including error indication, is found as a string in t . For examplee  .TESTDEVICE MP: M obtains information about the indicated device and returns a string in the tN string symbol . The various fields can be isolated with the .PARSE G or .TEST substring directives. The string is in the following format:u E- DB3:,140210,4405,31276,1000,atr,atr,...,atr,   where:-+ DB3: is the translated device name for MP: = The next four parameters are the four device-characteristicst words in octal notationn eD The characters atr are various device attributes from the following list:  p1 ALO The device is allocated to another terminal . ALU The device is allocated to this terminal, ATT The device is attached to another task5 ATU The device is attached to this copy of Indirectn1 FOR The device is mountable and mounted foreignM! LOD The device driver is loadedl5 MTD The device is a mountable volume and is mountedh! NAL The device is not allocatede NAT The device is not attached8 NFO The device is not mountable or not mounted foreign3 NMT The device is not mountable or is not mounted ' NPU The device is not a public devices3 NSD "No such device" is configured in this systeme OFL The device is off-line ONL The device is on-liner# PUB The device is a public device % UNL The device driver is not loadedn  See also HELP INDIRECT TEST TESTFILE  TESTPARTITION2 .TESTPARTITION#TESTPARTITION2 TESTPARTITION .TESTPARTITION partition-nameC Allows a command procedure to obtain information about the currentD partition or any other partition in the system. It can be used to H verify that a partition is of sufficient size before an INSTALL commandD is issued or that it is present before special systems are loaded.  nB Partition-name is any one- to six-character legal partition name.F If the character "*" is found, then it is assumed the reference is toG the same partition in which this version of Indirect is executing. Thet returned data is in the form: A partition-name,base in 32-word units,size in 32-word units,type,n n) If the partition is not found, the errorl c ,,,NSP, r/ (No such partition) is returned. For example:e  .TESTPA00vp$TADATADATADATADATADATARTITION GENr ;'' r might show:  ;GEN,1500,2303,SYS, J The partition type is SYS for system-controlled, USR for user-controlled,! or NSP for an unknown partition.t i . See also HELP INDIRECT TEST TESTDEVICEs TESTFILEo 2 .TESTFILEo #TESTFILEc 2 TESTFILE .TESTFILE filespecTN Determines if a specific file exists, or performs the translation of assigned devices.  D The output of the command is contained in the and J special symbols. returns the fully qualified file specificationF and returns the FCS status code from the look-up. (For more@ information on these special symbols, type HELP INDIRECT FILE.) C If no file name is included in the file specification, only device.; translation is performed. If a file name is included, thetJ specified file is searched for and the fully qualified file specification is returned in .m < For several examples, type HELP INDIRECT TESTFILE EXAMPLES. s See also HELP INDIRECT TEST TESTPARTITION r 3 EXAMPLESB An example of the use of the .TESTFILE command for logical device translation:E E .TESTFILE TI:  Returns: = 1l = TT10:.DAT;0m eE An example of the use of the .TESTFILE command for file information:n i .TESTFILE MP:IND.MAPf ! If the file exists: = 1B$ = DR1:[101,300]IND.MAP;6 i& If not: = 346 (230 decimal)$ = DR1:[101,300]IND.MAP;0 22 FILEF After a .TESTFILE, .OPEN, .OPENA, .OPENR, or .DATA operation, the two4 special symbols and are returned. N> is a string symbol that contains the fully qualified file specification. 7 is a decimal numeric symbol that contains the = status code resulting from the previous operation. The coder will be one of the following: u 1. Operation was successful., rJ negative word Operation failed; code is an operating-system error code. SE postitive word Operation failed; code is a file-system error code. but negativeD lower byteS F For example, the error code -1. means "Insufficient dynamic storage,"0 while 230(-26. as a byte) means "No such file." D For a complete listing of all error codes, see the Indirect manual. 2 .TRANSLATE #TRANSLATE 2 TRANSLATEt) Format (brackets are required syntax):s .TRANSLATE ([num]) logical o hK The .TRANSLATE directive allows a command file to expand a local or globalUM logical name assignment. The expanded assignment is contained in the stringa symbol .a Parameters:C [num] A numeric expression, evaluating to a number from 1 throughtA 10(10), to specify the number of times to iteratively translatep< the original logical name assignment, or a wildcard (*) to> specify that the assignment should be translated iteratively as many times as possible.8 logical The logical name assignment to be expanded.J contains a null string if no assignment exists for the specifiedH logical name or if your system does not have support for logical names.F The special symbol is set to true if the expanded logical name C assignment is the result of the final iterative translation of thevG assignment, or if no assignment exists for the specified logical name,R; or if your system does not have support for logical names.4E is always set to true if you use the wildcard parameter ([*]).< For more information type, HELP DCL DEFINE or HELP MCR DCL.1 Also, see the Indirect Command Processor manual.i c2 .WAIT#WAITl2 WAIT .WAIT tasknamelE The .WAIT directive suspends processing of an indirect command file /G until a particular task has terminated. If the task name is omitted, .G Indirect assumes the task name applied by the last "RUN task" command.a For example:D .WAIT PAYROL. .WAIT PIP ! Wait for the copy of PIP running% ! ...on this terminal to completeh2 .XQT#XQT2 XQTS .XQT taskname commandlineI The .XQT directive allows you to init00vx9}iate a task, pass a command line toF8 it, and then continue indirect command file processing. s For example:a d .XQT MAC TEST,TEST=TEST .XQT TKB BLD,BLD=BLD .WAIT MACl .WAIT TKBCG The example starts an assembly and a task build executing in parallel / and then waits for the two tasks to complete. 2 ACCOUNI is a string symbol that contains certain accounting informationEL from the user's RSX-11M-PLUS accounting block. On RSX-11M (or if accountingM is not running on M-PLUS), this symbol returns a series of commas with null : entries. The string returned is in the following format: G User_name,Session_id,Account_number,CPU,DIR,QIO,TAS,Active_tasks,m K User_name The first 14. characters of the user name as it appears P= in the system account file followed by the first initialnJ Session_id The three-letter session-ID code followed by the unique login numberI Account_number The user's account number as it appears in the system r account fileF- CPU CPU ticks used since login = DIR Total system directives issued since login: QIO Total QIO directives issued since login. TAS Total tasks run since login0 Active_tasks Current count of active tasks ? The individual fields can be isolated with the .PARSE command:  t; .PARSE "," NAME SID ACNT CPU DIR QIO TAS ACT JUNK cJ Note that since double precision arithmetic is not available in Indirect,G these count values cannot be converted to numeric form and manipulated  in arithemetic expressions. x2 ALPHANL is a logical symbol set to TRUE if last response to an .ASKS queryH was an alphanumeric string; else FALSE. is also set by a .TEST command.  e2 ALTMODG is a logical symbol set to TRUE if last question was answeredl' with an ALTmode or ESCape; else FALSE.e r2 BASLINI is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the current operating systemfC is a baseline configuration. This option is used by DIGITAL systemND generation procedures to determine what resources are available for the SYSGEN process.2 CLI A is a string symbol set to MCR, DCL, or another 1- through cH 6-character CLI name, depending on the current command line interpreter for the terminal. e2 CONFIGH is a string symbol that contains the build-time parameters and4 values for the current running version of Indirect. r2 DATEH is a string symbol set to the current date. The date is in the  format dd-mmm-yy. 2 DEFAULL is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the answer to the last question was defaulted; else FALSE.a 2 DIRECTC is a string symbol set to your current default directory A string in named mode. If you are in nonamed mode, the A+ symbol is set to the null directory ([]). 2 EOFsI is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the last .READ command resultedpJ in reading past the end of the file. If you type a CTRL/Z in response toH an .ASKx command and Control-Z mode is .ENABLEd, then is also set to TRUE.t o Format example: a .READ #3 nxtlin .IFT .GOTO END  2 ERRCTLD is a numeric symbol that controls Indirect processing upon@ encountering an error. It is treated as an 8-bit mask with theH first 7 bits set to indicate that the user's .ONERR target routine willN process that class of error. If the class of error is higher than the value 2 of the first 7 bits, Indirect exits immediately. 3F The eighth bit (the sign bit or 200 octal) is used to control whetherD Indirect will print any indication of an error. If the bit is set,# no error information is printed.  TE The initial default value for is 1, which implies that onlysM class 1 errors can be handled with an .ONERR address and that error messagesa will be printed.  iJ You are cautioned about indiscriminate use of this mask because debuggingH a command00v$TADATADATADATADATADATA file becomes very difficult. Refer to HELP INDIRECT MESSAGES> for a list of error messages and their assigned class values. eE If you attempt to trap errors other than default class 1, note that vH processing cannot continue in most cases. The error service routine isL limited to a fatal error message and .EXIT. The internal state of Indirect+ is unknown in all but class 1 error cases.  <2 ERRNUMH After processing an error, Indirect places in the error numberJ associated with the error. This value can be used for error-type-specificG processing in an .ONERR routine. See HELP INDIRECT MESSAGES for a list. of error messages and their assigned numbers. s2 SEVERE#ERROR e 2 SUCCESSc#ERROR 2 WARNINGe#ERROR2 ERRORiH The five symbols below are defined for determining the exit status of a command. Their values are: = 0r = 1i = 2m = 4 = 17 EK Note that a user or program can encode more than just the low-order 3 bitsnH of the exit status. If this is the case, a comparison in the following form will not always succeed: e% .IF = .GOTO CONTINA J In this case, the appropriate bits must be masked in order to isolate theI reserved success/fail status field of the exit status. A general form is= R' .IF = &7 .GOTO CONTIN< L2 ERRSEVJ After processing an error, Indirect places in the error severityH mask associated with the error. This bit mask corresponds with the bits@ of the mask used to control Indirect error processing. o2 ERSEENA is a logical symbol set to TRUE if any of the followings conditions are true:  u8 1. < 0 if a negative error code was returned >B 2. (&7) .GT. 1. if an exit status value more severe than was returnedg  3. is TRUE  O 4. is nonzeroi n2 5. If you have specifically used the command line E .SETT F 1 rK If you use the command line .SETF , the following symbols are also  set:t , 1. is set to 0 2. is set to 0 3. is set to E 4. is set to 0 m2 ESCAPEK is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the last question was answeredR' with an ESCape or ALTmode; else FALSE. m2 EXSTATH is a numeric symbol that contains the exit status value as set= by the last CLI command line or by the last .WAIT directive.c a warning = 0 = d success = 1 =  error = 2 = a severe error = 4 =  no status = 17 = n F See also . 2 EXSTRIA is a string symbol used to return string results from aaA more deeply nested command file or from a .TESTDEVICE statement.g= To allow controlled return of values from a nested file, thehE symbol can be set with a string value. In a fashion similarbF to , the string value is propagated back to the CALLING file. t Examples: d$ @deeperfile param1 param2 param3 .sets result  R l ORm . .gosub maktab  .sets switch d I* For an extended example, please refer to: r HELP INDIRECT ADVANCEDn nI Note that is set to null when Indirect waits for the completionF of a task.F R2 FALSEGE is a logical literal symbol used in comparisons with the .IFR2 directive or as a default for the .ASK directive. 2 FILERRE After a .TESTFILE, .OPENx, or .READ statement, contains theuE FCS-11 or I/O driver status code resulting from the operation. Theseo- codes are documented in the Indirect manual.O D For an extended example of code translation to message strings, see HELP INDIRECT ADVANCED. 2 FILER2E contains the FMS error code that was returned from the lastt .FORM directive issued.  n2 FILATRB The special symbol returns the 7 words of file-attributeD information contained in the FCS-11 File Descriptor Block. The data> is from the FDB used 00v9}in the last preceding .OPENx operation.  v2 FILSPCF The string symbol contains the fully qualified specificationE for the file referred to with the last .OPENx or .TESTFILE directive C operation, or in the last specification for a nested command file.S r Examples: p= .SETS CMDSPC ! Save the name of "this" command fileg t .TESTFILE TI:8 .SETS TERMIN ! Get the name of "this" terminal x2 FORATTH is a numeric symbol that contains the octal value of the file K attributes used in opening all data files. This symbol can be reset with pD the .SETN directive to allow foreign-attribute files to be written. L2 FMASKLF is a string symbol that contains the octal value of the threeH system feature mask words, separated by commas to allow easy parsing by the .PARSE directive. 2 LIBUICD is a string symbol set to the UIC containing nonprivileged utility tasks; format is [g,m].2 LOCAL C is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the terminal from whichE> Indirect is executing (TI:) is flagged by the terminal driver as a local terminal.S 2 LOGDEVH is a string symbol equal to the device name and unit number ofM the user's login account. This value is available only on systems supporting B the multiuser SYSGEN option; otherwise, is set with SY0. g2 LOGUICL is assigned the login UIC for the current user. In systems withoutD multiuser protection, is assigned the current default UIC. 2 MAPPEDH is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the current system supports memory management; else FALSE.D C2 MEMSIZD is a numeric symbol assigned the size of memory in K words (1K = 1024.). c2 NETUICI is a string symbol that contains the value of the UIC/DIRECTORYrJ string used on the system volume to hold the DECnet tasks. This symbol isH used with the and symbols to separate and manage the  components of your system. 2 NETNODE is a string symbol that contains the name of this system inn a DECnet network. 2 NOSTATD is a numeric literal symbol that is used in comparisons toD determine if a value returned from a task was an actual valid exit  status. d2 NUMBERI is a logical symbol used to verify that the last string entereduG in response to a .ASKS directive or tested in the last .TEST directiveiH contains only numeric characters. An empty string also sets to TRUE. 2 NXTSYMI is a unique string/operation symbol used in the utility librarypI procedure INDDMP to display the current contents of the local and globalh symbol tables.s a2 OCTALTE is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the numeric answer to the A last .ASKN command or the value of the symbol tested in the lastiB .TEST command is octal. If the .TEST command referenced a stringF and only the numeric characters 0 through 7 were found in the string, is set to TRUE.2 PRIVIL@ is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the current user is privileged. 2 RAD50 B is a logical symbol set to TRUE if the last string testedE or typed in response to a .ASK question contained only characters inN( the Radix-50 character set; else FALSE.2 IAS #RSX11D-2 RSX11DI and are logical symbols set to TRUE if the current systemi is RSX-11D or IAS; else FALSE.s e2 SPACEnH is a numeric symbol set to the number of free bytes left in theI symbol table. This value does not include symbol table space that couldo? be gained by a later automatic extension of the Indirect task.r i2 STRLENG is a numeric symbol set by the .TEST command to the length intG bytes of the tested string. Upon initial entry into Indirect, rD contains the count of valid parameters passed in the command line.  i2 SYDISKG is a string symbol set to the system disk mnemonic. There is,* no associated unit number (see ). r2 SYMTYPA As a result00v$TADATADATADATADATADATA of a .TEST command, contains a numeric codeE? indicating the type of symbol tested. The values returned are:o d Logical = 0 Numeric = 2 String = 4 k2 SYSDEVJ is a string symbol that contains the physical name of the system( disk; format is ddn (for example, DB3). T2 SYSIDsE is a string symbol that contains the 1- through 6-character i# operating system baselevel number.e t2 SYSTEMC is a numeric symbol set with the value 1 if the system is  RSX-11M or 6 for RSX-11M-PLUS.f 2 SYSUICE is a string symbol set to the current system UIC; format is( [g,m].2 SYTYPnG contains a string consisting of up to 12 ASCII characters thate3 identifies the system (for example, RSX-11M-PLUS).2 SYUNITJ is a numeric symbol set to the unit number of the system device. See . 2 TIMEG